This text is the “Notes” volume
accompanying Selections from Early Middle English, Project
Gutenberg e-text 26413.
The text includes characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file
encoding, including:
Ȝ ȝ; ƿ ᵹ (yogh; wynn, insular “g” and similar)
ꝥ (thorn þ with stroke)
ǣ ē ẹ etc. (vowels with less common diacritics)
ἅπ. λεγ. (Greek)
If any of these characters do not display properly, or if the
apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph appear as garbage,
make sure your browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set
to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change the default font.
Details about the presentation of this e-text are at the end of the text.
SELECTIONS FROM
EARLY MIDDLE ENGLISH
1130-1250
EDITED WITH INTRODUCTIONS AND NOTES
BY
JOSEPH HALL
M.A., Hon.
D.Litt., Durham University
PART II: NOTES
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
M CM XX
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
LONDON EDINBURGH GLASGOW NEW YORK
TORONTO MELBOURNE CAPE TOWN BOMBAY
HUMPHREY MILFORD
PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY
iii
The order of the vowels in the
phonological sections follows Bülbring’s Altenglisches Elementarbuch,
that of the consonants, Sievers’ Old English Grammar, translated by
Cook. The basis of comparison is Early West Saxon. The object of these
sections has been to provide collections for the interpretation of the
teacher. In accidence Sievers has been followed generally, but Zupitza’s
classification of the strong verbs has been adopted for convenience of
use with Bülbring’s Geschichte der Ablaute. In the literature sections
books marked with an asterisk are those which the student will find more
immediately useful.
This book has been a long time in preparation; it will perhaps help
to excuse some lack of uniformity if it be known that a great part of
the notes was in type by the end of 1915.
J. H.
Woodstock,
January, 1920.
v
CORRIGENDA.
225/39. Omit stop after Orm here and elsewhere.
231/1. unseihte represents unsæht
249/8. After &c., add wart 122
250/31. Add wart
253/27. Omit comma after sc͞i
254/20. Dr. Bradley’s restoration in M. L. Review, xii. 73, þa
þestreden sona þas landes, appears to me certain.
263/31. wile
266/26. ālīesednesse (but once ālȳsendnesse)
266/27. ā + w
271/13. sǣdon
312/36. After Bodleian add (D)
318/37. gēar
356/1. C 6
396/6. Add with before which
428/14. Add ia in giarked 84
428/38. tōgēanes
457/8. Add hn to n before nap
567/13. nyht, 160/185
Omit stop after Orm
superfluous . (“Orm.”) occurs 21 times in the text. Corrections are not
individually noted
254/20. Dr. Bradley’s restoration
...
the reference is to the note for l. 20, i.e. line 16 of the printed
page
223
Abbreviations: AR Ancren Riwle, ed. Morton; Archiv [für das
Studium der neueren Sprachen]; BH Blickling Homilies, ed. Morris; CM
Cursor Mundi, ed. Morris; ES Englische Studien; GE Genesis and Exodus,
ed. Morris; HM Hali Meidenhad, ed. Cockayne; KH King Horn, ed. Hall; L
Layamon, ed. Madden; NED New English Dictionary; OEH i Old English
Homilies, ed. Morris First Series; OEH ii Second Series; OEM Old English
Miscellany, ed. Morris; ON Owl and Nightingale, ed. Wells; PRL
Political, Religious, and Love Poems, ed. Furnivall, second edition; SJ
St. Juliana, ed. Cockayne; SK St. Katherine, ed. Einenkel; SM St. Marherete,
ed. Cockayne; VV Vices and Virtues, ed. Holthausen.
SM St. Marherete, ed. Cockayne
text unchanged: apparent error for “Margerete”
Manuscript: Worcester Cathedral Library, 174. It consists
of sixty-six leaves of vellum, ‘which had been cut and pasted together
to form covers for a book in the Cathedral archives’ (Catalogue of the
Chapter Library, ed. Floyer and Hamilton, Oxford, 1906). Its contents
are (1) an incomplete copy of Ælfric’s Grammar and Glossary, used by
Zupitza for his edition of the text (Berlin, 1880); (2) the scrap here
marked A; (3) the pieces B and C with five more fragments of the same
poem. A completes the page on which the glossary ends, and B is on the
verso of the leaf. The leaves have been slightly shorn at one side and
reduced at top and bottom, but probably to no great extent: the
conjectural complement, which is here printed within square brackets, is
for the most part fairly obvious, the more so as portions of the lost
letters often remain. The whole MS. is in the same large square hand,
but the pieces in verse, which are written continuously, like prose, are
less carefully executed. The handwriting is of the second half of the
twelfth century, perhaps about 1180 A.D. The Latin headings are not in the MS.
224
Editions: Phillipps, Sir T., Fragment of Ælfric’s Grammar,
&c., London, 1838; Wright, T., Biographia Britannica Literaria, AS.
Period, p. 59, 60, London, 1842 (omits the last four lines); Varnhagen, H.,
Anglia, iii. pp. 423-25.
Phonology: The scribe is mainly faithful to the orthography
of his original, which was in Anglo-Saxon script (as is shown by
Sipum for Ripum) and older language. He still uses the
rune for w. His spelling wavers between old and new, ǣ
survives in ilærde, lærden, læreþ, beside e in ilerde, weren;
ea persists in wireceastre, but wincæstre, rofecæstre; the
inflection is not levelled in leodan, but leoden, hoteþ, losiæþ (æ = e).
Drihten represents an OE. form in i; ie is e in derne;
ā is o in hoteþ, eo (= o) in leore. OE.
æ + g is æi in fæire, fæier, sæiþ; e +
g is ei in lorþeines; ēo + h is i in
liht; ēa + h, eih in unwreih. Bocare goes back to
late OE. bōcre; c is written ch in wisliche;
sć [š] is still sc in sceolen.
Accidence: The def. article is s. n. neut. þet 17,
19; s. a. f. þa 5; pl. n. þeo 3, 17; pl.
d. þen 19; pl. a. þeo 4. Noteworthy nouns are the mutation
pl. bec 7; diȝelnesse, s. a. 5; leoden, pl. n.
3, 18, leodan, pl. a. 15 (weak forms); leore, pl. n. 17.
The relatives are þe, þeo 18 (as in L 257, 2999), þet 3: the
demonstrative þis, pl. n. neut. 22, þeos, pl. n. m.
15, pl. a. m. 9 (properly a sing. form): possessives,
ure 9, 15, 18; heore 16. Glod 16 is a weak preterite beside strong
glēow, but the cognate forms in other languages are weak, and
this may be a borrowing from the Norse (NED s.v.).
French are questiuns, probably its first appearance, and feþ 23, with
its peculiar monophthong (OF. feid in which d was the spirant
[ð]); comp. 8/91 note.
Dialect: Middle or Western South.
Metre: Alliterative long line, of somewhat rude
construction, without transitional rhymes or assonances. The
alliteration extends mostly to two consonants, sometimes to three, as 5,
17; l. 16 is pure syllabic verse. The scribe sometimes misplaced the
pause stop, as at 9, and sometimes omitted it.
Introduction: In this scrap, some English patriot laments
the wholesale substitution of foreign prelates for English under William
the Conqueror. At the end of 1070 A.D.
there were only two native bishops, Wulfstan at Worcester and Siward at
Rochester. This may point roughly to the time, as the preponderance of
names connected with Winchester to the place, of the composition. The
absence of the names of Wulfstan, Bishop of Worcester (1002-1016 A.D.) and Archbishop of York (1002-1023),
the
225
author of the Homilies; of Wærferth, Bishop of Worcester (872-915),
translator of Pope Gregory’s Dialogues; of the later Wulfstan
(1062-1095), under whose rule there was great activity in the collection
and transcription of Homilies and other literature in English (Keller,
W., Die litterarischen Bestrebungen von Worcester in AS. Zeit, p. 64);
together with the writer’s ignorance of the North, shows that it was not
composed at Worcester. And the mistakes in Sipum 1/11 and heoueshame
1/12 would hardly be made by a Worcester transcriber.
The heading is from Numbers xxvii. 17.
2. ⁊ = and:
ond apparently does not occur in the twelfth century.
[writen]: Varnhagen supplies bec. Comp. ‘þa writen me beoð
to icume,’ L 9131. awende. Bede translated into English the
Gospel of S. John and some extracts from Isidore (Baedae Opera
Historica, ed. Plummer, i. pp. lxxv, clxii).
3. ꝥ . . . þurh, by
which. The preposition separated from its relative and placed with the
verb is common in ME. See Anklam, Das Englische Relativ im 11. und 12.
Jahrhundert, pp. 15-19, 44-6. Comp. in these texts, þet
. . . bi, 72/182; inne, 84/45, 131/104; of,
38/155, 66/96, 116, 117/8, 139/11, 211/476; on, 96/53, 179/112;
to, 142/75, 79, 143/98; þe . . . embe, 81/77;
inne, 11/3, 4; mide, 81/79; offe, 85/84;
one, 83/9, 119/73; to, 96/54; uppe, 84/71; þer
. . . in, 7/59, 54/1, 147/148; of, 64/61;
on, 106/210; to, 89/32; wið, 48/300. Similarly
hem . . . to, 193/564; þa . . . to,
96/58.
4. C[not]ten:
completed by Holthausen, Archiv, cvi. 347. Comp. ‘siȝewulf . . hine
befran . . be ȝehwylcum cnottum þe he sylf ne cuþe,’
Interrogationes Sigewulfi, ed. MacLean, 58/12; ‘Ich habbe uncnut summe |
of þeos cnotti cnotten,’ SK 1150, 1; and 202/168. With unwreih,
comp. ‘Ac Augustinus se wisa us onwreah þas deopnysse,’ AS. Homilien,
ed. Assmann, 5/103; ‘him þa toweardæn þing unwreah ⁊ swytelode,’ Twelfth
Cent. Hom. 98/17; Cursor, 22445. questiuns: probably Bede’s In
Libros Regum Quaestiones Triginta, answering questions put by Nothelm
(Plummer, p. cli). But there appears to have been a work known as Bedae
Quaestiones in utrumque Testamentum (Plummer, clv note), and there may
be a reference to such of his commentaries as were replies to the
queries of Acca, Bishop of Hexham. hoteþ: Wright supplies
we after þe as in 6, but hoteþ may mean here ‘are
called,’ though the passive sense is commoner in Central than in Early
ME.
5. derne diȝelnesse.
Comp. ‘Þatt dærne diȝhellnesse | Þatt writenn wass þurrh Moysæn,’ Orm
12945; and 125/296.
6. For Aelfric the Abbot see
Skeat in E. E. T. S.,
O. S. 114, pp. xxii-xliv.
226
The writer appears not to know his translations of Joshua, Judges,
Esther, and possibly Job. His identification of Aelfric with Alcuin, who
liked to call himself Albinus, is possibly due, as MacLean suggests, to
the former having translated Alcuin’s Sigewulfi Interrogationes (p. 47,
and Anglia, vi. pp. 463, 4).
7. bocare. Comp.
‘Beda, se mæra bocere,’ AS. Hom., ed. Assmann, 22/210. [fif]:
supplied by Varnhagen.
8. Vtronomius:
probably a blunder, but possibly an original attempt at abbreviation. Or
the writer may have had in mind the explanation given in De Mirabilibus
Sacrae Scripturae, ‘Deuteronomium, hoc est, iterationem Legis,’ S.
Augustini Op., iii. App. p. 13a. Observe that he places the title next
to Exodus; he would know from Jerome’s preface that it means ‘secunda
lex.’ Numerus: so Ælfric, ‘on Lyden Numerus and on Englisc
Getel,’ Grein’s Prosa, i. p. 179.
10. þet weren.
Comp. for the singular of the demonstrative, 80/35: ‘Soðlice ða eagan
þæt bioð ða lareowas, & se hrycg þæt sint ða hiremenn,’ Gregory’s
Pastoral Care, ed. Sweet, 28/12; ‘hwet beoð þas vii ȝeate? Det beoð ure
egan,’ OEH i. 127/29. Sometimes the verb also is singular, as at 76/8.
Similarly hit, it, 117/13, 190/450. bodeden: this
verb usually takes an acc. as here, so 15/86; ‘bodian þa soðen ileafen,’
OEH i. 97/31; but ‘bodiende umbe godes riche,’ id. 95/19.
11. Wilfrid, Bishop
of York, d. 709. Ripum: Ripon; Beda’s Inhrypum (Plummer,
i. 183, ii. 104). Johan of beoferlai, Bishop of York, d.
721. He is commonly associated with the foundation of a monastery at
Beverley in Yorkshire, but see Memorials of Beverley Minster, Surtees
Society, 1898, pp. xv-xix. Beverley is Beoforlic in AS. Chron. MS. D 721
(but written about 1070 A.D.);
Beoferlic in MS. E; Bevrelie in Domesday (see Stolze, Zur Lautlehre der
AE. Ortsnamen im Domesday Book, p. 28, and Zachrisson, Anglo-Norman
Influence on English Place-Names, p. 152). Cuþb[ert], Cudberct,
Bishop of Lindisfarne, d. 687. Dunholm occurs in AS. Chron. MS. D
1056 as the oldest name; Durham descends from AN. Dureme. The episcopal
mint from Beke 1283 A.D. to Langley
1437 A.D. has Dunholm, Dunelm, and
Dureme indifferently. The seal of Richard de Marisco (1217-1226) has
Dunholmensis. Comp. Zachrisson, 133-5. Oswald, Bishop of
Worcester, 962-91, Archbishop of York, 972-91, d. 992 (see
Keller, pp. 11-21). For Latin books attributed to him, see Wright,
Biographia, i. pp. 466, 7. Worcester in AS. Charters is Wigeran or
Wiogeran Ceaster, also Wigernaceaster, Wigraceaster; in Domesday,
Wirecestre. Egwin, Bishop of the Hwiccas, i.e. see of Worcester;
founder of the Abbey of Evesham, d. 717 A.D. For
227
works attributed to him, see Wright, Biographia, i. p. 227.
heoueshame: in Domesday Evesham; in the foundation charter Egwin
writes, ‘In quo loco (i.e. Ethomme) quum beata Virgo Maria cuidam
pastori gregum, Eoves nomine, comparuisset (ob cujus viri sanctitatem
eundem locum Eoveshamiam nuncupavi),’ Chronicon Abbatiae de Evesham, ed.
Macray, p. 18. æl[dhelm], Abbot of Malmesbury and Bishop of
Sherborne, d. 709 A.D.
(Plummer’s Bede, ii. pp. 308, 9). William of Malmesbury says in his
Gesta Pontificum, p. 336, ‘nativae quoque linguae non negligebat
carmina; adeo ut, teste libro Elfredi . . . nulla umquam
aetate par ei fuerit quisquam.’ He is said to have translated the
Psalms. Swiþþun, Bishop of Winchester, d. 862.
æþelwold, pupil of S. Dunstan, Abbot of Abingdon, Bishop of
Winchester, 963, d. 984 A.D. In
the Latin Life by Ælfric as revised by Wulfstan,
it is recorded, ‘Dulce namque
erat ei adolescentes et iuvenes semper docere, et latinos libros anglice
eis solvere,’ Acta Sanctorum, August, i. p. 94. His translation of
the Rule of S. Benedict was edited by Schröer in the Bibliothek der AS.
Prosa, ii. Kassel, 1885-8. Aidan, Bishop of Lindisfarne,
d. 651. Biern: Birinus, Bishop of Winchester, d.
650. The spelling with ie appears to be analogic with the
i-umlaut in such words as ierre, and so to belong to the
scribe’s original. wincæstre: in the Chronicle, anno 744,
Wintanceaster; Venta Civitas in Bede. [Pau]lin, Paulinus, the
Missionary Bishop of York, and, after 634 A.D., Bishop of Rochester, seems more likely than
the less-known Cuichelm, Bishop of Rochester, suggested by Wright. The
MS. has lin not lm. rofecæstre: in AS. Chronicle,
anno 604, Hrofesceaster; ‘in ciuitate Dorubreui, quam gens Anglorum a
primario quondam illius, qui dicebatur Hrof, Hrofæscæstræ cognominat,’
Beda, i. 85. Dunston. S. Dunstan was Bishop of Worcester,
957-9, Bishop of London, 958, 959, Archbishop of Canterbury, 959,
d. 988. ælfeih: S. Ælfheah, succeeded Æþelwold as Bishop
of Winchester in 984 A.D., became
Archbishop of Canterbury in 1006, and was martyred by the Danes in 1012
A.D. cantoreburi: a French
spelling, as Canteberi, 10/174; contrast Cantuarabirȝ, 11/4. L has still
Cantuarie buri, 94/15; Cantwareburi, 2821; where O has Cantelburi.
15. on englisc,
repeating 9. The writer does not mean that all these produced works in
English, but only to contrast them with French-speaking clerics.
16. Comp. ‘Si ergo lumen,
quod in te est, tenebrae sunt, ipsae tenebrae quantae erunt?’ S. Matt.
vi. 23.
17. nu is: so
Wright and Varnhagen, but read nu beoþ; for beo lore,
those teachings, is plural.
228
19. lorþeines,
teachers, apparently an ἅπ.
λεγ., of which the second element represents OE. þegn,
servant, disciple. Comp. the usual ‘larþawes,’ 15/82, ‘lorþeu,’ 20/68,
‘lorþeawes,’ 84/61, ‘larðewes,’ OEH ii. 41/28 (OE. *lārðēowas),
‘lareaw,’ OEH i. 241/21 (OE. lārēow). losiæþ, in the rarer
intransitive use, perish. Comp. ‘ꝥ þa men ne losien, þe on him ilyfæð,’
Twelfth Cent. Hom. 2/31, 34/1, 38/23; ‘þenne losiað fele saulen,’ OEH i.
117/18. forþ mid, together with, also with, here in the rare
adverbial use. Comp. ‘þenne losiað fele saulen ⁊ he seolf forð mid for
his ȝemeleste,’ OEH i. 117/18; ‘& him seolf þer forð mide,’ L 608.
It is common as a preposition, as at 40/176, 77/55, 195/611; ‘his
þenegas forð mid him þe he þyder brohte,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 528/645;
‘forswoleȝeð þene hoc forð mid þan ese,’ OEH i. 123/11.
20. ‘Sicut aquila
provocans ad volandum pullos suos, et super eos volitans, expandit alas
suas, et assumpsit eum, atque portavit in humeris suis,’ Deut. xxxii.
11, spoken of God’s care and training of his people. See Bozon, Contes
Moralisés,
p. 60, for an elaborate application of the text.
22. to worlde
asende. Comp. ‘fram Gode hider on world sended,’ BH 209/23.
23. [festen
&c.]. Comp. 190/438, 10/154. The sense required is, That we should
put our full trust in him.
Editions: ... London, 1842 (omits the
last four lines);
text has : for ;
6. For Aelfric the Abbot see Skeat in
E. E. T. S., O. S. 114
E.E.T.S., O.S. without spaces
11. ... Ælfric as revised by
Wulfstan
Wulstan: spelling “Wulfstan” used everywhere else
20. ... Contes Moralisés, p. 60
Moralises
Manuscript: As for A, p. 223.
Editions: Phillipps, as above; Singer, S. W., The Departing
Soul’s Address to the Body, London, 1845; Haufe, E., Die Fragmente der
Rede der Seele an den Leichnam, Gryphiswaldiae, 1880; Buchholz, R., Die
Fragmente der Reden der Seele an den Leichnam, Erlangen, 1889;
afterwards enlarged in *Erlanger Beiträge, ii. 6. 1890.
Literature: (1) of the Worcester
Fragment. Haufe, E., Anglia, iv. 237 (emendations); Holthausen,
F., Anglia, xiv. 321 (emendations); Kaluza, M., Litteraturblatt, ii. 92;
*Zupitza, J., Archiv, lxxxv. 78 (review of Buchholz). (2) of the Desputisoun. Heesch, G., Language and Metre,
Kiel, 1884; Holthausen, F., Anglia, Beiblatt, iii. 302; Kaluza, M.,
Litteraturblatt, xii. 12; *Kunze, O., Critical Text, Berlin, 1892;
Linow, W., Erlangen, 1889, edition enlarged in Erlanger Beiträge,
i. 1. 1889; Mätzner, E., AE. Sprachproben, i. 90-103; Varnhagen,
H., Anglia, ii. 225-52; Zupitza, J., Archiv, lxxxv. 84. (3) of the Legend in general. *Batiouchkof, Th., Romania, xx.
236; Bruce, J. D., Modern Language Notes, v. col. 385-401;
Dudley, Louise, The Egyptian Elements in the
229
Legend of the Body and Soul, Bryn Mawr, 1911; id. An Early Homily on the
‘Body and Soul’ Theme, Journal of English and Germanic Philology, April,
1909; Gaidoz, H., Revue Celtique, x. 463-70; Kleinert, G., Halle, 1880;
Paris, Gaston, Romania, ix. 311-14; Varnhagen, H., Anglia, ii. 225, iii.
569; *Zupitza, J., Archiv, xci. 369.
Phonology: For an account dealing with all the seven
fragments see Buchholz: what follows is based on the two here printed,
with references, where necessary, to his text of the other five.
Oral a is a, so ac, farene, habban: a before
nasals usually o, as from, mon, but a in licame (wavering
characteristic of the Middle South): a before lengthening groups
is o, as honden, imong, longe, psalm-songe. æ is a
after w, as was, watere D 12, but nes D 19; otherwise e,
as crefte, þene (OE. þænne), þet, but the traditional spelling
survives in æt, æfter D 42, goldfæten, igædered, gæderedest (OE.
gæderian), þæs, wræcche (OE. wræcca), wrænches G 48 (OE.
*wrænc). Messe is a French loan-word. e is regularly
e, as bedde, heui, met, þenchen, wel, &c., but i in
siggen F 7, siggeþ G 34 (characteristic of South-East and Kent).
i is regularly i, as him, nimen, willæn; it is u
after w in nulleþ, wulleþ C 35; but i in wihte D 3, nowiht
D 19. o is regularly o, as bodeþ, iboren, sorhliche;
before nasal, onȝean C 6; after w, woldest D 50, noldest, iwurþen
F 46; but a in aȝan C 18. eo is written for o in
feorþsiþ. œ (o + i) is eo in seoruhfule,
seorhful, seoruhliche, &c., neose. u is regularly u,
as biwunden, cumeþ, ful, tunge, &c., but o in iworþen F 45
after w. y is u, as ifulled, ikunde, lutiȝ, sunne,
ufel, wunne, wurmes, but y is preserved in synne F 33: iflut 2/30
is Scandinavian, OWScand. flytja; drihtenes 4/33, kinges E 39 descend
from OE. forms in i.
ā is normally o, as bon, loc, more, sor, woniende; but
a is often preserved as þa 2/18, lac 4/25, mare E 39, wa F 4.
eo is written for o in þeo 2/2, greoning, greoneþ; and
oa in woaning 2/15, woaneþ 2/25, is an attempt to express
graphically the [ao] sound. Þe [ȝet] E 3, 36 occurs twice
beside þa, þo. OE. wāwa gives weowe 2/7. ǣ1
(WG. ai + i) is mostly æ, idæled, tæcheþ, ilærede, and before two
consonants, ilæsteþ, æffre; but e in bideled C 32, ilered G 29,
ilesteþ, efre D 41, þen (= OE. þǣm) 3/36. It is
exceptionally a in þam C 25, facen (OE. fǣcne) G 10,
atterne G 17. In bileafen D 6, ea is written for æ.
ǣ2 (WG. ā) is still æ in þær, þærof, wæde,
grædie, wære E 28, but commonly e, þerinne, seten, beden, were,
misdeden, gredi. a is exceptional in hwar 3/4, 5, 7, 9, 10
(= OE. hwār). ē is usually e, swetnesse, þe,
2/2, me, ne, also before nasals, fenge, icwemdest. ī is normally
i, bi, lif, iwiteþ, liþ, hwile, &c., but after w it is
u in hwule, swuþe: hwui 4/17 beside hwi D 22 is an attempt to
express more fully
230
the sound of w. ō is normally o, to, moder, flore,
&c. œ̄ is eo in weopinde 2/10. (OE.
wœ̄pan). ū is regularly u, hus, wiþuten, ut,
&c. ȳ is u, ifuled, luþerliche, &c.
ea, breaking of a before r + consonant is
ea, earfeþsiþ, eart, scearp, æ in ært 4/16, e in
ert D 15, scerpe F 29, imerked G 39; no examples of a. It is
ea before lengthening cons. groups, earde, bearn. The
i-umlaut of ea (WS. ie) is e in all cases,
scerpeþ, erming D 18, yerde bidernan F 6. ea, breaking of
a before l + cons. is a, alle, also, scalt, wale G
2 (wealh): before lengthening groups normally o, colde,
coldeþ, itolde, holden G 32, 45, iwold C 8, isold D 38, monifolde, but
e, heldan C 35. The i-umlaut is seen in wældeþ, 4/41.
eo, breaking of e before r + consonant, is
eo, heorte D 49 and o herborwen C 23: after w also
eo, andweorke F 42, OE. handgeweorc, and e, werke D
30: the group weor, in LWS wur, has u, iwurþe F 45,
wurþe G 25, unwerþ 4/37, o, beworpen D 12; before lengthening
groups eo, yeorne, eorþe C 5. The i-umlaut of eo,
which after w had already become y in OE. is here
u, wurþest, deorwurþe, wurst D 30, wurþliche G 36. eo
before l + consonant gives u in sulfen C 27, suluen F 28
(already sylf in LWS). eo, u-umlaut of e, is
eo in heouene; å-umlaut of e
is eo in freome, feole, weolen (Bülbring, § 234); u-
and å-umlaut
of i is eo, seouene, seoþþen. libbe 2/13 is OE.
libban. ea, palatal diphthong, is ea, eæ in
isceaft F 35, isceæftan; a in schal, scal. ie after
g is e, ȝerde, biȝete C 13 (Bülbring, § 151
n.), i in ȝiuen 4/21. eo < WG. o after
sc is o in scorteþ, scoldest C 28, but eo in
sceoldest G 42. eo < u is u, onscunedest, sculen
C 38. OE. heom is heom and ham C 18; eom, eam, am F
14.
ēa is normally ea, deaþ, heafod, bereaued, seaþe E 8,
&c., but æ in dædan 3/42, beræfed C 7, sæþe, and e,
birefedest G 12. The i-umlaut of ēa is e, alesed,
iheren E 26, semdest 4/18, &c. (Bülbring, § 183 n.); and
u, huned D 47 (WS. ȳ). ēo is normally eo,
beoþ, teoreþ, leoflic, freonden, &c. Its i-umlaut does not
occur; deore C 47, neowe C 29, neode F 5, retain eo (Bülbring,
§ 189, anm. 1). īe is e in isene, E 40; yet
C 2.
a + g is usually aw, as in dawes 2/14, gnawen C
42, mawe C 49, but the older deaȝes survives 3/40. æ + g
is normally ei, iseid, but isæid G 19, and once dai E 13.
e + g is ei, ileide: weile 4/19 may represent OE.
weg lā (see Björkman, Scandinavian Loan-Words, 51). OE.
ongegn is onȝean C 6, aȝan C 18. o + g is
ow, bowe C 4, forhoweþ: o + h, douhter G 31,
wrouhte E 16, but wrohten D 25: u + ȝ, fuweles 4/42:
y + h, tuhte E 22. ā + g is ow in
owen C 45, sidwowes C 30: ā + h is seen in ohtest C 8,
ahte E 2, 29 (a survival). ǣ + g is eiȝ, iseiȝe D
8, leiȝe D 11, keiȝe F 16; ei in clei: ǣ + h,
aeihte 3/13, bitæiht G 52. ē + g, sweiȝe E 24. ō +
g, h, inouh, unifouh D 39, souhte, ibrouht. ū +
h is seen in þuþte 3/12 (= þuhte). ea + ht,
becomes ei,
231
istreiht, unseihte D 45. eo + h (LWS i) has
i in riht; the i-umlaut is represented by besihþ 3/45.
ēa + g, eiȝen, heiȝe E 39, but eȝen 3/42 and heie G 40:
ēa + h is eih in neih, heih G 42, but þauh G 27.
ēo + g, dreiȝen G 6, but driæn 4/36, written for drien, is
due to the scribe and may be Mercian; ifreoed 4/28 is noteworthy.
ā + w is usually ow, sowle C 2, blowen E 32, nowiht
D 19, but soule, nouht. ō + w, touward F 29, but reoweþ C
45. ēa + w, strau D 14. ēo + w, usually eow,
cneow C 27, icneowe C 27, þeow, þeowdome, but reouliche F 19, heou G
22.
In the vowels of final syllables, levelling has generally taken
place, but a few older forms, isceæftan, heafod, dædan, cumaþ, biddan,
offrian, weolan, remain from the original MS. In lufedæst, willæn,
driæn, &c., æ is written for e. The prefix ge
is represented by i.
The consonants present little of note. OE. nā māra becomes one
word with doubled m and shortened a in nammore 3/34 (comp.
wumme 2/13 note). farene 4/28, with n for nn, is
exceptional. OE. ǣfre is æffre 2/14, so næffre C 6, but æfre 3/3.
For f between two vowels u is generally written, bereaued
2/22, but beræfedest E 20. In mænet 2/7 t is French writing for
þ: schal 2/9 is isolated, sc [š] is the rule, as in onscunedest
3/3: k
is written mostly before e and
ie, while ȝ is used initially for the palatal (y in yield)
and between vowels, once finally in lutiȝ 3/2 where the original
probably had lutiȝe; g in other cases and mostly in combination
with consonants. For cw, French qu is used once in quale
4/42.
Accidence: The ā and jā stems add e in the
nom., blisse 3/8, bote 3/11, seoruwe 3/8, sowle 2/28, soule 3/45,
modinesse 3/4, accusatives are hwule 3/1, lore 4/29, soule 2/9,
sunne 4/22, Godnesse 3/3. The g. of strong nouns ends in -es, the d. in -e, the pl. n. a. of Masculines in -es; of Feminines in -e; Neuters as ban 2/21 are uninflected, pl. g.
has -e, d., -en, as honden
3/38. Markes 3/6, pundes 3/5 have adopted masc. endings; honden 3/39,
isceæftan 2/2, goldfæten 3/7 have joined the weak declension. Of the
latter dædan 3/42, weolan 4/32 are g., heouene 4/28 (nom.
s. heouene F 38 (OE. heofone), molde 3/34, d., and
exceptionally willæn 4/33, an archaic form preserved by its phrasal
character; a. is deade 3/40; æren, eiȝen 2/17, lippen 2/18, are
pl. n., weolen 4/16, d., eȝen 3/42 a.
The predicative adjective often shows strong declension, as grædie
3/13, fuse 4/15, ikunde 3/32; but heui 2/15, leas, lutiȝ 3/2, loþ 4/37,
&c., and the adjs. in ig are not inflected. Inflected
attributives are deope 4/40, s. d. m., muchele 2/23,
s. d. f.; durelease 4/40, s. d. neut.;
seoruhfulne 4/19, s. a. m.; alle 4/37, pl.
d. m., &c. The termination of the weak declension
232
is -e in all cases, as seoruhfule 2/8,
s. a. m.; reade 4/27, s. d. neut.; dimme
3/42, pl. a. neut.
The pronoun of the third person has pl. d. ham, heom. The def.
art. is s. n. þe- þeo- þat, d. m. þen, a.
þene- þeo- þat, pl. n. þeo- þa -þa,
þeo, þe. The relative is s. þet, s. and pl. þe,
þeo, pl. only þa.
The terminations of the verb are inf. -en (but driæn, offrian); ind. pr., e -est (contr. list 4/38), -eþ (but cumaþ 3/44, mænet 2/6); contr. sæiþ 2/13, biþ
2/22, met 3/33, liþ 3/36; pl. -eþ.
Come 3/11 is 2 pr. s. subj. Ind. pt. of weak verbs,
s. -de, -dest (but lufedæst 3/4), -de; part. pt. -ed, d, t in ibrouht 4/39, part. pr.
-inde, ende. Strong pasts are ȝeat 4/27,
beden 3/11, 4/21, seten 3/10; part. pt.; iboren 2/6, &c.
Dialect: The Dialect is Southern, outside the Kentish area,
and probably Middle South, with forms deriving from a Saxon patois. The
poem may have been written, as the preceding piece probably was, in or
near Winchester. The orthography belongs to two distinct stages of
development, the later showing the copyist’s practice towards the end of
the twelfth century, the more primitive being that of the original,
which may have been fifty or sixty years earlier. The phonetic position
of the scribe is in some respects more advanced than that of the Layamon
MS. A.
Metre: Alliterative long line of loose construction mixed
with rhymed syllabic verse. Occasionally four consonants alliterate,
2/6, 4/41, but usually three 2/5, 8, or two 2/4, 23. Crossed
alliteration of consonants occurs at 2/16, 22, 27; 4/32, of consonant
and vowels at 2/17; vowel alliteration at 4/37. At 2/4, read ⁊ lif ⁊
soule · him on ileide; at 3/11, bote come. The rhymes are sometimes
perfect, as at 2/15, 25; 3/6, 8; 4/15, 27, 44, but assonances like lif :
siþ 2/29; wif : siþ 3/43; dome : lore 4/29, and partial correspondences
of sound like crefte : idihte 2/3; bedde : libbe 2/13; honden : wenden
3/38; modinesse : lufedæst 3/4; wæde : lufedest 3/9 are valid for this
transitional verse. Sometimes alliteration and rhyme are combined, as at
2/3, 10 (read weopinde cumeþ), 3/4. Lines without either alliteration or
rhyme must be regarded as corrupt. We may perhaps read semeþ for þuncheþ
3/39; riht ⁊ godnesse 3/3; beden þe fore 4/21: icwemen woldest for
icwemdest ær 4/42. Compare the section on metre in the introduction to
No. vi.
Introduction: This poem, in which, after an introduction
on the miseries of birth and death, a lost soul reproaches the body it
has just left, represents the original type of one of the most popular
subjects of the Middle Ages. The idea is ancient, for Kunze, p. 3,
quotes a passage from a treatise ascribed to Plutarch, and Linow, p. 2,
another from the Talmud, which contain it in the germ. But as it is used
in Christian literature, it
233
originated in Alexandria under the influence of Egyptian conceptions of
death and the unseen world. In England before the Conquest it had
inspired (1) the poem printed in Grein-Wülker, ii. 92-105 from the
Exeter and Vercelli MSS., in which a lost soul speaks; (2) the fragment
from the latter MS., in which a blessed soul consoles the waiting body,
id. 105-7; (3) the homily printed in Ancient Laws and Institutes of
England, ed. Thorpe, ii. 396-400 (8vo ed.); (4) the homily in Wulfstan,
ed. Napier, 140, 1. Versions 3 and 4 are based on a Latin original
represented by an eleventh-century text, which is printed by Batiouchkof
in Romania, xx. 576-8, comp. Zupitza in Archiv, xci. 369. This Latin
prose text professes to be the relation of a vision by a monk to
Macarius of Alexandria (d. 393 A.D.), and it, according to Batiouchkof, is based on
earlier Greek legends wherein Macarius is himself the dreamer. The
homily (5) printed in Angelsächsische Homilien, ed. Assmann, Kassel,
1889, p. 167, and (6) that published by Zupitza, Archiv, xci. 379, are
independent of the Latin original just mentioned, and they have been
influenced by the Judgment Day literature. The former contains addresses
of a lost and a saved soul to their respective bodies on the Judgment
Day, the homily (6) has only the latter.
After the Conquest, contemporary with (7) the Worcester Fragment,
there is (8) the Oxford Fragment printed by Buchholz, p. 11. The theme
is again treated in (9) the twelfth-century homily, De Sancto Andrea,
OEH ii. 181, 3, which preserves as a quotation one line of its Latin
original, see 4/19 note. Closely related to
the last three versions is (10) the passage in the thirteenth-century
poem printed in OEM p. 173, ll. 65-216. In (11) the Desputisoun bitwen
þe Bodi and þe Soule, ed. Linow, based on the Latin Visio Philiberti,
the matter is thrown into debat form for the first time in
English. The Vision of Fulbert is again adapted in (12) the
fifteenth-century poem printed by Halliwell, Early English Miscellanies
(Warton Club), p. 12. Shorter passages in ME. literature, as OEM
83/331-6, Böddeker, Altengl. Dicht., 235-43 are fairly numerous.
The position of the Worcester Fragment among this literature is not
easy to define. It appears to form a group with 8 and 10, to which 9,
though too scanty to permit of an assured judgment, may be admitted.
They probably descend from a lost Latin original. Our author may indeed
have been acquainted with the oldest English version (1) and have drawn
thence the leading ideas for his poem. If so, he treated them with much
originality, for there is a wide difference between the austere
simplicity and concentrated energy of the older composition and his
234
diffuse and picturesque style, which reflects the influence of the new
literature imported from the Continent.
The lacunae in the text were mostly filled up by Singer. It
seemed unnecessary to assign to each editor his contributions to this
complement, much of which is obvious. For [fei]ge 2/30 and foot-note,
read [fei]ȝe.
The heading is from the Book of Job, xxv. 6.
1. en earde is
probably the remnant of on middenearde; elsewhere the writer uses
eorþe for the uncompounded word.
2. And all the created
things which pertain to it, i.e. to the earth. With isceæftan
comp. ‘He iscop þurh þene sune alle isceafte,’ Frag. F 47, 34/84,
130/80, 139/17, 187/356. For the position of to comp. on,
2/4; fore 4/21, 23; 96/53, 54, mostly with relative pronouns.
[s]cu[l]en, the tops of long s and l are cut off,
as also those of h and f in the next line. It is not an
auxiliary verb with ellipsis of a verb of motion (H., B.); it has
independent meaning as in ‘Þas wyrte sculon to (= are proper for)
lungen sealfe,’ Leechdoms, iii. 16/6.
3. [þe]ne. Singer’s
þonne, then, next, adopted by H., may be right.
4. Comp. ‘se us lif forgeaf
| Leomu lic and gæst,’ Christ, 775, 6, for which Grau, Quellen
. . . der älteren germ. Darstellungen des jüngsten Gerichtes,
p. 39, gives as source the poem ascribed to S. Cyprian, De resurrectione
mortuorum, ‘Qui sibi conplacitum hominem formavit in aevum, | Hanc
manibus caram dilexit fingere formam | Decoramque suam voluit inesse
figuram, | Spiritu vivificam adflavit vultibus auram,’ Opera, ed.
Hartel, iii. App. 310/51, 57-9. ileide on, put into, a meaning
apparently without a parallel; perhaps, entrusted to.
5. Softliche,
painlessly. isom[nede]. H. completed Singer’s isom[ne]. sor
idol, a painful parting; comp. l. 8.
6. ꝥ = þet; see 3/43.
The child by crying at its birth predicts the sorrowful separation of
soul and body at death; comp. 2/23-28; ‘Þæt cild, þe bið acænned, sona
hit cyð mid wope | ⁊ þærrihte witegað þissere worulde geswinc | ⁊ þa
toweardan costnunga,’ AS. Hom. ed. Assmann, 77/126-8; ‘Quotquot
nascuntur, vox illis prima doloris: | Incipit a fletu vivere quisquis
homo,’ S. Anselm, p. 199, col. 2 b; ‘Omnis homo cum dolore mundum
ingreditur, cum dolore iterum egreditur. Mox natus plorat, quia laborem
et dolorem sibi futurum pronunciat,’ Honorius Augustod. Migne,
P. L. clxxii, col. 1083.
7. The line is too short,
but Buchholz’s conjecture is too long for the gap. Perhaps the original
had hit woaneþ ⁊ weopeþ · ⁊ mænet þeo weowe.
8. B. translates siþ
here and at 2/16 by ‘weg’; rather lot, experience, as in ‘wa heom þæs
siðes þe hi men wurdon,’ Wulfstan, 27/3; ‘minegede
235
alle his wrecche siðes, þe he þolede on þis wrecche worelde,’ OEH ii.
169/8; ‘weop for hire wei-sið | wanede hire siðes; ꝥ heo wæs
on liues,’ L 25846-8. For compounds with siþ see 2/27.
sori, not ‘schmerzlich,’ B, but mournful, sad.
9. Haufe’s completion is
based on l. 28, where the verb is intransitive, but the construction is
supported by, ‘for þat he deleð þe sowle; and þe lichame,
þanne he wit of þisse woreld,’ OEH ii. 7/3. But the usual construction
is seen in ‘gif he þurh ferliche deð; saule fro þe lichame
deleð,’ id. 61/31, and it would be better to read [fro li]
came here, for the position of ⁊ is awkward. Another construction
is shown in ‘wið þone lichaman seo sawle gedælan,’ AS. Hom., ed.
Assmann, 164/17.
10. weopinde ⁊
woniende, so, ‘wop and woninge,’ VV 17/32; see 42/231 note.
11. Haufe’s completion is
too short, Singer’s too long, for the gap. For [swo], stressed
form, comp. 3/4.
12. he, i.e.
licame. walkeþ ⁊ wendeþ, tosses and turns in his bed.
[oftes]iþes H. followed by B., who afterwards expressed his
preference for [þe weas]iþes, based on ‘ȝet ic wulle þe ætwi[ten þ]e
weasiþes,’ Frag. G 7. Singer read [his si]þes.
13. wo me, though
written as one, are separate words; coalesced they become wumme; comp.
121/133; ‘wumme ꝥ ich libbe,’ SJ 72/5; ‘wumme ꝥ ich shal wunien on
uncuðe erde,’ OEH ii. 149/10; ‘wel me,’ 210/441.
15. greoning . . .
woaning: comp. 2/25; 196/662; ‘Heo woneþ ⁊ groneþ day and nyht,’ OEM
152/187.
16. biwunden. See 2/27,
79/13, 81/79, and for similar phrases comp. ‘swo faste bunden ⁊ swo
biwunde þarinne,’ OEH ii. 11/9; ‘mid sorȝen ibunden,’ L 12635; ‘mid
sorinesse bistonden,’ OEH ii. 147/26, 181/1.
17-21. Comp. ‘Hyse eres
shullen dewen, | & his eyen shullen dymmen, | & his nese shal
sharpen, | & his skyn shal starken,’ PRL 253/3-6, and the similar
piece OEM 101/1. An adaptation of the last quoted line has been inserted
at l. 19 to restore the alliteration. For him, comp. 80/47.
deaueþ, become deaf, a rare meaning, but paralleled in the
quotation above. OE. ā-dēafian has that meaning; see Deave, NED.
So too scerpeþ, l. 18, grows sharp, usually means to make
sharp.
19. scorteþ. Comp.
‘[þin] tunge is ascorted,’ Frag. G, l. 9. The phrase appears to be
without parallel: the corresponding texts have, ‘And þi tunge voldeþ,’
OEM 101/4; ‘& his tonge shal stameren, oþer famelen,’ PRL 253/8.
20. teoreþ, flags,
droops. Comp. ‘Ðin mægn is aterod · and þa mihte þu næfst,’ Ælfric,
Lives, i. 86/611.
236
21. [siden]. S
reads heorte, H muþ; something more extensive is wanted,
and sides is often used vaguely for body (see passages in Minot,
i. 15 note). liggeþ . . . stille occurs again, Frag. E
11, otherwise one might be tempted to conjecture, liggeþ he stan
stille, as in Minot, ii. 32, with improved alliteration.
23. at, as in
‘beræfed | At þene eorþliche weole,’ Frag. C 7, 8. So L, ‘biræiuie hine
at liue,’ MS. C 9205: it is the usual construction in the older version
(but simple dat. in ‘biræfued þan liue,’ 15283), while MS. O has
regularly of. With the meaning seize it takes the
acc., ‘he biræuede mine æhte,’ MS. C 8801. also, an
emphasized so, quite so, all the: comp. al = entirely, 2/29.
26, 27. So . . .
so, even as, even so. feorþsiþ: comp. 135/117, 3/41, 24/189,
119/74: similar combinations are ‘balesið,’ L 567; ‘fæisið,’ L 3731;
‘houdsiþ,’ ON 1586; ‘sorhsiðes,’ L 11109; ‘vnsiþ,’ ON 1164; ‘wosið,’ OEH
ii. 209/3; ‘wræc-sið,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 538/808.
29. This line is repeated
with variations as a sort of refrain, Frag. C 15, 37; D 9, 16, 42; F
19.
30. iflut,
transferred from the bed to ashes laid on the floor in the form of a
cross. Comp. ‘Sori is the fore | Fram bedde to the flore,’ Rel. Ant. i.
160; ‘on flore licgende, bestreowod mid axum, on stiðre hǽran,’ Ælf.
Hom. Cath. ii. 516/30; ‘Postremo redimens elemosinis
malefacta | Ipsaque confessus mortuus in
cinere est,’ Epicedium Hathumodae, 557; ‘Cum viderint iam eius exitus
horam imminere, cilicium expandunt, cinerem desuper aspergunt, et
infirmum de lecto levatum in cilicium submittunt,’ Consuetudines
Cluniacenses, Migne, P. L. cxlix, col. 772; ‘esto memor cineris in
quo tandem morieris,’ Hauréau, Notices, ii. 183/9. See other
texts in Rock, Church of our Fathers, ii. pp. 299-301.
31. eastward.
Burial with the feet to the east was formerly the usual practice (Rock,
ii. p. 473), but the eastward placing of the dying man is a detail which
I cannot illustrate.
32. [col]deþ.
Zupitza’s conjecture fits the place, gives a good meaning, and accords
with l. 36, but the usual phrase is seen in ‘þei clungin so þe cley,’
Archiv, xcvii, 309/17; ‘As a clot of clay þou were for-clonge,’ Hymns to
the Virgin, 13/31; ‘ant clyngeþ so þe clay,’ Böddeker, AE. Dichtungen,
211/17; ‘The clot him clinge,’ M. L. Review, V. p. 105.
hit is him ikunde. Comp. 154/85; ‘Nes hit þe nowiht icunde þet þu
icore[n] hefdest | Nes hit icunde þe more þen þine cunne biuoren þe,’
Frag. D 19, 20; ‘unfæger, swa him gecynde wæs,’ AS. Hom., ed. Assmann,
176/208; ‘Ah nim þu þene kine-halm; he is þe icunde,’ L
18158, 22004, 23196; VV 57/28.
237
34, 35. Comp. ‘Now
schaltow haue at al þi siþe | Bot seuen fet, vnneþe þat,’ Desputisoun,
91, 2.
36. Comp. ‘Nu lið þe
clei-clot | al so þe ston,’ OEM 172/73, 4.
37. þeo he, those
to whom he. With 37-40 comp. 4/15, 16, 37; 32/34; ‘& he þonne se
deada byð úneaþe ælcon men on neaweste to hæbbenne,’ BH 59/14; ‘& se
man næfre toðon leof ne bið his nehmagum & his worldfreondum, ne
heora nan hine to þæs swiþe ne lufað ꝥ he sona syþþan ne sý onscungend,
seoþþan se lichoma & se gast gedælde beoþ, & þincð his neawist
laþlico & unfæger,’ id. 111/27-30; ‘Alle his frendes he shal beo
loþ. | And helud shal ben wiþ a cloþ,’ PRL 253/1, 2. freome dude.
Comp. ‘him to fremen and do frame,’ GE 173: and see 176/24, 186/323.
38. riht wen[den],
set straight.
41. The copyist has
allowed his eye to wander to the very similar line 43 and has
transferred the second half of it here, to the exclusion of something
like þe woneþ þe feorþsiþ.
43. [þon]ne. The
last half of n and e are in the MS. riche is
probably a mistake for wrecche, as S. suggests.
44. For love turns
miserably into an evil under the stroke of misfortune. To have loved and
lost is an evil thing.
45. besihþ . . .
to, contemplates; comp. 124/249 note. Zupitza quotes, ‘When þe gost
it schuld go, | It biwent ⁊ wiþstode, | Biheld þe bodi þat it com fro,’
Desputisoun, 9-11. Comp. ‘cum educerent eam (i.e. animam) de corpore
commonuerunt eam angeli tercio, dicentes: O misera anima, prospice
carnem tuam unde existi,’ Visio Pauli, Texts and Studies, ii. 3.
18/7.
The heading is added from the Book of Job, vii. 11.
1. S., H., and B. fill the
lacuna with Hwui noldest biþenchen from 4/17, but this does not
fit the lower half of the letters left in the MS. where ligge as
the end of the preceding line is fairly certain, followed by a word of
three letters, the middle one being o and another word of two or
two and a half letters, of which the first is w. Perhaps loþ
we[re] should be read. A question is not suited to the
context. The opening lines evidently correspond to OEH ii. 183/16-19,
‘longe habbe ich on þe wuned. swo wo is me þe hwile, for al þat me was
leof; hit was þe loð · þu ware a sele gief ich was wroð. To
gode þu ware slau and let · and to euele spac and hwat.’
2. This line is repeated at
Frag. D 28.
4. [mo]dinesse. Comp.
77/52, ‘He hadde ben a modi kniȝt,’ Desputisoun, 5; ‘Me nimeð þe licome
| ⁊ preoneð in a clut. | ꝥ wes so modi ⁊ so strong | ⁊ so swiþe prud,’
OEM 172/67-70; and for the passage at
238
large, ‘Hwær beoþ þonne his welan & his wista? hwær beoð þonne his
wlencea & his anmedlan?’ BH 111/33; ‘Hwar byð þonne heora wela, þe
hi ahtan her on life? ⁊ hi dæghwamlice gesam nodon ma ⁊ ma togædere ⁊
nystan nænigne ende, hwænne hi ꝥ forlætan scoldan,’ AS. Hom., ed.
Assmann, 165/35-7; ‘Whar ben þine markes ⁊ þine poundes?’
Desputisoun, 33.
5. þurh [pa]newes
igædered, scraped together, or, more probably, wrung from the poor,
‘Quare pecunias et alienas facultates et substantias pauperum tulisti et
congregasti in domo tua?’ Batiouchkof’s text, p. 577. Comp. also 34/67,
46/296.
6. itolde. Comp. ‘and
þa paneȝes weoren italde,’ L 29460. An early use of bi with unit
of measurement.
7. Guldene is
corrupt; with the help of ‘Hwer beoþ þine nappes | þat þe glyde to
honde,’ OEM 175/107, 8, we may restore, hwar beoþ [nu]
þeo Goldfæten . þe glyden to þine honden. Then comen is a
gloss on glyden; though it is found in this connexion elsewhere,
‘þe schal com an hors to hande,’ Richard, 5554.
8. fornon, also at
4/44 is not OE. for-nēan (H.), which means nearly, but foran
on, in front, ahead, still to come. Comp. ‘foren an his hafde,’ L
23968, with local meaning, in front of his head (Germ. vorn an); ‘⁊ aȝȝ
þeȝȝ tokenn efft forrnon | To serrfenn wukemalumm,’ Orm 16/553
(= in continuation of the series); OEM 149/92. L has also ‘aforen
on, afornon,’ 10413. Similarly, ‘þe sorȝe is him biforen,’ OEH i.
63/164.
9. Comp. ‘Whare ben al þine
worþliche wede,’ Desputisoun, 25.
10. [sibbe] is
added to fill out the line. ofer þe, by the sick man’s bedside;
ofer, opposite to; more commonly expressed by over
against.
11. bote, cure or
relief, an ambiguous word.
12. þuþte, for
þuhte, like cniþt for cniht, L MS. O 346 a purely graphic
variation. On the other hand, hauef for haueþ, Frag. G 26,
like of þufte for of þuhte, 46/271, and
soþte for softe, KH MS. L 392, represent a difference in
pronunciation. See W. Horn, Beiträge zur Geschichte der englischen
Gutturallaute, pp. 91-4.
13. Comp. 22/129; ‘Þi fals
air schal be ful fain | Þi fair fe to vnderfo,’ Desputisoun, 105, 6;
‘And his freondes striveð | to gripen his i-won,’ OEM
172/75, 6.
14. [heo]. B. reads
[heo hit], which is too long for the gap, and translates ‘sie thun es
ohne dich.’ But it means, they put you outside; which is varied in 15,
16. Comp. ‘Me wule for þin ahte | make striuinge, | And pute þe wið-uten
| of alle þine þinge,’ OEM 176/133-6. See 22/130.
239
16. of weolen . . .
bedæled. The OE. construction is seen in ‘mínra bóca bedæled,’
Ælfric, De vet. Test. 1/22, and it is the same generally in L, ‘liues
bidæled,’ 17365; ‘windes bidelde,’ 28239; but ‘of folke bidæled,’
12743.
17. Comp. ‘Wai hwi
noldestu er | of þisse beon icnowe,’ OEM 178/167, 8.
18. semdest, didst
load; see 84/73. The phrase seems to be without a parallel; perhaps the
use of the verb was suggested by ‘forðon gie sémað menn mið seamum ðaðe
gebeara ne magon,’ S. Luke xi. 46 (Lindisfarne MS.).
19. This motiv is
common to the versions. Comp. ‘heu me, heu me, quare unquam in corpore
illud tenebrosum et pessimum ingredi merui,’ Batiouchkoff, p. 577; ‘Heu
michi cur olidum · fueram tibi iuncta cadaver. Aweilewei þu fule hold ꝥ
ich auere was to þe iteied,’ OEH ii. 183/14, 15; ‘Walawa ⁊ wa is me. ꝥ
ic efre com to þe,’ Frag. F 4; Wulfstan, 140/20-23; ‘Ue mihi, habitacio
tua mersit me in infernum,’ Revue Celtique, x. 469; ‘for hwon sceolde ic
æfre ingangan on þisne fulestan ⁊ wyrrestan lichoman,’ Thorpe, ii.
398/9. ‘Heu me miseram, quod unquam creata fui ac nata, seu in hoc
corpus maculatum posita,’ S. August. Opera, Migne, P. L. xl. col.
1357. For buc, comp. 186/330; ‘Awai þu wrecche fole bali,’ OEM
172/83.
20. [lo]kien,
preserve, maintain, as 77/46; 78/85; ‘uorte loken riht bitweonen ou,’ AR
286/6; ‘beloken (= to look to) þe sicnesse of þe sowle,’ OEH ii.
77/32; or perhaps, look for, seek after, as in ‘Haueden al þa
reuen; . . . iloked tweiene eorles,’ L 5273, 7. The
phrase with [ma]kien, the conjecture of H., seems not to
be earlier than the sixteenth century. ilærede men, ‘lerdemen,’
OEH ii. 31/9; ‘leredmen,’ 8/83; ‘bokilered,’ 18/2, 19/39. Comp. ‘alle
þat weoren ihadded | & þreo biscopes wise; a boke wel
ilæred,’ L 21856-8; and for the sense, ‘Noldest þu ær gode men for lufe
g[od dæ]lan,’ Frag. D 4, and 89/33-44.
21. fo[re]. See 2/2
note, and comp. fore after its noun in 4/23.
26. þæne. B. takes
þære
of the MS. as gen. sing. referring to messe; H. as gen.
pl. representing ilærede men, but þurh with the
genitive is very rare. It might be dative; but Zupitza’s correction is
certain; þæne refers to Christ, as is required by
his and he in the next line, and were is 2 sing.
past indicative as at 4/32. Comp. ‘þam soðfæstan gode | þas lac
geoffrian þe us alysde fram deaðe,’ Ælfric, Lives, i. 66/284; ‘Ac us is
mycel neodþearf ꝥ we geþencan, hu drihten us mid his þrowunge alysde
fram deofles anwealde, þa he a rode ahangen wæs ⁊ his ꝥ deorweorðe blod
for us ageat,’ AS. Hom., ed. Assmann, 164/7-10; ‘Hwi noldestu gelyfan
þinum
240
drihtene, þe wæs ahangen for us and us alysde fram helle wite,’ id.
167/80, 1; ‘alesde us of helle grunde,’ OEH i. 19/8.
29. fenge, betook
thyself, þurh—lore. Comp. ‘Þurh þæs deofles lore, þe þe
licode wel,’ Frag. G 14, 43.
30. Bi, concerning,
comp. ‘bi hwam ure Louerd seið,’ AR 158/9; ‘Nu mon mæi [seg]gen bi þe,’
Frag. C 9; 155/92.
31. Probably not a
quotation, but an imperfect reminiscence of ‘Qui enim divitiarum servus
est, divitias custodit ut servus,’ Bedae Opera (1612), v, col. 378.
33. for drihtenes
willæn, for the Lord’s sake (Germ. um Gottes willen). Comp.
‘for willan þæs ælmihtigan,’ Ælfric, Lives, ii. 112/683, and contrast
‘[Nol]de
he nefre þærof don his drihtenes wille,’ Frag. C 11.
35. from must be
taken closely with forloren, not as B. translates, ‘bist du verloren,
fern von allem, was du liebtest.’ Comp. ‘And fra folke forlese we þa,’
Surtees Psalter, Ps. 82, v. 5, translating ‘disperdamus eos de
gente.’ But it is an uncommon combination.
37. Comp. ‘Mid clutes þu
ert for [bu]nden and loþ alle freonden,’ Frag. F 17; and see note on
3/37. For unwurþ see 26/258.
38. Comp. 12/11.
39.
þær—scalt, where thou must remain. H. quotes ‘Nu me þe
bringæð þer ðu beon scealt,’ from the Oxford Frag. (The Grave) 5, and
for 40 (which is repeated in Frag. E 8) ‘Dureleas is þet hus,’ id.
13.
41-3. B. explains, There
worms dispose of all that was most prized by thee, birds friendly to
Death, all that thou didst formerly delight with all kind (reading
kunde) of sweetness, which thou didst dearly love. But to call
worms birds friendly to Death, is a flight of imagination beyond our
writer’s power, and the suggested arrangement of the two halves of 41,
42 is artificial, though not without parallel. A comparison of ‘Heo
wulleþ freten þin fule hold,’ Frag. C 41; ‘Ac þu heo (i.e. the earth)
afulest mid þine fule holde,’ Frag. E 5; ‘Aweilewei þu fule hold,’ OEH
ii. 183/15, suggests here fulest alre holde, foulest of all
bodies. The meaning is then easy and straightforward. His body was what
the dead man had most prized and pleasured, ‘For þin wombe was þin god,’
Frag. D 36; ‘þine þermes, þeo þe deore weren,’ Frag. C 47.
43. [þære]. The
staff of the first letter has survived in the MS.; it goes below the
line.
44, 45 are repeated with
small variation in Frag. D 40, 41. For fornon see 3/8 note. With the rhyme of 45, comp. ‘Beornen [þer
e]fre · ende nis þer nefre,’ Frag. E 49.
Literature: ... (3) ... *Batiouchkof,
Th., Romania, xx. 236;
Th. Romania
the passage cited as xx. 236 is actually xx. 1 and 513
Bruce, J. D., Modern Language
Notes
Languages Notes
ā is normally ... œ̄ is
eo in weoþinde 2/10.
weoþinde,
ea ... å-umlaut of e is
eo in freome, feole, weolen (Bülbring, § 234); u- and
å-umlaut of i is eo
first “å-umlaut” misprinted as bold instead of italic; second misprinted
as “a-umlaut”
... The prefix ge is represented by
i.
ge misprinted as italic instead of bold
The consonants ... k is written
mostly before e and ie
“k” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
Accidence. ... Neuters as ban 2/21
are uninflected, pl. g. has -e,
d., -en
-e, d, -en
... The def. art. is s. n. þe- þeo-
þat, d. m. þen, a. þene- þeo- þat, pl. n. þeo-
þa -þa, þeo, þe.
all hyphens printed as shown
The terminations of the verb ... part.
pt. -ed, d, t
“-ed, d, t” misprinted as italic
30. ... ‘Postremo redimens
elemosinis
form “elemosinis” for expected “eleemosinis” is in the source text
... Hauréau, Notices, ii. 183/9.
Haureau
32. ... M. L. Review, V. p. 105
M.L.
26. þæne. B. takes þære of the
MS. as gen. sing.
pære
33. ... and contrast ‘[Nol]de he nefre
þærof
“[Nol] de” with space
35. ... as B. translates, ‘bist du
verloren
bist with anomalous bold b
37. ... For unwurþ see
26/258.
unwurp
241
Manuscript: Royal 5 F vii, British Museum; described in
Casley’s Catalogue of the Manuscripts of the King’s Library, pp. 88, 89.
The pieces, with musical notation, in the order B, A, C, occur in a
Latin life of Godric by Geoffrey, a monk of Durham, on f. 85, apparently
an inserted leaf. This leaf is in a different hand from that of the
life, and belongs to the beginning of the thirteenth century; a hand of
the fourteenth century has added a Latin version beneath the lines of
the first stanza of A, and onfong above onfo in l. 3.
The Royal MS. alone contains C, but the first stanza of A, together with
B, are found in two MSS. of the life of Godric, written by his
contemporary Reginald of Durham, Laud Misc. 413, Bodleian Library, and
Harley 153, B.M., and the first stanza of A, also in another MS. of the
same life, Harley 322 B.M., and in Mm. iv. 28,
Cambridge University Library. Two
MSS. of Roger of Wendover, Douce 207, Bodleian, and Otho B v, B.M., and
three of Matthew Paris, C. C. C. Cambridge 26, Nero D v, and Harley
1620 B.M., have the whole of A. Most of these give Latin versions of the
English words. The filiation of the English copies has been determined
by Zupitza in the exhaustive article mentioned below: he gives a
critical text based on the Royal MS.
Facsimile: Saintsbury, G., History of English Prosody,
frontispiece to vol. i. London, 1906.
Editions: Ritson, J., Bibliographia Poetica, 1-4; Hazlitt’s
Warton, iii. 154 (reprint of A only); *Zupitza, J., Englische Studien,
xi. 401-32.
Literature: Zupitza, J., Archiv, lxxxvi. 408 (note on the
pronunciation of druð).
Phonology: Godric’s Northern dialect has been well
preserved, but he would have written scild 3, ric 4, and probably birth
13. a is a in scamel (sćeamol) 9; æ is
a in þat, bare 10, at 13. e is e in help 3., itredie 10. i is
i in schild 3, dilie 7, and y (written for i before
m) in tymbre 12. o is o in godes 4. y is
i in sinne 7, winne 8. ā is a in swa 9, clenhad 6.
ǣ1 (WG. ai + i) is e in clenhad 6, iledde 9;
ǣ2 (WG. ā) is a in bare 13, þare 14. ō
is o in moder 2, onfo 3, mod 7, fote 10. ū is u in
bur 5, hus 12. eo before r + consonant is e in erðe
10. æ + g is ai in faire 12; ēa + h,
eȝ in heȝilich 4 (hēa(h)līce). Scone 12 is Norse, the OE.
is scīene (Björkman, Scandinavian Loan-Words, p. 77), and burth
13 is probably so (id., p. 162). Sainte, uirgine, flur, druð, are
French. The scribe uses þ initially, ð in other positions, and once th.
So he has ƿ generally, but
242
once w in wel. In selfd 8, d is due to anticipation of the
following word: in wid 10 d is scribal error for ð.
Grammar: moderes is a new genitive (OE. mōdor,
mēder); e of the dative is lost in mod, scamel, burth.
fote 10 is pl. d., sinne acc. pl. Of the possessives mine
10 is pl. d., the others are uninflected; min sinne 7 is
noteworthy, because the pl. forms at this period are usually
inflected. Iledde is a solitary ind. pt. pl., silde subj. pt.
sing.; the other verbs are imperatives: rix = rixe. A new present
stem appears in onfang; it may be as old in the North as Godric’s time;
elsewhere it appears about 1200 A.D.
Dialect: Specifically Northern are the representation of
ā, the form silde and the early simplification of the inflection.
The development of æ, ǣ, and y exclude the
South.
Metre: Godric’s rhythms are all to be found in the Latin
hymns which probably inspired his verses. These are S. Anselm’s
Psalterium S. Virginis (Opera, ed. Gerberon, p. 303) and the Sequence
for the Feast of S. Nicholas, to be found under Dec. 6 in the York
Missal and elsewhere. The normal line in Anselm’s hymn contains four
measures with trochaic movement, as Nón est | nóbis | récens | Déus, but
there are others of five and six, with admixture of iambic rhythm.
Godric uses all these and applies to them the licences of native
prosody, elision, slurring, omission, and doubling of light syllables.
So his 1 and 5, Saínte | marí|e uír|giné |, and Saínte | marí|e
chríst|es búr |, are exactly Áve | Regí|na vír|ginúm, and 6, maíden|es
clén|had mód|eres flúr only differs by the slurring of e before
r. Line 2, móder | ihésu | crístes | náza|réne |, has one trochee more
than the normal line, one less than Cúius | laúdes | sónus | fíunt |
épul|ántis, and l. 7 with mine restored before sinne is of
the same pattern, dílie | míne | sínne | ríxẹ in | mín mod |. Line 8,
bríng me to | wínne | wið þé | selfd Gód |, has the same mixture of
trochees and iambs as Ómnis | remítt|itúr | iní|quitás |, or Áve | cúius
| virgín|eó |, but with doubled light syllable in the first measure;
similar is the rhythm of 4, ónfang | bríng he | ȝílich | wið þé | in
gód|es ríc |. Line 3, ónfo | schíld | hélp þin | gódric, has the same
movement as óbdor|míens | páti|éndo, but with omission of light syllable
after stressed long syllable in the second measure.
The long lines 9, 10 are based on a combination of two Latin ones,
Críst and | saínte | Marí|e swá || on scá|mel mé | ilédd|è, like Áve |
cúius | in fíl|iúm || Proclám|at fíd|es már|tyrúm | but with omission of
light syllable in the last foot; and þat íc | on þis ér|ðe né | sílde ||
wíd mine | báre | fótẹ i|trédie | imitates indú|ti stó|la gé|mína ||
Dúplex | dícunt | Álle|lúia, but with doubling of light syllables twice
and elision.
243
In the last verse, Saínte | Nícho|láes | gódes | drúð | is Glóri|óse
| Níco|láe | with added foot of one stressed syllable; týmbrẹ us | faíre
| scóne | hús | is vóca|lí con|córdi|à; Àt þi búrth | àt þi bár|è
resembles ùbi páx | et glóri|à, and Saínte | Nícho|láes | bríng vs wel |
þáre is the normal Ád sal|útis | pórtum | tráhe | with added foot.
In Godric’s verse the strict syllabic principle, with its consequent
abandonment of alliteration, save for ornament, and its consistent
attempt at end-rhyme, has obtained already a complete mastery, whilst in
most of the contemporary poetry it is still struggling with the
traditional alliterative metric. His methods rank him with the writers
of popular topical verse, while the more conscious artists still linger
in the old ways.
Introduction: S. Godric, the hermit of Finchale, near
Durham, died 1170 A.D. In his earlier
days he had travelled much as merchant and pilgrim, and learnt to
venerate S. Nicholas as the patron of those in peril of the sea.
Reginald tells us that the Virgin Mary, accompanied by S. Mary
Magdalene, appeared to S. Godric, in the chapel which he had dedicated
to her at Finchale, and taught him both words and melody of the first
piece (Vita, ed. Stevenson, Surtees Society, no. 20, pp. 117-19). The
occasion of the second piece was as follows. His sister Burgwen having
died, S. Godric earnestly desired to know what judgement had been passed
upon her, and he was privileged to see the Virgin Mary followed by two
angels, clothed in albs, bearing the soul of his sister, who, from the
centre of the altar in the Oratory, sang the hymn which filled the saint
with joy (Reginald, 143, 4). The third piece was unknown to Reginald,
but Godric told him that on one occasion S. Nicholas appeared to him,
with a company of angels, and bade him join them in their hymns (id.
202).
The literary value of Godric’s verses is small, but they are the
first compositions we have in Northern English after the Conquest, and
metrically interesting. There are, however, three earlier documents
which have been printed by Liebermann in Archiv, cxi. 275-84; the first
of these, Gospatric’s letter, is also in the Scottish Historical Review,
i. 62, 105, 344, 353; ii. 340: it is possibly pre-Conquest.
1. marie has three
syllables with the accent on the second; in OE. it is usually Maria with
accent on the first (but ‘þæt is MARÍA
· mædena felast,’ Be Domes Dæge, 18/293); in Orm naturalized as Marȝe
and in ME. generally Marye. From his Latin models Godric takes his
pronunciation and the associated uirgine, apparently its first
occurrence in English.
244
2. ihesu, the general
form for any oblique case, here genitive. nazarene is an
invariable adj. like cristene, but Orm has, ‘Forr Nazarenuss tacneþþ
sannt,’ 308/8865.
4. heȝilich, with
honour; gloriose in the MS. version. MS. Harley 322 has hegliche
and translates cito; the Cambridge MS. hehtlic, wrongly rendered
eternaliter as though it represented ēcelīce; Zupitza explains it as
the adverb of higð, ME. on hihðe, in haste; MS. Harley 153 reads
hehliche, rendered alte.
5. xpistes bur: comp.
‘Maria, Dei thalamus,’ Anselm 303/5; ‘Ave, de cuius intimo | Christus
processit thalamo, | in sole tabernaculum | fixit, qui regit saeculum,’
Mone, ii. 234/69-72, which shows that this use of the word came from
Psalm xviii. 6 ‘In sole posuit tabernaculum suum et ipse tamquam sponsus
procedens de thalamo suo exultavit ut gigas ad currendam viam.’ For xp =
Χρ, Chr, see Traube, Nomina
Sacra, 156 ff.
6. The translation in some
of the MSS. is ‘virginalis puritas, matris flos.’ Godric has in mind,
‘Ave mater per quam via | Immaculata patuit | Quia (Qui à in text) Deo
flore | Virginitas effloruit,’ Anselm, 306/93-6; ‘Ave coeleste lilium |
Per florem cuius unicum,’ &c., id. 305/153, 4. Christ then is the
Virgin’s pure offspring, the mother’s flower to whom the next two lines
are addressed, and þe in l. 8 (which Zupitza rejects) presents no
difficulty. The abandonment of the vocative for a new subject is
artless. The first half of 7 corresponds to, ‘O Christe, proles Virginis
| Patris compar altissimi | Per tuae mortis merita | Dele nostra
peccamina,’ Anselm, 303/22-5, and the second to ‘Ave mater cuius partus
| Deus in coelis habitat | In sanctorum dum mentibus | Dulcedine sua
regnat,’ id. 306/111-4.
9. scamel, from L.
Lat. scamellum, dim. of scamnum, step, stool; it often
means the little stool for the hands of cripples, but it is also
synonymous with scabellum, which in the phrase scabellum
pedum occurs nine times in the Vulgate, with the meaning footstool.
In two of these, Psalms xcviii. 5, cix. 1, the Surtees Psalter
translates by schamel, Eadwine’s Canterbury Psalter by scæmol, the Paris
Psalter by sceamul, the earliest Eng. Prose Psalter by shamel, the
Lambeth Homilies (OEH i. 91/11) by fot-sceomele. Comp. ‘Vor þi alle þe
halewen makeden of al þe worlde ase ane stol (scheomel, C; schamel, T)
to hore uet, uorto arechen þe heouene,’ Ancren Riwle, 166/15, 6. Psalm
cix. 1 ‘Dixit Dominus Domino meo: Sede a dextris meis, donec ponam
inimicos tuos, scabellum pedum tuorum,’ is quoted five times in the New
Testament, and there may be a reference to it here. Zupitza suggests
that l. 10 is based on ‘Quoniam angelis suis mandavit de te, ut
custodiant te in
245
omnibus viis tuis. In manibus portabunt te, ne forte offendas ad lapidem
pedem tuum,’ Psalm xc. 11, 12; but on þis erðe itredie is a weak
representation of offendas ad lapidem. Now we are told by
Reginald that the angels who bore the spirit of Burgwen halted ‘supra
Altaris crepidinem,’ and the Harleian MS. has, more definitely, ‘eam
super Altaris crepidinem statuerunt.’ The scamel is simply the
footpace of the altar on which she has been set.
Reginald’s version points in this direction, ‘Sancta Maria super scamni
sedile me deduxit’; as also Geoffrey’s paraphrase, ‘Ne pede calcarem
terre contagia nudo (a. l. mundo), | Sic mea me domina
deduxit sancta Maria.’ The meaning then is, I have been conducted to
this altarstep in such a way that I should not touch this earth
with my bare foot. I am divinely protected and lifted above the world.
And Godric understood, ‘statim intellexit quod anima sororis suae super
coelestibus Angelorum choreis esset associata’ (p. 145).
11. Nicholaes
occurs in AS. Chron. E. 1067 as Nicolaes. It corresponds to Nicolaus,
which in the Latin hymns is always four syllables, and so, I think, it
must be here.
godes druð: comp. ‘dilectus Dei Nicholaus,’ Aberdeen Breviary;
‘amicus Dei,’ York Breviary, ii. col. 106; ‘et amico Dei magno | Nicolao
condole,’ Anselm, 307/168, 9; ‘godes drut,’ Be Domes Dæge, 18/290.
12. hus does not
rhyme and has no reference to anything in the legend of S. Nicholas. But
he was invoked by sailors in peril (York Breviary, ii. 105), and we are
told that Godric would often interrupt a conversation by saying ‘Quaeso,
fratres, oremus; quia ecce, navis in pelago periclitatur,’ and that,
‘facta oratione, iterum consuevit adjicere, “Nunc navis mea applicuit”’
(Reginald, p. 130). If huð might be restored here, as an
un-umlauted form of hȳð, harbour, on the evidence of to
huþe = ad portum, quoted in Bosworth-Toller from the Lambeth
Psalter, it would correspond to ‘O beate Nicolae, | Nos ad maris portum
trahe’; ‘Gloriose Nicolae, | Ad salutis portum trahe’ of the Sequence.
tymbre can mean provide, prepare, see Minot, vi. 2.
13. Zupitza connects this
line with druð, but its position requires it to be taken with
tymbre or bring, at means from, by the merits of
(NED i. 529 †11). The singular piety of the infant Nicholas is told in
all his legends, ‘quarta et sexta feria tantum semel (= semel
tantum) sugebat ubera,’ Aurea Legenda, ed. Graesse, p. 22; ‘Qui in cunis
adhuc iacens | Servando ieiunia | a papilla coepit summa | promereri
gaudia,’ in the Sequence. And he was helpful in his tomb, ‘Ex ipsius
tumba manat | unctionis copia | quae infirmos omnes sanat | per eius
suffragia.’
Manuscript: ... Harley 322
B.M.,
B.M,
Phonology: ... e is e
in help 3, itredie 10.
3.
4. ... ēcelīce
ecēlīce
246
Manuscript: Laud Misc. 636, Bodleian Library (MS. E).
Described in Plummer, ii. xxxiv, v. A new hand begins with 1132 and
continues to the end in 1155 A.D.
Facsimile: Keller, Wolfgang, Angelsächsische
Palaeographie, Berlin, 1906: plate xii gives ll. 1-25.
Editions: For the earlier editions see Plummer, ii.
cxxvii-cxxxv. Thorpe, B., The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, 2 vols., London,
1861; Earle, J., Two of the Saxon Chronicles parallel, Oxford, 1865;
*Plummer, C., Two of the Saxon Chronicles parallel, 2 vols., Oxford,
1892, 1899; Emerson, O. F., A Middle English Reader, New York,
1905.
Literature: Behm, O. P., The Language of the Later Part of
the Peterborough Chronicle, Gothenburgh, 1884: Würzner, A., Review of
Behm, Anglia, viii, Anzeiger, 18-24: Meyer, H., Zur Sprache der jüngeren
Teile der Chronik von Peterborough, Jena, 1889: Horst, K., Beiträge zur
Kenntniss der Altenglischen Annalen, ES xxv. 195-218: Robertson,
W. A., Tempus und Modus in der altenglischen Chronik, Marburg,
1906. For History: Hugo Albus, ed.
Sparke in Hist. Angl. Scriptores, Londini, 1723 (comp. Liebermann, F.,
Ueber ostenglische Geschichtsquellen, Hannover, 1892): Gesta Stephani in
Chronicles of the Reign of Stephen, Rolls Series; William of Malmesbury,
Historia Novella, Rolls Series; Bridges, J., History of
Northamptonshire, 2 vols., Oxford, 1791: Norgate, K., England under the
Angevin Kings, 2 vols., London, 1887: Round, J. H., Geoffrey de
Mandeville, London, 1892.
Phonology: a is regularly a, whether oral,
faren 9, makede 23, ac 39, pades 59 (*pad); or before nasals,
Godman 22, nam 42; or before lengthening groups, land 1, enmang 26. It
is e in henged 55, 56 influenced by Scand. hengja;
æ, which in this text lies near e, in the Scand. loan-word
tæcen 120, 139; o in oc 7, but, through influence of Scand.
oc, also. æ is mostly a, was (34 times), þat (9),
at (5), -masse (3), but no instance of after; the pasts, bar
85, spac 141, stal 165; but e, wes (7 times, all between ll. 20
and 76), þet (once), -messe (once), efter
(15), analogy of eft; and æ, wæs (9), þæt
(once), æt (6), -mæsse (once), æfter
(once), stæl 132. e is generally e, nefe 7, wel 72; before
lengthening groups, sende 4, 9, þrengde 61 (*þrengan), ferde 166;
but æ in
bæron 63, 66, wæl 95, 203, þæ 100, æten 124. i is regularly
i, milce 4, scip 14, but y is sometimes written for it,
uurythen 58, suyken 135, wyd 141. o is regularly o, ouer
13, smoke 56, o 74 (= on); before length. groups, uuolde 3,
gold
247
24. It is a in an 14, a 20; u in durste 22. u is
regularly u, sunne 15, cumen 18, sturuen 75; before length.
groups, wurþen 17, hungær 67, wurthen 147. It is omitted in of uundred
17 (a French spelling). y is i, dide 9, 18, bebiriend 22,
sinnes 88, mint 98; written y in byrthen 24, yfel 29, 51, 88,
fyrst 30, fylden 49, 51, styred 136.
ā is normally a, þa 1, sua 3, an 10, athes 46, mare 76,
87, mar 136; before two consonants, halechede 28 (hālgode),
halechen 87 (hālgan), axen 128. It is o in nan more 71,
nan mor 6, to 111, 117 through loss of stress. ǣ1 is
e, todeld 39, neure 73, flec 74, hethen 77, here, her 190, or
æ, æuricman 20, sæ 13, ælc 102, æuez 117 (ǣfæst), todælde
178; exceptionally a in ani 52, lastede 68; o in onne 63
(ǣnne). ǣ2 is normally e, slep 14,
uueron 84, ormete 114, eten 123, or æ, wæron 6, 54, þær 61, 145,
ræd 156, but a occurs before r some fifteen times, uuare
16, 183, uuaren 50, 75, war 85, 172, thar 40, 84, 136, thare 96, 149,
bare 24, forbaren 78, nadres 59, stali 147. ē is mainly e,
fet 55, slep 86, refen 92, cuen 145; before consonant groups, underfeng
27, uuenden 38, spedde 171, but æ in læt 92, 164, and rounded
into eo before rd in feorde 6, 125, feorden 34, 150.
ī is regularly i, suithe 8, lic 21, for which y is
sometimes written, suyðe 49, 92, gysles 157. ō is o, com
1, oþre 5, moste 97. ū is u, ut 9, abuten 16. ȳ is
i, litel 35.
ea before r + cons. is a in quarterne 59, nareu
60; æ in scærpe 61, 64, iærd 78, 102; a generally before
lengthening groups, uuard 15, 18, 122, 189, 201, forewarde 157, 185,
nowiderwardes 65, but æ in wærd 176, 177, 193. The
i-umlaut is represented by æ, e, eo, færd
115, 180, ferd 133, feord 164. ea before l + cons. is
regularly a, als 15, alre 30, alle 45, hals 65; but ælle 43;
before ld, ald 16, halden 143, 186, 189; but manifældlice 113.
Palatal ea is a, iaf 10, 128, 129, 158, 205; æ in
begæt 96, 98. Palatal ie is generally i, y after g,
gyuen 9, 71, ííuen 144, 158, but gæildes 70, bigæton 170; after
č, cęste 60. eo before r + cons. is eo,
weorces 50, weorkes 103 (influence of w); e in sterres 16;
before length. groups e, erthe 85, eo, eorl 116,
æo, æorl 132. To the wur group belong wurscipe 11,
wurtscipe 93. w + ie, umlaut of eo before r
+ cons. is represented in uuerse 69, wærse, 156, 159. eo before
l + cons. is e in helde 184, æ in sælf 202.
eo, umlaut of i,
is e in clepeden 70, here
44; i, y in sithen 153, siððan 32, sythen 79, sylure 24, syluer
40, 53. eo after g is seen in iunge 178; after sc
in sculde 18, 38, scort 60; after w in suster 170; beionde 196,
heom 34, represent eo of obscure origin.
ēa is mostly e, ded 19, 176, 177, 193, hefed 56, estren
108, forles 140, reuede 173; or æ, ræuede 20, ræflac 29, ræueden
71, ræueres 83, hæued 58, but eo in eom 38, beom 64. Its
i-umlaut is seen in flemden 118, herde
248
163, cæse 74. Palatal ēa after g is æ in gære 13,
18, undergæton 44; ea in gear 1, a in iafen 44
(gēafon).
ēo is mostly e, underþeden 3, ben 7, frend 21, helden
32, undep 61, ieden 75, but æ in dær 23, gæde 58, scæ 140
(*sēo Anglia, Beiblatt, vii. 331), iæde 165, wæx 127, and
eo in heolden 47, 49, deoules 51, preostes 80, freond 151. Its
i-umlaut is seen in þestrede 15, 122, dære 74, sæclede 201 and
atywede 111 (ætīewan). gīet is gæt 76, get 38.
æ + g is æi in dæi 15, 16, 19, 52; ei in
dei 11, 14; ai in lai 14, mai 67; æ in sæde 143, sæden 17,
86. e + g is æi in æie 22, sæin 87, læide 173,
læiden 70; ei in eie 196, sei 24. ongegn is represented by
agænes 48, 130, agenes 30, 180, so togænes 116. i + g is
i in ani 52. o + h is oh in wrohte 91,
bohton 107. u + g is ug, flugen 76, 135, 147;
u + h, uh in fuhten 117. ǣ1 +
h is seen in bepaht 4. ē + g is ei in
uureide 2, beien 176. ī + g is i in fridæi 109.
ō + g, h is oh in onoh 63, brohten 21,
brohte 92. ea + h gives uh in muhten 147. ēa
+ g is eg in rachenteges 63; ēa + h,
eh, neh 4, fleh 140, 149, 165, hehlice 204; but heglice 112.
ā + w gives au in saule 40; ō
+ w is represented in nouther 78, 154 (nōhwæðer), noht 8
(nōwiht); ēa + w in fæumen 117; ēo +
w in neuuæ 93, treuthe 47, 154, treothes 47.
In syllables of minor or no stress, swā is reduced to
se, alse 38, 55, ware se 172; o to e, altegædere
79, enmang 26. æ is written for e, flugæn 82, forcursæd 84, War
sæ 85, neuuæ 93, bletcæd 198. In sona 30, a is traditional
spelling, instead of e. The suffix in wreccehed 76 represents
*hæd. Inflectional vowels are mostly levelled to e, but
a persists in the infinitives winnan 115, rixan 176, and is found
in the pt. plurals, tocan 32, coman 82; o in wæron (11
times), undergæton 44, bræcon 62, brendon 72, heoldon 143, fæston 154;
in macod 41, begunnon 210 and the inf. bæron 63, bigaeton 170. In
wicci 155 i is miswritten for e.
For w, the scribe adds to the OE. symbol ƿ the French
uu, which occurs for the most part initially, as uureide 2, but
medially in þohuuethere 33, Noruuic 107; and for sw, cw,
su, cu, as sua 3, cuen 145. Once for cw he has
French qu in quarterne 59. In cusen 201, cosan 204, s has
been substituted for r, by influence of cēosan,
cēas, &c. An inorganic n appears in conjunction with
d in bebiriend[en] 22, þolenden 87. In umwile 70, the prefix is
O. Scand. um; þumbes 56 (þūma) has inorganic b: in hauen, 131,
bb has passed through f, by analogy of hafað, to u;
similarly liuen 98. f between vowels is generally represented by
u, as æuez 117, ræueres 83; but hefed 56, yfel 29: it is also
u in æure 69, deoules 51, sturuen 75: it is assimilated in wimmen
53, lammasse 13. t is lost in efsones 156, and misplaced in
sa`t´hleden 153: OE. milts is milce 4. d
249
has fallen off in þusen 66, and interchanged with þ in wurþen 17,
wurthen 147. The contraction ⁊ = and 47, 198, but the d as well
as that of mid 142, 160 was evidently pronounced t when followed
by te for þe. þ, ð, th all occur
indiscriminately; the last is French. þ of the article þe is
assimilated to a preceding t, as ðat te 3, þatte 8, æt te
13, ⁊ te 5, and often, ⁊ to 111, 117, mid te 142, 160, but not after
d in fand þe 90, nor in mid þemperice 160, wyd þemperice 162,
where the article coalesces with the noun. In wurtscipe 93, &c.,
wart 122 t
has displaced þ; while in wurscipe 11 þ has been lost:
þ often interchanged with d, as uuard 15, 176, 201,
nowiderwardes 65, fordfeorde 125, wyd 141, widuten 147. In bletcæd 198
(bletsod) c is written for s, as in emperice 141.
Sc is [š], sh in ship; so sculde 7, scip 14, lundenisce
27, scort 60, scærpe 61, scæ 140, -scipe
11, &c. Voiced s is once written z, æuezmen 117.
The scribe uses ch, as often in Anglo-Norman, with the value
of [k] to represent c, g, as rachenteges 63
(racente, always with k elsewhere in ME.), halechede 28
(hālgode), halechen 87 (hālgan), folecheden 148
(folgodon), Burch 2, burch 163 (burg); being all the
instances of ch which occur. But he also has c with the
same value as folc, com, tocon, macod, &c., and c for
č (ch in chin), which may be assumed for ricemen 30, cæse
74, circe 78, ceste 60, cild 107, cusen 201, cosan 204, -cestre 133, -rice 9, and
for final ic.
Palatal g is mostly i, iaf 128, 129, 158, 205, iafen
44, aiauen 168 (āgiefan), ííuen 144, 158, iunge 178, iærd 78,
102, beionde 196, iæde 165, ieden 75 (ge-ēodon), but g in
gear 1, begæt 98, get 38, gæt 76, gæde 58, bryniges 57. In sloghen 118
(slōgon) the guttural sound is expressed.
Initial h in words of less stress has largely disappeared, so,
it 8, &c., but hit 189: it is added in hær 159, here, her 190.
hw is reduced to w, War 85, wile 69, umwile 70, and is
wu in Wua 24. h is lost in þur 112 through confusion with
the following word, but its guttural character is sufficiently indicated
by added c in þurhc 155, 156. þ is written for h in
þoþ 35, þoþwethere 91, 181; but þohuuethere 33.
Accidence: In the strong declension sunu m.
is levelled to sune s. n. 21; f. sæhte
s. n. 184 has added e. Gen. s. -es, as kinges 29; no examples of fem. or neut. nouns.
The dative is mostly without distinctive inflection, as land 1, king 2;
eie 196, sune 184, rice 177, genge 119 do not differ in termination from
the nom., but exceptionally kinge 28, tune 73; lande 10, 76, gære 13,
quarterne 59, wiue 179 have e. The dat. fem. forms saule 40,
ceste 60, strengthe 99, 145, rode 109, forewarde 157, and the
accusatives milce 4, treuthe 47, blisse 175 probably correspond in this
text to ME. nominatives with added e, as is the case with the
acc. fare 72, helpe 169, sahte 182. Men 23 is probably dat. sing.: the
gen. is mannes
250
65. Sylure 24 is probably for syluer, as at 53. The plural
n. d. a. inflection is -es; sandes 34, tunes 70, 72; once s in martyrs 54.
Neuters in es are gæildes 70, landes 92, weorkes 103, but wunder 46, 67
pl. a. retains the OE. plural. Fote 165 is prob. pl. d.
(= fōtum); wintre 69, 89 is a pl. a. corresponding to
OE. pl.winter; similarly threniht, pl. a. 16. Pining 54,
108 (pīnung f.) appears to be treated as a neut. pl.,
comp. pines 68: freond 151 is OE. pl. a. frēond. No
example of pl. gen. occurs.
The weak declension of all genders has e in all cases of the
singular; n. mone 16; d. messe 11, lammasse 13, smoke 56,
pape 95, time 106, luue 109; a. throte 65, cyrce 79. But sunnen
(dæi) 198 preserves an old genitive; cyricen 203, circewican 97,
horderwycan 98 are datives. The plurals are mostly in -es. n. nadres 59, d. þumbes 56, a.
neues 43; but halechen pl. n. 87, estren pl. d. 108
descend from OE. forms.
Most of the adjective inflections are lost, and there is little trace
of the distinction between strong and weak. There is no instance of
undoubted inflection of a strong adj. in the singular, but ful 56, an
60, scort 60, al 66, 88 are uninflected: micel is invariable. Strong
pl. in e are sæhte 35, alle 45, 62, 67, 68, 72, 96, 129, yuele
51, scærpe 61, suilce 86, manie 102, gode 104, wunderlice, manifældlice
112: not inflected are al 15, cnotted 57, hethen 77, mani 103. I take
untellendlice 54, alle, ilce 108 as pl. a. The weak declension is
exemplified in the singular, lundenisce 27, 139, yfele 88, ilce 200; but
ilc 18, &c. Wise 182 is plural; not inflected, æuez 117, &c.
onne 63,
s. a. f. corresponds to ǣnne, rather than
āne.
The personal pronouns are i 67; he, him; hi pl. n. 37, her
pl. g. (hiera) 154, heom, and once hi pl. a. 51;
scæ 140 (first appearance), hire; it: relatives þe, ðat, used
also in oblique cases, pl. g. 63, s. d. 116: article
s. pl. þe, but pl. to 111, 117 (for þo).
Strong verbs have inf. in -en,
but bæron 63, bigæton 170. The dat. inf. with to, but
uninflected, occurs 63, 71, 124, 170, 186, 189; part. pr. are
sittende 73, ridend 82; pr. pl. lien 97; pt. s. I a. iaf,
lai, besæt, begæt, spac: I b. com, nam, bar, stæl, stal: I c. warth,
uuard, ward, wærd, wart, fand, wan, belamp: III. fleh, forles: IV.
for, toc, suor, forstod: V. underfeng, held, slep, læt, wæx, hatte;
pt. pl. usually ends in -en, but on, an, æn also occur; I a. iafen,
undergæton 44, drapen, eten: I b. comen, coman 82, namen, bæron,
forbaren, stali (error for stalen) 147, bræcon 62: I c. wurþen, fuhten,
fuhtten 181, sturuen: II. risen, uurythen, suyken: III. flugen, flugæn
82, 135, cusen: IV. tocan 32, sloghen: V. helden, heolden, hengen: iafen
44, bræcon
62 are possibly subjunctives; bare 24, helde 184 are pt. s. subj.:
pp. I b. forholen: I c. begunnon: III. cosan, forloren: IV.
suoren, forsworen: V. underfangen.
251
Weak verbs have inf. in en, but rixan 176, uuerrien 33, sæin
87, sei 24; dat. inf. with to, but uninflected, at 33, 98,
131; pr. s. maket 112, pt. s. in -de, -ede; but besætte
131, wrohte 91: beteht 117, goded 92, henged 55, 56, læd 135, macod 41,
mint 98, scatered, to-deld 39 have lost final e; gæde 58 is pt.
s. subj.;
þole(n)den 1 pt. pl. 87; pt.
pl. in -en, as sæden 17, &c.; once
in on, brendon 72. bebiriend 22, bebyried 111 are for bebyrieden; comp.
byrieden 110, the loss of en is due to the following word;
part. pt. in -ed, but forcursæd 84,
bepaht 4.
Noteworthy among the Anomala are myhtes 2 pt. s.; muhten pt. pl.;
cunnen 1 pr. pl.; durste pt. s.; wæron, uuaren pt. pl.; uuare 16, ware
183, pt. s. subj.; hatte 113, gehaten 11, 202.
Dialect: This is, no doubt, substantially the North-East
Midland of Peterborough, but with traces of Northern influence, such as
the form saule 40, and the extensive representation by a of
ǣ2 before r; of ā;
and of a before lengthening groups. The last two perhaps need no
such explanation in this early text; they are indeed usual in Orm fifty
years later, but the inclination to o is marked in other East
Midland texts. There is a considerable survival of traditional spelling,
especially noticeable in the use of æ and in inflections of the
verbs.
Vocabulary: French are acordede, canceler
(pre-Conquest), castles, carited, cuntesse (first appearance), curt
(f. a.), emperice (f. a.), justise, iudeus (f. a., OF.
judeu, Reimpredigt 14/27), messe, miracles (f. a.), pais
(f. a.), prisun, processiun, rentes (f. a.), sot(lice),
Standard, tenserie, treson (f. a.), tresor (f. a.), tur,
uuerre, uuerrien 33: Latin are crucet (hus) 60, priuilegies 96; anno 94
is an early use. Scandinavian are bathe 52, brendon 72 (OWScand.
brenna), bryniges, carlmen (already in OE.), drapen, hærnes, sæht,
sæhtlian, tæcen 139, þoh, til (in OE.), um (while).
Introduction: The Peterborough Chronicle continues
the history for seventy-five years beyond any of the other redactions of
the AS. Chronicle. The last section of it here printed differs in form
and language from the rest. It is not in annal form; only six dates are
given as headings and events are not recorded in their chronological
order. Places like 6/29, 7/68, 8/88, 104 show that, at least from the
first-mentioned passage, the whole was written down at the same time,
and that not long after 1155 (comp. 11/210). Though there is
considerable variation in spellings, there is no evidence of progressive
change, or of the influence of earlier documents. These variations are
distributed quite impartially over the whole piece, and witness to
nothing but the strong effort of the scribe to express as accurately as
possible the sounds he heard. For I think it was taken
252
down at the dictation of an old monk, who had lived through the Anarchy,
by a younger man acquainted with French scribal methods. His mistakes,
such as false grouping of syllables 6/20, failure to grasp what was said
7/62, dropping and altering of end syllables under the influence of the
following word, 6/22, 8/111, 8/112, 9/147, the omissions shown by the
interlineations, are mistakes of dictation. And the brevity and absence
of subordination in the sentences, the confusions in construction, as at
7/64-7, the frequent changing of the number of the verbs 7/48, 9; 7/56,
7; 7/60, 61, are hardly consistent with deliberate written
composition.
Throughout this time there was an historian at Peterborough. Hugo
Albus was a monk there from 1114, and sub-prior from 1134 to 1154. In
advanced age he wrote the History of the Monastery in Latin, in which,
at any rate, he utilized the English Chronicle. Some have thought him
the author of the latter also, but that view is rejected very decidedly
by Liebermann (Ueber osteng. Geschichtsquellen, 5). His strongest
argument is the difference of style, the comparative smoothness,
elaboration, and coldness of the Latin. Some of that may be due to lapse
of time, for there is probably fifteen years between the two
compositions. Something too should be allowed for the difference in
language and in purpose.
1. King Henry returned
from Normandy to England in July, 1131. Henry of Poitou had been in turn
bishop of Soissons, monk and prior of Cluny, prior of Savigny, abbot of
S. Jean d’Angely in 1104, and, ‘quia versutus erat et callidus et
ingeniosus,’ as Hugo says, he acquired the archbishopric of Besançon,
from which he was expelled by the abbot of Cluny after three days’
tenure. Then he got and lost in the same way the bishopric of Saintes,
which he held for a week. In 1123 he came to England as legate for the
collection of Rome-scot, and returning in 1127 on the same errand he
told the king, to whom he was related, that being old and tired of war
and dissension in his own land, he desired to abandon S. Jean for
Peterborough. But being made abbot of the latter in 1128, he held both
till the monks of S. Jean expelled him in 1131, when he went to Cluny
and was detained there till he swore to the abbot that, if permitted to
return to England, he would procure the subjection of Peterborough as a
priory to Cluny. What he charged the monks with is not known.
2. burch: S. Petri
Burgum: ‘Medeshamstede monasterium . . quod nunc . . Burch
vulgariter nominatur,’ Hugo, 23.
3. ð = þat 6/34,
7/60, 64; but þet 11/186 and þæt demonstrative 11/195, each once
only.
4. sende efter:
summoned the monks to Brampton in Hampshire:
253
‘rex . . misit propter monachos apud Bramtune,’ Hugo, 75. With
efter comp. 5/9, 6/28.
5. Roger of Salisbury,
chancellor 1101; named bishop of Salisbury 1102, but not consecrated
till 1107; ‘secundus a rege,’ Henry of Huntingdon, 245; deprived of his
castles at Oxford 1139 (6/42); died in the same year. Alexander, nephew
of Roger, created bishop of Lincoln 1123; died 1148. b = biscop,
see 8/83, 9/140. Seresberi with inorganic s is Sereberi
6/42, OE. Searoburg: Sælesberi in the AS. Chronicle MS. F
anno 552 has dissimilated r, while the corresponding Latin
is Seleberi: lincol is influenced by the common French form,
Nicol: on Lincollan occurs at E 627.
6. In he feorde, he
may be the king, who had to deal with guile: comp. ‘Al es bot a fantum
þat [we] with ffare,’ ES xxi. 201/1; ‘Tandem non post multum temporis
post haec intellexit rex fraudulentias eius,’ Hugo, 75. If he is
the abbot, as in the next sentence, the sense is, he employed guile, so
‘Iactantia, ꝥ is idelȝelp on englisc, þenne mon bið lof-ȝeorn ⁊
mid fikenunge fearð,’ OEH i. 103/29. With the next sentence comp. ‘Cum
autem quod cogitaverat perficere non posset, voluit nepotem suum
Gerardum haeredem & abbatem facere pro se, ut quod ille non potuit,
iste perficeret,’ Hugo, 75.
9. Henry returned to S.
Jean. Hugo says he made a good end. His successor, Martin de Vecti,
native of the Isle of Wight, usually called Martin de Bec, first prior
after its second foundation of St. Neots, a cell to Bec, was received by
the monks on June 29th, 1132. S’ = seint, sometimes sein; a
French fashion. In MS. E, from 1066 to 1122, where a new section begins,
sc̄e for sancte is normal and frequent, exceptions being
Octabus sc͞i Martini 1114,
Octabus sc͞i Johannis
1117, while sc͞e Marie is treated as a genitive depending on words like
nativitas. From 1122 to 1131, S’ is regular save for three
entries in 1125 and sc͞e Marie twice as genitive. neod = Neotus
may be due to the Anglo-Norman tendency to substitute d for final
t (Stimming, Boeve de Haumtone, 221). The pronunciation
persisted, for in the church of St. Neots in Cornwall, whence the body
of the saint was stolen by the people of St. Neots in Huntingdonshire,
there is a tablet over his tomb with verses said to have been written in
the sixteenth century, in which occurs the line ‘The vulgar call it now
St. Need’s’ (Gorham, History of Eynesbury, 340). Sancti Neothi occurs
twice in a document, Palaeograph. Society, First Series, pl. 193. The
name is now pronounced like mod. Eng. neats.
10. Comp. ‘An preost wes
on leoden; Laȝamon wes ihoten,’ L 1: ‘he com to þere
dune oliueti his ihaten,’ OEH i. 3/5. This paratactic
254
construction with hatan is confined to names of persons and
places; it is colloquial and does not involve ellipsis of a
relative.
11. mid micel
wurscipe: ‘cum magno honore et gaudio,’ Hugo, 75: comp. 8/93,
11/188, 197, 207, 108/241.
13. gære: 1133
A.D. The eclipse took place on August
2nd ‘ð oþer dei’; it lasted ‘ab hora fere 3 usque ad horam 6,’
Liebermann, Anglo-Normannische Geschichtsquellen, 79. Henry died at
Lions-la-Forêt on the night of December 1st, 1135, and was buried
January 6th, 1136.
18. sua dide:
Comp. ‘sua diden’ 10/152; ‘swa ibeoð’ 14/70: similar are 8/84, 110,
9/115, 10/165, 176, 12/v. 5, 140/30, 146/117, 215/27, 217/97. The
subject is often omitted when it would represent the same thing as a
noun or pronoun in an oblique case in the preceding clause or phrase, as
at 16/122, 45/239, 98/71, 102/133, 118/42, 128/5, 140/25, 207/354,
217/94; see KH 1268 note.
19. Andreas is
the Vulgate form.
20. þe mihte:
comp. 8/81.
21. sune . . .
frend: Robert of Gloucester and Hugh, archbishop of Rouen, were at
his death-bed.
22. ‘Corpus eius . . .
apud Radingum in monasterio cuius ipse devotus fundator largusque
ditator exstiterat, sepultum est,’ William of Newbury, 30.
Redinge, L. Radingia.
23. wið: the
usual prepositions are against and to, but comp. ‘nalde na mon mis-don
wið oðre,’ OEH i. 15/17, 35/2, and see 48/300
note. dær. Their peace was soon broken, ‘Ferae quoque, quae
in tota prius regione, tanquam in indagine reclusae, cum summa pace
reservabantur, nunc quaquaversum turbari, a quolibet passim dispergi, ab
omnibus, abiecto metu, prosterni,’ Gesta, 4.
27. blais: L.
Blēsae: ai is an English graph for ei. Tonic
e free (L. ē) passed through ei to oi in most
French dialects, but in Norman it stopped at the first stage: in the
Norman patois of to-day, L. me(n)sem is
meis, mes. Similarly L. Pictavum passed through Peitou to Poitou in
central French, but remained at the first stage for some time in
Anglo-Norman; see 10/179. Stephen was ‘filius comitis Blesensium’; he
was himself ‘comes Boloniensis.’
28. Willelm
curbuil, Guillelmus Curbuliensis, W. of Corbeil (L. Corboilum), a
canon regular of the Augustinian Order, became archbishop of Canterbury
in 1123, and died 1136. The subject of halechede is lundenisce
folc: according to the Gesta (p. 4) they claimed the right to elect.
mide-wintre dæi, Christmas Day; the pre-Christian name for the
festival.
255
30. ricemen,
powerful men, nobles: comp. 8/99, 19/34, 206/324. Balduin de
Reduers, Balduinus de Radvariis; in France, Baudouin de Réviers
(near Caen). An e for Fr. ie is characteristic of
Anglo-Norman. He was created Earl of Devon sometime before June, 1141.
The order of events is here confused. The settlement with David of
Scotland by which Stephen granted the earldoms of Carlisle, Huntingdon
and Doncaster to David’s son, Henry, was made before Easter, 1136; Hugh
Bigod seized Norwich castle in May; Stephen laid siege to Bampton in
June and took Exeter in September; Milo of Beauchamp held Bedford castle
against the king early in 1138. Stephen was much blamed for his clemency
to the rebels at Exeter; see Round, 24.
31. Execestre is
the spelling of Domesday Book; OE. Exanceaster. Similarly
gloucestre 9/133, OE. Glowecester; Wincestre 9/140 (contrast
wincæstre 1/13), and Rouecestre 10/149 (contrast rofecæstre 1/14): all
show the Anglo-Norman [ts]. In the two last words the English sound has
prevailed.
35. forstode:
comp. 10/155. Morris translates availed, as in ‘hu micel forstent · and
hu mære is · seo soþe hreow,’ Be Domes Dæge, 4/55; but the ME.
dictionaries and NED have only hinder, which would answer here.
37. underfangen,
&c., accepted as ruler, for they thought he would be exactly like
his uncle, and he had still something to give away. Elsewhere 6/27,
11/187, 197, 207 used of ceremonious welcome.
39. sotlice,
foolishly, not ‘soothly’ (Norgate). Stephen lavished it in personal
expenditure, payments to mercenaries and subsidies to discontented
barons. ‘Habebat enim . . . rex immensam vim thesaurorum, quos
multis annis rex Henricus avunculus suus aggesserat; aestimabantur
denarii . . . fere ad centum milia libras. Hanc copiam gazarum
habenti auxiliatores deesse non poterant; praesertim cum esset ipse in
dando diffusus et, quod minime principem decet, prodigus,’ Malmesbury,
ii. 540; Annales de Wintonia, 50.
40. na god,
&c. Comp. 4/20-28.
42. The Oxford Council
was held in June, 1139. The Chancellor Roger Pauper was Bishop Roger’s
son. The castles surrendered were Devizes, Malmesbury, Newark, Sherborne
and Sleaford.
44. milde: ‘lenis
et exorabilis hostibus, affabilis omnibus,’ Malmesbury, 539. For a
modern estimate see Norgate, i. 280.
45. na iustise ne
dide, inflicted no punishment, as in OF. faire justise,
justiser; comp. ‘de li iert faite granz justise: | a glaive sera
turmentee | u vendue en altre cuntree,’ Marie, Lais, ed. Warnke,
154/60.
256
46. wunder,
dreadful deeds, destruction; a development of OE. wundor,
portent: comp. 7/67, 66/120; ‘þa scipen wenden to wundre,’ L
7855; ‘of hem ðat haued ðis wunder wrogt,’ GE 3588. The picture of
oppression and desolation which follows was probably drawn from the
doings of Geoffrey de Mandeville in the Fen country during Dec.
1143-Sept. 1144 (Round, 214-19). Comp. L 4034-53, an original passage
based on the tradition of this evil time. hi nan, none of them;
extension of the OE. appositional constr. in hi sume. Comp. ‘alle
he,’ 7/47.
49. Under the treaty of
Wallingford one thousand one hundred and fifteen ‘adulterine’ castles
were to be razed. With suencten comp. 44/250; and Round, 416.
52.
þe—hefden, lit. whom they thought that they had any
property. For this periphrasis comp. 119/58, 9; ‘breðren ꝥ he hefde
iherd ꝥ weren of muche speche,’ AR 74/9. The subject of the dependent
verb is not expressed.
53. efter, with
an eye to, to extort; a use mostly with verbs of pursuit or desire, but
comp. 60/12, 118/28. See Round, 214 note for instances of these
extortions.
54. pining,
notwithstanding the scribe’s punctuation, is a cognate acc. to
pined; with the adj. it is practically equal to unutterably;
comp. 8/108.
55. Comp. ‘Sumne hi
onhengon be þan fotum ⁊ sumne be þan earmum,’ AS. Hom.,
ed. Assmann, 171/36. After henged the object heom is
omitted as being the subject of the previous verb.
58. to ð, to the
extent that, so far that, so that. OE. to þon þæt.
60. crucethus,
torture house: the first element is L. cruciatus. Comp. ‘Heo
deden heo in quarterne; in ane quale-huse,’ L 3769; ‘þis
meiden wes bicluset | þe hwile in cwarterne | ⁊ i cwalmhuse,’ SK
600.
62. him . . . þe
limes, his limbs. Emphatic is ‘þat his ribbes him to brake,’
KH 1077. lof ⁊ grim: the passage is corrupt: grī may be
grin or grim; lof can only be for loþ, as Thorpe suggests
in his translation, ‘loathly and grim,’ as if two adjectives for the
name of the contrivance. Possibly grine has dropped out after grī; the
words are associated in ‘Forðon he me alysde of laðum grine’ = ‘Quoniam
ipse liberavit me de laqueo,’ Paris Psalter, xc. 3. But more probably
the scribe has heard indistinctly an unfamiliar word such as, wæron loþ
engins. It is true that engine, device, machine does not appear in
English till 1300, but it is found in Anglo-Norman books in the last
half of the twelfth century, and it must have come to England with the
castle.
257
63. rachenteges,
chains, fetters; but the gloss collario racentege (Napier, 2062)
is noteworthy in the present connexion. ð . . . onne,
one of which.
64. This may mean, ‘That
was adjusted in this way, namely it is fastened,’ &c., but it is not
clear. Perhaps it has been lost before is. The contrivance
must have resembled that described in Reade’s It is Never too Late to
Mend, ch. xi.
66. bæron: supply
sculde out of myhte.
70. æure umwile,
at regularly recurring times; it became a regular tax. tenserie,
protection money. Round, 215, quotes from a letter of Pope Lucius to
Archbishop Theobald, ‘Quidam etiam sub nomine tenseriarum villas et
homines suos spoliant.’ LL. tensare means, to protect, and,
through extortion of money on pretence of protection, to rob. See Round,
414 and NED s.v. Other references for tenserie,
tenser are Wistasse le Moine, 2112; Roman de Rou, 9554.
71. Worcester was burnt
in 1139, Nottingham in 1140 and 1153, Winchester in 1141, Oxford in
1142, Cambridge by Geoffrey in 1144.
72. Comp. ‘Ærst aswond
þat corn here; ȝeond al þas kineriche. | þer
after hit wes swa deore; & al folc gon to deȝen. |
swa þat þu mihtes fare; fulle seouen nihte | ꝥ no mihtest þu
þurh nene chep; finde neouwer na bred. | an burȝe and
on londe,’ L 31793-31801; ‘ꝥ folc ut of londe; flah on ælche
ænde. | monie hundred tunen; bi-læued weoren of
monnen. | þat lut me uinde mihte; men uaren
ȝeond londe,’ L 31845-50.
75. ieden on,
‘went about asking,’ Norgate. This meaning requires the verbal subst.;
rather, ‘subsisted on,’ with on of manner.
78. ouer sithon
is usually taken as, everywhere subsequently, which is not suitable
here. Earle equates it with OE. ofer sīþum, as meaning times past
reckoning, but ofer in the sense of surpassing requires an acc.,
and the phrase is without parallel. Perhaps sithon is a weak acc. sing.
of sīþ, which is often weak in ME.; the phrase might then mean,
contrary to experience. For ofer in that sense, comp. ‘ofer aþas
⁊ treowe’ = ‘contra fidem iurisiurandi,’ Bede, 148/10. William of Ypres
burnt Wherwell, plundered Abingdon, and tried to burn S. Albans.
Geoffrey de Mandeville sacked Ramsey in 1143; ‘nec ecclesiis nec
coemiteriis parcebant,’ Ann. de Wintonia, 52; Malmesbury, ii. 540.
forbaren, abstained from injuring; comp. ‘That the pore is thus
i-piled, and the riche forborn,’ Pol. Songs, 337/312.
81. ouer, written
for ower, anywhere. OE. āhwær. Gif, &c.: comp.
‘Ubicunque alter alterum in itinere conspicebatur, totus protinus
contremiscere, meticulose visum effugere, vel prope in silva vel in
divortio
258
aliquo latere, usquequo, resumpto tandem spiritu, viam coeptam tutior
carperet, et audacior,’ Gesta, 41.
83. leredmen: see
4/20.
84.
oc—þarof, lit. but to them was nothing concerning that; it
concerned them not at all. Comp. 46/292; ‘ne beo ham nawt of’ =
let them be unconcerned, 70/167; ‘þe dead (d.) nis nout of, þauh
he ligge unburied’ = the dead does not mind, AR 352/5; ‘þe deade nis nan
more of scheome þen of men[s]ke,’ AR 352/29 (in both places Morton
wrongly takes nis as ne wis); ‘Wha summ itt iss þatt mann,
þatt niss | Nohht off to wurrþenn fullhtnedd,’ Orm 140/4074. Similarly
180/131; ‘lutel me is of ower luue, leasse of ower laððe,’ SJ 27/14.
With of comp. 44/260, 164/256.
86. xpist slep.
Said by the wicked, H. of Huntingdon, 277; by the good, W. of Newbury,
i. 45. See Norgate, i. 335 note, and comp. ‘Sed . . . unicum
mihi consilium superest, Deum hominem . . . exorare: qui velut
in navi dormiens, fidelium precibus excitandus est, ut procellam
componat naufragantis Ecclesiae,’ John of Salisbury, Metalogicus,
206.
89. suinc: ‘cum
maximo labore abbatiam tenuit, sed adiuvabant eum monachi sui, et tamen
invenit eis abbas, et hospitibus, quicquid necessarium fuit, et erat
caritas magna in domo illa,’ Hugo, 76.
91. carited:
d is written for ð: similar forms are ‘kariteþ,’ ‘cariteþ,’ Orm
3000, 3008; ‘kariteð,’ VV 19/34, &c.; ‘Natiuiteð,’ Chron. E 1116;
‘plenteð,’ GE 3709. This ð represents the final t (sometimes d)
of the corresponding French words in the older texts, which had a voiced
[ð] or a voiceless [þ] sound according to the beginning of the following
word. This final t disappeared from Central French in the
eleventh century; it lingers on in Anglo-Norman texts of the twelfth:
see Behrens, Beiträge, 175, 6. The word may mean alms, but
caritas had the technical meaning of commemoration feasts,
‘epulae solennes et extraordinariae’ ‘caritativae comestiones,’ Ducange,
at the anniversaries of benefactors, &c., ‘gaudies.’
þoþwethere, nevertheless: ‘et in omnibus tribulationibus hiis
operatus est in ecclesia,’ Hugo, 76. sette þarto, assigned for
that purpose; ‘ad ecclesiam faciendam, villam Pilesgatam & omnes
decimas & omnes offerendas . . . constituit,’ Hugo,
78.
92. Rentes are
incomings generally, not rent. goded, endowed, i.e. with the
aforesaid lands, tithes, and offerings. Comp. 72/190 for another
meaning. læt it refen, had it covered (with lead). Thorpe
translates ‘had it provided with vestments.’
94. The fire took place
on August 4, 1116. The convent entered the church (Martin built the
choir only and the transepts were added by his
259
successor) on June 29th, 1140, according to the text and Hugo, but the
Chronicon Petroburgense and John the Abbot say 1143.
95. fram,
by.
Comp. ‘wearð Romeburg getimbred from twam gebroðrum,’ Orosius, 64/21;
‘Her swealt Herodus from him selfum ofsticod,’ AS. Chron. A 3; ‘I
sothlike set am for-þi | King fro him,’ Surtees Psalter, ii. 6
(= ‘constitutus sum rex ab eo’).
96. The termination of
priuilegies is due to direct borrowing of the technical term from
L. privilegium. The two documents are printed in Hugo, 78, 82,
and the former also in Dugdale, Monasticon, i. 390. They are dated A.D. 1146: Eugenius was elected in 1145. The
former protects the lands, property, and rights of the monastery in
general, and these are given in detail: the latter recounts and confirms
that part of the properties which was specially allocated for the
expenses of the sacrist (ciricweard) (‘terras, quae ad sacristiam
pertinent,. . . vel decimas, vel servitia plurimorum, &
domus,’ Hugo, 82). of, for, relating to.
97. lien to,
appertain to: a phrase of the charters. B-T. quotes, ‘mid eallon ðá[m]
þingon ðe ðǽr
fyrmest tólæg,’ Kemble, vi. 190; ‘ǽlc ðára landa ðe . . . læg
intó Cristes cyrcean,’ id. iv. 232. gif, &c., if he might
have lived longer, he meant to do the same for the office of
store-keeper; ‘similiter & redditus cellerarii & camerarii
affluenter augere & Romae confirmare, si posset vivere,
cogitaverat,’ Hugo, 87. The camerarius had to keep the stores of
clothes and bedding for the monastery, the thesaurarius was an
officer in charge of the sacred vessels and the plate under the
direction of the sacrist. Martin did assign two manors for the provision
of clothes, but he did not live long enough to get the protection of a
privilegium for the appropriation. Hordere is a word of
wide application; in Wright, Vocabularies, 330/18, it glosses
cellerarius; here it is the reilþein (vestiarius) of the
Chronicle, 1131. For the purpose of these special appropriations see
Plummer’s note, ii. 311.
98. He recovered
property of the Abbey in the shape of lands which powerful men possessed
by force. In Domesday the Abbey has holdings at Cotingeham (Cottingham,
Bridges, ii. 208), Ascetone (Easton-Mauduit, id. 163), Erdiburne
(Irthlingborough, id. 235), Stanwige (Stanwick, id. 195), and Eldewincle
(Aldwincle, id. 208), all in Northamptonshire. They are all in one group
in the first privilegium, duly protected under threat of
excommunication. Malduit (Maledoctus; Hugo says Maledictus) was
constable of the king’s castle of Rockingham and warden of the Forest.
Rogingham is Roegingahám in a charter dated 811, Kemble, i. 243.
Hugo has Rogingeham 43, Rochingham 88, Rokingham 89. Hugh de Waterville,
lord of Adington Parva and Thorp Waterville, was probably
260
kin of the succeeding abbot, 11/202. He paid to Peterborough sixty
shillings per annum for Aldwincle (‘LX solidos de Aldewincle reddendos
annuatim,’ Hugo, 88). Dele stop after sol in text.
102, 3. ‘Conventum
quoque de viginti monachis augmentavit,’ Hugo, 88, 89. winiærd.
For vine-growing in England see Plummer, Bedae Opera, ii. 5, and Anglia,
Beiblatt, xvii. 208. The weorkes were domestic buildings,
‘cameram abbatis & aulam ad familiam aedificavit.’ wende,
‘Forum mutavit,’ Hugo, 88. He changed the site of the town and
afterwards of the market, it is supposed, from the east to the west of
the monastery.
106. Stephnes
kinges: see 15/87 note.
107. iudeus is
pl. of iudeu, Orm’s Judeow, Judew, OF. Judeu. English
forms Judeas pl. a., Judea pl. g., occur in the early part
of MS. E. bohton. In Thomas of Monmouth’s Life of S. William of
Norwich, ed. Jessop and James, the mother of the boy is said to have
been persuaded, by a gift of three shillings, into letting him go away
with the supposed cook of the Archdeacon of Norwich, to be a helper in
his kitchen, p. 17.
108. pining:
see 7/54. ð, with which; see 46/292.
109.
langfridæi: see 85/101. The date in the Life is Wednesday before
Easter, March 22nd, 1144, but the chroniclers differ as to the year
(Plummer, ii. 311). A miraculous light in the sky led to the discovery
of the body. The charge of ritual murder at large has been investigated
by Dr. Strack in Das Blut im Glauben und Aberglauben der Menschheit,
München, 1900.
111. The body was
first buried in the wood where it was found, then about a month after in
the monks’ cemetery, and after six years it was translated to the
chapter-house, probably the occasion referred to in the text. It was
afterwards moved twice at least.
114. David crossed the
Tweed in April, 1138. The battle of the Standard was fought at Cowton
Moor on August 22nd.
116. Albamar:
‘Willelmus de Magna Villa, comes de Alba Mara apud Gisortum,’ Ricardus
Divisiensis, 389; William of Albemarle (Aumale), recently created Earl
of York. þe, to whom; see 46/292.
117. euorwic:
OE. Eoforwic; see Zachrisson, 63. Other English captains were
Walter Espec, Walter of Ghent, Ilbert de Lacy, and Robert Bruce. The
English were greatly inferior in numbers to the invaders.
120. Robert landed
with the empress at Arundel in September, 1139. Leaving her at Arundel
he rode across the south of England to Bristol with a few followers;
‘ediscensque [Stephanus] a veris exploratoribus comitem cum suis evasum
Bristoam sub nocturno silentio tetendisse . . . ipse ad
capiendum comitem totus intendit,’ Gesta, 55.
261
122. wart it
war: comp. 48/330, 203/204; it = of it, may be regarded as an
acc. of reference, comp. 192/518, 200/116.
124. March 20th,
1140.
125. William of
Corbeil died in 1136; Theobald was elected Dec. 24th, 1138, and
consecrated, Jan. 8th, 1139.
126. the bec:
the monastery of Le Bec-Hellouin; the village and commune of to-day have
the same name. It is stated that the article appears where bec
means a beak or wedge of land at the junction of two streams, but not
where it is the Scandinavian loan-word meaning stream. The rule does not
hold here, for the monastery was built ‘in vallem ad rivum, qui Beccus
dicitur,’ Robert de Torigni, 27.
128. The king gave
Ranulf des Gernons all that he asked for, save the earldom of Carlisle,
which was held by Henry of Scotland. William de Roumare (de Rollonis
mara: o for ou is Anglo-Norman) was his elder
half-brother. The king appears to have made him Earl of Lincoln about
this time. The brothers got into Lincoln Castle by a trick, and Stephen
at the appeal of the men of Lincoln besieged them there. The battle was
fought on Feb. 2nd, 1141.
135. Comp. ‘plurimis
autem antequam manus consererent, ut comes Mellonensis et Willelmus ille
de Ypra, proh pudor! fugitantibus,’ Gesta, 70; ‘Capto itaque rege, tota
Anglia concussa obstupuit,’ id. 71.
137. þer efter
com. She had been in England more than four months. The news of
Stephen’s capture reached her at Gloucester, and her brother joined her
there with his royal captive on Feb. 9th. The interview with Bishop
Henry (9/140) took place before Winchester on March 2nd. The empress was
elected queen, with an interim title of ‘domina,’ on a second visit to
Winchester on April 8th at the Great Council summoned by the bishop
(Round, 70). At this meeting was pronounced the excommunication of l.
143. The empress reached London some time in June and fled from it on
the 24th. She reached Winchester on July 31st, and laid siege to the
bishop’s stronghold, but was herself besieged by Stephen’s queen (l.
145), and fled on the 14th of September, when Robert of Gloucester was
taken.
139. Angou: the
scribe has made a better attempt in Angæu 10/167, 176. His predecessor
wrote Angeow at 1111 E and eleven times after (ge =
Fr. j).
150. minstre.
She was at Ludgershall, Devizes and Gloucester in her flight. The last
is, no doubt, meant.
151. The negotiators
were Stephen’s wife and Mabel, Countess of Gloucester.
262
152. Early in 1142,
when Stephen was on his way to York, he was met at Stamford by Ranulf
and William de Roumare. There the king and the earl bound themselves by
oath to mutual fidelity (Round, 159). But the barons compelled the king
to proceed against him at Northampton in 1146. He was seized and only
regained his freedom at the price of surrendering his castles. He gave
up Lincoln at any rate. On his release he attacked Lincoln and Coventry.
The Gesta (p. 124) calls the ‘wicci ræd’ of the barons ‘sanum
consilium.’
154. treuthes
fæston, made solemn declaration of fidelity: comp. ‘To the kyng
Edward hii fasten huere fay,’ Pol. Songs, 214/9; ‘treowðe staðeluæste,’
L 9819.
155. hamtun,
Northampton: p in the modern spelling is parasitic.
157. to ð
forewarde, on condition: comp. ‘Al Denemark i wile you yeue, | To
þat forward þu late me liue,’ Havelok, 485, 6. This rare use of
to has probably developed from the notion of associated with.
159. dide . . .
sculde: ‘did worse here than he should,’ Thorpe. For hær
sculde, read ær dide: comp. her, 11/190.
163. Oxford Castle was
surrendered to Matilda in the summer of 1141, and Stephen’s men entered
the city, Sept. 26th, 1142. Matilda escaped a few days before Christmas
1142; she left England early in 1147.
164. sægen, if
a noun, OE. sægen, means report; it is a verb at 8/106, and may
be here.
165. mid rapes,
a detail peculiar to the Chronicle.
167. By 1144 Geoffrey
of Anjou was completely master of Normandy. The Angevin house was not
popular there. here thankes, with their goodwill, willingly:
thankes is an adverbial genitive, here, poss. adj. Comp.
116/155, 153/70: with gen. noun, ‘warschipes vnþonkes,’ 118/42; with
gen. of possessive pron. ‘þines þonkes,’ OEH i. 17/35; ‘hares unþances,’
14/56: absolutely, ‘sume þances sume unþances,’ AS. Chron. MS. C 1066:
uninflected, ‘unþonc hise teð,’ HM 47/26, comp. ‘þat him wes mucheles
unðonc,’ L 22370; ‘mid his gode þonke,’ 34/69.
170. suster,
Constance, sister of Louis VI of France. The betrothal took place in
1140 when Eustace was about ten years old. The attempt to secure
Normandy took place in 1151. Just before his death, Aug. 18th, 1153,
Eustace ravaged East Anglia and tried to extort money from Bury St.
Edmunds.
174. Canteberi:
see 1/14.
176. rixan:
Stephen sought in vain to have Eustace crowned in 1152. Geoffrey of
Anjou died Sept. 7th, 1151; Matilda of Boulogne, May 3rd, 1152. Louis
VII was divorced from Eleanor of Aquitaine, March 18th,
263
1152; she married Henry of Anjou at Whitsuntide. She sent for Henry, and
he hastened to Poitiers where the marriage took place; ‘ad nuptias ducis
quas concupierat convolavit,’ Ann. Monast. iv. 28.
180. Henry landed in
England Jan. 6th, 1153. He captured Malmesbury, demolished Stephen’s
tower at Wallingford, took Stamford and Nottingham. By Nov. 6th he had
come to terms with Stephen at Wallingford.
184. ‘Rex Stephanus
ipsum ducem . . . adoptavit in filium,’ Gervase, 1375; ‘Ducem siquidem
Normannorum rex in filium arrogavit,’ R. de Diceto, 527. sib ⁊
sæhte: comp. ‘betere weore sæhte; þene swulc vnisibbe,’ L
9844, and see 70/158.
188. lundene,
L. Lundonia: Lundone 656 E, but generally with -en.
190. Comp. ‘Annis enim
iam plurimis fere nudo regis nomine insignis, tunc recipere visus est
huius rem nominis, et quasi tunc primo regnare coepit,’ W. of Newburgh,
91. æuert, ever as yet: comp. 218/135, 221/248, with her
(ǣr), ever at any time previously.
194.
fauresfeld, Faversham, where Stephen and his queen founded a
Clugniac abbey in 1147, is meant: in the charters Febresham, Feferesham,
Ferresham. Lambard, Perambulation, 270, says it is called in Saxon
Fafresfeld, a statement probably founded on this place. The mistake was
probably due to confusion with the place now called Fairfield, a manor
once belonging to Christ Church, Canterbury, which Hasted (iii. 486)
says was anciently called Feyrsfelde.
196. Comp. 6/22.
198. sunnen
dæi, December 19th. Martin died Jan. 2nd.
201. innen
dæis: Thorpe translates ‘within a day’; that is the sense required:
comp. ‘Eodem vero die, quo [Martinus] obiit, convenit omnis congregatio
in unum, ut quempiam ex suis eligerent . . . ne propter moram
aliquis extraneus per pecuniam se inmitteret,’ Hugo, 89. But the text
does not give that sense, and innen with a gen. is strange: read,
‘in an dæis wile,’
within the space of oneday.
202. William de
Waterville was one of Henry’s chaplains at the time of his appointment.
He belonged to a family founded by Ascelin (Azzelino) de Waterville, who
was a tenant of Peterborough in 1086 at Thorp Waterville in
Northamptonshire. Hugo, 8/100, was a descendant of his. William de
Waterville was deposed in 1175 for sheltering a relation who had
incurred the king’s displeasure (Hoveden, ii. 86).
204. sone: on
the day after his election.
206. bletcæd:
by Robert of Chesney, bishop of Lincoln. The new abbot made a tour of
the surrounding monasteries, which had many
264
interests in common with his own: Ramsey, Benedictine Abbey in
Huntingdonshire (Dugdale, ii. 546); Thorney, Benedictine Abbey in
Cambridgeshire (D. ii. 593); Spalding, Benedictine Priory in
Lincolnshire (D. iii. 206). The gap before Spallding may be filled by
Bourn, that after it by Sulby baresworth. Sulby Priory, to the
south-west of Peterborough, is said to have been founded about 1155; it
was connected with the Waterville family and had extensive possessions
in Baresworth; possibly the abbot’s visit was connected with its
inauguration. The last gap may have held Croyland. In the last two lines
the italics indicate letters in the MS. which are very faint and
doubtful. Ramesæie corresponds to L. Rameseia, Fr. Rameseie, in
contemporary documents: Torney is mostly Torny in Domesday;
sometimes in L. Torneia.
Phonology: ... þat (9), at (5), -masse (3)
(5) -masse
æ, wæs (9), þæt (once)
æ misprinted as bold instead of italic
æ in bæron 63, 66
œ
... eo, umlaut of i
i misprinted as italic instead of bold
ā + w gives
au
“au” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
For w ... þumbes 56 (þūma) has
inorganic b
inorganic m
In wurtscipe 93 &c., wart 122, t
has displaced þ
“wart 122” added by author
Most of the adjective inflections ... onne
63
“onne” misprinted as bold
Strong verbs .. I c. warth, uuard, ward,
wærd, wart
“wart” added by author
pt. pl. usually ends in -en
“-en” misprinted as italic
V. helden, heolden, hengen: iafen 44, bræcon
62
braecon
Weak verbs ... gæde 58 is pt. s.
subj.
final . invisible
Noteworthy among the Anomala are myhtes 2
pt. s.; muhten pt. pl.; cunnen 1 pr. pl.; durste
pt. s.
final . missing in first “pt. s.”, invisible in second
Dialect: ... representation by
a of ǣ2 before r
æ2
9. ... exceptions being Octabus
sc͞i
superfluous comma after “sc͞i” deleted by author
20. þe mihte: comp. 8/81.
Author’s Corrigenda: Dr. Bradley’s restoration in M. L.
Review, xii. 73, þa þestreden sona þas landes, appears to me certain.
95. fram, by.
“by” printed in bold
97. ... B-T. quotes, ‘mid eallon ðá[m]
þingon ðe ðǽr fyrmest tólæg,’
ðær
201. ... ‘in an dæis wile,’ within the space
of one day.
corrected by author from “hwile”
Manuscript: Harleian Charter 111 B. 49, British Museum. The
upper half contains a version in Latin, excepting the passage ‘sacha
. . . frimþa,’ which is in English; the names of six witnesses
are appended. On the lower half is the present text; on the back, ‘carta
reḡ. H. ii de sacha & socne.’ The document is in a French record
hand, and the writer was evidently little versed in the insular script.
He uses both þ and th, ƿ and w.
Facsimile: Keller, plate xiii.
Editions: Hickes, G., Linguarum Vett. Septentrionalium
Thesaurus, i. p. xvi; Dugdale, W., Monasticon, i. 111; Birch, W. de
Gray, Transactions of the Royal Society of Literature, New Series, xi.
312; Stratmann, F. H., Anglia, vii. 220; Earle, J., A Handbook to
the Land Charters, 346 (with the Latin); Kluge, F., Mittelenglisches
Lesebuch, 5.
Phonology: The language is not contemporary, for the
drafter, who was not the scribe, used as a model a charter
(H2) in the same terms, granted to William of Corbeil (see
6/28) and the monks of Christ Church by Henry the First in 1123 A.D., a copy of which exists in Campbell
Charter, xxi. 6, B.M., reproduced in Facsimiles of Royal and other
Charters in the British Museum, i. no. 6, and printed in Lye’s
Dictionary, ii. appendix. H2 differs from our text in its
dialect, which is mainly Southern, with some Kentish forms, in greater
regularity of grammar, in details of names and relationships, but in
little else. It was derived from a charter (H1) granted to S.
Anselm and Christ Church by Henry the First, c. 1107 A.D., extant in Campbell Charter, xxix. 5, and
Cotton Charter, vii. 1, printed in the Journal of the British
Archaeological Association,
265
xxix. 242, also imperfectly in Hickes and in Dugdale, i. 109, 111. It
also shows traces of its Kentish origin. But it was ultimately based on
the Charter (E) granted by Edward the Confessor to Archbishop Stigand,
c. 1052 A.D., Campbell Charter,
xxi. 5, reproduced in Facsimiles of Ancient Charters in the British
Museum, part iv, no. 38, and printed in Transactions of the Royal
Society of Literature, i., New Series; and the chain extended back to
the first extant example of the formula, the charter (C) of Cnut to
Æthelnoth, A.D. 1020, preserved by a
copy in a Canterbury book, the MacDurnan Gospels (now at Lambeth), and
printed in Earle, 232.
There is another copy of the present document, but fragmentary and
decayed, in the muniment room of Canterbury Cathedral.
H1, H2, and the Harley Charter (H3)
here printed, have been accepted by Dölle in his book, Zur Sprache
Londons vor Chaucer (Morsbach’s Studien, xxxii), as specimens of the
English of the London Chancellery. As the editors of the Facsimiles of
Royal and other Charters point out, H1, H2 are in
a book hand, not that of an official court scribe; they are without
witnesses or place of execution. Their seals do not prove them to be the
original grant, for both H1 and its duplicate Cotton Charter,
vii. 1, have seals, and a note on the back of the latter appears to
indicate that it is one of four copies. The duplicate of H3
also has its seal, attached, like the others, in an unusual way to the
left side of the document, as if to show that both documents and seals
are replicas of the original. They are, in fact, copies, and the natural
assumption is that they were made at Canterbury to provide against risk
of loss or damage to the actual grant.
H3 is on a different footing: it is properly attested, its
place of origin is given, and its seal is attached in the usual way at
the foot. But it is not in a charter hand, and its language shows that
it was prepared by a Canterbury scribe to be placed before the king for
his acceptance.
It should be noted that the English words from saca to frimtha also
appear in the Latin version with the following variants: Sacha, Wude,
felde, tolnes, grithbreches, thiofes, flemene.
The charter is then a patchwork of old and new; its phonological
position may be defined by an attempt at a version in Late West-Saxon.
Ic Henric · þurh Godes gife Englalandes cyng · grēte ealle mīne
bisceopas ⁊ ealle mīne scīrgerēfan ⁊ ealle mīne þegnas frencisce ⁊
englisce · on þām scīrum þe Þeobald ærcebisceop ⁊ se hīrēd æt xpīstes
cyrican on Cantwarabyrig habbað land inne frēondlice · ⁊
ic cȳðe ēow þæt ic hæbbe heom geunnen ꝥ hi bēon ǣlc þāra landa wurðe þe
hi hæfdon in Ēadweardes
266
cynges dæge · ⁊ on Willhelmes cynges mīnes furðor ealdefæder · ⁊ on
Henrices cynges mīnes ealdefæder · ⁊ sace ⁊ sōcne · on strande ⁊ on
streame · on wudum ⁊ on feldum · tolles ⁊ tēames · griðbryces · ⁊
hāmsōcne · ⁊ fōrstealles · ⁊ infangeneþēofes · ⁊ flȳmena fyrmðe · ofer
heora āgene menn · binnan burgum ⁊ butan · swā ful ⁊ swā forð
swā mīne āgene wīcneras hit sēcan sceoldon · ⁊ ofer swā fela þegnas swā
ic heom tolǣten hæbbe · And ic nelle ꝥ ǣnig mann ǣnig þing þǣrof tēo ·
butan hī ⁊ heora wīcneras þām þe hi hit betǣcan willað · ne frencisce ne
englisce · for þām þingum þe ic hæbbe Crīste þās gerihta forgifen minre
sāwle to ēcere ālȳsednesse · ⁊ ic nelle geþafian ꝥ ǣnig mann þis ābrece
be mīnum fullan frēondscipe. God ēow gehealde.
It will be seen that the OE. phonetic position is largely maintained;
noteworthy divergences are: æ as e in hebbe, ercebisceop;
as a in habbe (occasionally in OE.), ealdefader; as ea
(= e) in eafdon, æ + g in deȝe. ænglelandes
(also in H1, H2) shows a survival of primitive
æ, characteristic of the south-east. en 12/6 for on
is due to loss of stress; Layamon 8059 has æn; e + g is
ei in þeinas. y is e in grithbreces of the Latin
text and H1, H2 (but grithbrices is OE.
griðbrice); i in Cantuarabirȝ. ǣ is e in
bitechan, enig, eni, echere, toleten, þer; ȳ, e in keþe.
ea before l + cons. is a in forstalles; frimtha is
descended from fiermð with metathesis of r: the others
have fermþe and H1 also feormþe, forms without umlaut:
giefu appears as ȝefu, but giefan, forgifan. heora
is heara (early Kentish hiara) beside heore; scolden answers to a
non-diphthonged OE. form. flīema gives flemene in the Latin text
(so E, H1, H2, the latter also flæmene) and
fleamene: alisendnesse is OE. ālīesednesse (but
once ālȝsendnesse),
the others have alysednesse.
ēo is e in frenscipan: io in thiofes of the Lat.
text, ia in thiafes; ā + w is au in
saule; ēo + w appears as geau (ȝeu, Poema Morale, Digby
MS.) with ȝ borrowed from the nom., helped, no doubt, by the
general tendency exemplified in gearfoþe, ungeaþe of the MK. gospels.
w is written u in Cantuarabirȝ; an inorganic n
is inserted in alisendnesse; f is u in geþauian,
scirereuan. The dentals are confused: þ for t, t
for þ, t for d, d for þ appear in
theames, theo, teobalt, hiret, habbad, ford; d is omitted in
frenscipan, as in stan, halen, &c., of the MK. gospels; č is
written ch in chyrchen, bitechan, echere, ich, grithbriches; the
scribe apparently uses ch for [k] in Sacha of the Latin text;
h is omitted in eafdon; cht for ht in gerichtan is
an attempt to indicate the guttural sound.
The inflections of OE. are largely preserved, but levelling of
a to e is shown in fele, fleamene, fullen, heore, lande
(pl. g.), þare, Wicneres, while
267
a is written for older e in frimtha, saca, wurþa, and
o for e in geunnon. OE. um is an in burgan,
feldan, minan, sciran, þingan, wudan; þām appears as þan. Weak
forms are gerichtan, frenscipan; ȝefu is nom. form for accusative.
Dialect: The levelling of y, ȳ, æ,
ǣ to e; ea as a, the old Kentish io,
ia in thiofes, thiafes, heara point to Kent. The absence of
v, z for f, s initial, the retention of
a in lande, strande, and of n final either mark an early
stage in the dialect, or show the conservative influence of the older
documents.
Introduction: King Henry the Second grants, or rather
confirms, to Theobald, Archbishop of Canterbury, and the monks of Christ
Church their lands and privileges of jurisdiction. The date is February,
1155 (Eyton, Itinerary of Henry II. 5) and the place York. For
alisendnessee 12/15, read alisendnesse.
1. gret . . . mine,
verb of the third person, pronoun of the first: so CE; it is formal, and
not a scribe’s error as Stratmann thinks; H1, H2
have grete. bissceopas, &c.: in Latin, ‘Episcopis ·
Comitibus · Baronibus · Justiciariis ·
Vicecomitibus · Ceterisque suis
fidelibus.’
3. þe . . . inne, in
which; see 1/3 note. E has þær
. . . inne.
4. Cantuarabirȝ; see
1/14.
5. ꝥ = þet.
ælc, each of them: the archbishop and the monks severally, as
well as jointly; so H1, H2; E omits.
6. kinges: see
15/87 note.
7. saca and the other
genitives are, like lande, dependent on wurþa. Each of these words has a
threefold aspect: (1) the simple meaning of the word itself; (2) the
right to adjudicate in connection with that; (3) the right to profit by
fee or fine arising out of such jurisdiction. Sacu and
sōcn are glossed, litis, contestatio and quaestio,
inquisitio respectively. Sōcn is the leading word and
sacu was added to round off the phrase; together they express a
single idea, inquisition into a disputed matter (sometimes the area of
jurisdiction); then the right to adjudicate privately within one’s own
jurisdiction on certain cases which arise within it, and the right in
consequence to appropriate the proceeds in fines, &c. Toll,
tax on merchandise, sometimes exemption from such, the right to collect
it, the profit arising therefrom. Sometimes merely the right to tallage
one’s villeins. Tēam, vouching to warranty, right to adjudicate
in cases which involved the production of a guarantor (getēama),
right to forfeitures, &c., arising out of such processes (see B-T.
s.v.). Griðbryce, breach of a special peace, that is, a
protection accorded specially to a person, place, or period of time by
the king, the right to try such cases and fine.
268
Hāmsōcn, in Domesday hāmfare (OE. hāmfaru), attack on a
man’s house, trial for the offence and fine. Fōrsteall, assault
on the king’s highway; in Norman law, ‘assultus excogitatus de veteri
odio’ (PM. ii. 453). Infangeneþēof, thief caught red-handed in a
privileged area, the right to judge and hang him. In = within,
adverb: fangene = fangenne, s. acc. of the
participle agreeing with þēof: as the phrase was almost always
acc. after a verb of granting, these formed a compound regarded
as the nom. as well, but a nom. by form is sometimes found
as acc., ‘infangenðeóf,’ Kemble, iv. 226. The dat. ‘mid
infangenumþeofe’ occurs, id. 227, but usually ‘mid infangeneðéf,’ id.
190; gen. ‘infangeneðeófes,’ id. 193. C, E, H1,
H2 all have both words inflected gen. as here: I have
not found the double inflection elsewhere. Ūtfangeneþēof was the
right to hang one’s own thief wherever caught, if he were found in
possession of the stolen property: it appears to have been rarely
granted. Flȳmena fyrmð, the harbouring or supporting of a
wrongdoer or fugitive from justice. (Liebermann, Die Gesetze der
Angelsachsen; Pollock and Maitland, History of English Law.)
10. binnan Burgan,
&c.: a phrase for everywhere. Comp. ‘on ǽlce styde, be lande and be
strande,’ Earle, 344/11; ‘be wætere and be lande,’ id. 344/21; ‘inne tíd
and út of tíd, binnen burh and búten burh, on stráte and of stráte,’ id.
340/21.
11. swa ful ⁊ swa
ford: ‘in tantum et tam pleniter,’ as fully and extensively as my
own officers are in duty bound to exact: comp. ‘swá wel and swá freolíce
swá ic hit meseolf betst habbe,’ Earle, 343/16.
12. habben: read
habbe as in H1, H2; C, E have hæbbe. For
toleten, granted, E, H1, H2 have to
gelæten. The Latin has ‘super tot theines; quot eis concessit
Rex Willelmus proauus meus,’ which is probably the correct version.
13. þeron theo:
‘þær on teo,’ C, E; ‘þær on tyo,’ H1; ‘þer on tyo,’
H2. The Latin ‘se intromittat,’ meddle (also in
H1, H2), is not an equivalent, but rather
‘subtrahere,’ ‘exigere,’ ‘ad se trahere’ of similar documents. The
meaning is, take any thing from these lands and rights: for þer
on, comp. ‘ne teó se hláford ná máre on his ǽhte butan his rihtan
heregeate,’ Schmid, Gesetze, 308. Fuller expressions are ‘ænig þæra
sócna him to hánda drægen,’ Kemble, iv. 222: ‘fram honde téo,’ id. 212,
196: ‘of handa átéo,’ id. 226. þe, to whom: see 46/292.
14. for þan þingan,
for the reason that, because: see the examples of the phrase in B-T., p.
1060. C has for þā; H1 for þam þingan; E, H2, as
in the text.
15. to echere
alisendnesse, for the eternal salvation of my soul;
269
comp. ‘to ecere alysednysse,’ Ælfric, Lives, 258/320, ii. 154/178.
Keller prints eche, treating the curl attached to the final e as
a mere flourish, but the scribe’s model, H2, had æcere: see
23/161.
16. bi, as
concerning, having regard to, i.e. on pain of losing. Comp. ‘unrihtwisan
deman þe heora domas awendað æfre be þam sceattum,’ Ælfric, Lives,
430/233; ‘bebead eallum his folce, be heora life, þæt hí sceoldon
feallan adune,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. ii. 18/23; ‘þat ælc mon bi his
liue; comen to him swiðe, | bi heore liue & bi heore
leme,’ L 19434.
The charter is then a patchwork ... land
inne frēondlice
printed as shown: expected form “frēondlīce”
binnan burgum ⁊ butan ... butan hī ⁊
heora
printed as shown: expected form “būtan”
... alisendnesse is OE. ālīesednesse
(but once ālȝsendnesse)
initial ā in both words corrected by author from “a”
ā + w is au in
saule
ā corrected by author from a
7. ... Ūtfangeneþēof was the right to
hang one’s own thief wherever caught
Utfangeneþēof
Manuscript: Cotton Vespasian A 22, British Museum. It is
composite; a second MS., 224 × 153 mm. in two columns, begins at f. 54
with the pieces printed in OEH i. 217-45. It is written in a small and
crabbed hand unlike that of a professed scribe. The use of the
contraction marks is unsystematic and the readings are sometimes
uncertain. The other articles bound up with this MS. before and after
are historical and largely connected with Rochester Monastery.
Editions: Morris, R., Old English Homilies, i, pp. 231-41
(with translation), and Specimens of Early English.
Literature: Vollhardt, W., Einfluss der lateinischen
geistlichen Litteratur auf einige kleinere Schöpfungen der englischen
Übergangsperiode, Leipzig, 1888; Lauchert, F., Englische Studien, xiii.
83; Heuser, W., Anglia, xvii. 82.
Phonology: a is a, fram 38, maniȝe 54, lange
83, sandon 30, but o in longe 155, sonden 161. æ wavers
between e (28 times), feder 42, hwet 17, stef creft 89, þes 72,
&c., wes 1, 94, 96, and a (16), fader 40, hwat 49, þas 43,
was 19, 27, water 46. e is regularly e, engel 41, menn 31,
but æ in ængles 166 (ængel), mæn 22, 78, næmmie 112, and
a in anglene 139, angles 146, man, pl. 23, 76. i is
i, for which y is written in cyldren 42, cyrce 108, scyft
117: it is e in ȝeðe (= iþe) 165, þeser 74, þeses 113, repen
169 (= ripon), swepen 13; u in swupen 132. o
is o, but a, an 4, &c. (= on), þann 120, þáleð 123
(comp. the dialectic taal, Dan. taale, EDD). u is
u, but o in come 7, icome 115, sonne 46, all associated
with m or n. y is regularly e, berie 7, ded
73, drench 46, euel 41, ferst 167, gelty 153, senne 91, 95, 151, but
i in þrimsettles 36, (dier)chin 45; y in cyme 87 (?
cime); o in formest 50, 72. mycel is represented by
mucele 129, 137, moche 90: king 1, drihte 52 have i, as
often.
ā is mostly a, fa 25, na 55, þa 106; but o in
anon 12, cofe 27, cofer 17, gefo 22, go 22, more 97, 120, non 38, soriȝe
104, to 147, þo 140. clone 15,
270
an isolated form, represents clāne. ǣ1 is
mostly e, arerde 80, clene 103, elc 112 (3), er 117, geð 157,
helendes 87 (4), þer 139 (4); the traditional æ appears in ælc
91, 152, ær 18, 99, æer 21, ærst 69, ærndraches 16, 69; but it is
a in halende 93, lat 124, stanene 81, þar 19 (7), unwraste 23;
ea in unwreaste 79, 100, 104, 130, and eo once in leorde
109 (lǣrde) between l and r. ǣ2 is
uniformly e, adredeð 147, letes 129. ē is regularly
e, but dieð 51 (= deð). ī is i;
written y in tyme 77: gescung 54 is apparently gītsung.
ō is o without exception. ū is u; but uncoðe
22. ȳ is normally e, ceðen 16, 70, 113, fer 46, 143, 155,
scred 42; but litl 160, leoðre 169.
ea before r + cons. is a in arme 51, barn 60,
middenard 39 (5), widerwardnesse 24; ea in bearn 50, 159,
ȝearceon 6, ȝearnede 27; æa, gæarced 156; æ in ærfeð 3,
and e in merchestowe 124. ea before l + cons. is
regularly a, alle 4 (21), manifald 79; but manifeald 46, 90. The
i-umlaut of ea is represented by weregede 131
(wiergod). eo before r + cons. is eo in
eorðe 36 (4), heorte 72, leorninchnihtes 106; e in sterren 47;
æ in ærlen 20. In the wur group, wur is written in
wurð 143, otherwise wr = wur, derewrlice 10, wrð 77, 123,
wrðeð 108, wrhmint 65, 93. The i-umlaut is represented by birne
154, abernð 143, sterfeð 163, werpð 45 (wierpð), werpeð 142,
?stiarne 13 (stierne). eo before l + cons. is seen
in self 61 (7), sielfe 48. eo, u-umlaut of e is
e in heuene 107, 163, hefenen 36, but heofene 171;
å-umlaut is seen in fele 83; eo, umlaut of i, is
e in clepeien 49, ȝeclepien 6, lefede 102, 155, lefie 155, seþe
51, 76, 170; eo in neowelnesse 36; i in silure 92
(silofr); u after w in cwuce 162, wude 47. Here
also belong tolie 44, teolian and hare 85, 172, hares 56 from
heora through heara, both with shifted accent. ea
after palatals is a in gat 13, 117; e in scel 135;
eo in sceol 147, ea in ȝesceafte 93, ia in ȝiaf 97;
scandlice 151 is sceandlice, before nasal, ȝescepe 56 is
gesceapen. ie after g is i in gife 86, ȝife
88, 109; ie in gief 98, ȝief 119, ȝiefe 11, forȝiet 60,
underȝeite 4; e in forȝeten 59, 61, bigeten 55; scieppend
gives sceappend 65, 93, sceppend 40, 41. The conj. gif is gief 12
(EWS. gief), ȝief 60, gif 63, ȝef 9. eo after g is
seen in iunglenges 107 (geongling); eo after sc in
sceolde 7, 25, 87, sceolden 12, 160; heom is ham 18, 55, heom 5;
eom is am 162, ham 63.
ēa is ea in bread 162 (4), lean 135, deade 115, deaþe
123 (4), abreað 83; a in admoded 104, brad 29 (4), ȝecas 81,
grate 6, hafed 51, hafedmen 108; e in eðelice 124; æ in
ære 166. niatt 45 represents nēat, ȝie 49, gēa. The
i-umlaut of ēa is represented by unhersamnesse 84.
ēo medial is eo in beoð 108, &c., ibeoð 70, beon 69,
bitweone 9, underþeod 6, 66, underþeoden 3, 17, leoem 45 written for
leome
271
(lēoma); e in betwenen 169, befel 3, 4, ȝede 95, fend 5 (8),
frend 5 (9), frenden 28, 157, lefe 96, prestes 111; ie in
bieð 54, 65, bienn 135, to bienne 43, diefles 95, dierchin 45, frienden
21, lief 59, underþiede 137; io in þiode 91. Final ēo is
i, hi 50 (4), ibi 135, isi 55 (4), si 50 (6), þri 99, 101, and ie, besie 14
(besēon). The i-umlaut of ēo is seen in dierewurð
20, istriened 96, þiestre 53, þiesternesse 14; but derewrþe 138,
derewrlice 10, fendes 133, aþestreð 144, þesternesse 27. īe gives
ie in giet 53, ȝeiet 56, ȝie 24, 26. ēo from ō
after sc is eo, ȝesceod 8, toȝesceodeð 117, ȝesceop 33,
39; but ȝescod 74, ȝescop 54.
a + g, h, is ag, lage 71, &c.; muȝe
49 has u by imitation of other pret. presents. æ +
g is ei, deie 126, 137, meide 139, meiden 141, meidenes
166, neiles 146, seið 158, seieð 153; eȝ in deȝe 108, isegd 27,
seȝð 163; eiȝ in seigd 34; e in sede 117, 119, seden
69, 160 (= sǣdon),
ȝesed 114, mede 94 (= mæden);
ai in mai 152, maie 148. The peculiar spellings dȝeie 68, dȝeies
52, dȝei 134 show the development of a y sound, but deȝie 7, 8,
116, maȝie 59, maȝi 34 appear to be for deiȝe, maiȝe, maiȝ. e +
g is ei, þeinen 21, rien 47, written for rein: þenið 142,
þeninge 46 go back to þēnian, þēnung: ongegn is
represented by aȝen 101, aȝenes 24. A y sound has developed in
ȝeie 43, 142 (ege); aȝeie 64 seems to have been influenced by
OWScand. agi. ig is preserved in niȝen 138; ih in
dihte 39, 41: exceptional is forðteh 42 (forðtihþ). o +
g is seen in abroden 134, 156, abruden 27; heretoche 80; u
+ g in ȝebugon 25; y + h in drihte 52. ā +
g, h give oge 59, ogen 60, oȝeð 64, aȝen 88, ah 43, fa 5.
ǣ1
+ h, echte 55, tehten 110: ō + h, brochte 101,
ibrocht 146, innoh 152: ū + h, þuhte 11.
ea + h, ht is ea in leahtrum 79, a
in wax 81; miht, niht have uniformly i. eo + ht is
i in cnihten 20: the i-umlaut is represented in isecgð
148, iseȝð 150 (= siehð), ȝesecðe 134, 156 (gesiehð).
ēa + g, h is ag, ah, hagefaderen 140,
hahes 171, þah 112, þahhweðer 60. ēo + h is e in
wex 168; ih in rihtwisnesse 40, richtwise 147, 148, brictnesse
145, with ct for ht: lichte 50, 53; loht 45 is
lēoht with shifted accent: īe + h gives nixtan 73.
ā + w, daw 47, ȝesawen 165, sawe 44, sawle 42 &c., but
feawe 96, scewie 22: ahte 122, nahte 33, ahct 49 come from āht,
nāht. ǣ1 + w occurs in ȝecnowe 71:
ēa + w in unþeawes 132: ēo + w in ableow 42,
bleowu 168, treowe 92, fierðe 105 (fēowerða), ȝeu 24, 113, ȝehw
119, ȝiu 117, ȝiure 52.
The vowels of the inflections are generally levelled to e, but
a few remain from the scribe’s original; inf. wunian 159; pr.
s. blissið 50, pr. pl. þenið 142; cwaciað 147; pt. pl.
arerdon 85; pl. dunan 37, lagan 70, sandon 30; s. d.
nixtan 73; pl. d. leahtrum 79; buton 38, 72, 95, bufon 149. Among
vowels of minor stress are noteworthy ie in laðienge 6
272
(laðung), ȝelaðieres 82 (*laðere); a for e,
þina 37; æ for e, anæ 6, ȝæarced 156; e for
æ, rigtleceden 86, 103; e for i, iunglenges 107;
e for o, hefenen 36, 107, sicernesse 128; i for
e, adiligde 79, 84; eo for ie, ȝearceon 6;
ei for i, clepeien 49. ableow 42 possibly represents
onblēow. e is lost in ærndraches 16 (4), witȝin 89, and
added in seneȝeden 153: seneȝden 154 is for senȝeden. The prefix
ge, once written ge, gelest 2, is largely retained, but it is
reduced to i in pp. ibroht, icome 115, idon, imaced,
isent, istriened; inf. ibite, isi; ibruce 25, ibeoð 70, isecgð
148, iseȝð 150, innoh 152, uniredlice 131, iwiss 37; noteworthy is
unitald 47.
w is lost in sa 54, se 86, alse 115; it represents wu
in the wur group, wrð 77, wrhmint 65, derewrlice 10 &c., and
similarly wlcne 145: u is written for it in uin 160, wu in
bleowu 168, hwu 99. l is lost in swice 75, wic 142: final
ll often becomes l, befel 3, bispel 31, ful 102. mm
is simplified in wiman 59. The loss of final n in inflections is
characteristic: it occurs also in bine 90 (binnan), bitweone 9,
bute 17, morȝe 119, to fore 138, to for 22, upe 132: n is
assimilated to m in næmmie 112, it is added in hesne 98, doubled
in bienn 135, sennenn 132, þann 120 &c. on is weakened to a
126 (an 153). bb is simplified to b in habe 161; it is
u in sweueð 53, perhaps influenced by Scand. svefja. For
f the scribe writes þ in sielþe 48, selþ 61, 149, which perhaps
represents an individual pronunciation. The voiced sound between vowels
is represented by f, not u. The added t in mistlice
is found in OE., that after n in berient, melstanent 170 is
local, as sarment, suddent, varmint in the SE. modern dialects: t
is doubled in fett 14; ts is s in milsi 59, c in
milce 102. In an 130 d is lost (and 145), as in hlafor 21: it is
written for þ in dierewurd 20, had 152, hafd 56, sede 170. For þ,
f is written in of 11, 15, 108, ft in oft 134, 136;
t in to 36 (?), 147 after ⁊ = ant: æt þǣre is eter 13,
117: it is lost after h in forðteh 42, and intrudes before
h in awiðhst 37. sc is [š] in biscopes 111, sceolde 7,
scandlice 151; ss is written for it in wasse 10, 123. c is
palatalized in cheðen 70 (ceðen 16), dierchin 45 (fiscynn 46),
ærndraches 16, machede 41 (macede 91). c is doubled in accenned
94. g is lost in witien 140 and final in almihti 32, ȝegen 156,
leornin (ch[n]ihtes) 106: it is ch in heretoche 80, c in
strencþe 97. The scribe generally uses ȝ for ġ: exceptions are
gelest 2, gife 86, gief 98, gif 63, bigeten 55, iunglenges 107. The
development of a y sound is seen in ȝeðe (= iþe),
ȝeie 43; ȝ in ȝeu 24, ȝiu 117, ȝehw 119 has been adopted from the nom.
ȝe. Initial h before a vowel is often omitted, abben 160,
afeð 150, alste 36, is 28 &c., us 167; before consonants, laford 12,
61, wa 4, wat 24 (hwet 17), wic 142, wile 82: it is added in her 160,
his 128 &c., hofne 170, hur 65, hure 44, hus 43, and hwe 69, which
helps to the understanding of ȝehw 119. For
273
ht, cht is written in echte 55, ibrocht 146, lichte 50,
richtwise 147: ahct 49 is for acht (= āht); ct in
brictnesse 145.
Accidence: Strong decl. of m. and neut. nouns.
Sing. n. halende 93, helende 109, 163, sceppende 41 with
participial terminations (sceppend 40), endedeie 118, gate 117 have
added e: tacne 145 is tacen; drihte 52 has lost n.
Gen. -es. Dat. -e: exceptions, anginn 115, bearn 50, barn 60, fer 155,
gat 13 (gate 117), ȝegen 156, innoð 60, godspel 161 (godspelle 165),
hlaford 65, licht 53 (lichte 50), mancyn 99, sceappend 65 (sceappende
93), þing 53. Acc. as nom.: accennende 103, a participle
used as noun, fultume 47 with added e. Plur. n. m.
-es: deade 115 has adj. term., wude 47
(wuda); neut. wlcne 145. Dat. -en, as apostlen 139, bearnen 159, bredene 81, cnihten
20, aldren 20, esten 158, kingen 32, martiren 140, melstanent 170,
þeinen 21: exceptions, had 139 (= hādum), leahtrum 79,
meiden 141, neiles 146, write 85, and ME. repples 13. The accent on
hlafordé 32 may be a contraction mark. Acc. m. -es: neut. folc 68, niatt 45, þing 33, 101, 109;
þrimsettles 36 has masc. form. Weak are anglene 139, pl. g.,
esten 159 pl. n., hefenen 36 s. g. comp. hefene 163.
Strong decl. of fem. nouns: blisse 125, eorðe 45, lare 90, mihte
38, þiode 91, underþiede 137 (treated as compound of þēod),
witnisse 149 have added e in the nom. sing.: ȝefered 138
has lost en; its dat. is ȝeferede 20. The other cases
sing. and pl. which occur end in e, as merche (stowe) 124, rode
145, s. g.; echte 55 (possibly pl.), gife 86, 88,
109, s. d.; hesne 98, laðienge 6, lage 80,
s. a.; senne 80, 91, 151, pl. d.; ahte 122, pl.
a. Exceptions are wrldes 77, a masc. form, berient 170
(= byrgenne), ȝescung 54, gief 98 (possibly for gife), hand
37, nicht 53, s. d.; wrhmint 65 (wrhminte 93),
s. a.; ceðen 16, 70, 113, underþeoden 17, pl. d.;
hand 14, pl. a. underþeod, 6 is adj. used as noun. Weak forms are
dunan 37, pl. a., lagan 70, pl. n., sennenn 132, pl.
a., underþeoden, pl. n. 3.
Weak declension: Sing. nom. halege 126, mone 47, sonne 46,
tyme 77, witiȝe 35: d. ære 166, heorte 72, heretoche 80, time 84,
witie 57, uuantruce 122, acc. deme 148, lichame 41, 126: leoem 45
is probably for leome. Plur. nom. ȝeferen 15, sterren 47, 144;
dat. swepen 13, swupen 132, witȝin 89, witien 140; acc.
witiȝe 85, ȝefo 22. ærndraces 69, pl. n., 16, pl. a. have
adopted a strong inflection: nixtan 73, s. d. is adj. used
as noun.
Minor declensions: burh 166, berie 7, s. d.; fader 40, 44,
feder 42, s. n., feder 48, s. d., hagefaderen 140,
pl. d.; fett 14, pl. a.; frienden 21, 28, 157, pl.
d.; mannes 72, 118, s. g.; man 76, s. d.,
41,
s. a.; menn 31, hafedmen 108, man 23, 76, pl. n.;
mannen 153, pl. d., 159, pl. g.; mæn 22, mænn 78, pl.
a.
274
Adjectives: Remnants of the strong decl. linger in ecer 128,
s. d. f., soðe 65, grate 6, s. a. f.;
and perhaps hage(faderen) 140 (= hēagum); of the weak decl.
in fulle 127, gode 121, s. n. m., lefe 96,
s. n. f., mucele 137, s. d. m., 129,
s. d. f., richtwise 148, soriȝe 104,
s. a. m., unwreaste 104, s. a. neut. hahes
171 is a strong form for weak; haliȝe 102 a strong fem. qualifying lif,
neut. The pl. inflection in all cases is -e, so ȝeredie 131, stanene 81. Longer words are often
uninflected, as manifald 79, 90, dierewurd 20 (derewrþe 138), wrldlic
55; also ful 54, gelty 153, hali 122, 140. Adjectives used as nouns are
senfulle 147, s. n.; fa 25, fo 156, latst 8, 69, nixtan 73,
s. d.; innoh 152, s. a.; richtwise 147, pl.
n.
Pronouns: Noteworthy
are hwe 69, ȝie 24, 26 (ȝe 116); ȝeu 24, 113, ȝiu 117, 160, ȝehw 119.
The pronoun of the third person is, Sing. n. he, m. hi 50,
51, 59, 60, f.; hit, neut.; d. him, m.;
a. hine 10 &c., him 14, m. hit, n. Plur.
n. hi, i in combinations icome 17, ibeoð 70, mihti 55; d.
heom 5, ham 18, 55, 147; a. m. hi 117. From *seo f.
are his 81 s. a. f. (= is) and his 117, pl.
a. m. (= is), es in letes 129, pl. a. n., for
which forms see Anglia, Beiblatt vii. 331, xi. 302. The dat. s.
pl. with self uninflected occurs as definitive adj. 61, 81, 149;
s. and pl. with selfe as reflexive, 55, 91, 151, 152; us
sielfe 48. Possessives are mine 64, mi 63, s. n. m.,
mine 25, 156, s. d. m., mire 24 (with rice
neut.) 26, 154, mine in other cases; þina 37,
s. d. f.; ure, hure, ur, hur 65, with ures 87, 106,
s. g. m.; is, his, hire; ȝiure 52, ȝeur 153; hare 85,
172, hares 56, s. g. m. his 21, 29, pl. d. is
used as noun, his men. The def. article is, Sing. n. m. se,
once seo 66; f. si, with neut. tacne 145, but rode is
fem., gate 117; neut. þat 143: g. m. þes, with
wrldes 77, ses 87, by analogy from se; neut. þes:
d. m. þa, þe, (to) ðe 22; f. þare 93, with
neut. gate 129, þar 19, þer 139, (i)þer 123, with m. 141,
with neut. 13, 117; neut. þam, þan 118, 158, þe 50, 145,
(i)þe 161, ȝeðe 165, þa 110, probably for þan: a. m.
þann 120; f. þa 54 &c., neut. þat 168. Pl.
n. m. þa, þe, (⁊) to 147; d. m. þa, þo:
a. m. þe 85. Used pronominally si 83,
s. n. f.; þat 97, s. n. neut.; þa 26,
pl. n. m.; þan 141, pl. d. m. The compound
demonstrative is, Sing. n. m. þes; f. þes;
neut. þis: d. m. þese 48; f. þisser, þesser,
þeser; neut. þese 118, 163: a. f. þas 80;
neut. þis. Pl. n. þes, þas: g. þeses: d.
þesen: a. þes. Exceptional is þas 43, s. n. neut.
(OE. occasional þæs). The relative is þe 26, 32, 97; wam 48, 96,
s. d.; introducing dep. questions, wa 4, 66, hwa 67:
interrogatives, hwat, hwet, wat 24, wic 142: indefinites are
n. m. an 1; d. m. ane 68, neut. ane 164,
ene 7, an 53; a. m. ænne 7, f. anæ 6, neut. a
57; n. m. f. ælc, elc; g. m. elces 118;
a. m. elce 116; swice, pl. n. m.; nahte 33,
s. d. n. Sum 17, s. n. has oblique cases in
e 56, 82, but sum 92, pl.: fele 83, maniȝe 54, 109 are
plurals: oðre (once oðere) is constant: eall is sing. n.
all, al; d. f. alle 66,
275
neut. 4, 24 (rice is regarded as fem.); a. f.
alle 96, neut. all, al 47. The plural is alle; but all 15, al
141.
The infinitive of verbs ends mostly in e, fandie 130:
noteworthy are besie 14, isi 55: ȝief 119 has lost e before him.
wunian 159 is a survival; others in n are ȝearceon 6, ȝeclepien
6, clepeien 49, don 88, finden 173, forȝeten 59, abben 160. Dat.
inf. with inflection, bienne 43, donne 152; without inflection
abiden 11, bigeten 55, don 51, fulforðie 98, ȝelaðie 17, 78, isi 137,
sawe 44, tolie 44. Pres. s. 1. forȝete 61, lefie 155, nell(ic) 60; 2.
awiðhst 37, belocest 37, halst 36; 3. blisseð 52 and 8 others, but
contracted forms predominate, abernð 143, belimpð 128, cumþ 114, 121,
129, ett 163, fett 42, fet 171, ȝemet 133, ȝestrenð 112 (gestrengeþ),
isecgð 148, iseȝð 150 (siehð), lat 124 (lǣdeþ), sit 138
and 9 others. Exceptional are blissið 50, had 152 (hæfð), scred
42 (scrȳt), scyft 117, forðteh 42 (tyhð). Subjunctive
pr. s. forȝiet[e] 60, habbe 74, letes 129 (lete + es), milsi 59,
underfo 126. Pres. pl. 1. habbeþ 48, siggeð 114, wene (we) 49; 3.
adredeð 147, aþestreð 144 &c.; but cwaciað 147, þenið 142 (Archiv
lxxxix, 160-6). Subj. pr. pl. næmmie 112, scewie 22. Imp.
pl. understandeð 31, 99, witeð 155, wite (ȝe) 125. Past of Strong
Verbs: Sing. I a. cweð 21, et 28, ȝiaf 97; I b. com 19, nam 5; I
c. dranc 28, ȝelamp 1; II. astah 162, wratẹ 81 (wrāt); III.
abreað 83, ȝecas 81; IV. ȝesceop 33; V. ableow 42, bleowu 168, befel 3, wex 168. Pl.
I a. cweðe 18, 1. pl.; I b. come 9; I c. sturfe 28; II. repen
169; III. ȝebugon 25. Subjunctives are I b. come 12, 20; V.
ȝewold[e] 55. Pp. I b. icome 115; I c. abruden 27, abroden 134,
156; II. begripe 95; III. belocen 16; IV. ȝescepe 56, understande 116;
V. beswapen 151, ȝesawen 165, ȝewasse, uniwasse 123. Past of Weak
Verbs ends in -de, -ede, arerde 80, clensede 103 &c.: diht 41, gelest
2, send 78, sett 72 have dropped final e. Pl. -den; once arerdon 85: sede 117, 119, lefede 155,
acolede 90, ȝearnede 27 have lost n. The pp. ends in -ed, -d, -t; once acende 101, beside accenned 94:
unwemmede 94, weregede 131 are inflected. Minor groups: wat 54, pr.
s.; ah 43, pr. s., oȝeð 64 (āgon), 1 pr. pl.;
scel 135, sceol 147, pr. s., scule 26 &c., pr. pl.,
once sculen 161, sceolde 87, pt. s., sceolde 7, sceolden 12, 160,
pt. pl.; mai 152, pr. s., but maȝi 34, maie 148, maȝie 59,
pr. s. are subjunctive in form; muȝe (we) 49, 1 pr. pl.,
mihtí (mihte hi) 55, mihten 86, pt. pl.; am 162, ham 63, 1 pr.
s., his 33 &c., is 36, pr. s., beoð 70, 108, 146, bieð
54, 65, pr. pl., beon 69, bienn 135, pr. pl. subj., was
19, wes 1 &c., pt. s., were 99 &c., wer 69, 75, pt.
pl., were 5, 10 &c., pt. s. subj., 8, 15, 16 &c.,
pt. pl. subj., ibi 135 (*gebion), pp.; don 72, 73,
pr. s. subj. but plural in form, ded[ė] 73, pt. s.; to gað
145, pr. pl., go 22, 1 pr. pl. subj.
Accents are used extensively, but on no consistent principle, so láge
79,
276
lage 80; arerde 80, arérdon 85; áȝenes 34, aȝénes 24. They are mostly
placed over long vowels, but they are used to indicate separate
pronunciation of the vowels in méé 158, bethléem 167, besíé 14.
Similarly they show that a vowel is not to be slurred in belocést 37,
clénséde 103, macéde 91, ?Æér 21; that i is to have its full
vowel value (not y) in ȝeclepíen 6, ȝelaðíe 17, halíe 85, 107,
halíȝe 140, maníȝe 54, 109, witíe 57, 62, witíge 85; and that final
e is to be pronounced in forté 137, mihté 38. Sometimes the
accent has been exchanged with a contraction mark, as hlafordé 32,
acénde 101. It is only a diacritic, answering to the printed dot, in
íunglenges 107, ímaced 164, þenínge 46 &c., and over y
written for i in scýft 117, cýme 87, týme 77. In diphthongs it
marks the stressed element, séo 66, unterþéod 6, líef 59, níatt 45; in
leóem 45 it shows shifted accent (as in loht 45), so feáwe 96, ?bleówu
168, ?leórde 109: sónne 46, féce 7 are hard to understand. In unwēmmed
139, the contraction mark has been kept, although m has been
added; hīne 133 is curious.
Dialect: There is a considerable survival of older spellings
from the West-Saxon original. The scribe’s language is South-Eastern
strongly affected by Kentish, a mixed dialect such as might be current
on the south-eastern border of Kent, or used by a southern man, not of
Kentish extraction, but resident in the county, possibly at
Rochester.
Introduction: This piece, like its predecessor in the MS.,
which is a transcription of Ælfric’s De Initio Creaturae, is, at least
in part, an adaptation of an older, probably pre-Conquest homily, as is
shown by the occurrence of archaic inflections and constructions (comp.
to 8, hungre 28, hatrede 24, &c.; the extensive use of the subj.
mood), and by its OE. vocabulary (þrimsettles 36, hagefaderen 140
&c.) almost free from any foreign element. Vollhardt suggested as
its source the 46th chapter of the Liber de S. Anselmi Similitudinibus,
a collection of parables and sayings of S. Anselm recorded by his
biographer Eadmer, probably after the death of his master in 1109 A.D. This is printed in Anselmi Opera, ed.
Gerberon, App. 161; Migne, P. L. clix., 625 and Vollhardt, 25. That
the two versions are related cannot be doubted, but a consideration of
dates compels the conclusion that they have a common source, or that the
Latin is not S. Anselm’s.
The parable and its application is in the Latin brief and direct, in
marked contrast to the vivacity, fullness of detail, and diffuseness
(comp. 3. 19, 136) of the English. The latter has also expanded the
application of the parable by much extraneous matter: i. The Creation
Theme, 31-66; ii. The Five Ages of the World; iii. The Doomsday Theme,
136-156; iv. The Living Bread, 160-173, all of which is wanting in the
Latin.
277
For filii 58 read filio, and for descendit 162, descendi.
There is no title in the MS.: Rex Suos Judicans is from Anselm’s
title.
2. gelest, extended;
probably the earliest example of the word in this sense. OE.
gelǣstan, to accomplish, follow, last. With wide ⁊ side,
spacious, extensive, comp. ‘Ðu leof cyningc leod-scipas ðine wide and
side þu hætst,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 496/145; ‘⁊ ta wass Romess kinedom | Full
wid ⁊ sid onn eorþe,’ Orm 9173.
3. ærfeðtelle,
difficult to number; comp. ‘earueðhealde,’ 48/311; ‘Earfoðfynde,’ Ælf.
Lives, i. 492/82; ‘arueðwinne,’ OEH ii. 49/14. OE. earfoðe,
ēaðe, unēaðe are usually followed by the dat. of
the infinitive, ‘earfoðe is ænegum men to witanne,’ Cura Past. 51/5, to
which corresponds, ‘Hit is arfeð to understonden,’ OEH ii. 205/14; but
they are also associated with a kind of verbal noun having a dat.
termination in e, in imitation of the Latin supine in u,
as earfoðlǣre, ēaþlǣre, unēaþlǣce, and the two words come to be treated
as a compound adjective. For the acc. inf. comp. ‘Ac þe ben swo
fele ꝥ hie ben arfeð tellen,’ OEH ii. 201/30.
4. ꝥ—befell, lit.
that it occurred to him in purpose, that he formed a resolution: comp.
‘Ich wilnie a mine þonke; to walden al Rome,’ L 25091;
‘þat him wes on þonke,’ id. 13258.
5. nam him to rede,
lit. took to himself for counsel, adopted the plan: comp. 110/298; ‘nam
him to ræde,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 64/230; ‘let him to ræde,’ id. 506/319;
‘hwæt him to ræde þuhte,’ id. 244/113; ‘him to ræde fand,’ BH 201/25.
See Minot vi, 68 note. For omission of subject after ꝥ, see 6/18 note.
7. berie was meant to
supersede curt, but the scribe forgot to put dots under the
latter. He uses berie regularly afterwards. With ꝥ comp. ‘& swa he
nom enne dai; þat come heore drihtlice folc,’ L 2550.
8. be þe latst, at the
latest; so 14/69. to, at: comp. 14/68; ‘to þan dæie heo comen,’ L
13187.
9. mistlice, variant of
mislice (Bülbring § 535). It means, diversely, of different sorts,
friends and foes. But note fastlice, 16/114.
10. derewrlice, so as
to confer honour on him.
11. formemete, first
meat, breakfast, the ‘morȝemete’ of 16/125; ‘mixtum cibi,’ Ans. With
to lang, comp. 4/38.
12. none, after
formemete is probably for nonemete, midday meal, dinner: though
to might mean at, as at l. 8. See 206/323.
13. stiarne swepen:
‘strong whips,’ Morris: ‘stiff (strong) whips,’ Specimens: comp. 16/132.
But the adj. is rarely applied to a thing: perhaps stearce or smerte
would suit better.
14. besie, look to,
provide for, handle: comp. underfangeð 16/131;
278
‘Euele thai gonnen him bisen,’ Seuyn Sages, 507 (said of a whipping);
bisen, 202/195 is similar, look after.
15. abide,
inf. depends on he sceolde understood from sceolden 12.
clone, without exception, entirely: comp. ‘Ne dude hit noht þe
king ane; ah duden we alle clæne,’ L 8825; ‘mare ich habbe
ane; þane þa oðere al clæne,’ id. 13059, 13264.
17. hwet bute icome,
lit. What but they came? i.e. What did they but come? they came of
course. Comp. ‘nis þer bute þonken God.’ AR 382/26 with ‘Hwæt magon we
secgean buton ꝥ hi scotedon swiðe,’ AS. Chron. E 1083. Similar in effect
but exclamatory is ‘Hwæt þá se casere cwæð him tó andsware,’ Ælf. Lives,
i. 46/358; OEH i. 229/26.
18. bi ham, with
reference to them, in their case: comp. ‘gif þu witan wille hwæt be
Criste gedón wæs on Iudea lande,’ BH 177/1.
23. wente he hin,
‘then turned he,’ Morris, as though for hine. But hin is rather
for in.
24. lacede: Morris
altered to makede, but the text means, of what did you feel the
want?
25. ȝewinne, with the
rare meaning of contend; usually, to conquer. It takes wið in
OE., but comp. ‘wunnen aȝean,’ AR 238/17. ȝebugon, not ‘bow to,
be obedient to,’ Morris, but, turned aside from me and to my foes; L.
declinare: comp. ‘hi alle to rede gebuȝon,’ OEH i. 219/27. Swa
ibruce &c., As surely as I possess my kingdom: brūcan
usually takes a genitive; here with dative or accusative.
26. mete ibite: comp.
‘ne moste he nauere biten mete,’ L 15340; KH MS. L 1131 note.
28. þe: conj. =
þæt consecutive, with the result that: see 50/334 note. sturfe hungre: contrast 7/75: the
construction, like that of the dat. ‘hatrede ⁊ widerwardnesse’
24, is OE., ‘menn . . . lætað cwelan hungre Cristes ðearfan,’
Cura Past. 326/5. Morris translates nam hit him, betook himself: for the
correction in the text comp. 17/157, 213/539 note.
30. sandon, courses:
comp. 207/349; ‘þas beorn þa sunde; from kuchene to þan
kinge,’ L 24601. For the meaning of vii. comp. ‘Id enim frequens
& usitatum est in sacris Litteris, ut septenarius numerus
interpretetur dona illa, quae perfecta sunt, & quae desursum sunt,’
Gilbert of Hoyland in S. Bernardi Opera, ii. col. 120.
31-39. A parallel passage is
‘He is ealra cyninga Cyning, and ealra hlaforda Hlaford. He hylt mid his
mihte heofonas and eorðan, and ealle gesceafta butan geswince, and he
besceawað þa niwelnyssa þe under þyssere eorðan sind. He awecð ealle
duna mid anre handa, and ne mæg nan þing his willan wiðstandan,’ Ælf.,
Hom. Cath. i. 8: comp. OEH i. 219,
279
1-3 for a modernization of the first half to geswince. Our writer
was acquainted with the De Initio Creaturae, but he has translated ‘Qui
celorum,’ l. 35, independently. The ultimate source is the antiphons,
&c., at vespers in October and November. ‘Benedictus dominus qui
creavit celum et terram,’ York Breviary i. 597; ‘Domine rex omnipotens
in ditione tua cuncta sunt posita: et non est qui possit resistere
voluntati tue,’ id. 599; ‘Qui celorum contines thronos et abyssos
intueris, domine rex regum, montes ponderas, terram palmo concludis,’
id. 610.
34. wiðstande has
double construction (1) with aȝenes, (2) with
him: for the former comp. ‘Ic wiðstande ongen eow,’ ‘Ponam faciem
meam contra vos,’ Levit. xxvi. 17; for the latter the quotation from
Ælfric in the preceding note. him seigd: this use of the dative
pronoun, mostly in the third person, with intransitive verbs to
reinforce the subject, is seen in ‘warschipe hire easkeð,’ 119/75;
‘Affrican hire feader wundrede him swiðe,’ 141/62; ‘ȝe schulen
. . . sinken . . . ow,’ 146/111; ‘He is him ripe,’
159/167; 197/16; ‘ꝥ word him herde Androgeus,’ L 8525; ‘þer him cumeþ
iudas,’ OEM 42/174, 38/31; ‘men sullen . . . hem þar bidden,’
OEH ii. 23/21; KH 137 note: with acc. exceptionally, ‘And gon hyne to
abidde,’ OEM 41/156. See also 54/27, 81/90, 215/25.
35. witiȝe: the
antiphon is drawn from Isaiah xl. 12, Daniel iii. 55; see 14/57.
36. to: Morris
altered to tho without necessity, if it is the art. (see 17/47); but it
is probably a preposition, see 124/249
note.
37. · iii · prou.: Morris
read in pon. The reference is to the Third Book of the Proverbs (the
division into books, as in Bede’s commentary, preceded that into
chapters), and probably to ch. xxx. 4.
38. for þan þe is the
usual expression: for þat þe may be right.
42. sawle ableow:
comp. ‘God þa geworhte ænne mannan of láme, and him on ableow gast,’
Ælf. Hom. Cath. i, 12/28; ‘him on bleow gast’, OEH i. 221/17; ‘him
anbleow sawle,’ id. 223/9; ‘And his licham of erðe he nam, | And blew
ðor-in a liues blast,’ GE 200; ‘dû bliese im dînen geist în,’ MSD i.
81/7. fett &c.: comp. ‘he scryt me wel and fett,’ Wright’s
Vocabularies, i. 93/27.
43. þas: Morris read
[vel as].
44. his as a
correction is not inevitable, but it improves the rhetorical effect.
45. werpð, lit.
casts, i.e. sends forth: comp. 151/45. leoem ⁊ lif: comp. ‘to lif
⁊ to leomen,’ SK 1046.
48. of wam: from ‘In
ipso enim vivimus et movemur et sumus,’ Acts xvii. 28.
280
49. acht, acc.
used as adv., in any wise, at all: comp. ‘Ne mihte he neuere
finden mon; þe him oht wolde fulsten,’ L 6601.
moder: comp. ‘Sed et tu, Jesu, bone Domine, nonne et tu mater?
Annon es mater qui tanquam gallina congregat sub alas pullos suos?’
Anselmi Opera, 300.
50. chereð. The MS.
reading cheteð is explained, console, cheer, as possibly from OWScand.
kǣta, but this is rejected by Björkman, 260. There is no other instance
of the word. be = mid, l. 52, with.
52. All this doth your
lord.
53. Comp. ‘Est autem noctis
umbra mortalibus ad requiem corporis data, ne operis avida continuato
labore deficeret ac periret humanitas,’ Bedae Opera, ed. Giles, vi.
158.
55. ȝewold, for
omission of subject see 6/18 note.
56. hares unþances,
see 10/167 note.
57. word: Morris
reads worden, in wonderful words, which may be right: the same scribe
writes wordon once, wordum twice elsewhere. Numquid &c. The
Vulgate has ‘Numquid oblivisci potest mulier . . . ut non
misereatur filio?’ Isaiah xlix. 15.
59. la lief, O
beloved: comp. ‘Eala men þa leofoston,’ BH 165/32; ‘La leof ic bidde
eow,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 522/580; ‘Eala, leof hlaford’ = O mi domine,
Thorpe, Analecta, 19. his: OE. wīmman is masculine.
61. be — is, as
regards his being father.
62. In the Vulgate, ‘Si ergo
Pater ego sum ubi . . . et si Dominus ego sum’ &c., Malachi
i. 6.
63. manscipe, the
first occurrence of the word in the sense of homage. In OE. it means
humanity, courtesy.
64. G. m., Gode
men.
70. fif lagan: the
five laws correspond to five ages of the world. The division here is
unusual. The English writers mostly follow S. Augustine, who gives six,
so Bede, Alcuin, Ælfric, de vetere Testamento; but Wulfstan has seven,
Anselm and Herbert de Losinga eight. In another place Ælfric has five,
but different from those of our writer; see Hom. Cath. ii. 74.
71. ȝecnowe,
revealed.
74. ȝescod,
discretion, reason: see 122/176.
77. nas tid &c.
Comp. ‘he fram frymðe middaneardes oð his geendunge ne ablinð to
asendenne bydelas and láreowas to lǽrenne his folc,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. ii.
74/10, which is probably from ‘a mundi huius initio usque in finem ad
erudiendam plebem fidelium praedicatores congregare non destitit,’ S.
Greg. Hom. i. xix.
79. adiligde, was
destroyed: passive use, OE. ādīlegian, to destroy. unwreaste
leahtrum: see 118/30 note.
281
81. wrate &c.
Comp. ‘God awrát ða ealdan ǽ mid his fingre on ðam stǽnenum
weax-bredum,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. ii. 204/1. his, the law.
82. ȝelaðieres: comp.
‘sende hire his sondesmen biforen, þet weren þe patriarkes ⁊ þe
prophetes of the Olde Testament,’ AR 388/14.
83. fele; see
132/9.
84. wat, until: comp.
217/102: often with al, 215/26; ‘al hwat hie hine fordemden,’ VV
51/12 and frequently: wat is relative conj. substituted for þat,
with same meaning; see 72/179, 108/245: so þen exchanges with hwanne,
þer with hwær. þe, when, so þa 93.
85. arerdon, set up,
established: comp. ‘þæt is þonne ǽrest þæt ic wylle þæt man rihte laga
upp arǽre,’ Schmid, Gesetze, 270.
87. hlafordes . . .
helendes . . . cristes: this appositional construction is OE.; comp.
‘on drihtnes naman ures hælendes cristes,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 366/46: it is
fairly common in early ME.; comp. 8/106, 9/121, 9/137, 12/6, 7.
89. stef creft: OE.
stæf cræft, the art of letters, and hence, book learning.
90. Eft bine fece ⁊:
with this superfluous and connecting a phrase to the main sentence,
comp. ‘Him þa gyt sprecendum ⁊ soþlice þa beorhtwolcn hig oferscean,’ S.
Matt. xvii. 5. (= ‘Adhuc eo loquente, ecce nubes lucida obumbravit
eos.’) acolede, cooled, lost its vigour: comp. ‘⁊ forþam þe
unryhtwisnys rixað manegra lufu acolaþ,’ S. Matt. xxiv. 12
(= ‘refrigescet charitas multorum’). See 159/161.
91. hur ⁊ hur,
especially: a doubling for emphasis of OE. hūru, at least: comp.
149/11.
92. awente &c.:
‘Qui commutaverunt veritatem Dei in mendacium: et coluerunt et
servierunt creaturae potius quam Creatori,’ Romans i. 25.
95. begripe, seized,
in the grip of: comp. ‘seo sawul bið micele atelicor, gif heo mid
mislicum leahtrum begripen bið,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. i. 122/23. diefles
muðe: comp. 17/150. Mediaeval art gave a very literal rendering of
‘infernus . . . aperuit os suum absque ullo termino: et
descendent fortes eius, et populus eius, et sublimes, gloriosique eius
ad eum,’ Isaiah v. 14; see Wright, History of Caricature, 69-71.
97. sette, ordained,
established: comp. ‘þis synd þa . . . laga þe drihten gesette
betwyx him and Israhela folc,’ Levit. xxvi. 46.
99-104. Comp. ‘Triplici
morbo laborat genus humanum: principio, medio et fine, id est
nativitate, vita et morte. Nativitas immunda, vita perversa, mors
periculosa. Venit Christus, et contra triplicem hunc morbum attulit
triplex remedium. Natus est enim, vixit, mortuus est:
282
atque eius nativitas purgavit nostram, mors illius destruxit nostram, et
vita eius instruxit nostram,’ S. Bernardi Op. ii. 776. The Liber
Sententiarum, from which this passage comes, is placed by Mabillon among
the doubtful works. There can be little doubt that it is the source of
the English passage.
100. ful: comp.
29/33. grislic: inspiring terror and shrinking: see 120/94.
101. þer aȝen, to
remedy these blemishes of our nature: L. remedium.
102. efer þurh,
ever through, throughout, perpetually. milce, not the active
mercy, compassion, but meekness, patience.
103. acennende, the
being born, birth: present participle with the same meaning as the new
verbal noun acenneng, 100. The OE. noun is ācennednes or
ācennes.
104. admoded,
submissive: ‘Humiliavit semetipsum factus obediens usque ad mortem,’
Philippians ii. 8. The contrast is between man’s shrinking from death
and His voluntary acceptance of it.
105. ȝelice: read
grislice as suggested by W. H. Brown, Mod. Lang. Notes, vii.
226.
106. Omit þer, put
full stop after iunglenges, and understand from the previous
sentence were ærndraces.
110. þa may be dat.
sing of the article as at 14/57, but more probably it = þan, then.
folce to freme, for benefit to the folk; see 176/24 note. bedeles, heralds: comp. ‘Þa halgan
apostolas, þe ðam hælende folgodon, wæron þa getreowan þeowan ⁊ ða
fyrmestan bydelas, þe godes lare geond þas land toseowon,’ AS. Hom. ed.
Assmann, 56/141; ‘wearð se halga iohannes ætforan him asend swa swa
heofonlic bydel,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 342/94; Orm 19/633.
112. They are all one in
God’s purpose. For on comp. ‘Alle hie bieð forsakene on
godes awene muðe,’ VV 3/2.
114. fastlice, in
steady flow, or, corresponding to ‘þicce þringeð,’ 116, crowding. It
sometimes means vigorously, as in ‘hi fengon togadre fæstlice mid
wæpnum,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 98/489; sometimes firmly, ‘þing ðe godd
fastliche ðe forbett,’ VV 37/23. See 12/9.
117. his, them.
scyft, separates, is a mere synonym of ‘to ȝesceodeð.’ Perhaps
scryft = scrifeþ, fixes their destiny.
119. morȝe mete,
the ‘forme mete’ of 12/11.
120. more mete, the
‘fulle mete’ of 16/127; ‘none,’ 12/12; ‘vii sandon,’ 13/29.
121. witetlice of
the MS. may represent OE. witodlīce, assuredly.
122. uuantruce,
failure; as being compounded of wan, wanting, and
283
the noun of trucian, to fail, it should mean absence of failure.
hað: for omission of nom. see 6/18.
123. For the pain of dying
as penance, comp. ‘Quidam autem electi in fine suo purgantur a levibus
quibusdam peccatis,’ Isidore vi. 361; ‘Nullus tui Ordinis peribit, si
Ordinem amaverit; aut in morte purgabitur, aut in brevi post mortem,’
Arnulf of Boheries in S. Bern. Opera, ii. 802.
124. eðelice lette,
easy hindrance, i.e. slight delay. merchestowe: Morris suggests
‘merthestowe, a place of mirth,’ or alternatively translates the MS.
reading, place marked out, place of separation. The word is not found
elsewhere; it is probably a special coinage for the intermediate state,
the place of the soul waiting for the body, the place of the
‘morȝemete,’ the limited joy of which the soul is capable in its severed
state (‘requies ei, sed in anima sola, interim datur,’ Anselm, in
Eadmer, 161 col. 2 B); the banquet of perfect felicity, ‘se fulle
mete,’ follows when soul and body meet again at the resurrection, 17/157
(‘in anima simul & corpore laetabuntur,’ Ans.). Comp. March,
‘myddys be-twyn ij cuntreys,’ Prompt. Parv. ed. Mayhew, 282.
128. belimpð hit: a
superfluous nominative, as if, what is it that happens?
129. letes in
Specimens is resolved into lete + his, the latter being gen. of
hit, governed by fandie, and so like ‘ȝif we his abiriȝdon,’ OEH i.
223/22. But support is lacking for enclitic es = his: it seems better to
take letes as lete + es, pl. acc., them, or even as
s. a. f. used incorrectly as neuter.
131. anu is taken
by Morris as for anum, but neither his ‘at once,’ Specimens, nor
‘only,’ OEH, is satisfactory. Probably the original had anūge
(= ānunge) gerǣde, entirely, quite ready, very keen.
132. hade, a past
among the presents, is probably a mistake for habe subj. pres. of
indefinite comparison, Howsoever many vices he has on him, just so many
fiends he there encounters: fele has dropped out after swa 133.
135. In Specimens [habbeþ]
is inserted after hi, with the translation, ‘and they shall have
for their reward the home that long shall last.’ The text given means,
they shall be thrust from his sight and into their reward which must
last long for them. For hin = in, comp. 13/23, and for abroden
into, 13/27. But the original may have had, ⁊ higien him to hire
lēan þe lange sceal gelǣstan.
136. a þa mucele
deie: comp. ‘on þam miclan dæge,’ Christ 1049, and often; ‘in
iudicium magni diei,’ S. Jude, 6. See Deering, W., The Anglo-Saxon Poets
on the Judgment Day, 8.
138. niȝen anglene
had: ‘Novem esse distinctiones, vel ordines angelorum
284
sacrae scripturae testantur: id est, Angelos, Archangelos, Thronos,
Dominationes, Virtutes, Principatus, Potestates, Cherubim et Seraphim,’
Isidore, vi. 137.
141. þer midenarde . .
. werpeð abec. The article is s. d. fem., the noun
s. d. masc. The phrase might mean, with all those who for
his love turn backwards to the world, but not, ‘put aside the world,’
Morris. It seems to be without parallel: such expressions as,
‘projecerunt legem tuam post terga sua,’ ii Esdras ix. 26, suggest the
acc. þes midenard here.
142-146. The ultimate
source is Ephraem Syrus, ‘Quomodo sustinebimus, Fratres, quum videbimus
igneum fluvium . . . comburentem omnem terram et quae in ea
sunt opera? Tunc, dilecti, ab illo igne flumina deficient et fontes
evanescent, stellae cadent, sol extinguetur, luna abibit, coelum
plicabitur ut volumen, sicut scriptum est . . . Quomodo
sustinebimus tunc, Christo dilecti, quum videbimus terribilem thronum
praeparatum et signum crucis apparens, in quo affixus est Christus
voluntarie pro nobis,’ ed. Lamy, ii. 192. Comp. with the present passage
BH 91.
144. With aþestreð
comp. 123/230.
145. to gað, should
ordinarily mean, parts in sunder, but in view of plicabitur in the
quotation above (‘et complicabuntur sicut liber caeli,’ Isaiah xxxiv.
4), it may mean here, is rolled up. Comp. ‘& on þæm dæge heofon biþ
befealden swa swa boc,’ BH 91/25. si hali rode tacne usually
means, the sign of the cross, 130/65; BH 237/21; AR 106/9; here and OEH
i. 121/9 it is the cross itself as a sign. Comp. ‘et tunc parebit signum
Filii hominis in caelo,’ S. Matt. xxiv. 30, ‘and seo hea ród | Ryht
aræred rices to beacne,’ Christ 1063. See also Deering, 42.
147. cwaciað: comp.
34/94; ‘oðe dom of Domesdai, þer þe engles schulen cwakien,’ AR 116/19.
senfulle: comp. ‘þer þe crysmechild for sunnes sore schal drede,’
OEM 90/11. The passage bears considerable resemblance to ‘hinc erunt
accusantia peccata, inde terrens justitia: subtus patens horridum chaos
inferni, desuper iratus judex: intus urens conscientia, foris ardens
mundus. Justus vix salvabitur; peccator sic deprehensus in quam partem
se premet?’ S. Anselmi Op. 208.
148. bechece is
translated in Specimens, ‘gainsay’ and connected with cigan,
which is difficult both as to form and sense: probably it is written for
beceche, deceive. beswice, get the better of.
151. beswapen,
clothed: ‘et induit maledictionem sicut vestimentum,’ Ps. cviii. 18;
‘Qui oderunt te, induentur confusione,’ Job viii. 22.
152. an himselfe,
concerning himself: comp. ‘Eft ne mot nan mann . . . secgan on
hine sylfne,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 274/177.
285
153. ecenesse is
strangely said of man’s earthly existence. Perhaps recelesnesse.
158. esten,
dainties: comp. 50/359; metaphorically, it means delight, at 159.
Delicie &c.: Prov. viii. 31; sunt is not in the
Vulgate.
160. litl her, a
little time ago.
161. Ego &c.:
S. John vi. 51; in Vulgate, descendi.
162. astah: OE.
astīgan is a neutral word the direction of which is indicated by
an adverb. When alone, it is generally used of rising; but comp. ‘Ah
crist . . . asteh of heuene riche,’ OEH i. 17/25; ‘he (Christ)
asteh to þisse liue,’ id. 19/7.
164. alswa se, not,
‘as he also,’ Morris, but, just as, even as, 17/173: so alswa alse,
17/169; alse, 13/42, alswa, 17/170 = as.
165. ⁊ c.: ‘cadens
in terram mortuum fuerit, ipsum solum manet,’ S. John xii. 24. was
ȝesawen, at the Annunciation. The fanciful comparison is common in
mediaeval writers: comp. ‘Elegit autem sibi quasi granum tritici Deus
corpus de Spiritu sancto in utero virginali conceptum . . . in
cruce illa [grana] moluit, in resurrectione cribravit,’ Petri Cellensis
Sermones (Migne, P. L. ccii), 808.
167. com, sprang
up; a common use in mod. dialects. ꝥ cweð us of breade is
translated in Specimens, ‘which speaketh to us by bread.’ It means, of
course, that is called house of bread: comp. ‘Bethleem is gereht
“Hlaf-hús,” and on hire wæs Crist, se soða hlaf, acenned, þe be him
sylfum cwæð, “Ic eom se liflica hláf,”’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. i. 34/14; ‘In
coelis erat panis angelorum, set in bethleem factus est panis hominum.
Merito igitur locus iste domus dicebatur panis, unde angelorum et
hominum carnaliter fuerat oriundus panis,’ H. de Losinga, ii. 12; Orm
121/3528-35.
170. melstanent:
‘Pastor farinam moluit in cruce tanquam in molendino,’ P. Cellensis,
807. berient: the tomb as the oven is original. Comp: ‘Iste est
ille, qui seipsum coxit in clibano passionis,’ Bede, vii. 369 (Cologne
ed.); ‘Et sicut panis igne coquitur, ita Christus in camino passionis
assatur,’ Elucidarium Honorii Augustodun., 1129; Adam. Praemonstr. 178
(Migne, P. L. cxcviii); Petrus Blesensis, iv. 33.
173. Ego sum
&c.: S. John xv. 1.
Phonology: ... y in cyme 87 (?
cime)
cyme,
.... ǣ2 is uniformly
e
æ2
ē is regularly e, but dieð 51
(= deð)
text unchanged: error for “dēð”?
... Final ēo is i, hi 50 (4),
ibi 135, isi 55 (4), si 50 (6)
(4) si 50
... æ + g ... eiȝ in
seigd 34
seigð
e in sede 117, 119, seden 69, 160
(= sǣdon)
corrected by author from sædon
ǣ1 + h
æ1
Minor declensions: ... feder 48,
s. d.
d. s.
... man 76, s. d., 41, s.
a.
41.
The infinitive of verbs ... Pres. s.
1. forȝete 61
1:
ȝestrenð 112 (gestrengeþ)
ȝestrend
V. ableow 42, bleowu 168
V ableow
oȝeð 64 (āgon), 1 pr.
pl.
1. pr. pl.
muȝe (we) 49, 1 pr. pl.
1. pr. pl.
26. ... KH MS. L 1131 note.
Ms.
28. ... see 50/334 note.
final . missing
37. · iii · prou.
anomalous spacing unchanged
Manuscript: Jesus College, Oxford, E 29, formerly Arch. i.
29 (J). It consists of two distinct MSS. bound in one; the second begins
at f. 217 r. (new foliation) and was written not long after 1276 (Anglia
xxx, 222). Its contents are best described in the Owl and the
Nightingale, ed. J. E.
286
Wells, Boston, 1907, at pp. ix-xiii. Our piece is written continuously
as prose, each stanza forming a paragraph, but iv and v are in one
without l. 54, which is here supplied, while l. 43 is written at the end
of the preceding paragraph and similarly the lines beginning viii-xvii,
xix-xxiii. The scribe was evidently struggling with an original which he
could not always read; see footnote to l. 105.
Another MS. is B. 14. 39, Trinity College, Cambridge (T): see The
Western Manuscripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge, by
M. R. James, vol. i. p. 438. It gives a much longer text very
badly copied by a scribe little skilled in English.
A third copy in MS. Cotton Galba A. xix was destroyed in the fire at
Dean’s Yard in 1731. But Wanley had printed a specimen (W),
corresponding to ll. 1-21 of this edition, in his Catalogue (published
in 1705), p. 231; and Richard James (1592-1638) had copied, from a
transcript furnished to Thomas Allen (1542-1633), Fellow of Trinity
College, Oxford, by Sir Robert Bruce Cotton (1571-1631), in what is now
MS. James 6, Bodleian Library (RJ), p. 68, pieces corresponding to ll.
1-23; 27-49; 52, 53; 55-64; 78-85; 168, 9; 173, 4; 211-13; 204-206; 236,
7; 307, 8, and two fragments which correspond to the text in MS. T, ll.
516-32; 652, 3, but are not in MS. J. Allen’s MSS. passed into the
possession of Sir Kenelm Digby, who presented them to the Bodleian in
1638. But the transcript was not among them. It is a curious mistake to
think that it ever formed part of MS. Digby 4, which has been caused by
Langbaine’s calling the copy of the Poema Morale in that MS., Alfredi
Regis Parabolae. This is clear from MS. Rawlinson D 325, which consists
of Hearne’s notes to Spelman’s Life of Alfred; it contains the note
printed on p. 131 of the Life, which is immediately followed by a
cancelled extract from the Poema Morale in the Digby version. Allen’s
transcript has disappeared.
The Cotton MS. was again used by Sir John Spelman (1594-1643) for his
Life of Alfred. He says that ‘by the Courtesy of Sr Thomas [Cotton,
1594-1662] I am provided of a Copy of them.’ Apparently he was himself
the copyist, for he speaks of the MS. as ‘faulty and ill writ, in a
mungrel Hand (as well as Language).’ He gives what corresponds to ll.
1-64, and a paraphrase of six stanzas more. It is hard to say what
Spelman actually wrote, for his own MS., which was probably University
Coll. MS. 136. 8, has disappeared, and the three versions of it differ
considerably. They are (1) Hearne’s transcript (SH1) of
Spelman prepared for the printer, now MS. Rawlinson D 324 (p. 225); (2)
the Life of Alfred in English (SH2), published in 1709; (3)
the Latin translation
287
(SL) published in 1678. A fragment of the latter was copied in MS. Stowe 163,
B. M. ff. 101-135; of the English poem it has ll. 1-19. The
evidence which is to be got from the Spelman sources as to the text of
MS. Galba is suspect. S signifies their agreement.
Editions: Wright, T., in Reliquiae Antiquae, i. 170 (J,T):
Kemble, J. M., Salomon and Saturn. (T only). This book, without
title-page, is dated in pencil in my copy, 1845, 6. It seems a first
attempt for the following: Kemble, J. M., The Dialogue of Salomon
and Saturnus. Ælfric Society, London, 1848, p. 225. Morris, R., An Old
English Miscellany, 1872 (J; and T from Wright and Kemble), p. 53:
*Skeat, W. W., The Proverbs of Alfred, Oxford, 1907 (J,T);
*Borgström, E., The Proverbs of Alfred, Lund, 1908 (J,T).
Literature: Wülker, R., Ueber die neuangelsächsischen
Sprüche des Königs Ælfred. Paul-Braune, Beiträge, i. 240: Gropp, E., On
the Language of the Proverbs of Alfred, Halle, 1879: Zupitza, J.,
Anglia, iii. 570; Holthausen, F., Archiv, lxxxviii. 370-2 (emendations).
Ekwall, E., Anglia, Beiblatt, xxi. 76-8. Skeat, W. W., Transactions
of the Philological Society, 1895-8, p. 399. For Proverbs: Förster, M., in ES xxxi. 1-20: Kellner,
L., Alteng. Spruchweisheit, Wien, 1897: Kneuer, K., Die Sprichwörter
Hendyngs. Leipz. Dissert. 1901: Skeat, W. W., Early English
Proverbs, Oxford, 1910; Tobler, A., Li Proverbe au Vilain, Leipzig,
1895: Catonis Disticha, in Baehrens, Poetae Latini Minores, iii. 205-42:
Senecae Monita, ed. Woelfflin: Publilii Syri Sententiae, ed. Woelfflin,
Lipsiae, 1869: Alanus de Insulis, ed. C. de Visch, Antwerpiae, 1654:
Arnulf, Deliciae Cleri, Romanische Forschungen, ii. 211: Columbani
Monostichon, Poetae Lat. Aevi Carolini, i. 275: Fecunda Ratis, ed.
Voigt, Halle, 1889: Florilegium Gottingense, Rom. Forsch. iii. 281, 461:
Florilegium S. Omer, id. vi. 557: Florilegium Vindobonense, Müllenhoff
u. Scherer, Denkmäler, xxvii: Otloh, Beda, i. 1080: Proverbia Heinrici,
MSD: Proverbia Rustici, Rom. Forsch. iii. 633: Regimen Sanitatis
Salernitanum, ed. Croke, Oxford, 1830: Wipo, ed. Pertz., Hannoverae,
1853.
Phonology: Oral a is a; a before
nasals and lengthening groups, o, but can 231, manyes, 295,
fremannes, 299: me, indef. pron. < man is due to loss
of stress: þanne, þane, þan, hwanne are usual, but þenne 72, 91, hwenne
254. æ is mostly a, as always in after, at, fader, hwat,
war 16, but e in eþelyng 44, gedelyng 214, gled 209, glednesse
30, gres 81, heuedest 187, queþ 19, &c., þet 154 (once), þes 63
(once), wes 4 and always; Ealured 6 occurs beside Alured 12, &c.
e and e before lengthening groups is e, but ny 124
< ne: imulten 276 represents myltan. i is
i, often written y, mostly in conjunction with n,
but wule 91, 254, 286 (beside wile 154, wille
288
142), nule 69, after w, nele 254, OE. nele. o is
o, but on is weakened to a 112, 200; ðone is þane
247, 248, þene 114, 116, 198 (LWS. ðane, ðæne). œ
is represented in seorewe 151, 233, serewe 156. u is u,
but bycome 138, where o is associated with m. y is
u: munye 25 is OE. mynian; vordrye 227, OE.
fyrþrian, is a French spelling; king, kyng, dryhten with y
for i are exceptions as usual; steorne 207 is corrupt.
ā is o; a remains in bihat 245, mayþenes 130,
madmes 133, 276. ǣ1 is e: exceptions are vyches
276, euer uyches 54, which descend from ylc, agoþ 146, ouergoþ
143, without umlaut: nenne 296 is nænne. ǣ2 is
also e, but þar 4 &c., always. ē is e, but doþ
81. ī is i, often written y, but me 140
(mīn) is due to loss of stress. ō is o, but reowe
96 (rōwan), a French spelling. ū is u: for it
w is written in hw 11, 22, 42. ȳ is u in byhud 163,
cuþe 254, cuþeþ 170, lutel 215, 277, 312, luþre 257, but litel 281;
þȳ has i in forþi 304, e in þe 82.
ea before r + cons. is e in erewe 156, a
in arewe 152, þarf 108, 244; before length. groups, e in bern
311; its i-umlaut is seen in churreþ 53 (cierran), and,
before length. group, yeorde 328 (gierd): ea before
l + cons. is a, as al 105, &c.; before length. groups,
e in weldan 130 &c., awelde 320, o in cold 237, holde
42, 102, 280, 304, &c., vpholde 113; its i-umlaut is seen in
ealde 319, 330, elde 68, 71, 72 (ieldo), ildre 125
(ieldran). eo before r + cons. is eo in
heorte 163, 166, smeorte 164, but e in werk 15, werke 16; before
length. groups, eo in cheorl 58, eorl 4, eorþe 81, &c.,
yeorne 66, 69, leorne 170 &c., but furþ 113; its i-umlaut is
shown in durlyng 7, hurde 6, vrre 136. The wur group has
invariably u. eo before l + cons. is eo in
seolf 308 &c., but sulue 284 (sylfe). ea,
u-umlaut of a, is wanting in balewe 282, baleusyþes 189.
eo, å-umlaut of e, is shown in feole 2, 249, and
weole 78 (5), but fele 2, 132, 302 is without change; vale 300 is
feala with shifted accent. eo, u- and
å-umlaut of i, is seen in heonne 115, heore 11, seoluer
121, 134, but is wanting in huntseuenti 79; leofian appears only
as libben 135. ea after palatals is a in schal 35 (8),
gesc(e)apen is ischapen 92; ie after g is e
in foryeteþ 137, yeue 90: eo after g is o in yong
195, yonge 328, yongmon 87; youþe 105, youhþe 66, 69, 98 (geogoð)
show combination with the following g: eo after sc
is o in scolde 87 &c., scholden 11: heom is
heom 9.
ēa is normally
a, but reade 80, lyen (= lēan) 289; its i-umlaut is
e, foryemeþ 137, ilef 132, 248, nexte 265, iherest 251, but
u in ihure 10, ihurd 205. ēo is normally eo, but
e in forleseþ 137, fremannes 299, o in wolde 278, loþ 234,
the latter miswritten for leoþ, r. w. forteoþ; the rhyme
istreon 125 : lone (lān) is noteworthy: neode 141, 217, 265 is
LWS.
289
nēod arising beside nied by confusion with nēod,
desire. īe in scīene, gesīene gives schene 213, isene
75.
a + g is aw, but seye 152, seyþ 234, 246, sayþ,
305: æ + g is ay, but seyde 24, iseyd 236, ised
230: e + g is always ey: ayeyn 95 = ongegn:
o + g always ow: u + g gives mvwe 113
(LWS. muge), doweþes 118 (duguða).
ā + g is always ow: ā + h is
ah in ahte 79: ǣ1 + g occurs in feye
113; ǣ1 + h in ayhte 125, 171, 274, but eyhte
145: ī + h in lyeþ 109 (lihþ): ō + g
in inowe 133, plouh 61, brouhte 181: ū + g in buwe
201.
ea + h occurs in wexynde 112, 113, iauhteþ 171 (geeahtian), probably
a miswriting of iachteþ in the scribe’s exemplar (T has hachte for
æht, nocht, &c.): eo + h in bryht 211, rihtwis
34, mixe 276 (meox), vouh 129 is feoh; in case it
corresponds to fēo, dative; Skeat and Borgström read veoh.
ēa + h gives þeih 88 (9), þey 79. ā + w is
ow in mowe 53, 60, sowen 59, isowen 80, au in saule 23,
ou in nouht 35 &c. and ey in iseye 186
(gesāwe): ēa + w is ew in fewe 301, þewes
195, 312, vnþewes 262, eu in glev 256, vnþev 198, eaw in
gleaw 30: ēo + w is eow in greowe 81, reowe 330,
treowe 202, ew in rewe 71: the pron. ēow is ou 21,
eu 142, ēower ower 141, eure 20, 23.
The acute accent is used twenty-one times over long vowels, in ten
cases over e representing ǣ: séé 95, 132 is furnished with
two, as often in MS. O of Layamon, comp. 95/2. In v́uel 217 it serves to
distinguish the vowel.
The consonants show little divergence from OE. use. For w,
u is written in uexynde 112, for u, w in hw 22, 42:
wur is wr in wrþsipes 22, wrþie 36, 286, wrþe 124: iwrche
83 is OE. gewyrcan, wrt 112 is wyrt. OE. swa is
regularly so, but once swo 99, influenced by the initial sw of
the following word. l is lost in vyches 276, eueruyches 54 and
other pronominal words of similar formation: n is dropped in
euelyche 49, owe 111, wyndrunke 184; uppe prep. 132 occurs beside
vpen 123. f between vowels is commonly v, u, but hafst
133, oferhoweþ 323, wife 185 where it is probably voiced; initially it
is largely maintained, but it is v, u in urouer 37, velde 112,
vouh 129, forvare 147, 260, vere 148, vordrye 227, vayre 245, 6, avynde
291, vale 300, in all these cases before a vowel. d is t
in huntseuenti 79; schaltu 168 has t for þ after a dental:
þ is represented by d in vordrye 227; madmes 138 answers
to LWS. mādm: t is omitted in lest 316. c +
s is represented by x in arixlye 329. hw is
generally preserved, but wile 149: in initial combinations with other
consonants h is lost: swyhc 159 is written for swych, iscohte 303
for ischote. The prefix ge is regularly i: k is
often used for c; cw
290
is qu; č is ch, as chireche 57, cheorl 58, &c.
sc is generally sch, but scolde 87, wrþsipes 22: ġ
is regularly y.
In syllables of minor stress the vowels have mostly been levelled to
e, as in egleche, sadelbowe, sikerliche, vppen, &c. An
e, generally slurred in scansion, is inserted in clerek, euere,
seorewe, arewe, erewe, foleweþ, pouere.
Accidence: Nouns of the strong declension m.,
neut. have s. g. -es,
cristes 283, cunnes 276; d. -e,
bure 212, balewe 282, &c., but the termination is sometimes not
written before a vowel, god 104, word 16, or omitted by the scribe, lyf
28, lond 12, mod 224, þing 188, or an accusative form is used, cotlyf
174, fryþ 58, loþ 234, through confusion of the prepositional
constructions. The plural of masculines ends in -es, n. þeynes 1, d. wrenches 257,
a. acres 79: neuter nouns with masc. terminations are n.
wordes 24, a. sedes 59, þinges 21, wyttes 40, but the normal
þing, pl. a. 143; treowe 202, pl. n. represents
trēowu; þinge 250 is an isolated pl. a.; worde 300 is
probably pl. g., an OE. construction after vale; worde 301 is
pl. d.: englene pl. g. 6, &c. (Engla), iwriten
pl. a. 67 are weak forms. Of the strong feminines, ayhte 125,
blisse 31, 282, 310, lone 126 (read lon), neode 141, vnhelþe 73, youþe
105 have added e in the s. n., and worlde 278, wunne
279 in the s. a.: worldes 22, s. g. shows
confusion of declensions: the s. d. ends regularly in -e, except world 122 (see note):
s. a. in e. The general termination of the pl. is e,
n. eyhte 145, ayhte 274, leode 20 &c., wene 74; g.
quene 237 (cwēna), or s. g. (cwēne); d.
leode 264, honde 259; a. custe 170, saule 23, but d.
blissen 31, deden 47, spechen 249: tales 295, pl. d. medes 60,
pl. a. (mǣdwa) show confusion of declensions: doweþes 118
appears to be meant for s. g., but it answers to OE.
duguþa; perhaps doweþe is to be read. Loss of final n has
greatly simplified the weak declension, so s. d. heorte 163,
sadelbowe 153, weole 82, 103, ivere 144, vere 148, wille 35;
s. a. tunge 190, tyme 114, weole 91, 100, wille 185 &c.,
but wyllen 283: dwales 296 is a strong pl. a. The minor
declensions are represented by mon s. n. 17, monnes
s. g. 54, fremannes 299, mon s. d. 159, wymmon
s. a. 204, monne pl. g. 32, pl. d. 253, 269;
boke s. d. 39; fader s. n. 33, s. g.
212, moder s. d. 203; freond s. a. 83, 245,
pl. v. 25, pl. a. 267.
Remnants of the strong declension of adjectives are longes
s. g. neut. 109, reade s. d. n. 80
(rēadum), yonge 328 (geongum), godne
s. a. m. 45, vuelne 231, swikelne 252; wenliche
s. n. m. 68, godlyche 204 have e, contrary to OE.
usage, but vnlede s. n. m. 238, is OE. unlǣde.
Weak forms are wise s. n. m. 287, betere s. n.
neut. 325, 327, wysuste s. n. m. 17; for mildest
s. n. m. 32 mildeste should be read. OE. āna is
one 29, 41,
291
118, ān is o 79, 278. The participial āgen gives
s. n. neut. owe 149, d. f. owere 54,
a. m. owene 318, a. neut. owe 128. With exception of
the above, the adjective is not inflected in the singular. The plural in
all cases ends in e. Adjectives used as nouns are arewe
s. d. 152, erewe s. n. 156, fayre
s. d. 172, feye s. g. 113, frakele
s. a. 172, god[e] s. d. 225, god
s. a. 90, ifon pl. n. 129, ivo pl. d. 186,
ildre pl. g. 125, loþe s. a. 247, more
s. a. 162, pouere s. d., riche s. d.
268, s. a. 50, vuele s. d. 90.
The personal pronouns are ich, we, us, þu, þe, ye, ou 21, eu 142:
s. n. he m. 9, heo f. 169 &c.; d.
him m. 35, 71, 88, 330, n. 312, 316; a. hine
m. 36 &c., hyne 144 &c., hi f. 187, 192, 242, hit
n. 118, it 96; pl. n. hi, heo 76; d. heom 9;
a. hi 80, 170. Reflexives are him seolue 260, hymseolue 137;
definitives, heo seolf 308, himseolf 41, seoluen 38: possessives, mi, me
140, myne pl. 25, 26; þi s. n. m. 272, þin
s. n. f. 166, þire s. d. f. 163, þin
s. a. neut. 323, þi 168, in all other cases þine, þyne;
hire, hyre, once heore 11; vre; eure, ower 141. The definite article is
s. n. þe m. 4 &c., f. 141; þes
g. m. 63, þas 113; þan d. m. 55, 152, þare
f. 5, 217, þe 216 (read þare); þane a. m. 247, 248,
þene 114, 116, 198, þe f. 95 &c., þe n. 220, 234, þat
46, 56; pl. þe in all cases; for þan adv. 240. The
compound demonstrative is þis s. n. f. 63; d.
122: the relatives, þe, þat, once þet 154, hwat 181: interrogative, hwat
84: indefinites, oþre pl. d. 242; non n. 38, no 112, nones
g. 299, none d. 169, a. f. 280, non a. neut.
308, nenne pl. a. 296; eny s. d. neut. 225: nouht
n. 35, nouhte d. 275: me 245, 247: fewe pl. d. 301:
fele, feole 2, 249, vale 300: vyches s. g. neut. 276, echere
s. d. f. 161, eueruyches s. g. m. 54:
hwych s. a. neut. 52: swuch 53, swyhc 159: al s. n.
neut. 105, alle d. f. 29, 30, a. m. 185, al
a. f. 278, 279, a. neut. 89 &c., alre pl.
g. 62, 110, in other cases of the pl. alle; mid alle 128.
Two-thirds of the infinitives end in e, ie, ye, y, lokie 41, wrþie,
36, 286, wyssye 21, arixlye 329, leorny 69, weny 244; n is retained
mostly before vowels and at the end of lines and half-lines, but leten
and forleten occur six times against lete once. A dative infinitive with
inflection is to fone 55, others without inflection are leden 46, mowen
60, reowe 93, sowen 59, swynke 96, for to do 229, for to werie 56, for
to vordrye 227. Presents are s. 1. holde 304, munye 25; 2. hauest
151, hafst 133, lest 316 (lǣtest); 3. leorneþ 66, seyþ 234
&c., foþ 289, wurþ 209, iwinþ 100 (read iwinneþ), let 204, 329,
bihat 245: pl. 1. wurcheþ 283; 3. ibureþ 45, forteoþ 235:
subjunctive s. 3. fare 64, lykie 88, lyke 155, loke 64;
pl. 1. biþenche 284; 2. adrede 27, luuyen, lykyen 28:
imperative s. 2. seye 152, leorne 170, ilef 132, 248, ryd 153,
let 165, wurþ 184, but wrþe 124; pl. 2. lusteþ 140. Past of
Strong Verbs: s. 3. Ia. cweþ 19 &c.; Ic. bigon 9, pl.
Ia. sete 1;
292
subj. s. 2. Ia. iseye 186; 3. Ib. bycome 138; V. greowe 81, wolde
278. Participles present: I c. singinde 153; V. uexynde 112, 313; past:
I b. iboren 138, 328, vnbore 327; I c. forswunke 200, aswunde 76; II.
biswike 76, idryue 61; III. idrowe 105, iscohte 303; IV. ischapen 92; V.
isowen 80; VI. bitowe 106. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 2. heuedest
187; 3.
brouhte 181, hadde 80, luuede 15, seyde 24, wiste 181. Participles
present: lyuyinde 188, werende 316; past: ihurd 205, ilered 2, 39, iseyd
236, ised 230, iwreþþed 187, 222. Minor Groups: wot pr. s. 118,
156, not 114; ahte pt. s. subj. 79; on pr. s. 160, 162;
con pr. s. 154, 302, kunne pr. s. subj. 40, cunne 41;
schal pr. s. 35 &c., schulle 1 pr. pl. 127, schulen
276, schulle pr. pl. 49 &c., schule pr. s. subj. 42, 1
pr. pl. subj. 119, scolde pt. s. 87 &c., scholden
pt. pl. 11; myht 2 pr. s. 159, 263, may pr. s. 38
&c., mawe 1 pr. pl. 286, 2 pr. pl. 10, mvwe pr. s.
subj. 113, myhte pt. s. 199 &c., 2 pt. pl. 22;
mote pr. s. subj. 149; beon inf. 68, nys pr. s.
112, 125, biþ pr. s. 322, beoþ pr. pl. 74, 76, beo pr.
s. subj. 35 &c., pr. pl. subj. 202, wes pt. s. 4,
were pt. pl. 24, pt. s. subj. 200, 325, nere 82; wille 1
pr. s. 142, wile pr. s. 154, wule 91 &c., nele 254,
nule 69, wolde pt. s. 21, 2 pt. pl. 20, pt. s.
subj. 191; do inf. 197, for to do dat. inf. 229, deþ
pr. s. 288, 321, doþ 81 (read deþ); agoþ pr. s. 146,
ouergoþ 143, ago pr. s. subj. 145.
Noteworthy adverbs are frakele 246, ifurn 236 (gefyrn), lihte
198, muchele 162, vuele 171, 176, vayre 245, 246: oft is always
ofte.
Dialect: Southern, free from South-Eastern influence. The
wavering in the representation of a before nasals points to the
Middle South, but ihure 10, ihurd 205 are South-Western. But this
representation of īe, as well as lyen (= lēan), is found in
MS. e of the Poema Morale, which is generally taken as of the Middle
South. The forms vyches, eueruyches occur elsewhere in MS. J, and are
probably due to the scribe.
Metre: The system is that of Layamon and the Bestiary;
the Worcester Fragment B shows an earlier stage of its development. It
is a mixture of the national alliterative verse loosely constructed and
rhyming couplets. The latter are bound together by perfect, imperfect,
even inflectional rhymes, and assonances. The halves of the couplets as
they appear in MS. J are of varying lengths, two measures as 73, 216,
more frequently two and a half 7, 44 &c., three 51 &c., three
and a half 8 &c. Three-syllable measures are common, as, ‘hé wes þe
| wýsuste | mòn,’ 17, ‘his sé | des to sów | èn,’ 59, ‘his mé | des to
mów | èn’ 60. The alliterative combinations present every possible
variety, 2 + 2, as 16; the normal 2 + 1, as 67; 1 + 2, as 142; 1 + 1, as
23 and often. The couplet has sometimes the added ornament of
alliteration, as 46, 47.
293
Where a line has neither alliteration nor rhyme, it may be assumed that
the formless text is corrupt, as at 26, 68 &c.
There is then little to be gained by a metrical analysis of the poem
in its present condition. It had originally a quite definite and regular
structure, but this has been spoiled by copyists with little feeling for
the structure of the verse and possessed by a strong desire to renovate
the antique. It is highly probable that the last of them, the writer of
MS. J, had a large hand in this alteration, for the copy of the Poema
Morale in the same MS. has undergone a drastic revision which sets it
apart among the versions of that poem, and the version of the Owl and
Nightingale has suffered, though not to the same extent. On the other
hand MS. T was copied by a man who was incapable of remodelling it;
though a ruin, it often preserves in details the original.
The dilapidations wrought by the copyists may be classed as follow:
i. Archaic and uncommon words are rejected: for þeynes 1, read sweynes;
comp. L 28359, O 3297, 14953 for this word as meaning the immediate
dependants of the king; the line then divides after ‘sete’: l. 13, see
note: l. 24 for seyde þe, read wordede; comp. ‘þe king wordede þus,’ L
13052: l. 26 with the help of T may be restored, arme ⁊ edie leode · of
lifis wisdom: l. 38, see note: l. 56, adopting ‘here’ from T, read þat
land for to werie | wiþ hunger and wiþ here (the Danish marauding host
was forgotten): l. 62, for bihoue read biliue (bilif T, W): l. 68, for
beon read wurþen: l. 71, 330 for rewe read suwe, smart; comp. 72/199: l.
82, see note and comp. L 30903: l. 87, for howyen, read ȝeomeren, be
depressed: l. 88, 155, for lykie read wurþe: comp. ‘Ne scyle nán wís
monn gnornian to hwæm his wise weorþe,’ Boeth. 40, 3 (B-T): l. 111, see
note: l. 115, for turne read rume (rime T): l. 122, see note: l. 133,
for inowe read muche (moch T): l. 136, for Monymen read moni gume: l.
137, for him seolue read his saule, with T: l. 138, for bycome read
were, with T, restoring a couplet: l. 143 for þing, read weole (welþe
T): half a line is lost after lere: read, And ich eu lere wille · [leoue
freond myne] | wit and wisdom · þat alle weole ouergoþ.: ll. 202, 207,
see notes: l. 278 for mon read wiht: l. 280 for holde read lenge, as in
T. ii. Older forms and constructions are modernised: ll. 159, 160, see
note: l. 169 read þat heo þe bringe, making a couplet: l. 187 read
heuede: l. 216 read þare for þe: l. 305, read alle for al, comp. 185:
other instances are noted in Accidence. iii. Words are rearranged mostly
in a prose order, spoiling rhyme and rhythm: read l. 25, leoue freond
myne: l. 41 himseólf one lokie: l. 55 bihoueþ þan knyhte, for the
alliterating word in the first half of the line comes almost invariably
last, the rare exceptions being mostly verbs: for l. 56 see above: read
l. 80
294
and he isowen hadde: l. 118 hit one wot dryhten: l. 130, vre maþmes
welden | and vs byhinde leten: l. 142, lere wille: l. 156, if þu hauest
serewe | and hit wot þe erewe: l. 203, þe kat museþ: l. 211, wiþute is
bryht: ll. 232, 233, þe hire rede folẹweþ | to seorewe heo bringeþ: l.
245, þat he habbe freond: ll. 321, 322, þanne hit sone deþ | þat þe
unyqueme biþ. iv. Lines and parts of lines are transposed, most of these
as affecting the interpretation have been dealt with in the notes, see
40, 90, 144, 186, 247; read ll. 72, 73, þenne cumeþ vnhelþe | and ek
uniselþe: though the combination in the text is found elsewhere as
40/197, elde seems to be due to the preceding line; at l. 190 we should
perhaps read wymmon is tungwod · ⁊ haueþ wordes to wroþ. v. Padding is
freely used: l. 4 omit þe: l. 7 read On Engelonde king: l. 9 read gon
for bigon: omit l. 24, þe before king; l. 35, ne; l. 49, he; l. 66, his;
l. 69, þat; l. 98, þe mon, and read þe on youhþe swo swinkeþ | and
worldes weole her iwinneþ: l. 105, read on ȝouþe þat he haueþ idrowe:
omit l. 132, þu; l. 149, owe; l. 152, þu; l. 188, hit; l. 189, scholde,
forþ; l. 192, nowiht, and read ll. 191, 192 as an alliterative line:
omit l. 205, ne, he; l. 209, blyþe and; l. 210, þe mon: l. 219-23, with
the help of T we may restore, Ne ared þu nouht to swiþe | þe word of
þine wyue. | If heo be i wreþþed · myd worde oþer dede; l. 231, for þat
wymmon read heo; comp. T: l. 242 omit þe mon: l. 249, see note: l. 254,
omit þe before wule: l. 262 omit þe, see note: l. 275, for schulle
bicumen read bicumeþ: l. 280, for none read no: ll. 294, 296, omit þu:
l. 324 omit þe. vi. The rhymes may, in some cases, have been spoiled by
the substitution of alien dialectic forms; it is tempting to read ihere
10, iherd 205, but the u forms do not appear to belong to the
dialect of the scribe of J: at l. 102 helde, a patois form (Bülbring
§ 175 note), might be read: at l. 240 þon. The combinations brouhte
: myhte, 181, 182; ayhte : nouhte, 274, 275 are remarkable.
Many intractable lines remain, such as 284, where perhaps bet has
been lost at the end.
Elision and slurring are frequent; pronounce þeorl 4, lawẹlyche 47,
euẹlyche 49, euẹruyches, owẹre 54, &c.
Introduction: The ascription of the Proverbs to Alfred
rests on no firmer ground than an affectionate remembrance of the great
king as a sage and teacher of his people. The only part of the poem
which could with even artistic fitness be attributed to him is ll.
19-64, the rest is mostly the cautious wisdom of the common people,
varied by reflections in a higher strain on the favourite mediaeval
theme of the shortness and uncertainty of life. Up to l. 64 the poem is
connected; afterwards it is without apparent plan, though there is
occasionally a
295
slender thread of union between the stanzas. The editors indeed see a
new exordium and the beginning of a second section in stanza xiii, which
appears to me to be a weak imitation of stanza vii. Perhaps a structural
difference may be detected between the more general observations of the
first part and the advice to an individual which begins with stanza xiv.
Stanza xxi appears to have strayed from its natural place beside stanza
vii.
The version of MS. J is not necessarily the more primitive because it
is shorter than that of T. A poem of such loose structure readily lends
itself to selection on the part of the copyist; and the scribe of MS. J
was evidently a critic.
If the suggestions offered in the section on metre have any weight, a
considerable time and several copies must have intervened between the
original and the present form of the poem. The composition of that
original should, I think, be placed somewhere about 1180 A.D.
1. Seuorde: siforde
T; Sifforde W, RJ,
which is identified by Spelman 126 with ‘Shifford, six
miles west from Oxford.’ That it is ‘remote from the use of the southern
dialect’ does not prevent it from being the place where Alfred
discoursed. But Seaford, a seaport in Sussex, is more likely to have
been associated in the popular mind and tradition with Alfred.
2. Biscopes, &c.:
comp. ‘Forð iwenden eorles; forð iwenden beornes. | forð
iwenden biscopes; & þa boc-ilæred men;
forð iwenden þæines; forð iwenden sweines |
. . . at þan hustinge,’ L 14620. With bokilered comp.
19/39, 4/20 note.
3. egleche, valiant:
OE. aglǣca, a fierce warrior. egloche S.
4. Alurich: An Ælfric
thesaurarius witnesses a charter of King Alfred, A.D. 892, Birch, Cart. Saxon. ii. 209.
5. of . . . wis:
comp. 212/533.
6. hurde: comp. ‘Swa
se æþela lareow sægde, þæt se cyning & se biscop sceoldan beón
Cristenra folca hyrdas,’ BH 45/24; ‘folces hyrde,’ Beowulf 610.
7. Englene durlyng:
so, ‘com Alfred þe king; Englelondes deorling,’ L
6316: he has also ‘Bruttene, Orka[n]es, Denemarkes, Irisce
monnen, utlaȝen deorling.’ See KH 488 note.
9. bigon: gon T, gan
W,S: set to work to teach.
13. and may be
redundant, as often in Layamon, as ‘Ic wlle mine riche
to-don; & allen minen dohtren,’ 2945 but
Alured, though it is in all the copies, may be an error for
Ælder: comp. ‘& þu seolf læuerd king; leoden þu ært
ælder,’ L 16835, 17252, in the latter place, leader. T,W,S
read a.
296
16. wis . . . war:
comp. 129/27, 156/148, 186/324, 190/456; ‘þe wes þe wiseste;
þe wes þe warreste,’ L 2107; ‘wisliche þauh ⁊ warliche,’ AR 138/7.
21. wisliche, wise,
advisable: OE. wīslīc: Layamon has ‘to iwislichen þinge,’
21052. T has, of wi[s]liche þinges.
28. lykyen, please:
in this sense it governs a dative, which may be understood out of hine.
But Mätzner translates, like.
29. one, alone:
comp. 19/41, 22/118, 60/2.
30. glednesse:
after the manner of l. 29, we expect gleawnesse, but comp. ‘Of alkin
gladnes es þar gleu,’ CM 23359. T has ⁊ he is gleu | ouer alle glade
þinhes: S omits. Line 31 is probably a gloss upon l. 30.
34. riche,
powerful: comp. 6/30, 133/33; ‘hit ne gerist nanum ricum cynincge,’ Ælf.
Lives i. 382/260.
35, 6. that there shall
not be wanting anything he desires to him who is purposed to honour Him
here in this world. For the construction of wone, see 52/368: for
the double negative comp. ‘for he ne mihte beon wurðe; na
þing of his wille,’ L 18704: in the MS. wc the scribe mistook þ
for w. T has apparently þo, not wo: Skeat reads [hwo]: that relative is
not found in J.
37. For stanza iii
generally comp. ‘Decet regem discere legem. | Audiat rex quod praecipit
lex. | Legem servare hoc est regnare. | Notitia litterarum lux est
animarum,’ Wipo 1-4. An echo of this stanza is evident in, ‘The ferste
seide, “I understonde | Ne may no king wel ben in londe, | Under God
Almihte, | But he cunne himself rede, | Hou he shal in londe lede |
Everi man wid rihte,”’ Wright, Pol. Songs, 254/7 (date 1311 A.D.).
38. may has
possibly its independent force, is strong, has power, comp. 29/12, but
the line is evidently corrupt; ryhtwis is a reminiscence of l. 34, as
is also riche in T. It is easy to supply beo after king,
for TS have ben. But RJ, S are nearest the right reading with, Ne
mai no riht cing ben under crist selve (selve SH1; self
SH2, selfe SL). Read Ne may beon ryht king. vnder
criste, a favourite expression in Layamon, as, ‘Ȝe beoð under
criste; cnihten alre kennest | and ich æm rihchest alre
kinge; vnder gode seolue,’ L 27230, 27976, 28056.
40. It is obvious to
substitute for wyttes, wrytes, or better iwriten,
as at 20/67, 70, after writes in T, but ‘his writings,’ i.e.
manuscripts, seems suspicious, and if correct gives a feeble threefold
repetition of the same idea; and further the relation between ll. 41 and
42 requires the explanation of hw as, ‘so as to know how,’ Skeat.
A transposition of ll. 40, 41 with welde read for kunne
(which seems to be due to the following line), will give a better
sequence of ideas, obviate repetition, and restore the
297
alliteration. Comp. ‘ælc bi his witte; wisdom sæiden,’ L
25627; ‘he wes swiðe wis mon; and witful on bocken,’ id.
22097. For cunne RJ, S have icweme.
41. lokie, consult,
examine, refer to records for himself: comp. ‘þat yow tels sent Ieremi,
| If yee wald lok his propheci,’ CM 9333.
46. leden, guide;
usually with personal object.
49. he, resumes the
subject clerek and knyht: a frequent construction in this poem,
comp. 20/66-68, 21/98-105, 24/204, 5; similarly 24/209, 10 where the
pronoun is explained by a noun. It is common in AR ‘þe wreche peoddare
more noise he makeð to ȝeien his sope,’ 66/17. Borgström takes he
as referring to eorl and eþelyng, l. 44, with clerek and
knyht as object of demen, on the ground that clerks and
knights did not exercise judicial power. The matter is not so simple.
Clerek may include bishops, who sat in pre-Conquest shire-courts
by the side of the Alderman, and lawyers generally. And demen is
a word of wide meaning, comp. ‘Ne wandige ná se mæsse-preost no for
rices mannes ege, ne for féo, ne for nanes mannes lufon, ꝥ he him symle
rihte deme, gif he wille sylf Godes domas gedégan,’ BH 43/9; ‘Ne sceall
nan godes þegn for sceattum riht deman,’ Ælf. Lives i. 430/244; ‘And he
hæhte alle cnihtes; demen rihte domes,’ L 22115. Alfred meant
that there should be no discrimination between rich and poor;
discrimination between clerk and knight was not likely. demen
riht is a phrase in which riht is a noun: comp. ‘Se rihtwisa dema
sceall deman æfre riht,’ Ælf. Lives i. 430/239: sometimes, as in the
quotation above, it means simply, to administer justice.
52, 3. Comp. ‘Ech man sal
eft mowen bi þan þe he nu soweð,’ OEH ii. 159/15; i. 137/31, 131/24; all
referring to ‘Qui parce seminat, parce et metet,’ 2 Cor. ix. 6: here the
reference is to ‘Quae enim seminaverit homo, haec et metet,’ Galat. vi.
8: l. 54 means that the judgment passed on each man is of his own
making: comp. 36/115.
55. on to fone, may
mean, to take on himself; its ordinary use is, to begin, 143/85. Skeat
translates, undertake, but in the place referred to in support, L 31415,
the meaning is, proceed. T, RJ have cnouen, cnowen; S. mowen: the former
has been explained, to study, to know how to. I think these readings are
substitutes for something the scribes did not understand, such as,
keneliche to kepen, or keneliche him kepen.
56. T has, of here ⁊ of
heregong, where of is remarkable: the simple dative in OE.,
wið, 48/321, 141/41, and later from are the usual
constructions with werien, of the thing guarded against.
57. gryþ: ‘pax
regia per manum data,’ Liebermann, Ueber die Leges
298
Edwardi Confessoris, 28: here it means vaguely, protection, much as frið
with which it is constantly associated; comp. ‘þonne nam man grið ⁊ frið
wið hi,’ AS. Chron. 1011; ‘a þisse londe he heold grið; a
þisse londe he hulde frið,’ L 9912; Orm 116/3380; 116/133.
58. Comp. ‘þe ælc cheorl
eæt his sulche; hæfde grið al swa þe king sulf,’ L 4260.
59, 60. Comp. ‘cornes heo
seowen; medewen heo meowen. | al heo tileden; ase
heo to þohten,’ L 1941.
62. bihoue: comp.
91/108: ‘to his awere bihoue,’ L 4565. T has bilif.
63. lawe, rule of
conduct, practice: at 176/15, habit. In spite of the consensus of the
MSS., the reading of the original was probably lare.
64. Let the knight see
that it thrive, i.e. be well kept.
65-71. Comp. ‘Disce puer,
dum tempus habes, euo puerili, | Ne te nil didicisse fleas etate
senili,’ Flor. Gott. 98: ‘Qui vacat in iuventute turbatur in senectute,’
Wipo 63; Cato 231/12; ‘He ꝥ in ȝouþe no vertu vsiþ, | In Age Alle honure
hym refusiþ,’ ES xli. 262/27. See Kneuer, p. 19.
69. lorþeu: see
1/19.
72. elde . . .
vnhelþe: for this combination, see 40/197, where unhelðe
rhymes with uniselðe.
75. wroþe, pl.
adj. agreeing with wene, to which latter heo and
hi, variant forms of the pl. n., refer. When age and
ill-health come, then the expectations of the improvident man are in
experience found to be utterly perverse: not only are they cheated, but
they actually vanish, i.e., he is left without hope at all. There is a
play on wene and wenliche, l. 68.
78. Comp. ‘Melior est
sapientia, quam secularis potentia | Plus unicus sensus quam multiplex
census,’ Wipo 7.
82. furþer. T has
wrþere, more worthy, which is, no doubt, original, as it alliterates
with weole. noht wurþ, RJ.
83. of frumþe, from
the beginning, betimes: comp. 65/59; ‘þah þu liuedest of adames
frumðe,’ OEH i. 33/31. RJ reads of fremðe, but T fremede, and
Skeat adding [of] translates, out of a stranger. But the point is not
the making friends early or out of strangers, but the having wisdom
along with your gold. Stanza xiii. is a weak echo of vii. and l. 144 is
the key to l. 83. Read hine to freme for him of frumþe,
with the meaning, Unless he make Wisdom his friend to his profit. See
15/110; 176/24 note.
87-92. Comp. ‘ȝif þou be
visite[d] with pouerte, | take it not to hevyle, | for he
ꝥ sende þe Aduersite, | may turne þe
Aȝen to wele,’ ES xli. 261/5: Li Proverbe au Vilain, no. 133.
299
87. howyen, be
anxious, distressed: comp. ‘Ne beo ge na hogiende ymb þa morgenlican
neode,’ S. Matt. vi. 34.
89. welde: comp.
4/41.
90. Comp. ‘After vuele
cumeð god; wel is him þe hit habbe mot,’ L 3608. A
transposition here restores the alliteration in two verses.
92. Comp. 195/634, where
the verb is omitted after wel, as is usual in such expressions; ‘Wel him
ðe is clene iþrowen,’ VV 95/30; ‘Ah wel hire ꝥ luueð godd,’ HM 27/35.
For þat=for whom, see 46/292 note,
and for ischapen, destined, comp. ‘after ðan ðe hem iscapen is,’
VV 105/4: hit is, of course, good after evil, weal after woe.
94. Comp. ‘Whoso roweth
aȝein the flod, | Off sorwe he shal drinke; | Also hit fareth bi the
unsele, | A man shal have litel hele | Ther agein to swinke,’ Pol.
Songs, 254/20; ‘werig sceal se wiþ winde roweþ,’ Exeter Book, 345/12.
For strong, difficult, tough, comp. 48/312, 76/18, 200/111; ‘hu
strong hit is to arisen of vuel wune,’ AR 326/28: ‘þes ilke Mon is
strong to sermonen’ (difficult to preach to, a tough subject), OEH i.
81/14.
98. mon is a
suspended nom., the construction being changed at l. 105:
analogous to 19/48.
102. idelnesse
holde, enjoy leisure. T has hednesse, OE. ēadnes, happiness,
comfort. ‘Honestior est qui senectutem ad otium rettulit, quam quem in
otio invenit,’ Monita 22/75.
106. wel bitowe,
well employed, profitably experienced. Comp. ‘alle þe ȝeres weren wel
bi-toȝe,’ L 19902; VV 13/2; ON 702; ‘uuele bitohe,’ 74/225.
108. See 26/244 note,
and for the form of the expression, comp. ‘Ah her, þu wenest ȝet | ꝥ tu
wenen ne þerf,’ SK 1153.
110. lyues: read
lyf is . . . luued: ‘Qui enim vult vitam diligere,’ &c. 1 S. Peter
iii. 10.
111. lyf his owe:
the order is strange, and owe is pointless, quite different from
22/128, 23/149, 27/277, where there is a contrast with one’s
possessions, &c. Possibly the original had lifes leowe,
life’s warmth, shelter, OE. hlēow: comp. ‘herd leouwe,’ AR
368/12, poor housing. The word was uncommon and likely to puzzle the
copyist.
112. wrt: Comp.
‘Herba nec antidotum poterit depellere loetum; | Quod te liberet a fato,
non nascitur horto,’ Fecunda Ratis 132/725. Skeat quotes as a proverb,
‘Cur moriatur homo, cui salvia crescit in horto?’ It is from the Regimen
Sanit. Salern. l. 177, and the next line is, ‘Contra vim mortis non est
medicamen in hortis.’ a wude: comp. 181/181.
113. þas feye
furþ, the life of the doomed man.
118. doweþes
louerd: prob. the original had duȝeðe, pl. gen.: ‘duguða
300
dryhten,’ Christ, 781 = Dominus exercituum, Dominus virtutum. T has
domis louird.
122. Skeat explains the
MS. reading, givest away and controllest; an unnatural order: Borgström
takes yefst = yhefst < OE. gehæbban, ‘If thou hast and
possessest.’ Morris’s conjecture, yetst, may mean, gettest,
gainest. The passage is corrupt: T has ‘ȝif þu hauest welþe awold iwis
ȝerlde:’ in þis world is mere padding arising from vpen
eorþe: the original may have been, Gif þu havest a wold | seoluer
and gold: comp. 22/133, 4; ‘Whil ȝe habbeþ wyt at wolde,’ Hendyng 299;
52/387 note.
125. ildre
istreon: comp. ‘þæt he of his yldrena gestreone hine sylfne fercian
mote,’ Ælf. Lives i. 524/597, 528/669; ‘þæ castles aðele
weore; of his eoldrene istreon,’ L 18608.
126. lone: Skeat
quotes ‘divitiæ . . . donum Dei,’ Eccles. v. 18.
127. þar of, from
them: comp. 22/117: the expression is unusual.
128. ‘Homo vitæ
commodatus, non donatus est,’ Syri Sent. 220.
129. vouh, for
veoh: OE.
feoh. Comp. 3/13: ‘ffrendles ys þe dede,’ Hendyng 288.
130. Mayþenes for
maþmes: see 102/134. leten . . . byhinde: Skeat explains as,
forget us; but 4/14 suggests a more pointed meaning.
131. Comp. ‘Cum fueris
felix, quae sunt adversa caveto,’ Cato 218/18; ‘Tranquillis rebus semper
diversa timeto,’ id. 232/26. The first four lines are imitated in, ‘The
ferthe seide, that he is wod | That dwelleth to muchel in the flod, |
For gold or for auhte; | For gold or silver, or any wele, | Hunger or
thurst, hete or chele, | Al shal gon to nohte,’ Pol. Songs 256/1, where
the writer has evidently misunderstood l. 132.
132. fele as
adverb is not common; Einenkel, Anglia, xxxiii. 531, quotes ‘þonne moton
we . . . fela for urum synnum þrowian,’ Wulfstan 151/5, and
the present passage: add Beowulf 1385; ‘He bounden him so
fele sore,’ Havelok 2442. see, the flowing tide of success: comp.
‘Swo floweð þis woreld þenne men michel tuderið . . . ⁊ beð
michel blisse among mannen,’ OEH ii. 177/16.
134. gnyde in the
intransitive meaning, ‘be rubbed away’: elsewhere active. T has wurþen.
Comp. 27/274-6.
135. to duste . . .
dryuen: comp. ‘makede . . . godes deore temple to driuen al to
duste,’ SJuliana 41/1; a less frequent intransitive use. Dryhten,
&c.: comp. ‘geong ealdian · god us ece biþ,’ Exeter Book, ed.
Thorpe, 333/22.
136. godes vrre:
comp. 46/276.
137. foryemeþ
&c.: comp. 122/167, 8; ‘Forrletenn ⁊ forrȝemmdenn,’ Orm
259/7502.
301
138. by come:
comp. 27/275: in T, were.
142. wit and
wisdom are often so coupled: ‘Wyt and wysdom is god warysoun,’
Hendyng 21; Kneuer, 20; 130/81: with sing. masc. pronoun hyne, l.
144.
143. ouergoþ,
surpasses in worth: comp. ‘Þeo luue . . . ouergeð ham alle uoure ⁊
passeð ham alle,’ AR 394/1; an extension of the meaning of OE.
ofergān, conquer, overcome, which is that of 125/270, 207/340: at
29/45 it means, pass away, so ‘deð ꝥ ouergeað,’ SK 1883; ‘ðæt hi
geðencen hu hrædlice se eorðlica hlisa ofergǽð,’ Cura Past. 447/29.
144. sitte: comp.
26/270. The recurrence of þe—vere at l. 148 and the divergence of
T which gives
for the last half of this line, and hwo hem mide senden, preserving the
alliteration, shows that something is wrong here. A rearrangement in the
order 143, 147, 148, 144, reading syker he may sitte ⁊ þat him mide
syndon, 145, 146, 149 gives a good sense.
151, 2. Comp. ‘Tel þou
neuer þy fo þat þy fot akeþ,’ Hendyng 93; Kneuer, 29. arewe,
apparently found only here, malicious person, enemy: OE. earg,
earh.
153. þe, an
ethical dative; see 13/34 note.
154. The subject of wile
is the clause þet—con, he who is not acquainted with your
circumstances. With 155 comp. 21/88.
158. teleþ,
derides, makes sport of.
159. swych mon
þat, &c., such a man as wishes you very well, said ironically:
þat is not conjunction, but relative pronoun, and the construction is
parallel to, ‘talem igitur te esse oportet qui primum te ab impiorum
civium . . . societate seiungas,’ Cic. Fam. x. 6. 3; just
as so . . . þat, 24/184, 5 is matched by, ‘Quis est tam
lynceus qui in tantis tenebris nihil offendat?’ id. ix. 2; and similarly
‘nec tamen ego sum ille ferreus, qui fratris maerore non movear,’ Cic.
Cat. iv. 3. Where the expression is generic, the dependent verb should
be subjunctive, as is the case with segge, and probably here the
original had monne—onne. Comp. ‘ic bidde . . .
swælc monn seðe to minum ærfe foe,’ Thorpe, Diplom. 471/16; ‘Nes þo non
so hardy · þat on me leyde honde,’ OEM 43/209; ‘þat na man ne wurðe swa
wod; ne witte bi-dæled, | þat in his hirede breke grið,’ L
10282; ‘þat na mon on worlde; swa wod no iwurðe, | no swa ær
witte gume; þat his grið bræke,’ id. 22069, 787. With
on comp. ‘ne beo he no swa luðer mon; þat his freond
him wel ne on,’ L 22963: Skeat’s insertion of hit spoils the
meaning. Swyhc mon = such a one: swillc an appears for the
first time in Orm 11595.
166. bywite:
þenkeþ T.
302
169. Comp. ‘Uxorem fuge
ne ducas sub nomine dotis,’ Cato 228/12: ‘Monimon for londe wyueþ to
shonde,’ Hendyng 280; Kneuer, 57.
170. custe,
qualities, virtuous or otherwise.
171. vuele
iauhteþ, estimates falsely, makes a bad bargain.
172. of fayre,
not, out of what is fair, but, in choosing a fair wife: of = in the form
of, in the person of. For frakele, comp. ‘he bið wið-uten feire ⁊
frakel wið-innen,’ OEH i. 25/27. ‘Munditiam seruat sinceram rara
uenustas,’ Fec. Ratis 114/581.
175. So:
Holthausen, Archiv lxxxviii. 370, suggests wo, which gives a common
phrase, ‘Wo is hym alyue,’ OEM 183/221; ‘wa is me on liue,’ L 3422.
177. vppen eorþe,
a favourite tag: see 28/315; KH 247 O.
179-82. These lines are
repeated with small variation in Hendyng, 133-7, but the ‘wyf’ is
‘ȝonge’; Kneuer, 53. Zupitza, Anglia, iii. 370, quotes an inscription in
Low German from a room in the Lübeck Rathskeller, which is identical
with the English proverb, and Holthausen, Archiv, lxxxviii. 371,
contributes two more versions in the same dialect.
184. so wod . . . þat
. . . segge, so mad as to say: see 23/159; and comp. ‘Ne wurðe nan
cniht swa wod; ne kempe swa wilde,’ L 8593, ‘& þa
drihliche gumen; weoren win drunken,’ id. 8125.
185. wille, all
that is in thy mind: comp. 27/305, 23/166.
186. þu: T has
hue, and Skeat alters here to heo, but the text may very well
mean, if you ever found yourself. Perhaps the original had: For if þu hi
myd worde · iwreþþed heuede | And heo iseye þe · bi vore þine ivo alle.
Comp. ‘confundet te in conspectu inimicorum,’ Ecclus. xxv. 35.
188. lete, omit,
refrain from: form and meaning from OE. lǣtan, but with
construction, þat- clause with subj., of OE. lettan.
189. Omit
scholde, a mere repetition from the preceding line. Comp. ‘gyf
þonne þissa þreora þinga ænig hwylcne man lette, þæt hine to ðam fæstene
ne ónhágje,’ Wulfstan 285/3 (quoted in B.-T.). forþ, openly,
freely: comp. ‘ðane sei ðu forð mid seinte Petre: Tu es Christus,’ VV
25/31. baleusyþes, cast up to you your misfortunes: comp. 2/27.
But one expects, after l. 185, something like, will reveal all your
secrets.
190. woþ: T has
wod and wordwod may mean word-mad; in that case the second half of the
line is little more than repetition. But T has often d for
þ, and so his reading may be the same in effect as that of J,
which does not put þ for d. Now in Layamon the younger MS.
writes woþ for wouh, woh in the elder, 3327, 4333, where
the sense requires the latter, and word woh, perverse of speech,
would fit well here.
303
191. wel wolde,
though she desired it ever so much, she cannot control it at all.
194. ouerprute,
excessive pride: the noun apparently only here; the adj. ouerprut is
commoner. In T, orgul prude. Comp. ‘Bruttes hafden muchel
mode; & vnimete prute,’ L 19408.
196. After þat,
heo has dropped out.
198. That vice she would
readily give up, if she were often in a sweat exhausted with toil. Comp.
‘moni swinc moni swæt; . . þolede ich on folde,’ L 2281,
7; ‘he swonc i þon fehte; þat al he lauede asweote,’ id.
7488.
202. Read, þat beon
uulle treowe: lit. though it is ill to bend what are full-grown trees,
i.e. though full-grown trees are hard to bend. It is not necessary to
alter beo, but n of nule probably belongs to it; it
is subjunctive in an object clause expressing a class of things. For
uulle comp. 42/219; ‘min fulla freond,’ Thorpe, Diplom. 525/8;
‘heo beoð ure fulle feond,’ L 963; ‘Ech god giue ⁊ fule giue cumeð of
heuene dunward,’ OEH ii. 105/17; ‘fulliche cristene mon,’ OEH i. 73/5.
‘Dum curuare potes, vel curuam tendere virgam, | Fac sit ut ad libitum
plantula ducta tuum: | Cum vetus in magnum fuerit solidata vigorem | Non
leviter flectes imperiale caput,’ Alanus 435. It is difficult to alter a
grown-up.
203. after,
following the example of: comp. ‘Prendere maternam bene discit cattula
predam,’ Prov. Heinrici 169; ‘Muricipis proles cito discit prendere
mures,’ id. 109: said of innate tendencies. The hindrances to the
training of the young wife are that she is already grown up and has an
inherited disposition.
204. þe mon þat . . .
he: see 19/49. Comp. ‘Femina quem superat, nunquam uiuit sine pena;
| Libertate caret, turpi constrictus habena,’ Flor. Gott. 724.
205. ihurd,
listened to, or perhaps, spoken of, as having any independence in what
he says. Had the writer in mind, ‘labia nostra a nobis sunt, quis noster
Dominus est?’ Ps. xi. 5.
207. steorne is
strange in form (it should be sturne in this text), and does not suit
the context, and the verbs to-trayen, to-teonen are
apparently found nowhere else. Read, turne to treye and to teone, change
his life to sorrow and affliction: in that case the two lines should be
printed as one alliterative long line. The combination is common; comp.
Minot vi. 2 note, and 133/61. T has, ac he sal him rere dreiȝe, but he
shall provide trouble for himself.
210. þe mon
resumes he of l. 209. qued occurs again as quet T 702, in
the metaphorical sense of devil, evil man. Here Skeat translates,
304
aversion; Borgström, following Morris, contempt, scorn, without any
support from other examples. The word is a coarse term of contempt for a
‘poor creature,’ based on the primitive sense of OE. cwead: it is
easily paralleled in modern dialects.
212. fader is
pointless: the reading of T, in hire faire bure, which is for, faire in
hire bure, points to the right way. Read, So is mony burde · bryht on
hyre bure: ‘bright in bower’ is a common tag in the romances; see Guy of
Warwick 2674 with Zupitza’s note.
213. Schene vnder
schete: comp. ‘swete in bedde,’ Havelok 2927.
214. Comp. ‘Ne sont pas
tuit chevalier, qui a cheval montent,’ Li Proverbe au Vilain, no.
201.
215. This line is to be
rejected: it spoils the symmetry of the contrast, and is not
original.
216. glede,
‘beside the glowing coal,’ Skeat; ‘in mirth,’ Borgström; glede being
identified with OWScand. gleði, joy, with an allusion to boasting at the
feast. The original word was probably wede, comp. ‘in wlanke wede,’ Eng.
Met. Homilies (ed. Small), 42/2 = mollibus vestimentis indutus;
‘Whyle þe wlonkest wedes he warp on hym-seluen,’ Sir Gawayne, 2025;
‘awlencð his lichame,’ OEH ii. 211/36. The contrast would then be
between his gay clothes and his unserviceableness. T has werȝe, for
which Borgström reads werwe, steed; and Skeat weiȝe, way: for the former
might be quoted, ‘Nis so wlonk vnder crist · ridynde on stede,’ OEM
91/19. With 217, comp. 26/265.
221. arede, take
as advice. ‘Femina quod iurat, errat qui credere curat,’ Prov. Hein.
64.
222. ‘Coniugis iratae
noli tu verba timere; | Nam lacrimis struit insidias, cum femina
plorat,’ Cato 229/20.
226. lude ⁊
stille, under all circumstances: comp. 28/317, 188/377; ‘don we hit
wullet | lude and stille,’ L 3665: Minot viii. 54 note.
228. ‘Didicere flere
feminae in mendacium,’ Syrus 74/130; ‘Muliebris lacrima condimentum est
malitiae,’ id. 87/343; Fecunda Ratis 39/163.
231. Not said by
Solomon, but by Syrus, ‘Malo in consilio feminae vincunt viros,’
86/324.
234. loþ, read
leoþ; OE. lēoþ, song.
235. Skeat equates
scumes with Icel. skūmi, twilight, and translates, ‘like
twilight-shadows (they) mislead (us),’ which is fanciful. Scumes
may be miswriting for scunnes, which would represent OE.
scēones, scȳness, suggestion, temptation, as in ‘deofol
þonne þurh þa attor berendan næddran mid hire þære yfelan scéonesse
. . . beswác þone ærestan wifmon,’ BH 3/17. The sense would
be, as temptation they mislead. But more
305
probably the place is corrupt, and the original may simply have had, as
cwen us forteoþ, with an allusion to Eve’s bad counsel.
237. Björkman, 14,
thinks that this proverb was originally Scandinavian, and it adds point
to understand cold in the meaning, disastrous, of the Icelandic
version. Comp. ‘Wommennes counseils been ful ofte colde,’ Chaucer,
C. T., B 4446. ‘Mulier cum sola cogitat, male cogitat,’ Syrus
87/335.
240, 241. Skeat’s
version, ‘I do not say this because a good woman is not a good thing,’
shows that he takes for þan þat together, which is contrary to
the metrical stress on þan and gives no sufficient sense: for
þan, is, therefore, i.e. in spite of all the hard things I have said
about women: hit is an anticipatory object, which is expanded in
the object clause, þat . . . wymmon. The scribe deleted
n before ys, Skeat restores it; T also has is, for
which Skeat substitutes [n]is, quoting, ‘Hic ne sige nout byþan | þat
moni ne ben gentile man,’ T 665. I think that what the scribe wrote
should be retained. It is clear that the relation between a negative
principal clause and its dependent object clause was often in ME. very
loose and illogical. Comp. ‘For sco was traist and duted noght, | þat
godds wil ne suld be wroght,’ CM 12321; ‘Ne doð ham no þing swo wo |
. . . | swo ꝥ hi niten, ꝥ here þine | ne sal habben ende,’
Poema Morale, MS. D. 140 (see 46/290); ‘ihc nas na wurdra;
þenne ich nes weldinde,’ L 3466; also 100/104. ‘Ðat ne forȝeit ðu naure
· þat ðu godd ne heriȝe,’ 93/149, means, That forget thou never that
thou honour God; what is more natural than to leave out the negative, if
the contrary meaning is required? Our text may be paraphrased, Whatever
I have said about women in general, I do not say it with reference to
the proposition that a good woman is a good thing. For the sentiment
comp. ‘Femina raro bona, sed que bona digna corona,’ Prov. Hein. 65;
‘Femina pauca bona est; si forte inveneris ullam, | De celo cecidit,
tessella caractere miro,’ Fecunda Ratis 153/919.
242. þe mon þe,
for the man who. icouere, &c. win her from his rivals.
244. Repeated from
21/108.
245. Comp. ‘Nulla sevior
pestis quam familiaris hostis. Nis non werse fo; þene frakede
fere,’ OEH ii. 189/33; ‘Gravior est inimicus, qui latet in pectore,’
Syrus 79/200.
246. vayre . . .
frakele: see 23/172 note.
247. Skeat explains
þane loþe, the hostile one, and lead, keep on one’s side,
so, by fair words. T reads So mon mai welþe lengest
helden, which is easier of interpretation, but is just as inept. I think
both scribes or their exemplars have altered as best they could a
displaced line to fit
306
it into its new context. Its proper place is after the good advice of
ll. 248-51 (comp. l. 263), and it may have originally run, So myght þu
fayre lif · lenguste leden.
248. ‘Nolito quaedam
referenti credere saepe: | Exigua est tribuenda fides, qui multa
locuntur,’ Cato 224/20.
249 is a very lame
verse; we might read, þat feole speken can.
251. With singen,
comp. ‘Noli homines blando nimium sermone probare: | Fistula dulce
canit, uolucrem dum decipit auceps,’ Cato 220/27.
252. swikelne,
deceitful: comp. ‘Ueond þet þuncheð freond is swike ouer alle swike,’ AR
98/5; ‘Habet suum venenum blanda oratio,’ Syrus 80/214.
254. cuþe, give
warning.
256. Alfred would hardly
have said that a man learns wisdom from proverbs and prudence from good
luck. Read for sawe, sorewe (the scribe has overlooked the
contraction for re), and for hiselþe, uniselþe,
misfortune. Comp. ‘In þes middeneardes iscole · selðen ⁊ uniselðen,’ OEH
i. 243/7: ‘Vitat maiora sapiens post dampna minora,’ Prov. Hein. 240.
Borgström reads his elde, where his is surely doubtful and þ
interchanging with d without parallel.
258. The editors leave
out And, which is not in T, but l. 257 is complete in itself;
And vnwurþ, and despicable, is a sort of afterthought: for the
combination comp. 4/37; ‘þat he biðe vnworð & lah’ (loþ, MS. O), L
3464, and further for this meaning of vnwurþ, 143/92; ‘þe idele
ȝelp us beo eure unwurð,’ OEH i. 107/8.
259. hokede,
thievish: in thieves’ slang, a hook is a pickpocket, his fingers are
hooks. Comp. ‘Sutoribus custodem addidit et ut eorum curvos ungues
observaret . . . rogavit,’ Disciplina Clericalis, ed. Hilka u.
Söderhjelm, 28/19; ‘Arpiis similes armantur in ungue ferino,’ Fec.
Ratis, de Predonibus, 173/1154. þat he bereþ is rejected by Skeat
as a ‘gloss.’ It is certainly feeble; perhaps we should read, þat he
herȝeþ, with which he plunders; the relative would be under the régime
of the preceding þurh.
261.
From—wune, (dis)accustom thyself from lying: a singular
phrase.
262. þe may be
the reflexive dat. as at 13/34, but it is more probably a mistake, due
to þe in the previous line: its omission improves the metre.
263. on þeode, a
tag beloved of Layamon: with him it is always local; comp. ‘he þohte to
quellen; þe king on his þeoden,’ 20056 (in his londe,
MS. O); ‘þa weoren Rom-leoden; bliðen on heore þeoden,’ id.
11144:
307
it corresponds to ‘vpen eorþe,’ 22/123, and differs from in alle
leode, among all the people, Layamon’s ‘on folke,’ 2218.
265. Comp. ‘behoueð ðe
ðat ðu bie well warr ꝥ tu luuiȝe ðine nexte, ðat is, aurich mann ðe berð
ðin anlicnesse,’ VV 39/13: a translation of proximus, S. Luke x.
29. þe: comp. 22/141, 25/217: ‘Au besoing voit on qui amis est’,
Li Proverbe au Vilain, no. 72.
266. Comp. 188/378;
‘Vrom mulne ⁊ from cheping, from smiðe ⁊ from ancre huse, me tiðinge
bringeð,’ AR 88/26; ‘At chireche and at chepyng | hwanne heo to-gadere
come,’ OEM 189/57; Böddeker, AE. Dicht. 112/82.
270. sytte: comp.
22/144: rest in contentment; ‘sit soft.’
271. Skeat takes lond
le
as a mere scribal error for londe which T reads.
I think it points to an original londe ⁊ se: comp. 40/194; ‘Mid mede man
mai ouer water faren And mid weldede of giue; frend wuerche,’
OEH ii. 41/20 (possibly a reminiscence of this place). For the proverb
comp. ‘Mieux vaut amis en voie, ke deniers en corroie. Melius valet
amicus in via quam denarius in corrigia,’ Hauréau, Notices et Extraits,
ii. 283.
274-6. Comp. 22/133-5.
mixe: T has nocht.
280. holde,
maintain: ‘vpholde,’ 21/113.
285. Comp. 18/9-11.
288. Comp. generally
32/39-65; 29/20-24. Perhaps the allusion is to ‘In timore Domini esto
[tuum cor] tota die: Quia habebis spem in novissimo, et praestolatio tua
non auferetur,’ Prov. xxiii. 17, 18.
289. lyen: comp.
‘ꝥ sind þa gecostan cempan þa þam cyninge þeowað | se næfre þa lean
alegeð þam þe his lufan adreogeð,’ Exeter Book, ed. Gollancz, 108/91.
See 32/64 note.
293. gabbe, talk
mockingly or derisively: the meaning of Fr. gaber, to talk
boastingly, would suit well here, but it lacks support. schotte
is difficult: the obvious sense is, to pay scot, to take part in
convivial assemblies, but this does not go well with gabbe.
Borgström thinks that it may be schoute, to shout, or possibly to
scout, sneer, modified for the sake of the rhyme. If that principle may
be admitted, stroute, to swagger (Havelok, 1779), would be
preferable.
294. chid,
wrangle, engage in a ‘flyting,’ or scolding match: ‘Ne respondeas stulto
iuxta stultitiam suam,’ Prov. xxvi. 4. Whether tales be taken
with the preceding or the following line, it is equally unsuitable,
unless it may mean reproaches, charges, after OE. talian. It goes
best with l. 296; ne should be omitted before chid.
dwales, not ‘fools’ in the general sense, but erring ones;
dwall in mod. dialects means to wander in mind, to talk
incoherently. With cunnes comp. 81/80.
308
298. ‘Rumores fuge, neu
studeas novus auctor haberi,’ Cato 218/12. With 299 comp. ‘Pauca in
convivio loquere’, id. 217/51. ‘Inter convivas fac sis sermone
modestus,’ Columbanus 92; ‘Contra verbosos noli contendere verbis: |
Sermo datur cunctis, animi sapientia paucis,’ Cato 217/10.
302. biluken,
enclose, comprehend: the brief utterances of the wise man are
weighty.
303. See Hendyng 85 and
Kneuer 28.
305. With wille,
comp. 24/185.
307. Comp. Hendyng 144
and Kneuer 55; Förster’s note, ES xxxi. 6; ‘Osse caret lingua, secat os
tamen ipsa maligna,’ Prov. Hein. 149; ‘Mo sleað word þene sweord,’ AR
74/1; ‘plaga . . . linguae comminuet ossa,’ Ecclus. xxviii.
21.
310. ‘Exultat gaudio
pater iusti,’ Prov. xxiii. 24: ‘Him stondes wel þat god child strenes,’
Havelok 2983.
311. ibidest,
dost obtain: OE. gebīdan, to await, experience, attain to.
312. mon þewes:
comp. ‘hauest þu nu quene þeouwes inume,’ L 30281. ‘Curva cervicem eius
in iuventute, et tunde latera eius dum infans, ne forte . . .
erit tibi dolor animae,’ Ecclus. xxx. 12. The ‘child unþewed’ is one of
the ‘Ten Abuses,’ OEM 185/9.
314. The better things
will ever go in the world. For buuen eorþe, see 23/177.
316. werende:
Skeat reads wexende; if any alteration is made, wuniende would give a
common OE. and ME. combination: as ‘þæt he her in worulde wunian mote,’
Christ 817; ‘wuniende ⁊ rixlende on worlde,’ OEH 1. 25/17. But
weren is equated in Stratmann-Bradley with Mid. Dutch, OHG.
weren, to remain, with this place as the only instance.
317. lude and
stille: see 25/226.
327. Comp. ‘For betere
were child ounboren þen ounbeten,’ Hending, MS. O, Anglia iv. 191/4.
328. ‘Qui parcit virge,
sua pignora protinus odit,’ Fec. Ratis 93/438; ‘Quippe diu male cesus
lamentabitur infans,’ id. 65/289. spareþ, with dative.
329. areche, get
at, control.
Manuscript:
Manuscript.
The Cotton MS. ... MS. Stowe 163, B.M.
ff.
Stowe, 163 B. M.
... īe in scīene,
gesīene gives schene 213, isene 75.
scīene gesīene
ea + h occurs in wexynde 112,
113, iauhteþ 171
113 iauhteþ
The personal pronouns ... a. f. 280,
non
non,
s. g. neut. 276, echere
echere,
... Past of Weak Verbs: s. 2.
heuedest 187;
187:
1. Seuorde: siforde T; Sifforde W,
RJ, which is
RJ.,
38. ... ryhtwis
rightwis
87-92. ... sende þe
Aduersite
Aduersite
129. vouh, for veoh
“veoh” misprinted as bold
144. ... the divergence of T
of B
258. ... which is not in T,
T.,
271. Skeat takes lond le as a mere
scribal error
“lond le” misprinted as plain (non-bold)
Manuscript: As for no. vi. There are other copies in (C)
MS. Cotton Caligula A ix., B.M., of the first quarter of the thirteenth
century, and (B) MS. Laud 471, Bodleian, of
the end of the same century. In (A) MS.
309
Arundel 57, B.M. there is a fourteenth-century version of nine lines. CJ
form a group, B belongs to another branch.
Editions: Of CJ; Morris, R., OEM, pp. 156-9 under the inappropriate title, Long
Life: of B; Zupitza, J., Anglia i. p. 410: of B, corrected by CJ;
Kluge, F., ME. Lesebuch, p. 56; of C; Wright, T., Percy Society, vol.
xi. p. 63. Of A; Morris, R., Ayenbite of Inwyt, p. 129.
Literature: Zupitza, J., Anglia i. 410; Varnhagen, H.,
Anglia ii. 71; ii. 67.
Phonology: The position is the same as that of piece vi:
words not in it are blench 4 (blencan vb.); falwy 6
(fealwian); luteþ 29 (lūtian); sterk 11 (stearc);
steo 38 (stīgan, imitating in the inf. flēon, wrēon,
Bülbring, Ablaut 88), sunne 10 (synn). MS. C does not differ
materially from it: it has however drinche 8, deaþes 8, sterch 11,
strench 14, tahte 23, fole 33, wormes 34, nowt 50. MS. B is
South-Eastern bordering on Kent; it has rene 3 (rēn), senne 10,
starc 11, sene 13, to yenes 16, Man let lust and senne stench 19,
sede 23, stie 38 and st for ht in brigst 13. The text is
often faulty as if written down from memory, and l. 26 is missing, but
the rhymes are correct: the original was doubtless in the South-Eastern
dialect.
Accidence: longe s. g. neut. 1 (comp. longes
21/109); heyust adv. 38; endi inf. 39 (endian),
last 2 pr. s. (lǣdest) 36 are the only forms which require
notice.
Metre: The ten-line stanza of this poem is unique
in ME. literature. It is an expansion of the common eight-line stanza:
its rhyme formula is abab | baab | bb, two quatrains with contrasted
rhymes and a two-line close in which the sentiment of the stanza
culminates. In the last stanza the effect is spoiled by the absence of a
break at the end of the eighth line.
As a rule the line contains four measures, but four out of five times
the ninth line of the stanza has only three, so, Món | er þu fál | lẹ of
þi bénch | 9; Ac déþ | lúteþ | in his schó | 29; In déþ | schal þi lýf |
endí | 39; wúrcheþ him | pýnẹ eu|er mó | 49. Further, in the original
form of the verse, as preserved by MS. B, the tenth line has only two
measures, þi sénnẹ | aquénch | 10; wel dó | wel þénch | 20; hím to |
fordó | 30 (Zupitza’s correction of the MS. do him for do); on wóp | þi
glé | 40; ne dó | þu só | 50. The rhythm is mostly trochaic, as Món may
| lónge | lýues
| wéne | 1, but sometimes iambic, as Nis nón | so
stróng | ne stárk | ne ké|nè 11; her naú|ẹstu blís|se dáy|es þré | 35.
Lines with three-syllable measures like 9 are 22, 26: with monosyllabic
first foot are 19, 22, 31, 32.
310
Introduction: The comparative smoothness and finish
of the verse points to a date considerably later than that of the
Proverbs: perhaps about 1210 A.D. The
piece seems to have been inspired by stanzas x and xxi of the earlier
poem.
1. A man may look forward
to a long life, but the trick often deceives him; an oft-quoted proverb,
as at 21/108, 222/274; ‘Mani man weneþ þat he wene ne þarf, longe to
liven, and him lieþ þe wrench,’ Hending MS. O, Anglia iv. 200. The
second line occurs in another connection in AR, ‘moni mon abit to
schriuen him uort þe nede tippe. Auh ofte him lieð þe wrench,’ 338/18.
For the case of liues comp. ‘Ðær sceolan þeofas . . .
lifes ne wenan,’ Christ 1608; with wrench . . . blench
comp. 157/125; ‘wrenceþ he ⁊ blenceþ · worn geþenceþ · hinder-hoca,’
Exeter Book, ed. Thorpe, 315/18.
3. turneþ: went,
BA.
4. makeþ: hit
makeð, C; the subject is weder, neut.: turneþ he, B; i.e. reyne (OE. regn,
m.). Comp. ‘Hope maketh fol man ofte blenkes,’
Havelok 307; ‘þenne þe kyng of þe kyth a counsayl
hym takes, | Wyth þe best of his burnes, a blench for to make,’
Cleanness 1201, 2.
6. falwy: falewi,
BC: comp. 133/39, ‘faleweþ so doþ medewe gres,’ OEM 93/16.
8. deþes drench:
comp. ‘Þær Cristess mennisscnesse | Drannc dæþess drinnch o rodetreo,’
Orm 45/1373.
9. bench implies
feasting: comp. ‘Ne schaltu neuer sytten · on bolstre ne on benche | Ne
neuer in none halle · þar me wyn schenche,’ OEM 175/89; ‘Ye þat weryeþ
þat riche schrud · and sytteþ on eure benche,’ id. 169/3; ‘Ac þu sete on
þine benche, underleid mid þine bolstre,’ Worcester Frag. C, 26; L
9693.
10. With aquench,
comp. ‘Her-of we owe þenche. | And vre sunnen aquenche. | Mid beden and
myd almesse,’ OEM 79/217.
12. B reads, þat may
agein deaþes wiþer clench, that has power against death’s hostile grip:
wiþer-clench appears to be without parallel. In our text, Morris
takes ago for agon, escape, but, as Zupitza points out, it
is probably for agon = agein, which is also found as age, aȝe.
Stratmann-Bradley translates wiþer-blench, attack, quoting this
place only: more probably it means sly, treacherous attack.
14. ryueþ, rakes:
Icel. rifja, to rake hay into rows: ‘Ryvyn, or rakyn,’ Prompt. Parvul.
ed. Mayhew, col. 386. on o streng: so B, but C in one strench,
which would represent OE. strenc, a by-form of streng,
recorded in Funiculus, modicum funus, rap uel strenc,
Wright, Vocabularies 245/6, just as drench, wrench represent
drenc, wrenc. If that be
311
the case here, then C agrees with BJ, save in the preposition in.
For Death armed with a rake comp. ‘Hwen he com to arudden | of deaðes
rake oðre, | hwi deide he him seoluen?’ SK 1137: Satan is often so
represented, ‘Þer is sathanas þe qued · | redi wyþ his rake,’ OEM
181/213; SM 11/11; SK, MS. C 917. Death sweeps in his victims with his
rope; ‘Ded has vs wit-sett vr strete, | · | All sal we rin into his
rape,’ CM 23727; ‘Ded sal rug us til his rape,’ CM 21920; ‘Deþ shal take
vs al in rape,’ id. MS. T. The conception then is that of Death sweeping
in all sorts and conditions with the same rope. It is just possible that
the reading of C, strench, is meant for strech, i.e. stretch, the word
still used in Dorsetshire for ‘the space taken in at one stretch of the
rake,’ EDD. v. 813. Streche is not common at this period, but comp.
42/231; ‘on his modes streche,’ OEH i. 111/25, in the sweep, or compass,
of his mind.
15. fox,
adj.: comp. 187/351; ‘fox of fyl’ (read wil), Horst.,
S.A.L. 12/251; Orm 230/6646: for wrench, comp. ‘Alse þe fox þe
mid his wrenches walt oðer deor; ⁊ haueð his wille þerof,’
OEH ii. 195/7.
16. B has, ne mai him
noman to yenes.
17. þreting,
menace, or possibly upbraiding: B has weping. The nouns þreting,
bene, Mede, &c., are subjects of may, l. 16.
18. Mede,
bribery: B reads, ne listes ne leches drench.
21. Possibly a reference
to the advice given at 27/288.
23. Do as He who
bringeth thee to thy end taught thee and said. Comp. 27/282-286.
25. mysdo,
misfare. B leaves out þenne and the whole of the following line,
which means, But thou hast good reason to live in fear and trembling. ‘A
peyne joie avra un sul jur | Ke de sa fyn bien pensera,’ MS. Lambeth
522, Archiv lxiii. 76/23.
27. such, such
and such a man, indefinitely.
29. luteþ,
lurkeþ. Comp. ‘Ja n’ert tant prus ne tant vaillanz, | Ne tant de
richesces en avra, | Ke tuit nel perde a un launz: | Kar mort tapit enmi
sun gaunt, | Kant meyns quide | Chescun,’ Archiv lxiii. 76/33; ‘within
the hollow crown | That rounds the mortal temples of a king | Keeps
Death his court,’ Shakspere, K. Richard II, iii. ii. 160. The reading of
B, ‘deþ him ledes on his sóó,’ apparently means, death on his shoes (OE.
scōum) directs his footsteps.
33. fule fulþe:
comp. 134/94. ‘Cum faex, cum limus, cum res vilissima simus, | Unde
superbimus? Ad terram terra redimus,’ Hauréau, Notices, vi. 124.
37. Comp. ‘Quor deades
strenge warp him dun,’ GE 21/714.
38. Comp. 21/110; ‘Quen
þu best wenis to haf all, | Fra al þan
312
sal þou titest fall,’ CM 21939; ‘þenne þu wenest ꝥ þu scalt libben alre
best · þenne gest þu forð,’ OEH i. 7/23; ‘quant mielz quidet vivre | e
estre a delivre, | la mort li cort sore,’ Reimpredigt 32/16.
41. Comp. ‘Wela · weolla
· wella; hu þu biswikest monine mon. | þenne he þe treoweðe
alre best on; þenne biswikes tu heom,’ L 3411.
45, 6. Evidently a
popular saying, so ‘Mon let þi fol lust ouergo · and eft hit þe likeþ,’
Poema Morale MS. J. 15 an interpolated line; ‘auh let lust ouergon ⁊ hit
te wule liken,’ AR 118/26; ‘Let lust ouergon ⁊ hit þe wule liken,’ id.
238/27; Hendyng 53. For likeþ comp. 30/11, and for ouergo,
pass by, 22/143.
Manuscript: ... (B) MS. Laud
471
printed as shown: error for “Laud Misc.”?
Editions: Of CJ; Morris, R.,
OEM
R. OEM
As a rule ... Món may | lónge | lýues |
wéne
lyúes
4. makeþ: hit makeð, C; the subject
is weder, neut.
neut
Manuscripts: i. Lambeth 487 (L), a small quarto, 177 ×
135 mm., of 67 leaves, written towards the end of the twelfth century.
Its contents are described in Wanley, p. 266, and printed in OEH i. pp.
2-189: nos. x, xi. of this book are also taken from it. The words
printed in clarendon in these three pieces are written in red, not
inserted afterwards by a rubricator but done at the same time as the
rest of the text. The PM ends with fordemet, l. 270, in the middle of a
page; the final t has a flourish for its cross stroke; the copyist had
apparently no knowledge of any more.
ii. iii. Egerton 613, B.M., described in the List of Additions, 1843.
Its contents are mostly in Norman French, but it has two copies of the
PM: the second (e) furnishes here a complement to the Lambeth MS. as far
as l. 370, with which it ends; the first (E) is used to complete the
text. e was written in the first quarter of the thirteenth century, E is
somewhat later; the former has accents, the latter none. In e every
other line has a red initial, but the rubricator went wrong at ll. 308,
312. These copies are in different hands.
iv. Trinity College, Cambridge, B. 14. 52 (T), on vellum, 135 × 105
mm.; written early in the thirteenth century. Its contents are described
in James, M. R., The Western Manuscripts in the Library of Trinity
College, Cambridge, 1900, i. 459. A leaf is lost after f. 8, and a new hand begins with
f 9; the PM appears to be a distinct MS. (Anglia, iv. 408). The initials
of each line are capitals and written apart from their words. A later
hand has glossed aihte 42, goodes; ore 53, favour, grace; lean 64,
deserving; manke 70, Manca, Mancus.
Other MSS. are v. Digby A 4, Bodleian D, of the beginning of the thirteenth century;
described in Macray, W. D., Catalogue of the Digby MSS., Oxford,
1883. The PM is written in half lines and stanzas; it is in a hand found
nowhere else in the MS., which was probably copied at Christ
313
Church, Canterbury (James, M. R., The Ancient Libraries of
Canterbury and Dover, Cambridge, 1903; Förster, M., Archiv cxv. 167).
Its dialect is Kentish. vi. Jesus College, Oxford, E 29 (J): see p. 285. vii. McClean MS. 123 (M), Fitzwilliam
Museum, Cambridge, 122 leaves on vellum, 262 × 167 mm.: about 1300: the
Nuneaton Book, described by Miss Anna C. Paues, who discovered this copy
of the poem, in Anglia xxx. 217-26, and in A Descriptive Catalogue of
the McClean Collection of Manuscripts by M. R. James, Cambridge,
1912. Like Egerton 613 it has the Bestiary of William the Norman and the
Gospel of Nicodemus in French. The dialect of PM is
South-Eastern, bordering on Kent. It begins with two lines from Sinners
Beware (OEM p. 72), and has four other lines not found in any other
copy: on the other hand, it wants seventy lines found in T; it diverges
from the other MSS. in the order of the lines, and in other respects
gives the impression of having been written down from memory.
Facsimile: Of vi. Skeat, W. W., Twelve Facsimiles,
Oxford, 1892; plate vi gives ll. 1-34.
Editions: Of L: OEH i. 159-75 with modern version.
Kluge, F., ME. Lesebuch, 57-61. Of E: Furnivall, F. J., Early
English Poems. Philological Society, 1862, 22-34, with readings of e and
OEH i. 288-95, 175-83. Of e: Zupitza-Schipper, Alt- und Mittelenglisches
Übungsbuch, Wien, 1907, 80-91, completed from E. Of T: OEH ii. 220-32
and Specimens 195-221. Of J: OEM 58-71 and Specimens 194-220. Of D:
Zupitza, J., Anglia i. 6-32, part in Hickes i. 222. Of M: Paues,
A. C., Anglia xxx. 227-37 (I read l. 29, hire; 63 þon; 65
nammore; 71 ouersicþ; 84 þurȝsicþ; 105 diaþe; 147 þar pine; 152
ysicþ; 191 ofspreng; 223 hi neure; 236 Mot; 268 wulle; 314 hī =
him; 333 ḅyseo = yseo).
A critical edition based on all the MSS. then known was issued by H.
Lewin, Halle, 1881. He adopted Zupitza’s filiation of the MSS. as
expressed in the following table:
Miss Paues thinks that M is descended from V co-equal with U, thus
314
displacing the latter from its position of original: to me it seems to
belong to the Z group, and to be most nearly related to D.
The MSS. thus fall into two groups, which are here adequately
represented by the printed texts, for D is inferior and J much altered,
indeed often rewritten. U, the original, was probably written about 1180
A.D.
Literature: Einenkel, E., Anglia iv. Anz. 88-93;
Jordan, R., ES xlii. 38-42 (dialect of L); Krüger, A., Sprache und
Dialekt der ME. Homilien in der Handschrift B. 14. 52. Trinity College,
Cambridge, Erlangen, 1885; Paues, A. C., Anglia xxx. 217-37;
Zupitza, J., Anglia i. 5-38; iii. 32, 33; iv. 406-10.
Analogues: Reimpredigt, ed. H. Suchier, Halle, 1879; Le
Sermon de Guischart de Beauliu, ed. A. Gabrielson, Upsala, 1909;
Guischart de Beauliu’s debt to religious learning and literature in
England, by A. Gabrielson, Archiv cxxviii. 309-28.
Phonology: (1) of the
Lambeth MS. Oral a is a, baþien 245, faren 176;
a before nasals is normally o, mon 22, þonc 71, but
a in manke 70, þanke 241, and þenne, þene, þen, wenne are the
usual spellings, with occasional þanne 18, 160; a before
lengthening groups is o, honde 81, ifonded 147; ent 159 is
Anglian end. æ is mostly e, brec 183, et 92, feder
148, efþ 171 (hæfð), hwet 92 &c., weter 248, but a in
bað 218, fader 186, 195, habbe 3, 5, hwat 90, water 142, 194, 240.
e is e, beren 95, ende 179, strengþe 168, but sullic 181
(syllic; comp. seollic L 18035), ni 77, meind 142
(mengde). i is i, biden 125, binden 216, child 148;
after w it is u in wule 34, 39, 155, wulleð 97, 226, uuel
123 (= nule), nute 236, nusten 102, 225. It is e in þerdde
138, u in ofsprung 207; boð 120 is miswritten for bið. o
is o, bifore 16, borde 260, but after w, a, walde
49, nalde 185, 261; cumen 202 is c(w)omon. The prep. on is
mostly a, sometimes an; u is u, cumeð 234, funde 68, but
come 124, 221, iwoned 57 in contact with m, n, w.
y is mostly u, abuȝeð 195, cunne 202, duden 265, sunne
201, swuch 80, þunchen 62; before lengthening groups, sungede 258, but
i in afirst 37, hwice 136, lifte 83, ofþinchþ 130 (5), swich
80 (3), and e in dede 2, vnnet 5: king 50, drihten 80, drihte 110 are the only forms of these words.
ā is normally a, an 26, are 179, hwam 202, þa 190;
before consonant groups, are 207, hattre 247, but it is o in hom
95, hwon 105, þo 53, wori 142, e through loss of stress in se 80
&c., þe 169. ǣ1 is e, eni 53, er 11, þen
71, ech 32, efre 68, ledden 209, but a in anige 269, þan 74:
uches 90 descends from ylc. ǣ2 is always e,
adrede 6, brede 143, lende 122, uniselðe 198. ē is always
e; ī, i; ō, o, but e in te
108: na 134 is Anglian
315
nā. ū is always u. ȳ is normally u,
cudde 191, fur 76, hud 77, lutel 46, but litel 28, hwi 104.
ea before r + cons. is regularly e, erȝe 17,
þerf 43; before lengthening groups, erninge 64, herde 157, 169, wernin
228, but arme 227, warni 226: the i-umlaut is represented by
derne 78, smirte 114. ea before l + cons. is once
ea, bifealt 7; normally a (Anglian absence of breaking),
al 7 &c., salt 248, ald 4, -fald 54,
247, waldeð 84, but welde 2, welden 55 (by confusion with
gewieldan): the i-umlaut is seen in elde 14, 15, eldre
192, helde 197, but alder 1. eo before r + cons. is mostly
e, herte 74, werke 27 (9), but horte 113; before length. groups
it is o in ȝorne 49, horþe 75, orðe 81, orðliche 153. The
wur group is represented by wurð 140; the i-umlaut by wurs
236, wurst 217, 219: bernd 249, berninde 218, bernunde 245 come from
bærnan. eo before l + cons. is written o
[ö], solf 12 (13), but u in sulf 214 (LWS. sylf).
ea, u-umlaut of a is represented by kare 45.
eo, u-umlaut of e is o, houene 25 (7), world
153, 222, but e in heuenriche 42, 63, and by influence of
w, u in suster 148, 185: eo, å-umlaut of
e is written o [ö], brokeð 91, fole 9 (4), unfrome 226,
but is e in fele 70, 166, wele 222. eo, umlaut of i
is written o [ö], binoþen 87, hore 101, solure 264, souene 26,
soððen 9, 117, but is e in biclepie 107, iclepede 104, seue 140;
u in suððen 205, hure 141. The palatal diphthong ea is
a in scal 24, 35, schal 19, -gate
180; e in scefte 84, ȝere 110; sceamian is skamie 163,
165, sceomu, scome 166. ie after g is regularly
e (Anglian), ȝeuen 64, 261, ȝefð 144, ȝeue 45, 74, ȝelde 45,
forȝeten 34, 98, but i in giue 56; after č, e,
chele 197, 233 (without umlaut); after sc, i, scilde 220.
eo after g is u in ȝung 4, 10; after sc,
u, sculen 20 (8), sculde 118, 263, sculden 60, 265, but o
once in solde 51. eom is em 1, 4, heom, hom 18 &c.
ēa is ea in deaþe 182, uneade 181, otherwise e,
brede 189, chep 68, deðe 115, uneðe 189: lan 64 is Scandinavian. The
i-umlaut is e, alesed 134, iheren 262, ileuen 255.
ēo is eo in beoð 17, beo 29, freonde 220, seon 16,
otherwise regularly o, bon 2 (5), bo 134 (10), boð 26 &c.,
dore 143, doule 97 (5), frond 30 (4), son 158, þoue 43, but e in
lef 252, sec 199, tening 253: bið 233 is due to confusion with the
singular. The i-umlaut is represented by dore 144, 184, fond 219,
frond 220, node 261, þostre 78, but once þestre 76. gīet is ȝet
5; gēar, ȝer 140. ō after sc is seen in scop
84.
a + g is aȝ, draȝen 47, 49, laȝe 170: ah
14, 119, ach 58 is Anglian ah. æ + g is ei,
dei 134, mei 14, seið 114, 133. e + g is eȝ in
weȝes 72, ei in eie 18, weien 63: ongegn is aȝein 76;
e + h is seen in hechte 268; i + h in
iwichte 212; o + g in unwron 160 (unwrogen);
o + h in bohte 184, unbocht 59; u + g in
fuȝeles 83, luȝen 159, muȝe 21, wruȝen 160; y + g in
316
abuh 144 (abygþ). ā + g produces aȝ, aȝen
30 (5), maȝe 29, but ahen 161: ā + h is seen in ahte 2, achten 129.
ǣ1 + g is ei in eiðer 62, seiden 223;
ǣ1 + h, eh in ehte 259, echte 42 (3),
but ach in tachte 268. ǣ2 + g gives
eȝ in iseȝen 98, 102, but ei in mei 29, 185. ē +
g is seen in forwreien 97; ō + g in inoch 235;
ō + h in biþocht 8, brochte 183: uwer 88 is ōwer
< ōhwǣr, comp. ouhwar AR 60/25. ea + h gives
mihte 13, michte 16, 52, mahte 222, isech 261; the i-umlaut is
represented in nihte 78: eo + h, brichte 75, rihte 109;
its i-umlaut is represented in ouersich 75, þurþsicheþ 90.
ēa + g is eȝ in eȝen 75; ēa + h gives
þah 4, þach 102, 222, þech 181; ēo + h, lihte 76,
lihtliche 145. ā + w is au in cnauð 146, knauð 110,
saule 136, 245, naut 48, 212; aw in nawiht 150, 249 (but noht
190, nocht 132 are from nōwiht); auw in iknauwen 161;
otherwise aw, blaweð 136, mawen 20. ēa + w is
aw in scaweð 135. ēo + w is ou in ou 50;
ow in ow 228, rowen 19, sowen 20, eow in eow 25: its
i-umlaut is represented in untrownesse 265.
In syllables without stress a is levelled to e, abuten
267, bihinden, binoþen 87, biforen 25, sone 38, but biforan 63; o
to e, atter 142, siker 41, swikele 251. e is added in
areles 216 (ārlēas), ofte 57. The prefix ge is i,
ilome 47, iswinc 36, itit 125.
For sw, su is written once in suilch 120; qu is
the regular equivalent of cw, iquemen 95, quike 79. An
l is lost in ful 6, 145, fulenden 243: gg is written for
ng in biginnigge 119. Initial f is once u in uersc
248: f between vowels or vowel and voiced consonant is generally
u, buuen 87, eure 86, iuere 229, solure 264, uuel 251, but
f in ufel 59, 93, ufele 17, ifere 102; frure 232 is probably
frōfre. In heste 242 t is added, but hese 91: ts is
c in milce 72. d is lost in leden 93 and added in
ordlinghes 103: t is written for d in ent 159, fordemet
270, idemet 106, 171, maket 230, undret 208, 247. þ is lost in
abuh 144, ouersich 75; written for d in hefð 147; for it
th is written in with 216, t in etlete 148, 153, 257,
hauet 65, ofþinchet 10, seit 133, þunchet 233, d in cud 159 (but
kuðe 9), uneade 181, h in þench 33, wih 220, c in eclete
74: it is assimilated in attere 127, at ta 156. sc [š] is
sc in scal 24, scameþ 165, scilde 220, sch in schal 19,
s in bisunien 152, ss in fisses 83 and notably sk
in skamie 163. č is generally ch, chele 197, child 3, ich
1, but drunke 258, smike 16; c [k] is palatalized in hech 232,
werch 108, 116, werche 254, but werc 177; it is g in þingþ 5; ah
14, 119, 120, ach 58, 166, hi 221 (= ih) have Anglian h:
čč is ch, feche 222, reche 221, rechð 133, streche 231,
stuche 189, wreche 232: cg is gg, seggen 94, buggen 65,
but abuȝeð 195. Palatal g is very regularly represented by
ȝ, forȝeten 34, ȝeue 74, ȝere 110, but i in medierne 256
(georne), h in ahen
317
161 and g in anige 269: gate 180 is plural: ng is
ngh in ordlinghes 103, ngg in eueningges 162: g is
lost in murþe 154. The prefix ge is lost in bon 137, hud 77,
meind 142, write 101. h has been added initially in hech 232,
helche 89, his 72, 121, 229, honde 193, dropped in is 217, raþer 131,
undret 208, 247: þ displaces h in þurþ 90. For hw,
w appears in wa 114, wet 79, 94, h in hom 95. ch
for h is frequent, achten 129, brochte 183, brichte 75, hechte
268, isech 261, ouersich 75, þurþsicheþ 90, &c. In soht 30,
ht is written for tt.
(2) of the Trinity College MS. Oral
a is a, fare 180, habben 39; a before nasals
regularly a, man 20, þanc 245, þanne, þane, þan are the usual
forms, but þene 343; a before lengthening groups is o,
fonded 149, longe 3, but hangeð 312. æ is regularly a,
after 28, almesse 28, brac 185, fader 150, water 244, but sæd 392,
hweðer 240. e is e, bed 222, beren 95; before lengthening
groups, bende 398, felde 348, imengd 144, strengðe 317, but ængles 94,
angles 284, 355, 380. i is i, þridde 140, child 3, finde
54, but e after w in nele 336, nelle 291, nesten 229, 388,
also in ofspreng 211, þese 312, þesse 328, 383, þesses 338
(ðyssum, ðysses), u after w in swunche 208,
373, as also in ofsprung 198. o is o, bode 264, borde 311,
but on prep. is most frequently a, an. sorg is soreȝe
142 (4), but sareȝe 378. u is invariably u, bigunne 218,
grunde 180. y is e in deden 269, 270, euel 26 (11),
hlesten 230, 387, kenne 206 (4), senne 129 (7), senden 290
(syndun), steche 191, vnnet 5, unwenne 212; u in abugeð
197, abuið 146, bugge 65, dude 2, duden 96, fulle 352, furst 37, gulteð
315 (4), gult 197 (4), hulle 351, misduden 101, 194, muchel 76 (8),
murie 156, murihðe 396, þunche 62, ofþunche 207 (3), sunegeden 262;
i in tihte 272, þincheð 5, 10, 166, swilch 79, 399, hwilch 138,
unwinne 250: king, drihten, drihte are the only forms of these
words.
ā is mostly o; the exceptions are aquerne 366, bihat
368, hat 308, hatere 251, hwan 206, lac 203 (loc in corresponding line
73). ǣ1 is mostly a, ani 53, are 124, has 91,
349, hate 236, sa 83, sade 131 (LWS. sǣde), tache 305, þare 346;
before two consonants, ache 235 (4), afre 86, mast 7, unhalðe 16 (4);
but e in hete 199, mene 170, ðer 216, and before two consonants
arerde 172, ech 23 (8); æ in ænes 185; ea in hease 296. In
forgoð 358 a plural form is used for the singular. ǣ2
is mostly a, adrade 6, dade 3 (4), lache 306, misdade 132, 166,
275, rade 4, strate 235 (4), before two consonants naddren 277, ofdrad
43, 94, 288, unisalðe 200, 378, wapne 340, but e in mere 393,
misdede 209 r. w. ofdrade, unsele 201, iselðe 15; æ
in læte 345, and ia in þiar 165. ē is e, beten 242,
demde 274, iquemd 174, but a in ache 364 (ǣce): doð 35 (8)
is plural form for singular. ī is i, abiden 140,
318
þriste 19, but syrreue 50, ȝietceres 271 (Bülbring, § 306, anm. 1).
ō is o except in cam 117 (4), te 316. ū is
invariably u. ȳ is e in forbet 307, here 45, kedde
193; u in cuðen 99, fure 43, 152, hudden 162, i in litel
46, 264, 331.
ea before r + cons. is, as a rule, a, arme 231,
narewe 343, swarte 282, before lengthening groups mostly a,
hardde 171, warnie 304, but e in erninge 64, metheschele 366;
ea, æ in middeneard 140, 200, middenærd 195: the
i-umlaut is represented by erminges 323, derne 77, smierte 114.
ea before l + cons. is regularly a, alle 22,
biualle 198, before lengthening groups mostly ea, bihealde 288,
eald 4, but bihelden 392, holde 55: the i-umlaut is seen in elde
16 (5), elder 1, 326, elderne 194. eo before r + cons. is
mostly e, herte 74 (3), werc 108 (10), but storre 279, hierte
113; before lengthening groups it is ie in ȝierles 324, ȝierne
49, e in erðe 75, erðeliche 155. In the wur group u
is the rule, wurðe 142, wurðen 334. The i-umlaut after w
gives werse 299, werest 221 (LWS. wyrsa, wyrrest): barneð
253, barnende 222, descend from bærnan; oerre 280 represents
eorre. eo before l + cons. is always e, self
131 &c. eo, u-umlaut of e is e, heuene
27, wereldes 271, but o in woreldes 226, 338; the å-umlaut
is represented by fele 9 (3), wele 155 (4): eo, umlaut of
i is e, icleped 104, henne 400, seðen 9, seuene 28,
bineþen 87, but binime 44, ȝieue 74, niþer 347, quike 78, 192, siluer
268, and after w, suster 150, 187, wude 348. ea after
palatals is a in sal 21, 26, safte 84, same 168, samie 165, sameð
167, scat 367. ie after g is ie in biȝiete 105,
126, ȝielde 45, forȝiete 34 (4), ȝieuen 64 (12), forȝieue 217; after
sc, c, it is i, silde 224 (5), e in chele
199, 236, bicherd 322. The conj. gif is ȝief 121, 166. eo
after g gives ȝeunge 10, ȝeunger 326, jung 4, ȝieuð 377
(geogoð): eo after sc, solde 37, 267, solden 60,
sulle 22, sullen 103. heom is hem; eom, am.
ēa is mostly ea, breade 191, deaðe 106 (7), eaðe 210,
288, 376, uneaðe 183, 191, but ec 46, 107, eðlate 74, 150, 261, rauing
257. The i-umlaut of ēa has regularly e, alesed
136, hereð 89, ileuen 49, temen 108, but ȝiemeð 80. ēo is mostly
e, ben 39 (12), biflen 154, deflen 97, lef 73, frend 30, rewen
358, but ie
in bien 389, bie 4 (4), biede 266, bieð 291,
315, diere 145, fiendes 223, friende 224, lief 203, 261, hielden 172,
298, isien 18 (5), swiere 146, þieue 43; i in sic 201. The
i-umlaut is represented in diere 146, 186, fiend pl. n.
283, friend pl. a. 224, niede 265, þiesternesse 281, but
derlinges 389, frend 185, 304, þuster 77. gesīene is isene 344;
gīet, ȝiet 5, 293; gēar, ȝier 142: ō
after sc is seen in sop 84.
a + g is aw in drawen 47, aȝ in laȝe 172,
295. æ + g is ai, dai 370, fair 392, mai 16, 44,
but maiȝ 88, 124, 217. e + g is ei, wei 353,
eiseliche
319
285, eie 20, seið 112, 135, but treiȝe 375, weiȝ 341, weiȝen 63:
ongegn is aȝien 351. i + g is ie, nieðe 342,
unwrien 162; final ig is i, peni 300, weri 244: i +
h is ih, sihte 369, wihte 78. o + h is
oh, bohte 186. u + g is uȝ, luȝen 161, muȝe
23, 55, muȝen 159, but fueles 83. y + h, drihte 79, 110
with i as usual, abuið 146, abugeð 197. ā + g,
h is oȝ, moȝe 187, oȝen 163; ow, mowe 29, owen 30;
oh, foh 365. ǣ1 + g is ei in
eiðer 62, 239, but aiðer 306, aihware 88: ǣ1 + h is
ai, aihte 42 (5), taihte 272, but eihte 321. ǣ2
+ g is æi in mæi 29; ai in mai 187, grai 365;
ei in iseie 118, iseien 98, 99, 102. ē + g occurs
in forwreien 97, leie 282: ō + g, h in inoh 391,
inoȝh 389, biþoht 8, brohte 185. ea + g, h is
ei, iseih 265; the i-umlaut is seen in mihte 15, 52, 202,
226, mihte 76, nihte 77, 370. eo + h is ih in
brihte 75, rihte 109, rihtwisnesse 72, unriht 93; the i-umlaut is
represented in ouersihð 75, þurhsihð 90. ēa + g is seen in
eien 75, 381, raketeie 283; ēa + h in heie 16, 284, þeih 4, 102, 131:
ēo + g in drie 292, lie 291; ēo + h in liht
316, 382, lihtliche 147. ā + w is ow, bloweð 138,
cnoweð 110, icnowen 163, nowiht 152, sowle 138, but naht 48, &c.,
naðer 367. ī + w is seen in glie 292; ēa + w
in feawe 349; ēo + w in newe 313, rewen 21, sewen 22,
untrewnesse 269: ēow is eow 157.
In unstressed syllables levelling to e takes place as in L:
e is inserted after r between consonants in arefeð 315,
harem 198, iboreȝe 167, narewe 343: quica 192, þa 349 have a for
e; comp. alla 81/76, blaca 82/99.
r is lost medially in metheschele 366; rr is simplified
in werest 221. n is lost medially in ore 383, raketeie 283,
druken 257, seuenihte 142; nn is simplified in done 37, isiene
392. bb is simplified in haben 53, 100, habeð 179, 194, libeð
208. f between vowels is u, buuen 87, eueten 277, deueles
179, but deflen 97, defles 258. t is dropped in a te 92, foremes
197, nah 129; ts is represented by c in milce 8, by
ch in milche 219. d is lost in godcunnesse 393, exchanged
with ð in idemð 173, and doubled in hardde 171. For þ,
d is written in habbed 141, 177, bed 104, 381; th in lothe
61, metheschele 366, sathanas 287: þþ is simplified in seðen 9, 117, 209.
sc [š] is sc in scat 367; s in bisunien 154, safte 84,
sal 21, same 168, sameð 167, samie 165, senche 335, silde 224 (5), sineð
279, solde 37, sop 84, srud 367, sulle 22, syrreue 50; ss in
fisses 83. gītsere is ȝietceres 271. č is expressed by
ch, muchel 12 (23), ich 1 (25), but mukel 209, ic 12, 229:
čč is also ch, feche 226, reche 135, 225, steche 191,
?wichen, 103: cg is gg, seggen 92, g, abugeð 197
(but abuið 146), ligeð 283: cw is always qu, aquerne 366,
quike 78. ġ is regularly ȝ, forȝieuenesse 302, forȝiete
34, but j in jung 4. A y sound has developed initially in
ȝierles 324; comp. ȝeie 13/43. g before ð is c in
strencðe 170, h in murihðe
320
396. For almihtin 337 see 79/17 note.
hw initial is preserved, but hr is r, raðer 133,
rewen 358.
Accidence: (1) of L.
Strong declension of masc. and neut. nouns. In the
s. n. were 31 has added e; sune 186 represents sunu.
Gen. -es, swinkes 64; golde 70 is
probably miswritten for goldes: d. -e, gode 73, middenerde 193, fure
43, werke 27; exceptions are festen 145, god 49, hunger 145
(hungre), king 63 (r. w. erninge), middenerd 198, unriht
209, mostly before vowels, fur 150, werch 116, at mid pause of the
verse: misse 234, acc. has added e. The pl. n. a. of
masculines ends in -es, engles 94, weȝes
72, bendes 188, but wintre 208 (wintru): neuters are -ȝer 140, iswinc 36, lif 246, þing 84, word 9, 158,
doule 97 (dēoflu), gate 180 (gatu), werkes 63, 72, 111
with masc. termination; g. manke 70; d. doulen 269,
wrenchen 251, bende 134, wintre 1, 4, write 101. Of the fem.
nouns, blisse 233, endinge 120, mihte 211, milce 72, murþe 154,
rihtwisnesse 72, sorȝe 140, 194, sunne 201, tilþe 57, unhelðe 197,
witnesse 113, 116, wombe 145 have added e in the s. nom., echte
42, 55, ehte 259, node 261 in the acc. The other cases
sing. and pl. end in e, helle 216, s. g., are
179, s. d.,
53, s. a., but tening 253;
pl. n. are blisse 153, glede 218, mihte 77, saule 136, uniselðe
198, wihte 79; g. misdede 130, souenihte 140, a. dede 10,
hese 91, saule 245, scefte 84, sorȝe 166, stunde 147, sunne 238, tide
137: worldes 222 s. g. is a masc. form, deden 89 pl.
a. a weak form. In the weak declension the termination of all cases
in the singular is e; n. mone 76; g. houene 65; d.
deme 96, wawe 151; a. grome 166, swore 144: plural n. are
reuen 256, swicen 103, eȝen 75, ifere 102, iuere 229. The minor
declensions are represented by mon s. n. 22 &c., monnes
s. g. 30, monne s. d. 117, but mon 201, 259, men
pl. n. 41, monne pl. g. 161, pl. d. 18, but men 18;
boke s. d. 118, (a) boken pl. d. 224 (on
bōcum); feder s. n. 148, fader s. g. 195,
s. a. 186; broðer s. n. 148, s. a.
185; suster s. n. 148, 185; frond s. n. 30,
freonde pl. d. 220, frond pl. a. 183, 219, 220, fond
219.
With the exception of the weak forms laþe 268, betere 26, 142, hattre
247, loure 29, 263, mare 2, 18, wunderlukeste 68, the adjective in the
s. n. is uninflected: alder 1 is ieldra. The
s. d. regularly terminates in e, except uuel 24. The
s. a. is mostly uninflected, as wurst 217, but endelese 141,
herdne 169, lesse 60, muchele 191, 205. The participial āgen is
unvaried, aȝen 30, 108, 113, 116, 261, once ahen 161. The pl. n.
ends in e, arme 227, erȝe 17, herde 169, orðliche 153, but words in
-ig, gredi 264, edi 227, weri 240 and idel 9, lut 104 (lȳt
indeclinable), ofdred 94 are uninflected: pl. d. are fulle, gode
219, uuel 251; pl. a. with e, bare 137, ȝunge 10, sare 36, uuele
170, wreche 170, 250. OE. āna is ane 86, 110, 213: ān is
an
321
s. n. f. 26, are d. f. 205, 207, enne
a. m. 137; nān is na n. 22, 80, 181, nan 59,
nane d. neut. 236, nenne a. m. 119, nane
a. f. 235; naþing a. neut. 98. Adjectives are used
extensively as nouns, s. n. sullic 181, ufel 59, uersc 248;
s. a. beste 51, litel 28, lutel 46, lesse 71, lest 112, mare
2, 54, mest 7 (4), muchel 28. In the s. d. and throughout
the pl. the termination is regularly e, s. d. gode
21, 61, laðe 61, ufele 17; pl. n. eldre 192, fremede 34, laðe,
loue 44, sibbe 34, unholde 36, pl. a. dede, quike 190, uuele
192.
The personal pronouns are ich, hi 221 (= ih), i in ilede 5, me, we,
us, þu, þe, ȝe, eow 25, ou 50, ow 155, 228. The pronoun of the third
person is s. n. he m. 21, hit neut. 11,
d. him m. 24, 44, a. hine m. 12, 34, 116,
him 110, ha f. 215 (Mercian), es (see p. 274) 55, 239, is 144, his 40, 259; hes,
hies 56 (= he + es), hit neut. 15, 38, pl. n. hi
66 (4), ho 19 (11), d. him 165, 184, hom 18, 62, 181, hi a.
180, hom 182, 184. Reflexives are him s. 124, him solue 23 (5),
him solf 115; definitives, solf s. 46, 129, sulf 214, þe solf 29,
him solf 40, 114, 184, hom solf pl. 225; possessives, mi 2, þin
29, his 30, 31, 42, is 217, hire 31, vre 57, 247, hore 101, hure 141.
The definite article is s. n. þe m. 39, 68, þe
f. 74, þa 116, 201, g. þes neut. 193, d. þe
m. 63, 92, 96, þa 156, (at) ta 156, þere f. 233, (at) tere
127, þe 83, þan neut. 212, a. þe m. 232, þe
f. 13, 261, þat neut. 51, pl. n. þe 94, þa 103,
136, (ent) ta 103, a. þa 190. The article is also frequently used
as pronoun antecedent to relatives, þe ðe 69 (5), þa þe 215, þo þe 53,
261, þe þet 55, he who; þa þe 93 (8), þa þi 173, þo þe 61, 96, they who;
þa þe 250, þe þe 252, þe ꝥ 263, they to whom; with þa þe 216, with those
whom; þen þe 71, to him who; þan þe 225, to those who; ꝥ þe 58, what.
Other pronominal uses are of þan 74, of him of whom, þe 169, þa 270,
they; þer fore 144, for it. The compound demonstrative is represented by
þisse s. g. f. 267, þes pl. n. 41, þas pl.
a. 230. The relatives are þe 33 &c., þa 12, 139, 169, þi 173,
often meaning he who, they who 12, 19, 23, 253, þet 21 &c., often
meaning that which, what: þe 10 is genitive, of which, ꝥ 65, 257
dat.: þen 269 is þe + en. Interrogatives are hwa
s. n. 133, hwam d. 202, hom 95; hwat 244, hwet, wet
79, 103, to hwon 105; hweþer 236, hwilke s. d. m. 130,
hwice s. n. f. 136, correlative suilch
s. n. 120, swich, swuch 80, swilche pl. d. 220:
ilca is ilke s. d. 212. Indefinites are wa se 114; me
48 &c.; sum s. 25, summe pl. 147; fole 9 (4), fele 70,
166; eiðer 62; oðers s. g. m. 30, 263, oðer 257,
s. d. m. 186, s. a. neut. 147, oþre pl.
n. 166; ech s. n. 32 &c., hech 232, ec 171, uches
s. g. m. 90, elches s. g. f. 222, eche
s. d. 231, ilche s. d. m. 86, helche
s. a. f. 89; eni s. n. m. 68, anige
s. d. f. 269, eni s. a. neut. 53; moni
s. n. 38, monies s. g. 36; al
s. n. a. 81, 54, alle pl. n. a. 79, 173,
174, 195, 84, alre pl. g. 161, 187.
Five-sixths of the infinitives end in en, showing Anglian influence,
322
the remainder mostly in e, as bode 262 r. w. node, ileste
242 r. w. unstedefeste, ofþinche 203 r. w.
swinke; exceptional are wernin 228, warni 226, seon 16, son 158. Dative
infinitives are to baþien 245, beten 132, habben 39, swenchen 250,
swinden 57, þenchen 252, for . . . cumen 154, for habben 53,
for lesen 180, 182; possibly to frure 232, see note. Presents are
s. 1. adrede, biþenche 6; 3. biswikeð, fulieð 12, þunchet 233,
ofþinchet 10, hauet 65, þurþsicheþ 90, and the contracted forms (as
numerous as the uncontracted), abuh 144, bernd 249, bet 126, 164, bit
126, iherð 89, itit 125, lest 167, sent 42, 46, ouersich 75, þench 33,
wit 84: pl. 1. abuȝeð 195, brokeð 91, þenke we 190; 3. fareð 232,
þolieð 202, wuneð 136: subjunctive s. 1. bidde 134; 2. wende 86;
3. ȝeue 122, giue 56, helpe 156, lipnie 22, 31, rede 8, 156, scilde 220,
wite 122, wurð[e] 140: pl. 3. ?come 124: imperative s. 2.
wende 86: pl. 2. sendeð 25, vnderstondeð 227. Past of Strong
Verbs: I a. s. 3. isech 261; pl. 1. iseȝen 102; 3. 98: I
b. s. 1. com 221; 3. binom 259, brec 183, com 117, nom 205;
pl. 3. comen 139, 202, helen 160, stelen 159: I c. s. 3.
unbond 188; pl. 3. bigunnen 243, swunken 254; subj. s. 3.
bigunne 214, funde 68: II. pl. 3. witen 244, writen 224, wruȝen
160: III. pl. 3. luȝen 159: IV. s. 3. scop 84: V.
s. 3. let 260, hechte 268 (weak form); pl. 3. biheten 242,
holden 170, sowen 20, leten 266. Participles present: I c. berninde 218,
bernunde 245: V. wallinde 218; past: I a. biȝeten 105, forȝeten 98,
iqueðen 9: I b. bistolen 15, forholen 77, iborene 105: I c. iborȝen 165,
r. w. sorȝe, ifunde 177, sprunge 173, unforȝolden 59: II.
iwriten 118: II, III. unwron 160: III. biloken 81, icorene 104,
forlorene 106: IV. forsworene 103. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 1.
hefde 13, sede 155; 3. biþohte 150, cudde 191, herde 262, likede 11,
seide 129, r. w. misdede: pl. 1. hefden 51, leden 93;
3. ledden 209, luueden 93, iquemde 269: subj. s. 3. hefde 137,
hefð 147 (miswritten for hefde). Participles past: alesed 134, ibet 132,
idemet 106, 171, fordemet 270, igult 27, hud 77, ihud 28, ofdred 43,
offerd 157, meind 142, iclepede 104. Minor Groups: wat pr. s. 79,
89, 111, nute hi pr. pl. 236, wiste 1 pt. s. 15, wisten
pt. pl. 139, nusten 1 pt. pl. 102, pt. pl. 225;
ahte pt. s. 2, achten 1 pt. pl. 129; kon pr. s. 71,
cunne pr. s. subj. 213, kuðe 1 pt. s. 9; þerf pr.
s. 43, 44, 45, 163; scal pr. s. 24, 35, schal 19, sculen 1
pr. pl. 47, 95, 161, scule we 92, 95, sculen 2 pr. pl. 20,
49, pr. pl. 94, sculde pt. s. 263, sculden 1 pt.
pl. 60, solde 51, sculden pt. pl. 265, sculde pt. s.
subj. 118 (the past forms in u are Anglian); mei 1 pr.
s. 14, mai pr. s. 35, 40, 69, mei 65, 88, 124, 145, muȝen 1
pr. pl. 157, 206, pr. pl. 66, 237 (in form subjunctive),
muȝe pr. s. subj. 21, 55, 125, muȝen 2 pr. pl. subj. 25,
pr. pl. subj. 19, mahte 1 pt. s. (Anglian mæhte)
222, mihte 13, michte 16, 1 pt. pl. 52, mihten pt. pl.
200; mot pr. s. 33; bon inf. 2 &c., bo 134, em 1
pr. s.
323
1, 4, is pr. s. 26, his 72, 121, 229, nis 77, 80, boð pr.
s. 120 (in form plural), beoð 1 pr. pl. 17, boð pr.
pl. 26, 75 &c., bið 233 (in form singular), bo 1 pr. s.
subj. 4, pr. s. subj. 21 (7), beo 29, bo pr. pl. subj.
177, bon 94, wes 1 pt. s. 1, pt. s. 187, 208, weren pt.
pl. 102, 230, 251, were pt. s. subj. 153, nere 199, ibon
pp. 3; wule 1 pr. s. 155, pr. s. 34, 39, wile 55,
uuel (miswritten for nule) 123, wulleð pr. pl. 97, 226, walde 1
pt. s. 14 (Anglian), pt. s. 35, r. w. unholde
149, wolde 147, nalde 185, 261, nolde 138, walde ȝe 2 pt. pl. 49,
wolden pt. pl. 244, 266, nolden 238; don inf. 37, 69, 92,
do 185, 186, to done inf. dat. 17, 37, deð pr. s. 35
&c., doð 53 (plural form), doð 1 pr. pl. 58, 60, misdoð 206,
doð pr. pl. 19, 79, do pr. s. subj. 18, 21, 69, 210, dede
pt. s. 2, misduden 1 pt. pl. 99, duden pt. pl. 265,
misduden 192, dude 96, idon pp. 7 &c., fordon 270.
(2) of T. Strong declension of
masc. and neut. nouns. In the s. n. aquerne
366, were 31 have added e: sune 188 represents sunu. Gen.
-es, godes 313, goldes 70, werkes 64:
d. -e, ate 262, biede 266, daie 80,
158; exceptions are deað 200, deuel 273, druken 262 (for drunke), fasten
147, 339, god 284, hunger 147 (hungre), peni 300, siluer 268
(seolfre), þanc 245, þing 320, mostly before a vowel, and fur
152, middenærd 195, peni 67, werc 116 at mid pause of the verse: misse
238 s. a. has added e. The pl. n. a. of
masculines ends in -es, ængles 94,
ȝietceres 271, bendes 190, but wintre 212, 356: neuters are folc 217,
ȝier 142, iswinc 36, þing 84, word 9, 160, ibede 301 (gebedu),
werkes 63 (4) (with masc. termination), deflen 97, a weak form:
g. angles 355, 380, manke 70: d. dichen 41, ibeden 339,
wallen 41, wrenchen 255, bende 136, 293, 398, wapne 340, winter 4, worde
312, write 101, angles 284, derlinges 389, erminges 323, gultes 318,
werkes 258, wines 223. Of the strong feminines blisse 237, 380, este
363, idelnesse 7, mihte 76, 215, milce 72, reste 364, 373, rihtwisnesse
72, senne 129, 196, 205, sihte 369, soreȝe 142, 196, 378, strate 345,
tilðe 57, þiesternesse 281, unhalðe 327, unisalðe 378, witnesse 113,
116, wombe 147, have added e in the s. n., aihte 42, 55,
263, niede 265 in the s. a. The other cases sing. and
pl. end in e, s. g. blisse 357, helle 220, sowle 306;
d. bote 318, dade 3, dure 124; a. milche 219, murihðe 396;
pl. n. glede 222, unhalðe 199, wihte 78; g. blisse 355,
misdade 132, 275, seuenihte 142; d. aihte 271, 321; a.
dade 10, 89, 160, laȝe 172, soreȝe 168. Exceptions are woreldes 226 (4)
s.g., sa 83 s. d., has 91 s. a., rauing
257; wihten 285 pl. n., honden 81 pl. d., luues 314 pl.
a., tiden 139. Nouns of the weak declension have e in all cases of
the singular; n. moȝe 187, almesse 28; g. lichame 306;
d. deme 96, herte 309; a. grame 168, swiere 146: pl.
n. are eien 75, 381, eueten 277, iferen 102, 233, 297; a.
swiken 278. The minor declensions are represented by man
s. n. 165, noman 24, mannes s. g. 30, 90, 113,
manne s. d. 117, man 20,
324
maniman 205, men pl. n. 162, 260, manne pl. g. 163, 380,
pl. d. 342, men 263, 354; boc s. d. 118, 228; broðer
s. n. 150, s. a. 187; fader s. n.
150, faderes s. g. 197, fader s. a. 188; suster
s. n. 150, 187; frend s. n. 30, friende pl.
d. 224, frend pl. a. 185, 304, friend 224; fiend pl.
n. 283, fiendes pl. d. 223, r. w. friende.
Remnants of the strong declension of adjectives are wreches
s. g. m. 338 (with woreldes f.), ealde[s] 195, euele
s. d. m. 335, godelease 348, wrongwise 48, bare
s. d. f. 211, stronge 283, gode s. d. neut.
73, unstedefaste 320, wilde 145, hardne s. a. m. 171,
endelease 143, possibly dat., muchele s. a. f.
396. Weak are ealde s. n. m. 287, loðe 272, 287, narewe
349, swarte 282, brode s. n. f. 345, murie 156, bare
s. d. m. 348, heuenliche 96, muchele 92, muchele
s. d. f. 156, narewe s. a. m. 343,
brode s. a. neut. 341, the comparatives and superlatives as
betre 28, wunderlukeste 68, except elder 1 (ieldra), niðer 299,
347, werest 221. All other adjectives are uninflected in the singular:
the termination in all cases of the pl. is e; arȝe n. 19,
lichamliche d. 398, wreche a. 172, but arefeðheald 315,
eadi 231, euel 172, 233, gradi 268, idel 9, iwar 334, weri 244 are not
inflected. āgen is owen 30, oȝen 113, 116, 163, 265 without
variation: āna gives one n. s. m. 86 (7):
ān is on n. s. m. 67, f. 28, one
s. d. m. 348, on 335, ore s. d. f.
383, one 209, 211, one s. d. neut. 384, on
s. a. f. 139, nān, none
n. s. m. 367, non 110, no 37, 50, non
s. n. f. 289, nones s. g. neut. 372, none
s. d. neut. 240, s. a. f. 239: ilca,
ilke s. d. neut. 216. Of the numerals twam 312 is
dat. Adjectives are freely used as nouns, s. n. foh,
grai 365, sellich 183; s. g. godes 371, 372;
s. d. gode 23, lothe 61, juel (yfle) 19;
s. a. emcristen 310, beste 51, lasse 71, mast 112: the
pl. has e, n. fremde 34, elderne 194, heie 164, unholde
36; a. deade 192; exceptions are elder 326 (ieldran),
ȝeunger 326 (geongran), quica 192.
The personal pronouns are ich, i in ibie 4, ibiðenche 6, idude 2,
ilade 5, ime 6, ine 16, 225, me, we, us, þu, þe, ȝie, eow. The pronoun
of the third person is s. n. he m. 21, hie 114, ?hi
38, hit neut. 13; d. him m. 20, 21, 44; a.
hine m. 110, 116, 385, him 34, him f. 129 (masc.
form), hes 219, 241, his 263, hies 243, hes 40 (= he + es), 55, 56,
hit neut. 17; pl. n. hie 22 &c., hi 382, he 248 (5),
d. hem 62, 167, 180, 239 &c., a. hem 184, 305, hes
102, 186, 288, 314, mes 259 (= me + es). Reflexives are us self
310, him 21, 124, him selfen s. 14, 107, 115, him selfe 25, him
self 111; definitives, þe self 29, him self 40, 114, 186, self 131, 218,
379, pl. hemself 229; possessives, mi 2, mine pron. 304,
þi 29, his 30 &c., hire 31, ure 57, pron. 251, here 101. The
definite article is sing. n. se m. 287, þe 39 &c., þa
349, þe f. 116, 205, þet 68 (neut. form), d. þan
m. 63, 96, þe 83, 158, te in ate 92, þare f. 346, 347,
397, þe 83, 237, (a)te 127, ðer neut. 216 (fem. form),
a. þane m. 341, 343, 353,
325
þene 343, þe f. 265, þat neut. 51; pl. n. þe 103,
d. þo 291, 340, 354, a. þo 278, þe 192, 278. The article
is also frequently used as pronoun antecedent to relatives, as þe þe, he
who 25, 66, se þe 53, 55, se þit 112 (= se þe hit), þan þe, to him
who 71, þo þe, those who 213, 234, þar þat, of those who 192, þo þe, to
those who 229, those to whom 267, 275, those who and those to whom 256,
wið þo þe, with those whom 220. Other pronominal uses are of þare, of
that other 328 (representing neut. noun), þar fore, for it 146,
after þan(e) þe, conj., according as 362, þo, those 171. The
compound demonstrative is þis s. g. f. 271, þesses 338
(masc. form), þesse s. d. neut. 328, 383, þos pl.
n. 351, 352, ?þes 103, þese pl. d. 312, þos pl. a.
234, 303, 314; relatives þe 33, 73, in combinations þis 156, 251
(= þe is), þit 112, 141 (= þe hit): þe often means he who 14,
21, 30, se 221; þe, they who 257, þat, that which 22 &c., þe, to
whom 296, of which 10. Interrogatives are hwo 135, hwat 78, 103, 137,
hwan d. after prep. 95, 206, 330, to hwan, why 105, hweðer 240,
hwilch 138 with correlative swilch 79, 399; ilca is ilke 216:
indefinites, hwo se 114; me 48, 63, 342; sume pl. 149, 361; fele
9, 70, 212; feawe 349, 354; eiðer 62, 239, aiðer 306; oðer
s. g. 30, 261, 267, 363, s. d. 116, 188, 360,
s. a. 149, þoðre pl. 168 (= þe oðre), oðer 390;
elch s. n. m. 107, 173, eche 344, ech 23, elch
s. n. f. 360, aches s. g. f. 226,
neut. 371, eche s. d. m. 86, achen 350, ache
s. d. f. 235, elche s. a. m. 132,
f. 89; ani s. n. m. 68, d. f. 273,
a. neut. 53; mani n. s. m. 38,
s. g. m. 36; afric s. n. m. 32, africh
65, afri 117; al s. n. m. 198, neut. 7, alle
s. d. neut. 307, 340, pl. n. m. 22 &c.,
f. 78, alre g. 163, 189, 355, alle d. 318, 389,
a. m. 224, a. f. 84, 89, a. neut. 84.
The infinitives are equally divided between -en, including isien 18, 379, 385, and -e: exceptions are fulendin 247, warnin 230, 232. Those
of the second weak conjugation have -ien,
-ie, wunien 153, 181, 249, samie 165,
wunie 214, 376. A dat. inf. with inflection is to isiene 392,
uninflected are to bete 134, to bihelden 392, to falle 316, to habben
39, te læte 345, te stonde 316, to swenche 254, to swinde 57, to þenchen
256, for to haben 53, for . . . to fulle 352, for lesen 182,
184. Presents s. 1. adrade 6, bidde 136; 3. barneð 253, bihoteð
38, exceptionally biswicað 14, mislicað 13, haued 70, 340, singed 311,
contracted forms, three-sevenths of the total number, abit 130, abuið
146, bet 126, 166, bit 126, 357, itit 125, last 169, lat 129, lat 342,
sent 42, wit 84 and others; pl. 1. abugeð 197, brekeð 91, findeð
332, wilnieð 319, but ileued 176, þenche we 192; 3. fareð 236, folȝeð
346, but habbed 141, 177: subjunctive s. 2. wende 86; 3. bringe
397, cume 156, ȝieue 56 (4), ȝeue 317, helpe 158, hopie 31, rade 158,
reche 135, sende 27, silde 224, 303, warnie 304, wurðe 142; pl.
1. late 307, 341, luue 309, silde 308, ute 337, werie 339, all followed
by we, haben 100, wurðen 334;
326
3. wende 400: imperative s. 2. wende 86; pl. 2.
understondeð 231. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 3. sat 266, iseih
265; pl. 1. iseien 98, 99, 102; subjunctive s. 3. iseie
118: I b. s. 3. brac 185, cam 117 (4), nam 209; pl. 1.
come 330; 3. binomen 263, comen 206, halen 161, stalen 162, come 141: I
c. s. 3. swanc 362, unbond 190; pl. 3. bigunnen 247, gunne
276, swunken 258; subj. s. 3. bigunne 218, funde 68: III.
pl. 3. luȝen 161: IV. s. 3. sop 84: V. pl. 3.
biheten 246, hielden 172, 298, leten 270, 352, sewen 22, lete 264.
Participles present: I c. barnende 222: V. wallinde 222; past: I a.
biȝiete 105, forȝieten
98, ispeken 9: I b. bistolen 17, forholen 76, iborene
pl. 105: I c. iboreȝe 167, ifunde 179, sprunge 175, unforȝolden
59: II. iwrite 117, write 228: II, III. unwrien 162: III. biloken 81,
icorene pl. 104, forlorene 106: IV. forsworene 103: V. biualle
198. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 1. hadde 15, sade 157; 3. bohte 186,
kedde 193 (cȳðde), likede 13, sade 131, taihte 272; pl. 1.
ladden 93, luueden 93; 3. arerde 172, hudden 162, ilaste 246, iquemde
273, leide 263, saden 227, sunegeden 262; subj. s. 3. hadde 139,
149 (= hadde he); pl. 1. swunke we 321. Participles past:
alesed 136, ibet 100, 134, bicherd, bikeihte 322, idemd 106, demde 274,
ofdrad 43, 288, ofdradde pl. 94, ispend 12, teald 120, wuned 57.
Minor Groups: witen inf. 386, wot pr. s. 78, 89, 111, not
148 (= ne wot), witen pr. pl. 294, niten 240 (= ne
witen), iwiste 1 pt. s. 17, wiste pt. pl. 141, nesten
pt. pl. 229, 388 (= ne wisten); oh pr. s. 2; cunnen
inf. 336, can 1 pr. s. 306, pr. s. 71, cunnen
pr. pl. 305, cunne pr. pl. subj. 217, cuðe 1 pt. s.
9; þarf pr. s. 43, 45, 165; sal pr. s. 21, 26, sullen 1
pr. pl. 163, sulen 58, sulle we 92, sullen pr. pl. 103,
sulle 22, 106, solde pt. s. 37, 267, solden 1 pt. pl. 47,
60, solde 51, solden pt. pl. 269; mai 1 pr. s. 16, miht 2
pr. s. 129, mai pr. s. 35, 44, maiȝ 88, 124, 217, muȝen 1
pr. pl. 159, 210, 332, pr. pl. 241, 288, 374, muȝe 207,
pr. s. subj. 23, 55, 125, 338, muȝe we 1 pr. pl. subj.
325, mihte 1 pt. s. 15, 226, pt. s. 202, 1 pt. pl.
52; mot pr. s. 33, moten 1 pr. pl. subj. 317, 400; ben
inf. 39 (12), bien 389, to be 2, am 1 pr. s. 1, is pr.
s. 7, 72, nis 76, 79, beð 23, 32, 114, 1 pr. pl. 19, pr.
pl. 75, 94, 237, bieð 291, 315, bed 104, 381, senden 290, bie 1
pr. s. subj. 4, 136, pr. s. subj. 29, 77, be 32, 251, bien
pr. pl. subj. 80, ben 28, was 1 pt. s. 1, pt. s.
189, 212, waren 1 pt. pl. 100, 333, pt. pl. 102, naren
383, ware pt. s. subj. 155, nare 201, 1 pl. 322, iben
pp. 3; wille 1 pr. s. 227, wulle 157, nelle 291, wile
pr. s. 39, 55, nele 336, willeð pr. pl. 34, 97, 230,
nelleð 374, wolde 1 pt. s. 16, pt. s. 35, nolde 140, 187,
265, wolde ȝie 2 pt. pl. 49, wolden pt. pl. 248, 270,
nolden 247, nolde 242; don inf. 37, 69, 270, to done inf.
dat. 37, to don 19, deð pr. s. 21, 221, doð 35 (8), 1 pr.
pl. 60, pr. pl. 61, 78, do pr. s. subj. 8, 20, 23,
214, 1 pr. pl. subj. 308, dude 1 pt. s. 2, duden 1 pt.
pl. 96, misduden 101, deden
327
pt. pl. 269, 270, misduden 194, idon pp. 7, ido 304,
fordon 274; forgoð pr. s. 358, goð pr. pl. 351, go we 1
pr. pl. subj. 343, 353.
Dialect: L is a copy of a Southern original made by a
Midland scribe of the Southern border. His alterations, casual and
inconsistent, affect mainly the sounds; the inflections are on the whole
Southern, but the extensive retention of inflectional n is due to
the scribe: the pronoun ha 215 and the infinitives warni 226, wernin 228
are Mercian features of the Katherine Group. T is South-Eastern
bordering on Kent, with some trace of Midland influence, such as the
exclusive representation of æ by a, the development of
æ + g as ai, distinct from that of e +
g as ei, the absence of breaking in ea before
l + consonant, the past participles without prefix, the
infinitives in -in, features which point
to the northern border of the South-Eastern area as its place of origin.
In phonology it closely resembles Vices and Virtues. The dialect of
e is Middle South: its rhymes are mostly correct, and it is
probably the best representative of the original. MS. E is assigned by
Jordan to the same area, but nearer its northern border.
Vocabulary: The foreign element in these texts is
small. French are bikehte bikeihte (first appearance), cunin kuning,
ermine (f. a.), martres 50/362 (f. a.), sabeline (f. a.),
serueden, werre: sōt is pre-Conquest French, soht 30/30, written for
sŏtt, a pre-Conquest Latin borrowing: Sathanas with th is French.
Scandinavian are bene, efninges eueningges (influenced by efen),
ille, laȝe loȝe, lofte, niþinges, þralles þrelles, wrange wronge, and
possibly fruden frute, lan 32/64: baþe boþe in a Southern text may
descend from OE. bā þā (Björkman, 108).
Metre: The Septenarius is a purely syllabic metre
of seven feet, with or without end-rhyme, fashioned on the model of such
mediaeval Latin verse as the well-known méum | ést pro|pósit|úm || ín
ta|bérna | móri; the first section of the line having four stresses with
a masculine and the second three with a feminine ending. The trochaic
rhythm of the verse is very often changed into iambic by the addition of
a syllable as prelude before either half of the verse: the full scheme
is accordingly (x)x́xx́xx́xx́ || (x)x́xx́xx́x̀. This is perfectly
exemplified in the Ormulum with its invariable line of fifteen
syllables, but in the PM, the earliest known attempt at the metre in
English, the influence of the native prosody is strong, and a regular
line like Þe Món | þe wúl|e sík|er bón || to háb|ben Gód|es blíssè L 39
is uncommon. The following scansions of L illustrate the deviations from
the norm of the verse:
ich ém | nu áld|er þénẹ | ich wés || awín|tre ént | a láre
Ich wél|de má|re þénẹ | ich déde || mi wít | áhte | bon máre
328
Wel lóngẹ | ich háb|be chíld | ibón || a wórd|e ént | a déde
þáh ich | bó a | wíntre | áld || to ȝúng | ich ém | on réde
5
v́nnet | líf ich | hábbẹ i|léd || ⁊ ȝét | me þíngþ | iléde
þénnẹ ich | mé bi|þénche | wél || ful sárẹ | ich mé | adréde
mést al | þét ich | hábbẹ i|dón || bífealt | tó child|háde
Wel látẹ | ich háb|be mé | biþócht || búte | Gód me nu | réde
Fólẹ id|el wórd | ich hábbẹ | iquéðen || sóððen | ich spék|e kúðe
10
fóle | ȝúnge | dédẹ i|dón || þe mé | ofþínch|et núðe
Mést al | þét me | líkedẹ | ér || nú hit | mé mis|líkeð
þa múch|el fúl|iéð | his wíl || híne | sólf he bi|swíkeð
Ich míh|te háb|be bét | idón || héfdẹ ich | þé i|sélþe
Nú ich | wáldẹ ah | ích ne | meí || for éldẹ | ⁊ fór | unhélþe
15
Élde | me ís | bistól|en ón || ér ich | hít | wíste
ne míchtẹ | ich séon | bifór|e mé || for smí|ke né | for míste
Érȝe | we béoð | to dón|e gód || ⁊ to úf|elẹ ál | to þríste
Marẹ éi|e stónd|eð mén | of mónne || þánnẹ hom | dó of | críste
þe wél | ne dóð | þe hwílẹ (þe) | ho múȝen || wél oft | hít schal |
rówen
20
þénnẹ ho | máwen | scúlen ⁊ | répen || þét ho | ér | sówen
Dó he | to gód|e þét | he múȝe || þe hwílẹ (ꝥ) | he bó | alíue
ne líp|nie ná | món | to múchel || to chíld|e né | to wíue
[þé] þe | hím | sólue | forȝét || for wí|ue né | for chílde
hé scal | cúmen in | úuel | stúde || bútẹ him | Gód bo | mílde
25
Séndeð | sum gód | bifór|en éow || (þe) hwíle | (ꝥ) ȝe múȝẹn | to
hóuẹne
for bét|erẹ is án | elmés|se bifórẹn || þénne | bóð efter | sóuẹne
Álto | lómẹ ich | hábbẹ i|gúlt || a wérk|e ént | o wórde
Ál to | múchẹl ich | hábbẹ i|spént || to lítẹl | ihúd | in hórde
Ne béo | þe ló|ure þé|ne þe sólf || ne þín | mei né | þin máȝe
30
Soht is þét | is óð|ers món|nes frónd || bétre | þén his | áȝen
52
for þer wé | hit mích|te fínd|en éft || ⁊ hább|en bút|en énde
Elision of e occurs under the usual conditions: pronouns like me 6,
10, 15, þe 23, and nouns of the type of wintre 1, 4 are not subject to
it. Instances of hiatus are worde 3, þe 13, werke 27. Syncopation of e
occurs in muȝẹn, houẹne 25, biforẹn, souẹne 26, litẹl 28, and probably
in muchẹl 28, though it might be regarded as forming part of a
trisyllabic verse. The prelude is wanting in the first section, 4, 5, 6,
14, 20, 27, 28; in the second section, 8, 12, 13, 15, 18, 19, 26, 30; in
both, 7, 11, 20, 24. It is doubled in the first section, 30, 52; in the
second, 17. The first foot of each section is sometimes a trochee
instead of an iamb; so in the first section, 9, 15, 17, 21, 25; in the
second, 9. The unstressed element in a foot is sometimes wanting, 15,
20, 22; sometimes it is of two syllables, 8, 12, 24, 26 (three
329
times), 29. Feminine endings before the caesura are not uncommon, 2, 9,
18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24; but the ending of the line is invariably
feminine. A comparison of the manuscripts shows that the author’s
practice was more correct than the representation of any of them; thus
the unmetrical second section of 25 is in e, þe hwílẹ | he méi | to
héuẹne. But it is clear that he used all the licences detailed
above.
Introduction: The Moral Ode is, to all appearance,
an original work, the natural product of an old man’s musings on life
with its lost opportunities, death, and judgement. Its manner and
spirit, simple, earnest, austere, sententious, are of the Old English
cast. The author lived in Hampshire somewhere near the junction of the
Stour with the Avon. He was probably a secular priest, for he makes no
reference to the life of the cloister and names no saint or holy place.
His theological learning was of a commonplace kind and without subtilty.
He may have had some skill in medicine. He lived through the Anarchy,
and the faithless vassal and the tyrannous noble wallow in his Inferno
with the corrupt judge and extortionate official.
Another poem of similar content, the Sermon of Guischart de Beaulieu
in Anglo-Norman, was written in England about the same time as the Poema
Morale. If the author took his name from Beaulieu in Hampshire, where
King John founded a Cistercian Abbey in 1204 A.D. (Dugdale v. 680), he may have written not far
from the home of our poet. It abounds in striking parallels to the PM,
but the editor of the Sermon thinks the resemblances are not
sufficiently close to prove that Guischart used the English poem.
1. nu: in LT
only. awintre ⁊ a lare: a winter and ek on lore J; of wintre ⁊ of
lore M. ⁊ = ent; see 38/159.
2. welde mare:
not in the usual meaning, possess more wealth, as at 21/89, 22/122, 130,
32/55, but either, am more respected, honoured, as at 18/22; ‘for
worulde weorðscypes wealdan,’ Thorpe, Laws, ii. 324. 4, or more
probably, possess more knowledge; if so, ‘knowledge comes but wisdom
lingers.’ Comp. ‘of wisdom wilde,’ OEM 96/94. For welde D reads
ealdi, M eldi, age, grow old.
3. child: comp.
‘Adhuc enim non pueritia in nobis sed, quod est gravius, puerilitas
remanet: et hoc quidem peius est quod auctoritatem habemus senum, vitia
puerorum,’ Seneca, Ep. iv; ‘To longe ich habbe sot ibeo | Wel sore ich
me adrede,’ OEM 160/31. a worde, &c.: comp. 30/27: on worde ⁊
on dede D; of wordes & of dede M.
4. a: on D; of
JM. on: at E; á e; of M.
5-8. Comp. ‘Ki se fie en
cest secle por fol tenc mult celui | Par mei
330
meimes le sai ne mie par altrui | Folement le menai itant cum ieo i fui
| Kar unkes ne fis riens de quanke faire dui | Trop i dui demurer trop
tart men apercui,’ Guischart 32-36; ‘vnnut lif to longe ich lede |
hwanne ich me biþenche; wel sore ich me adrede,’ OEM
192/3, 4.
6. wel ful: wel,
wel D; ful J; the other MSS. wel, but T alters the first half of the
line. wel qualifies biþenche.
7. ꝥ = þet; see
32/55. bi fealt &c. is not original, but an avoidance of the
rare word chilce, which is in E e J T; D has chilðe, M chilse.
chilce, childishness, appears to be formed from child, on the
analogy of milce from mild; it occurs here only. L alters l. 8 for the
sake of the rhyme; the other MSS. are with T.
8. bute, unless;
comp. ll. 24, 210, 271.
9. iqueðen:
ispeken T; ispeke J. Comp. ‘Ifurn ich habbe isuneȝet mid wurken ⁊ midd
muðe | ⁊ mid alle mine lime siððe ich sunehi cuðe | ⁊ wel feole sunne
ido þe me ofþincheð nuðe,’ OEM 193/29-31.
10. þe: so T e,
but þat EJM; þet D. OE. ofþyncan is impersonal, it takes dative
of the person and genitive or, rarely, nominative of the cause; ‘him ðæs
slæpes ofþuhte,’ Ælf., Hom. Cath. i. 86/19 is normal. The indeclinable
relative þe here and in similar places, as ‘Ne do þu non oðer man þing
þe þe wolde ofþunche gief me hit dude þe,’ OEH ii. 179/20, may be doing
duty for the genitive (see 46/292 note).
But in ME. generally hit is expressed as subject, 52/370, or the cause
is nominative, 38/164, 42/203 (notwithstanding the verb in the
singular), 145/104, or the subject is actually personal, 46/271; ‘his
freonden hit ofþuhten,’ L 197. Þat in the other texts is nominative.
11. Comp. ‘Or me
semblet puillent co ke ieo mult amai | Quant del plait me souent enz en
mun queor mes mai,’ Guischart 1205, 6. Mest: Best J. The scribe
should have put the stop after er.
12. Comp. ‘Mult est
fous ke fait trop de sa volontez,’ Archiv lxiii. 84/301. After this line
J interpolates, Mon let þi fol lust ouer-go · and eft hit þe likeþ; see
29/45.
13. þe is
possibly miswriting of þen. M has also þe selþe, but e T D þo; E þer; J
eny selhþe. The meanings given in the dictionaries for iselþe, luck,
good fortune, happiness, do not give a good sense here; if it could mean
experience, the sentiment would be like ‘si jeunesse savait, si
vieillesse pouvait.’ Morris in OEH i. 160/13 translates discretion.
14. elde
&c.: comp. 20/72; 40/197; 48/323.
15. wiste:
awuste E; á wyste e; iwiste TD; er þan ich hit wiste JM.
16. smike:
smeke E; smeche e D; smoke J; smiche M.
331
17. al to
þriste, all too bold, ready; comp. 157/127.
18. stondeð:
B-T quotes under standan (of direction) ‘Swa micel ege stod
deoflum fram eow,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. i. 64/25, with meaning, came over;
similar is ‘Norð-Denum stod atelic egesa,’ Beowulf, 783. In ME. stonden
has developed the meaning, exists (comp. Fr. être < stare). For the
construction comp. ‘non eige ne stand of louerde,’ OEH ii. 39/20,
139/28; ‘of iwel and dead hem stondeð greim,’ GE 392: men here is
dative like hom. Variations are, ‘þer hem stod eie;
þer hem ne sholde,’ OEH ii. 73/30; ‘him ne stod æie to naþing,’ L 11694;
‘alle heom stod him æie to,’ id. 27100; ‘wið dead him stood hinke and
age,’ GE 432; 62/37; ‘uor elles vuele us stode,’ AR 312/9. For
do, subjunctive after þanne with comparative, comp. 31/28; ‘he
brycð swiðor on ðone suðdæl þonne he do on þone norðdæl; ⁊ sio hæte hæfð
genumen þæs suðdæles mare þonne se cyle þæs norðdæles hæbbe,’ Orosius
24/26.
19. See 32/35.
hwile þe: comp. 32/33, 55: elsewhere L has the more usual hwile ꝥ
(always unmetrically), or hwile.
20. ȝe: hy E e;
hi DM: but J has, Hwenne alle men repen schule · þat heo ear seowe. For
ꝥ E has þer þe; e, þer; M, her þat.
21. to gode,
for good; comp. 32/61. he (muȝe): hi D; ȝe E e M; ye J: similarly
in the case of the following he.
22. lipnie,
depend on, trust to: hopie E e; leue D; truste M.
24.
bute—milde: a formula of frequent occurrence; see KH 80
note.
25. D alters, Sende
sum god biuoren him | man, ꝥ wile to heuene; the scribe of E copied the
end of l. 21, reading, þe wyle ȝe ben aliue, and in the second half of
the next line, þanne ben after vyue.
27, 28 are misplaced,
the other MSS. have them as in T. With 27 comp. ‘Ifurn ich habbe
isunehed mid worke ⁊ mid worde,’ OEM 193/21; and with 28, ‘muchel ich
habbe ispened; to lite ich habbe an horde. | Hord þat ich
telle · is almesse dede,’ id. 193/24, 25; ‘Ne des altres uertuz nule ne
reseruai | . . . | Or ai si despendu ke ieo nule nen ai,’
Guischart 1184, 6.
29, 30 are wanting in
D. þe solf: þi self EJ. With mei . . . maȝe,
comp. ‘Ne naueþ he mey ne mowe. | þat durre one þrowe. | Bi hym sitte ne
stonde,’ OEM 79/208-10, 179/161, 2. With l. 30 comp. ‘Qui mieux aime
autri que sei au molin fu mort de sei.’ ‘Videtur enim quod quis alium
plus quam se amat qui alios admonitionibus et correctionibus pascit et
seipsum non emendat,’ Hauréau, Notices, ii. 281, an application which
robs the proverb of its apparent crude selfishness.
31. lipnie:
lipne J; hopie E e T D; truste M.
32. ech: vych
J; the others are with T.
33. to him: the
others have him. þe mot: he is to be understood
332
from him in the preceding clause, see 6/18
note. E has þe he mot, D, ꝥ he, M, þat he, the other MSS. he.
34. fremede . . .
sibbe: a formula, see KH 64 note. A variant is, ‘to freomede ⁊ to
kunne,’ OEH ii. 259/30. wule is singular; comp. T.
35. Comp. 30/19,
44/238. The proverb is common, as, ‘he ne mei hwon he wule, þe nolde
hwule þet he muhte,’ AR 338/19; ‘hit is riht Godes dom, þet hwo ne deð
hwon he mei, he ne schal nout hwon he wolde,’ id. 296/22; Hendyng C.,
stanza 46.
36. The fruits of many
a man’s hard toil often pass into the possession of his enemies. Comp.
22/129, 30. From ‘Scrutetur foenerator omnem substantiam eius: et
diripiant alieni labores eius,’ Psalm cviii. 11, in the OE. version,
‘Ealle his æhta unholde fynd, rice reðe mann, rycene gedæle; and his
feoh onfon fremde handa,’ Thorpe, Psalter, 317/11. sare iswinc is
plural.
37. don afirst,
put off: OE. fyrst, respite: comp. ‘Vre deð he do in firste ȝet,’
OEH i. 71/294. slawen: so e; but sclakien E; slakien J; sleuhþen
D; sclakie M. ‘Nolite deficere benefacientes,’ 2 Thess. iii. 13.
40. he his: he
it E; he hit JD; he e M. mid iwisse, of a certainty: OE. mid
gewisse: ‘mid iwissen,’ 38/139 is mid gewissum: ‘iwis,’
187/349 represents s. neut. of gewiss: ‘fuliwis,’ 79/17,
‘fullȝewiss,’ 89/20 is the same strengthened by ful: ‘to fuliwis’
190/445 shows the same treated as though it were a noun: similarly ‘to
fuligewis,’ 192/508, a compound of fulli + gewiss; Orm has
contracted ‘fuliȝwiss.’ From to wisse, mid wisse come ‘to
nafre none wisse,’ 45/240, ‘mid neure nane wisse,’ 44/236. See KH 1209
note.
42-65. Comp. generally
27/274-291.
43 T. After For, þar
ne has been omitted by the scribe.
44. þerf he,
copied by mistake from the preceding line. The MSS. agree substantially
with T: e has, þer ne mei hí be nime. laðe . . . loue:
formal; comp. ‘mid lufe ge mid laþe,’ BH 45/8; ‘litel me is of ower
luue, leasse of ower laððe,’ SJ 27/14.
45. of ȝeve ne of
ȝelde, of bribes to officials and of taxes; things which subtract
from his gains on earth. Comp. ‘hem þat desireth | Ȝiftes or ȝeresȝyues
· bi cause of here offices,’ Piers Plowman, B. iii. 98, 99; Böddeker,
Alteng. Dicht. 104/53; 44/256: Mede was very busy in those days. This is
undoubtedly the original reading; J D concur, but E has of wiue ne of
childe, similarly e; M of ȝunge ne of ȝelde: here in T is hire,
usury.
46. For solf
bereð E has the singular variant, suuel and bred, savoury meat and
bread.
47, 48. Not in D.
draȝen ⁊ don, convey our wealth and deposit it:
333
comp. ‘La devriüm traire | trestot nostre afaire, | nostre estage
prendre, | le nostre doner | por nos delivrer, | partir e despendre,’
Reimpredigt 56/110, which is possibly the source of the English; see
also 51 note. Otherwise draȝen with þider would naturally
mean, proceed to that place, as in ‘Traez uers cel pais chascon a grant
espleit,’ Guischart 1259, but that leaves don without meaning. It
has the sense of the fuller phrase in l. 42: see NED, do I 3.
Morris indeed connects don wel which is against the metrical pause as
indicated by the point after don in E e J: E e moreover read wel
oft ⁊ wel ȝelome, and J has hit in l. 48 for naut. For wel ofte
see 49/329, for wel ilome, 134/97. M reads þider we scolde bere ⁊ draȝe,
ofte ⁊ wel ylome, with hit in the next line, as in J. ofte ⁊
ilome: OE. oft and gelōme; comp. 48/325, 119/78, 127/360; ‘Hi
hedden teone and seorewe · ofte and ilome,’ OEM 89/14, 169/22; ON 1545;
L 16500.
48. wrangwise
dome: comp. 44/256. E reads mid wronge ne mid woȝe.
50. ne reue: ne
se ireue e, the others with T. The ‘reue’ is the sheriff. Comp. ‘Ia nuls
hom ki cel (i.e. luer) ad ne se deit esmaer | Kar li nel pot tolir ne
prouost ne ueier,’ Guischart 614, 15; ‘Il nen i ad prouost ne nad plaiz
ne contez | Sun aueir ni ert pris ne a marche menez,’ id.
375, 6.
51. hefden:
hedde e; the others have the present. Comp. ‘Tut le mielz ke auum a deu
nus deurum traire,’ Guischart 329.
53. er, for
her, which the other MSS. have.
55. halden wel,
possess to good purpose, make good use of. M reads wel wile wite.
56. hies: his E
e; hit J; hi D; he M. hes: heo hit E; he his e; he hit J; he hi
D; hi M.
58. doð: yeueþ
J, with T.
62. Eiðer,
both. Both of them shall hereafter seem both too little and too much; a
curious way of saying, He shall think his good deeds too little and his
bad deeds too much. The MSS. are in accord. Comp. ‘De tut le plus kat
fait est dolens e pensanz | Del bien li semble poi · li mals li semble
granz,’ Guischart 30, 31.
63. weien:
comp. ‘Dunc serrat a chascon tuz ses biens demustrez | Sulum nostre
labur dunc serrum mesurez | E les biens e les mals tuz nus serrunt
pesez,’ Guischart 442-4.
64. swinkes
lan: comp. ‘⁊ ta shall ure Laferrd Crist | Att ure lifess ende | Uss
ȝifenn ure swinnkess læn | Wiþþ enngless eche blisse,’ Orm 111/3256-9;
‘lure ow is to leosen | ower swinkes lan,’ SK 804; ‘La receura chacon
luer de sun labor,’ Guischart 311. lan: lyen E; lien e M; lean
JTD: see 27/289.
334
66. þe (mare):
þe þe E e M; se ꝥ D. J rewrites, þe riche and þe poure boþe · ah nouht
alle ilyche. muȝen: mai E; mei e; the others omit as T.
67. Al se, just
the same: e Eal se, omitting the nominative, like L, but He alse E; þe
poure J; Al suo on D; Ase wel þon M. alse oðer: se þe oþer E e;
alse þe oþer M; swo oþer D; þe riche J.
68. cheþ: ware
e J D T M; ȝare E, a case of letter substitution.
69.
mid—þonke: equivalent to ‘of gode wille,’ l. 73: see
10/167 note.
70. se þe þe:
se þe E e; swo se D; so he M; J omits 69, 70. manke: the mancus
was ‘not current coin but merely money of account,’ Grueber, Handbook of
Coins, introd. p. ix: ‘fif penegas gemacjað ǽnne scylling and þrittig
penega ǽnne mancus,’ Ælf. Gram. ed. Zupitza 296/15, 16. The word was in
OE. mancus, g. -es.
m. its pl. n. mancussas, pl. g.
mancussa; s. mancs, pl. mancsas also occur (ES
xxxix. 349). The Latin forms were mancusa, mancus, manca, from the last
of which may have been derived an OE. *manc with pl. a.
*mancas = mancys, Kemble, Codex Dipl. ii. 380, and pl. g.
*manca, the original of manke here. e reads marke. golde
may mean, in gold; OE. on golde, but more probably it is a
mistake for goldes as in the other MSS. For fele with genitive
see 132/9 note.
71. kon mare
þonc, acknowledges, feels more thankful; like Fr. savoir gré. þen
þe, to him who: ðan þe E e D; ye þat J; him þat M.
73, 74 T: see 203, 204
T.
74. ec lete
appears to be a mistake for eðlete, of small account as in the other
MSS.; ȝeþlete M: comp. Et lete 38/148, 153. of þan, of whom, of
him whose; ðenne E e; þer J; þanne D; of him þat M. J rewrites ⁊ lutel
he let on muchel wowe · þer þe heorte is ille; wherein ‘wowe’ is
explained by Kock (Anglia xxv. 318) as = vowe, votive offering.
76. houen fur,
probably daylight; possibly lightning or the stars: heuene · ⁊ fur J;
dai ⁊ fur E; dei ⁊ fur e; ⁊ alle sterren D; sterre ⁊ fur M.
þestre: see 123/230. T omits this line and substitutes a new line
at 80, not in the other MSS.
79. þenkeð . . .
doþ: doþ . . . queþeþ M.
80. swich se,
such as: swilc se E e; comp. ‘þa com þær heofonlic leoht . . .
swilc swa hi ær ne gesawon,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 184/262; 76/29.
swilch in T, with which the other MSS. agree, = such as; comp.
36/120; ‘Ðonne ic wæs mid Iudeum ic wæs suelc hie,’ Cura Past. 101/5.
The fuller expression is seen in, ‘we ne magon . . . nan þing
geseon swylc swilc hyt is,’ Blooms, ES xviii. 354/26.
80 T is probably the scribe’s own attempt to remedy the omission of
335
l. 76: Boðe appears to refer to ‘crist’ and ‘drihte.’ þe his
bien, such as be his, his own.
81. biloken:
comp. 13/37.
82. wettre . . .
londe: a common formula: comp. 26/271 note; 40/194; ‘Vor hi bynomen
him saulen · in water ⁊ in londe,’ OEM 56/682, 162/13; ‘a londe ⁊ a watere,’
L 550, 562, 17990. See KH 245 note.
83. fuȝeles
&c.: comp. 143/79.
84. wit ⁊
waldeð: wit ⁊ walt E. Comp. 139/17.
85. buten:
abuten, in both places E e; al buten D: a buten ende represents OE. ā
būtan ende, ever without end; by union of the first two words a
false form abuten, without, grew up, as at 52/369, 371, 373, alongside
abuten, OE. abūtan, onbūtan, around, about. J rewrites, He wes
erest of alle þing · and euer byþ buten ende.
86. wende
&c., go where you will; so ‘Ga quar þou ga,’ CM 14072; ‘for wende
woder þou wende; þine daȝes beoþ at þe ende,’ L 16110.
Expressions of the same form are ‘comen þer heo comen,’ L 20667, 23021;
‘fare wha swa auere fare,’ id. 20849, 23223; 104/176; ‘likien swa me
liken,’ L 22511, 30544; ‘wreaðe se þu wreaðe,’ 141/54; 143/84;
145/115.
88.
þe—wille: the MSS. have the order in T. uwer,
anywhere: aihwar D (= OE. ǣhwǣr, everywhere); ichwer J;
oueral M; but E e have eiðer, OE. ǣgðer, both; perhaps for eaðe,
or eaðere, easily, more easily.
90. Wi, alas;
not in E e; wy J; wai D. Comp. 36/105; ‘wei þet he eure hit wule
iþenche,’ OEH i. 21/28; ‘Awi leof ware þu me, Heu dilecta mihi,’ OEH ii.
183/7: Heu is translated by Aweilewei, id. 183/15.
hwat—rede, what shall be to us for advisable? a common tag;
see KH 825 note.
91. gulteð,
&c.: comp. 117/18.
92.
et—dome: comp. ‘at þan muchele dome,’ L 23056;
16/136 note. D has at to heaȝe dome; M, atte heȝe dome.
93-96 are omitted in
D. J has them in the order 93, 96, 94, then a new line, Crist for his
muchele myhte · hus helpe þenne and rede, 95, 97.
94. engles:
comp. 17/146; ‘Dunc tremblerunt li angle qui tant sunt beaus e clers | E
nus que ferum dunc chaitif maleurez | Ki en peche uiuom,’ Guischart
446-8.
95. beren biforen
us: e, omitting us, has the right reading. The phrase is Fr. mettre
avant, put forward, allege as a plea; comp. ‘Mes tu iés si engresse e
fole, | qu’avant vuels metre ta parole,’ Marie de France, Fables, ed.
Warnke, 305/15, 16. Gabrielson, Archiv cxxviii. 327, notes the
similarity of the expression to ‘Mais eiez charite ke uus metez de
uant,’
336
Guischart 1896, but the metaphor there is that of interposing a shield
against the darts of the devil. hom: wan E; hwan e J T; wham M:
all the readings mean, what.
96. þo, a
mistake for we, which the other MSS. read. deme is object of
iquemen.
99. The variant
iseien is peculiar to T: it is evidently due to l. 98.
101. Comp. 119/70,
72.
103. Comp. ‘Quant
ileoc tremblerunt martir e confessur | Dites mei que ferunt pariurie e
traitur,’ Guischart 319, 20. þes wichen in T may be a false
division of words, or it may be a deliberate variation, meaning, these
witches (wicca, wicce).
104. hwi: the
other MSS. have the exclamation like T; a wei D; Awi M. The corruption
in L has brought about the insertion of ⁊, which is also in D. ‘Multi
enim sunt vocati, pauci vero electi,’ S. Matt. xxii. 14.
105. wi hwi:
comp. ‘Wei hwi beo we uule on þisse wrecche world,’ OEH i. 33/36; ‘Wi
qui þan mak we us sa kene,’ CM 23845. to hwon: to hwi D;
hwi J.
107. bi
clepie, accuse. D has biclepien, bitelle ⁊ deme.
108. All MSS. except
L have temen or teme. For he J has hit, which is probably object
of temen, the subject of schal being that of the preceding line.
110. ȝere,
fully; OE. geare: the other MSS. have wel. For him J has, his
þonk.
112. bi seiþ,
declares; with mest, has most to say about it. Comp. ‘Seó wearð
gebróht and besǽd þám cyninge,’ B-T. suppl. s.v. besecgan;
‘elch sinne þare him seluen biseið,’ OEH ii. 173/6. he seið e J; the
others seiþ only; seit E. With stille, silent, comp. 135/105;
‘sedebit solitarius et tacebit, Me schal sitten him one ⁊ beon stille,’
AR 156/18.
114. hal:
vnhol J. M has Þe man þat saiþ þat he is lame, himself he wot þe
smerte.
115. ‘Igitur ex
nostro iudicio iudicat nos Deus,’ Alcuin ii. 131.
116. J agrees with
L, but E e have oðer with T, and D aider: all meaning, either death or
life.
117. com to
monne, was born; comp. 113/30.
118. The original is
preserved in swilc hit si abóc jwriten e, as if it were written in a
book; similarly E; J has Al so he hit iseye; D swich hit were on boc
iwrite, | isien he sel hit þanne. iþenchen, remember: OE.
geþencan.
119-121. Compare
generally, ‘forðan ðe god ne besceawað na, hwilce we ær wæron, ac he
besceawað, hwilce we beon, þonne we dælan sceolon
337
sawle ⁊ lichaman. Þæt is to witanne, þæt god ne secð na þæs godan
weorces angin, ac he secð þæne ænde, forðan ðe ælc man sceal beon demed
be ðam geearnungum, þe he hæfð, þonne he of ðisum life hwyrfan sceal,’
AS. Hom., ed. Assmann, 149/138-43; Orm 111/3248-55. S. Bernard quotes as
from Isidore, ‘Non iudicat Deus hominem de praeterita vita, sed de suo
fine,’ Opera ii. 840: for further parallels see Alcuin ii. 141; Fecunda
Ratis 4/8.
119. efter:
in accordance with: comp. 119/80.
120. suilch,
such as; comp. 34/80: swulc se E; swich se e; DM have iteald, iteld,
estimated; J rewrites, Ah dom schal þolyen vych mon · after his
endinge.
121. ȝefe is
probably due to ȝeue in the next line; ȝif E e; ȝef M; yef J; ef D. The
inversion in T is peculiar to it. e reads for the last half of the line
⁊ gód ȝíf gód ís þenne.
122.
wite—lende: in T lende is probably pr. s. subj. of
lenden, OE. lendan, to arrive, in the very rare causal use, bring
to land (lǣnde, pt. of lǣnan, would, by rule, be
lande in this text): the sense then may be, grant that he convey us to
heaven, a forced meaning for lende; similarly J with, God yef vs vre
ende gód · hwider þat he vs lende. On the other hand the scribe of D,
regardless of the rhyme, can have meant only lǣnde in writing,
wite whet he us lende, meaning, preserve what he has entrusted to us,
i.e. our souls; the expression of a familiar idea as at 121/144;
127/339, 368, and similarly lenne in e r. w. þenne, must be
taken to represent lǣne, pr. s. subj. of lǣnan. The
meaning of L, with which E and M agree, is probably the same, but if
lende means convey, then wite must have the rare sense of,
see to it, provide, as in, ‘Wite ȝe þet ȝe ȝemen þenne halie sunnendei,’
OEH i. 11/28. It would seem that all the texts derive from a corrupt
source; the author may have written ⁊ wite us þen we wende; comp.
‘For-þi er we wende. | Makie we us clene and skere. | Þat we englene
ivere. | Mawe beon o buten ende,’ OEM 73/27-30; 21/116-17.
123. uuel:
mistake for nule, due to the persistence of uuel from 121.
124. J reads, þat
deþ cume to his dure. him is in L only: comp. 30/6.
125. Comp. ‘Mult
avient sovent, | quant li mals le prent, | qu’il ne puet parler, |
penitence prendre | ne le suen despendre, | partir ne doner,’
Reimpredigt 32/64. itit: bilimpeð D.
126. for þi:
þi E e, with same meaning; D omits. biet is difficult; possibly
it is a mistake for beiet, kneels; see 132/3; 143/84. For bit ⁊
bet, prays for pardon and amends, comp. 86/120. The variations in
the MSS. here look like attempts to mend a faulty source. E, like T, has
bit ⁊ beȝit ⁊ bet, prays for pardon, obtains it and amends: e has beot ⁊
beat
338
⁊ bit, the first verb probably from beoden, the second possibly for
beȝat: þat bit ore J; þat ore bit M gives a good sense, but is plainly
from the previous line. Finally the reading of D, ꝥ bit ⁊ bete ⁊ bet,
suggests that the author wrote, þat beot bote ⁊ bet, that offers
satisfaction and reforms; comp. 136/132, and for bet, 38/164.
127 T. þe
deað: the article is often so prefixed in ME.; see NED. iii. 73 for
examples.
128. latheð:
leted E; leteþ e J M; uorlet D: probably the scribe of L meant to write
lateð as in T, he does not elsewhere use th.
129, 130 T. These
lines, not in L, were added on the margin of e and then partially
erased. They are not, in my opinion, original. J has, Bilef sunne hwil
þu myht · and do bi godes lore. | And do to gode hwat þu myht · if þu
wilt habben ore. nah: for naht; Sin leaves you and not you it,
when you cannot commit it any longer. him shows confusion of
genders, synn is fem. For him þan þu, e has hi þanne þus,
E hire þanne þus (= þu es). With the sentiment comp. ‘Nulla igitur
laus est non facere quod facere non possis,’ Lactantius 579; ‘Si enim
tunc vis poenitentiam agere, quando peccare non potes; peccata te
dimiserunt, non tu illa,’ Alcuin ii. 135; ‘Or l’estuet laissier, | ne
puet mais pechier, | n’at mais a durer,’ Reimpredigt 36/71 (l’ = son
pechié).
130 T. abit,
puts off, delays.
129, 130. Comp. ‘Ceo
dit escriture: | Tant cum li huem dure | en sa poesté, | se dunc se
repent: | a deu veirement | s’est ja acordé,’ Reimpredigt, 38/73. The
reference is possibly to Isa. lv. 7. ꝥ: E e agree with T; For we
hit ileueþ wel J; Swa ileuen we hit muȝen D.
132. þer:
probably a miswriting of er, previously, hitherto: her T; hier D, in
this world. haueð to: scal E; sceal e.
134.
Ne—bet, ought I not rather to pray? In 136 T, bie
ich means, may I be. For alesed . . . of bende, see
52/394. D reads, ne recche ic bote bi ic alesd; and M similarly.
135. scaweð,
shows, is pointless: with T the other MSS. have icnaweð e; iknoweþ J D;
knoweþ M; but icwoweð E, an error of anticipation.
137-140. Comp.
generally, ‘El mund n’ad nul home, tant eit de leaute, | S’il aveit par
mort le siecle trespasse, | E en enfern un oret este | E sentu la puur e
veu le oscurte, | S’il reveneit en vie e en prosperite, | Ke james feit
mal, tant serreit effree,’ Archiv lxiii. 81/152-7. In 138 T hit
is a scribe’s mistake for hete.
137. twa bare
tide, merely two hours; comp. 221/227. After 138, J has Swiþe
grimlych stench þer is · ⁊ wurþ wyþ vten ende | ⁊ hwo þe enes cumeþ þer
· vt may he neuer þenne wende, which are not in any other MS.,
339
followed by two lines corresponding to 42/221-2, which fit in better
here.
139. þa hit:
þit E T = þe hit; ꝥ e; ꝥ hit D; heo hit J; & wite hit M. The
allusion is to such legends as those of Owain and Tundale. For mid
iwissen, see 32/40.
140. wa wurð:
so T M; but, uuel is E e; þer wurh D; þer þurh J. for, in exchange
for.
141. In is a
scribe’s mistake for Ent: wa wurð, or in E e uuel is, must be supplied
from the preceding line. The second þe is a superfluous
repetition of the last word on the preceding recto. J avoiding
for reads ⁊ for þe blysse þat ende haueþ; endeles is
þe pyne.
142. water
drunch, water-drink; comp. ‘Alls iff þu drunnke waterr-drinnch,’ Orm
ii.
149/14482. The other MSS. avoid the compound; water to drinke E;
weter í drunke e; wateres drung J; betere were drinke wori weter D;
wateres drinch M. atter: comp. ‘God for ure secnesse dronc attri
drunch o rode,’ AR 364/17.
143. brede,
roast meat; OE. brǣde: comp. ‘he nom his aȝe þeh |
. . . þer of he makede brede. | he bredde heo an hiȝinge,’ L
30581, 3, 4.
144. All too dear he
buyeth it, who giveth his neck for it.
145. ‘Plenus venter
facile de ieiuniis disputat,’ S. Jerome, Epist. 158, 2.
146 is intelligible
if of pine is understood after cnauð. E has þe naht not · hu hi
scullen ilesten; similarly e.
147. stunde:
hwile E.
148. Et lete:
see 34/74 note. J reads ⁊ lete for crist
beo wif.
149, 150 are wanting
in e M. For oðerluker, see 125/270.
151. wawe . . .
wene: the combination is formal: comp. 142/77: but E has wa
. . . pine, e, wa . . . wawe; D, wo . . .
wope; J, Eure he wolde in bonen beon · ⁊ in godnesse wunye | Wiþ þat he
myhte helle fur · euer fleon ⁊ schonye, and similarly M.
152. Wið ꝥ
þe, provided that, if only; wid þan þe E, wið þan ðe e M, = wīþ
þǣm þe; Wiþ þat J; wið þet D. T J D M add he, unnecessarily, as it
is in the principal clause.
153. J reads, ⁊ lete
sker al þes worldes weole, where ‘sker’, utterly, is OWScand.
skǽrr, clean.
154. L appears to
mean, Because to attain to that great bliss is joy of a certainty. But
cume in T E e, come in D are subjunctives dependent on for, in
order that he may come, the subject not being expressed because of
him in the principal clause; see 6/18: for . . .
cumen in L could have the same meaning, comp. ‘for lesen’ 40/180,
182, but a subject is needed for is. For with the
subjunctive is not common, but see NED. iv. 412,
340
col. 3; in this use it descends from for þǣm þæt. J has Wiþ þat
he myhte to heouene cumen. In Te þis = þe is; D has þet is, E þat
is heuenriche. For mid iwisse, see 32/40.
155. ꝥ . . .
of: see 1/3.
157. eþe: so
E e D; J M omit; sore T is isolated, but J reads ⁊ sore vs of-drede.
158. he: in L
only: the others agree with T: al is in L T only.
159, 160. þer
men, wherein men. stelen . . . helen change places in T M
only. wruȝen . . . ⁊ helen: the combination is formal;
comp. ‘ase þe uikelares wreoð ⁊ helieð,’ AR 88/18; a reminiscence of
‘quoadusque veniat Dominus, qui et illuminabit abscondita tenebrarum et
manifestabit consilia cordium’, 1 Cor. iv. 5.
162. riche:
so J only; heiȝe E; heȝe e D M.
164 T. to þe:
a mistake which has probably arisen out of an original þo: efning is
constructed with wið.
163-166. Not in J.
After scal E has þei, e þeh, D þeð, T þeih, nevertheless.
164. ofþincþ:
see 30/10 note. The subject of bet
is he, as implied by him preceding.
165. scameþ . . .
gromeð: comp. ‘Teonen þolien ⁊ gromen ⁊ schomen umbe stunde,’ HM
7/8, and for the corresponding nouns in the next line, ‘Þu vs hauest
iwroht þes schome. | And alle þene eche grome,’ OEM 83/334, 5; ‘Me to
sorge, scaðe and same,’ GE 302; OEH ii. 173/13, 14, 23.
166. þo þre:
so D þoðre, but þe oþre E e M. oft: e D M agree with T; but E
has, þat sculle beon forlorene.
167, 168. Comp. ‘Ia
ne porrat nuls dire ke il seit enganez | En tant com li oil clot serrat
li plaiz finez,’ Guischart 444, 5.
168. mene,
with him reflexive, complain; comp. ‘þat he ne mahte nanes weis |
meanen him of wohe,’ SK 1235, 6. D has bimene; comp. ‘Men hem bimenin of
litel trewthe,’ Rel. Ant. ii. 121/11. At 196/663, 205/280 it has the
more usual sense, with reflexive, of bemoan. strengþe . . .
wronge: comp. 19/48-51, 32/48-50, 44/256: the perversion of justice
by bribed or overawed judges is a common theme in the literature of the
time; see Wright, Political Songs, pp. 224-30. strengþe,
violence, has usually a determining adjective in this sense, as ‘nawt
wið luðer strencðe,’ SK 1234; ‘liste ne luðer strengðe,’ id. 1516, but
see 60/18.
170. uuele
holden, handled, treated, hardly; comp. ‘and heom heold swa
harde; ⁊ mid hærme heom igrette,’ L 29937, 8.
redde: a mistake
341
for rerde, as in E; the others have arerde, set up, instituted; comp.
15/80, 85.
171. ec: Ac
E; End e; ech D; Euerich M. 171, 172 are not in J.
176, 178. forð
mid: see 1/19.
177. habbeð
doules were: nabbeð god idon E e: comp. 44/254.
178. grunde:
comp. 46/295; ‘alesde us of helle grunde,’ OEH i. 19/8; ‘al forloren
into helle grunde,’ id. 21/35; see also 119/82. For faren forð
mid, E e have, falle swiþe raþe.
179. are: ore
E J D. The text means, ever without mercy and without end, but Lewin
confusing ore with orde as in ‘Wiþþutenn ord ⁊ ende,’ Orm 234/6775,
translates ‘ohne Anfang und Ende.’ e reads á ⁊ buten ende.
180. gate:
dure E e J D; M omits. for lesen: for lese e; the others have to.
The infinitive of purpose with for is uncommon, comp.
173/409.
181. sullic,
wonder. wa . . . uneade, OE. unēaðe, are historically
adverbs, lit. though to them it be wofully and grievously; bet, wwrs,
&c., are used in the same construction; see 46/289: comp. with
uneade, ‘þer fore hire wes uneðe,’ L 4503; ‘an heorte him wes
unneðe,’ id. 26730. J has, he mawe wunye eþe, they may easily remain
there.
182. for
lesen: variants as in l. 180, but E for lesen. Comp. ‘Ki deu ne uolt
conustre tut serrat cureicus | Il ne morrat ia meis ne por mei ne por
uus,’ Guischart 223, 4.
183. helle
brec, harrowed hell. ‘The Gospel [of Nicodemus] probably reached the
climax of its popularity in England during the thirteenth and fourteenth
centuries,’ The ME. Harrowing of Hell, ed. Hulme, p. lxviii.
184: Comp. ‘Tant
cher nus achatað de sun sanc precius,’ Guischart 220; OEM 49/434,
187/20. hom: hi D; the others, us.
185. mei . . .
mei: comp. 30/29, where L has the usual pair, representing OE.
mǣge, kinswoman, mǣg, kinsman: mouwe . . . mey
E; maȝhe . . . mei e; moȝe . . .
meie D; moȝe . . . mei M: but J Nolde hit nomon do for me.
188. bendes:
comp. 81/67.
192 T. þar
þat, of those who: comp. 1 Cor. vi. 2.
192. ꝥ,
because. uuele: harde J D M, meaning hardship; comp. ON. 459,
527. habbeð . . . on honde, have to do with, have to
suffer: similar expressions are ‘sorhen heom com on honde,’ L 30428;
‘for al hit trukeð us an hond; ꝥ we to temden,’ id. 16799;
‘and eoden him luðere an hond,’ id. 31265: ‘him for ðissere worulde wel
on hand eode,’ Ælf. Lives i. 488/13. For the matter, comp. 183/241,
193/551-2.
193. honde:
comp. 56/50: ande e.
342
194. sake: in
L only. It means here, guilt, as in ‘Þa lakess mihhtenn clennsenn hemm |
Off sakess ⁊ off senness,’ Orm 36/1126, 7. Other similar combinations
are ‘sorge, scaðe and same,’ GE 302; ‘sorge and sare,’ Ælf. Lives i.
266/90; ‘swinc and sorwe and deades strif,’ GE 268. With T comp. 42/204,
136/136; ‘on sorhge leofodon and on geswincum,’ Ælf. de Vet. Test. 3/10;
‘labor et dolor,’ Psalm lxxxix. 10. For a watere, &c., see
34/82; on se ⁊ on londe D.
195, 196. Comp.
‘Adam le (i.e. nostre pais) nus tolit e sa fole moiller | E nus ki deaus
uenimes lauum conpare chier | En grant cheitiuison mult nus pot en
nuier,’ Guischart 695-7. forme: formes E e; uormes D.
197. Comp. 48/323;
‘þurst and hunger · chele and hete · þis beoð stronge pyne,’ OEM 37/9;
‘muchel hunger ⁊ hæte; at æuer ælche monnes ȝete,’ L 20441,
2. helde ⁊ unhelðe: comp. 20/72, 30/14, 48/323, 52/373. But, eche
⁊ al unelþe E; eche · ⁊ eal un helðe e; ache and vnhelþe J; ecðe
(= eche) ⁊ al unhelðe D; eche ⁊ unhelþe M, show the original
reading: OE. ece, æce, ache.
198.
uniselðe: comp. 52/374; 26/256 note. J has vnyselyhþe.
199. unsele:
vnhele J; vnvele D.
200. a hele:
on hele E e D; myd blysse and myd wele J.
203, 204 T are
copied by mistake from ll. 73, 74. As in both cases the lines are at the
top of a folio, it may be inferred that the scribe of T was copying a
MS. exactly page by page, and that l. 202 completed a gathering in his
original with an added catchword Litel; that he, after beginning f
5a with the catchword, laid aside his work, and on resuming
it began at the wrong place. On discovering his mistake he started
afresh.
201.
lutel—mon: so T J D, it seems a small matter to many a man;
but E e omit hit, read iþenchð, iðencð, and hu for
ac, many a man little thinks how great, &c.
202. hwam:
hwan e; whan M; whon J = for hwǣm, for hwon, why; vor hwy
D = for hwȳ; E has for þan. hore must mean Adam and Eve; M
reads adammes: but e reads þe, D þo, yet they begin the next line with
Heore e, Here D, and J with heore in this line has Vre sunne and vre sor
· vs may sore of þunche.
203.
ofþinche: see 30/10.
204. sorȝe:
see 40/194.
206. eðe:
sore E J M.
208. an helle
pine &c.: e M go with L; E with T; in pyne ⁊ on
vnwunne J.
209. ledden:
the other MSS. have the present tense. mid unriht: comp. ‘Ne wurþ
þer vnryht ne wrong,’ OEM 143/85.
343
210.
buten—do, unless God’s mercy intervene. longe: comp.
48/327, 169/342.
212. bi þan ilke
iwichte, by the same measure, i.e. as great as his might; comp.
53/384: ah al by one wyhte J; nis him no þing litlinde, | ac bi emliche
wihte D (litlinde, decreasing, see 126/327; emliche, equal). In T 216
mihte is a mistake for milce.
213. ‘Nuls ne pot
tant pecher com deus pot parduner,’ Guischart 948.
214. hit
bigunne, made a beginning, took the first step, i.e. repentance,
hit being indefinite; comp. ‘Li sires est tut prest certes de nus
aider | Se il en fust alkun kil uosist comencer,’ Guischart 703, 4. Less
probable is, began to show mercy, Einenkel, Anglia iv., Anz. 92. Morris
takes bigunne as subjunctive of bigan, to seek for. E reads, it
bidde gunne.
218.
wallinde: the other MSS. add pich, and have bed instead of bað:
see 44/245, 120/104.
219. Comp. ‘Ke plus
fait sun servise, plus fait ke maleurous,’ Archiv lxiii. 81/171; ‘Ki
plus fait sun plaisir a celui fait il pis,’ Guischart 59; ‘Ki kunques
mielz le sert cil ad peines plus granz,’ id. 102; ‘Hec est natura
Diaboli, qui semper malefacit amicis suis et non aliis; pessime
remunerat illos qui ei seruiunt,’ Eudes de Cheriton 232/7. fulle,
utter, deadly: comp. ‘þat is my fulle i-vo,’ OEM 42/174; ‘nawt ane to
hare freond, ah to hare fulle fon,’ HM 31/3; 24/202. For frond, E
e M have wines; D wine. J omits ll. 219-22. Wurst is
adverbial.
220. wih:
wihd E; wið e D; fram M.
221. hi = ih,
I.
222.
þer—feche, might there procure for myself: but E e D M have
for þer me, þerinne, þarinne, and D wende for mahte.
223. ꝥ his is
a misreading of an original þeh ic, and on is for ou. wise
men: comp. ‘De ceo ke io dirrai asez en ai garanz | Les mielz de
seinte glise e tuz les plus uaillanz,’ Guischart 9, 10.
224. aboken:
comp. ‘Hit is write in þe bok · þer me hit may rede,’ OEM 41/131.
226. unfrome,
detriment: unfreme e; unureme M; hearme E; harme J; unwines D.
227. edi men ⁊
arme: comp. ‘Arme ⁊ edie ledin,’ Prov. of Alfred, ed. Skeat 7/39;
‘ne ermne ne eadine,’ OEH i. 115/19. For arme M reads strangely areȝe.
‘Entendez ca uers mei les petiz e les granz,’ Guischart 1.
229. twa
uuele: uuele twa e, and similarly the other MSS. iferen in T
is certainly the noun, companions, so iueren D and probably iuere
in L: in the others ifere, in company.
344
230. maket
niþinges, made worthless men, a reading due to the misunderstanding
of the compound, as in T and the other MSS., stingy in giving away food:
comp. ‘mete custi,’ L 19266. M has, þat were niþinges here.
231. For
waning, D has sorinesse; for wow, all MSS. wop; comp. ‘þær
nan stefne styreð butan stearc-heard | wop and waning, na wiht elles,’
Be Domes Dæge, 14/200; 2/10. efter eche streche, at every stride,
on every hand; comp. 29/14; ‘bið swa mihtles on his modes streche,’ OEH
i. 111/25, for the verb, ‘bot inwyth not a fote, | To strech in the
strete þou hatȝ no vygour,’ E. E. Allit. Poems, 29/969. The other
MSS. agree with T: after ache strate, along each road: for
after comp. ‘Ðonne licggeað ða giemmas toworpne æfter strætum’
(= dispersi per plateas), Cura Past. 135/4; ‘Al þat verden æfter
wæi,’ L 13776. M reads in eueriche strete.
With 232-4 comp. 120/100-2. from hete to hete may mean from
one degree of heat to another, but the MSS. agree with T. The last half
of the line which is peculiar to L does not mean, ‘and nearly freeze the
wretches,’ as Morris translates, but, and each (change) for comfort to
the wretches. The construction is probably the same as at 86/125; see
176/24 note: if to frure is a dat.
inf., it is the only one in L without final n.
233. blisse:
J has here and l. 235, lisse, rest, respite; a word often associated
with blisse, as ‘Blisse ⁊ lisse ic sende uppon monnen’, OEH i. 15/2.
234.
of—misse, they feel the privation of heat. The verb is also
constructed with of, ‘Hwo þat for lyue þisse | þer-of schal mysse,’ OEM
73/34, 5, 87/7, 8; Minot ix. 13 note.
235. hi, heat
and cold; the MSS. agree with T. The omission of the subject to nabbeð T
239 is grammatically correct, but the metre requires hie. lisse:
T, so E e J M.
236. D reads Niteð
hi hwer hi wonieð mest, they know not where they lament most. For
mid—wisse, see 32/40.
237. walkeð:
not ‘rolls’ as at 2/12; the place in the writer’s mind is ‘Cum immundus
spiritus exierit de homine, ambulat per loca inaquosa, quaerens requiem;
et non inveniens dicit,’ &c., S. Luke xi. 24.
238. See 32/35.
239. for þi:
so J; for hi D; ⁊ hi M, but E has ac þi; e þi, therefore; comp. ‘Ich
rede þi þat man bo ȝare,’ ON 860, 1548: ‘þi bileafden heo heore
timbrunge,’ OEH i. 93/23.
240, 241. Suggested
by ‘Qui enim haesitat similis est fluctui maris, qui
345
a vento movetur et circumfertur,’ S. James i. 6; ‘Vir duplex animo
inconstans est in omnibus viis suis,’ id. i. 8. walkeð here
seems to mean, rolls, tosses; see 2/12. weri: comp. ‘wery so
water in wore,’ Bödd., AE. Dicht. 148/32, said however of stagnant
water. For weri J substitutes þar boþe.
241. a þanke:
comp. ‘stif he wes on þonke,’ L 2110. For boð, D has seden, for
senden. For the last three words J substitutes Mid hwom me heold feste;
Morris, thinking it corrupt, conjectures, hwom me ne heold feste, or, me
heold vnfeste, whom men considered unsteadfast. But the scribe of J has
deliberately substituted for the men of infirm purpose those who fare
sumptuously. These are they who in this world were those with whom men
feasted.
242. ⁊ þa þe:
e reads ⁊ to, which gives the best sense. heste, not often in the
sense of promise: auht E; aht e. In T 246, naht has dropped out before
ilaste.
243. ful
enden: fulendi D; OE. fullendian, finish.
244. witen,
went; OE. gewītan: the other MSS. have weren E e D; were
J M.
245. e reads, þere
is pich ðe æure wealð · þer sculle baðie inne, and so the others, but
for þer—inne J has, ꝥ heo schulle habbe þere, and M, þat sculle þe
beo inne. See 42/218 and comp. ‘In a bytter baþ | ich schal baþe naked.
| Of pych and of brunston | wallynde is i-maked,’ OEM 181/209-12.
246. here:
vuel E; uuel e. in werre ⁊ in winne, in war and in strife: the
combination is at least rare. M has, mid werre ⁊ mid ywinne.
unwinne in T 250, meaning distress, is also a rare word; comp.
‘Sinne me hauiþ in care ibroȝt | broȝt in mochil vnwinne,’ E. E.
Poems, 21/5, 6: e has, in feoht end in iginne, where iginne is
miswritten for iwinne; E in feoh (= feoht) end in iginne
(= iwinne), in fighting and strife; comp. ‘ne bilæfde he næuer
nænne; þat heold feht and iwin,’ L 9042, 4, 11522. D reads,
in wele ⁊ in senne; J vnwreste · and eke false were.
247. E has ll. 249,
250 before 247, 248. In 251 T þis = þe is.
248. uersc,
fresh water; OE. adj. fersc used exclusively of fresh as
opposed to salt water. The other MSS. agree with T: nauene strien ne
sture E; nauene striem ne sture e; ne auene strém · ne sture J; Hauene
stream ne Sture D. There are two places where rivers called Avon and
Stour meet, in Warwickshire near Stratford-on-Avon, and in Hampshire
near Christchurch.
249. nawiht:
nomon J; no þing D.
250. þa
þe—lof, those to whom it was too pleasing, those who took too
346
much delight in: ll. 250, 251 may be a reminiscence of the Anarchy; see
7/49, 6/44.
252. Those who had
the power to do evil, (and) those (without the power) to whom it was
sweet to contemplate it. But the other MSS., except T D, and M which
omits the line, agree with E, þo þe ne mihte euel don · ⁊ lef was it to
þenche. In T 256 þe does double duty as nom. to mihten,
and as dat. to lief; comp. 118/28.
254. ⁊ á · on ðes
deofles weorc · bliðeliche swunche e; comp. 40/177; ‘qui laetantur cum
malefecerint, et exultant in rebus pessimis,’ Prov. ii. 14.
255. ‘Or ne set lum
ki creire tant est fel e muanz,’ Guischart 13. Comp. 7/47.
256.
Medierne, greedy of bribes. Comp. 32/48.
257. ꝥ: so þe
E e, meaning, he to whom; comp. 161/187: Þe þat J; þo ꝥ D: wes has
fallen out after wif.
258. ete:
méte J; comp. ‘Inne mete ⁊ inne drinke ic habbe ibeo ouerdede,’ OEM
193/41. A variant is, ‘on hete and on wete,’ OEH i. 101/24; ‘on æte oððe
on wæte,’ Ælf. Lives i. 354/270. druken in T 262 is miswritten
for drunke (drynce) through confusion with druken 257
(druncen).
259. Who took from
the poor man his property, and added it to his store. See 7/51, and
comp. ‘leggeþ ine hord,’ OEM 47/364; ‘Vych mon hit scholde legge on
hord,’ ON 1224.
260. lutel let
of, held in small esteem; comp. 113/45; 143/99; ‘Ac se kyngc let
lihtlice of oð ꝥ he com to Englalande,’ AS. Chron. D 211/16; ‘ne lete he
nout wel of þet he is Godes ȝerde,’ AR 184/21; ‘þat prophet | þat
drightin of sa mikel let,’ CM 9149; ‘þat of his wordus lette pure liht,’
AE Legenden, ed. Horstman, 44/206; ‘he let lutel to þe,’ HM 33/14. For
similar expressions see 8/84, 124/264, 129/32, 173/417. borde:
comp. 48/307: bode E J D; bibode e; hest M.
261.
⁊—aȝen: End te his aȝen e, and to his own relatives, and
similarly in L T D, though the preposition be wanting. J has þeo þat
almes, adding as next line, Ne his poure kunesmen · at him ne myhte
nouht spede. E has And of his owen nolde ȝiuen.
262. sonde:
so E J; sande e: but D agrees with T. In the second half of the line L
stands alone, with an easy phrase, when he heard it announced. But E e
have preserved the original, þer he sette his beode, nor would listen to
God’s messenger, when He spread His table; the reference being to the
parable of the marriage feast, S. Matt. xxii. 4, as expounded at
85/84-7. The OE. word bēod, bīed occurs in ‘Þu gearwodest beforan
me swiðe bradne beod’ = ‘Parasti in conspectu meo mensam,’ Psalm xxii.
5. The readings of T, of D, þer he set (= sat) at his biede, and
347
of J, þar he sat at his borde, are all corruptions of that original with
identical meaning, as in ‘Noldest þu nefre helpen þam orlease
wrec[che]n; | Ac þu sete on þine benche, underleid mid þine bolstre,’
Worcest. Frag. C. 25, 26.
263. ꝥ does
double duty as dat., to whom, to loure, and as nom., who,
to weren in the next line; similarly T: see 44/252. hit: him M;
leuere þan beon schulde J.
265. þon þe:
þam þe e, both meaning, to those to whom. E has ȝam, miswritten for þam, to whom. J
rewrites, ⁊ luueden vntrewnesse · þat heo schulden beon holde; Morris
translates þat, in which; it is a mistake for þar, which M reads. Comp.
‘treowe and holde,’ OEM 38/48: the offence is in OE.
hlāford-swīcung, Morsbach’s Studien, l. 167. D omits ll. 263-6: J
adds after 265, Heo schulleþ wunyen in helle · þe ueondes onwolde.
267. weren . . .
abuten, were bent on; see 74/229 note.
The other MSS. agree generally with T: ȝysceres E; ȝetseres D; ȝeseres
M; gaderares J; witteres e = knowing, wise.
268. hechte to ⁊
tachte, bid and taught (them) to do: hem tihte ⁊ ec tauhte E; heom
tihte ⁊ to tehte e; heom tycede and tahte J; ham tichede to ⁊ taðte D;
tiȝte do ⁊ tehte M. The original was probably tuhte to ⁊ tehte,
instigated and taught. Comp. 127/365; ‘Þe deofel heom tuhte to þan
werke,’ OEH i. 121/33.
269. þen: so
E e; it = þe en (40/196), in; ꝥ anie wise D; þat in alle wise M; And
alle þeo þe myd dusye wise J, in foolish fashion.
270. fordon
&c.: comp. ‘fordon ⁊ fordemed,’ SK 427; ‘fordude ant fordemde,’ SM
2/32. Here the Lambeth MS. ends.
271. of
ðufte: see 30/10.
273. Comp. generally
76/27-32; 120/95-7. frute, toads: frude E; fruden J D: akin to
OWScand. frauðr (Björkman, 76). Frod is a child’s name for a frog in
Yorkshire, EDD. ii. 504. NED. iv. 570 quotes from Dives and Pauper,
‘Some man hadde leuer for to mete with a froude or a frogge in the waye
than to mete with a knyght or a squyre.’
274. speke:
speken E; spekeð J D. niðfulle: ondfulle D.
276. hate: so
M; but hete E J D; OE. hete, enmity. eorre: ȝeorre E;
herre D; erre M.
277. uuel:
muchel J M.
278. swierte
leie: comp. 76/17; 119/86-8: þiester leie D.
280. ꝥ beoð
þa: comp. 1/10.
281. ateliche . .
. eisliche: comp. ‘swo eiseliche and swo ateliche,’ OEH ii. 171/24:
J reads ateliche ueondes ⁊ grysliche wyhtes.
348
282. ifon,
seize: the other MSS. agree with T: ison E. ðurh sihte: bi sihtes
J; mid isiȝte M. NED. explains bi sihtes, by looks or glances. The
context rather requires, with open eyes, knowingly, wilfully, but I know
no parallel. Comp. Heb. x. 26.
283. Comp. 134/93;
‘sathanas þe cwed,’ OEM 180/213. ealde: ‘serpentem antiquum, qui
est diabolus et Satanas,’ Apocal. xx. 2: comp. ‘Se ealde deofol þe is
mid andan afylled,’ Ælf. Lives ii. 180/183; ‘For to beon yuonded · of
sathanas þen olde,’ OEM 38/28, 76/130; OEH i. 75/30; SK 1184; HM 15/14.
belzebud: belsebuc E; belzebuc M: ‘est finalis litera b,’
Catholicon.
285. A common
formula; comp. 119/85, 133/48; OEM 173/57-60; AR 144/21.
287. Wið, as
regards: it has apparently the same meaning in ‘god heom aredde wið
heore ifan,’ OEH i. 87/18, for aredden usually takes of or ut of. E T
have of, about: comp. 187/350; J For al.
288. gamen ⁊
gleo, a favourite combination: comp. ‘Iluued ich habbe gomen and
gleo,’ OEM 160/33; Minot iv. 57 note.
292 T. of
þat, as concerns what; so far as what one may suffer here is
concerned.
289, 90. ‘Tut est
desespere iceo les par confund | Ke il seuent tres bien ia merci nen
aurunt,’ Guischart, 125, 6; CM 23261-4. deð—wa, affects
them so wofully, causes them such sorrow: see 40/181: such uses of don
are very extensive in ME.; comp. 34/69; ‘don us mare wa on,’ SJ 43/8.
naht: noþing J.
290. ꝥ, as
that: bute þat E; Ase ꝥ J; swo ꝥ D.
292. þe, to
whom. The use of þe as oblique relative is not common in OE.; comp. ‘he
sealde his dohtor . . . þæm cyninge . . . þe he ær
Æpira rice geseald hæfde,’ Orosius 118/27, where þe is
preceded by another dative. It occurs more frequently in EME.: for þe =
to whom, see 9/116, 12/13, 139/15; = in which, 113/36; with which, 88/4.
Similarly þat is used in various relationships, with which 8/108,
possibly 26/259; to whom, Orm 118/3439, HM 5/24; for whom, 21/92,
195/634; against which, 201/144, 218/147. E reads þe heom, to whom; the
personal pronoun is given a relative force by the addition of the
relative þe; comp. ‘þe holie man iob þe non ne was his efning on eorðe,’
OEH ii. 69/32, whose equal was not on earth: þet . . . hire
117/10 is analogous. J reads þet = to whom; comp. 143/84; D þer naht of
godes bode, a hopeless corruption. þe nes naht of, who heeded
not: see 8/84 note.
293-6. ‘Quant fustes
baptizez de funz regenerez | Ke dunkes premisistes gardez ne li mentez |
Ki or nirrad a lui il ert deseritez | Come fel
349
e traitre pus en ert apelez | En destreit serrat mis e a tel ert liurez
| Ki nel rendrat pas pus por mil mars dor pesez,’ Guischart 554-9.
294. cristen
dom, baptismal vow. heolde, kept; see 48/310.
295.
on—grunde: comp. 40/178. J reads anyþe helle grunde: a nyþe
is found only here. It may be a preposition formed from an +
neoþan (comp. anunder), like beneoþan and with the same meaning;
but probably it is for a niþer as in T and D in niþerhelle grunde.
296. ut: so
D: but E J vp. ‘Ne porrat morir | n’a merci venir, | senz fin i serat,’
Reimpredigt 34/67. marke: see 34/67, and comp. ‘myd markes and
myd punde,’ OEM 89/18.
297. ibede:
bene D.
298. D, vor naht hi
solden bidde þer | ore ne ȝeuenesse, in agreement with T, in which hi
must be supplied from hem in 301: see 6/18. ‘Almones ne ben faiz ne lur
profiterunt | Messes ne ureisuns ia certes nes garrunt,’ Guischart
127, 8.
299. of: so
E; but T J D M have wiþ, which is normal, as at 304, and for schilden
50/346, 82/121; biwerien 50/334; werien 50/335; biwiten 117/5, 149/168;
witen 82/118, 149/170, 178. Less usual are ‘misdon wið’ 6/23 note; ‘loki
wit’ 153/56. of, in respect of, as regards; a rare use for,
against; comp. ‘uor to warnie wummen of hore fol eien,’ AR 54/26: and
note wið interchanging with of, 46/287.
300. þer wið,
against it, i.e. hell pine: see 1/3. habbe: wille D; wulle M.
With ido T 304 comp. 122/185 note.
302. sceal,
must. leche: comp. ‘Of vre louerd ihesu crist · þat is soule
leche,’ OEM 51/508. From this place it has been inferred that the writer
was a priest with some knowledge of medicine. Perhaps he is only
asserting the claim of Christianity to benefit the body as well as the
soul, as in 1 Thess. v. 23, and often in Missal and Breviary, ‘mente et
corpore pariter expediti,’ &c.
304. we ꝥ:
wel, swo D.
306.
emcristen: euen cristen J; nexte M; see 26/265. After eal,
se has probably dropped out: alse E; as J; swo D; al suo M.
307. Every thing we
hear in the services of the Church: comp. ‘Al þet me ret and singeð
. . . in halie chirche,’ OEH i. 125/27; ‘al þet holi chirche
redeð ant singeð,’ AR 268/9; OEM 91/43. bifore godes borde, at
the altar.
308. hanget ⁊
bihalt bi, derive their authority from and depend on. S. Matt. xxii.
40.
311.
earueðhealde, difficult to keep; see 12/3. J rewrites, Ah soþ ich
hit eu segge · ofte we agulteþ alle.
350
312. strang:
see 21/94. lange: veste D. liht, easy: comp. 72/178; ‘All
þiss to shæwenn niss nohht lihht | Shorrtliȝ wiþþ fæwe wordess,’ Orm
99/13032, 3: so lihtliche, 50/343, readily.
314. unne:
lete J; leue M. bote: see 80/58
note.
315. wele:
ayhte J.
316. eal:
mest leggeþ vre swynk J; leggeð almest D; muchel M. Comp. 32/57.
318. of: for
oft: ofte J D M; E omits. bicherd, misled. bi kehte,
ensnared, deceived. But J reads for the latter, vuele by þouhte,
saddened by remembrance of our sins: comp. ‘þe man kið him seluen
mildhertnesse þe biðencheð on his sinnen,’ OEH ii. 189/5.
319.
erminges, miserable mortals: mostly an adj. in ME. as at 76/22,
31. Morris suggested erninges, gains.
320. en: of E
J. her ⁊: oþer E J D M.
321-3. Comp. 40/197,
8.
324. of þere,
of that: J has þer of.
325. ofte
&c.: see 32/47.
327. lange:
comp. 42/210; 168/342.
328. J substitutes ⁊
after gode wel wurche · þenne ne þuruue noht kare, and be vigorous in
pursuit of good: comp. 30/21, 32/61.
330. Unless we are
on our guard, this world will make us drunk: the meaning of
fordrenche is fixed by drinche l. 331. adrenche D M, drown. With
wurðe . . . iwer, comp. 9/122; with us,
13/34.
331. scenche,
draught; OE. scencan, to pour out; comp. KH 369 note.
deofles: M reads, of one duole scenche, of a stupefying
draught.
332. A man must know
how to protect himself well, if it (i.e. the drink) is not to trip him
up. See B-T. s.v. screncan. J is defective here; D omits
ll. 331, 2.
333. Mid: Vor
D. For almihtin, 337 T, see 79/17.
334. ꝥ: þe J;
see 13/28. he: he ne E; heo . . . ne J; hi ne D.
335. werie . . .
wið: see 48/299.
336. bi
ȝiten: in e only; ȝiuen alle mancunne E; and similarly in the other
MSS. The text may mean, acquired for mankind.
337. bene,
pleasant, agreeable: ‘spatiosa via . . . quae ducit ad perditionem,’ S.
Matt. vii. 13. J reads grene, rejecting, as often, the unusual word:
comp. ‘the broad way and the green’ of Milton’s sonnet.
338. niȝeðe
del, nine-tenths, the great majority: niȝende del D.
339. wei
grene: the path to heaven is compared to what is still in some parts
called a ‘green road’ or a ‘green way,’ ‘a road over turf
351
between hedges,’ EDD., the ‘unmetalled road’ of the Ordnance maps,
because, unlike the highway, it is used by few. J has, þene wey so
schene, and in the next line, and þat is wel eþ-sene; M, ⁊ þat is þe
worlde on-sene. The last half of T 344 appears to be corrupt.
341. us lað:
comp. ‘lað þah him were,’ L 244; 145/106.
342. eal,
wholly; but M al hare wil.
343.
mid—hulde, along the lower (downward) slope: nuðer E; niðer
helde D M. J omits ll. 343-4. mid, in the same direction as, like
the modern ‘with the stream.’
344.
godliese: gutlease D: the earliest quotation for godless,
impious, in NED. is under 1528; words before that time are ranged under
goodless, comfortless, worthless. But Mätzner puts examples from SK and
HM under the former. Are the cheerless wood and the bare field
Virgilian? Aeneas passes by the ‘descensus Averni’ ‘per tacitum nemus’
to the ‘lugentes campi’. bare: brode D.
345. hese:
hes E; heste J M; hesne D. ðer: þat J, cognate acc.; comp.
‘I am a man farand þe way,’ CM 3295.
346. ꝥ beoð
ða: see 1/10. sculdeð . . . wið: see 48/299: silten D (for
silden, shielded); schedeþ wel J, possibly, separate themselves
completely, but scheden requires from, 159/153, and in the presence of
wið the reading may be regarded as a mistake for schildeþ.
347. ȝeanes:
to ȝeanes E; ayeyn J; aȝenes M; D omits ll. 347, 8. Not, ‘along the
cliffs,’ but, breasting the steep slope, up the high hill; comp.
Milton’s ‘labour up the hill with heavenly truth.’
348. J reads, þeos
leteþ awei al heore wil; comp. 157/133. fulle, perform; OE.
fyllan: M has felle.
352. ne ðincð
&c.: comp. 12/11 (piece v). J substitutes, Wel edy wurþ þilke mon ·
þat þer byþ vnderuonge.
353. þe lest haueþ
murehþe J; Se ꝥ lest haueð blisce D.
354. for ðas,
for the bliss of this world.
355. uuel:
pyne J; hunger M.
358. In accordance
with their deeds here, in proportion to the severity of their
effort.
359. este:
comp. 17/159.
360. Comp. ‘giueð
hem to medes eche lif · ⁊ blisse · ⁊ heuene mid him seluen,’ OEH ii.
67/25; 74/233.
361. fah ne
græi: fou ne grei E; fou ne grey J; foȝ ne grei M; D omits ll.
361-2. For the association of the words comp. ‘Ne hedde he none robe ·
of fowe · ne of gray,’ OEM 39/66; ‘gold · ne seoluer · vouh · ne gray,’
id. 94/28; ‘Monye of þisse riche. | þat werede fouh and grey,’
352
id. 165/27, 8. In French they are vair (L. varius) and gris, as
in ‘jamais ne vestirai vair ne gris ne hermine | n’afulerai mantiel
ourle de sabeline, | ne coucerai en lit covert de marterine,’ Le
Chevalier au Cygne, in Bartsch & Horning, 349/14-16. OE. fāȝ, fāh,
variegated, coloured, is also in ME. an adj., as at 81/82; ‘fah clað,’ L
24653. As a noun it means a variegated or shaded fur, as distinct from
one of uniform colour, like græi, which is badger. kuning,
rabbit fur, but cuniculus is glossed marderis, i.e. marten, in
Fecunda Ratis 450, where it is associated with migale, ermine, which
would go better with the general idea of sumptuosity. But marten is in
the next line. konyng J; cunig EM.
362.
aquierne, squirrel: OE. ācwern, in oldest form
ācweorna, Sweet, Oldest E. Texts, 590: ocquerne E; Okerne M; Ne
oter ne acquerne J. martres cheole, marten’s throat, explained by
Mätzner as throat-piece, collar or boa of marten; but the expression,
found here only, is a bad attempt at translating F. gole martrine, fur
dyed red, as in ‘ses mantels fu riches et chiers | et fu toz faiz a
eschaquiers; | l’uns tavels ert de blanc hermine | et l’altre ert de
gole martrine,’ Eneas, 4029-32; a chess-board pattern in white and red.
The pelisson of the period was a tunic of fur enclosed between cloths
which permitted the red-dyed fur to be seen only at the front edges of
the garment. These borders were called goules; comp. ‘Lermes li moillent
le menton | E les goles del peliçon,’ Roman de Troie, ed. Constans,
15543-4; ‘Goules de martre, ne vos vuel plus porter,’ Raoul de Cambrai,
6227: the resemblance to the French word for throat has led to the
translation here, as to the erroneous explanation of goules, gole, by
‘collet’ in Florence de Rome, 1959; Roman de Thebes, 6375-6. M has
simply martrin, OF. martrine, marten’s fur. metheschele in T is
for merðes chele, the first element being OE. mearð, marten; it
is equivalent to the reading of E e. beuer, &c.: Beuveyr ne
sablyne J.
363. sciet:
sced E; scete D descend from OE. scīete, scēte, cloth, but scat
T; schat M from OE. sceatt, property, money; as in ‘srud and
sat,’ GE 795, 881, ‘srud or sat,’ id. 3169. J has, Ne þer ne wurþ ful
iwis · worldes wele none. scrud, dress; not ‘shroud.’
365. See
125/291.
367, 368. D omits.
na wið uten: noþing ȝit vten E; nowiht wiþ vte J: the latter and
T appear to mean, there is nothing wanting to him: e is probably a
corruption of na wiht uten, and ȝit in E is miswritten for wit = wið, as
ȝihte 380 for wihte.
368. wane: T
has the usual construction, as ‘deest mihi pecunia, mê ys fêos
wana,’ Ælf. Gram. 202/11; ‘He nis naht fulliche cristene þat (= to
353
whom) is ani wane of þese þrie,’ OEH ii. 15/22; 19/35; in E e
wane is an adj. as in ‘ic eom wana of ðâm getele,’ Ælf. Gram.
202/11; 129/23. J has Nis heom nones godes wone.
369. gane,
miswritten for wane, misery, the reading of D T; J has wone; E
grame.
370. of
ðinche: see 30/10. e ends with this line; what follows is
from E.
371. treȝe:
so D: J has the often-associated teone; comp. 133/61; 24/208 note. ‘La
est uie senz mort ki tut tens li durreit,’ Guischart 1255.
373. ulde . . .
vnhelðe: see 40/197.
374. sorewe . . .
sor: comp. 147/137; ‘mid seorwen and mid seore,’ L 6885; ‘to
forswelten isar ⁊ isorhe eauer,’ SJ 79/7; ‘iseien sor ⁊ seoruwe,’ AR
190/15; SK 1164: so too, ‘sorwȝe and sariness,’ VV 19/2; ‘seoruhful ⁊
sori,’ AR 88/12.
375. Seoþþe me
dryhten iseo. So J, which cannot mean, ‘Afterwards one shall see the
Lord’: probably in Seoþþe lurk Swo þer, and schal has fallen out, as it
has in T. swa, even as, more fully in T, swo se; comp. 34/80: D
reads, swo ase he is. For omission of the subject in T comp. 6/18 note.
mid iwisse: see 32/40. Comp. ‘Kar deus sicum il est tuz tens senz
fin uerunt,’ Guischart 117; ‘En l’un qui serat | dampne deu verrat |
toztens en present,’ Reimpredigt 54/107.
377-80 are wanting
in J. And ðeh, and yet.
378. ði,
because. The reading of T, which is supported by D M, gives a better
sense.
380. ȝihte,
miswritten for wihte; comp. 52/367 note: wiȝte M; rihte D. See
42/212.
381. seon:
wite M.
382. icnawen ⁊
iwiten, understand and get to know: iseon and iwyten J; iknowen ⁊
isien D; biknowe ⁊ yseo M. For mihte, J has Milce; M milse.
383. to: þer
to D; may luste J. The usual preposition is after, as ‘þa lisste
himm affterr fode,’ Orm ii. 39/11333; ‘Aȝȝ lisste himm affterr mare,’
id. i. 356/10220: but comp. 158/168; ‘Hi sete adoun ⁊ ete faste: for hem
luste wel þerto,’ Legendary, 223/127. hleste in 387 T is
explained in Specimens as a noun, desire: it can only be OE.
hlystan, listen, suggested by ‘isien’ in the next line.
384. hali
boc: in liue boc D; on lyues bec (MS. bee) iseon J.
385. alle &c.: to
alle derlinges J.
386. he: so J
D: for oþere J has wordliche.
387. wealded:
haueð on wealde D, has in his power, under his rule: see 22/122, 198/40
for the synonymous ‘owen a wold.’
354
388. of him to
sene, of seeing him; comp. 124/239 note. sed: so D. OE.
sæd, sated, appears to be used here as a noun, for satiety. The
adj. is common enough, ‘Ich nam noht giet sad of mine sinnes,’ OEH ii.
75/8; ‘for selden y am sad þet semly forte se,’ Bödd., AE. Dicht. 149/5.
‘Mult porreit estre liez quant deu senz fin uerreit,’ Guischart 1256. J
has, Him to seonne murie hit is. In the second half of the line J D
agree with T.
389. mere:
OE. mǣre, glorious: swete J.
391. oþer:
oþre D, both meaning, to another; Ne may nomon hit segge · ne witen myd
iwysse J.
392. godes:
heuene J. Here D adds, Vten eftin þiderward | mid aldre ȝernuolnesse | ⁊
vorsien þisne midelard | mid his wouernesse. || Ef we vorsieð þis loþe
lif | vor heuenriche blisce, | þanne selð us Crist ꝥ eche lif | to medes
on ecnesse. Zupitza notes that eftin is for efstin (that is, hasten, OE.
efestan), and wouernesse is OE. wǣfernes, pomp, show.
393. rixlet:
rixeð D; ricscleþ M; lesteþ J. abuten: buten J D; ay bute M: see
34/85.
394. of:
comp. 38/134; 112/11; 132/15: but ‘alesede hem eche deaðe,’ OEH ii.
5/26. Lines 393-4 are echoed in ‘And yef þat eche lif · þat neuere ne
haueþ ende. | Hwanne vre soule vnbynd · of lykamlyche bende,’ OEM
53/551, 2. licames: J D M agree with T.
395. ȝyue:
lete J; leue M. swilc: swichne D; suicchne M.
396. After this J
adds, Bidde we nu leoue freond · yonge and ek olde. | þat he þat þis
wryt wrot · his saule beo þer atholde. Amen.; which I take to be a
prayer for the scribe himself, not for the composer of the Moral
Ode.
iv. ... A leaf is lost after f. 8
f 8
Other MSS. are v. Digby A 4, Bodleian
D
“D” added by author
The dialect of PM is
South-Eastern
printed as shown: error for “M” alone?
ēa is ea in deaþe
182
paragraph break added by transcriber for consistency
.... ā + g produces aȝ,
aȝen 30 (5), maȝe 29, but ahen 161:
final : invisible
For sw ... qu is the regular
equivalent of cw
cw misprinted as italic instead of bold
ēa is mostly ... but ie in
bien 389
“ie” misprinted as bold instead of italic
gēar, ȝier 142
corrected by author from “gear”
a + g ... ǣ1
+ g is ei
æ1
ēa + h in heie 16
ea
... þþ is simplified in
seðen
þ
Accidence: ... d. -e, gode 73
-e misprinted as italic
s. g., are 179, s. d.,
53
s. d. 53
... The s. d. regularly terminates in
e
“e” misprinted as italic
Remnants of the strong declension ... (with
woreldes f.)
woreldes f)
The infinitives ... past: I a. biȝiete 105,
forȝieten 98
forȝieten, 98
18. ... (comp. Fr. être <
stare)
être > stare
82. ... OEM 56/682
OEM.
142. ... Orm ii. 149/14482
number “ii.” missing
153. ... OWScand. skǽrr, clean.
OW Scand.
185. ... maȝhe . . . mei e
meie (one word)
201. ... read iþenchð, iðencð
iþenchð, iꝥencð corrected from Zupitza
257. ... wes has fallen out after
wif.
wif misprinted as plain (non-bold)
265. ... to those to whom.
to whom,
292. ... where þe is preceded by
another dative
þe misprinted as plain (non-bold)
361. ... in Bartsch & Horning
Hornung
385. alle &c.: to alle derlinges
J.
printed as shown, with bold “&c.”
Manuscripts: i. Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, 402 (A);
on vellum, 215 × 150 mm. The fly-leaf fastened down has the mark S. 15,
then follow three leaves with writing in a seventeenth-century hand (?
Joscelin), mostly a translation of the piece beginning in Morton, p. 6,
‘Nan ancre bi mi read,’ then 117 folios, on the first of which is a
marginal rubric, J þe feaderes ⁊ i þe sunes | ⁊ i þe hali gastes nome |
her biginneð ancrene | wisse, as at the beginning of SJ (139/1) and SM
in MS. Bodley 34. On the lower margin of f. 1 r in a fourteenth-century
hand is Liber ecclesie sancti Jacobi de Wygemore:
quem Johannes Purcel dedit | eidem ecclesie
ad instanciam fratris Walteri de Lodelawe
senioris tunc precentoris. The Abbey of Wigmore was
dedicated to S. James (Dugdale, vi. 344). There are glosses in red
pencil and words underlined in red. The revival of
355
Anglo-Saxon studies under Archbishop Parker, partly prompted by the
desire to use in defence of the Reformation the evidences as to the
tenets of the early Church in England, caused such books as this to be
carefully read. William L’isle extracted from it some of the prayers (in
Morton, 26, 28, 30) and, treating them as debased Anglo-Saxon, turned
them into the latter speech as he understood it. His efforts are
recorded in MS. Laud Misc. 201; they have led Dr. Heuser (Anglia, xxx.
103) to conclude that the Ancren Riwle is not a ME. but an OE.
document.
The MS. belongs to the second quarter of the thirteenth century. It
cannot be earlier than 1225 A.D., for
it mentions the Dominicans and Franciscans, and it is probably later
than 1230. It is the most correct, but it has additions to the original,
such as 62/46-64/62, 64/73-78. See further A Descriptive Catalogue of
the MSS. in the Library of Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, by
M. R. James, vol. ii, pp. 267, 8.
ii. Caius College, Cambridge, 234 (B); on vellum, 124 × 93 mm.; 368
pages; late thirteenth century. Pages 1-185 consist of extracts from the
AR, but not in the order of the other manuscripts (ES iii. 536). It is
addressed to ‘friends’ 55/1, not sisters, and the second passage printed
here is not in this MS. The contents of the manuscript are given in A
Descriptive Catalogue of the MSS. in the Library of Gonville and Caius
College, by M. R. James, vol. i, p. 298.
iii. Cotton Nero A 14, British Museum (N); on vellum, 146 × 114 mm.;
written in the second quarter of the thirteenth century. Its contents
are ff. 1-120 r, the Ancren Riwle; 120 v-123 v, The Orison, printed at
pp. 132-7 of this book; 123 v-131 v, the pieces printed in OEH i, pp.
200-17. It forms the text of Morton’s edition.
iv. Cotton Titus D
18, British Museum (T); on vellum, 158 × 120 mm.; 148 folios in
double columns, written from f. 14, where AR begins, to the end, about
1220 A.D. Its relationship to two
other manuscripts in respect to their contents is shown by the following
table:
Manuscripts. |
SK |
SJ |
SM |
Sawles Warde |
HM |
Wohunge |
AR |
Royal 17 A 27 |
— |
— |
— |
— |
|
|
|
Bodley 34 . |
— |
— |
— |
— |
— |
|
|
Titus D 18 . |
— |
|
|
— |
— |
— |
— |
For the Royal and Bodleian MSS. see the introduction to No. xvi.
356
v. Cotton Cleopatra C 6, British Museum (C), on vellum, 196 × 140
mm.; 196 folios of 19 to 26 lines to a page in a peculiar angular hand,
written about 1240 A.D. The scribe,
after finishing the book, had access to another manuscript, either A or
one closely resembling it, and interlined or put on the margin passages
from it which were not in the first exemplar. C was presented to Legh
Abbey, Co. Devon, by Matilda de Clare, by whom the Abbey was converted
into a Nunnery about 1285 A.D.
(Dugdale, vi. 333).
vi. The Vernon MS. of the Bodleian Library (V), a very large book,
written in two columns of eighty lines to the column, has a
fourteenth-century version of the AR, which begins at folio 371
v2. It contains our first extract, but only a fragment of the
second.
vii. Another version of portions of the AR, written at the end of the
fourteenth century, discovered by Miss Paues, exists under the title of
the Recluse in the Magdalene College MS., Cambridge, Pepys
2498 (P).
viii. A fragment in a hand of 1330-40, corresponding to p. 138, l. 25
&c. of Morton’s edition, was described by Napier in the Journal of
Germanic Philology, ii. 199-202.
ix. Magdalen College, Oxford, 67 (M). A Latin version in writing of
the end of the thirteenth century; on f. 1 r it begins, Hic incipit
prohemium venerabilis patris Magistri Simo|nis de
Gandauo episcopi sarum in librum de uita solitaria | quem
scripsit sororibus suis Anachoritis apu`d´ tarente. It ends on f. 95 r,
Explicit liber septimus de uita solitaria: Octauus omnino
taceatur:—with the addition in a later hand, eterna taciturnitate.
The second extract is therefore not represented in this version.
x. Cotton Vitellius E 7 (L): fragments of a Latin version rescued
from the fire of 1731, said by Macaulay to be the same as the Magdalen
MS. version, but with the addition of the eighth part. In Smith’s
Catalogue (1696) it is said to have had the note, Regulae vitae
Anachoretarum utriusque sexus scriptae per Simonem de Gandavo, Episcopum
Sarum in usum suarum sororum. Hunc librum Frater Robertus de Thorneton,
quondam prior, dedit claustralibus de Bardenay. Bardney Abbey is in
Lincolnshire (Dugdale, i. 623).
xi. Cotton Vitellius F 7 (F). A French version, written about 1300
A.D., but retaining many forms of the
considerably older manuscript from which it was copied. This manuscript
also suffered in the fire; the top half of the folios is scorched and
shrunken, and a line or two is lost on each page: it consists of 164
folios in double columns. In Smith’s Catalogue it is described as, La
Reule de femmes Religieuses et Recluses; sive de vita solitaria &
anachoretica per Simonem de Gandavo, Episcopum Sarisburiensium in usum
sororum ipsius.
357
Facsimiles: Of T. Palaeographical Society; Second Series,
plate 75. Of C. Ibid., plate 76. Of P. The Recluse, ed. J. Påhlsson.
Lund, 1911.
Editions: The Ancren Riwle, edited and translated by James
Morton, B.D. Camden Society, no. lvii, London, 1853. Mätzner, E.,
Altenglische Sprachproben, ii. 8-41 (the second part of AR with
introduction and notes). Shorter extracts in Sweet’s First Middle
English Primer, 19-41, Emerson and Kluge. The text of all the preceding
is from MS. N. Heuser, W., Anglia, xxx. 108-10 (passage from MS. A).
Påhlsson, Joel, The Recluse, Lund, 1911.
Literature: Bramlette, E. E., Anglia, xv. 478-98 (the
original language of AR); Brock, E., Philological Society, 1865, 150-67
(Accidence in N); Dahlstedt, A., The Word-Order of the AR, Sundsvall,
1903; Heuser, W., Anglia, xxx. 103-22; Kölbing, E., ES iii. 535, 6; ix.
115-17; xxiii. 306; Lemcke’s Jahrbuch, xv. 179-97 (collations and
dialect); Landwehr, M., Das grammatische Geschlecht in der AR,
Heidelberg, 1911; *Macaulay, G. C., The ‘Ancren Riwle’, Modern
Language Review, ix. 63-78, 145-60, 324-31, 463-74 (collation of A and
general discussion); Mühe, T., Über den im MS. Cotton Titus D. xviii
enthaltenen Text der AR, Göttingen, 1901; Anglia, xxxi. 399-404; Napier,
A. S., Modern Language Review, iv. 433-6; Ostermann, H., Lautlehre
des germanischen Wortschatzes in der von Morton herausgegebenen
Handschrift der Ancren Riwle. Bonner Beiträge, xix, Bonn, 1905;
Påhlsson, J., ES xxxviii. 453, 4; Paues, A. C., ES xxx. 344-6;
Redepenning, H., Syntaktische Kapitel aus der ‘Ancren Riwle’, Berlin,
1906; Williams, Irene F., Anglia, xxviii. 300-4 (language of C); Wülker,
R., Paul-Braune, Beiträge, i. 209-39; Zupitza, J., Anglia, iii. 34.
Sources and Illustrations: Ælredi Regula, in Lucae
Holstenii Codex Regularum Monasticorum et Canonicorum, Augustae
Vindelicorum, 1759, vol. i, p. 420; also as Ailredi Rhievallensis de
Vita Eremitica ad Sororem, in S. Augustini Opera, Antwerp, 1700, vol. i,
p. 640; English version of ch. xxi-lxxviii from the Vernon MS. in ES
vii, pp. 304-44; Vita S. Gileberti Confessoris: Institutiones beati
Gileberti in Supplement to vol. vi, pt. 2, of Dugdale, W., Monasticon
Anglicanum, London, 1830; Eckenstein, Lina, Woman under Monasticism,
Cambridge, 1896; Cutts, E. L., Scenes and Characters of the Middle
Ages, London, 1872.
Phonology: (1) of A. Oral
a is a, calices b 17, cat b 2; a before nasals and
lengthening groups is o, dronc 21, gomen 83, brondes b 161,
wombe, 97; þen, þenne, hwen, hwenne, selthwenne b 195 are the usual
forms, but once hwon b 116: and is ant 26 &c., man,
indefinite, me 16. æ is usually e, bres 103, ed b 121,
efter b 12, gedereð 87 (gæderian), hetter
358
b 28, oðerhwet b 177, neppes 94, þet b 126, wes b 3, wicchecreftes 7,
esken 79, 85 (æsce), weschen b 145, vesscheð b 112
(wæscan), but ea, an EME. writing for æ in bearuot
b 39, bleasie b 162 (blæse, sb.), feader b 173, b 231,
feaste b 42 (3), gleadliche b 186, measse b 83, readliche b 94,
noðeleater b 169, weater b 94, inohreaðe 43 (hræþe), and a
in awakenet 24, awakenið b 61, b 91 (awacenian), blac b 23,
warliche b 148 (flexion forms), cappen b 45: habbe 25 &c., nabben b
130 descend from LWS. forms in a: quoð b 76 (cwæþ) is due
to loss of stress. e is regularly e, bedde b 25, bereð 64
(but beore b 136), spekeð b 57 (but speoke b 132); before lengthening
groups, ende 100, englene 76. Between w—f, e is
rounded to eo in tweolue b 112; before a palatal it is raised to
i in rikenin 25, rikeneres 82: stude b 171, sullen b 12, 14,
swuch b 18 are due to OE. forms in y. i is regularly
i, bidde b 237, binimeð b 221 (but neome b 34 &c.); before
lengthening groups, blod binde b 69 (binde), bringen 49, child
22, but u in wule 72
and other forms of willan, nute
b 130 (nyte). o is normally o, biuoren 57, hosen b
39, word 65, but a in an(an) b 87; nalde 90, walden 42, iwraht b
24 are Anglian. u is u, cume b 90, cuppe 103, sunderliche
24, wunder b 63, but i in kimeð 94, b 200 (cymeð;
Bülbring, Ablaut, 74). y is u, brune b 160, sundreð b 161,
sungið b 191, but i in pilche clut 68: mycel is muchel b
91, muche 82; sturne b 195 represents styrne.
ā is regularly a, are b 229; before two consonants,
gast b 231; length is indicated by doubling in aa, b 162, b 234: man b 8
is *mān. ea for ā appears in eanes b 34, b 189,
easkin b 181, easki b 78, easkeð b 118, b 203, wreaðfule 32, 63, coming
from forms in ǣ. ā is o in cop b 142 (cōp),
e in se b 67 &c., but swa 73. ǣ1 is, as a
rule (41 times), ea, ageasten 58, arearen b 159, asneasen 69,
eani 8; before two consonants, eauer 54 &c., leafdi b 235, wreaððe b
153, b 166, but e in þer b 155, and before two consonants in
flesch b 26, flesches b 91, fleschlich b 78, fleschliche b 75, leste b
37, b 54 (beside leasse 61 (4), leaste b 188), and a before two consonants in
attri 12, attreð b 80 (? analogy of āttor). ǣnig is mostly
ei 8 (possibly shortening of eiðer,—Holthausen); ǣlc is
euch 34 &c. ǣ2 is e (32 times), dreden b
196, her b 141, neddre 31, wepmen b 22, but eo in leote b 131, b
19, feorle 100. ea appears only in ileanet 16, read b 13, b 37,
reade b 2 (but reden b 188, redeð b 223, b 224, b 228, ired b 235): þear
41 is probably a scribal error for þer, but comp. þiar 39/165. The
difference in the representation of ǣ1, as ea,
rarely e, and ǣ2, as e, rarely
ea, is also found in the Katherine group, and is Anglian (Stodte,
p. 31). ē is always e; ī, i, but wummon b
21 (5) after w; ō is o; ū, u; ȳ is
regularly u, fur b 160, hudest b 57; before two consonants, cuððe
b 144, fulðe b 113, but i in schriden b 85, beside schruden
90.
359
ea before r + cons. is ea, bearm 71, nearewe b
204; before lengthening groups, bearnes 75, heard b 44, but a in
scharp 64, 65, 67 and always after w, warde b 231, -ward as in frommard b 165, inward 36, toward b 89,
utward 37, warm b 23, warneð 11. ea in chearre b 238, wearien b 6
represents æ, i-umlaut of unbroken (Anglian) a.
ea before l + cons. is regularly a (Anglian), alle
7 &c., falleð 6, halden b 193. The i-umlaut has ea =
æ from unbroken a, ealde b 124, healden b 197, both before
a lengthening group. eo before r + cons. is regularly
eo, heorte 51, keorue b 34; before length. groups, eorðe 85,
sweord 65, Beornard b 219, but Anglian smoothing is seen in werkes b 62,
b 67, b 81. To the wur group belong wurðen 88, forwurðen 23,
forwurðe b 95: warpere 64, warpeð 66 are Scandinavian; WS. forms are
weorpere, wierpð. The i-umlaut is wanting in
heordemonne b 6, iheortet 31; wier, wyr words have u,
vnwurðe b 108, b 219, wurse 16, 56, b 37, iwurset b 191. eo
before l + cons. is eo in seolf 59, seoluen b 204 &c.
ea, the u- and å-umlaut of a, is seen in
eateliche 58, 69, eawles 67 (awul), meaðeleð 73, 96, streapeles b
42, vnsteaðeluest 5; fearen b 197, misfearen 13, and analogically
(Bülbring § 228 anm.), feareð 79, b 120, forfearinde 29, gleadie b
232, heatien b 141, ?peaðereð 81, ?skleatteð 53. This umlaut is
specifically Mercian. eo, u-umlaut of e, gives
heouene 3, b 185, but world 40, worldliche b 79 &c.: eo,
å-umlaut of e, beoden b 124, b 206, b 237, breoken b 20,
eoten 99, ȝeouen
b 71 (from Mercian ġefan), and analogically,
beore b 31, b 136, forbeoren b 149, breoke b 216, eote b 127, eoten b
150, ȝeoue b 131, b 173, b 233, forȝeoued b 200 (but ȝef 102), speoke b
132, speoken b 138: an Anglian feature. eo, u- and
å-umlaut of i, is seen in cleopede 9, 11, bicleopet b 192,
leoðeliche b 28 (liþig, OWScand. liðugr), neomen b 72, b 174,
neome b 34, neomen b 189, neomunge 7, seoue 21, seouene 4, seolc b 69,
seoluer 84, sweoke b 160, teolunges 6, but hare 5 &c. is the regular
representative of heora, suster b 4 &c., of WS.
sweostor, Anglian wike b 189, of WS. wucan
(*wiucu). ea after palatals is a, schal 42 &c.,
ischauen b 101, schape b 146, but e in ȝeten b 128 (WS.
gatu), eo before nasal, scheome b 51: schapieð b 70 is a
ME. formation. ie after ġ is e (Mercian
monophthong), ȝef 102, 104, ȝeueð b 68, ȝelden 15, b 7, forȝelde b 175,
ȝelp 37; this e with å-umlaut gives forms in eo,
ȝeouen &c. as above. ȝef, EWS. gief, is ȝef 9.
eo after ġ is u, ȝungre b 132; after sc,
schule 99, schulde 22 &c. (Anglian). eom is am b 236
(Anglian), heom, ham 4 &c.
ēa is regularly ea, beate b 31, deade 41, eadmode b
119, greatluker b 157, reaflac 15, but e in chepeð b 12, chepilt
b 11, cwedschipe b 93, eð b 214, edscene b 147, and a in chaffere
b 11, chapmon b 12, shortening
360
due to stress on following syllable: its i-umlaut is e
(Anglian), bemen 39, 76, bemere 42, bemin 43, dremen b 206, ȝeme b 190,
ȝemeles 10 &c., ȝemeð 16, ȝemen b 98, iȝemen b 90, ihereð 53, leue b
174, b 207, leue b 36, misleue b 182, lefunge 7; but greattre b 67 is
grēatra. ēo is eo, beon 4, cneon b 150, feondes 92,
feorðe 21, but e in seke b 108, secnesse b 111, before c.
The absence of its i-umlaut is Anglian, deore 71, feond
s. d. 34 &c., neod b 1, neodeð 88, istreonede 23;
e in nedlunge b 8, tene b 112. Absence of palatalization,
characteristic of Mercian, after ġ, sć is seen in ȝer b
101, schende b 52 (Bülbring § 289), schon b 38, but scheos b 39,
ischeoed b 40. ȝīet is ȝet b 193, the
second element in edscene b 147, is gesīene.
a + g is ah, dahes b 105, drahe b 53, draheð 36,
mahen 50 &c.; isleine 33 is geslegen; seið 46, 89,
sægð; dreaieð b 233 (comp. dreaien 147/153, dreihen, 146/122)
descends from *dreagaþ, form with å-umlaut (WS.
dragaþ). æ + g is regularly ei, deies b 21,
feier b 123, heiward b 6, mei 4 &c., meiden b 96, seide 46, b 117,
iseid 26: mahe b 148, b 180 comes from LWS. mage. e +
g is also ei, abreiden 75, aȝein 5 (ongegn),
toȝeines b 56, eie b 18, eili b 9, leið b 152, pleien 67, b 139, b 146,
pleieð 64, but plohien b 218 which descends with shifted accent from
*pleogan with å-umlaut (comp. pleogede in a SW.
Mercian text of Bede, ed. Miller, ii. 82). The MS. has in other places
pleien as above, but the noun in Morton’s text pleowe 184/4, pleouwe
218/8 is in MS. A regularly plohe, in MS. C ploȝe. i + g,
h, pliht b 97, ipliht 18, sihðe b 61, onsihðe b 55, wriheles b
49, but sygaldren 6: lið 71, b 93 is līþ < ligeð,
il in ilespiles b 31, īl < igil. In twien b 210
from twiga the spirant has disappeared, as in monie b 168. Final
ig is regularly i,
bisi b 89, dusi 18. o +
h, g is oh, bitohe b 225, dohter b 52, but dehtren
b 15 with e from the dative singular. u + g, duhen
b 59, muhen b 44: y + g, h, buð b 11, b 187,
drihtines 41, b 206. ā + g, h, ah 17, ahne b 61,
ahnes b 207, ahte b 181, lahe b 141, b 152, wah b 58.
ǣ1 + g, h, ahte 84, bitaht 16, tahte b
75, but eiðer 53 (ǣgþer). ē + g, iueitsomet b 168,
iheiet b 234: ī + h, wrihen b 50 (*wrīhan
inf.), wriheð b 58: ō + g, inoh b 79, inohreaðe b
41, ibroht b 214, þohten 39. ea + ht: lahtre 50, mahte b
213 come from Anglian forms in æ; the i-umlaut gives mihte
b 230, niht b 215, but a in lahhen b 139, lahheð 97, monslaht 24
also represents Anglian æ. eo + ht, riht 51, rihten
b 99: sist b 57, sið b 89, b 159 are Anglian forms corresponding to WS.
siehst, siehð with i-umlaut (Bülbring
§ 217). ēa + g, h, deh b 66 (North,
dēg), ehe 51, ehnen b 63, heh b 186, hehe b 185, neh b 90, b 120,
but þah b 7, b 63, as if from Ang. *þæh. ēo + g,
h, dreheð b 233, but lihte b 39, lihtliche b 3, b 87. īe +
h, nest b 26, b 29 (North.
361
nēsta), lihtin b 101. ā + w is aw, blawen
40, icnaweð b 201, itawet b 24, nawiht b 9, nawt b 53, sawle 94, slaw
12, but nowðer b 48 represents OE. nōwþer, nohwer b 33, b 41,
nō(h)wǣr, similarly nohwider b 126, eawiht b 235, eawt 52
(*ǣwiht with i-umlaut, NED.); sehe b 139 is Anglian
sēge, WS. sāwe. ǣ1 + w is also
aw, rawe 33, slawðe 11, 18. ēa + w, þeawes b 81,
þeawfule b 106, but schawin 38. ēo + w is ow, fowr
39, b 101, trowðe 18, ow 99 &c., ower b 1; eo finally in gleo
47: neowe b 137 has no umlaut; the WS. form is nīwe (Bülbring
§ 306, anm. 5).
Unstressed swā is se 15 &c., but swa 73: a occurs
for o in anan b 87; e for o in streapeles b 42,
sunderliche 24, vnsteaðeluest 5; i for e in drihtines 41,
b 206; u for i in dimluker 43, greatluker b 157, monluker
b 110, as in the Katherine group; e is lost in earst b 52,
meidnes b 106, b 183, added in luðere 32, ȝiuere 92; o is lost in
unbischpet 19. The prefix ge is i; ǣr, ear
in earunder b 209; æt is ed b 178; þǣr is syncopated in
þrin, þrinne, þrof, þron, þrefter, þruppe, forms characteristic of the
Katherine group, found also in MSS. C, T, but not in N.
w is assimilated in frommard b 165; isehen b 62 descends from
gesegen, not from gesewen. Metathesis of r is seen
in iwraht b 24 (late North. wroht). ll is simplified in
druncwile 105; mm in grim 62. n is lost in earunder b 209,
and often in iþe 1, i 25 for in, o 7 for on; nn is
simplified in monluker b 110. p is inserted in nempneð b 48:
bb is simplified in neb b 54. f is regularly u
between vowels, or vowel and liquid, biuoren 94, heaued 8, froure b 221,
bearuot b 39, underueð 74, vnsteaðeluest 5, but lefunge 7; once v
appears initially, vet b 42, but not u. t is doubled in
hetter b 28, lost in best b 43, olhnin b 6; d for t occurs
in ed b 121 &c., edhalden 13, b 73 (but ethalt 87), prude 30:
t is assimilated in ȝisceunge 14, 16 (gītsung), ȝiscere
79: milce b 182 is milts, milci b 175 miltsie: tt
is simplified in cat b 2. d has disappeared in mungunge b 52; it
is doubled in foddre b 5: t for d appears in ontfule 31,
worltlich 36, b 107, b 108 (but worldliche b 139): mið 53 is Anglian for
mid: dd is simplified in bidest b 238. Initial þ often
becomes t after t, d, te 5, 32, b 178, b 216, tis
83, teo b 179, ter b 196, but þe b 43, b 171, þah b 196, þat b 215; it
is lost in forfearinde 29, d is written for it in edscene b 147,
ladlich b 7, t in leste b 37. For s, ce appears in
ȝisceunge 14, 16; ȝiscere 79 is gītsere: sć is regularly
sch, schrift 19, schende b 52, weschen b 145, but ssch in
dissches 93. The stop c is commonly written k before
e, i, kemese b 83, kene 69, kimeð 94, awakenet 24, lokeð b
215, makien 48, rikenin 25, stikeð 92, and ck after another
consonant in þonckið b 228, also in easkeð b 203, esken 79; in other
positions c, cat b 2, com b 74, cumeð 41, locunge b 143,
362
exceptions are kues b 5, kun b 72: ah 25 is Anglian ah, WS.
ac: k is inserted as a glide sound in skleatteð 53; see
Archiv cxxxi. 305. č is ch, chearre b 238, cwencheð b 165,
brech b 41, iþench b 237, kealche 103, swuch b 18, but keorue b 34,
keoruinde 65, conformed to curfon, corfen. čč is
cch in wicche(creftes) 7; isticchet b 142 is a ME. formation
descending from OE. stiče; contrast stikeð 92 (Bülbring
§ 499, anm. 5). cw is usually preserved, cwide 13,
forecwidderes 57, but quoð b 76. Palatal g is regularly written
ȝ, biȝete 12, ȝemeð 16; h is written for g in
murhðe b 221, orhel 38, teoheði 12; g is lost in sygaldren 6;
čǧ is gg, liggen b 28, seggen b 72. Initial h is
lost in lahheð 97, lahtre 50, lud 38, lust 54, ring b 64; hh is
simplified in laheð 83 and h doubled in crohhe 94
(crōh).
(2) Of B. The principal divergences
from A are noted. Some of them are due to the scribe’s inexperience; his
handling of the consonants in particular is confused. eo in
eondfule 48 for o from a before length. group is a French
writing; similar is neolden 89. æ is a in bras 103,
inohraþe 42, hwat 9, nappes 94, þat 16, craftes 7. cwude 12 is from
cwyde; liki 50 is a mistake for loki; u is o in
open 64 (uppan); y is i in mint 97. In leouerð 49,
eo is for o from ā; ea 53 represents ā, ever; comp.
nea L 1552, 1555. ǣ1 is a in agastan 57, ilad
4, 19, e in asnesen 68, hest 17, lesse 60, wredfule 32, ae
(= æ) in aetri 31, ea in eawer 72, 99: ǣnig is ai 8,
15, ei 7. ǣ2 is e in ilened 15, as generally
in A.
ea before r + cons. is a in barm 70, e in
bernes 74, sherpe 64, but sharpe 63, 66: eo before r +
cons. is e, swerd 64, but sweordes 68. There is no
å-umlaut in ateliche 57 (but eateliche 68), vnstaþelfast 5, fared
78, forfarinde 29, paþered 80, as in A: skletteð 53 is OWScand. sletta.
seofon is sewe 28. ēa is e, drem 37, 75, reflac 14;
ēo is also e in strenes 28, thehewen 12: gief is
gif 9. æ + g gives mai 4, 25; ā + w, out 51,
slauwe 70, slaþ 11 miswritten for slaw; ǣ1 + w,
areawe 32, slauþe 20, slouþe 10; ēo + w, trouþe 17. In
syllables of minor stress a appears for e, bemares 36,
galnasse 23, warpare 63; e for æ, ethalden 12, i
for u, neominge 7; e for ō, te 15 &c.,
tegederes 79: on is a 74. e is often inserted medially
between consonants, bolehed 85, iboregen 41, deoueles 42, deouelen 57,
iugelurs 46, wigeled 96.
For w, u is written in uule 72. l is lost in
fundes 12, n in cunen 46, druch 20. For p, b is
written in unbischbed 17: f medial occurs in bifore 39, biforen
60, vnstaþelfast 5, but biuoren 62 as in A, deoules 70 and w for
u in biworen 94, eawer 72, 99, giwere 105, keorwinde 64, 69,
kniwes 62, underweng 73. For t, d appears in bihald 82,
blend 80; ts is ss in gissere 78, gissunge 14, but
giscunge 13; d is lost in an 25 (but and 86 and consequently ⁊ þe
31, 73); it is unaltered in ondfule 31, wondrede 76, worldlich
363
35, where A has t: t is written for d in hont 60,
lauert 95, ð for d, leouerð 49; d is often written
for ð, beod 19 &c., drahed 35, gemed 15, libbed 33, puffed
36, serued 34, shuled 52, slead 30, tutelid 71, wid 2, wredfule 32,
wigeled 96, wurden 87; t for þ, fondet 29, gat 2, w
for þ, thehewen 12, warwið 89. sc is regularly sh,
dishes 93, shal 87, shruden 90, &c.: etheliche 76 is miswritten for
echeliche; in richkeneres 81, k was added above as a correction
of ch not deleted; cw is qu in forquiddares 56.
g is used for ġ, agein 5, bigete 11, ge 1. cht for
ht is frequent, drichtines 40, iplicht 17, richte 14; þ
for h occurs in þwitel 89, th for h in þothten 38,
for t in thehewen 12.
(3) Of N. For an account dealing with
the whole of Morton’s text see Ostermann: the examples given in the
following summary illustrate such differences as exist between N and A.
Oral a is a, blasie 143 (blase, sb.),
wasshen 124, wassheð 95; gledie 204 is influenced by glæd:
a before nasals and length. groups is o; hwon 6, 87,
seldwhonne 179 are the usual forms, but þeonne 5, 144, 181 by influence
of heonne. æ is regularly e, keppen 38, veder 154, ueste
37, gledliche 168; occasionally ea, heater 29, readliche 77;
a in hateren AR 104/24, later 151, was 3 (Bülbring, Ablaut 62),
water 76, and the flexion forms baruot 34, warliche 127. e is
e, blodbendes 64; raised to i before a palatal, sigge 110,
130, siggen 152 (South-Eastern and Kentish); u in stude 153,
sullen 12, swuche 18 &c. i is i, but u in
hwuder 103, wute 138, nute 107. o is o: u is
u, kumeð 184: y, u, drunch 187, wurcheð 70.
ā is regularly o, anon 69, boðe 105, mone 8, more 196, but
oa in moare 154, woanes 19 (comp. woaning 2/15, 2/25); eo
in beoðe 173, 182, and a in lates 127 (Scand. lát).
ǣ1 is regularly e, clene 22, eni 93, geð 100,
wreððe 133, but ea in arearen 140, unweawed 119, heale 193.
ǣ2 is mostly e, leten 108, lete 19, but
ea in heare 36, readeð 208, weaden 125, and a in hwarse
95, hwarto 126. The representation of ǣ1 and
ǣ2 is therefore practically identical. ē is
e; ī, i, but u in hwule 71, 198, ihwulen 73,
swuðe 197, wummen 171: ō is o; ū, u;
ȳ, u, hure 167, schruden 67, but ui, expressing
length, in huire 6, 164, 205.
ea before r + cons. is mostly e, hermes 7,
hermie 9, neruwure 189; before length. groups, herde 28, herdure 189,
and a, after w,
urommard 146, warme 25; in other
conditions occasionally a, sparke AR 296/13, or ea,
schearpe AR 82/11; a in warien 6 is to be explained as ea
in wearien 60/6. ea before l + cons. is a, halue
174, before length.
groups o, holden 177; the i-umlaut is seen in elde 100,
helden 181. eo before r + cons. is mostly eo,
heorden 28, leornen 79, but e in hercnen 73, werc, werke 70,
werkes 62; to the wur group belongs forwurðen 77; wyr
words are iwursed 174, wurðe AR 38/17: the i-umlaut is wanting in
heordemonne 6.
364
eo before l + cons. is u in sulf 32, suluen 189.
The u- and å-umlauts of a are not represented.
eo, u-umlaut of e, occurs in heouene 167, but
worlde 206, worldliche 90, 115; eo, å-umlaut of e,
in beoden 100, ueole 33: eo, u- and å-umlaut of
i,
in bicleoped 175, seolke 64, but hore 105, sustren
1, wike 172. ea after palatals is a, schal 27, 181,
ischauen 84, ea in ȝeate 105, scheape 125, but often e,
ȝet AR 74/12; schepieð 65 is from sćeppan. ie after
ġ is i, ȝiue 155, 205, uorȝiueð 185, e in ȝelden 7,
forȝelde 156: gef is ȝif 20 &c. eo after ġ is
u, ȝungre 108; after sć, schule 66, schulde 72. eom
is am 210, heom, ham 188. ēa is regularly ea,
cheapeð 13, cheapild 12, cweadschipe 75, but e in chepmon 13,
cheffare 11, gretluker 137, gretture 62; its i-umlaut is e
in ȝeme 173, ȝemen 80, ȝemeleaste 175, leue 156, 193, misleue 165, but
ea in dreamen 192. ēo is regularly eo, but e
in seke 91, secnesse 93; the i-umlaut has e in nede
adv. 9, but neode 20, neodeð 26. Palatalization after ġ,
sć is absent in ȝere 83, schon 33. gīeta is ȝete 176;
gesīene is represented in eðcene 126.
a + g is aw, dawes 88: auh 54 is the equivalent
of Anglian ah, WS. ac. æ + g gives
ei, deie 94, feir 100; muwe 163 is LWS. muge for earlier
mæge. e + g is also ei, eilie 9, weie 100:
seihtnesse 139 is sæhtness. o + g, bitowen 198:
o + h, iwrouhte 25. u + g, muwen 37, 67.
ā + g, owen 167, owune 67, 190: ā + h, ouh
10, 80, ouhte 163, louh 121, lowe 118, louwe 131, nouhwuder 103.
ǣ1 + h, eihte 3, 8. ī + g, iueied
149, iheid 206. ō + g, inouh 36, 210, þouht 10. ea
+ h, muhte 116. ie + h, nihtes 22, isihð 23, 71,
140: lauhwen 115 corresponds to lahhen in A. eo + h, rihte
136. ēa + g, deih 56, eien 54, heie 168, 176: ēa +
h, neih 72, heie 118, but þauh 7 &c., as if from þah >
*þĕah. ēo + g, drieð 205. īe + h,
nexst 27. ā + w, nout 10, nouhtunge 145, nouðer 112, 159,
but drawe 11, itauwed 25 (forms from the scribe’s exemplar), iseie 116.
ō + w, touward 71, 112, 199. ēa + w,
þeaufule 89. ēo + w, four 83, our 91, ower 175, seouweð
65.
Swā is so 62 &c., once se 187, and in composition hwo se
29, hwer se 60. For e, a is written in demare 176, for
on in akneon 129; for o, e in strapeles 37;
e is added in heuede 197, sunegeð 174, ȝeorneliche 177, u
in gretture 62, herdure, neruwure 189: in contrast with A, syncope is
rare. The suffix -lēas is unchanged in wimpelleas 37.
w is assimilated in urommard 146, uppard AR 216/28. iwrouhte
25, corresponding to iwraht in A, has metathesis of r. ll
is simplified in griðfulnesse 4; for l, r appears in
irspiles 30. Final n is lost in iðe 83, o 141, but it is
otherwise very regularly retained; it is simplified in monluker 93.
f is kept in the combinations fd, ff, fs,
ft, lefdi 208, cheffare 11, ofte 19, lufsumere 54; as a final,
strif 134; initially after a word ending in a voiceless
365
sound, foddre 5, fondunge 74, forwurðen 77 (with exceptions at 54, 90,
150, 172); also before u, ful 36, fur 142, 146, þeaufule 89, to
avoid uu. Otherwise it is u, v, at the beginning of
a sentence, Vor 5, Uorði 23; after a syntactical pause, vor 72, 94;
after a word ending in a voiced sound, uet 37, ueond 69, or a liquid,
uor 69, ueste 124, uere 110; or medially, iuestned 10, luuien 180. But
f is exceptionally written sometimes after d, for 14, four
83, especially after and 147, 156, 204, 209, where the exemplar had ant,
as well as in flesshes 74: of is shortened to o 195, 208;
w is written for u in unweawed 119. ts is c
in milce 157, 165. þ is assimilated in ette 160, but and te 189
is due to ant te in the scribe’s exemplar; þ is d in
lodlich 7. For s, c is written in eðcene 126: sć is
initially sch, schal 27, schon 33, medially ssh in
flesshes 74, wasshen 124, but fleshe 27. c [k] is c before
consonants, clene 22, hercnen 73, but akneon 129, iknotted 36, iknowed
185; k is regular before e and i, keppen 38, makien 129, and as
frequent as c before other vowel sounds, kat 2, kom 75, kume 102.
č is ch, but ecchenesse 207: istihd 119 is miswritten for
istichd. Palatal g is regularly written ȝ; rg is
rw in midmorwen 162; ng is nc in strencðe 18;
čǧ is gg, liggen 29, sigge 110. hs is written
xs in nexst 27.
(4) Of T and C. According to the
careful investigation of Mühe, MS. T exhibits a varying mixture of Anglian and
Southern forms, the former being predominant. MS. C differs in no main
feature from A. As in the Lambeth MS. of the PM (317/6) ch for
h is frequent, olchni 6, þocht, nawicht 10, iwracht 25, þach 53,
echnen 54; noteworthy is the interpolated y sound in muchȝen 67
(mugon), sechȝe 116, lachȝe, hechȝe 118, iueiȝet 149 &c.
Accidence: (1) of A. Strong
declension of masc. and neut. nouns. In the
s. n. sune b 231 represents sunu. Gen. -es, gastes b 165, bearnes 75: d. -e, bedde b 25, bure b 186, chearre b 238, hame
b 122 (WS. hām), but the inflection is wanting in more than half
the instances, clað b 23, hus b 148, &c. The pl. n. a.
of masculines ends in -es, bemeres 36,
brondes b 161, but scheos b 39, and schon b 38, a weak form: neuters,
with the exception of word 65, have taken the masc. termination, felles
b 24, b 31, gomenes b 218, þinges b 140, werkes 62, wordes 96, &c.,
or have joined the weak declension, beoden b 124, b 206, deoflen 58, 67,
sygaldren 6: wa b 186, pl. a. is indeclinable: genitives are
cunne b 30, englene 39, 76, þinge b 200; datives have mostly -es, breres b 32, streones 5 and 19 others, but beoden
b 237, cneon b 150 (Mercian cnēom), ȝeten b 128, siðen b 19, b
101; mel b 177, þing b 129 are acc. in form. The fem.
nouns of the strong declension have -e in
the s. n., fulðe b 113, hure b 184, neode b 17, b 202,
þuftene b 123; exceptions are heast 18, b 115 (hǣs),
366
neod b 1, b 20, b 217, þuften b 119; the acc. also has -e. Gen. -e, helle 76, heorte 86: dat. -e, honde b 121, worlde b 234, sawle b 175, b 176, but
uninflected half 40, 52, help b 75, hond 34, 95, luft 52, world 40, b
234. Pl. n. are teolunges 6, esken 85, weden b 146; d.,
esken 79, honden b 14, sunnen 21, talen b 106, wunden b 198, sawles b
176; a. ahte b 3, kemese b 83, leasunges b 140, secnesses b 36,
glouen b 65, honden b 29, spechen b 139, sunnen 24, talen b 137. The
extension of the weak declension at the expense of the strong is
Southern. Nouns of the weak declension have -e in all cases of the singular; exception, leafdi
s. a. b 235. Pl. n. are neddren, tadden 88, ancres b
188, leafdis b 46, b 79; pl. d. bemen 39, 76, cappen b 45, earen
b 206, ehnen 48, b 63, heorden b 27, hosen b 39, nomen 25; pl. a.
earen 54, b 136, blodbinde, huue b 69, teone b 187 (Anglian absence of
n). The minor declensions are represented by vet s. d. b 42;
wummon s. n. b 41, monnes s. g. b 58, wepmonnes
b 56, mon s. d. b 220, chapmon b 12, wummon b 47,
s. a. b 21, cunnesmon b 144, men pl. n. 99, monne
pl. g. b 15, b 70, wummone b 194, heordemonne b 5, wepmen pl.
d. b 97; boc s. d. b 223, (o)boke b 134; brech pl.
a. b 41; kues s. g. b 5; niht pl. n. b 215;
feader s. n. b 173; broðer s. n. b 75, breðer
s. d. b 76; moder s. n. 21; dohter
s. n. b 52, dehtren pl. n. b 15; suster
s. n. b 4, sustren pl. n. b 1, b 232, sustres ?pl.
g. b 208; child s. n. 22, godchild s. a. 20,
childrene pl. g. b 96; feondes s. g. 92, feond
s. d. 34, 63, b 159; hettren pl. a. b 70
(hæteru): hetter s. d. b 28 is a ME. formation.
Adjectives which in OE. end in e retain that termination in all
cases, as cleane b 21, softe b 198, swete b 43. Instances of weak
inflections are s. n. eadmode b 119, fleschliche b 75, hehe
b 185, swote b 43; g. sunfule b 51; d. dredfule 76,
grurefule 40, hehe b 192, wide 103; a. greate 97, ondfule 50,
rihte 15: a solitary strong inflection is linnene
s. a. m. b 26. All other adjectives are uninflected in
the singular, as ful b 93, heh b 186, riht 51. Those in -ig lose
g, almihti b 231, attri 12; druncwile 105 represents druncwillen;
lute b 116, lȳtel; mycel is mostly muche, but
s. n. muchel b 18 (3); d. muchele 60, b 225;
a. b 226; pl. a. 80: āgen gives s. n.
ahne b 61; g. ahnes b 207; d. ahne b 205; pl. n.
57. The pl. ends in e, bĭsie b 121, idele b 137; exceptions are
hāli b 14, idel b 87. OE. āna is ane b 2 &c.; ān is
an, a; s. g. anes 14: nān is nan, na;
s. g. nanes 51; pl. a. nane b 68, b 137, b 218.
Adjectives used as nouns are inflected, as s. gode b 238, idele
74, nearewe b 204, slawe 71, wide b 205, wreaðfule 63, wurse 56;
pl. neodfule 90, ontfule 31, prude 30, wreaðfule 32; exceptions
are ȝemeles (predicative) 10, 12, god 53, 73: feorle 100 represents
fǣrlic. Comparatives end regularly in e, lufsumre b 64, except
dimluker 43, greatluker b 157: of superlatives only leaste b 188 is
inflected.
367
The personal pronouns are ich, me, us, þu, þe, ȝe, ow b 37, b 196.
The pron. of the third person is s. n. he m. 66, ha
f. b 4 &c., heo b 127, hit neut. 5; d. him
m. 88; a. him m. 69, hire f. b 89, hit
neut. b 2; pl. n. ha 33, 51, 53, b 147, b 191, heo b 143,
b 149; d. ham 4; a. 58 &c. Reflexives are ow b 106, ow
seoluen b 85, him 27, him seolf 81, b 208, him seoluen b 234, hire b 30,
b 33, hire seolf b 32, ham b 166, b 170, ham seolf b 138, b 194:
definitive is ham seolf 59: possessives are mi s. b 91, mine
pl. 99, b 1, b 232, þin b 162, ure b 173, ower b 1 &c., his
11, hire b 9, hare pl. 5 &c. The definite article is mostly
þe, te after t; inflected forms are þet s. a. neut. b 205,
þer s. d. f. b 155, þen s. d. neut., in ear
þen b 126. Þet is used demonstratively 52, 53, 54, b 152, þet ilke b
152, b 153, b 161: the article is also used pronominally in þeo þe,
those who b 86, which 25, þeo, that one b 122, teo, those b 179: þer
buten, without that, b 103. The compound demonstrative is þes
s. n. m. 74, þeos s. n. f. b 117, þis
82, þis s. n. neut. b 158, s. d. f. b 223,
s. a. neut. b 188, tis 83, þes pl. n. 81, þeos 20,
56, þeose pl. d. 28, 43, b 115, pl. a. 97. The relatives
are þe, þet b 126; þe sometimes means he who 11, she who 21, b 103.
Interrogative is hwuch 9; its correlative is swuch b 18, b 65, b 146;
ilca is ilke b 152; þyllic, þullich 104, þulliche
pl. 3, 20. Indefinites are hwa se 15, hwam se d. 73, hwet
se b 183; me 16, b 7; sum 27, summe pl. 47, b 46; eiðer 53
&c.; oðres s. g. 14, oþer s. d. 8, 47, oþre
66, b 239, pl. n. 26, oðer pl. g. b 15; oðerhwet b 177;
euch 34, euche s. d. b 188, b 223; ǣnig is mostly ei
8 &c., but eani 8, b 111, b 213; nowðer b 48; eawt 52, nawt b 15, b
89; monie pl. 80, b 168; al s. n. a. 82, 72,
alle s. g. b 207, s. d. b 149, pl. n. 20,
d. 7, a. 24, mid alle b 20.
Three-fourths of the infinitives end in -en; those of the second weak conjugation mostly in
-ien, as makien, þolien; with -in are bemin 43, grennin 59, hungrin 99, lokin 51, b
145, rikenin 25, 82, schawin 38 and the ME. niuelin 59, olhnin b 6,
toggin b 145, wimplin b 51; with -i,
teoheði 12; with -e, cume b 90, drahe b
53, forwurðe b 95, habbe b 2, teache 19, wrenche 48; contract verbs are
underuon b 100, wreon b 50. The dat. inf. is inflected in forte
donne b 227, to witene 17. Presents are s. 1. bidde b 237, hopie
b 224; 2. hudest, sist b 57; 3. attreð b 80, bodeð 66, forms in -ið are þreatið 97, winkið 51, contract verbs,
sið b 89, b 159, sleað 30, contracted forms, being about one-fifth of
the total number of 3rd presents, bihalt 83, 97, ethalt 87, blent 82,
buð b 11, b 187, hat b 135, leið 72, b 152, lið 71, b 93, punt b 6, seið
89, send b 127, understont 83, went b 204; pl. 2. dreheð b 233,
feleð b 111, makieð b 80; 3. bihateð b 201, bodieð 57, makieð 38, in
-ið, awakenið b 61, leornið 61, sungið b
46, b 191; also seoð b 22: subjunctive s. 3. arise b 55, beate b
31; in -i, biblodgi b 32,
368
binetli b 33, easki b 78, eili b 9, frouri b 232, hearmi b 9, milci b
175; in -ie, bleasie b 162, gleadie b 232,
makie b 18, b 155, b 217, trukie b 183; from contract verbs, seo b 143,
wreo b 54; pl. cussen b 156, dreden b 196, heatien b 141, makien
b 150, plohien b 218, þolien b 43; in -in,
bemin b 206, lokin b 147; with apocope of n, ȝeoue b 131, segge b 172,
ticki b 219; from contract verb, underuon b 151, underuo b 130:
imperative s. 2. ȝef 104, ȝeot 103, loki b 9; pl. 2.
ariseð 40, schurteð b 106, schapieð b 70, seowið b 70, talkið b 105,
þonckið b 228, forȝeoued b 200, driue ȝe b 11, fondi(n), leue ȝe b 36,
makie ȝe b 67, b 80, wite ȝe b 15, gruchesi ȝe b 177. Past of Strong
Verbs: I a. s. 3. quoð b 76; subj. s. 3. sehe b 139: I b.
s. 3. com b 74, b 93: I c. s. 3. dronc 21, swonc b 236: V.
pl. 2. edheolden, underuengen b 73. Participles present: I c.
keoruinde 65, 69, singinde b 124: II. bitinde b 199: III. lutinde b 152:
IV. drahinde 45, forfearinde 29: V. wallinde 103; past: I a. isehen b
62: I b. iboren b 213, ibroken b 21, utnume adj. b 221: I c.
iborhen 42, icoruen b 141, fordrunke adj. 96, ilumpen b 19: II.
iwritene 28: II, III. bitohe b 225: III. bilokene 26: IV. ischauen b
101, isleine 33: V. edhalden b 215, ileten b 103, ilete b 104. Past of
Weak Verbs: s. 1. cleopede 9, hefde b 225, seide b 117; 3.
schende b 52, gulte b 157, tahte b 75, ondswerede b 76; pl. 3.
liueden b 14, þohten 39. Participles present: suhinde b 199, wundrinde b
76; past: awakenet 24, biburiet b 76 and 28 others in -t, ilead 4, igurd b 28, istreonede 23, iturnde b 147,
ontende b 168 and six others in -d. Minor
Groups: nat 1 pr. s. 3, wat pr. s. b 7, nat 10, wite
pr. s. subj. b 226, nute b 130, witen pr. pl. subj. b 158; ah
pr. s. 17, ahen pr. pl. b 184, ahte pt. s. b 181
(with present meaning); duhen inf. b 59, deh pr. s. b 66;
con pr. s. b 134, cunnen pr. pl. 47, b 171; schal pr.
s. 42, schulen 2 pr. pl. b 28, schule 99, b 105, b 191,
schulen pr. pl. 58, 89, schule ȝe 2 s. imp. b 71, schulde
1 pt. s. b 90, pt. s. 22; mei pr. s. 4, mahen 2
pr. pl. b 29, b 85 (4), pr. pl. 50, b 79, mahe pr. s.
subj. b 148, b 180, muhen 2 pr. pl. subj. b 44, mahte pt.
s. 25, b 140, b 213; mot pr. s. b 5, mote pr. s. subj.
b 208; beon inf. 4 (9), beo b 4 (4), to beonne dat. inf. b
195, beonne b 74, forte beon 41, am 1 pr. s. b 236, is pr.
s. 2, nis 5, beoð 2 pr. pl. b 104, b 223, pr. pl. 3,
20, 26, beo pr. s. subj. b 9 (9), beon 2 pr. pl. subj. b
203, pr. pl. subj. b 38 (5), beoð 2 pl. imp. b 45 (3), beo
ȝe b 86, wes pt. s. b 3, were pt. s. subj. b 96; wule
pr. s. b 53, b 160, wulleð 2 pr. pl. b 101, b 113, b 205,
wule pr. s. subj. 72, b 27, wullen 2 pr. pl. subj. b 45,
nalde pt. s. 90, walden pt. pl. 42; don inf. b
22 (3), do b 226, forte donne dat. inf. b 227, to fordonne 30, dest
2 pr. s. b 60, deð pr. s. 50 (3), doð 2 pr. pl. b
67, b 227, pr. pl. 38, 82, do pr. s. subj. b 154, don
pr. pl. subj. b 180, b 205, dude pt. s. 22, idon
pp. b 176; gan inf. 19, b 39, geað
pr. s. b 124, gað 2
369
pr. pl. 1, 2 pl. imp. b 210, ga pr. s. subj. b 124,
b 126, b 129, aga b 160.
(2) Of B. This differs from A in
being somewhat more fully inflected: divergences from A are noted. londe
2, schrifte 18 have dative inflection; domes 40 is probably a mistake
for dome; sunnen 26, earen 71 are s. d.: þes 82, 92 is
s. g. m. of the article, þen 103
s. d. m., 32 pl. d.: ha 60 is probably
miswritten for hare. In the inflection of the verbs i is occasionally
found, skirmin inf. 66, seruin 46, seruid pr. s. 48,
tutelid pr. s. 71, shuli inf. 47, liki (loki) 50: other
noteworthy forms are agastan 57, a survival, maken 47 inf. of the
second weak conjugation, ablent 84 contracted pr. s., bitahted 15
pp.
(3) Of N. The inflections are
generally better preserved than in A. Strong masculine and neuter nouns
have -e in the dat. sing., deie 94, weie
100 &c.; exceptions are cloð, drunch 187: mele 158, þinge 90 are
pl. d., blodbendes 64, pl. a. Of the strong feminines
n. s. are neode 20, seihtnesse 139; s. d.
ȝemeleaste 175, halue 174, hwule 198; s. a. hwule 21, 71,
leasunge 117, ?mone 8; pl. d. soulen 157; pl. a. eihte 3:
weak is ancren n. pl. 171. In the minor declensions ueonde 139 is
s. d.,
monne 9, 109, 124, pl. d. The adjectives godere 182, heie 168 are
s. d. f., sorie 91, pl. n., worldliche 90,
pl. d. ān is on, o 138, g. ones 193, d. one
94, 208, on 29, a. one 22; nān, non 27, no 23, g.
none[s] weis 3, a. m. nenne 20, 23, 108, no 27,
a. f. none 11, 101, a. neut. no 11; pl. d.
none 9, 109, 124: āgen is represented by owune s. d.
67, 190. The n. s. f. of the pronoun of the third
person is heo: possessive mine 73 is a. s. f.:
ēower is our 91, ower 175, heora, hore 105. Inflections of
the article are s. n. þe m., þe f., þet
neut. 140, d. þer f. 130, 170, a. þene
m. 6 (4), þeo f. 21, 71; pl. a. þeo 88. The
compound demonstrative has s. d. f. þisse 195, 208,
s. a. f. þeos 209. The relative is þet; swuche 18, 92,
125 is s. d., sume 140, s. a. f., 90,
pl. d.; ueole pl. a. 33; eueriche 195,
s. d. m.; ǣnig is eni 8, 93.
Infinitives end in -en, those of the
second weak conjugation mostly in -ien,
but loken 124; forms in -in, -i are absent. An inflected infinitive is forto donne
199, in other cases the simple form is preceded by uorto, uorte, for to,
except to schruden 67. Inflected forms with -i are not found in any part of the verb. The contract
verb sēon gives isihð pr. s. 23, 71, 140: contracted forms
of the pr. s. occur about as frequently as in A: the pr.
pl. ends in -eð, drieð 205, sunegeð
174, but iseoð 23; the pr. subj. ends in -e, -en, eilie 9, gledie
204, hermie 9, milce 157, sigge 130, siggen 152, but iseo 119. Past of
Strong Verbs: I a. iseie subj. s. 3. 116: II. wrot s. 3.
209. Participles present: I c. singinde 100: II. bitinde 183: III. lutende 131;
past: I a. iseien 53: I b. ikumen 19: II, III. bitowen 198. Past of Weak
Verbs:
370
heuede 1 pt. s. 197. Inflected past participles are isette
a. s. f. 164, iwrouhte pl. 25. Minor Groups: wot
pr. s. 198, wat 7, wute ȝe imp. pl. 138 (Anglian); ouh
pr. s. 10, 80, owen pr. pl. 167, ouhte pt. s. 163;
deih pr. s. 56; schullen 2 pr. pl. 29, schulen 87, 175;
muwe pr. s. subj. 163, muwen 2 pr. pl. subj. 37, 67, muhte
pt. s. 116; beon inf. 4, pr. pl. subj. 24, to beon
dat. inf. 179, was pt. s. 3; uorto don dat. inf.
199, don 2 pr. pl. subj. 62; uorto gon dat. inf. 34, geð
pr. s. 100, go pr. s. subj. 100 (4).
(4) Of T: mainly a statement of
divergences from A. In the strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns, wede s. n. 125 represents OE.
gewǣde; heordes 6 is s. g. As in A, the dat.
sing. is mostly uninflected, but ȝate 105, hame 98, rihte 164, tune 109.
schon 33 is a weak n. pl., beodes n. pl. 192, a.
pl. 100 has masc. termination, þinge 184 is pl. g.;
datives have mostly -es, -s, cneos 129, 135, giltes 150, wahes 19, but siðe 19,
83, þinge 117; meal 158, þing 106, 188 are acc. in form. Strong
declension of fem. nouns: somentale n. s. 139
represents -talu; dat. -e,
lokinge 18, but uninflected are hond 97 (hond), rest 92;
acc. -e, without exception:
fondinges 74 pl. n. has masc. termination, tales 89 is pl.
d., acc. are gloues 56, leasinges 117, speches 115, tales
114, ahte 3. Nouns of the weak declension are s. g. ancres
8 (4), chirches 66, schirches 32 (= chirches), d. deme 176,
eare 192, fere 110, anker 165, lauedi 155, lafdi 112; pl. n.
ancres 171, d. ehne 54, hose 35, heordes 28, a. cappes 38,
eares 112. The tendency to substitute the terminations of the strong
declension for those of the weak is Midland. In the minor declensions
namon 9 is s. d.; sustre 204, pl. n.; childrene 78,
pl. g.
An adjective inflected in the sing. is hehe 176: plurals have
-e, with the exception of bisi 97, idel
69, sari 91: pl. a. is nane 115. Beside ich 86 (3), i occurs 72
as pers. pronoun. The n. s. f. and n. pl. of the
pronoun of the third person is ho 4, 122; hom 167 is miswritten for ho;
heora is hare 125, 127, hore 126. The relative pronoun is þat:
the demonstrative þā, those, is seen in (⁊) ta 68, 161: the
indef. is mon 8 (5); hwat as noun occurs at 145, 159; āwiht is
oht 208; alle is s. d. 128, pl. d. 116.
Infinitives are divided equally between -en and -e; those in -ien are hatien 117, þolien 87, 169, in -ie, werie 27, but loke 124; forms with -in, -i are
absent. Dative infinitives are for to biginnen 199, for to puffen 143,
to habben 56, with four others in -en; to
breke 20, to haue 11, to lose 94, to reare 140. The 3rd pr. s.
ends in -es, askes 188, blawes 190, and 32
others, none being contracted forms, but lis 76, seos 71, 140, and bueð
170; the 3rd pr. pl. in -en,
bihaten 186, hauen 208, and 13 others, but suneheþ 174; the
subjunctive pr. s. in -e, blawe
148, cume 102, blodeke 32, eile 9, like 35, make 135, but blasie 143,
gladie 204, trukie 166, werie
371
27, seo 23, pl. in -en, bemen 192,
hauen 66, nabben 106, halden 202 (but halde 147), luuien 180, makien
129; imperative s. 2. in -e, loke
9, were 30, pl. in -es, biddes 201,
haues 21, habbes 26 and twelve others, driue ȝe 12, gruse ȝe 158,
&c. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. subj. s. 3. sehe 116: I c.
s. 3. swanc 210: III. pl. 2. drehden 205, a weak form;
comp. HM 37/6. Participles present: II. bitende 183: III. lutende 131;
past: II, III. bitohen 198: V. bifallen 19, ileten 85, 87. Past of Weak
Verbs: s. 1. hafde 197. Participles present: seiende 100,
suhiende 184; past: bicleopet 175, iset 164, ifest 149 and 8 others in
-t, idodded 83, ilaced 37, iturnde 126,
gurd 30, red 208, icnotten 36. Minor Groups: duhen inf. 24, deah
pr. s. 56; cunnen pr. pl. 172, cunen 152; schule 2 pr.
pl. 175, schuln 29, schule pr. pl. 122; mai pr. s. 4,
muhen 2 pr. pl. 67, 89, 173; beon inf. 53, 196, beo 4 (6),
to beon dat. inf. 179, arn 2 pr. pl. 87 (5), pr.
pl. beon 126, 147, 149, beos 97, beo pr. s. subj. 148, 206,
beon 2 pr. pl. subj. 189, pr. pl. subj. 33, 105, beos 2
pl. imp. 188, 201, beo ȝe 69, was pt. s. 3, were pt. s.
subj. 198; wile pr. s. 28, 168, nule 29, wiln 2 pr.
pl. 96, 191; don inf. 89, for to donne dat. inf. 199,
to do 199, dos pr. s. 142, 189, don 2 pr. pl. 200, 201,
pr. pl. 129, 157, 2 pr. pl. subj. 62, do 191, idon
pp. 157; to gan dat. inf. 34, gas pr. s. 100, ga
pr. s. subj. 100, 141. The termination of ladli adj. 7,
gladli adv. 168, nomeli 149 is due to Scand. -ligr, -liga; nedinge 9
represents OE. nēadinga; wið prep. 20, 22 (in N mid), ni conj. 55
&c., and til conj. 172 are noteworthy.
(5) Of C. This differs little from A.
Nouns of the weak declension are ancres s. g. 8, blodbinden
pl. a. 64. The pronoun of the third person
s. n. f., pl. n. is ha 4, 122. While the pr.
s. of the verb regularly ends in -eð,
makes 8, 20 survives from the Midland original; so too don 2 pr.
pl. 200 beside doð 201, beon 126, 149. iburð pr. s. impers.
56, befits, represents OE. gebyreþ; other verbal forms are sechȝe
pt. s. subj. 116, segginde pres. p. 100, nach for ne ah
pr. s. 80, achȝen pr. pl. 167, muchȝen 2 pr. pl.
67, muȝen 92, wullet 2 pr. pl. 96, 191 beside wulled 84, wullen
38. The adv. nedunge 9 represents OE. nēadunga.
Vocabulary: The Scandinavian element is large: ai T 206,
arn T 87 &c., blast T 144, eskibah 79, flutte b 182, geineð b 163,
grið(fullnesse) b 4, hesmel N 118, lah b 143, lahe b 152, lane 13,
lastunge 56, lates b 147, meoke b 38, b 66, nai b 48, b 76, riue b 83,
riueð b 82, riuunges b 83, sahtnesse b 158, (but seih[t]nesse N is
English), scale 95, semes T 3, skile b 118, skleatteð 53, tiþinges NT
114, tidinges b 138, C 114, til TC 172, wanes b 19, warpere 64, warpeð
66 (worpare, worpeð N are English), windowe b 59, wontreaðe 76, wursnet
T 174: probably baðe T 105, T 156, T 187, brendes C 141, hird B 33,
hwitel 89, lustni b 90, lustnen T 73,
372
meaðeleð 73, 96, rukelin 80, rukeleð 86, ruken 81, somen (tale) T 139,
suhinde b 199, suhiende T 184, suwinde N 184, umben b 229, TC 201:
possibly dusten 68, glopnen T 56/58. The French element is very
extensive; many of the words appear for the first time: accidie 11,
amendeð N 65, mendið b 70, amices b 78, angoise 60, apostle b 50, atiffi
b 63, untiffet b 64, tiffunge b 53, aturn b 146, augrim 81, best N 2,
beastes 28, boistes b 16, broche b 65, caliz C N 17, chaliz T 17, canges
82, celer 92, change b 222, ichanget b 117, chartres b 16, cheres 48,
complie b 179, criblin b 81, curt 34, cuuertur 89, cyrograffes b 17,
dame b 129, (deuleset TC 198), disceplines b 35, dute N 79, eise b 187,
eise b 223, eoli b 197 (Bonn. Beitr. xv. 110), familiers T 113, figures
81, folliche 18, frut b 177, gloire b 80, glutun 92, grace b 174, graces
b 171, greueð b 105, gruchunge b 135, haire T 36, hurte b 214, hurten b
213, inobedience 6, iuglurs 47, large b 203, laz b 69, ilacet b 42,
leattres b 99, leon B 30 liun 30, manciple 92, mantel C 120, imantlet C
121, meistre b 2, imembret b 65, meoster 35 mester B 48, mustreisun b
80, noise 38, obedient b 129, ore 7, parures b 79, penitence b 169,
poure b 70, pouerte b 114, prophetes 57, religiun b 74, riwle b 116,
rund b 59, sacrement 8, scoren b 16, scurge b 32 schurge N 31, seinte C
46, semblant 60, seruant b 181, seruin 47, seruise 43, silence b 180,
skirmi 67, sot(schipe) b 111, spece 5, stamin b 27, strif b 154,
isturbed N 163 isturbet b 181, suffreð N 205, surpliz b 66, taueles b
82, temptaciuns b 35, tendre b 73, terme 15, tohurten b 164, triccherie
17, vnicorne 32, ures b 135, vampez b 40, veiles b 45, veine b 80,
uestemenz b 17. Latin borrowings are auez b 134 auees C 111, cuchene 93
(pre-Conquest), false 6, falsliche 19, paternostres b 134, presumptio 9,
purses b 68, scapeloris C 120, unbischpet 19, venie b 150.
Dialect: The AR has hitherto been generally regarded as
Southern, partly because of the prevailing Southern dialect of the
manuscript printed by Morton, and partly because of the fancied
connexion of the treatise with Tarrant Kaines in Dorsetshire. But the
presence of Midland and Northern forms to a greater or less extent in
all the manuscripts, although four of them at least were written by
Southern scribes, points to the Northern border of the Midland area as
the home of the original, while the large Scandinavian element in the
vocabulary and the absence of the characteristic u in unaccented final
syllables (-ud, -un, -us, -ut) decide for the
East against the West Midland. MS. N is a copy made by a scribe of the
Middle South; his alterations of the inflections are systematic, but
with occasional lapses like timbrin Morton, 12/24, blescið 18/11,
seihtni 28/19, kalenges tu 54/2, wenes tu 54/5 (beside wenest tu 54/20),
muhtes 304/13 (but muhtest 270/3) &c.; more frequently he copies
Anglian
373
sounds from his exemplar. He also substitutes, as far as he can, English
and French words for Scandinavian, e. g. hercnen 73 for lustnin,
yet he retains such purely Northern elements as suwinde 184, and the
suffix in godleic Morton, 136/15, ureoleic 192/25. Peculiar to the
scribe are his representations of a + h, ā +
h, ō + w (touward occurs in Layamon). MS. A
presents the characteristic features of the Katherine Group; it is a
copy by a scribe of the Northern border of the South. The Midland
element in its sounds is considerable, but the inflection is mainly
Southern; the u- and å-umlauts of a appear to be
due to the scribe and not to the original. MS. B is closely related to
A, but it is somewhat more Southern in preservation of the inflections;
the scribe was more accustomed to French than to English. MS. C also
closely resembles A, but in the flexion North-Midland forms appear more
often by inadvertence. In MS. T, both sounds and inflections are
predominantly Midland: still in other parts of the manuscript the
Southern element is more evident than in our extract. This manuscript
stands nearest in dialect to the original; it appears to be a copy of a
North-Midland text made by a scribe not long enough resident in the
Midland area to have quite forgotten his native Southern speech.
Style: MS. N is not only the most remote from the
original in dialect, it has also been altered in language more than the
others, partly from a desire to make the meaning plainer, partly from a
dislike of any singularity of expression. The changes made may be
classified as i. insertion of connecting particles, ‘and,’ ‘vor,’
‘þeonne,’ N 144 &c.; ‘so uorð so’ in A is altered into ‘uor so’
Morton, 136/13: ii. expansions like ‘ȝe habbeð’ N 95, ‘he nout’ N 101,
‘to þer eorðe’ N 130, ‘þeo þinges’ N 160: iii. re-arrangement of words
in a prose order, ‘kume hom’ N 102, ‘so’ N 115, ‘dreamen wel’ N 192: iv.
substitution of nouns for pronouns, ‘nenne mon’ N 23; the writer has a
peculiar affection for the word mon, so, ‘ase deð, among moni mon, sum
uniseli ancre,’ Morton 128/23, where A has ‘monie’ without noun: v.
elimination of words and expressions used in a figurative way, ‘hit is’
N 99 for ‘driueð,’ ‘kumeð—heouene’ N 170, destroying the
alliteration. These alterations have tended to obscure the peculiar
rhythmic movement of the prose, which was a feature of the original as
of Sawles Warde, the Katherine Group, Hali Meidenhad and some smaller
pieces. It is discernible in the other manuscripts, especially in
elevated passages, as b 182-7, b 205-8, b 231-5, and the scribe of MS. A
often shows by his punctuation that he recognized its existence.
Introduction: The Ancren Riwle, as it was called by
Morton, the Ancrene Wisse (the Anchoresses’ Guide) as its title is in
MS. A, was
374
written for the instruction of three sisters, ‘gentile wummen,’ of whom
the author says ‘ine blostme of ower ȝuweðe, uorheten alle worldes
blissen ⁊ bicomen ancren’ (Morton, 192). Their dwelling is under the
eaves of a church, they are ‘under chirche iancred’ (M. 142); there is
but a wall between them and the Host (M. 262). They live in separate
cells, for they send messages to one another by their attendant maids
(M. 256), and they are fully provided for, ‘euerich of ou haueð of one
ureond al þet hire is neod; ne þerf þet meiden sechen nouðer
bread ne suuel, fur þene et his halle’ (M. 192). They are greatly
beloved, ‘vor godleic ⁊ for ureoleic iȝerned of monie’ (M. 192); their
whole life in so strict an order is as a martyrdom, ‘ȝe beoð niht ⁊ dei
upe Godes rode’ (M. 348).
As they were not subject in their anchorhold to any recognized
monastic rule, they sought some regulations for their way of life, and
the treatise they received is represented, so far as the matter is
concerned, best by MS. N. But a book so helpful was certain to be copied
for the use of other anchorites, with suitable adaptations and possibly
additions; such a copy is MS. A, made a considerable time after the
original. It omits the important reference to the author, found only in
MS. N, wherein he speaks of the practice of the lay brothers of the
community to which he belonged (Morton, 24), the word ‘leawude’ in ‘ure
leawude breðren’ (M. 412/8), and the passage addressed by the author to
the ladies for whom the book was composed (M. 192) containing the
biographical details quoted above: of the numerous additions the most
interesting is that in which reference is made to the general adoption
of the rule by anchoresses all over England, with such unanimity that it
is as though they were all gathered within the walls of one convent at
London, Oxford, Shrewsbury, or Chester (M. L. Review, ix. 470). As
MS. T is imperfect at the beginning, its first leaf corresponding to
Morton, p. 44, it cannot be known whether it left out the first passage
(Morton, 24) mentioned above, but it does omit the second passage
(Morton, 192), and further eliminates commendatory references to the
sisters found in Morton, 48/2-4, 50/20-24; it is therefore adapted like
A. So too is the French version; it contains some of the additions of A,
and is subsequent to it. A third stage is reached when the book is
recognized as profitable reading for others who are not anchorites, for
nuns, as in the Latin version of MS. M, in which the first ritual part
is abridged and the last wholly left out as inapplicable to those who
have a definite rule of their own, such as the Cistercian sisters at
Tarent, for whom Simon of Ghent may well have executed this translation.
Similarly the extracts of MS. B were probably made for the use of
seculars.
375
Hitherto no plausible guess as to the author has been made. Simon of
Ghent, who died in 1315 A.D., is
manifestly out of the question. Bishop Poor (d. 1237) has been drawn in
solely because of his connexion with Tarent (Dugdale, v. 619), of which
he was the principal benefactor. From internal evidence it may be
gathered that the writer was a disciple of S. Bernard (1091-1153), whom
he quotes some twelve times expressly, and from whose Liber Sententiarum
he says he takes most of his sixth book; ‘hit is almest Seint Beornardes
Sentence,’ Morton, 348/14. He was acquainted with Ailred of Rievaulx and
with the treatise which Ailred wrote for his sister the anchoress
(Morton, 368), of which he made extensive use. He belonged to some
monastic order, for he speaks of ‘vre leawede breþren,’ and ‘ure ordre’
(Morton, 24). He appears to have been acquainted with other anchoresses
(Morton, 102, 192, 410). There is a note of weariness at the end of the
book, as of one already advanced in years, and indeed the accumulated
experience of a long life must have gone to its making. He was a
widely read man; he quotes from many authors, of whom, after S. Bernard,
S. Augustine and S. Gregory were the chief, but he drew on the Bible
twice as often as on all the others put together. Finally, the
Scandinavian element in his native speech was exceptionally large, and
French was so familiar to him as to colour his English far more than
that of any previous writer.
There were two men living towards the end of the twelfth century who
might answer to this description, Gilbert of Hoyland, Abbot of Swineshed
in Lincolnshire (Dugdale, v. 336), and S. Gilbert of Sempringham. The
former completed the treatise on the Canticum Canticorum begun by S.
Bernard, in which the mystic interpretation is quite different from that
which runs all through the Ancren Riwle. But for S. Gilbert (1089-1189)
I think a good case can be made out. He was brought up in South
Lincolnshire, where the Danish element was strong, and not far from the
northern border of the Midland area, for Lincolnshire north of the
Witham was more Northern than Midland. In later years his visitations
took him often to his houses of Watton and Malton in Yorkshire. He
received his early education mostly in France, and he probably visited
that country often in later life; he spent more than a year there in
1147, 1148 A.D. To no other person
would the recluses have been so likely to apply for a rule, since he was
famous as the greatest director of pious women in England; ‘vir eximiae
religionis, in feminarumque custodia gratiae singularis,’ says Trivet in
his Annales; ‘vir plane mirabilis, et in custodia feminarum singularis,’
W. of Newburgh. His own foundation for women and men, the order of the
Gilbertines, had its beginnings in an anchorhold which
376
he built for seven maidens against the north wall of his own church of
S. Andrew at Sempringham sometime about 1131 A.D. (Dugdale, vi, pt. 2, *ix). For these he framed
a Rule, ‘dedit . . . eis praecepta vitae et disciplinae,’ and
provided servants ‘puellas aliquas pauperculas in habitu seculari
servientes.’ When, after a long visit to S. Bernard, he returned to
England with his Institutiones confirmed by Eugenius III, his order was
regularly founded, with himself as Master. The Rule of his nuns was
framed on Cistercian lines, but with modifications from many sources.
While it differs of necessity from regulations suitable to the life of
the recluse, it shows the same extraordinary attention to details (‘non
solum magna et maxime necessaria, verum etiam minima quaedam et abiecta
. . . non omisit,’ Dugdale, *xiii) which is displayed in the
Ancren Riwle. And the two Rules often agree in these details, as will be
seen in the notes; the most remarkable example is the similarity of the
devotions of the lay brethren of the order to which the writer belonged,
as described in the AR (Morton, 24), to the rule for the Hours of the
Fratres in the Sempringham Order (Dugdale, *lx). There are numerical
differences in the number of Paternosters and Psalms, but the Gilbertine
Rule, as we have it, is a revision, probably a relaxation, of Gilbert’s,
and the principle is the same. This method of saying the Hours is given
by the writer to the recluses as an alternative use to the more
elaborate one already prescribed, and he adds, ‘Gif ei of ou wule don
þus heo voleweð her, ase in oþre obseruances, muchel of ure ordre.’
Gilbert was intimate with Ailred of Rievaulx, and sought his advice in
the case of the nun at Watton (Twysden, Decem Scriptores, i. col. 420).
Unfortunately, no authenticated writing of his, save a formal letter
addressed in his last days to the Canons of his Order (MS. Digby 36, f.
189 b), has come down to us. But the first of his biographers tells us
that, when in the course of his constant visitations of his houses he
rested for a time anywhere, he did not eat the bread of idleness, but
among other occupations wrote books, ‘scripsit quandoque libros’
(Dugdale, *xv), and the writer of the Nova Legenda Anglie, i. 471, says
‘libros multos scripsit; verba eius nichil aliud quam sapientiam et
scientiam sonuerunt.’ The first members of his Order would surely
multiply copies of the works of their founder, and it is not likely that
all of these have disappeared. The Ancren Riwle was probably one of
them. But there is besides a group of writings which are seen in their
true setting when regarded as a product of the Gilbertine movement; the
table on p. 356 gives the contents of
three manuscripts which are in my opinion collections of the works of S.
Gilbert. Among them is that ‘Englische boc of Seinte Margarete’ (M.
244/20) possessed by the recluses, as the writer of the AR knew.
377
There has been much dispute as to the language in which the AR was
written. The older scholars, Dr. Thomas Smith (1696 A.D.), Wanley (1705), Planta (1802) had no doubt
that it was Latin. Morton (1853) championed the English version, but
some of his arguments were refuted, others shaken by Bramlette. Muhe,
holding the priority of the Latin proved, was obliged to adopt an
involved and improbable view of the relationship of MS. T to the other
manuscripts. It should be observed that these scholars were unable to
take into account the Corpus MS. and the French version. The first to
pronounce from a knowledge of all the materials was G. C. Macaulay
in the M. L. Review, xi. 61. He appears to have disposed
effectually of the claim on behalf of the Latin version, but his
arguments in favour of French as the original language are not
convincing. It must suffice here to say that nothing he adduces appears
to be so crucial as the passage at 58/79, or even 56/38, 56/54, 70/170.
In a general comparison, the English has all the vigour and raciness of
an original work, while the French gives the impression of being
unidiomatic and wanting in spontaneity.
In the foot-notes p. 60, l. 12, add C after chepilt: p. 61, l. 17,
read chirche: p. 65, l. 62, add C after grettere: p. 67, l. 96, read
wullet C for wulh C., also at p. 75, l. 191.
The references throughout are to the Corpus MS., unless otherwise
stated.
1. wildernesse: of
the world; he has already said, ‘Iþisse wildernesse wende ure Louerdes
folc, ase Exode telleð, touward tet eadie lond of Jerusalem
. . . ⁊ ȝe, mine leoue sustren, wended bi þen ilke weie toward
te heie Jerusalem,’ AR 196/28-30. Comp. ‘alse longe se we iðese westen
of þesser woruld wandrið,’ OEH i. 243/3; ‘Claustrales in huius mundi
deserto exulantes,’ Alanus de Insulis, 65. þer . . .
in, in which; see 1/3: ‘ou vous aleȝ enȝ,’ F.
3. beastes . . .
wurmes: The Lion of Pride, the Serpent of Envy, the Unicorn of
Wrath, the Bear of Sloth, the Fox of Covetousness, the Swine of
Greediness, the Scorpion of Lechery, each with its whelps. The
conception comes from S. Jerome, ‘quasi inter scorpiones et colubros incedendum
ut . . . iter per insidias saeculi huius et inter venena
faciamus possimusque . . . terram repromissionis intrare,’ iv.
796. Comp. also, ‘Per superbiam enim quasi a leonibus lacerantur, per
invidiam tanquam viperarum morsu percutiuntur,’ Cesarii Sermo lx, in S.
August. v. App. 301 B. It is not in the manner of the Bestiaries, where
the lion and the unicorn
378
are types of Christ, though the influence of the Bestiaries is often
shown in the AR.
4. ilead . . . to,
traced to, classified under; ‘reduci ad,’ M; ‘menee od,’ F.: a rare use;
comp. 54/20. seouene: in the older English literature the number
is eight; Superbia being followed by Vana Gloria. See Max Förster, Über
die Quellen von Ælfric’s Homiliae Catholicae, Berlin, 1892, pp. 47-9 for
a good summary of the changes in the lists. seoluen B: so T
seluen.
5. streones:
‘hweolpes,’ AR 198/7; ‘engendrures,’ F. vnsteaðeluest:
‘Destable,’ F. literally, unstabled. nis hit &c., is it not
the species of Pride called Disobedience? CTN agree with B; the meaning
is the same: T reads, nis hit of prude. Jnobedience. Her to falleð
sigaldres: M has ‘Jnconstans fides. contra sacram
doctrinam. nunc ex superbia inobediencie
est: ad hoc pertinent sortilegia.’ The division in
Morton is therefore wrong: P has Inobedience ne falleþ it to sigaldrie.
‘Þe vifte hweolp [of þe Liun of Prude] hette Inobedience,’ AR
198/17.
6. Herto falleð,
come under this head; comp. ‘alle þe þing ꝥ lust falleþ to,’ AR 52/24,
58/9; ‘⁊ falleð to biȝete,’ SK 24/471. false teolunges, wrongful
practices, especially in treatment of the sick by means of herbs
gathered with incantations and of other pagan devices; comp. ‘Se
cristena mann ðe on ænigre þissere gelicnysse bið gebrocod, and he ðonne
his hælðe secan wyle æt unalyfedum tilungum, oððe æt wyrigedum galdrum,
oþþe æt ænigum wiccecræfte, ðonne bið he ðam hæðenum mannum gelic,’ Ælf.
Hom. Cath. i. 474/19-22. These ‘unallowed practices’ are, at the same
place, contrasted with ‘true leechcraft,’ the skill of a doctor: comp.
‘uncundelich lechecreft,’ 62/36, and see the Homilia de sacrilegiis, ed.
Caspari, ch. iv and notes, for abundant illustrations of these
superstitions. Comp. also, for a wider use of teolung, ‘to
æghwylcre neode man hæfð on cyricbocum mæssan gesette and tilige man
(= let one set to work) georne mid þam . . . þæt is hwene
betere, þonne man to wiccan, and to wigleran tilunge (= treatment)
sêce æt ænigre neode,’ Wulfstan, 171/7-12 (B-T). Morton translates
‘false reckoning,’ which hardly comes under the head of unsteadfast
belief; ‘fals takynges’ P.
7. lefunge o swefne · o
nore: this order is peculiar to A. For the Dream Books of mediaeval
England see Förster in Archiv cxxi. 33, cxxv. 39, cxxvii. 31. o
nore: so BCT; N has on ore ⁊ of swefnes; PV have nothing
corresponding; M is vague, ‘ad hoc pertinent
sortilegia · ⁊ quecunque infidelitas · credere sompniis ·
⁊ huius modi’: in F the place is at the damaged top of the
folio; it has, apparently, ‘credence en estrenies en songes ⁊ toutes
manieres de sorceries.’ ore cannot represent OE. ār,
379
which has no meaning like luck, nor can it be connected with L.
augurium, the contemporary French form of which is eür. I
think it is F. oré, favourable weather, favourable occasion, as in ‘Nos
n’avrons ja tens ne oré | Desci que li vienge a plaisir,’ Roman de Troye
5952, 3: the particular form of ‘unsteadfast belief’ meant being the
trusting to the system of favourable and unfavourable days for different
kinds of work &c., embodied in such books as the Calendar printed in
M. L. Review, ii. 212-22, where it is stated that the first day of
the month is good for beginning a piece of work, the second for
marrying, the third is a bad day for taking up one’s abode in a town,
and so on (for the literature see Archiv cx. 352). The collection in
Caspari’s note on § 12 of the Homilia already cited shows that the
superstition was often attacked in sermons as pagan; he quotes ‘Nullus
Christianus observet, qua die de domo exeat, vel qua die revertatur,
quia omnes dies Deus fecit; nullus ad inchoandum opus diem
. . . attendat,’ Pseudoaug. Sermo cclxxviii. Comp. ‘time,’ OEH
ii. 11/13 and VV 27/22-29.
8. heaued sunne:
Orm’s ‘hæfedd sunne,’ 98/2728; peccatum capitale: ‘cum mortali peccato,’
M. Comp. ‘Nu syndon eahta heafod leahtras,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 354/267.
9. ‘þe ueorðe [hweolp of
þe Liun of Prude] is Presumptio,’ AR 198/14.
10. ȝemeles: so
BPV, negligent, adj. for noun, negligence, carelessness: N
has the noun ȝemeleste; C scheomeles. under, classified under the
head of: ‘þe seoueðe [hweolp of þe Bore of heui Slouhðe] is
Gemeleaschipe,’ AR 202/13.
11. For uuel C
has lure: NT have incorrectly lure for biȝete; so in M, ‘Qui non
premunit alium de dampno uel
incommodo.’ Not to warn a man against something hurtful is
slothful negligence; not to apprise him of something to his advantage is
venomous envy. The sins are different and come under different heads.
The first half of the sentence is in effect hypothetical, and equivalent
to, if a man does not warn &c.; so 54/21; 66/120, and F, ‘Ki ne
garnist altre de son mal ou de son gaig[ne]; nest ceo
perescouse negligence ou venimouse envie.’
12. For slaw
ȝemeles C has slauðe scheomelese. teoheði mis: Contrast
‘rihtliche teðien,’ OEH ii. 215/32; ‘giuen rihte tiðinge,’ id. 129/32;
‘theoþe ryht vnder his honde,’ OEM 77/149. teouðen C; tiheðe T; Mis
iteoðeged N, the being mistithed; a remarkable use of the participle;
‘male decimare,’ M; ‘mes doner,’ F, a vague expression, which looks like
a translator’s failure. How S. Gilbert once dealt with a ‘mistither’ may
be read in his life, printed in Dugdale, vi., pt. ii., p. *vii.
mis is aphetic for amiss, wrongly; comp. 56/48.
380
13. edhalden:
edhalde C; OE. oþhealden, withhold; so at 64/73: comp. ‘Lante ⁊
thyng me was taght | I held ouer-lang as i noght aght,’ CM 28398.
oðer—mis fearen, or treat badly, is peculiar to A.
14. ȝisceunge:
‘Þe Vox of ȝiscunge haueð þeos hweolpes: Tricherie ⁊ Gile, Þeofðe,
Reflac,’ AR 202/18. ⁊ anes cunnes is peculiar to A.
15. strong
reaflac: ‘rapina,’ M. hwa—mei, if one is able to pay
it: peculiar to A. þe—ȝisceunge: ‘species cupiditatis,’ M;
‘qi est desouȝ couoitise,’ F.
16. It is sinful ‘biseon
ȝemeleasliche eni þing þe me mide uareð, oðer ouhte to ȝemen,’ AR
344/6.
17.
þen—hit, than the owner of it thinks right: M has here
prius for peius. ȝemeles of slawðe, negligence, a
subdivision of Sloth. The author has already classified under
Gemeleaschipe, ‘miswiten ei þing þet heo haueð to witene,’ AR 202/14. C
reads scheomeles of slauðe.
18. alswa is
dusi: alswa · idusi C: apparently OE. gedysig.
longe—unbischpet: ‘diu esse sine
confirmacione,’ M.
19. falsliche,
insincerely. abiden, put it off: N connects it with what follows
by reading uorte for ne.
21. moder: so he
writes of the ‘seoue moder sunnen,’ AR 216/21.
23. istreonede,
pp. as noun: ꝥ te istreonede T; ꝥ þe streonede C. strong
monslaht: ‘fort homicide,’ F; ‘homicidium,’ M.
24. galnesse:
comp. ‘þe Scorpiun of Lecherie; þet is, of golnesse,’ AR
204/15. awakenet, originated; comp. 64/61, 66/91, 143/70; AR
44/9, 220/9; HM 27/8, 31/5; ‘woden . . . whence first awoke
the West-Saxon bloud royall,’ L’isle, Divers Ancient Monuments, sig. f 3
v. of galnesse awakenet are not represented in M, though
necessary to the argument.
25. nomeliche,
particular, proper; exceptionally an adj. here; in l. 27, as
usually, an adv. corresponding to OE. namcūþlīce; comp.
‘ne ne muhte, ase ich wene, mide none muðe nomeliche nemen ham,’ AR
226/6. ‘touȝ peccheȝ seueralment par lour propre
nouns; ne porreit nul hom contier,’ F.
26. beoð
bilokene: ‘includuntur,’ M: comp. ‘Auh ine þeo þet beoð her
etforen iseid alle þeo oðre beoð bilokene,’ AR 226/7. ilokene CT.
27. understonden
him, perceive; see 13/34 note and comp.
‘þenne aȝe we to understonden us | from alle uuele he scal blecen us,’
OEH i. 57/63, 64; ‘Peter · anon þer after · hyne vnderstod · | Hwat his
louerd hedde iseyd,’ OEM 45/297, 8. of: the genitive of the thing
perceived is found in OE., ‘ðe hiora ðeninga cuðen understondan,’ Cura
Past. 3/4.
28. imeane,
‘general heads,’ Morton, evidently taking it for the adj.
381
used as a noun: it seems better to regard it as the adv.
generaliter, referring each species of sin to its genus. T omits; B
alters by inserting þat, which I indicate. ‘Nec est aliquis ut
puto qui [non] possit intelligere suum
peccatum sub aliquo
predictorum contineri,’ M.
29. anlich: comp.
‘he (S. John Baptist) . . . wende into onliche stude iðe wildernesse,’
AR 160/7. þe—for donne: nothing corresponding in M. for
fearinde: forð farinde CT; uorðfarinde N; ‘passanȝ,’ F.
31. hehe . . .
iheortet: comp. ‘ase of prude; of great
heorte; oðer of heih heorte,’ AR 342/24. hehe, adverb;
LWS. hēage, comp. 68/142. ouerhohe: ouerhoȝe C;
ouer hehe T; ouer heie N. Apparently they all mean, too loftily;
the forms with o may be due to the influence of ouerhowien (comp.
28/323): ouerhowe, contempt, occurs as a noun, ‘ouerhowe of eorðliche
þinges,’ AR 276/3, HM 43/4 (comp. OE. oferhoga, a contemner): for
hehe in B is corrupt. M has ‘elatos corde.’
32. iþonket:
iþonked C; iðoncked N, is explained as a new formation from iþanc, OE.
geþanc, thought, thus meaning thoughted, but the versions
connected it with þankien, OE. þancian, ‘Serpens uenenosus
inuidos ⁊ ingratos,’ M; ‘La venimouse serpente lenuious ⁊ ceauȝ qe sunt
de male voluntee vers lour bienfetours,’ F. T has ‘þe ondfule ⁊ te luðere
iþohtet: ꝥ beon malicius ⁊ luðere aȝain oðere’; luþere J·hertet
V. The unicorn stands for Pride, not Anger, in the patristic literature;
comp. Cohn, Zur literarischen Geschichte des Einhorns, ii. 8.
33. o rawe, in
their order, in succession. to—isleine: ‘Interfecti
quo ad deum,’ M; ‘qant a dieu; il sunt tueȝ,’
F. Comp. ‘mest al þe world, þet is gostliche isleien mid deadliche
sunnen,’ AR 156/9.
34. hond,
control: the MSS., except V which has warde, agree with B: ‘in eius
excercitu,’ M; ‘de sa meignee,’ F. of: comp. 56/48; a locative
use = in.
35. falleð, is
proper to, is in accordance with his nature; comp. 54/6:
‘quilibet de officio ad se pertinente,’ M, ‘qe a lui
apent,’ F.
36. draheð wind:
the germ of this comparison is possibly, ‘Qui inflantur superbia, vento
pascuntur,’ Isidore vi. 241/4. Comp. also, ‘Dominus cuidam heremite
ostendit in spiritu tres homines quorum unus in monte excelso trahebat
ventum ore aperto . . . Hii sunt vani et superbi homines qui
vane glorie ventum attrahunt et multa opera faciunt ut ab hominibus
laudentur,’ Jacques de Vitry, ed. Crane, 68/2.
37. hereword:
comp. 84/69; ‘don hware þuruh me buð þene kinedom of heouene, ⁊ sulleð
hit for a windes puf of wor[l]des hereword; of monnes
heriunge,’ AR 148/2; OEH ii. 83/20; ‘vent de veyn glorie,’ Bozon 89/25.
idel ȝelp: comp. ‘Se seofoða leahter is iactantia gecweden | þæt
is ydel
382
gylp on ængliscre spræce,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 356/300; OEH i. 103/29; VV
5/20; Orm 10/391; SK 470.
38. orhel, pride:
so T; oreȝel C; horel N; gle P; craft V; ‘pompose melodie,’ F, confusing
it with orgel, organ.
39.
o—world, in four quarters of the world: comp. ‘æt þissum
feower endum middangeardes,’ BH i. 95/13; ‘þenne sculen engles mid bemen
blauwen on fower halue þe world,’ OEH i. 143/18. As to the form of the
expression, N reads, a uour halue þe worlde; P, on foure half þe werlde;
all the other MSS. have uninflected half and world (word B), and omit
of. For the ellipsis compare the similar construction of side: half
apparently follows the analogy of pound and similar words of
measure.
40. grurefule . . .
grisliche: see 120/95. Ariseð: see 58/77.
42. iborhen:
iboreȝen C; iboruwen N; iburhen T; ‘saluabitur,’ M.
43. inohreaðe: a
favourite word with our author, comp. 62/41; 143/74, and not found
outside AR and the group associated with it. It means literally, quite
quickly, quite readily, but in AR it is mostly a sentence adverb
meaning, quite possibly, probably; comp. ‘ant so ofte inouhreðe ne dest
tu hit nout i rihte time,’ AR 270/6. inochraðe C; inohraðe T:
‘parauenture,’ F. dimluker: of this comparative, descending from
an OE. *dimlīce, there does not appear to be any other example:
for the termination see 125/270. Elsewhere in ME. dim is used of the
voice. ‘minus sonarent,’ M; ‘plus coiement
sonereient lour busme,’ F.
44. Jeremie: sein
Jerem’ T; sein Jerome C. solitarius: ‘assuetus in solitudine,’
Jer. ii. 24. M has ‘Onager in desiderio . . . sui ·i·
vane glorie.’ T omits sui.
45, 46. N, apparently
puzzled by seið ABCT, remodels, Of þeo ðet draweð wind inward uor
luue of hereword · seið ieremie; ase ich er seide. The other
MSS. agree with A, but T has prud for wind, and C omits in. seið,
means; ‘And seið syon ase muchel on englische leodene ase heh sihðe,’ HM
5/6. P omits seið—seide.
47. iuglurs:
joculatores, called ‘menestraus,’ AR 84/11; ‘nebulones,’ W. of
Malmesbury, ii. 438, were usually a combination of minstrel,
storyteller, tumbler and buffoon, but those in the text are limited in
their means of making mirth.
48.
makien—ehnen, pull faces, twist their mouths awry, look
obliquely with their eyes: ‘mutare uultum. curuare os.
obliquare oculos,’ M; ‘faire cheres besturner la bouche ⁊
trestourner les eoilȝ delesclent,’ F. schulen, schuleð, l.
53, are found only in this passage: OE. (be) scȳlan; dialectic
sheyle, shyle. T has schuldi (? through confusion with scyldan),
but sculeð at l. 53: P, sculleh (for scullen, scowl); V, staren.
383
49. seruið: comp.
with this and the following paragraphs a passage from an anonymous
sermon of the fourteenth century, ‘Nota quam bonos (servos) habet
diabolus qui ad nutum sibi obediunt, imo qui nutum eius praeveniunt.
Habet suos ioculatores, scilicet lascivos; suos traiectores qui trahunt
de sacco plus quam sit in sacco, omnes male iudicantes et maledicos;
suos thesaurarios, omnes avaros; suos gladiatores, omnes contentiosos;
suos advocatos, omnes detractores; suos insidiatores, omnes invidos;
suos latrinarios, omnes gulosos; et sic de aliis. Certe periculosum est
servire tali domino,’ Hauréau, Notices, iv. 101. bringen o
lahtre, induce to laugh; a curious expression, which seems to be
without parallel: ‘ut ad risum prouocet,’ M, ‘pur mettre
en risee,’ F.
50 B. liki is a
scribe’s mistake for loki. Comp. ‘Riht so hit farþ bi þan ungode | Þat
nouht ne isyhþ to none gode,’ ON 245, 6.
51. þider:
þiderwart C; þiderward N. riht—heorte: comp. ‘þa eagan
minre heortan,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 28/425, 38/559; ‘mid þe eȝene of his
horte,’ OEH i. 157/28, 203/11; ‘Ablinde þe heorte, heo is eð ouercumen,’
AR 62/10, 90/22, 178/16; ‘opene to vnderstonde þe ehne of þin heorte,’
HM 3/15; ‘espiritel sacrement | Ke nus od le oil de cuer ueum,’ Adgar,
175/283. See also 115/119, and comp. ‘lay to the eere of thy herte,’
Rule of St. Benet, 1/3. For ehe C has echȝe. winkið: the
writer had perhaps in mind, ‘Annuens oculo fabricat iniqua
. . . novissime autem pervertet os suum, et in verbis tuis
dabit scandalum,’ Ecclus. xxvii. 25, 26.
52. o ꝥ half: on
C; oþere half N. He closes the eye which looks in the direction of the
good deed: ‘Sed ex parte illa conniuent
oclis,’ M. The readings of the passage which follows are, ⁊ bi halt o
luft · ȝef þer is eawet to edwiten oðer · ladliche þiderwart schuleð wið
eiðer · C; ⁊ biholdeð oluft ⁊ asquint · ⁊ ȝif þer is out to eadwiten ·
oðer lodlich; þiderward heo schuleð mid eiðer eien · N; ⁊
bihaldeð oluf ȝif þer is eyt to edwiten · oðer loken laðliche
þiderward · sculeð mid eiðer hwen &c. T. A means, turn
away their unclosed eye to the left and suspiciously try to pick holes
in the good, or else they scowl wickedly at it with both eyes. BCV seem
to have lost an infinitive after oþer. In N lodlich agrees with out. M
has ‘⁊ quasi a sinistris vident · si quid sit ibi
quod reprehendant · uel displicenter se
habent’: F ‘regardent del senestre sil i ad rien qe
reprouer ou laid cele part regardent en esclench · dautre part
qant il oient le bien,’ &c. o luft, on the left side,
askance, an expression of suspicion, Milton’s ‘squint suspicion,’ Comus
413, or of incredulity as to the genuineness of the good deed. But ‘ibi’
in M suggests another explanation; he looks in another direction to see
if he can there find something else to find fault with.
384
53.
skleatteð—adun, slaps down the flaps of his ears: scletteð
C; sleateð N; sclattes T; ‘deprimunt aures,’ M.
54. lust,
hearing; ‘auditus’ M: OE. hlyst. C has luft, and F accordingly
‘Mes la senestre enqore al mal est touȝ iours ouerte.’ T has luf
and P loue. In 53 B ea may be miswritten for aa, ever.
55. After muð,
CNV add mis.
56. lastunge: so
CN; ‘ampliori detractacione,’ M; leasinge T; sustenynge V,
due to confusion with lasten, endure: ‘par plus
entoccher,’ F.
58. eateliche:
atterluche T; no adj. in P. ageasten: glopnen T; rapelich
glutten P, the former word due to reading ȝet as ȝer. There is an
OWScand. glúpna, to be surprised, but Björkman (241) thinks a Scand.
origin of the English word doubtful. Comp. the modern dialectic gloppen
in the North and North Midland; glottened, startled, is also recorded
for Shropshire.
59. niuelin:
niuelen CNT; nyuelen V; P omits: probably means to snuffle: M has
‘gement’; F, no equivalent: is possibly a form of snivel, and is
recorded in EDD. for Gloucestershire and Oxfordshire, to turn up the
nose in disdain. makien sur semblant, wear a rueful countenance:
comp. 117/19; ‘ȝif þu makest ei semblaunt,’ AR 90/18: loþly
semblaunt P; ‘frunt vn egre semblant,’ F.
61. hond:
ham T.
62. makien grim
chere: comp. ‘niuelen ⁊ makien sure ⁊ grimme chere,’ AR 240/4;
‘makeð hire ueire cheres,’ id. 218/11. M has ‘quia
prius discunt officium suum · ut facia[n]t
horribilem’ [uultum].
63. skirmeð:
Master Walter Leskirmissour, who performed before Edward the First at
Whitsuntide 1306, was, no doubt, an artist of this sort. A picture of
one who is keeping three knives and three balls going in the air may be
seen reproduced in Strutt, Horda Angelcynnan, i. plate 19. ⁊: BC
omit.
64. warpere: so
C; worpere N; castere T. M has ‘Iracundus coram diabolo
pungnat ut pugil · cum cultellus est
protector cultellorum’; his original had probably
cultellis, and projector; possibly protector represents a mistake,
warde, or wardere.
65. eiðer beoð:
eiðer baðe ha beoð C, with same meaning.
66. he . . . him . .
. he: ho . . . hire . . . ho T, and so hire for him in the next
three lines. warpeð: so C; warpes T; worpeð N. from:
frommard N; see 77/63 note. skirmeð,
directs, aims: ‘impungnat,’ M. P has kerueþ.
67. eawles,
hooks; comp. 120/126: used of the torturer’s hook, SK 2178; SM 6/28; the
‘īsen hoc’ of BH 43/25. In Ælf. Gloss. 316/6
385
āwul glosses L. fascinula (= fuscinula), the Vulgate word at 1
Sam. ii. 14, which is a diminutive of fuscina, ‘quoddam instrumentum
ferreum . . . quo vtuntur . . . piscatores ad pisces
capiendos, coci ad carnes extrahendas de caldario,’ Catholicon. F has
‘crochouns’; M ‘cum creagris’: creagra (= κρεάγρα), fleshhook, occurs in the
Vulgate at 2 Paralip. iv. 11, 16. Similarly, ‘And when þai hadde on hym
ylayd | Her scharpe hokes al þo | It was in a sori playd | Ytoiled boþe
to ⁊ fro,’ Desputisoun, ed. Linow, 56/477.
67-69.
skirmi—ut: M has dimicabunt for pleien; but
otherwise nothing corresponding to this passage: F ‘ietterunt,
lun vers laltre; sicome pesce de policon ⁊ despeies
denfer le percerunt parmi.’
68. dusten,
fling; a word characteristic of the group SK, SJ, SM; comp. 120/127:
dunchen P, push, strike. pilche clut, rag of a pilch, whether
that means a garment of fur or skin, or the nether garment of an infant:
but the latter meaning is not evidenced till the seventeenth
century.
69. asneasen:
snesen C; sneasin T; alsnesien N; stingen V; pierce: OE. āsnǣsan.
For ꝥ see 1/10 note.
72. tutel, mouth:
the word, which occurs only in AR, descends from a Teutonic root,
meaning something projecting, comp. Franck, s.v. Tuit; in its
English use it has acquired a derivative meaning like its O. French
congener tuel, tuelet, pipe, passage: comp. ‘þe veond of helle
. . . went þurh þe tutel ꝥ is euer open into þe heorte,’ AR
74/7, ‘ȝeoniinde tuteles,’ (= aures prurientes) 80/15. For the verb
tuteleð, whispers, comp. 64/88; ‘þinne tutelinde muð,’ AR 106/28;
‘garulat ei quicquit uult,’ M. For eare C has
arm.
73. hwam se: se
C. idel of god, not occupied in good; comp. 64/87; ‘uol of
zennes, and ydel of alle guode,’ Ayenbite, 131/12; ‘ydel of guode
workes,’ id. 218/20: the construction with of is rare; Wiclif has
from: ‘huclif (read hucsif) de bien faire,’ F; ‘ociosis,’ M.
74. underueð:
underfeð C; underuoð N; vndertakes T; vnderfongeþ P; vnderuongeþ V:
underweng B is no doubt for underuengþ. ȝemeles: C has scheomeles
corrected into ȝemeles. is þes: is tis T; is wel C.
75. bearnes: so
C; barnes V: but bermes N; barm T; barme P: ‘le dormir al filz del
diable ⁊ a la fille,’ F; ‘Ocium ⁊ negligencia ⁊ somnus
sunt pueri diaboli,’ M, surely a translator’s mistake. For
abreiden T has abreien.
76. wontreaðe:
comp. 121/129, 143/96: wṛontrede C; wondrede N; wandreðe T:
OWScand. vandrǽði (Björkman, 92, 290). V substitutes serwen: P for this
and the next word, wonderlich.
77. echeliche: so
T; ateliche CN; ferfulliche V. M has nothing corresponding to
⁊—wakien: F ‘en la meseise denfer pardurablement
386
veillera,’ but no Latin quotation. Surgite &c.: all the MSS.
agree with B in this quotation. Part of it is in S. Jerome, ‘Semper tuba
illa terribilis vestris perstrepet auribus, Surgite mortui, venite ad
iudicium,’ ed. Martianay, 1706, v. 438; also in Alanus, ‘Vos qui iacetis
in sepulchris surgite et occurrite ad iudicium salvatoris,’
63 b.
79.
Þe—esken: the readings are, Þe giscere is his eskebach
fareð abuten esken C; Þe ȝiscere is his askebaðe · fares
abuten askes T; Þe ȝiscare is þes feondes askebaðie ⁊ lið
euer iþen asken · ⁊ fareð abuten asken N; Þe couetous mon · is þe
fendes askebaþi · ffareþ abouten asken V; Þe coueitouse man haþ swich a
bay þat he liþ euere in þe askes ⁊ askes al abouten
hym P. askebaðe is a Scandinavian word, meaning one who bathes or sits
in ashes, similar are Danish askefis, blower in ashes, askepot, wallower
in ashes (Björkman, 135, 6), and the English dialectal ashypet.
feareð abuten esken, is busy with ashes: the usual prep.
is with; comp. 5/6. The form of the expression agrees with 56/36, 58/92,
and contrasts with the vague ‘Cupidi est officium cineres
congregare · cumulare ⁊ cumulos multiplicare’ M: F has ‘Li
couoitous en son despit enfant qest touȝ iours entour la ceindre ⁊
ententiuement sentremette damonceiller la ceindre ensemble a
granȝ ⁊ plusours monceals,’ where despit is probably a mistake
for esperit and qest for gist; the passage looks like a
translation of an original wrongly read as, þe ȝiscere in his estre babe
lið euer abuten asken.
80. ruken, heaps:
probably a Scandinavian word (Björkman, 252): used in this sense still
in North and North-Midland dialects.
81. peaðereð,
pokes, stirs up: paðereð CN; puðeres T; poþereþ P; Piþeriþ V. A word of
obscure origin: potter, pother, of same meaning, represent it in modern
Yorkshire and Lincolnshire dialects: ‘palpat ⁊ planat,’ M; ‘Trestourne
la cendre de fusiaus,’ F. augrim: ‘algorismi,’ M; arithmetic.
82. canges,
fool’s: for the word, which is characteristic of the AR, SK, HM group,
see Björkman, 290, note 4. T substitutes askebaðes. P reads conions; F
has ‘cangon.’
84. After wis mon
T adds ⁊ wummon, and for eorðlich T has worldlich.
85. ahte appears
to have been repeated by mistake from the foregoing. ablendeð,
probably from ‘Quid aliud detrahentes faciunt, nisi in pulverem
sufflant, atque in oculos suos terram excitant,’ S. Gregorii Opera, ii.
193.
86. bolheð,
inflates: boleȝeð C; boluweð N; bolhes T; bolneþ P; bloweþ V. M
strangely, ‘excecant (i.e. cineres) insufflantem ⁊ inflant’: F ‘Cest qi
se enfle par eus en orgoil de queor.’
387
87.
mare—neodeð belongs to ethalt: T has mare þen hire
nedes.
88. wurðen him,
become for him; ‘vertetur,’ M. T has hire, and similarly twice in
the next line. tadden: frouden P; see 46/273. ba: boðe N;
Baðe T.
89. hwitel:
whittel P; OE. hwītel is usually a mantle, cloak; the sense here
accords better with Icel. hvítill; it means a blanket spread over the
bed straw to lie on. So the poor man in Piers Plowman has a too short
‘substratum,’ ‘when he streyneþ hym to strecche · þe straw is hus
whitel,’ C 284/76; Walter of Henley quotes as an English proverb, ‘wo
þat strechet forþerre þan his wytel wyle reche, in þe straue his fet he
mot streche,’ Husbandry 4/6. ‘de vermibus erit tam
coopertorium quam substratorium,’ M; ‘son
couertour ⁊ sa coilte,’ F; coilte meaning mattress. The reading
of N, his kurtel ⁊ his kuuertur, spoils the meaning.
90. Subter
&c.: Isa. xiv. 11; the Vulgate has erunt vermes.
92. For manciple
M has mancipium, which may = manceps, purveyor. ah: Uor N: TP
omit.
94. neppes,
drinking cups, but Morton translates ‘table cloth.’ nepp C; neppe N;
nappes TP; cuppe V; ‘ciphis,’ M; ‘hanaps,’ F. crohhe: so T;
crochȝe C; OE. crōh: crocke NPV; OE. crocca: ‘urceolo,’ M;
‘poot,’ F.
95. bismuddet: so
BT, a form found here only; comp. ‘smod,’ stain, E. E. Allit.
Poems, 59/711: bismotted V, from be + smot; both words mean besmutted,
smudged. C has bismuðeled, which, with ð for d, appears to be a
derivative of *besmud. bismitted N; OE. smittian, to stain;
discoloured. bismoked P, grimed with smoke, is a substitution for a less
familiar word. bismulret: bismurlet T; bismorlet V point to a
*smyrlian from smyrels, ointment: bismeored C; bismeoruwed
N; bismured B; bismered P, besmeared, are variant spellings of the same
word; OE. besmierwan. ‘perfusus et fedatus,’ M, a colourless
expression beside the vigorous English; ‘esmite ⁊ enbroe,’ F.
scale: OWScand. skál, bowl (Björkman, 92, 93): schale CP; scoale
N; skale T; bolle V.
96. mis wordes,
words mispronounced; comp. 62/43 note for another meaning: ‘iargoune
paroles corrumpnement,’ F. P omits all from Meaðeleð to fallen.
haueð imunt, has an inclination; OE. gemyntan, intend,
purpose: the use here is peculiar: þat is in poynt to fallen V; ‘en
pensee de cheir,’ F.
98. ‘Ecce servi mei’
&c., Isa. lxv. 13.
99. hungrin:
impersonal; comp. 188/390.
100. feorle:
apparently for feorli = OE. fǣrlic, sudden; used in ME. for
wonder: it may have been suggested by vos confundemini in the
388
next verse: comp. ‘Tamquam prodigium factus sum multis,’ Ps. lxx. 7. But
all the MSS. are with B, and F has ‘vous serieȝ la pouture del enemy.’
Quantum &c.: Apocal. xviii. 7. The following Contra
&c. is adapted from ‘in poculo, quo miscuit, miscete illi duplum.’ M
has the Latin of the text. CN read luctum ⁊ tormentum.
103. kealche:
kelche BT; keache C. V has ȝif þou þe kelche þe cuppe. Wallynde
bras to drinken, and P ȝiue þe gloton þe coppe · he þat wil euere
drynk · Coppe in glotonye ȝiue hym wellande bras to drinken, from
which it is evident that they regarded kelche as an independent word,
perhaps as = OE. celic, cup, used for drinker. But the
construction points to a compound, kelche-cuppe, of which the first
element must be a verb, perhaps the word which has survived in the
Northern dialects as kelch, to throw up, keiltch, an upward lift or
push; giving a meaning for the combination of tosspot. M has ‘miscete ei
duo. pro cyphatu potus: date ei es candens’; where cyphatus means the
man provided with a cup (scyphus). N has gulchecuppe, compound from
gulchen, to swallow greedily; comp. ‘ne beo hit neuer so bitter, ne
iueleð he hit neuer; auh gulcheð in ȝiuerliche,’ AR 240/2
(gluccheð A; glucches T). wallinde bres: comp. 146/118.
104. swelte
inwið, burn within: form from sweltan, to swoon, die, with
meaning from swelan, to burn: aswelte wiðinnen N: ‘qil arde tout
de denȝ,’ F; M has nothing corresponding to ȝeot—inwið.
aȝein &c.: comp. ‘Aȝaines an likinge; habben twa
ofþunchunges,’ HM 7/35.
Passages in C (mostly interlined or marginal) which are not in N are
inserted between asterisks in the text of the latter. The collations at
the foot of pp. 60-75 show the other divergences of C and those of T
from N; when not followed by any letter they give the readings of T;
those followed by C are the readings of C, while B indicates agreement
of T and C as against N.
The Eighth Book of the Ancrene Wisse consists of a brief
introduction, to the effect that the outer rule is not rigidly binding,
and seven sections (‘stucchenes’ 72/188) treating of i. eating and
drinking; ii. worldly possessions and dealings, ll. 1-25; iii. clothes,
26-67; iv. occupations, 67-100; v. care of the person, 101-20; vi.
servants, 120-222; vii. use of the rule, and conclusion, 223-39.
1. bute—reade
corresponds to frequent phrases in the Gilbertine Rule, like ‘nisi
necessitas postulet aliqua hoc fieri,’ ‘nisi magister aliter
389
iusserit.’ With the former compare 60/18, 62/20, 64/84, 74/217; with the
latter 60/13, 62/30, 37, 66/98; ‘þes riwle ⁊ alle oðre beoð in owres
scriftes read ⁊ in oweres meistres breoste,’ MS. C f. 190. The master is
‘presbyter aliquis senex maturus moribus, cui raro, nisi de confessione
et animae aedificatione, [inclusa] loquatur. A quo consilium accipiat in
dubiis, in tribulationibus consolationem,’ Ailred, 642 c.
3. þuncheð bet,
seemeth to be rather. The contrast of Martha and Mary, the active and
the contemplative life, is a favourite topic in the AR; ‘Husewifschipe
is Marthe dole; and Marie dole is stilnesse and reste of alle
worldes noise,’ 414/16. Less frequently it is Lya and Rachel that are
opposed, Hugh of S. Victor, i. 133.
5. for &c.: the
passage is based on Ailred, ‘Aliae [inclusae] . . . pecuniae
congregandae vel multiplicandis pecoribus inhiant: tantaque cum hac
sollicitudine in his extenduntur, ut eas matres vel dominas familiarum
existimes, non anachoretas. Quaerunt aliquibus pascua, pastores
. . . Sequitur emptio et venditio’ &c., 641 c, but its
vivid detail and interest are all the writer’s own.
6. Olhnin, wheedle,
get on the right side of; a word peculiar to AR, SJ, SK, SM; ‘couendra
. . . de querre la grace de messer,’ F. heiward:
OE. *hægweard occurring in dat. hæigwerde; adopted by the
writer of Quadripartitus, p. 22 (c. 1100), as heiwardo,
d., but often called messor; among other duties, he kept cattle
out of the enclosed fields and impounded strays: see Liebermann,
Gesetze, i. 452; Leo, Rectitudines, 245. wearien: warien NCT; OE.
wergian, curse, revile; comp. ‘ne ne warien hwon me agulteð to
ou,’ AR 186/2, 284/22; ‘Ȝe ne schulen uor none þinge ne warien, ne
swerien,’ 70/20: ‘mandir (for maudir) le qant il les
enparke,’ F.
7. ȝelden &c.,
and moreover pay for the damage done. wat crist: comp. ‘Deu le
set,’ AR 382/17. hwen &c., when there is complaint among the
people at large about the recluse’s cattle, or possibly, wealth. The
order of the words forbids the explanation, ‘complaint of anchoresses’
cattle in an enclosure,’ Morris. For the vague use of in tune,
comp. KH 153 note. Comp. ‘si bestias haberetis, aliena pascua forsitan
occuparent, essetque magnus clamor vicinorum dicentium: Utinam
isti eremitae nunquam advenissent, nam multiplex eorum possessio
multiplex nobis infert impedimentum,’ S. Stephani Grandimontensis
Regula; De bestiis non habendis; Migne, P. L. cciv. col. 1143:
possibly the source of this place.
8. Nu þenne
introduces a command, 123/218, 126/311, or request 119/78, or argument
122/191, but its use here for still, notwithstanding, is peculiar. Note
that the scribe of T deleted þenne in favour of þah.
390
10. ifestnet: L
has nothing corresponding to the following ancre—heorte, but
instead ‘Cauens enim psalmista [di]cente. Nolite cor appon[ere]’;
a reference to Ps. lxi. 11.
11. driue,
practise, pursue: comp. 130/72; ‘þa þe þone ceaþ drifað,’ Benedictine
Rule, ed. Schröer, 95/11; ‘ꝥ nis bute dusilec | al ꝥ ha driueð,’ SK 424,
5, 1798; ‘long wune is her driuen,’ GE 1681. chepilt, a female
trader, one who buys to sell at a profit, as the text explains.
12. efter: see
7/53. chepeð, offers for sale, with dat. chapmon; comp.
‘And chepte heom to sullen vre helare,’ OEM 40/115, but with prep. in
sense of buying, ‘Ȝif me cheapeð on of þeos et ou,’ AR 190/8.
14 C: the addition
þah—wordes, not in any other MS., is noteworthy: F has nothing
corresponding to it or to the sentence in A, þing—honden.
14. sumhwile: he
is probably thinking of the Fathers of the Desert, who plaited mats of
palm, for the Vitas Patrum was a favourite book of his. The regulation
is only of general application, these sisters being fully provided
for.
15. wite, take
charge of: in troublous times the anchorhold would be regarded as a
place of safe deposit. of: so CN, but T omits (correct footnote
by deleting B); it depends on Nawt. ‘Rien ne gardeȝ en
vostre maisone daltrui choses,’ F. In N of must be
partitive, for witen takes the acc. of the thing guarded: see
118/52 note.
16. boistes,
boxes, caskets, mostly for ointment, but here probably jewel cases.
chartres, deeds; probably the earliest instance. Scoren,
scrolls: OF. escroe; comp. ‘Scrowe oðer quaer,’ AR 282/29.
17. cyrograffes,
indentures, bonds; an early instance of the word. calices: there
was a special objection, ‘nulla femina . . . calicem Domini
tangat,’ Udalrici Sermo Synodalis, Migne, P. L. cxxxv.
1071 b.
18. strengðe,
violence: comp. 40/168: ‘bute vor neod one, als strengðe ⁊ deaðes dred,’
AR 6/23; ‘auh teares doð him strencðe’ (= lacrima cogit), id.
244/27; ‘Ne dede dieuel him none strengþe,’ VV 113/19. F has
‘force.’
20.
makeð—hus, causes your house to be laid open; comp. 117/8,
118/28; ‘oðer ȝif þu iherdest þeoues breken þine woawes,’ AR 242/23. The
Gilbertine Rule, while forbidding access to the nuns ordinarily, says
‘propter ignis incendium vel mortis instantis periculum, vel propter
furtum et latrocinium omnibus sustinemus introitum,’ p. *lxxvi.
22. seoð: comp.
‘Nullich ꝥ no mon iseo ou bute he habbe leaue speciale of ower meistre,’
AR 56/21; ‘inclusa etiam facie velata loqui debet cum viro,’ Ailred, 642
d. wel mei don of, it matters little about: don means
originally, serve, suffice, as in ‘that will do,’ but the phrase
391
with the words in this order is specialized: comp. ‘Ah wel mæi
don hu hit ga; for wræcches we beoð æuere ma,’ L
12754, 5; ‘Scheome is understonden bi þe reade; auh wel mei
don,’ AR 356/11, where Morton mistranslates. Quite different is, ‘an
olde ancre mei don wel ꝥ tu dest vuele,’ AR 52/9. T has duhen here, as A
at 64/59 and C at 65/52, ordinarily meaning to be of profit, to avail,
but the sense is the same as in the phrase containing don. The
construction is impersonal; ancre is dative at 64/59, 65/52, as
at 64/74: for of, concerning, comp. ‘he . . . dyde of
heom ꝥ he wolde,’ AS. Chron. D 208/9. ‘De colore autem
vestium non est multum curandum,’ L; ‘ne
puit chaler de voȝ draps,’ F.
23. unorne,
plain, rough: ‘vils,’ F; ‘dum [ta]men non n[im]is
(?) exquisite,’ L. But Förster (Morsbachs Studien l. 171) would
translate, ordinary, usual.
24. ow to neodeð:
comp. ‘nimen . . . þet hire to neodeð,’ AR 414/24. ow is
dat. depending directly on the verb, the usual construction of
the person in EME. for neoden and neod, comp. 123/210; to is
adverbial and a superfluity, quite in the manner of the writer, comp.
‘þurh hwat muhte sonre ful luue of aquiken,’ AR 58/10; ‘þet ich spec er
of þeruppe,’ id. 372/23; 130/80 note. Contrast, ‘Nefde he nane neode to
us ac we hefden muchele neode to him,’ OEH i. 123/35, where to = of.
to bedde: comp. ‘to ruggen and to bedde; iscrud mid
gode webbe,’ L 19946, 7; ‘Nowe is the tyme of the yere when provysion
was wont to be made . . . of ther wynter vesturys [to] theyr
bodyes and to ther beddis,’ Wright, Suppression of Monasteries, 68/4: ‘a
lit ⁊ a dos,’ F.
26. linnene: its
use in any form was a great concession. It was noted that Abbot Roger
Norreys of Evesham, in his contempt for the Rule, ‘camisiis et
lintheaminibus . . . palam utebatur,’ Chron. Abb. de Evesham,
104. hearde, hard; pl. of heard, l. 44: herde N 28
is the same word, but Morris glosses it, hards, hurds, tow, and heorden,
hards of flax, referring both to heordan, without accounting for
the difference in form. The meaning, of hards and of coarse hards, is
not satisfactory. F has ‘sil ne seit de stupeȝ ⁊ de grosses estoupes’;
the two nouns appear to be an Anglo-French and a French form from the
same Latin word, stupa. Possibly the former means tow of flax and the
latter tow of hemp; anyhow the cloth was called stupacium. Comp.
generally, ‘Porro talia ei vestimenta sufficiant quae frigus repellant.
Grossioribus peliciis utatur, & pellibus propter
hyemem, propter aestatem autem unam habeat tunicam: utroque vero tempore
duas de stupacio camisias vel staminas,’ Ailred, 644 e.
392
27. Stamin: OF.
estamine, an under-garment loosely woven of coarse wool, nearly as
uncomfortable as a hair shirt, ‘camiseam de grossiori panno [habeant],
si voluerint’ of the Gilbertine Rule, p. *lxxix. ‘Estamiȝ,’ F.
28. hetter,
garment: ‘vn de voȝ vestures,’ F. OE. pl. hæteru, often in
ME. as singular. ‘Vestiti quoque dormiant et cincti, vt semper sint
parati,’ Grimlaici Regula Solitariorum, in Holstenii Codex, i. 291. Lay
folk did not in those days wear night clothes. leoðeliche,
loosely: the ME. adverb corresponding to the OE. adjective liþig,
flexible; comp. OWScand. liðugr, free: liðeliche, 72/194 is OE.
līþe, soft. The writer here and elsewhere shows himself anxious
to mitigate the austerities of his pupils. F has nothing corresponding
to swa—under.
30. cunne is
historically genitive plural: see 132/9
note and 81/80 note. schriftes, confessor’s: the ‘meistre’ of
60/2: comp. 80/62; ‘bi ure shriftes rede,’ OEH ii. 55/29; ‘mid ðe rade
of þine scrifte,’ VV 127/2. In F ‘sanȝ congie de son confessour’
corresponds to ‘wiðute schriftes leaue,’ 62/33.
31. ilespiles
felles, hedgehogs’ skins: OE. igil, īl, hedgehog +
pīl, prickle; the compound is used in ME. for the animal. Comp.
‘⁊ alle [sunnen] weren prikiende so piles on ile | He biþ þicke mid
piles,’ Worc. Frag. F 21, 2. In irspiles N 30 r is
probably due to OF. heriçun: F has ‘peel diricon.’
31 N. ileðered
in this MS. only: it must mean, furnished with leather thongs: F has
‘[pl]umbee.’
32. holin: OE.
holegn, holen, holly.
33. binetli, whip
with nettles: NED. quotes from Cotgrave, ‘enortier, to
benettle.’
34. biuoren, in
front of the body. ne na keoruunge, practise no cutting or
mutilation. ed eanes, at any one time. F ‘a nule foiȝ.’
35. luðere,
severe, lit. wicked. disceplines: ‘smerte smiten of smale longe
ȝerden,’ OEH ii. 207/6. Comp. ‘Disciplina pacis nostre super eum, seið
Isaye, þus ure beatunge ueol upon him,’ AR 366/14, 346/24.
36. cundeliche:
for sicknesses which come in the natural course they must not put faith
in or try remedies which are unnatural, such as the nostrums of the
herb-woman: see 54/6 note. The writer in
another place, 368, says that recluses are apt to be far too much
concerned about bodily health.
37. leste
&c., lest worse befall you: see 30/18. leste descends from
þȳ lǣs þe; this is an early instance of its use.
38. meoke, soft,
supple; comp. 64/66: the only instances in English
393
of the use of this word in the material sense of OWScand. mjúkr as in
Icel. mjúk-hendr, soft-handed. ‘In yeme utamini sotularibus
grossis ⁊ callidis,’ L.
39. Hosen wiðute
vampez, stockings without feet; the ‘chausses’ were usually footed.
‘En chauces sanȝ auant pieȝ gise qi voudra,’ F; ‘In caligis sine
pedalibus dormietis,’ L. vampez, pl. of
vampe or vampey, are properly the front part of a boot, the ‘uppers’
(avant pied), here they mean the whole covering of the foot. In
Cavendish’s Life of Wolsey (ed. Singer 335), Wolsey is represented as
saying, ‘we do intend . . . to go afoot . . . in the
vamps of our hosen,’ i.e. in our stocking feet. The second and in
35 N is superfluous.
40.
Ischeoed—bedde: another prohibition of undue austerities.
The passage is not in any other of the English MSS., nor in F, but L has
‘calciatis numquam nec nisi in lecto.’
41.
Sum—wereð, it may be that some woman wears &c. For
inohreaðe see 56/43; F has ‘parauenture’ here as there.
brech, drawers; OE. brēc, pl. of brōc,
answering to femoralia of the monastic Rules. here, haircloth;
OE. hǣre.
42. streapeles,
the legs of the drawers; especially so called when they were closely
confined to the limb by cross-gartering. They were worn by men also: see
Strutt’s Complete View of the Dress &c. i, plates 31, 49, 56, for
good illustrations. OE. strapul: ‘Hoc tibiale: a strapylle,’
Wright, Vocab. 775/18, 734/23. F has ‘les braeis de heire m[u]lt bien
noueȝ les tiguns aual desqe a pieȝ mult ferm laceȝ,’ but nothing
corresponding to ah—here, which is in A alone: and yet it
is necessary to the sense. The writer does not approve of the ‘brech of
here,’ a sweet and patient disposition is better, an often-repeated
idea; ‘Þis is Godes heste, þet him is muchele leouere þen þet tu ete
gruttene bread, oðer werie herde here,’ AR 186/10. L is with A, ‘Alique
utuntur femoralibus cilicium. Mallem tamen
in vobis cor humile ⁊ potens sustinere dura verba ·
et probrosa · quam durum cilicium
portare.’
43. swete . . .
swote: a frequent combination: comp. ‘swete ⁊ swote iheorted,’ AR
118/3; ‘so unimete swote ⁊ swete,’ id. 102/26. þolien: comp. ‘A
mis-word þet ȝe þolieð . . . ȝe nolden sullen hire uor al þe
worldes golde,’ AR 190/7.
44.
ȝef—wullen, If you can do without wimples, and you would
doubtless wish to do so.
45. beoð bi, have
for use: comp. ‘beoð bi þe leste þet heo euer muwen,’ AR 350/7; ‘gifð us
al þat we bi ben,’ OEH ii. 69/29, 179/6. Similarly, ‘ne na mâ wifa þonne
ân hæbbe, ac beo be þære anre þa hwile, þe heo
394
lybbe,’ Wulfstan, 271/14 (B.-T.); ‘ne æac maran getilige to haldænne
þonne ic gêmetlice bi beon mage,’ Blooms, ES xviii. 343/43.
cappen: the ‘mitras lineas, nigras et forratas de agninis
pellibus’ of the Gilbertine Rule, p. *lxxix.
46. wimplunge: so
S. Bernard contrasts the wimpled fine lady and the veiled nun, ‘Risus
immoderatior, incessus lascivior, vestitus ornatior wimplatae magis quam
velatae congruerent,’ i. 123 f. The wimple was a long strip of fine
linen which encircled the head, neck, and the top of the shoulders; at
this time one end of it hung down along the left arm. There is a good
illustration of it in Shaw’s Dresses and Decorations, i, on the middle
figure of plate 10. Like other linen clothing, it was at this time
coloured with saffron; ‘hire winpel wit, oðer maked geleu mid saffran,’
OEH ii. 163/32; Rel. Ant. ii. 15/8; the ‘ȝeolewe clað’ of 82/108. The
long passage from Ancren l. 46 to wimplunge l. 59 is in AC only; in the
latter it is added on the margin, which has been cropped. L is very
fragmentary at this point, but it had matter corresponding
to A.
47. cundeliche,
by reason of her sex, because she is a woman, and ordered as such by S.
Paul to veil her head.
48. heaued clað:
the ‘couvre-chef,’ a veil of fine linen worn on the head. Holy Scripture
says nothing of wimples or other head-dress, but speaks of covering
only. ‘Si turpe est mulieri tonderi aut decalvari, velet caput suum,’ 1
Cor. xi. 6.
51-55. The source of
this passage is probably, ‘Linus papa . . . constituit ut mulieres
in ecclesia velatae sint. Et hoc propter tres causas fit: una est, cum
sint decipula diaboli, ne laxis earum crinibus iuvenum animi
illaqueentur; . . . tertia est ut reatus originalis peccati,
qui per mulierem evenit, ad memoriam nobis revocetur. Iudex quippe
malorum est Christus: sacerdos eius vicarius. Ante sacerdotem ergo debet
se mulier velare velut rea et tanti mali sibi conscia coram iudice
celare. Unde dicit Apostolus, ut mulier velata sit propter angelos, id
est sacerdotes,’ Honorius Augustodunensis (Migne, P. L. clxxii) 589
d. sunfule goes with eue; comp. 63/44.
52. on earst, at
the beginning, would correspond to OE. *on ǣrest, which is
apparently not found: OE. on ǣr means beforehand. Comp. ‘on
erest,’ AR 264/8; ‘on earst,’ SM 14/7; ‘on alre earst,’ HM 17/25; SM
14/4. The phrase is confined to AR and its group; elsewhere at erst is
used.
53. drahe, divert
from their proper use: a rare meaning. tiffunge, adornment.
54. If ȝetten
means yet, furthermore, it repeats and reinforces Eft.
395
As a form it seems to be quite isolated: it may be derived from ȝette
and owe its final n to the influence of such pairs as ofte,
often; uppe, uppen; buten, bute; seþþen, seþþe. ȝette 47 C is
also a rare form; comp. 76/19; HM 13/9, 43/13; ‘ewt ꝥ mon seið þe oðer
deð ȝette,’ id. 43/21. It can hardly come from gīeta, which gives
ȝete; perhaps it is for ȝet + þe, like þætte for þæt þe: þe ȝet is
frequent in Layamon.
55. þurh hire
onsihðe, through the seeing of her: comp. 124/253, perhaps the only
other place where the word occurs: it is possibly formed on the analogy
of OE. ansīen. Et hoc &c.: ‘Ideo debet mulier
potestatem habere supra caput propter Angelos,’ 1 Cor. xi. 10.
56. iwimplet: the
writer is addressing an imaginary disciple who insists on the wimple as
satisfying the requirements of S. Paul. He replies that the apostle
requires more; the face also must be veiled; his words are directed
against the recluse who receives visits from men. The wimple can be
dispensed with by the recluse who keeps within her walls and avoids the
sight of men. The visits of various people to the recluse are often
referred to; see AR 56/20, 58/5, 68/16.
57. þe is for þe
þe, as in C and at 64/60.
59. wel is a
mistake for þurl due to anticipation of the following wel. Three windows
are mentioned, that looking into the church, the ‘chirche þurl,’ AR
68/16; the parlour window, through which they converse with visitors and
communicate with the servants, the ‘þurl’ of 74/209, AR 68/19; and the
house window, the ‘rund windowe’ of the text. Each window was hung
inside and out with black cloths marked with a white cross, AR 50/2,
96/10, and furnished with shutters; compare the elaborate regulations
for the windows in the Gilbertine Rule, Dugdale, *lxxv. wel mei
duhen: see 62/22 note: ancre is
dative.
60. þus ne dest,
i.e. hidest not thyself from men’s gaze.
61. þer . . . of,
thereby, by reason of that, see 1/3 note: so
‘hwarof,’ whereby AR 58/22.
63. þah, if.
Comp. ‘Ȝif we weopeð for ure owune [sunnen] hit is nout muchel wunder,’
AR 312/23. ‘ki qe vult estre veue mes qele satife nest pas grant
merueille,’ F.
64. untiffet wið
uten: comp. 1 Pet. iii. 3, 4.
65. broche:
‘fermail,’ F; ‘firmaculos,’ L (should be firmacula). imembret,
striped, parti-coloured: comp. ‘Singuli Fratres singulas zonas tantum
habeant, sintque zonae eorum simplicis corrigiae, sine fibulis &
absque omni tinctura,’ Statuta Ord. Grandimont., Holst. ii. 303.
glouen: comp. ‘Ut nunquam induant gantos,’ Regulae
Sanctimonialium Fontis Ebraldi, Migne, P. L. clxii. 1097.
396
57 C-61. See 66/114-19.
The scribe of C copied this passage by inadvertence at the bottom of f.
193 r instead of f. 194 r.
66. ow ne deh, it
is not proper for you. meoke, soft and pliant, not like the heavy
sheepskin winter garments. See 62/38 note.
67. greattre,
coarser and larger pieces of work, not fancy trifles.
68.
forte—wið, with which to get yourselves friends. ‘nec eorum
(i.e. friends) munuscula litterasque suscipias, nec illis tua dirigas, prout
moris est, puta zonas, marsupia, quae diverso stamine & subtegmine
variata sunt,’ Ailred, 642 e. In the Gilbertine Rule the nuns are
forbidden to make purses embroidered with silk, p. *xciv.
69. huue, coif,
skull-cap: OE. hūfe; Germ. haube. blodbinde, ligatures of
silk to stop bleeding: ‘tenas,’ L (a LL. form = taenias). laz,
not ‘lace’ Morris, but laces, i.e. strings for lacing garments: ‘laqueos
de serico,’ L.
70. chirche
claðes: ‘les vestementȝ de seint iglise,’ F.
72. fore,
beforehand: OE. fore: without telling him about it beforehand, as
well as the circumstances, your relationship to the persons, how often
you receive them, how long you entertain them.
73. tendre of
cunne, affectionate towards kindred. The story which follows is in
Eudes de Cheriton (ed. Hervieux, 270) and in Jacques de Vitry (ed.
Crane, 54). Both were active in the first quarter of the thirteenth
century. Eudes may have found the story (which is, in any case, an
interpolation) in AR, he quotes, p. 195, a variant of the proverb found
in AR 96/24, ‘euer is þe eie to þe wude leie,’ and applies it
correctly.
74. ⁊—him,
to whom came.
75. efter: see
7/53.
76. dead
biburiet: probably and has fallen out between these words.
77. dead
gasteliche: ‘mortuus sum in claustro sepultus,’ Eudes, 271; ‘Quanti
monachorum dum patris matrisque miserentur, suas animas perdiderunt,’ S.
Jerome, ii. 577.
78. The amice, L. amictus, is the oblong
piece of linen which envelops the neck of a vested priest. For a good
illustration see Bock, Gesch. der liturg. Gewänder des Mittelalters, ii.
Tafel ii. To its upper edge is sewn an apparel which forms a collar to
it. The parures, apparels, are pieces of richly embroidered cloth sewn
on the amice and on the alb, two at the lower hem before and behind, two
on the cuffs, and sometimes two on breast and back. See Shaw’s Dresses,
i. plates 14, 16; Rock, Church of our Fathers, i. 424-66. The
Gilbertines were allowed to use silk for these embroideries.
397
80. mustreisun,
ostentation, boasting: OF. mo(n)straison, L. monstrationem: NED. records
a later monstrison and monstration.
81. For gode
werkes spoilt by publishing them, see the characteristic passage in
AR 146-52. Criblin: the exact meaning of this word, hitherto
unrecorded, is hard to determine. Its connexion with F. cribler, LL.
criblare (in Mulomedicina Chironis, ivth cent.), L. cribrum can hardly
be doubted; it must mean some kind of open work; either embroidery on a
net foundation, ‘filatorium,’ or drawn-thread work, or, what seems most
probable, ‘tambour,’ wherein the strips of linen stretched in a ring
frame, with the pattern pierced by a bodkin and the edges of the holes
thus made framed in needlework, would above all things suggest a sieve.
Such work might be used for ornamenting altar cloths, or pyx cloths, or
even albs (see Bock, ii. 35). It was elaborate work, such as recluses
ought not to undertake.
82. Taueles,
linen cloths which are spread on the mensa of the altar, the ‘tres
tobaleae mundae’ of the Roman rite. LL. toualia, Eng. towel.
riueð, stitches, sews together; OWScand. rifa, to tack, sew
loosely together: in Scottish dialects, riv.
83. measse
kemese, albs: OE. cemes, LL. camisia. nomeliche
oueregede, especially such as are foolishly elaborate:
oueregede is found here only; egede is a characteristic word of
the group, AR 282/13; HM 39/2; SM 11/9.
84. Helpeð
&c.: comp. ‘Quod ut fiat, videat inclusa, ut si fieri potest, de
labore manuum suarum vivat, hoc enim perfectum est,’ Ailred, 641 d. A
general injunction, not applicable to the sisters, for whom ample
provision had been made, AR 192/16.
85. se forð se,
as far as: comp. ‘so uorð so,’ 65/67; ‘se uorð ase,’ 75/187; ‘ase forð
as,’ 72/201; ‘so uorð ase,’ AR 268/10, 382/11.
86. The reference is
probably to ‘ne quemquam otiosum possit diabolus invenire, ne variis
desideriis pateat cordis aditus, altera sororum libros scribat
. . . suat altera cucullas sororum,’ Opera v. 442.
87. lihtliche,
without good reason. allunges, altogether, wholly: the genitive
form is less common than the dative, 70/154, which represents OE.
eallunga. of sumþing . . . idel, without
something to do: comp. 58/73. anan rihtes, immediately, straight
away.
89. for nawt, to
no purpose.
90. iȝemen: OE.
gegīeman occurs only in the sense of treating as a patient,
amending: ȝeme T means, take heed to, give attention, the variant in N,
ihwulen, have leisure: comp. ‘hwon so ȝe euer muwen ihwulen,’ AR
44/5. Apparently it occurs nowhere else.
91. ‘In desideriis est
omnis otiosus,’ comp. Prov. xxi. 26. For
398
awakeneð see 54/24. ‘Ecce haec fuit iniquitas Sodomae, sororis
tuae, superbia, saturitas panis et abundantia, et otium ipsius,’ Ezech.
xvi. 49.
94. rust: ‘otium
enim et desidia quasi quaedam rubigo sapientiae est,’ S. Jerome, ii.
773.
95, 96. From Ailred;
‘sunt quaedam inclusae, quae in docendis puellis occupantur, et cellam
suam vertunt in scholam,’ 641 f. forwurðe, degenerate into;
a meaning apparently found only in AR; its ordinary sense is, to perish,
54/23. Comp. ‘Þeo þet schulden one lecnen hore soule mid heorte
bireousunge . . . uorwurðeð fisiciens ⁊ licomes leche,’ AR
368/28; ‘bicumeð (forwurðeð T) meister, þe schulde beon ancre,’
64/24.
96. ꝥ—of,
concerning whom it would be danger; comp. 1/3. For of, meaning
ground, cause, comp. ‘strengðe of,’ 66/116; ‘gostlich fondunge þat is
more dred of,’ AR 194/23: for pliht, risk, ‘Nu ne sceole ȝe
halden eower child to plihte to longe hæþene,’ Twelfth Cent. Hom. 6/7:
dute 79 N has the same meaning.
97. bimong: a
form characteristic of AR and the allied writings.
99. See 64/68 note. In
the next line writen probably means compose or copy books; comp.
‘Nulla etiam de nostris praesumat libros aliquos, vel orationes, vel
meditationes scribere vel scribi facere sine assensu prioris omnium,’
Gilbertine Rule, p. *lxxxiii.
100. Their hair is to
be cropped, idoddet, or shaven four times a year, or if any one
prefers it, trimmed, ieueset, but in that case, the hair must be
washed and combed more often, C 85; not more than seven times in the
year according to the Gilbertine Rule.
102. beo bi, as
at 62/45.
103. as ofte:
four times a year, as in the Gilbertine Rule, p. *lvi. þe, who,
equivalent to whoso; if any one can dispense with bloodletting; þer
buten, without it: see NED. s.v. Here § 16.
105. þe þreo
dahes, a recognized period of indulgence; ‘Minutis tribus diebus
pitantia mane vinum autem bis datur . . . a laboribus vacant,
ad lectos redeunt, a post prandium usque ad vesperas colloquium de bonis
faciunt,’ Guigonis Consuetudines, Migne, P. L. cliii. 737.
106. schurteð,
amuse: a rare word supposed to be cognate with Germ. scherzen. ‘Mes
dalieȝ de paroles od voȝ meschines ⁊ od honestes countes solaceȝ vous
ensemble,’ F.
107. beoð: the
subject ȝe is understood from the preceding ow.
109. They were too
severe in their austerities, AR 378/21, 228/18.
110. For
monluker see 125/270 note.
115.
ꝥ—riwle depends on nan. This passage corresponds to
65/57-61.
116. strengðe,
weight, importance: a favourite word of the writer;
399
comp. ‘of þincges wiðuten . . . nis nout muche strencðe,’ AR 12/12; ‘me
schal makien strencðe of onnesse of cloþes,’ id. 12/5. For of see
66/97. In the introduction to part viii, he says that they must not
promise, as unwise people might do, to observe any of the external
rules.
117. inre, the
inner rule, the ‘lady rule,’ to which the outer is but an handmaid:
comp. AR 4/10, 12/24, 410/18.
118. skile,
reason.
119. þuften,
handmaid; comp. 68/123; ‘for mi lauerd biseh his þufftenes mekelac,’ HM
45/12; AR 4/11. OE. þyften.
120. feareð to
wundre, goes to misfortune, ruin: OE. wundor, a portentous
thing. Comp. 6/46 note; 117/10; ‘þu scealt to wundre gewurðan,’ AS.
Hom., ed. Assmann, 174/163; ‘⁊ tukeð ham alto wundre,’ AR 380/15;
‘ȝeuest þin ahne dere bodi to tuken swa to wundre,’ HM 27/14; ‘so was
ðis were to wunder brogt,’ GE 3977. Ancre &c.: the first
clause is conditional, as at 54/11; if an anchoress have not her food
close at hand, two women are busy, i.e. have plenty to do, are needed.
This absolute use of bisie, meaning fully employed, is
noteworthy. F has ‘Recluse qe nad pas sa vetaille pres · mestier ad
dauer ij femmes’; L, ‘Anachorita que non habet
victum ad manum indiget duabus ancillis.’ The rule is
founded on that of Ailred, ‘Itaque eligatur tibi aliqua anus, non
garrula, non vaga, non litigiosa, non nugigerula . . . Haec
ostium cellulae custodiat . . . Habeat sub cura sua fortiorem
ad onera sustinenda puellam,’ 641 f.
121. þe leaue,
who may remain, to stay: an intransitive use.
123. unorne,
not ‘old,’ but plain in appearance; comp. 62/23; either a young girl or
middle-aged, without adornment.
124. beoden,
prayers: comp. ‘Cheatereð ouwer beoden euere, ase sparuwe deð þet is
one,’ AR 174/24: ‘voise disant ses proiores,’ F.
129. dame,
mistress: each of the anchoresses had her own maids; see 74/208.
132. ȝe: the
reading of N is preferable: CT have no nominative: ‘Nul hom ne lessent
entrer,’ F.
134. oboke, by
book; comp. ‘Sum is clergesse ⁊ sum nis nout ⁊ mot . . . an
oðer wise siggen hire ures,’ AR 6/12. bi, by the repetition of:
‘die par patre nostres,’ F. Comp. AR 24, where the
writer describes how the lay brethren of his own order say their
hours.
136. Comp. ‘So þet me
seið ine bisawe, “Vrom mulne ⁊ from cheping, from smiðe ⁊ from ancre
huse, me tiðinge bringeð,”’ AR 88/26: Ailred, 641 b.
400
140. to uuel
turnen: ‘vnde quis aliquid mali poterit
suspicari,’ L.
141. heaued
clað: ‘coeuere chief,’ F. eiðer ligge ane, let each lie by
herself, comes in awkwardly among the directions about their clothes: F
has it here, but T after habben, l. 143.
142. cop is
apparently the caputium of the Gilbertine Rule: ‘Conversae vero laicae
sorores vestiantur sicut monachae, cucullis et scapulari exceptis;
quorum loco habeant pallia de adultis agnis forrata; et caputia earum
mamillas tegentia ad formam scapulariorum sanctimonialium,’ p. *lxxxvii:
so a short cape covering the shoulders instead of the longer cloak
called scapular. It was to be sewn high on the breast, not closed by a
brooch: hence its name hesmel in N, as a garment with a hole for
the head to pass through; Icel. hálsmal: istihd in N is probably
miswritten for istichd. ‘lour cotes soient par de sus closes par deuant
la poitrine sanȝ fermail,’ F.
143. unleppet,
literally unlapped, not enfolded; ‘desaffublieȝ,’ F: not in their ‘cop’
or ‘hesmel.’ OE. læppa, skirt. unweawed N, ungarmented,
means the same thing, not ‘unveiled,’ Morris: comp. OE. wǣfels,
pallium, indumentum. open heaued, bare-headed; ‘teste
descouerte,’ F. ihudeket C, covered; from *hȳdecian,
derivative of hȳdan (NED).
144. cussen:
the mode of salutation then general among lay folk is forbidden them.
For the custom at a much later period see Cavendish’s Life of Wolsey,
ed. Singer, p. 171.
145. toggin,
tug, pull about; comp. 186/318. T has the derivative, toggle: Sc.
dialect, tuggle.
146. aturn,
attire, or possibly, bearing, manner. OF. atourn, equipment, adornment.
Comp. ‘for þi is hare aturn se briht,’ HM 23/10; ‘aturnet,’ 123/209.
147. hwerto . . .
iturnde, in what direction they are going, what way of life they
have chosen. Hare lates &c., let them wisely give heed to
their gestures, behaviour; ‘porteures,’ F.
150. venie,
acknowledgement of fault and petition for pardon, usually in the form of
a genuflection or of a profound bow (curvatio). It was also used as a
formal act of humiliation at the end of a Psalm and with the angelic
salutation, as ‘cum tribus veniis totidem feci salutationes,’ Caesarius
Heisterbach., ii. 33, 39: see also Ecbasis Captivi, ed. Voigt, ll.
769-72. Comp. ‘nimeð ower uenie dun et ter eorðe mid te honden
one; oðer ualleð adun al uor muchel misnimunge,’ AR 46/27;
‘sumat veniam super terram,’ Gilbertine Rule, p. *lxxxi.
154.
do—ut, put it utterly out.
401
156. eiðer
&c., and let them raise one another and end with a kiss: ham
in N is reciprocal.
157. þe greatluker
gulte, who was more in fault; see 125/270.
158. witen
&c.: see 90/73 note. some,
concord: comp. ‘to some and to sehtnysse,’ Ælf., Hom. Cath. ii. 198/19,
‘myd sib and myd some,’ OEM 89/15; ‘sib ⁊ sæhte,’ 11/184; ‘sib wið ute
uihte,’ 133/60. somentale in T means concord; in Orm, sammtale,
in CM, samertale, concordant.
159. umben: see
74/229 note. For leaððe, OE.
lǣððo, hatred, N has substituted the commoner wreððe.
160. o brune,
alight; comp. ‘bed bringen o brune,’ SK 1355; AR 296/12. aga, go
out; an uncommon use of a word which means, to depart. Comp. ‘That other
fyr was queynt and al agon,’ Chaucer, C. T., A 2336.
161. nond,
aphetic form of anond, onond. The emendation appears to be justified by
the reading of N, although this shortened form does not occur elsewhere.
All the scribes seem to have been puzzled by the peculiar use of the
word; N adds a gloss ‘also.’ T has dos hond to, sets his hand to; C
omits. The word is adverbial, meaning likewise; a development of on
efen, on a level with. He doth likewise the same thing, is a
tautology characteristic of the writer: ‘il fet meismes ceste
chose,’ F.
162. ꝥ he wule
ꝥ, which he wills that it should burn: comp. 7/52: ‘le quel il vult
qe arde en nostre queor,’ F.
163. ne geineð
nawt, is of no avail.
164. nohtunge,
depreciation: comp. ‘for noht oðer nohtunge,’ HM 9/1. But F interprets
it otherwise, ‘ascune altre chose qe rien ne vaut.’ to hurten,
may dash asunder: ‘par quey il seuerent lune de laltre,’ F. to
hurren CT means, whirl asunder: comp. dialectal Danish hurre, dial.
English hurr, to whirr round.
165. For
frommard see 58/66. cwencheð should be cwenche or
hurten, hurteð. An early instance of cwenchen, to be
extinguished.
166. halden
ham, let them, i.e. the brands, hold themselves firmly together.
167.
ne—of, let them not heed; see 8/84. F has ‘⁊ ne lour seit a
rien tout soffle lenemy.’
168. monie,
i.e. brondes. iueiet, joined; corresponds to OE. gefēged,
pp. of gefēgan: a favourite word of the author; comp.
‘iveied togederes,’ AR 26/9; ‘iueied somed,’ id. 308/17; ‘hope ⁊ dred
beon euer iveied togederes,’ id. 336/9, 356/7. ontende: comp.
128/370; ‘of þeos two treon
402
ȝe schulen ontenden fur of luue wiðinnen ower heorte,’ AR 402/7. For
wið see 130/52: F has ‘nomeement ensemble. si plusours
estes ensemble iointes ⁊ bien damur esprises,’ where the first
ensemble is superfluous.
170. schriuen
ham, let them make their confession: a new development in the
meaning of the word: OE. scrīfan means, to hear confession, to
impose penance (scrift). F has ‘Al prestre ia le plus tard
ne se confessent souent,’ where the equivalent of
noðeleater, nevertheless, is noteworthy.
174. se lengre se
mare: ‘a touȝ iours · plus ⁊ plus,’ F.
177. gruchesi,
a hitherto unrecorded form, means, like the other readings, to munch,
nibble. It is related to gruse T as the mod. dialect. forms
growdge (Lincs.), grouge (Notts) are to grouze, to eat noisily (mostly
Lincs.): gruselie N may be represented by gruzzle, to eat
voraciously (Lanark). Similarly OF. groucier is grutch in ME., in mod.
dialects, grouse, to grumble.
178. liht,
readily given by the mistress; comp. 48/312. F appears to have read liþ,
‘le conge gist en toutes choses la ou ny ad pecche.’
179. na word:
the rule for the anchoresses was, ‘Silence euere et te mete;
vor ȝif oðre religiuse doð hit . . . ȝe owen biuoren alle,’ AR
68/21. ⁊ teo stille, and those few in a low voice: N has added
beon, and let those be &c. complie: after the
anchoress has said compline, the servant must be careful not to disturb
her obligatory silence. The times of silence are stated in Ailred’s
thirteenth chapter. aþet, until; OE. oð ðæt, until that, a
conjunctional phrase, as at 72/189, 77/61, 69, 118/23, but here a
preposition; comp. ‘aþet endunge þissere weorlde,’ OEH i. 119/15; ‘aðet
tes dei,’ SK 1305. þet, þat are used alone as conjunctions, until; comp.
162/248; ‘ꝥ come þes dei,’ OEH i. 33/32; KH 123 note. a þa, 78/71
(= a þe) represents oð þe, conj., until: so too
of = oð, 13/15. uort N 73/162, until, is shortened from
for te (= for to); comp. ‘slepte uort midniht,’ AR 236/25; ‘for to
þe fowertuðe dai,’ OEH ii. 23/7. But it is mostly a conjunction, as at
134/64, 136/156, 151/41; ‘uort ȝe beon al greiðe,’ AR 16/6; ‘for to þe
time cam,’ OEH ii. 23/4; or it forms with þet a conjunctional phrase,
73/172; ‘vort tet we speken,’ AR 64/12; ‘forte ꝥ on þen þridde
dai; ꝥ is heorte be liht,’ OEH ii. 103/23. Finally, in ‘ȝet
nabbe ȝe nout wiðstonden uorte þet þe schedunge of ower blode,’ AR
262/17, uorte þet is a preposition. Note the readings of TC at l.
172.
181. hure
appears to be a repetition of the preceding: N has cloð; CT clað: ‘fors
le mangier ⁊ auestir,’ F.
182. ꝥ . . .
bi, by means of which. flutte, subsist; OWScand. flytja, but
403
the meaning here answers to the reflexive flytjask, to maintain oneself:
‘dunt ele se puit sustenir,’ F. Comp. ‘þet moni þusunt muhten
biflutten,’ AR 202/25, apparently the only other place where it is used
in this sense. The noun fluttunge is in HM, ‘to fluttunge ⁊ to fode,’
27/8, 29/4; SM 22/34. Ne misleue &c., Let no recluse’s
servant have such want of confidence in God as to think that He will
fail her, whatever betide the recluse. The servant may rest assured that
she will be provided for in any contingency. ‘Nule ne mescroie dieu
qeiqe auienge de la recluse qil lui faille,’ F. See 141/36, and for
trukie comp. further 82/105, AR 68/6, 234/17, 356/31.
183. þe meidnes wið
uten would seem to restrict the application of the last sentence to
the aged indoor servant, see 66/121. The reading of T, þeo ꝥ arn wið
uten, applied to people in general who help the recluse, seems
better.
184. alswa as,
even as, just as: so ‘alriht so,’ AR 92/8. hom in T is a mistake for
ho.
185. haueð ehe . .
. toward: comp. ‘hwon ȝe habbeð touward me eien oðer honden,’ AR
76/15 (= ‘cum extenderitis manus’): ‘qi ad loil desperance
vers si haut louer,’ F. In N 168 ‘of’ has been lost after ‘eie,’
which cannot mean any.
186. heh bure,
Blake’s ‘heaven’s high bower’ is quite in the manner of the writer; he
has ‘breoste bur,’ AR 34/11; ‘heorte bur,’ 102/22; ‘in to þe stirrede
bur bliðe to heouene,’ SM 22/12. Comp. also, ‘in to þan heuenliche
bure,’ OEH ii. 167/3. A has preserved the original reading: F has
‘vers si haut louer.’
187. eise . . .
este: a frequent combination in AR, comp. ‘Eise ⁊ flesches este beoð
þes feondes merken,’ AR 364/2, 136/26, 220/6, 374/27; ‘Al þe este ⁊ al
þe eise is her,’ HM 29/26. ‘Od aise ne od delit ne achate hom pas tiele
ioie,’ F.
188. reden: F
has ‘lire,’ but the women would not understand French. euche wike
eanes: ‘Quater in anno legantur scripta fratribus et sororibus,’
Gilbertine Rule, p. *xciv. ou beoðe in N 173, to both of you,
means, to the anchoresses as well as to their servants; comp. N 176.
190. igodet,
improved: comp. 8/92; AR 386/15.
192. for þi as,
for the reason that: comp. 130/53. The writer affects a fullness of
expression in such phrases: so ‘ȝef þet’ in the preceding line; ‘uor þi
ꝥ,’ in order that, AR 66/22; ‘uor hwon þet,’ if on occasion, id. 160/3,
270/11, 300/16; ‘mid tet ꝥ,’ as soon as, id. 76/22; ‘wið þen þet,’ on
condition that, id. 242/27; ‘bi þen þet,’ by that, id. 330/18.
ow: dative, to you.
404
194. liðeliche ⁊
luueliche, gently and affectionately. wummone lare, teaching
to women.
195. For selthwenne
sturne, F has ‘relement estiburne’; the former word is dialectic for
rarement, the latter apparently ME. stiborn, Chaucer C. T., D 456;
comp. ‘Styburne, or stoburne (or sterne). Austerus,’ Prompt.
Parv., ed. Way, 475: OF. estibourner, to palisade.
197. eoli ⁊
win. The source is probably, ‘Hinc namque est, quod docente Veritate
per Samaritani studium semivivus in stabulum ducitur, et vinum et oleum
eius vulneribus adhibetur, ut per vinum scilicet mordeantur vulnera, per
oleum foveantur. Necesse quippe est ut quisquis sanandis vulneribus
praeest, in vino morsum doloris adhibeat, in oleo mollitiem pietatis,’
S. Gregorii Pastoralis Cura, ii, ch. 6. The biographer of S. Gilbert
says he applied this teaching, ‘Quoniam autem vulneribus saucii nunc
vinum, nunc oleum infundere debet Samaritanus qui interpretatur custos,
studuit . . . medicus iste animarum utroque uti genere
medicamenti.’ Dugdale, p. *vi. Wine is mystically interpreted justice;
oil, mercy.
199. suhinde,
biting, smarting: perhaps connected with OWScand. svíða: a Northern
word, see Minot, v. 12 note and EDD sou. C substitutes
sturne.
200. luue eie,
love-fear; ‘doute en amur,’ F. Comp. ‘With loue awe, sone, þy
wyfe chastyse,’ How the Wyse Man taught hys Sone, 33/140, where the
editor reads lone; ‘frigti luue,’ 197/18. The words are often
associated, as ‘And quat for luue and quat for age,’ GE 3632.
201. icnaweð,
confess: arn cnawe in T means are confessing; OE. gecnǣwe; see KH
983 note. Ase forð as: see 64/85: ‘Ausi auant come vus
poeȝ,’ F.
203. nearowe,
strict, sparing: comp. ‘hold hire neruwe,’ AR 268/25; ‘neruwe domesmon,’
id. 156/14; ‘et te neruwe dome,’ id. 308/9. It is a noun in the next
line, as is wide, l. 205: ‘lestreit del corn . . . le
large,’ F. hearde: as they in fact were; ‘Noðeleas, leoue
sustren, ower mete and ower drunch haueð iþuht me lesse þen ich wolde,’
AR 412/28. Similarly Ailred, ‘parcissimo cibo vix corpus sustentas,’
644 c.
205. ȝe don,
may ye do, do ye.
207. ahnes,
own; a gen. sing., corresponding to OE. āgnes, in a sort of
apposition to ower:
so aunes in C: the construction is
probably the same in ‘His ahȝenes þonkes he þrowede for us,’ OEH i.
121/27. With ones N 193, alone, comp. 147/163; ‘mid his ones
mihte,’ AR 160/10, where T has the curious anres as here; ‘wið his anes
wit awarpen,’ SK 591, 1283; as in Latin, ‘Mea unius opera respublica
salva est.’ In OE. are found, ‘mid þines anes ȝeþeahte,’ Boethius, ed.
Fox, 128/19;
405
‘ðæt ge ures nanes ne siendon,’ Cura Past. 211/14, where the possessive
has conformed to the adjective.
209. cumeð
&c., pay a visit to your maids for relaxation. With froure
comp. ‘iuvencula quaedam quae ei (sanctimoniali) ad solatium fuerat
deputata,’ Caesarius Heisterbach., ii. 216. cumeð . . . to
þe þurl: comp. the rule as to visits of the recluse’s friends, ‘ȝif
eni haueð deore gist, do hire meiden ase in hire stude te gladien hire
uere, ⁊ heo schal habben leaue to openen hire þurl enes oðer twies ⁊
makien signes touward hire of one glede chere,’ AR 68/22.
earunder, before undern, noon: undern is from nine to twelve,
sometimes twelve as here and at 206/323, sometimes nine as at 220/205:
comp. ‘ereyesterday,’ the day before yesterday, quoted from Coverdale in
NED iii. 267. With ouerunder, after undern, comp. ‘ofer non,’
Wulfstan, 205/9; ‘ouernon,’ afternoon, R. of Gloucester, ed. Wright,
7302, 7487; ‘mydouernoon,’ Hymns to the Virgin, 84/49; ‘þy feorþan dæge
ofor undern,’ BH 93/14. The dialectic overday, overnight, overyear refer
to the past day &c.
210. note
gastelich, spiritual occupation, duties.
211. sitte
&c.: do not remain at the window talking to them past the proper
time for compline.
213. hurten
heorte, wound another’s feelings, if retailed: that readily works
mischief. Comp. AR 256/1-7, where the devil is said to be busy about
separating the sisters with gossip.
215. lokeð,
watches over, preserves; see 4/20. edhalden, entertained: comp.
‘Prohibemus . . . ne aliqua . . . praesumat alicui
hospiti dare carnes . . . nec aliquem balneare, vel minuere
vel ultra unam noctem retinere,’ Gilbertine Rule, p. *lxxxv. ꝥ
beo, let it occur.
218. plohien is
subj. pr. pl., Let not the anchoress or her maiden play; it
represents OE. pleogian as ME. pleien does OE. plegian.
Possibly the dialect word ploy, amusement, usually explained as aphetic
for employ, is connected with this form. The gomenes would be
backgammon, chess, and the like.
219. ticki to
gederes, pat, caress each other, or possibly, romp, play the child’s
game of ‘ticky.’ See NED s.v. Tick, v.1 for
examples of the phrase ‘tick and toy.’
220. fleschlich
froure: the reference is perhaps to ‘Venientibus quippe ad
religionem non est consideranda carnis fragilitas, ut ei delicate
subserviatur, sed impedimenta fervoris spiritus, ut sollicite
fugiantur,’ Opera, i. 370 b.
221. wið ute
met &c., beyond measure (exceptional) exquisite joy. Comp.
‘utnume feir,’ SJ 6/1.
406
222. þruppe
usually means, in addition, as at 127/358, but in AR it generally refers
to what has previously been said. Comp. ‘Turneð þeruppe (= back to
the place) þer ich spec hu he was ipined,’ AR 188/17; ‘þet ich spec er
of þeruppe,’ id. 372/23; where it repeats ‘er’; ‘þeruppe is inouh
iseid,’ id. 194/5, already enough has been said. The passage to which he
refers them is probably ‘ne schal tu nonesweis þeos two ilke cumforz,
min ⁊ te worldes—þe joie of the holi gost ⁊ flesches froure habben
togederes,’ AR 102/13.
223. eise, at
leisure, have opportunity: so ‘hwen þu art on eise carpe toward ihesu,’
OEH i. 287/11; ‘eise (= opportunity) makeð þeof,’ HM 17/24; AR
288/21; ‘aisie,’ convenient, OEH ii. 47/16; ‘efter hire eaise,’ to her
liking, AR 114/10. In ‘Et te one psalme ȝe schulen stonden ȝif ȝe beoð
eise,’ AR 20/27, it means, in good health, as ‘hwo se is ful meseise,’
id. 46/22, means, whoever is very infirm. The Gilbertine Rule gives
leave to sit at the choir offices, especially after bloodletting, p.
*lvii.
225. biheue:
see 91/108. bitohe: see 21/106.
226. wite:
subj. as in the exclamation ‘wite Christ,’ OEH i. 29/26: the ind. as in
N is usual. CT have deu le set. do me toward, set out for Rome, a
journey of hardship and difficulty; see Arnulfi Lexov. Epistolae, ed.
Giles, 197. The simple infinitive after leouere is noteworthy:
the reading of N represents the normal OE. to donne.
229. beoð
umben, be bent on. The phrase is constructed with (1) inf., 70/159:
(2) noun, ‘and beo ge embe þæt ylce,’ Ælf., Lives, i. 120/79, 154/120,
434/34; ‘Ac hi efre beoð ymbe þat an,’ OEH i. 221/7: (3) relative adverb
as here and at 75/201: (4) with relative clause, ‘⁊ ymbe þæt wæron þæt
hig hig sylfe on Hierusalem beclysan woldon,’ AS. Hom., ed. Assmann,
185/123; ‘is vmbe eueriches weis þet heo him luuie,’ AR 218/12. beon
abuten has the same meaning and constructions: comp. 46/267, 118/29;
‘Aure to feawe men bien abuten to habben ðese hali mihte,’ VV 133/20;
‘Satan is ȝeorne abuten (= expetivit) uorto ridlen þe ut of mine
corne,’ AR 234/15, and absolutely, ‘Inouh ich was abuten,’ I did my
best, AR 88/8. But ‘abuten to eggen,’ AR 146/1, means, employed in
inciting. þeronuuen, thereupon, on that object, i.e. that ye keep
it better &c., where the adverb is somewhat superfluous, but in the
writer’s manner. OE. þǣr an ufan. But on uuen has in two
places at least the meaning of, for the future; SJ 53/9; AR 236/14; and
the word in the text might mean, thereafter. þer abuten N 202,
about that thing.
231. wite . . .
warde: see 118/50.
233. dreheð ⁊
dreaieð, suffer and endure; OE. drēogað ⁊ dragað: comp. ‘þe
alre meast derue | ꝥ eni deadlich flesch | mahe drehen ⁊ drawen,’
407
SK 1889; ‘þu hauest for mi luue muchel idrohen ant idrehen,’ SJ 34/9.
For the form dreaieð, comp. 123/206, 147/153.
234. him
seoluen: comp. 50/360. aa, ever: comp. 118/53, 119/90,
120/108, 125/276: so in SK (MS. R) 664, 1480; HM (MS. T) ‘aá’ 15/34. The
doubling is merely an indication of length.
235. þe leafdi:
comp. ‘Saluum la Dame souent,’ Adgar, 200/58.
236. meaðful,
moderate: OE. mǣþfull; comp. 122/197.
237. writere,
the scribe; comp. 128/375. sum chearre, sometimes; comp. ‘sume
cherre,’ AR 108/10.
238. þe, for
thee, dative.
v. Cotton Cleopatra C 6
corrected by author from “C 5”
Literature: ... Mühe, T.
Muhe
Phonology: ... but u in wule
72
“u” misprinted as bold instead of italic
ā is regularly ... (beside leasse
61 (4), leaste b 188)
(4) leaste
ū, u;
u,
ea before r ... ȝeouen b
71
ȝeouen,
ēa is regularly ... ȝīet is
ȝet b 193
printed as shown: apparent error for “gīet”
a + g ... in MS. C
ploȝe
C. ploȝe
Final ig is regularly
i
“i” misprinted as bold instead of italic
siehst, siehð with
i-umlaut
“i” misprinted as bold instead of italic
ea before r ... and a,
after w
w misprinted as italic instead of bold
before length. groups o
length groups
eo, u- and å-umlaut of
i
i misprinted as italic instead of bold
(4) Of T and
C. ... investigation of Mühe
Muhe
Three-fourths of the infinitives ... witen
pr. pl. subj.
pr. pl. subj.,
idon pp. b 176;
176,
(2) Of B.
... sunnen 26, earen 71 are s. d.
d. s.
(3) Of N.
... ueonde 139 is s. d.,
comma missing
Infinitives end in -en ... II. bitinde 183:
183.
Infinitives are divided ... II. bitende
183:
183;
Vocabulary: ...
all commas in this paragraph are printed (or missing) as shown
Dialect:
Dialect.
3. ... inter scorpiones et
colubros
colubres
32. ... F. T has ‘þe ondfule ⁊ te
luðere
open quote missing
37. ... a windes puf
þuf
26. ... Grossioribus peliciis
utatur
spelling unchanged
65. broche: ‘fermail,’ F;
‘firmaculos,’
open quote missing
68. forte—wið, with which to
get yourselves friends
“with” added by author
75. efter: see 7/53.
efter;
78. The amice, L. amictus
L amictus
103. ... p. *lvi ... see NED. s.v.
Here § 16.
N.E.D.
207. ... apposition to
ower
ower misprinted as plain (non-bold)
Manuscript: Lambeth, 487: see p.
312.
Editions: Morris, R., OEH i. 41-47, and Specimens, 17-21;
Zupitza-Schipper, AE Lesebuch, ed. viii, 92-95.
Literature: (1) of the Vision of S.
Paul. Brandes, H., Ueber die Quellen der me. Versionen der
Paulus-Vision, in ES vii. 34-65; id. Visio S. Pauli, Halle, 1885;
Batiouchkoff, Th., in Romania, xx. 17; James, M. R., Visio Pauli in
Texts and Studies, ii. 3, Cambridge, 1893; Meyer, P., in Romania, vi.
11-16, xxiv. 357-375, and in Notices et Extraits, xxxv. 153-158; Ward,
H. L. D., Catalogue of Romances in the British Museum, ii.
397-416; Cohn, O., Die Sprache in der me. Predigtsammlung der Hs.
Lambeth 487, Berlin, 1887. Vollhardt, W. (see p. 269/19). (2) of the
Vision in general. Fritzsche, C., Die lateinischen Visionen des
Mittelalters, in Romanische Forschungen, ii. 247, iii. 337; Peters, E.,
Zur Geschichte der lateinischen Visionslegenden, in Romanische
Forschungen, viii. 361-364; Becker, E. J., A Contribution to the
Comparative Study of the Mediaeval Visions of Heaven and Hell,
Baltimore, 1899; Bedae
Opera Historica, ed. C. Plummer, ii. 294. (3) of the Sunday Letter. Priebsch, R., in Otia Merseiana,
i. 129, and in Mod. Lang. Review, ii. 138-154; Napier, A., in An English
Miscellany, 355-362.
Phonology of x and xi: References to piece xi are marked b.
Oral a is a, crabbe b 84, slakien b 67; a before
nasals, o, biwon 73, from 87, but swam b 90; a before
lengthening groups, o, ahonge 14, ontful 53, but and 8, 85, b 25.
æ is regularly e, cweð 45 (3 times), þet 25 &c., but
abac b 86, blake b 82, b 120, blaca b 99, saterdei 71, þat 25, 68,
watere b 86: with habbe b 14, b 77 comp. LWS. subj. habbe.
e is regularly e, betre b 24, eten b 101, b 104 (but eoten
80), engles 5 (4), sunbendes b 67; but it is i in tilden b 110,
eo in seolcuðre 17: stude 40, 41, b 26, whulche b 80, wulc b 20,
swulc b 85 are due to OE. forms with y, hwilc b 21, swilc
408
21, uwilc 83, 85 to forms with i. i is i, bidde 60,
wille 60, b 62, bindeð b 110, but en 59, wule 6, nule b 28 and all other
parts of willan. o is o, froggen b 83, longe 47,
but iwrat 79, walde 46, 47, b 93, nalde 46, 51, nalden 32, 58, all
Anglian forms with a; in weord 65 (5) eo is written for
o. u is u, bicumeð 73, sunedei 4, hundes b 38.
y is u, cunnes b 80, cunde b 85; mycel is muchele
67 &c.
ā is regularly a, an 16, claþeð b 114, gast 87, lauerd
39 (5), na b 100 (Anglian), þas 30, swa 29, but on 43, louerd 60, þon 5,
þeo b 19, þeos b 14 (4) þos b 95, b 99, se b 11, b 69; noteworthy is
foage b 119: escade 44, 49 descends from ǣscian.
ǣ1 is e, efreni 27, ledde 50, but a in
þare b 98, ea in eani 18, 48, sea 24 (4); ulcne b 66 descends
from ylc. ǣ2 is e, breðe 42 (Anglian
brēþ), neddren 26, but ariste 87. ē is e, gleden
35, ferde 10, but deað b 58. ī is i, is 25, swiþeliche 90,
fifte 26. ō is o, bicom b 9, nom b 10, bisocnie 80, but
eoðre 45. ū is u, hus b 73, lude 33. ȳ is u,
fur 25 (3), mus b 113, tuneð b 27 (4), uþe 24, but forþi 6.
ea before r + cons. is e, herde b 51, midelerd b
81, both before lengthening group; a between w and
r appears in swart b 105, warp 16, warðe 41. ea before
l + cons. is invariably a, ald 43, alle 5. The
i-umlaut is e, aweriede b 29, erming 6 (3), but earming
22, bicherreð b 112. eo before r + cons. is eo,
eorðe 59 (4), ȝeorne 49, heorte 16 (3), weorkes 67, but ibureȝe 36,
apparently from OE. gebeorgan (comp. ‘bureȝe,’ OEH i. 25/16,
‘bureȝest,’ id. 39/20). The wur group is represented by wurþien
75, 90. The i-umlaut is wanting in beorninde 12, after w
it is u, wurse 26, wursien b 14, unwurðe b 29: berninde 16 (3) is
from bærnan, smurieð b 114 from smyrian. eo before
l + cons. is seen in seolf 76, 83. ea, u-umlaut of
a, appears in eateliche 17, heauekes b 38. eo,
u-umlaut of e, is eo, heofene 5, 99, ȝeolewe b 107,
b 108, weorlde b 91, b 100, or o, ȝolewe b 120, world b 36, but
hefene 82, heueneriche 55, ȝeluwe b 83, without umlaut. eo,
å-umlaut of e, is seen in beode 80, beoden b 29, beoreð b
82, eoten 80, feole 19: unaneomned 28 is perhaps an analogic form.
eo, å-umlaut of i, is eo in seodðan 16, b
115, seoðþan 40, seodðe b 25, heore 6 (3); hare 31 is Anglian
heara: analogous are dalneominde 99 (comp. ‘neoman,’ OEH i.
29/18), icleped 88 (4). eo, u-umlaut of i, is seen
in seofen 41, seofe 17, seofeþe 26. The palatal diphthong ea
appears in sceal 62, scal b 89, ȝete 13: ie after ġ in
ȝeue 71, ȝefe 60, 69, geuen b 49, b 102, ȝeueð 93; gef is ȝef 1,
gif 6. eo after ġ is u in ȝunge b 87; after
sc it is seen in sceolde b 13, scolde b 111, sculen b 21:
heom is heom 9 &c., ham 70.
ēa is e, deðe 87, eren b 27, aȝen b 90 (ongēan),
and six others, but ædie b 19 (‘eadi,’ OEH i. 39/5), dead, deade b 59:
the i-umlaut gives e, alesnesse b 76, chese b 111, iheren
b 28 (12), remeð 33. ēo is regularly
409
eo, beot 98, feorðe 25, iseo 58, þreo b 51, but bitwenen 83,
fredome 3, þre b 69; the i-umlaut does not occur. After
sc, ēa appears in scean 29.
a + g is aȝ, daȝes 98, maȝen 40 (5); slage b 57,
slaȝeð b 98 are new formations from the pp. slagen
(Bülbring, Ablaut, 96); ah 51 (5) is Anglian ah. æ +
g is invariably ei, mei b 103, seide b 87. e +
g is also ei, eisliche 12, toȝeines 60 (3), wei b 24, but
awey b 94. o + g is seen in forhoȝie b 25. ā +
g is aȝ, aȝene 23 (4), faȝe b 82 (3), foaȝe b 119,
expressing the [āo] sound. ǣ1 + ht
gives ehte b 100, b 105. ē + g appear in leies 17, leit 30
(lēget), tweien 8; ō + g in wohe 47; ū +
h in þruh b 60. ea + g is seen in gneȝeð 34 =
*gneagað, with å-umlaut of a, idreȝen b 70,
pp. analogous to dreagan inf. with the same umlaut;
ea + h, ht, in iseh 48; the i-umlaut in
mihte 42, mihte 92, niht 30. The i-umlaut of eo + h
occurs in siste 26 (siexta). ēa + g is eȝ,
eȝen 15, heȝe 12; ēa + h, eh, abeh 64, heh 45: þah
23, b 97 is Anglian þæh. ēo + g, ht are seen
in liȝere 53, lihtliche b 43, the i-umlaut in lihting 72.
ā + w is aw in iknawe b 24, nawiht b 22, au
in saule 7 (7), snau 25. ǣ1 + w gives eu
in eubruche b 34. ō + w, noht b 11 (nōht).
ēa + w is seen in sceawede 12 (8), sceaude 16, scawede 11,
scawere b 116; ēo + w in eow 2 &c., feower b 45, heowe
17 (WS. hīw), reowliche 33, how b 118, fower b 80, bireusunke b
53.
In syllables without stress a is usually levelled to e,
but it survives in dringan 47, ilca 31, locan 86, 91, pinan 36, 37:
o becomes e in heuene 55, seofeþe 26, suteliche 3, but
a in escade 44, 49; onuppan is anuppon 46. In alla b 76,
alra b 46, blaca b 99, wiðinna 43, a is written for final
e, similarly clusterlokan 41, manaðas b 34; comp. quica 41/192.
The prefix ge- is largely retained as i, iblissieð 5; it
is u in uwilc 83 &c. e is added in amonge 30, medially
in hefede 68, swiþeliche 90, lost in onswerde 57, sceaude 16.
w is added in hwure 61. ll is simplified in suteliche
3; m doubled in summe 14 &c.; mm simplified in swim b
88, swam b 90, as nn in clenesse 51, 91, ene b 45, ine b 34:
n is doubled in sunne 100. p is doubled in deoppre b 41.
Initial f is written u in ualleð b 46, b 47, uindeð b 7,
uenne b 8, b 33, but f in falleð b 106: f between vowels
or vowel and liquid is usually u, but ȝefe 69, leofe 72,
monifolde 57, ufele 42, b 94, wifes b 37, nefre 45, 51, 52, efre 97,
efreni 27: f is assimilated in wimmen b 113, but wifmen 93.
tt is simplified in put b 31; ts is c in milce 63,
milcien 62. dd is simplified in midelerd b 81; d is lost
in onswerde 57, 70: d is t in ontful 53, iseit 82, b 14,
td in feðer fotetd 28, ð in forðwarð b 87, iclepeð 3,
iherð 73, isceaweð b 49. þ is written ðd in strengðdeð b
85, dþ in redþer 68, d in dringan 47, rested 95, wurdliche
91, t in speket b 92: þþ is dð in seodðan 16, b
115, seodðe b 25, but seoðþan 40. sć [š] is sc in
410
gledscipe 81, iscild b 121, scal b 89, scolde b 111, and other forms of
sceolan, scrift 32 (5), s, ss, ssc in fis b
84, fisses b 88, fissce b 84: the scribe writes elsewhere ‘ichefte,’ OEH
i. 77/5 (gesceafta), ‘iblesced,’ id. 5/7, ‘edmodnesce,’ id. 5/19.
č is expressed by ch, chese b 111, chirche 79 &c.,
eche b 98, tech b 89, uwilche 74, whulche b 80; but c is used
finally for the same sound in ic 57, hwilc b 21, swilc 21, swulc b 85,
uwilc 85, wulc b 20. čč is seen in totwiccheð b 94, wrecche 7,
11. The stop c is k before e, i, stoke b
113, swike b 111 and in clusterlokan 41, otherwise c, locan 86,
but apparently ch in musestoch b 109, b 110. čǧ is
gg in liggeð b 34, seggen 3. cw appears in cweð 45 (3),
but qu occurs elsewhere in the MS., as ‘quic,’ OEH i. 81/1.
ġ is ȝ,
daȝes b 45, ȝef 1, ȝeue 71, ȝete 13,
slaȝed b 98, but Gif 6, slage b 57, geuen b 49: ng is nk
in bireusunke b 53, ‘of sprinke,’ OEH i. 75/31 (comp. Horn, Beiträge,
29); but ng for nc occur in ‘þong’ (= þonc), OEH i.
39/33, ‘dringen’ (= drinken), id. 37/33. Initial h is lost
in lauerdes 4 &c., lusten 1, lude 33, redliche 64, redþer 68, remeð,
reowliche 33, bireusunke b 53, witsunne 88; it is added in heow b 21,
how b 118, hiheren b 16; h is also lost in iwrat 79; for it
ð is written in þurð b 53. hw is seen in whulche b 80,
wulc b 20: siste 26 is siexta, Angl. se(i)sta.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. sune b 120 represents
sunu. Gen. -es, muðes b 53,
cunnes b 80, but monedeis 72; d. -e,
deie 3 (3 times), scrifte b 69, fredome 3, ȝete 13, but domesdei 72,
sunnedei 61, gast 87, 100, scrift b 67, atter b 106, non 71, smel b 112,
without inflection. Plural n. a. of masculines, -es, daȝes 98, sunbendes b 67, but euencristene b 96
with adj. termination; neuters n. are deor 28, 33, weord b 14,
beode 80 (gebedu), but þinges b 80, with masc. termination;
beoden b 29, clusterlokan 41, deoflen 21, 43, 48, weak forms; a.
hors b 37, weord 65, but huses b 36, weordes b 16 (4), wifes b 37, treon
12; d. -es, rapes b 12, weorkes 67,
-weorkes 94, weordes b 94, but manaðas b
34, treon 13 (? trēum). Of the feminines mihte 92, 94, 95 has
added e in the nom., bisocnie 80 represents -socn. The
other cases end in -e, s. g.
dede b 54, but weorldes b 100, a masc. form; s. d. ireste
77, weorlde b 91, but irest 5, sea 24, 27, b 84 (sǣ);
s. a. reste 7 (5), but rest 6, sea 24; pl. n. ehte b
105, saule 19, but gleden 35, saulen 6; pl. d. pine 27, 97, saule
7, 73, but honden 14, pinan 36, 37, sunnen b 32 (3); pl. a. laȝe
59, b 28, pine 57, saule b 98, but laȝen 46, pinen 39, saulen 14, 22,
sunnen b 62 (3) are weak forms. Nouns of the weak declension have -e in all cases of the singular, n.
crabbe b 84; g. heorte b 53; d. chirche b 28; a.
nome b 96: the plural has -en, n.
crabben b 84, neddren 26, b 82, but neddre b 91; d. eȝen 15,
haleȝen 68; a. eren b 27, but licome 31. Minor
411
declensions: fet pl. d. 14, 28, 64 (possibly sing.); mon
s. n. 42 (3), s. a. 43, b 66, men pl. n.
b 33, monne pl. d. 32, 74, 83, men 31, wepmen 93, wifmen 93,
wimmen b 113; boc s. d. b 7; mus pl. a. b 113; þruh
s. d. b 60; niht s. a. 30; feder
s. n. b 120, fedre s. d. 99; moder
s. n. b 88; breðre pl. n. 72; children pl. a.
b 37.
The weak declension of adjectives has -e throughout the singular, n. m. alde 44, b
87, halie b 121, f. leofe b 88, foaȝe b 119, blake b 120,
neut. faȝe b 91; d. m. ȝunge b 87, halie 87, 100,
ufele 42, f. eche b 98, stronge b 106, neut. halie b 17;
a. f. muchele b 36. The only exception is heh
s. n. m. 69. The strong forms are flectionless in the
singular, except s. d. f. halie b 7, b 27, b 75, heuie
b 66, mildere 70, seolcuðre 17 (with heowe neut.), warde 41
(= wardre); s. a. m. sunfulle b 66,
s. a. f. muchele b 15, b 49. The termination of all
cases of the plural, strong and weak, is e; exceptions are blaca b 99, freo b 50, sari
b 56. āgen is represented by aȝene s. a. f. 34,
pl. 23, 35, b 98: ān, nān appear as an n.
45, 50, b 84, on 43, nan 42, b 69, naþing 79; ane d. m. b 8,
a. m. 40, ene b 45, an 16, ane a. f. 20, b 9, an
a. neut. 49, nan 51, na b 101. Adjectives used as nouns are deade
s. d. b 59, fulle s. a. b 104, god 48, 52, b
101, sunfulle pl. d. b 76, pl. a. 11: nouns as adjectives,
erming 6, 22, 31, 96, liȝere 53, wrecche 7, 11, 13: hindene b 116 has
pl. adj. termination. Noteworthy among numerals are þridde 25,
95, fifte 26, siste 26, seofeþe 26 (seofoþa).
The personal pronouns are ic, we, us, þu, ȝe, eow, heow b 21, how b
118. The pronoun of the third person is s. n. he m.
13, heo f. 50, 86, 91 (dei like L. dies is fm.), b 88, b 104, hit neut.
10, d. him m. 12, 13, hire f. 91, a. hine
m. b 10 (4), heo f. 50, hit neut. 2, pl. n.
hi b 93, heo 8 (10), ha 21, b 15, d. heom 9, 56, b 39, ham 70, b
117, a. heon b 98 (for heom), ham 36, 39. Reflexives are ham 5,
heom 94, heom seoluen b 117, b 118; definitive, seolf 76, 83;
possessives, mine s. a. f. 63, pl. a. 58, þin
s. n. m. 60, 69, þines s. g. m. b 62,
þine s. d. m. 66, b 63, s. d. f. 67,
pl. d. 66, his 34, hire 20, ure 55, 83, heore 6 (5), hare 31. The
definite article is s. n. þe m. 4, f. 25, þet
neut. 25 &c., þat 25, g. þes m. 4, f. b
100, neut. 68, d. þam m. 41, 87, þan 3 (6), þen 61,
69, þon 5, þe b 8 (4), þa 3, þare f. b 98, þere b 60, b 84, b
103, þer 15, b 106, þe 15, þan neut. b 17, þon 23, þa b 111, þe
15, a. þenne m. 75, þene 90, 97, b 59, þon 88, þe b 24, þa
f. 20, b 32, þe 24, þet neut. b 70 (with scrift
m.), pl. n. þa, 5, 6, b 79, d. þam 7 (4), þan 13,
32, þa 14 (4), þe 15, a. þa 11 &c.: þet 8, b 35, b 47, b 51,
b 114, b 115, b 116, is demonstrative. The article is also used as
antecedent to relatives, þeo þe b 19, þa þe b 39, they who. The compound
demonstrative is s. n. þis m. b 84, þes b 31, þis
neut. b 91, þas b 73 (comp. 13/43), d. þisse m. b
10 (3), þis b 77, þisse f. 54, b 91, neut. 31, a.
þeos m. b 81, þas f. b 36, þis neut. b 39, pl.
n. þas 30, b 90, þos
412
b 95, b 99, þeos b 14, b 33, b 105, d. þas b 113, a. 57,
65, þes b 100. The relative is mostly þe, but ꝥ 43 (6), þet b 106:
interrogatives are hwa s. n. 7, 73, hwet 44, hwat, ꝥ b 78,
hwilc s. n. b 21, wulc b 20, whulche pl. n. b 80,
correlative swilc 21, b 40, swulc b 85: ilca is ilke
s. d. 27, pl. n. 30, ilca pl. d. 31.
Indefinites are hwa 6, hwa efre 97; me 36, b 9, mon 98, b 24; sume
s. d. 9, sum s. a. 95, summe pl. n. 14,
28; oðer s. d. neut. 50, eoðre 45, oðre pl. d. 27, b
35, oðer pl. a. 97; ulcne s. a. b 66; uwilc
s. n. 85, uwilche pl. d. 74, uwilc 83, uwilcan
s. n. 17 (gehwilc ān); eani 18, 48, efreni 27; monie
pl. b 113; alle s. d. f. 5 (4), al
s. a. m. b 81, s. a. neut. 90, b 39, alle
pl. n. 17 (4), alra pl. g. b 46, alremest b 35, alle
pl. d. 27, alla b 76, alle pl. a. b 121.
The infinitive ends regularly in en; locan 86, 91, iþolie b 11 are
the only exceptions; verbs of the second weak conjugation have -ien, iðolien 40, lokien 46, and six others;
exceptions are enden 32, iloken 85, sceawen b 21. Dative infinitives
with inflection are to bihaldene 18, to brekene 30, to demene 89, to
swimminde b 86, uninflected are to haliȝen 74, to wurðien 75 (virtual
nominatives), for to lokien 9, for to arisen b 40 and ten others in
piece xi with for to, to draȝen b 117 and fifteen others with to.
Presents are s. 1. bidde 60, iseo 58; 2. bringest b 63, leist b
60; 3. bicherreð b 112, wuneð b 91, exceptional are bitacnet b 74,
speked 37, speket b 92, contracted forms as beot 98, bret b 111 amount
to one-third of the total number; pl. 1. cumeð b 58, slage we b
57, tuneð b 44; 2. habbeð 73, b 20; 3. beoreð b 82, wepeð 34, and of the
second weak conjugation, iblissieð 5, lokieð b 115, smurieð b 114,
wunieð b 80; subjunctive s. 2. ȝefe 60, 69, milcie 68; 3. ibureȝe
36, iknawe b 24, icnawe b 25, cume 61, 69, forhoȝie b 25, ilokie 97,
trukie b 105; pl. 1. tunen b 44: imperative s. 2. aris 70,
haue 39, iscild b 121, swim b 88, tech b 89; pl. 2. ihereð b 79.
Past of Strong Verbs: Ia. s. 3. cweð 45 (3), iseh 48: Ib.
s. 3. com 10 (3), bicom b 9, nom b 10: Ic. s. 3. biwon 7,
73, gon 65, bigon 54, b 89, swam b 90, warp 16; pl. 3. urnen 20:
II. s. 3. scean 29; pl. 3. swiken 30: III. s. 3.
abeh 64: IV. s. 3. stod b 7: V. s. 3. het 9, weop 55.
Participles present: Ib. dalneominde 99: Ic. beorninde 12, berninde
16 (3): II. glidende 35; past: Ia. ibeden 71, geuen b 49, b 102, ispeken b
77: Ic. biwunden b 79, idoluen b 46: III. icorene pl. 68: IV.
idreȝen b 70, istonde b 9: V. ahonge 14, 19, ihaten 4, b 52. Past of
Weak Verbs: s. 3. ferde 10, ledde 50, sende 88, escade 44, 49,
onswerede 70, onswerde 57, sceawede 12 (7), sceaude 16, hefde b 69, b
70, hefede b 8, seide 59, b 87; pl. 3. ledden 44, 49. Participles
present: graninde 33, liuiende 42, wuniende 12, 53; past: afered b 104,
ibet b 62, forgult 22, iherd b 20, iherð 73, b 77, isceaweð b 49, iseit
b 14, ise[i]t 82, isend b 39, iwrat 79; fotetd 28 is participial in
form; inflected are aweriede
413
b 29, blessede b 19, iclepede b 110, forgulte 73, isende b 73. Minor
Groups: witen inf. 7, 58, wat pr. s. 62, witeð 2 pr.
pl. imp. b 118, b 119, wiste pt. s. 51, biwisten pt.
pl. 21; aȝen 1 pr. pl. 90, b 65; sceal 1 pr. s. 62,
scal b 89, sculen 1 pr. pl. b 21, sceolde pt. s. b 13,
scolde b 111; mei pr. s. b 103, b 107, maȝen 1 pr. pl. 40,
b 50, 2 pr. pl. 65, 92, pr. pl. b 101, mihte pt. s.
42, b 11; to beon dat. inf. b 49, is pr. s. 60, nis b 69,
bið 53, b 59, beoð 1 pr. pl. b 56, pr. pl. 34 (5), beon b
19, beo pr. s. subj. 79, 84, beo 2 pr. pl. subj. b 119,
pr. pl. subj. 99, wes pt. s. 8, nes 52, weren pt.
pl. 17 (4), were 11, nere 23, were pt. s. subj. 44, nere b
70; wulle 1 pr. s. 62, wule pr. s. 6, nulle 85, nule b 28,
b 67, wulleð 1 pr. pl. 2, wuleð 2 pr. pl. 1, walde pt.
s. 46, nalde 46, nalden pt. pl. 32; don inf. 48,
dat. inf. b 101, deð pr. s. 29, deað b 58, do we 1 pr.
pl. b 44, doð pr. pl. b 34, fordoð b 81, idon pp. b
69; gan inf. 42, 43, eode pt. s. 10, eoden pt.
pl. 9.
With ȝette adv. 19, comp. ‘ȝiete,’ OEH i. 139/13, ȝetten
64/54; mid prep. 65 with accusative is Anglian (Napier, Anglia,
x. 138): leste conj. b 104 (þȳ lǣs þe) is an early
instance of the compound.
Dialect: These pieces were copied by the scribe of the PM in
the same MS. As was said at p. 327, he
belonged to the Southern border of the Midland area. On the evidence of
the spoilt rhymes in the Pater Noster, inne : sunne, OEH i. 55/23, 24 (4
times), linnen : sunnen, id. 67/230, 231, he must be located to the West
of that area, where u was the representative of OE. y,
ȳ.
In the present articles his exemplars were in the South-Western
dialect. That of piece x was considerably the older, probably of the
early transition period about the beginning of the twelfth century, as
is evident from the archaic forms which have survived in the copy. There
is no trace of these in piece xi, the original of which was probably
little older than the copy. As in the copy of the Poema Morale, the
scribe’s alterations affect mainly the sounds; the grammar remains
Southern; a Midland form like beon b 19 is isolated.
Vocabulary: The foreign element is small; most of the
Romance words are in piece xi. French are archangel 8, blanchet b 114,
castles b 38, feble b 9, glutenerie b 34 (first appearance), grace b 49,
lechurs b 117, manere b 84, prophete b 7, b 43, sacreð b 76, sacramens b
75, salmes 47, seint b 22, merci 39, meister 21, meistres 23, ureisuns b
75: Latin, apostles 88, sancte 8; mihhal 8 is probably a direct
borrowing from the Vulgate Michahel. Scandinavian are caste b 10, icast
b 68, griðe 80.
Introduction: The ultimate sources of this discourse are (i)
the Legend of S. Paul’s visit to the other world, and (ii) the Sunday
Letter as extended by the addition of the Dignatio diei Dominicae.
414
(1) S. Paul in his second epistle to the Corinthians, xii. 2-4, said
that he had been caught up to the third heaven and heard words
unspeakable. But a detailed account of what he saw, partly drawn from
the Revelation of Peter (ed. M. R. James, p. 65) and coloured by
Egyptian ideas of the other world, was extensively circulated in the
early Church, and existed in two Greek versions as early as the fourth
century. One of these, the Ἀναβατικὸν Παύλου, is lost, but it
is probably represented in a Latin version discovered by Dr. M. R. James
and published in Texts and Studies, ii. no. 3. The other younger Greek
version, denounced by S. Augustine as ‘nescio quibus fabulis plenam’
(iii. 541 e), was printed by Tischendorf in Apocalypses Apocryphae,
34-69: he dates it about 380 A.D.
There is an early Syriac version, an English translation of which is
reprinted by Tischendorf under the Greek Text.
The Latin version already mentioned is the most ancient and the
fullest form of the legend, and it is the main source of the Latin
mediaeval versions, which have been classed by Brandes in six
redactions. Of these the first alone contains an account of S. Paul’s
visit to heaven, the others describe only the abode of the lost. The
fourth redaction (B iv) printed in Brandes, Visio Pauli, 75, in the
Cologne edition of Beda, vii. 362, as one of his sermons, and by P.
Meyer from a Toulouse MS. of the fourteenth century in Romania, xxiv.
365, appears to be the main source of most of the versions in the modern
languages, as of our text. Meyer enumerates twenty-three MSS. of it; he
thinks that it is not anterior to the twelfth century and that it was
widely circulated in England. In Notices et Extraits, xxxv. 153, he
gives a list of six versions in French: (1) by Henri d’Arci, there
printed; (2) by Adam de Ros, trouvère anglais, printed by Ozanam in
Dante et la philosophie catholique, 1845, p. 425; (3) Anonymous, MS.
Bibl. Nat. 2094, of which Brandes cites the beginning and end, p. 51;
(4) Anonymous, B.M.
Add. 15606, printed in part in Romania, vi. 11-16; (5) by
Geoffroi de Paris, an adaptation of the preceding; (6) by an anonymous
English trouvère, printed in Romania, xxiv. 357. The English versions in
verse are (1) MS. Laud 108, Bodleian, printed by Horstman in Archiv lii.
35; (2a) MS. Jesus Coll. Oxford E 29, printed in OEM 147-155;
(2b) MS. Digby 86, Bodleian, printed by Horstman in Archiv lxii.
403; (3) Vernon MS. Bodleian, in OEM 223-232 and ES i. 293-299; (4) MS.
Douce 302, Bodleian, in OEM 210-222. There is, besides the present
article, a fourteenth-century prose version printed in ES xxii. 134. The
relations of the English and French versions are determined by Brandes
in ES vii. 34.
Some references in the older literature should be noticed. Ælfric
(Hom. Cath. ii. 332) calls the legend a lying composition, and proceeds
to tell that
415
of Fursey as true. The writer of the Blickling Homilies (43, 45) relates
the episode of the wicked bishop, following a text closely resembling
the oldest Latin version, which differs little from the Greek at this
point. In a second passage, 209/29-211/7, he has combined vague
recollections of the legend with scenery drawn from Beowulf (see the
Preface to BH, pp. vi, vii).
The first part of the present article differs from B iv and agrees
with F iii in substituting smoke (‘smorðer,’ l. 26) for fulgur; with F
iii it omits the Fiery Wheel and the Bridge of Dread, and the punishment
of usurers by name. It is therefore possible that it and F iii had a
common source. But our author has exercised a free choice in details; he
says nothing of the punishment of the unchaste child murderers, of the
oppressors of widows and orphans, of those who broke their fast before
due time, and of those in the pit; nothing of the vision of sinful and
righteous souls borne through the air; all of which are in B iv. His own
fantasy is probably responsible for the division of the torments of the
furnace, l. 24, between the furnace, the fount of fire and the sea of
hell, and for the pleading of S. Paul in ll. 56-72, which are without
parallel in any of the other versions.
(2) The Sunday Letter was a fiction which originated in the south of
France or northern Spain towards the end of the sixth century. It
purported to be a letter, which had fallen from heaven, written in Latin
by Christ’s own hand, denouncing judgement on those who did not observe
Sunday rightly. It had great vogue in England before the Conquest, and
furnished material for the homilies printed in Wulfstan, ed. Napier,
nos. 43, 44, 45, 47, in Otia Merseiana i. 129, and in An Eng.
Miscellany, 357. Latin versions are printed in the two last-named. Our
author makes only general reference to it in 78/75-85, but ll. 85-91 are
taken directly from a Dignatio diei Dominicae which is sometimes
associated with it, and is found separately in the Pseudo-Augustine
Sermons clxvii, cclxxx, and Alcuin, ed. Froben, ii. 487. It is also
added to one MS. of the Visio Pauli (Brandes, 102), and it precedes the
German version which he prints at p. 83. It also forms the subject of
the fourteenth homily in OEH i. 139.
1. Leofemen: like ‘Men
þa leofestan’ of the Blickling Homilies: the writer also uses, ‘Gode
men.’ But ‘Lordinges and leuedis,’ 215/31 is French = Seingnurs &
dames. ȝe willeliche: Zupitza prints ȝewilleliche (adv.,
meaning gladly), and the separation of the words in the manuscript is of
no weight against it. But the prefix ge is in this text commonly
reduced to i, and ȝewilleliche occurs nowhere else and has
nothing to correspond in OE., the forms in which are willīce,
willendlīce, while willeliche is in AR 396/20. ȝe is
probably a repetition of the preceding by
416
mistake for ec, which very frequently goes with and in these homilies
(comp. 76/4, 78/68).
2. hit belongs to
lusten as well as to understonden; comp. ‘þe luste nulleð þesne red,’
OEH i. 63/161, and for the postponement of hit, ‘Al hit us mei
rede ⁊ to lare ȝif we wulleð,’ id. i. 15/5, where to goes with rede.
3. fredome: the Latin
version in Harley 2851 has for title Priuilegia diei dominice.
4. blisse &c.: see
78/77.
6. erming, only here
and at 76/22, 31 as adjective, for the usual armliche. OE.
earming, a miserable person. rest of: comp. 78/96; ‘þæt is
sio an ræst eallra urra geswinca,’ Boethius, 144/27; ‘hwonne him lifes
weard, | frea ælmihtig frecenra siða | reste aȝeafe,’ Genesis, 1426;
‘lagosiða rest,’ id. 1486. Rare in ME., but for the verb comp. ‘thei
rest of her traueilis,’ Apoc. xiv. 13 (Purvey).
7. to soþe &c.: see
90/73 note.
8. þet wes: comp. 1/10,
where the verb is plural.
10. hu—ferde,
how things went on there: ‘quia deus voluit ut Paulus videret penas
inferni,’ B iv. 75/5. Mihhal—wuniende, there is nothing
corresponding in B iv, but James has, ‘dixit [angelus] mihi: Veni et
sequere me, et ostendam tibi animas impiorum et peccatorum ut cognoscas
qualis sit locus,’ 28/17, and Adam de Ros, ‘Seint michiel en ueit auant
| Sein pol ses hores disant,’ Ward, ii. 410.
15, 16. eȝen:
probably a mistake for eren (= ‘auribus’ B iv), as Kölbing pointed out
in ES xxii. 137. hefede, by the hair, ‘capillis.’ heorte:
a strange substitution for ‘brachiis’ of B iv.
16. ouen—leies:
‘fornacem ignis ardentem per septem flammas in diversis coloribus,’ B
iv. he, i.e. ouen; if not a mistake for þe, a striking example of
parataxis.
17. eateliche to bi
haldene: comp. ‘eatolice on to seonne,’ Beda, 240/21; the dat.
inf. answers to the L. supine as in terribilis aspectu. In sead
. . . to iseonne, 133/30, it corresponds to the genitive
of the L. gerund, aspiciendi.
18. strengre: see
21/94 note, and comp. ‘ne geþæncaþ hio na, hu
strang hit biþ an helle to bionne,’ Wulfstan, 225/12.
21. meister deoflen,
principal devils: for this use of meister comp. KH 642 note. They are
not in B iv, but F iv has ‘Soignours, an l’apre fornoise habitent · vij
· delo[u]rs | · vij · diable l’atisent: cest lor maistre labours | Et ·
vij · flames an issent de diverses colours.’ swilc, as if; OE.
swilce, conj.; comp. ‘He . . . geseah |
modiglice menn on merebate | sittan siðfrome swylce hie ofer sæ comon,’
Andreas, 247; ‘mon geseah swelce hit
417
wære an gylden hring on heofonum,’ Orosius, 234/8; ‘þe king Leir iwerðe
swa blac; swlch hit a blac cloð weoren,’ L 3069. Swylc
swa is also found with the same conjunctive sense, ‘þyslic me is
gesewen . . . þis andwearde lif . . . swylc swa þu
æt swæsendum sitte,’ Beda, 134/24. For swilc swa, such as, 76/29,
see 34/80 note.
24. þe sea of helle:
B iv has ‘Et septem plage erant in circuitu eius (i.e. fornacis): prima
nix, secunda glacies’ &c. The writer or his original has changed
these plagues of the furnace into waves ‘uþe’ of the ‘flumen orribile in
quo multe bestie dyabolice erant quasi pisces in medio maris,’ which is
mentioned at a later point in the Latin, while he alters the river into
a lake, perhaps due to a recollection of the ‘stagnum ignis et
sulphuris’ of the Apocalypse, xx. 9.
25. snau: comp.
120/100.
26. smorðer, thick
smoke: B iv has ‘sexta fulgur’; F iv ‘Et la siste de foudres et
d’avenimemant.’ F iii agrees with the English text. ful stunch:
comp. 46/277; 133/44.
28. unaneomned,
without a name, because they were like nothing in this world; not
‘unmentionable, on account of their number,’ Morris. There is no
description of the beasts in the Latin, but such details are to be found
elsewhere in the Visions literature, e.g. Visio Tnugdali, 16/7, 17,
19/26.
31. to brekene:
dative infinitive: OE. swīcan, geswīcan, to cease from,
are often constructed with dative of nouns, as, ‘gif he ðonne ðære
hnappunge ne swicð,’ Cura Past., 195/11, but apparently not with the
dat. inf. This construction is common with analogous verbs such as
onginnan, forlǣtan, ieldan. In ME. the dative of
the noun occurs, as ‘þa aswac worden; Merlin þe wise,’ L
16112; and the gen., ‘iswikeð unrihtwisra dedan,’ OEH i. 117/32 as in
OE., ‘ðæs noldan geswican,’ BH 211/6. Comp. 81/85, 6.
þe—nalden: ‘qui non egerunt penitenciam post peccata
commissa in hoc mundo,’ B iv. 75/14.
32. enden: see
80/54.
33. lude remeð:
‘ululant’; comp. 120/99, 192/528.
34. his, each of them
his; distributive in meaning.
37. Miserere &c.:
possibly from some unprinted version of the Visio, or from some version
of the Evangelium Nichodemi; comp. The Harrowing of Hell, ed. Hulme,
18/203.
39. ham: the writer
frequently doubles the subject or object by a pronoun; comp. ‘ꝥ ic hit
efre dude mid mine wrechede licome þas sunnen,’ OEH i. 29/9; ‘þe mon þe
leie · xii · moneð in ane prisune nalde he ȝefen,’ id. 33/9; ‘Gif þu
hine iseȝe þet he wulle,’ id. 17/13. See also 78/97 note; 136/144;
138/12.
418
41. midde warðe: OE.
middeweard is usually an adjective, occasionally a noun: it is
probably adj. here, and miswritten for middewarðre. Comp. ‘In mideward
þe felde,’ KH, O 574. clusterlokan is explained as ‘enclosures,’
Morris; ‘cloisters,’ Strat.-Bradley. The corresponding passage in B iv
appears to be, ‘Et ostendit illi puteum signatum ·vij· sigillis et ait
illi: Sta longe ut possis sustinere fetorem hunc,’ and the meaning,
fastening, lock, seems most appropriate here. The word is OE.
clūstorloc: comp. Pogatscher, §§ 179, 182; L. L.
claustella, pl. of claustellum, is glossed clusterlocæ, Sweet,
Oldest E. Texts, 50/220; hæpsan, loca, Napier, OE. Glosses, 106/4003;
clustello, loce, fæstene, id. 136/5936. The metrical versions have
‘seals,’ except the Jesus MS., ‘Seoue duren þer beoþ on’; OEM 153/235
and the second prose version renders, ‘a put ylokke wiþ seuen lockes,’
ES xxii. 136/53. Comp. also, ‘Til he vnclustri al þe lokes | þat liif
ligges vnder,’ ES ix. 441/59, 60.
42. þar neh, near
that place; an expression of rare occurrence; comp. ‘magas þa þe þær
neah wæron,’ BH 139/16.
44. escade . . . to:
see 77/49; a rare construction, not in OE., and probably influenced by
F. demander à; comp. ‘Huet may þe zone betere acsy to his uader þanne
bread,’ Ayenbite, 110/14: analogous is, ‘fulluht we to þe ȝeorneð,’ L
29473. But at is older, ‘hwæt axast ðu æt us,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 74/112,
and of is in Layamon, ‘he axede gauel of þan londe,’ 6122. Comp.
‘þretest to,’ 155/83.
45. In the Latin and the
other versions the bad bishop is not in the ‘puteus,’ but in another
place of less torment; there he is ‘avarus et dolosus et superbus,’ here
he is specialized into one who iniquitously vexed his tenants and
dependants by legal proceedings and steady oppression. So the Monk of
Eynsham saw a bishop grievously tormented ‘quod placitoris loco inter
saeculares iudices consedere plurimum delectari soleret, multis etiam
bona conscientia nitentibus in litigantibus violentus contra iustitiam
oppressor exstiterit,’ 698/5. Some contemporary is here meant, such as
Gilbert Glanville, Roffensis (Godwin, De Presulibus, i. 572), or perhaps
the earlier Gerard of York (id. ii. 27; Mapes, De Nugis Curialium, 224).
The haughty maiden of ll. 50-54 is not in the Latin; in all probability
she is drawn from the life.
46. lokien: ‘non
custodivit legem dei,’ B iv. 77/21; see 4/20 and comp. ‘witen,’
77/58.
49. swiðe
unbisorȝeliche, with great want of care, consideration, like ‘mid
mycelre reþnesse,’ said of the bishop’s treatment by the devils in BH
43/29.
52. Elmesȝeorn, fond
of giving alms, benevolent; OE. ælmes-georn:
419
it occurs here only in ME. prud . . . ⁊ modi: comp. 3/4; ‘So modi
and so prute,’ OEM 82/300.
53. wreðful ⁊ ontful:
comp. 56/31.
55. forð mid,
together with: see 1/19 note. of,
from: a common use with dative in OE.; comp. ‘Peahte ðeod com of Scyþþia
lande on scipum,’ Bede, 28/7.
56. on þunres liche,
in the likeness of thunder: the alteration of the MS. reading wunres is
due to Morris, but the resultant meaning is unsatisfactory. He
suggested, on þunres sleȝe, comparing ‘þær com swylce þunres slege,’ Ev.
Nichod. ed. Thwaites, 13/3, and the expression occurs in ME. ‘ofdradd of
ðese muchele ðþunresleiȝ ðe cumþ ut of godes auȝene muðe,’ VV 11/18. The
writer has elsewhere, ‘Vre drihten wile cumen dredliche in fures liche,’
OEH i. 143/15, which may suggest the true reading here. The Latin has
‘deus descendit de celo et dyadema in capite eius’; possibly crunes
lurks under wunres.
60. toȝeines,
adv., in reply: him depends directly on seide, as
in ‘ic eou habbe þet godspel iseid,’ OEH i. 5/13; ‘heom seggen godes
lore,’ id. 7/33, though the construction with to is also found in these
homilies. Comp. ‘Cuðberhtus him togeanes cwæð,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. ii.
138/34. But the word is generally a preposition, as at 64/56, 86/142.
ȝef—is: see 134/84.
61. la hwure, ah! at
any rate. This writer uses La mostly with interrogatives, ‘La hu
ne beað,’ 89/34; ‘Lahwet scal þis beon,’ 89/36. a þet: see
72/179 note.
63. efterward, in
quest of, seeking; = ‘efter’ 7/53; comp. ‘þat ha beon þe lasse afterward
swuch þing,’ HM 37/7; ‘Iohannes . . . wearð him æfterweard,’
Ælf. de Novo Testamento, 18/21. Similar uses of the compound in the
sense of the simple preposition are, ‘al urommard þisse,’ AR 178/18;
58/66 note; 70/165: ‘They met Beues inwarde the paleys,’ Beues of
Hamtoun, 69/1208; ‘alysde of þam witum ða þe towearde wæron,’ Wulfstan,
228/11. Similarly ‘þu most beon on ward þine sunnen,’ OEH i. 37/20
appears to mean, thou must give attention to thy sins.
64. swiðe wa: see
40/181 note and comp. ‘Ofte hadde horn beo wo
| At neure wurs þan him was þo,’ KH 115, where him shows that horn is
dative. abeh &c.: ‘Post hoc prostravit se Michahel et Paulus
et angelorum milia milium ante filium dei,’ B iv.
66. for, by: comp.
94/26.
68. þes þe redþer,
the sooner on that account, the sooner. The more regular comparison is
seen in, ‘ah þes þe we heoueden mare wele on þisse liue, þes we ahte to
beon þe edmoddre,’ OEH i. 5/27, 21/12.
420
69. a þet: see
72/179 note.
71. non, three
o’clock, when the Sunday festival began; ‘ab hora nona sabbati usque in
prima hora secunde ferie,’ B iv. 79/21; ‘fram nóntide þæs sæternesdæges
oð monandæges lihtincge,’ Wulfstan, 207/11. a þa: see 72/179 note.
72. þet efre forð,
for all future time: for þet, until, see 72/179 note; it is so used especially when aþet, or
aþa precedes it; comp. ‘a þet ic beo ealdre oðer þet ic beo sec,’ OEH i.
23/3. forð, right onwards, develops the meaning, continuously,
ever; comp. ‘ðat we moten forð mid ȝew on blisse wuniȝen,’ VV 21/24,
25/12, 113/16.
74. mucheles, by
much; an adverbial genitive, mostly used in comparative phrases, as,
‘mucheles þe swuðere,’ AR 368/6; ‘mucheles þe more,’ OEM 86/74; ‘se læce
bið micles to bald,’ Cura Past., 60/2.
75. for—seið:
‘Hanc epistolam scripsit dominus Iesus Xristus manibus suis,’ Sunday
Letter in An Eng. Misc., p. 400. The Latin quotations which follow are
probably from some redaction or expansion of the same fiction.
79. Ne beo &c.:
‘nec aliud faciatis in die dominico nisi sacerdotibus meis seruiatis,’
An Eng. Misc., 403.
80. bisocnie, visit,
frequenting; elsewhere, petition, request: Mätzner compares ON.
kirkju-sókn: see chirchsocne 82/4; hamsocne 12/9.
82. iset, miswritten
for iseit, translating ‘dicitur.’
85. iloken, observe,
from the idea of keeping guard over something; comp. 116/156.
86. ester dei:
‘Dominicum ergo diem Apostoli . . . religiosa sollemnitate habendum
sanxerunt, quia in eodem Redemptor noster a mortuis resurrexit,’
Pseudo-August. Sermo cclxxx; ‘dies clarus in quo resurrexit Dominus a
morte . . . in quo Spiritus sanctus descendit in Apostolos et
in quo speramus Dominum nostrum . . . ad judicium venturum,’
id. Sermo clxvii. Comp. Wulfstan 219/27-29, 230/26-28; 294/5-12; Alcuin,
ii. 488; OEH i. 143/7.
91. hafð mid hire,
there is inherent in it.
92. mihte, virtues,
the power to accomplish certain purposes.
93. eorðe þrelles: a
combination after the pattern of eorðwaru, as in ‘Sunne dei
blisseð togederes houeneware ⁊ horðeware,’ OEH i. 139/22: not ‘slaves,’
Morris, but said of men generally as enslaved by earthly pursuits; comp.
14/54-56.
94. heom: the corrupt
reading of the MS. perhaps points to he heom as the original; see
77/39 note. Comp. ‘þe sonenday is best of alle |
þanne aungles habbuz heore pley,’ Archiv lii. 35, the Latin has only ‘in
quo [die] gaudent angeli et archangeli maior diebus ceteris.’
421
96. ireste . . . of:
comp. 76/6.
97. Whosoever then observes
Sunday . . . let them be participators &c., is a sentence of much
the same type as, ‘Se þe Drihten ondræde herie hine, eall Iacobes cynn,’
Psalter, ed. Thorpe, xxi. 21; 77/39. Morris suggests the change of heo
to he, but singular and plural in these texts often alternate: for
beo, pl. subj., see 82/119. þa oðer halie daȝes:
the feast-days of obligation.
100. abuten ende:
see 34/85 note.
Literature: ... Bedae Opera
Historica
text unchanged, but work cited spells it “Baedae”
w is added ... ġ is
ȝ
“ȝ” misprinted as bold instead of italic
Accidence: ... monedeis
72;
72:
The weak declension ... strong and weak, is
e;
e,
The personal pronouns ... (dei like L. dies
is fm.)
L dies
(1) S. Paul in ... One of these, the
Ἀναβατικὸν Παύλου, is lost
Παύλου is
represented in a Latin version
Version
The Latin version ... (4) Anonymous, B.M.
Add. 15606
B M
Manuscript: As for piece x.
Editions: Morris, R., OEH i. 47-53, and Specimens,
21-25.
Literature: Cohn, O., Die Sprache in der me.
Predigtsammlung der Hs. Lambeth 487, Berlin, 1880.
Phonology &c.: See piece x, pp. 407, 410, 413.
Introduction: No source has been found for this singular
piece, which, in its treatment of Jeremiah in the pit as the type of the
unshriven sinner, differs from the usual mystical interpretations of
this episode in the life of the prophet. So Adam of Prémontré, ‘Pax
tibi, o sanctificate in utero, virgo et sacerdos Dei, o Jeremia
sanctissime! quem de lacu lutoso et funes et panni levant veteres, quia
sanctos Dei ab aeterno ad vitam ab ipso praedestinatos de sordido vitae
praesentis profundo et sacrae Scripturae praecepta et sancta elevant
exempla,’ De triplici genere Contemplationis, Migne, P. L.,
cxcviii., col. 824. So for S. Gregory, the ropes are ‘praecepta
Dominica,’ the old rags, ‘antiquorum patrum exempla,’ Moralia, xxv. 7,
and the interpretation of Hugh of S. Victor, ii. 256, is similar.
The homily consists of two parts, very dissimilar in style and
discordant in tone; the joint is plainly discernible at 81/76. The first
part is an earnest insistence on the necessity of sacramental
confession, a question much debated at the time of this sermon and
after, till it was finally disposed of by the fourth Lateran Council in
1215 A.D. The passages in Latin, like
81/64, do not necessarily imply a Latin original, they are rather
headings of the divisions of the discourse, which is probably an effort
of the writer’s own ingenuity in support of his favourite contention. It
contains no hint of the crabs and other ‘wurmes’ of the pit. The second
part reads like a translation; it has all the vivacity and simple
directness of the contemporary French Sermo ad Populum. Its leading idea
was probably suggested by the famous apologue in the legend of Barlaam
of
422
the man who, pursued by a furious unicorn, fell into a well tenanted by
a dragon, a four-headed snake, and two mice. This story was used by
Eudes de Cheriton, p. 217, and Jacques de Vitry, no. cxxxiv.
The thirty-third Homily in OEH ii. should be compared with this
second part: it is in the same style, if not by the same author.
1. The Latin is based on
Jeremiah xxxviii. 6-13, but there is no authority in that place for the
second sentence and the first half of the fourth. Comestor adds to the
Scripture narrative, ‘et erat propheta in luto usque ad guttur.’
7. ꝥ = þet: see 76/8,
25.
8. ⁊ ꝥ, and what is
more, and indeed: comp. 80/33; OEH i. 121/9.
12. claðes:
‘veteres pannos et antiqua quae computruerant,’ Jer. xxxviii. 11.
15. bitacnunge,
spiritual meaning, allegorical significance.
17. fuliwis: see
32/40. almihtin, comp. 51/337: according to NED., it owes its
n to imitation of drihtin: Morsbach, ME. Gram. 95/4 sets it down
to late OE. acc. ælmihtigne.
18. Beati &c.:
S. Luke xi. 28.
23. Alanus de Insulis,
Opera, ed. Visch, 78, has the same words as a quotation without naming
the author. S. Gregory, Regula Pastoralis, pars iii. ch. 34 and in four
other places, quotes 2 Pet. ii. 21 thus, ‘Melius enim eis non cognoscere
viam justitiae, quam post agnitionem retrorsum converti ab eo quod illis
traditum est.’
25. þe: miswritten
for þen; see 80/39: þet, from the preceding clause, is to be
understood with it.
26. ‘Qui declinat aures
suas ne audiat legem, oratio eius erit execrabilis,’ Prov. xxviii. 9, is
quoted by S. Gregory, Moral., xvi. ch. 21, with variant ‘aurem suam,’ as
in Codex Amiatinus, and again Moral., x. ch. 15, with ‘avertit aurem
suam.’ Obturat is probably due to ‘Qui obturat aures suas,’ Isa.
xxxiii. 15, also quoted by S. Gregory, Op. i. 755.
28. þe—beoð,
that proceed from him.
29. unwurðe:
pl. OE. unwierþ, despicable: see 26/258. Puteus
&c. What follows is drawn from S. Augustine’s Enarratio in Psalmum
lxviii. 15, 16, ‘Eripe me de luto ut non infigar: libera me ab iis, qui
oderunt me, et de profundis aquarum. Non me demergat tempestas aquae,
neque absorbeat me profundum: neque urgeat super me puteus os suum,’ on
which part of the comment is, ‘Magnus est puteus profunditas iniquitatis
humanae: illuc quisque si ceciderit, in altum cadet. Sed tamen ibi
positus, si confitetur peccata Deo suo, non super eum claudet puteus os
suum,’ Op. iv1, col. 523, an interpretation adopted by Bede,
viii. 655. The writer
423
of the homily probably had for his immediate source the abbreviated
quotation in the Liber Poenitentialis of Alanus, 195. Comp. OEH ii. 43
for another comment on this passage.
32. heueð sunnen:
see 54/8.
34. glutenerie,
gluttony: OF. glutunerie; apparently here only.
35. ꝥ: comp.
1/10.
37. hames, estates,
possessions, as in ‘hig cípton ealle hira hámas,’ Gen. xlvii. 20 =
‘vendentibus singulis possessiones suas.’
38. tunes,
enclosures, such as parks: comp. OE. dēor-tūn.
39. þe
liggeð—arisen: comp. ‘in quo lacu sunt multi qui se ibi esse
non sentiunt, quia peccata sua non attendunt, nec clamant ad Dominum,’
Beda, viii. 508.
41. propheta, S.
Augustine: the quotation in Alanus is ‘non claudet super te os suum, si
tu non claudas os tuum.’
43. Comp. ‘ne ꝥ þe pit
tune ouer me his muð,’ OEH ii. 43/16.
45. feower daȝes oðer
fiue, for a considerable length of time: comp. ‘Iesus þo his wille
wes · aros from deþe to lyue. | Þeyh hyne bi-wusten knyhtes voure oþer
vyue,’ OEM 52/538.
46. ualleð &c.:
probably suggested by ‘Lacum aperuit, et effodit eum: et incidit in
foveam, quam fecit,’ Ps. vii. 16.
47. him: comp.
2/17, 120/96, 121/132. This dative instead of the possessive adj. is
common with parts of the body affected: in ‘þat his ribbes him to
brake,’ KH 1077 we find both. ꝥ is ꝥ, that means: comp. ‘ꝥ is þet
þe deofel þe geð abutan . . . ꝥ he neure ne maȝe cuman
wið-innan us,’ OEH i. 127/27. þer &c., where he never again
cometh out of penance, i.e. where he must make perpetual expiation
instead of a brief one on earth. For omission of the subject comp. 6/18
and for of = out of, ‘forfaren of ða rihte weiȝe,’ VV 125/30: for bote
comp. 80/58. Morris, in OEH i. 48, translates, ‘from whence he will
never again return to repent,’ joining þer of and taking bote as = to
bote. In Specimens it is taken to mean, ‘therefrom neuer again cometh
help,’ but of should be after bote for that sense, comp. 64/61, 66/116,
and the examples in the note at 1/3, though the prep. is occasionally
awkwardly placed before a noun which it does not govern, as at
84/45,106/210.
51. þreo herde
weies: comp. ‘Tria debent occurrere ad hoc ut vera sit confessio;
scilicet cordis contritio, oris professio, operis satisfactio.
. . . Haec est via trium dierum per quam debemus ire in
solitudinem,’ Alanus, 99. But it is a commonplace: see the Liber
Sacerdotalis on Confession. In a French sermon we find, ‘Vocabatur
[diabolus] primo, gallice “Clocuer,” claudens cor contra contritionem;
secundo “Cloboche,” claudens os contra
424
confessionem; tertio “Cloborse,” claudens bursam contra satisfactionem,’
Hauréau, Notices, iv. 159.
54. dede wel
endinge is wrongly explained in Specimens as = wel dede endinge,
completion or performance of good works. It is a very literal
translation of the Latin phrase, dede, gen. = operis,
wel = satis, endinge = factio. For enden, to perform,
especially of religious observances, comp. 77/32; ‘þat oure louerd hem
ȝeue grace: þis holi dede wel ende,’ E. E. Poems, 47/137.
Cordis &c.: the source of this is unknown to me.
56. þe[nne]: the
correction was perhaps unnecessary, for þe = when, occurs in OEH i.
79/21: possibly in both places þe is for þē = þen.
58. sunbote,
confession, here corresponds to ‘oris confessione’: its more usual
meaning is penance, ‘operis satisfactione,’ as in ‘Alle weldede beoð
freomfulle to sun-bote · ah nan mare freomful denne elmes idal,’ OEH i.
135/29: so ‘bote’ in l. 48 above. In 48/314, ‘cume to bote’ has a more
general sense of, find pardon.
60. þruh, coffin,
not ‘tomb,’ Morris; the burial belongs to the third stage, 81/63.
61. scrift
underuongest, dost undertake, submit to the penance enjoined by the
priest: comp. ‘ær he hæbbe godcunde bote underfangen,’ = ‘antequam
divinam emendationem susceperit,’ Schmid, Gesetze, 178/5.
62. þenne &c.,
when thou hast done penance for thy sins in accordance with the
directions of thy confessor: see 62/30.
63. þine onwalde,
authority, power over thee: þine corresponds to the genitive
which goes with OE. anweald, onweald in the same sense, as
‘onwald . . . ðæs folces,’ Cura Past., 3/5, power over the
nation.
66. heuie is
probably a mistake for heued; comp. 80/32; but ‘heuie sennen,’ OEH ii.
11/29.
67. sunbendes:
‘colligationes impietatis,’ Isa. lviii. 6; comp. 85/100; ‘þeo þat ye
aleseþ here · of heore sunnes bende,’ OEM 55/629. Similarly ‘bendes’
40/188: the verb is common, 135/123; ‘Ðe ilke mann ðe is ibunden mid
heaued-senne,’ VV 101/8; OEM 192/5.
76. in alesnesse,
for the deliverance: in expresses purpose and the noun is
historically accusative; comp. ‘in gemynd þæs wundres,’ Beda,
204/27.
77. þe . . . embe,
about which: comp. 1/3; 89/48; 90/73; 118/44; ‘mast ðar embe spekð,’ VV
101/9. So, þe . . . mide, 79.
80. fower cunnes
wurmes, crawling things of four kinds; in such expressions the
sing. gen. cunnes often displaces the normal plural; comp.
27/295, 88/13, 92/117, 119/90, 124/264, 134/93, 187/358, and contrast
425
‘kunne,’ 132/9 note. So too the predicative ‘manie kinnes,’ of many
kinds, 85/104, 105.
82. ⁊ beoreð, which
carry: parataxis as in 150/27; ‘Euelin iseh enne gume . . . ⁊
bar an his riht hond; ænne stelene brond,’ L 8435.
85. euer, as an
invariable result; comp. 7/69. Connect se mare, the more.
strengðdeð him, exerts himself; comp. ‘⁊ streinþede him by al ys
miht | to serue god,’ Bödd., AE. Dicht. 257/7. to swimminde, in
order to swim, for swimming: corresponding in form to LWS. to
swimmende, alternating with the regular dat. infinitive to
swimmene: comp. ‘to quemende,’ 84/68, 70; ‘to lesende,’ 87/148; ‘to
clensende,’ 87/177. Another exchange of terminations is seen in ‘Hit is
to vnderstondinge þat sir Renaud . . . purchacede’
&c., An Eng. Miscellany, 350/6. The writer has ‘to brekene,’ 76/31,
‘for to lokien,’ 76/9.
86-90. Comp. ‘Ecce quot
laqueos diabolus tendit litteratis et maxime theologis et
predicatoribus, nam subplantatis et dejectis doctoribus facile
deiciuntur discipuli; verum dicitur quod cuidam querenti a cancro cur
non incederet recte sed retrograde, respondit cancer: “Ita didici a
parentibus meis,”’ Jacques de Vitry, xliv. (the Exempla ex Sermonibus
Vulgaribus may have been written as early as 1210 A.D.). The crab is accordingly the type of the
teacher who cannot himself perform what he expects his pupils to do.
90. swam hire,
swam: see 13/34.
92. alse feire . . .
alse, as kindly as if.
93. in—bosme
puten, clasp to their heart, like ‘suo sinu complexuque recipiet,’
Cic. Phil. xiii. 4, 9.
94. to twiccheð,
pluck to pieces, speak censoriously of; like L. vellicare, discerpere.
to draȝeð, rend, practise detraction, L. detrahere.
95. doctores:
perhaps detractores; comp. ‘Detractores, Deo odibiles,’ Rom. i. 30. But
the mother crab was a ‘doctor,’ and eciam here may be
significant.
96. For the absolute use
of bihinden comp. ‘þe ꝥ spekeð faire bi-foren ⁊ false bi-hinden,’
OEH i. 143/25.
97. monslaȝen,
homicides. S. Gregory calls them cannibals, ‘Sciendum quoque est quia hi
etiam qui alienae vitae detractione pascuntur, alienis procul dubio
carnibus satiantur,’ Moralia, xiv. 52.
100.
þes—ehte: read þes weorldes muchele ehte.
101. itimien
represents OE. getīmian, to befall, happen, a meaning which does
not suit here or at 104. The ME. word may here have been influenced by
OWScand. tíma, always used with a negative as in tíma ekki, to grudge
(Egge in Mod. Lang. Notes, i. 131), but his suggestion of
426
a connexion with ‘beteem,’ Shak. Hamlet I. ii. 141, must be rejected, and the isolated use
of the word in a Scandinavian sense, afford, find in his heart, in this
Southern text makes a difficulty. Mätzner suggests the meaning,
‘verfallen auf etwas,’ and Strat.-Bradley, ‘to use opportunities.’
Possibly the writer was trying to translate some such Latin as, non
potest temporanee manducare, or temporare (= in tempore vivere,
Catholicon), or adtemporare, which would suggest getimien in a strained
sense of, to do at the proper season.
102. ah liggeð þer
uppon: comp. ‘Condit opes alius, defossoque incubat auro,’ Virgil,
Georg. ii. 507; ‘Chryseros quidam nummularius, copiosae pecuniae dominus
. . . sordidus aureos folles incubabat,’ Apuleius, Metamorp.
iv. 9.
103. Eudes de Cheriton,
Fabula lxvii. has, ‘Contra auaros et laycos tenaces. Bufo, qui
habitat in terra, rogauit Ranam, que habitat in flumine, quod daret ei
de aqua ad potandum. Ait Rana: Placet; et dedit ei quantum uolebat. Rana
esuriens rogauit quod daret ei de terra. Respondit Bufo: Certe nichil
dabo, quia ego ipse, timens ne deficiat, [non] comedo ad sufficienciam.
Sic sunt plerique in tantum tenaces, quod expectant quod panes sint
muscidi, bacones rancidi, pastilli sint putridi; nec possunt manducare
nec pro Deo dare; timent quod terra eis deficiat. Hii sunt bufones
Diaboli.’ Eudes flourished about 1219 A.D. The parallelism between ‘nec—dare’ and
‘maȝen—godalmihtin’, 101, 2; and
between ‘timent—deficiat’ and ‘swa—trukie,’ 104, 5, is
striking.
105. trukie:
comp. 72/183.
107. The passage in
brackets is conjectural: the copyist passed over a line ending with the
same word as that which he had just completed. For the yellow cloth see
62/46 note.
109. helfter,
halter, noose: OE. hælfter. The original had, no doubt, laqueus
diaboli. For similar expressions comp. ‘Revera ornatus muliebris sagena
diaboli est,’ Caesarius Heist., 287; ‘diaboli hamus,’ Vitas Patrum, 302.
þeos wimmen &c.: comp. ‘Mundus est la garanne au
diable in qua venatur ut capiat animas, et tendit ibi laqueos
infinitos. Unus laqueus ejus est pulchritudo corporalis et ornatus. Unde
istae dominae, quae tam pulchrae videntur esse et tam bene ornatae,
acemées, sunt muscipula diaboli, quam tendit ad capiendum fatuos;
ipsae sunt la ratière au diable,’ Hauréau, Notices, iv. 154.
lumeð, shine, are splendidly attired. The MS. reading luueð and
Morris’s conjecture liuieð give a poor sense. For lumen comp.
‘Hire lure lumes liht, | ase a launterne a nyht,’ Böddeker, AE. Dicht.
169/23; ‘þat lemeþ al wiþ luefly lyt,’ id. 152/6, 155/8, 145/3. The
transitive ‘alemeþ,’ illuminates, occurs in OEH ii. 109/1; ‘alumþ,’ id.
427
141/29. musestoch: comp. ‘Similiter assatur caseus et ponitur in
muscipula. Quem cum sentit Ratus, intrat in muscipulam, capit caseum et
capitur a muscipula. Sic est de omni illicito. Caseus as[s]atur, quando
mulier paratur, ornatur, ut stultos ratos alliciat et capiat,’ Eudes de
Cheriton, 221/1; ‘Mulier pulchra . . . est caseus in
muscipula. Mulier adornatur . . . Hoc est caseus assatus,’ id.
328/1. See also 62/51 note.
114. blanchet,
‘fine wheaten flour,’ Halliwell, who quotes from MS. Bowes of Robert of
Brunne, ‘With blaunchette and other flour | To make thaim qwytter of
colour.’
116. scawere,
mirror: comp. OEH ii. 29/9-13. hindene, Morris thinks is
miswritten for hid-ern, hiding-place; a word which does not occur
elsewhere; if it were connected with OE. hȳdan the first syllable
would be hud- in this text. In Specimens it is translated snare, with
comparison of OE. hinderhōc, stratagem, as if for hindere. I take
it to be the adv. hinden in substantive use, the hinder parts,
the ‘behind’; in CM 22395, ‘hindwin.’ There is an ‘exemplum’ preserved
in Le Livre du Chevalier de la Tour Landry, ch. xxxi, which tells what
the lady who devoted a fourth of the day to her toilet once saw in her
mirror; it was probably in our writer’s mind here. The Book of the
Knight was written for the instruction of his daughters.
118. wið: comp.
48/299 and ‘þer wið,’ 82/121; ‘þe clenesse iscilt heo wið unþeawes,’ OEH
i. 111/17; but ‘from,’ 148/141; ‘Wiðtieð giu fro flesliche lustes,’ OEH
ii. 63/28.
61. ... Schmid, Gesetze, 178/5.
Schmidt
103. ... The parallelism between
‘nec—dare’ and ‘maȝen—godalmihtin’
second set of quotation marks missing
Manuscript: Trinity College, Cambridge, B. 14. 52. See
p. 312.
Facsimile: Frontispiece to OEH ii.; gives f 44 r.
Edition: Morris, R., OEH ii., and Specimens, pp.
26-33.
Literature: Krüger, A., Sprache und Dialekt der me.
Homilien in der Handschrift B. 14. 52. Trinity College, Cambridge,
Erlangen, 1885.
Phonology: Oral a is a, ateliche 128, axen
183; a before nasals, a, manne 168, þanken 48, but
o in þonc 72, þonked 84, 139; a before lengthening groups,
o, honde 23, understondeð 146, but a in lange 101, 184,
understandeð 180: þanne 45, 136 alternates with þenne 52, 117. æ
is a (12 times), bad 88, 120, wat 175, and e (9 times), bed 11, set 71, wecche
97. e is e, eft 37, bendes 100, but understont 176,
understant 181 (-stent). i is i, bidden 188,
bringen 11, often written ȳ in synne OEH ii. 57/5, synfulle id.
57/17, synegeden id. 65/16, and similar words: but i is e
in beð 122 (from pl.), sleðrende 169. o is o, biforen 28,
one 11, 14, borde 87, wolde 22, but an 185, a 4 (5 times). u is
u, burh 21, bunden 127, but o in comen
428
66, 69, folcninge 111, beside fulcninge 114. y is i (29
times), iuele 116, kinne 103 (3), but e in specð 85, euel OEH ii.
183/10, kenne id. 201/11, u in cunde 162, fulste 76; cuinde 160
shows hesitation between u and i. ā is normally
o, aros 137, bitocneð 102, but a 11, an 19, hatte 9, naðeles 13,
74. ǣ1 is mostly e, bileueð 158, clensinge 186,
leren 65, but a in ani 136, ar OEH ii. 11/24, lareð id. 15/2,
o in goð 4, 56 (from plural); a diphthong has developed before
sc in fleis 144 (6). ǣ2 is also mostly
e, beren 23, selðe 123, but a in aristes 140, adrade OEH
ii. 193/18, dade id. 187/22. ē is e, bete 73, este 166,
but o in doð 15, 159, 164 (from plural), ie in gie OEH ii.
21/9. ī is i, lichame 126, lif 67. ō is o,
blod 47, blostme 24, but te 11. ū is u, abuten 101, husel
47. ȳ is i, kidde 135, e, bet 147, u, cudden
18.
ea before r + cons. is a, armheorted 119, harde
98, warð 175, but e in bern 30, smerte adj. 98, ea
in smeart pt. s. OEH ii. 21/27, ia in giarked 84. ea before
l + cons. is a, al 71, half 68, but sometimes o,
olde OEH ii. 47/3, ea, ealde id. 19/15, ealse id. 35/23, and
ia, ȝiald id. 169/4: the i-umlaut is e, eldre id.
43/35. eo before r + cons. is eo, eorðliche 72 (3),
heorte 62, but e in beregeð 114, herte 17, lerneð 17, sterre OEH
ii. 161/4, o in storre id. 161/19, storres id. 161/6; the
wur group has u, wurðe 84, 140, wurðlice 92, the
i-umlaut is wanting, wurð 162, wurðe 91. eo before
l + cons. is e, self 155, seluen 90 (4), but sulfen OEH
ii. 45/6. eo, u-umlaut of e, gives heuene 74, 79,
wereld 168: eo, å-umlaut of e, is wanting in fele 105.
eo, u- and å-umlaut of i, is e in bileue 149,
clepen 10, cleped 44, 108, here 20, 107, 123, seueðe 102, but biliue 172.
ea after palatals is a, shal 27 (3), gaf 14, shap 158, but
gef 172, giaf OEH ii. 113/27; a in shameliche 127 before nasal.
ie after g is i in giueð 160, forgiuenesse 46, but
gief OEH ii. 9/10. ȝef is gif 57, 182. eo after sc
is u, shulen 74: eom is am 17, heom, hem 171.
ēa is regularly e, bred 87, 156, deð 6, ec 105, ester
101 (4), leue 143, þeh 12, but a in admod 17, admodnesse 15, shad
148, ea in deaðe 137; its i-umlaut is e, lesen 147,
lesende 148, remden 28, semeð 73. ēo is also e, beð 51,
ben 63 (10), crepe 100, preste 9 (5), but ie in bie 30, 115, bien
61 (4), and i in bi 57; its i-umlaut is e, þester
OEH ii. 39/29, but þiesternesse id. 9/27, and þeoster id. 171/25.
īe after g is e in geme 57, 182; hīe is hie
74, 105.
a + g is ag, lage OEH ii. 3/6, dages id. 3/14.
æ + g is ai, dai 4 (5), fair 12 (3), mai 38 (4),
but sunedeies 99, seið 24, 31, seide 155. e + g is
ei, leiden 20, wei 32 (5); agen 37, 182 descends from
ongēn, so togenes 19, but toȝanes OEH ii. 177/32 is tōgēanes.
e + h gives eh,
sehte 51 (3), sehtnesse 53, but Scand. sahtnesse 50. i +
g, reine 171 (O.North. regnian). u + g is
ug, muge 152, 188, but mo 77 (Kentish). y + h,
drihten
429
33, driste 189. ā + g is seen in agen 165, ogen 121;
ǣ1 + g in eiðer 126; ē + g in
tweie 39, tweien 10, 17, tweire 103; underfoð 106 (-fēhþ)
has o from the plural. ō + g
gives boges 33, 65; ō + h, boh 24, brohten 34; ū +
g, bugen 88 (3). The i-umlaut of ēa + ht is
i in mihte 135, 159, ie in niehtes OEH ii. 11/5. eo
+ h is represented in riht 68, rihte 143, six 96, sixte 101, its
i-umlaut in sest OEH ii. 137/5, seð id. 121/26. ēa + g, h
in hege 21, heg 35, nehgebures 122; hegeste 176 has no umlaut. ēo
+ ht is seen in leochtes OEH ii. 11/5, liht id. 13/16. ā +
w is ou, ow, soule 116 (4), snow 169, wowe 138,
181; noðer 12 is nōþer, noht 65, nōht. ēa +
w is ew, sheweð 94. ēo + w is eow,
eou in reoweð 119, reouð 122, ew in trewes 34, 60, hew 159
but hiu 158 (hīew), giu 147, 148, 153, comp. ȝiu 16/117: feorðe
99 is fēorþa, reoðe 121 (*hrēowð) is probably miswritten
for reowðe.
Swā is swo 9, in combination alse 15, wat . . . se 175.
e is inserted in beregeð 114, forsinegede 71, 124, husel 47,
ouelete 154, shameliche 127, added finally in one 11, 14, þermide 139 by
analogy of inne 45, uppe 71. For a, e appears in felefolde
164, for e, i in giarked 84; the prefix ge- is
i in iwis 150. o is e in makede 5, u,
e in þureh 54 (3); the suffix -ung is ing,
clensinge 186, tocninge 55, wissinge 95, but wissenge 187 and the
compromise þroweinge 52. ǣ is e in naðeles 74; ea,
o in felefolde 164; ēa, e in endelese 74,
loðlesnesse 109.
In nemed 118, n is omitted, by influence of the past
nemde: n is lost finally in selde 98, a 4 &c.:
nn is simplified in mankin 136, sinbote 109, sunedai 183:
ng is gg in biginnigge 5. bb is u in hauen
71, liuen 153. f becomes u between vowels or vowel and
liquid, driuen 127, freureð 124, ouelete 154; in other positions it is
generally unchanged, fele 105, stefne 28, but uantstone OEH ii. 61/17,
uele id. 63/11. t is doubled in settle 35, ts is c
in milce 188, sc in blesced 30: d is doubled in bidded 86;
for d, ð appears in sleðrende 169; ð in dauiðes 30
is OE. þ is assimilated in atte 156, likeste 122; te for þe 6,
166 is probably from the scribe’s exemplar as tis 174 for þis; betfage
is French, bethphage from the Vulgate: d is written for þ
in bidded 86, maked 62, quedinde 145. ss is simplified in cos 53; initial
sc is sh, shal 27, shrud 113, shrifte 183, but
exceptionally srifte OEH ii. 73/5, scrifte id. 11/11: medially it is
seen in axen 183, acxen 96, bisshopes 61, englisse 44, it is s
final in fles 47, fleis 150 (6). The stop c is written k
before e, i, drinke 150, kinne 103, but spece 118: it is
omitted in ofþinð 123. č is ch, eche 125, swinch 98;
chosene 78 (coren) is conformed to cēosan; for cruche 185
see NED. s.v. Crouch: čč is cch in wecche 97,
wrecche 123: cw is qu, quemende 68. Palatal g is
written g, giueð 160, gaf 14, hege 21, but occasionally ȝ,
ȝaf OEH ii. 141/28, heȝest
430
id. 197/14: final -ig is i, but bode 189: swimesse 156
represents swīg(e)messe: čǧ is g in wig 14,
gg in briggeden 32, 59. h is added initially in heste,
hestene 164, heorðliche 35, his 47; h is lost in ider 130, louerd
13, lude 28, remden 28, reoweð 119, reouð 122, reoðe 121; for h,
g occurs in hegsettle 35: hw is w, wat 38 (3), wile
114, wit 113, conversely hū is hwu 130, wu 167: ht is
written st in driste 189, cht in leochtes OEH ii.
11/5.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. Gen. -es,
sunedeies 99, kinnes 104, 105: d. -e, deaðe 137, borde 87, but the inflection is often
wanting, as in the compounds of dai, 101, 183, 184 and in most of the
neuters, blod 144 (4), fleis 144 (4), &c.; muð 156 may be
acc. (Anglian) after mid. In the acc. weie 59, 60, 62 has
e like jo-stems, and tacne 53 from pl. tācnu: mule
12 is French. The pl. n. a. of masculines ends in -es, cloþes 20, prestes 61, bendes 100; preste 9
is a scribe’s mistake for prestes: neuters are burhfolc 21, þing 148.
Pl. g. kinne 103, but englene 172, estrene 140 (ēastrena),
kingene 13, muðene 44 are weak forms, louerdes 12; d. boges 33,
65, trewes 34, 60. The fem. nouns, except wereld 168, have
e in the s. nom., chirchsocne 4, sinbote 109, abstracts in
-nes, 109, 118, 119 as also in the s. acc. cuinde 160,
forbisne 14, mihte 135, 159; hond 69, wereld 168 are exceptions:
g. -e, sinne 100, but aristes 140
(occasionally m. in OE.): d. -e, cunde 162, dede 15. Plurals are n. hese 73,
wede 103, wedes 104; g. estene 166, hestene 164, wedes 127;
d. weden 131, honde 23, wedes 22, 125; a. mede 74, sinne
119, sinnes 46 (4), honden 128, pinen 96. Nouns of the weak declension
have -e in all cases of the singular;
lichames s. g. 162 excepted. Plurals are n. names 39,
sanderbodes 18: d. axen 183, blostmen 26: a. acxen 96,
blostme 24. The minor declensions are represented by fot
s. a. 9, fet pl. a. 128; man s. n. 36,
cristeman 176, mannes s. g. 62 (4), man s. d.
117, manne 176 (a weak form), men pl. n. 10, pl. d. 116,
pl. a. 143; burh s. d. 21, bureh 11, 18
(byrig); boc s. n. 24; helende s. n.
5 (5) with participial termination; comp. 273/3, helendes
s. g. 57; child s. a. 112; children pl.
n. 31.
Strong inflections of the adjective are s. n. f. bicumeliche
116, holie 45, 51; s. d. m. bicumeliche 93, eche 125,
f. bicumeliche 93, 94, 183, eorðliche 72, faire 64, lude 28, wise
66; s. a. m. endelese 181, rihte 143, sehte 55,
f. eche 181; but holi s. d. m. 184, soð 183,
fair s. a. m. 12 are not inflected. The weak form has
mostly -e in the singular, holie 24 (9),
but holi 47 (9), lift 69, riht 68 are not inflected. Adjectives in the
plural have -e; as also comparatives and
superlatives, loðere 116, hegeste 176, but biterest 178. Adjectives used
as nouns are bitere pl. g. 178, half s. a. 68.
āgen is ogen s. d. f. 121; ān is an 19, a
11; nān, no 106 (3). Noteworthy among the numerals are tweire
pl. g. 103 (twēgra), fifte 100, sixte 101, seueðe 102.
431
The personal pronouns are ich, me, we, ure pl. g. 182, us, te
= þu in likeste 122, ge, giu 147, 148, 153. The pronoun of the third
person is s. n. he m. 12, d. him m. 19,
a. 27, hit neut. 19 (with asse m.), it 21 (with
strete f.); pl. n. hie 33, 74, g. here 107,
d. hem 72, a. 11. Reflexive is himseluen d. 107,
a. 90: definitive, himself s. n. 155: possessives are
mi, ure, þin, his, hise pl. d. 10, 78, here. The general form of
the article is þe, te 6, 156, 166; inflected forms are ðet s. n.
neut. 26, 117, þo pl. n. 17 (3); þet 14, 84 is demonstrative:
the article is used pronominally in þo þe, those who 27 (10). The
compound demonstrative is s. þis, tis 174, pl. þese, once
þis[e] 125. The relatives are þe, ꝥ = þet, þat 115: wat 38 (3) is
interrogative: swiche 106, 129 is pl. Indefinites are me 27; sum
24, sume pl. 33 (3); eiðer 126; oðer 117, oðre
s. d. m. 15, s. a. m. 136, pl.
d. 22, pl. a. 135; ech 38, elhc 36, eches
s. g. m. 175, 178; ani 136; manie 104; fele 105; al
s. a. m. 71, s. a. f. 167, alle 114,
pl. n. 105 (3), alre pl. g. 12 (6), alle pl. a.
135 (3).
The infinitive ends in -en, bidden 188,
þolen 6 and fifteen others; exceptions are crepe 100, reine 171, and the
contract verb fon 74. Dative infinitives with inflection are to
clensende 177, to lesende 148, to quemende 68, for to quemende 70;
without inflection, for . . . to hauen 70, to blissen, to
gladien 83, to bete 73 and ten others. Presents are s. 1. speke
104, spece 118; 2. likeste (= likest þu) 122; 3. beregeð 114, liðe
100 (miswritten for liðeð), bidded 86, for biddeð; contract verb,
underfoð, 106, 117; syncopated forms, about one-third of the total
number, bet 120, bet 147, bit 120, 143, sent 53, understont 176,
&c.; pl. 1. hauen 186, undernimen 142; 2. understonden 154;
3. bidden 46, herien 46, noten 45, þanken 48, wunien 9 and ten others in
-en, lereð 67, semeð 73, wisseð 63, maked
62, for makeð: subjunctive s. 3. drinke 91, wurðe 84, 140;
pl. 1. bugen 88; nime we 56, 182, understonde 88; 3. liuen 153:
imperative s. 2. haue 121, underfo 113; pl. 2. brukeð 147,
cumeð 87, lerneð 17, understondeð 87, 146. Past of Strong Verbs: I a.
s. 3. gaf 14, gef 172, bad 88, 120, bed 11, set 71, spec 160;
pl. 3. eten 172: I b. s. 2. come 130; 3. com 8, 26;
pl. 3. beren 23, breken 33, 60, comen 28: I c. s. 3. warð
175; pl. 3. funden 19: II. s. 3. aros 137, rod 20: IV.
pl. 3. understoden 27: V. s. 3. let 171; pl. 3.
bihengen 21; s. 3. hatte 9. Participles present: I a. queðinde
16 (3), quedinde 145; past: I b. brokene adj. 65, cumen 182, cumene
pl. 185: I c. bigunnen 179, 187, bigunne 177, bunden 127, worpen
128: II. driuen 127: III. chosene pl. 78: V. forleten 179, 187,
shad 148. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 3. fette 138, kidde 135, lufede
175, rerde 137, seide 155, sende 10 (3); pl. 3. wenden 23, ferden
18, 28, leiden 20, makeden 61, but exceptionally ferde, makede 58.
Participles present: seiende 89, 120, seggende 86, sleðrende 169;
432
past: blesced 30, nemed 118, bet 179, 187, clepede pl. 108,
forsinegede pl. 71. Minor Groups: wot pr. s. 38; agen
pr. pl. 165; shal pr. s. 27, shulen pr. pl. 74; mai
pr. s. 38 (4), muge we 1 pr. pl. 188, mo 77 (Kentish),
muge [ge] 2 pr. pl. 152; ben inf. 77, 127, am 1 pr.
s. 17, is pr. s. 44, his 47, beð 122, 154, ben 1 pr.
pl. 142, 185, pr. pl. 63 (10), bien 61 (3), beð 51, bie
pr. s. subj. 30, 115, bi 57, si (lof) 30, bien 1 pr. pl.
subj. 182, was pt. s. 18, weren pt. pl. 31, 67; wile
pr. s. 78, wolde pt. s. 6, 22; do 1 pr. s. 105, doð
pr. s. 15, 159, 164, don 1 pr. pl. 141, fuldon pr.
pl. 74, do pr. s. subj. 114, do we 1 pr. pl. subj.
88, dide
pt. s. 136, diden pt. pl. 31; gon inf. 101, goð pr. s. 4,
56.
Dialect: A scribe of the South-East Midland has copied a
manuscript written in the South-Eastern area bordering on Kent. The
changes he has made affect both sounds and inflections in varying
degree; in this extract the Midland element is more pronounced than
usual; towards the end of his task the Southern gains the upper hand.
But his exemplar was in its turn descended from an original of the
Middle or Western South, written not long after the Conquest, or at any
rate by a man to whom OE. constructions, such as the uses of the dative
in him 106, iuele 116, folke 174, manne 176, were not strange.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are rideð 62, sahtnesse
50, shereðursdai 184, wanrede 124, and probably gestninge 84. French are
absolucion 100, custume 3, diciples 10, mule 12, oliue 24, palefrei 12,
procession 4, prophete 169, proue 90, richeise 72, sepulcre 102. Latin
are apostles 20, bisshopes 61, calice 52, cruche 100, crisme 112,
fant(ston) 101, munt 10, temple 23.
Introduction: These pieces appear to be original
compositions of the Middle English period, but the work of a writer who
drew his ideas from the older literature, Beda and Ælfric, and used many
archaic words such as burhfolc, chirchsocne, hegsettle, ouelete,
sanderbodes, swimesse, wig. There is similarity in parts to the sixth
Blickling Homily.
1. Turbe &c.:
S. Matt. xxi. 9.
4. ⁊ = and.
haueð—of, has its origin in: for of comp.
131/98.
6. Et &c.: not
a quotation from the Vulgate or Comestor.
8. þe is a mistake
for he, necessary as sende l. 10 has no subject.
9. preste:
‘Bethphage erat viculus sacerdotum in monte Oliueti,’ Beda, Opera, vii.
183. þe . . . one: see 1/3
note.
11. into . . .
ierusalem: ‘in castellum quod contra eos erat ·i· in hierusalem,’
Comestor, Hist. Euang. ch. cxvij. wig: OE. wicg, steed; a
poetical word, but here apparently in a depreciatory sense.
12. noðer stede
&c.: comp. ‘Ne he nedde stede · ne no palefray. | Ac
433
rod vppe on asse · as ich eu segge may,’ OEM 39/67; OEH i. 5/19; ‘Broght
þai noþer on hir bak | Na sadel ne panel,’ CM 14981.
15. on his dede . . .
on his speche, by means of act and word: on is more energetic
than in: comp. ‘herte biðencheð ꝥ hie seggen shal on songe,’ OEH
ii. 211/17. But on oðre stede is a purely local use.
16. Discite
&c.: S. Matt. xi. 29.
18. sanderbodes,
messengers; apparently the word occurs only here, but sandermen is in
AS. Chron. 1123 A.D. A combination of
sand, gen. sande, message, and boda,
messenger: r may be due to Scandinavian influence (NED viii. 91), or it
is possibly analogous to that in provender, OF. provende, lavender,
Anglo-French lavendre, from LL. lavendula. þiderward, on the way
there; see 91/93 note.
21. hihten,
adorned; comp. ‘alle þos wennen huihten his wurðshipe,’ OEH ii. 195/32,
71/24.
22. oðre: adj.
pl. d., practically adverbial, besides.
25. Occurrunt
&c.: Antiphon sung in procession on Palm Sunday, according to Old
English and Roman uses: see York Breviary i. 367.
27. understoden,
received: for the earlier underfōn in this sense, comp. 6/37,
11/187, 197, 207.
28. remden lude
stefne, cried with a loud voice; stefne is dative; comp. ‘and on
cleopie agan; loudere stemne,’ L, MS. O 20789.
29. Osanna
&c.: S. Matt. xxi. 9.
31. Pueri Hebraeorum
vestimenta prosternebant in via, one of the Antiphons sung at the
blessing of the palms in the Old English and Roman uses: see York
Missal, i. 85, Breviary i. 367. v. p. are incorrectly
expanded in the text, through a too trustful following of Morris.
35. heg settle.
OE. setl, stōl continue in regular use for the official
seat of king and dignitary till the middle of the thirteenth century,
when they are displaced by F. trone.
37. fro chirche to
chirche. The Palm Sunday procession at Mattins issued from the west
door of the church, visited the stations in the churchyard and
re-entered the church by the same door. In so doing it was mystically
said to leave Bethphage and return to Jerusalem. The scribe has
misplaced ⁊ eft agen; it should come before to chirche.
⁊ bitocneð parataxis; see 81/82.
40. domus bucce:
‘Bethphage autem domus buccae . . . dicitur . . . quia multos
ante passionem suam docendo [Saluator] donis piae confessionis &
obedientiae spiritalis impleuit,’ Beda, Op. vii. 183; ‘Venit Bethphage
quod dicitur domus maxillae, dum adveniente morte salvandus quisque
peccata sua aperit in confessione,’ Godefridi Homiliae in Migne,
P. L.
434
clxxiv. 22: Hildebert, id. clxxi. 500; ‘Betfage, se tun, getacnaþ þa
halgan cyricean on þære biþ sungen ꝥ halige geryne, ⁊ men þær heora
synna andettaþ, ⁊ him þaer forgifnesse biddaþ,’ BH 77/14.
45. þet . . .
inne, in which: see 1/3. noten, employ (with advantage) the
functions of their mouths: comp. ‘here wiken hem binimeð · þe hie ar
noteden,’ OEH ii. 183/1: it takes an acc. here and at 87/165, but
‘noten of,’ 191/488: OE. notian often governs gen. of the
thing enjoyed.
48. uisio pacis:
so Beda, vii. 262; Ælfric, Hom. Cath. ii. 66. soð, l. 50, is a
mistake for sihð, repeated OEH ii. 53/20; it really translates pax uera;
see 116/140. Comp. ‘sibbe gesihð Sancta Hierusalem,’ Crist, 50; BH
81/1.
52. of þe calice.
At this period, the celebrant after the consecration of the elements
kissed the chalice and then the Deacon, with the words ‘Habete vinculum
pacis et caritatis’; the Deacon next passed on the kiss to the
assistants and so to the congregation. See York Missal, i. 198,
Zaccaria, Bibliotheca Ritualis, ii2. cxlviii-cli. Ælfric
calls the messe cos, ‘sibbe coss,’ Lives, ii. 46/699.
53. þe folc sent,
dismisses the people, with the words ‘Ite, missa est’: a sufficient
sense, but interposing awkwardly between ‘cos’ and ‘þer mide.’ Probably
folc should be taken as dative, or folke should be read; and sends it to
the people and thereby betokens &c.
56. ⁊ eft should
come before of ierusalem: the church is Bethphage when the
procession goes out of it, but Jerusalem when it returns to it: see
83/37.
60-72. The
interpretation is peculiar; in some points it resembles that of
Hildebert of Tours, Migne, P. L. clxxi. 501.
62. rideð, clear
the road; OWScand. ryðja; elsewhere in this text ruden; comp. ‘ich sende
min engel biforen þine nebbe þe shal ruden þine weie to-fore þe,’ OEH
ii. 133/27. makeð—heorte: comp. ‘ut Christo iter ad mentem
parent,’ Hildebert.
64. forbisne:
‘virtutum suarum exemplis,’ Beda, vii. 263.
65. þo þe leren:
‘Hi sunt qui a sanctis patribus bona sumentes exempla, aliis etiam
normam [bene] vivendi proponunt,’ Hildebert.
68. quemende: see
81/85 note.
69. hereworde:
see 56/37.
72. unwilliche is
an adverb; OE. unwilsumlīce; comp. 40/181 note.
73. semeð,
burdeneth, as at 4/18.
74. fuldon,
fulfil: comp. ‘dædbetan and þæt fuldon on þæs abbodes hæse,’ Benedictine
Rule, ed. Schröer, 70/21. As it appears to be always
435
transitive, the following hie, them, must be taken as its object, and
shulen is without subject expressed.
79. Read
secla.
82. Hec &c.:
Ps. cxvii. 24: the Graduale in Old English and Roman uses for Easter
Day.
84. þonked wurðe
him, lit. be it thanked to him: comp. ‘we ahte . . .
þonkien hit ure drihten,’ OEH i. 5/29. þe . . . offe,
concerning which.
85. Ecce &c.:
St. Matt. xxii. 4 adapted.
87. Morris alters
þe to we, but the article is necessary, and the subject is often
omitted by this writer; see 83/10, 85/105, 87/152, and 6/18 note.
88. bord bugen:
so at 85/102, but ‘to godes bord bugen,’ 88/188: bugen, to bend one’s
steps, to go, is elsewhere used with a preposition; either to has
dropped out in these two isolated instances, or there has been some
confusion in the writer’s mind with begin.
89. Probet
&c.: 1 Cor. xi. 28.
91. wurðe þer to,
fit for that: þer to replaces an older genitive, ðæs wierþe;
comp. 86/142.
94. Erest,
firstly: oðer siðe, 95, secondly; þridde siðe, 99,
thirdly.
95. wissinge,
instruction, guidance; i.e. penance.
96. acxen:
referring to the ceremony of giving the ashes to the congregation on Ash
Wednesday. bilien, pertain, are associated with: comp. ‘þe six
werkes of þesternesse · þe bilige to nihte,’ OEH ii. 15/3.
97. saccum, a
penitential garment of sackcloth, worn over other clothes, thus
differing from cilicium, hair-shirt; S. Jerome, Ep. 44. The writer has
omitted after it, plagas, the ‘smerte dintes’ of the next line,
‘disceplines,’ 62/35.
99. siðes: read
siðe; the superfluous s is due to the initial of the next word:
in liðe, 100, final þ has been lost before initial
þ: swiðere, 119, owes its final re to the beginning
of the next word. shereðuresdaies, of Maundy Thursday:
corresponds to OWScand. skíriþórsdagr, purification Thursday, but was
wrongly connected with ME. scheren, to shear. The form in sh is
native or naturalized; see Björkman, 125, and comp. 99/73.
100. sinne
bendes: see 81/67 note. crepe to
cruche, creeping to the cross; the adoration of the cross on Good
Friday; Rock, Church of our Fathers, iii2. 88.
101. lange
fridai: langa frīgedæg, an ancient name for Good Friday, so
called from its fast and observances. gon—fantston, appears
to refer to some procession of the laity at the blessing of the font on
Easter Eve, perhaps local, as it is not noticed in the service books.
Brand, Popular Antiquities (Bohn), i. 158, quotes from Googe’s
translation of the Regnum
436
Papisticum of Kirchmayer, ‘Nine times about the font they marche, and on
the Saintes do call; | Then still at length they stande, and straight
the priest begins withall.’ Of course there was a procession of the
clergy to and from the font, Frere, Use of Sarum, i. 149. In ‘ðor-of in
esterne be we wunen | Seuene siðes to funt cumen,’ GE 3289, the
reference is to the procession made to the font every afternoon in
Easter week. The font is the symbol of the sepulchre because, as
Durandus, vi. De Sabbato sancto, says, ‘fit hac die baptismus, quia in
eo consepulti sumus christo.’ It is noteworthy that nothing is said of
the Easter Sepulchre, which was probably not instituted before the
fourteenth century.
103. tweire
kinne, of two kinds; OE. twēgra cynna, but kinnes, 104, 105
is a sing. gen. in form, with plural meaning: see 81/80 note.
105. do: comp.
122/185 note.
106. faire him,
becoming to him; ‘bicumeliche,’ 86/116.
107. underfo,
used absolutely, like mod. receive, to communicate: comp. the full
expression 86/117. himseluen to hele, to his spiritual
well-being. here oðer, one of these two; but eiðer þese
wedes, 86/126 can only mean, at this date, each, i.e. both of these
garments. If eiðer be a mistake for oðer, then þis wede must be read in
l. 125.
109. sinbote is
explained by ll. 119, 120.
112. crisme
cloð: in the service books ‘chrismalis pannus, vestis’: ‘crismale
seu vestis candida que super caput baptizati imponitur significat
secundum rabanum
interioris et exterioris hominis castitatem et
innocentiam,’ Durandus vi. The chrism cloth was put on with the words,
‘Accipe vestem candidam, sanctam et immaculatam,’ after the sign of the
cross had been made with chrism on the head of the person baptized.
115. for þat,
by reason of which, through which.
116. iuele is
predicative dative, equivalent to the usual construction with to, as in
l. 125. It is OE.; comp. ‘heora nan him ne mehte bion nane gode,’
Orosius 282/18.
118. embe:
usually þe . . . embe, about which.
120. he: for
the personal pronoun used instead of a repeated relative, comp. ‘hem,’
87/156; ‘He ðurh hwam kinges rixit, ⁊ alle mihtes . . . of him
cumeð, he lai bewunden on fiteres,’ VV 49/27. bet ⁊ milce bit,
amends and prays for mercy; comp. 36/126, 44/238. Read seiende.
121. Miserere
&c.: Ecclus. xxx. 24.
123. likeð . . .
selðe, is pleased at the prosperity of all of them.
126. soule,
lichame, datives; comp. ‘himseluen to hele,’ 85/107; 176/24
note.
129. Amice
&c.: S. Matt. xxii. 12.
437
132. ‘Haec est dies
quam fecit Dominus: exultemus et laetemur in ea,’ Ps. cxvii. 24.
135. oðerluker,
in quite another fashion: a comparative adverb: see 125/270.
140. for þi . . .
for ꝥ þe, for this reason . . . because.
142. þer
togenes, for its coming, to meet it, as in ‘biþ hit eft him togeanes
gehealden on þæm heofonlican goldhorde,’ BH 53/13. Comp. ‘þer to,’
85/91, and for a similar pregnant use of ‘efterward,’ 77/63; ‘hamward,’
91/93.
143. Holthausen in ES
xv. 307 emends this sentence by omitting ⁊ before bringe and before þus
and changing bringe, leue into bringeð, leueð. It might be better to
omit þe and retain ⁊ before bringeð, with leued and omission of ⁊ before
þus.
145. Accipite
&c.: from the Missal, with substitution of commedite (S. Matt. xxvi.
26) for manducate (1 Cor. xi. 24), as in all the English service books.
After novi, add ‘et aeterni testamenti, misterium fidei.’
148. to
lesende: see 81/85 note.
149. Caro
&c.: S. John vi. 56: the quotation in l. 151 is from verse 54 of the
same.
152. Morris says
muge = muge ge: probably the latter word has dropped out.
154. ouelete,
oblation, the thing offered, here the wafer to be consecrated. OE.
oflǣte, oflēte from L. oblata.
156. ⁊ . . .
hem, and which: comp. 86/120. swimesse, lit. silent mass,
explained in Specimens as a mass without music; in Bradley-Strat. as a
low mass. But the words of consecration were used in masses low and
high; the meaning is the Canon of the Mass, containing the words of
consecration, which was said secreto, and was often called
secretum, as by Durandus, ‘secretum silentium in quo & misse
canon devote dicitur.’ Comp. ‘Si comenca puis le secrei | De la messe,
par bone fei; | Et quant li secrez ert finez, | Est danz Theophle auant
alez; | Receut le dulz cors de Jhesu,’ Adgar, Mary Legends, 113/1041;
and see the Lay Folks Mass Book, pp. 267, 274. A similar compound is
‘swidages,’ OEH ii. 101/15, the still days, the last three days of Holy
Week, which is called ‘swiwike’ in MS. Cleopatra of AR 70/7.
157. Comp. ‘colorem et
saporem panis voluit [Christus] remanere, et sub illa specie veram
corporis Christi substantiam latere,’ Hildebert, 535.
159-61. The words in
brackets were supplied in Specimens, with translation, ‘Greater might
doth our Saviour than the holy words which he spake by his (the
priest’s) mouth, when he giveth mankind his flesh and
438
his blood,’ an explanation unsatisfactory in substance, for the ‘might’
is not ‘greater,’ but the same. Besides ‘his’ must refer to helende, and
the earliest certain example of man’s kind = mankind ‘þar he for mans
kind wil dei,’ CM 14909, is more than a century later; the word in this
text is ‘mankin,’ 86/136 (mann cynn), ‘manken,’ OEH ii. 19/14.
mannes cuinde cannot mean anything but man’s nature, humanitas,
like Orm’s ‘mennisske kinde,’ Dedic. 218, ‘mennisscnessess kinde,’ id.
15687. Omitting the supplement the meaning appears to be, Our Saviour
works a greater miracle than if the words of consecration were literally
fulfilled, since he gives us in the sacrament his perfect human
nature.
161. ⁊ Naþeles
&c., and moreover when a man eats and drinks in the ordinary way,
the bread he eats and the drink he drinks do change into flesh and blood
by the natural working of the body, wherefore &c.
163. swo doð:
comp. 6/18 note.
166. estene
dai, day of dainties, with a word-play on estre as in hu
sel = wu god: sǣl, happiness.
169. sleðrende,
falling gently, like dew or rain. Pluit &c.: Ps. lxxvii. 24,
25.
172. biliue,
food: comp. ‘bileue,’ 87/149.
173. Manna
&c.: ‘filii Israel dixerunt ad invicem: Manhu? quod significat: Quid
est hoc?’ Exod. xvi. 15.
177. clensende:
see 81/85 note.
178. michele
sinnes, mortal sins.
179. ‘Qui enim
manducat et bibit indigne, iudicium sibi manducat et bibit: non
diiudicans corpus Domini,’ 1 Cor. xi. 29.
182. agen, with
reference to; an early example of this use: comp. OF. devers.
189. driste,
for drihte, Lord, as at 35/79. For st = ht, see KH 249 note. But Morris
reads Ariste, resurrection.
Phonology: ... and e (9
times), bed 11
comma missing
ea in smeart pt. s. OEH ii.
21/27, ia in giarked 84
“ia in giarked 84” added by author
eo, å-umlaut of
e
a-umlaut
eo, u- and å-umlaut of
i
a-umlaut
a + g ... toȝanes OEH ii.
177/32 is tōgēanes.
corrected by author from togeanes
underfoð 106 (-fēhþ) has o
from the plural
—fēhþ
ēa + g
eā
In nemed 118 ... ss is
simplified
s is
The infinitive ... pr. pl. subj.
88,
88;
pt. pl. 31; gon inf. 101, goð
pr. s. 4, 56.
31,
112. ... secundum rabanum
lower-case as shown
Manuscript: Stowe 34, British Museum: of the early part
of the thirteenth century; written on vellum, 223 × 160 mm., by three
scribes, with numerous corrections by at least three other hands. It
belonged once to William Fleetwood, Recorder of London, and to Thomas
Astley. See Catalogue of the Stowe MSS., and Catalogue of an Exhibition
of the Stowe MSS., no. 240.
Facsimile: Palæographical Society; Second Series,
plate 92.
Edition: Holthausen, F., Part i. Text and Translation.
E. E. T. S., O. S. 89.
439
Literature: Schmidt, G. Ueber die Sprache und Heimat
der ‘Vices and Virtues.’ Leipzig, 1899; Philippsen, M. Die Deklination
in den ‘Vices and Virtues.’ Kieler Diss. Erlangen, 1911; Heuser, W.,
Anglia, xvii. 88.
Phonology: Oral a and a before
nasals is a, wascen 82, swanc 4; a before lengthening
groups wavers between a (9 times) and o (5), lande 16,
londe 8, understanden 34, understonden 138. æ is regularly
a, after 42, cwað 94, was 3; wrecche 60, 116 comes from
wrecca. e is generally e, but umlaut e
before nasal is a (representing æ, Bülbring, § 171)
in namden 117, inamde 120, sant 127, sante 84, wante 88; before
lengthening groups e, lengðe 45, but a as above in andin
122, andeden 123, wand 93, and æ in wænden 46, strænges 28;
a, æ for umlaut e before nasals is characteristic
of the South-Eastern area (Morsbach, § 108); i for e
in ðingþ 41 is due to confusion of þencan and þyncan;
hwilliche 112 descends from hwilc. i is i, bidde
52, finde 83; cherche 9 is cyrice, ferst 91, ðessere 22 (3) come
from forms with y. o is o, dropes 12, borde 15;
ðane 3 is LWS. ðane. u is u, cumeð 26, swunken 146,
grundwall 53, but beswonken 136, forðer 45 (late North. forþor).
y is e, euele 26, kennes 13, þelliche 36; mycel is
muchele 4 (3), beside michele 21 (8); þincþ 47, 63, þingþ 70 represent
þyncþ.
The representation of ā wavers between a and o,
the former predominating, lare 20 (3), lore 57 (3), swa 5, swo 12, wat
136, wot 137; before two consonants, annesse 115, onnesse 148, tacneð
79, tocneð 130. ǣ1 is regularly a, ani 35 (5),
sade 75 (8); before two consonants, alche 139, aure 125 (3), but
æ in ær 4, 47, bræde 44, mæst 29, næure 31, tæche 54, ea
in sea 22; ilke 130 descends from ylc. ǣ2 is
also a, dade 92, 98, rad 19, 42, ware 129; before two consonants,
blastes 27, latst 48, but æ in ræd 44, wære 60, and e in
leten 56, nahwer 83. ē is e, bene 95, feden 116, before
two consonants, dest 36, misferde 125, but ie in hie 36, hier
144, and more frequently in other places, bienes VV 65/3, diest id.
41/2; o in doð 33, 42 is from the plural. ī is i,
liue 8, wisdome 32, but bleðeliche 66 beside bliðeliche 63. ō is
o, don 123, godnesse 91. ū is u, trukede 120, dust
70. ȳ is e in screden 116, ie in inȝied 80, 91
(ingehȳd), i in litle 12, litel 42, 91, little 136.
ea before r + cons. is a, harm VV 29/10; before
lengthening groups a, harde 31, warnin 27 (4), warð 87, but
middeneard 6; the i-umlaut is e, wernde 83. ea
before l + cons. is also a, all 6 (14), grundwall 53, halt
40
(heald), scalt 38, but ea survives in ealde 128, healden
57 (4), before a lengthening group; the i-umlaut is e,
eldest 118. eo before r + cons. is e, berȝen 140,
berȝin 138, ferr 45, herte 34, 82, but ie in hierte 31, 98,
liernin
440
64, 138, a in harkeð 66 (*heorcian); eo survives in
weorc VV 95/3 &c.; the i-umlaut is ie, hierdes 1, but
worð 133. eo before l + cons. is seen in seluen 20.
eo, u-umlaut of e, is e in heuene 24,
heuneriches 140; after w, o in woreld 2 (5). eo,
u- and å-umlaut of i, is e, icleped 58,
leðebeiȝe 15, seððen 5, the datives ðese 60, 143, 144, ðesen 119, 120,
ðese 53, 140; heora is here 15, 30, and hire 14: niðer 30 is
without umlaut. ea after palatals is a, scal 79: ie
after g is i, ȝif 90, 101, ȝiuen 40, ȝiue 74, e in
beȝete 125, forȝete 60, ei (for ie) in forȝeit 149. ȝef is
ȝif 32, gif 102. eo after sc is u, scule 8, sculen
1, 74, but scolde 129. eom is am 59, heom, hem 112.
ēa is ea, breade 100, dead 87, forleas 7, teares
73 (8), but bred 77, ec 2: aȝean 93 is ongēan: the i-umlaut
has e, ȝemeleastes 13, hersum 15, hersumnesse 115 (2), iherde
95 (5), netene 130, but unbiliefde 33. ēo is mostly ie, bien
12 &c., dier 129, dieuliche 11, lief 3, ouerȝiede 6, ðies 79, 91,
but e in be 39, betwen 112, deules 26, lef 88, twene 139;
eo is rare, beon VV 121/10. The i-umlaut is e,
fiftene 95, inede 74, steren 9, and ie, niede 92 (4), niedfulle
74, stieren 1, stierde 5. Palatal ēa after g is seen in
ȝear 95, biȝeates 14 (begēat, Napier, OE. Glosses 2698); after
sc in scadwisnesse 121. ȝīet is ȝiet 90, 95.
a + g is aȝ, laȝe 128, 131, forðdraȝen 97.
æ + g is ai, faire 11, mai 34, sai 94
(sæge), tail 129, but daiȝ 77. e + g is ei,
aweiward 48, seið 17 (segeð), but iseȝen 119 (gesegen).
o + g is seen in ibroiden 28; o + ht in
þohtes 25, 30. u + g is uȝ, muȝe 97, muge 125.
ā + g, h are seen in wauȝe 89, auh 17;
ǣ1 + ht in betaht 7; ǣ2 +
g in ȝeseiȝe 124; ē + g in wreiȝede 83; ī +
g in stieð 24; ō + g in bowes 44, ō +
ht in besouhte 84, ȝeþouht 46, þouhten 77; ea + h
in iseih 94; ie + ht in miht 98, mihte 5 &c., mihtes
46, niht 77; eo + ht in riht 146; ēa + h in
þeih 105; īe + ht in ieiht 96; ā + w in
saule 10 (6), sawle 80: naht 12, 87, 126 is nāht. nielnesse 30
represents neowolnes. ēa + w gives eaw,
feawe 40, sceawin 25 (3), unðeawes 55; ēo + w, ew,
ȝew 20, ȝewer 19, ȝewere 20, newe 131, īe + w, ew,
trewe 39.
a without stress is levelled to e in andswereð 51,
middeneard 6; o to e in forðer 45, niðer 30, sikere 12,
sikerliker 98, sikerest 113, te 28, 42; u to e in
leðebeiȝe 15. e is lost in eule 81, heuneriches 140, o in
nielnesse 30, e is added in ofte 60. on is a 149.
For w the rune is used. ll is simplified in dieuliche
11. n is doubled in þennken 49: for almihtin 143, see 79/17 note. Initial f is f, ferr 45,
f between vowels or vowel and liquid is u, euele 26, aure
125, otherwise f, unbeliefde 33. d is doubled in godd 7,
goddspell 118, lost in finst 40; dd is simplified in amidewarde
70; for d, t appears in halt 40. Initial þ becomes
t after t in tin 40, tu 37, 47, 87; for þ, d
is written in seid 21, 67,
441
speked 73, tobrekd 35, wid 71. s is represented by sc in
bledscin 147: sc is regularly sc [š], iscop 52, scal 79,
sceawin 25, scipes 14, scolde 129, scule 8, wascen 82. The stop c
is written k before e, i, lokin 1, munekes 38 and
before another consonant, forsakþ 20, tobrekð 32, but tobrecþ 36,
c in other positions, cumen 113, exceptionally ch in ilche
52 (ilca), arche 5, 9 (if not French), g in ðingþ 41 (4):
ic is ic and ich. č is ch, alche 139, beseche 58,
ilich 69, iswinch 48, michel 122 &c., tæche 54, þelliche 36, þench
89, þenchinde 59, but exceptionally k in beseke 106, beseken 97,
ilke 130 (ylc confused with ilca): čč is
cch, wacchen 114, wrecche 60, 116. cg is gg, segge
99, 109; cs, x, rixin, rixið 110; cw, cw,
becweð 86, cwað 94, cwide 86. Palatal g is ȝ, initially,
biȝeates 14, ȝemeleastes 13, but Gif 102 (with capital letter);
medially, maniȝe 4 (4), heriȝen 147 (3), wuniȝeð 15, 18, muȝe 97, VV
3/18, 73/17 &c., but muge 125. The prefix ge- is often
retained, ȝewriten 23, ȝeþanc 57, ȝeswinkes 145, beside iþanke 66,
iswinch 48, and ȝ is added in ȝew 20, ȝewer 19, ȝewere 20,
ouerȝiede 6. For the stop, g is used initially, grundwall 53,
agunnen 123, ȝegunnen 53, but iȝunnen 47, medially, bringen 8, but the
palatal symbol is used for the spirant after l, r, berȝin
138 &c., folȝin 44 (3), foriswelȝen 39: myr(i)gþ is
represented by merhðe 25, merchþe 140. g is lost in heuiliche 48.
For h, ȝ is written in þurȝwunie 131, ðurȝwuneð 133;
h is added in Hvte 143, lost in þurwuneð 128, inȝied 80, 91
(inȝehied VV 141/1): initial hl is preserved in hlesteð 17 (3),
but lhesten 50, lesten 44.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. Sing. g. -es,
priestes 43, kennes 13, scipes 14: d. -e, hlauerde 143, netene 130, but daiȝ 151 (comp. OE.
on dæg), hlauerd 52, ræd 44, sal 111 (OE. æt sumum sǣle,
on sumne sǣl) are without inflection. Pl. n. a. of
masculines, -es, hierdes 1, bowes 44, but
wintre 4 (wintru); neuters are n. dier 129, a. ȝear
95, þing 137, bede 114 (gebēdu): pl. g. ðinge 71;
d. -es, blastes 27, biȝeates 14,
ȝeswinkes 145, wordes 66. Of the fem. nouns of the strong
declension, forbisne 66, mihte 126, niede 151, sawle 51 (3),
scadwisnesse 121 have added e in the s. n. and bene 95,
mihte 106, niede 92, 150 in the s. a. Gen.
-e, herte 34: d. -e, bræde 44, cherche 9, but sea 22, woreld 2 (4).
Pl. g. saule 13; d. ȝemeleastes 13, mihtes 46 (5);
a. dade 92, 98, mihtes 69. Nouns of the weak declension are
s. d. hope 28, ileaue 28; a. lichame 10; pl.
n. dropes 12; d. wisen 117; a. wacchen 114. The minor
declensions are represented by mann s. n. 33, mannes
s. g. 145, manne s. d. 33, stieresmanne 15, man
s. a. 127, stieresmann 3, manne 124, stieresmenn pl.
n. 8, mannen pl. d. 38, stieresmannen 18, 21, stieresman[nen]
23; moder s. n. 109; faderes pl. n. 109, 111.
Remnants of the strong declension of adjectives in the sing. are
haliȝes
442
g. m. 145, faste d. m., rihte 28, dieuliche
d. f. 11, mannliche 10, michele 21, 96, faire d.
neut. 11. The weak declension in the sing. has -e throughout, unware n. m. 41, unwise 33,
eule n. f. 81, gode 80, lieue 136, muchele d. m.
5, wilde 6, bitere d. f. 22, ealde 128, soðe 29, &c.,
gode a. m. 3, 35, michele a. f. 25, little a.
neut. 136; exceptions are hali 64, 117, 124, muchel 48. The
pl. strong and weak has -e in all
cases, sikere n. 12, halie d. 140, euele a. 26, but
hali n. 108, 111, hersum 15, hali d. 46, 53 are
uninflected; comparatives and superlatives are gladdere
s. n. f. 98, eldes[t] pl. d., wisest 118,
ān is a n. m. 91, on 118, an f. 66, 126, one
a. f. 106, nān, non n. f. 71,
neut. 103, none d. m. 10, 11, f. 72,
neut. 32, 134. Adjectives used as nouns are gode s. d.
neut. 72, 134, arst s. a. neut. 71, betste 89, god 38,
40, lasse 43, litel 42, gode pl. d. 150.
The personal pronouns are ic 45 (8), ich 46 (8), me, we, us, þu,
(ðat) tu 37, 58, (scalt) tu 87, ðe, ȝew 20. The pronoun of the third
person is s. n. he m. 4, 7, ?hie 45, hie f.
108, 109, he 110, hit neut. 29; d. him m. 7, hire
f. 110; a. hie m. 36, f. 5, his 127; pl.
n. hie 2; d. hem 56; a. hes 50, 54, 56. Reflexives are
me seluen 19, hem pl. d. 112: possessives, min 57, 79, mine
pl. 76, 79, þin 98, ðine s. d. f. 57, 90, 91,
s. a. m. 95, s. a. f. 95, tin
s. a. neut. 40, þi 96, ure 23, ȝewer 19, ȝewere 20, his 82,
is 93, hire 81, here pl. 30, hire 14. The definite article is
s. n. ðe m. 17, f. 79, 80, se 81, þat
neut. 80, 117; d. ðan m. 33, 52, ðe 5 (6), ðo 69,
ðare f. 29 (8), ðe 9, 31, ða 147, ðe neut. 64, ðo 100;
a. ðane m. 3, 53, ðanne 127, ðe f. 25, 39, ða 4, 9,
þat neut. 89, ðe instr. 98: pl. n. ða 8, ðe 1;
d. ðan 74, ða 21 (3), ðe 46 (4); a. ðe 26, ðo 31. The
article is used as pronoun antecedent to relatives, se ðe, he who 19,
65, ðo ðe, those who 1, 2: ðat is demonstrative 17, 33, 64, 80, 102,
121. The compound demonstrative is s. n. þies f. 91,
79 (with neut. bedd); d. ðese m. 60, 144, ðessere
f. 22, 71, 131, ðese neut. 143; a. ðese f.
58, 124, þis neut. 20, 136: pl. n. þese 73; d.
ðesen 119, 120, þese 38, 53, 140; a. ðese 103. The relatives are
ðe 1, ðat 37, 60, what, se ðe 148, who; ðe 4 means with which.
Interrogatives are hwam s. d. f. 71, hwat 17, 36,
hwilliche 112: ilca is ilche s. d. m. 52,
þyllic, þelliche pl. d. 36. Indefinites are se ðe 125,
whoso; se . . . he 132; hwat hwat 134, whatever, me 113, man
104, 110; feawe pl. 40; sum s. n. 113, sume
s. d. m. 111, pl. a. 97; oþres s. g.
neut. 77, oðer s. d. f. 61, oðre pl. d. 108;
ilke s. n. m. 130, alche s. d. m. 139;
auriche s. d. neut. 130; ani 35 &c.; maniȝes
s. g. m. 145, neut. 12, manies 117, maniȝe
pl. n. 12, manie 119, maniȝe pl. d. 55, pl. a. 4,
119; all s. a. m. 6, f. 39, al s. a.
neut. 37, alle pl. n. 14, 129, alre pl. g. 71, alle
pl. d. 14 (7), pl. a. 137.
Infinitives of the second weak conjugation, except watrien 79, end in
-in, andin 122, folȝin 44 (3), rixin 110,
all others in -en, -ien, berȝen 140,
443
beseken 97, herien 143, except berȝin 138, herborȝin 115. The dat.
inf. is not inflected; to laten, to libben 88, to speken, to þennken
49 are virtually nominatives. Presents are s. 1. beseche 58,
habbe 56; 2. hauest 53, lokest 47, syncopated are dalst 37, finst 40,
hafst 37, latst 48; 3. answereð 51, haueð 45, rixeð 148, tocneð 130,
rixið 110, and twelve others, but syncopated forms predominate, hafð 35,
sant 127, and nineteen others; pl. 1. fareð 21, habbeð 119 (3),
speked 73, finde we 83; 3. cumeð 26, stieð 24, wuniȝeð 15, 18,
exceptionally folgið 3, seggeð 109, stikð 30; subjunctive s. 2.
beseke 106, forðbringe 54, heriȝe 149, sette 59, tæche 54, þanke 150; 3.
beȝete 125, þurȝwunie 131; pl. 1. bledscin, heriȝen 147, hvte we
143, segge we 99, speken 71, þankin 147; 3. forliesen 9, lokien 14,
tobreken 27: imperative s. 2. becweð 86, sai 94, wand 93; halt 40
for hald; pl. 2. hlesteð 17. Past of Strong Verbs: Ia. s.
3. cwað 94, iseih 94; pl. 1. ȝeseiȝe we 124: Ic. s. 3.
swanc 4, warð 87, worð 133; pl. 3. agunnen 123, swunken 146: III.
s. 3. forleas 7: IV. s. 3. iscop 52: V. s. 3. hatte
106, 126. Participles present: Ia. spekinde 112; past: Ia. iseȝen 119:
Ic. agunnen 133, ȝegunnen 53, iȝunnen 47, beswonken 136, ȝeborȝen 119,
iborȝen 133, ibroiden 28: II. ȝeswiken 57, ȝewriten 23: V. ihoten 29,
128. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 1. hadde 46, 47; 3. besouhte 84,
ȝeherde 93, hadde 7, sade 75 &c.; pl. 3. andeden 123, namden
117. Participles present: liuiende 16, þenchinde 59, wuniende 60; past:
betaht 7, ȝeluued 90, icleped 58, ihafd 56, ieiht 96 (geīecan),
unbiliefde adj. s. d. 33. Minor Groups: wat pr. s.
136, wot 137, witen pr. pl. 41, wite 2. pr. imp. 73; auh
pr. s. 17; scal 1. pr. s. 79, scalt 2. pr. s.
38 (3), sculen pr. pl. 1, 74, scule 8, scolde pt. s. 129;
miht 2. pr. s. 98, 139, mai pr. s. 34 (3), muȝe 2. pr.
s. subj. 97, muge pr. s. subj. 125, mihte pt. s.
5 (3), mihten pt. pl. 13 (3), mihtin 122; bien inf. 72, 87,
am 1. pr. s. 59, is pr. s. 23, nis 103, bieð pr.
pl. 2 (4), bien pr. pl. subj. 12, 15, 105, be 2. imp.
s. 39, was pt. s. 3, waren pt. pl. 77, wære pt. s.
subj. 60, ware 129; wile 1. pr. s. 46 (3), wilt 2. pr.
s. 63 (3), wile 37 (subj. form), wile pr. s. 31 (4),
willeð pr. pl. 16, wile 40 (for willen, subj. form),
woldest 2. pt. s. 49, wolde pt. s. 82, wolden pt.
pl. 39; don inf. 123, dest 2. pr. s. 36, doð pr.
s. 33, dede pt. s. 42, deden pt. pl. 121, idon
pp. 45, 90, don 134.
Dialect: Here, as in the Trinity College manuscript of
the Poema Morale, a scribe of the northern border of the South-Eastern
area has turned a composition in the dialect of the Middle or Western
South into his own, with occasional retention of Southern forms. After a
considerable interval his version was copied with little alteration by
the three scribes of the Stowe manuscript, for the differences between
the sections are mainly graphic and only in a minor degree dialectal. As
a consequence, the language of VV is older than that current at the time
when the
444
copy was made; in some respects older than that of MS. T of the PM., as
in its representation of ā, ā + g, ā +
w. Occasional lapses into OE. forms at the beginning of the
manuscript, such as acwellan inf. VV 9/19, daȝas 27/22 (which
would have been in OE. dagum), have been thought to point to an
OE. original, but they are more probably due to a scribe acquainted with
the older native literature.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are hahte 21, skele 121,
sckelewisnesse 107; an OE. borrowing is stieresmann 3: French are carite
29, cariteð 58, hert 35, prophete 75, richeise 88, (stan) roches 31,
seruise 130, and probably arche 5: offrin 129 is a pre-Conquest Latin
borrowing.
Introduction: The book is imperfect at the
beginning, but probably little has been lost. It opens in the middle of
a confession by a sinful soul of a formidable array of sins, to which
Reason (‘Scadwisnesse,’ 90/62, ‘Ratio,’ 92/135) replies by a series of
discourses on the virtues which will help the soul against its vices.
The first extract, written by the first scribe, is part of this. The
second piece, written by the third hand, concludes the book.
The writer speaks of his work as a compilation from many authors
(93/144). The framework of it may have been suggested by S. Isidore’s
Synonyma de Lamentatione Animae Peccatricis, wherein Homo and Ratio hold
similar alternate discourse (Opera vi. 472), but nothing else. The
author appears to have been acquainted with the writings of Hugh of St.
Victor (d. 1140); he may have borrowed from him (Opera i. 69) the
idea of the contest between Mercy and Truth (VV 113), but the influence
of the older English literature dominates his style, vocabulary, and
mode of thought.
1. hierdes,
pastors: comp. ‘þe selue herdes beð þe lorþewes of holi chiriche,’ OEH
ii. 39/12; ‘se cyning ⁊ se biscop sceoldan beon Cristenra folca hyrdas,’
BH 45/25. lokin, to take care of, preserve: comp. 4/20; ‘ðe
sceaweres ðe lokeden ðe hali burh,’ VV 103/13, 121/11; generally with
acc., but ‘to lokin of mine wrecche lichame,’ VV 17/3. ⁊ =
and, 89/28.
2. ute, in the
cloister.
3. noe: a type of
Christ; the Ark is the Church, a common idea, Ælf. Hom. Cath., ii. 60;
OEH ii. 43/4; AR 142/12, but especially beloved of Hugh of St. Victor,
‘Noe significat Christum sive quemlibet praelatum qui in quantum potest
facit arcam, id est, aedificat Ecclesiam,’ i. 226.
4. þe, with
which: see 46/292 note.
5. mihte . . .
ȝemaked, was able to complete: the last word is more adjective than
participle and its syntax is primitive, comp. ‘hie alle on þone
445
Cyning wærun feohtende oþ þæt hie hine ofslægenne hæfdon,’ AS. Chron.
755 A.D.
8. to liue ⁊ to
londe: a zeugma, bringen has its ordinary meaning with to
londe, but bringen to liue means, preserve alive, without any
sense of motion; comp. ‘To lyue God him wolde bringe,’ Gregorius, 269;
similarly ‘to liue go,’ escape death, KH 97, where see note for other
uses of the same kind. Note the variant in 88/16.
10. For none
winde, because of any wind.
11. on, in:
comp. 90/66, 93/147; ‘forsakene on godes awene muðe,’ VV 3/2; ‘wakien on
godes seruise,’ id. 3/27, and often in this text. See 83/15 note.
13. kennes: see
81/80 note.
15. leðebeiȝe,
pliant, ready to obey: OE. leoþu-bīege, supple-jointed; the
figurative use is noteworthy: comp. ‘leðebeih ⁊ hersum gode,’ VV 109/3:
‘Soð was leðebei,’ id. 113/26.
16. liuiende
lande, land of the living: glossed ‘terra uiuentium,’ VV 41/11.
18. ‘Qui vos audit, me
audit: et qui vos spernit, me spernit,’ S. Luke x. 16.
20. fullȝewiss:
see 32/40.
21. hahte,
danger: OWScand. hǣtta; see Björkman, 99.
22. hoc mare
magnum: Ps. ciii. 25. bitere: probably from ‘Porro iuxta
allegoriam, mare sive stagnum quod cum suis transire desiderat
[Dominus], tenebrosus amarusque seculi praesentis accipitur aestus,’
Bede, ed. Giles, xi. 70 (comment on S. Luke viii. 22).
23. Ascendunt
&c.: Ps. cvi. 26.
26. deules
blastes: comp. ‘Al so al holi chirche, þet is schip icleoped, schal
ancren . . . so holde þet tes deofles puffes, þet beoð
temptaciuns, hit ne ouerworþe,’ AR 142/12: ‘flante vento diabolicarum
suggestionum,’ Hugh of S. Victor, ii. 483.
28. strænges,
strands. The expressions ‘rihte ileaue,’ ‘soðe luue’ are of common
occurrence; comp. 113/49, 189/435; OEH ii. 47/25, 103/28; Orm 46/1407,
and for the latter, Ælf. Lives, i. 354/247. But ‘faste hope’ is unusual;
comp. VV 15/27, 39/1. For hope te, see 178/89.
31. nexin,
soften: OE. hnexian: beside the ordinary neschen, OE.
hnescian. This text has ‘nexxin,’ 145/33, ‘nexce herte,’ 63/26:
these forms do not apparently occur anywhere else.
32. watere of
wisdome: suggested by ‘Sitierunt, et invocaverunt te (sapientiam),
et data est illis aqua de petra altissima, et requies sitis de lapide
duro,’ Wisdom xi. 4. Comp. ‘flowinde wettres of wittie wordes,’ SK 687.
ðar . . . to: see 1/3.
446
33. unbiliefde,
unbelieving, as though not possessed of belief: OE. gelīefed,
believing, a believer. With 33-44, comp. OEH ii. 29/33-36.
35. The unwise man, if
he have any generous purpose, makes shipwreck (on the stone-rock of the
unbeliever), because the latter collides with his good will and wrecks
it by using such words as these. The figure of the ship and the rock is
continued in this sentence; the change of subject in ‘he hert’ is not
uncommon.
37. spelleres,
talkers, preachers. For hadede, see 4/20.
38. Holthausen puts a
comma after mannen, making Wile ðu subjunctive, if thou wilt,
which was no doubt the intention of the author.
39. be trewe
mann: equivalent to our, Be a man!
42. te gode:
comp. 30/21.
45. Hie &c.
Charity has led me into talking about it at greater length than I had
intended. Comp. ‘Ich hadde iþoht ðat ic naht ne scolde writen bute of
ðese haliȝe mihtes . . . ðanne am ic iladd ut oðerhwile, ær ic
hit ouht wite, to oðer þinge,’ VV 53/15.
47. lokest
aweiward, avertest thy face: comp. ‘a-weiward his heued
heold; [&] nolde hit ihere,’ L, MS. O 8878.
48. heuiliche
latst, appearest to be wearied; in common phrase, look bored.
51. me to
helpe, for my help: comp. 85/107; 176/24 note.
53. grundwall,
foundation: comp. ‘Ne mai no mann leiȝen oðer grundwall’
(= fundamentum), VV 93/30.
54. forðbringe,
bring forward, utter; perhaps here, build up on the foundation already
laid.
58. halwende,
sanctifying, purifying: OE. hālgian, comp. 130/78.
59. for ðan
&c., because I am very pensive as long as I dwell in this wretched
body: comp. ‘Ðarhwile ðe ðu art,’ VV 75/9, translating ‘Dum es.’ This
archaic use of the particle þe is characteristic of the writer: so ‘ðar
ðe,’ 91/109, VV 69/25; ‘ðarof ðe,’ id. 69/26;
‘ðar to ðe,’ id. 73/15; ‘ðo ðe,’ id. 49/15;
ðat, what, in l. 60 is elsewhere ‘þat ðe,’ VV 65/16: Ðas
þe in l. 63 is for Ðas.
61. Comp. ‘for ðan ȝif
hit ne helpð one, hit helpð an oðer,’ VV 53/18.
63. Ðas þe,
according to that, according to what you say, so then: adverbial use
descended from OE. þæs, gen. sing. neut. of the article
se, with þe annexed, as sometimes in OE.; so too in ‘Harke nu ðe
formeste forbysne ðe he mankenn sceawede ðas þe we cunnen understonden,’
VV 49/12, where the meaning is, so far as we can understand. Otherwise
þas þe, þes þe is regularly associated in ME. with a comparative adverb,
as ‘ðu scalt hauen ðas te more iswink,’ VV 75/4.
447
65. Qui
&c.: S. John viii. 47.
66. on iþanke:
comp. 12/4.
67. ‘Qui enim sine
humilitate virtutes congregat, in ventum pulverem portat,’ S. Greg. Op.
i. 1461. Alcuin quotes with substitution of ‘bona opera agit’ for
‘virtutes congregat,’ Op. ii. 132.
72. wið
healden, restrained; which gives an inadequate sense: omit wið,
which is due to the preceding wið, the meaning then is, without which
(humility) no other virtue can be possessed to any advantage or use.
Comp. ‘for ðan hie (humility) is þe swa swiðe nedfull ðat tu ne miht
none oðre mihte habben ne healden . . . bute þu ðese habbe,’
VV 53/21. wiðhealden has the meaning, keep company with, associate with,
in ‘he is to luuiȝen ⁊ to wiðhealden,’ VV 101/5, 101/10.
73. Wite ðu to
soðe, know thou for a truth; a favourite expression of the writer,
but with te, not to, as at VV 41/32, 55/23, 59/11, 69/28, ‘wite ðu te
fulle soðe,’ 65/22: comp. the variants at 70/158, 76/7, 142/73, 143/75,
91, and, ‘wite ȝe hit to wisse,’ SJ 27/16. ðe . . .
spekeð: comp. 81/77.
74. inede,
needy persons: comp. the ME. verbs ineden, neden; OE.
genīedan.
75. Fuerunt
&c.: Ps. xli. 4.
77.
Of—teares, of tears of another kind; so 91/101.
78. Lacrimis
&c.: Ps. vi. 7.
79. Comp. ‘Sit animae
beatae culcitra conscientiae suae puritas: sit cervical aut capitale
tranquillitas: coopertorium securitas: et in hoc strato delectabiliter
dormiat et feliciter requiescat,’ Hugh of St. Victor, iii. 236.
82. þar of ðe,
whereof, of what: comp. ‘Ðar is ðin herte ðarof ðe ðu mæst þenkst,’ VV
69/26.
85. Dispone
&c.: Isa. xxxviii. 1. Omit ⁊ before tu.
86. cwide,
legacy.
88. lað: comp.
189/412: richeise is accusative.
89. dede þat
betste, took the best course.
90.
for—idon, exerted myself cheerfully for love of thee.
91. god inȝied:
referring to Hezekiah’s words, ‘Memento quaeso quomodo ambulaverim coram
te in veritate et in corde perfecto.’
93. hamward, on
his way home; ‘antequam egrederetur Isaias mediam partem atrii, factus
est sermo Domini ad eum, dicens: Revertere,’ 4 Kings xx. 4. Comp. ‘þa ða he hamwerd
wæs,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 318/181, ii. 150/110; ‘eoten wæs ut-weard,’
Beowulf, 761; ‘þiderward,’ 83/18; ‘þa wes it cud ouer al þe burh þet þe
helind wes þiderward,’ OEH i. 3/15; ‘is towerd on worulde,’ Ælf. Lives,
ii. 170/28. These expressions are elliptical; farende or the like is to
be understood.
448
94. Vidi
&c.: Isa. xxxviii. 5. lacrimam tuam: so Codex Amiatinus. The
Vulgate has ‘lacrymas tuas’.
97. muȝe
forðdraȝen, art able to produce from thy store; L. depromere.
99. forð mid:
see 1/19. Ciba &c.: Ps. lxxix. 6 (adapted).
104. alswa alswa
. . . alswa, even as . . . even so.
107.
sckelewisnesse, skillwiseness, discretion: OWScand. skilvíss.
108. beheue:
comp. 74/225, 127/346: a favourite word of this writer, see VV 99/25,
107/28, 109/8: comp. ‘Geþyld is micel mægen · and mannum nyd-behefe,’
Ælf. Lives, ii. 166/142; ‘hemseluen to unbihefe,’ OEH ii. 121/24.
109. moder:
‘Haec dico ut discretionem, quae omnium virtutum et mater et nutrix est,
detegam,’ Ælredi Regula; ‘imetnesse is alre mihta moder,’ OEH i. 101/24;
‘Witerlice meteȝung is alræ mæȝene moder,’ Twelfth Cent. Hom. 90/29.
110. rixin is
a mistake due to the preceding rixið: the text, as it stands, must mean,
who wills to rule and follow her. hlesten is the word associated with
folȝin in VV, comp. ‘for ðan ðe hie nolden godes lare hlesten ne
folȝin,’ 61/16, ‘Hlest ⁊ folȝih se ðe wile,’ 77/9.
111. vitas
patrum: see pp. 551, 2, ed. Roswey, Antwerp, 1628. sume sal,
at a time when a number of the hermits of the Thebaid came to visit S.
Antony, ‘perfectionis inquisitione et collationis gratia.’
112.
on—cumen: ‘quaenam virtus . . . certe ad Deum recto tramite
firmoque gressu perduceret.’
115. annesse:
‘remotiorem vitam et eremi secreta.’ Comp. ‘Munec mai ut-faren mid
ileaue in to hermitorie, oðer in to onnesse te wunien,’ VV 73/24. The
same word means unity at 93/148.
116. to lokin
is syntactically on a level with herborȝin, but has to, because
it is separated from ðurh: comp. ‘Hit bieð sume þat non imeðe ne cunnen
of hem seluen to feden,’ VV 139/23.
117. on
manieskennes wisen: see 81/80 and 132/9.
118. on: S.
Antony. Ðurh &c. Holthausen translates, ‘Through all these we
have seen and heard a great many saved, and many by all these named
virtues perished, because discretio failed them,’ which gives an
unsatisfactory sense for the second clause and involves a forced meaning
for ‘of’ as equivalent to ðurh (for which the only near parallels in VV
are 97/19, 103/3), and a meaning in which it would hardly be used
immediately after ‘manie’; ‘inamde’ (elsewhere ‘forenammde,’ VV 15/29)
is superfluous. The original is, ‘Omnia quidem haec quae dixistis,
necessaria sunt et utilia sitientibus Deum: sed his principalem tribuere
gratiam nequaquam nos innumerabiles multorum fratrum casus et
experimenta permittunt.
449
Nam saepe vidimus fratres has observationes tenentes repentino casu
deceptos, eo quod in bono quod coeperant discretionem minime tenuerunt.’
The English appears to be corrupt: mihten belongs to the former ðesen;
the second alle is repeated from the first; under the superfluous inamde
lurks the equivalent for repentino casu, which would hardly be
overlooked by the translator; perhaps in a munde, in a handwhile,
in a moment. The sense would then be, We have seen and heard of very
many persons protected (comp. VV 73/7) by all these virtues, and (we
have seen) many of these lapse in a moment, because discretion failed
them. This meaning of mund is not in the dictionaries, and the evidence
for it is slight, but comp. Varnhagen’s note on ‘boten a mounde’ in
Anglia, iii. 283. More usual, but less appropriate, would be, in a
niede.
125. muge is
subjunctive after se ðe, indefinite, whosoever, as is wile in ‘Weriȝe se
ðe wile,’ VV 89/33, but se ðe, he who, is followed by the indicative,
‘se ðe luueð,’ VV 41/7 (= qui diligit), ‘se ðe swereð,’ id. 79/3
(= qui iurat). There seems to be no distinction in meaning between
‘Bie war, ȝif ðu wilt,’ VV 59/2, and ‘Bie war, ȝif ðu wile,’ id. 61/8,
but the forms of this verb are confused, see 89/37. Note also the
indicative after ‘hwat hwat,’ 92/134.
126. to
laten, to be passed over without mention, to be omitted.
127. ðe—to
sant, to whom God sends it.
128. This is from S.
Gregory, ‘Quia nimirum virtus boni operis perseverantia est; et voce
Veritatis dicitur: Qui autem perseveraverit usque in finem, hic salvus
erit. Et praecepto legis cauda hostiae in sacrificio iubetur offerri. In
cauda quippe finis est corporis; et ille bene immolat qui sacrificium
boni operis usque ad finem debitae perducit actionis,’ In Evang.
Homiliae, ii. 25, § 1. Similarly S. Isidore, v. 427; Alanus, 78.
See Lev. iii. 9.
129. alle
dier, a subject without a verb; the construction is altered.
132. S. Matt. x. 22,
xxiv. 13.
136.
beswonken, worked at; like L. elaborare, with acc. as in OE.
he it wat &c.: a favourite expression of the author, as VV
21/3, 95/26; ‘He it wot ðe all wot,’ id. 75/2.
137. wissin . . .
warnin: so ‘wissedest ⁊ warnedest,’ VV 21/27.
139. twene,
doubt: OE. twȳn.
143. Hvte we,
let us: comp. 175/422; ‘Wuten we fare,’ VV 23/22.
147. on, in:
see 83/15.
149. ne
heriȝe: see 25/241 note.
151. ofte ⁊
ȝelome: see 32/47.
153. implet:
a variant, without authority, for imple.
Facsimile: Palæographical
Society
anomalous æ unchanged
ea before r ... halt 40
(heald)
40,
ēa is ea ... ȝīet is
ȝiet 90, 95.
text unchanged: apparent error for gīet
a + g is aȝ, laȝe 128,
131, forðdraȝen 97
forðdragen
59. ... ‘ðarof ðe,’ id. 69/26
open quote missing
‘ðar to ðe,’ id. 73/15
close quote missing
93. ... Comp. ‘þa ða he hamwerd
wæs,’
Comp,
450
Manuscripts: i. Cotton Caligula A 9, British Museum (C);
on vellum, 216 × 153 mm.; 192 folios in double columns of 32 to 34
lines, written by two scribes in the first quarter of the thirteenth
century. It is bound up with another manuscript containing the Owl and
the Nightingale and other pieces.
ii. Cotton Otho C 13, British Museum (O); injured in the fire of
1731; on vellum; 145 folios in double columns of 38 lines; written in
one hand, of the third quarter of the thirteenth century.
C is by far the better representative of the original, yet O alone
not infrequently preserves it in details; though fifty years later than
C, it has probably been transmitted through fewer copies than the
latter. Mistakes common to both versions have been derived from an
intermediate manuscript X. O represents a recension of X, made by a man
who was mainly interested in the chronicle of events, a matter-of-fact
person who stood in a critical attitude to his exemplar and took no
pleasure in simile, epic repetition or descriptive touch. Under his
handling, much that is characteristic of the author disappears.
Facsimiles: Of C. Madden, i. p. xxxv, and New
Palaeographical Society, plate 86. Of O. Madden, i. p. xxxviii.
Editions: Madden, Sir Frederic, Laȝamons Brut, London,
1847. Of the present extract: Mätzner, E., Altenglische Sprachproben, i.
19-39; Morris, R., Specimens, 64-86.
Literature: Manuscripts and
Texts. *Bartels, L., Die Zuverlässigkeit der Handschriften von
Laȝamons Brut, Halle, 1913; Seyger, R., Beiträge zu Laȝamons Brut,
Halle, 1912; Stratmann, F. H., ES iii. 269; iv. 96, 7; v. 375;
Zessack, A., Die beiden Handschriften von Layamons Brut und ihr
Verhältnis zu einander, Breslau, 1888. Sources. Brown, A. C. L., Welsh Traditions
in Layamon’s Brut. Modern Philology, i. 95-103; Imelmann, R., Laȝamon
Versuch über seine Quellen, Berlin, 1906; Krautwald, H., Layamon’s Brut
verglichen mit Wace’s Roman de Brut, Breslau, 1887; Wülker, R., Ueber
die Quellen Layamons, Paul-Braune, Beiträge, iii. 524-55. Phonology. Bowen, E. W., Open and close ē in
Layamon. Anglia, xvi. 380; Lucht, P., Lautlehre der älteren
Laȝamonhandschrift, Berlin, 1905; *Luhmann, A., Die Überlieferung von
Laȝamons Brut, Halle, 1906; Stratmann, F. H., Das paragogische N in
Laȝamon. Anglia, iii. 552, 3. Grammar.
Bohnke, M., Die Flexion des Verbums in Laȝamons Brut, Berlin, 1906;
Funke, O., Kasus-Syntax bei Orrm und Laȝamon, Wien, 1907; Hoffmann, P.,
Das grammatische Genus in Laȝamons Brut,
451
Halle, 1909, completed in Morsbachs Studien, xxxvi; Lange, H., Das
Zeitwort in . . . Laȝamon’s Brut, Strassburg, 1906; Lichtsinn,
P., Der syntaktische Gebrauch des Infinitivs in Laȝamon’s Brut, Kiel,
1913. Vocabulary. Monroe, B. S.,
French Words in Laȝamon, Modern Philology, iv. 559. Metre. Brandstädter, K., Stabreim und Endreim in
Layamons Brut, Kirchhain, 1912; Luick, K., Anglia, Beiblatt, xii. 37, 8;
Trautmann, M., Anglia, ii. 153-73; Bartels, as above. Style. Regel, K., Spruch und Bild im Layamon, Anglia,
i. 197-251; *Seyger, as above. Antiquarian. Kolbe, M., Schild, Helm und Panzer zur
Zeit Laȝamons, Breslau, 1891; Krautwald, as above. B. S. Monroe, in
Modern Philology, iv. 559-67, gives a detailed bibliography.
Phonology: (1) of C.
Oral a is a, fare 176, habben 189, but færeð 43, færen 45,
hæfuest 50; uerden 48 is from fēran. a before nasals is
normally o, comp 120, moni 93 (5 times), but whanene 31,
whænnenen 27, þenne 182, muni 113; a before lengthening groups is
o, hond 201, imong 141, but and 9 &c., andswerden 11 (6),
answarede 51 (4), angles 34. æ is a (48), e (20),
æ (16), after 179, æfter 186, bad 241, bed 298, hafde 212 (7),
hæfde 233 (3), hehde (for hefde) 69, wes 8 (5), wæs 78, nes 104 (3),
heleðes 248, sætterdæi 75. e is normally e, bereð 44,
sellic 267 (often elsewhere seollic), speken 12; before lengthening
groups, ende, uelde 211, hende 273; but æ is common, spækeð 159,
ænde 34, 109, fæld 209, hændest 95, hændeliche 99; Hængest 89 (8) is the
common form; a occurs in fareð 276 (ferian), ualde 203, þa
15, 39, 68, u in sugge 52, suggeð 167; eo in heoreð 58 (if
from herian):
bærnan gives berneð 108, forbærnan, forbærnen 165,
ærnan, ærneð 108, mengan, mæingde 292, beside mengde C
15530 (Morsbach, § 107, anm. 3). i is i, blisse 146,
wille 25, but u in nulle 191, nuste 264, us 62, wulle 25, and the
pres. forms of willan; before lengthening groups i, child
44, þinge 61. o is o, folc 36, hope 58, but durste 137,
dursten 158; on is mostly an or o, once æn 211; before
lengthening groups o, bord 215, wolde 20 (4), wolden 19, 192, but
walden 12, 42. u is u, burh 173, cumen 137, iwune 117, but
ilomp 122, sonedæi 75; before lengthening groups u, funde 298,
murnede 293. y is normally u, cume 118, wunne 188, but
kime 263, kineborne 168, kineliche 173, kinelond 56, 192; before
lengthening groups u, guldene 257, vmbe 36: king 139 is the
regular form, but kenge 94.
ā is regularly a, hali 66, ihaten 34, but æ in
bræd 218, bræ[d]ne 209, mære 42, særi 103; before two consonants
a, hatte 32, ladlic 294, madmes 134, but hæhte 59 (7).
ǣ1 is æ, bilæfuen 24, hæðene 8 (3), sæ 2,
spræde 210, or e, bitechen 191, breden 250, stenene 222, but
a in bitache 173, haðene 295 (possibly Scandinavian), ea
in leare 150; before two consonants æ, ælche 129, æuer 44, læfdi
74, lædden 259, næuere 176, or a, alc 51,
452
alchen 280, auere 7, nauere 23, vnwraste 80, wraððe 150, but e in
arerde 223, elchen 21. ǣ2 is æ, æten 251, dæde
197, þræd 218, or e, deden 96, vnimete 254, but eo in
weore 8, weoren 2 (9), neoren 138, and a in mare 223; before two
consonants, þærfore 175, setten 250. ē is e, greten 144,
ueden 190, but heo 73, þæ 63, 231; before two consonants, imetten 18,
lette 283, but igrætten 18 (r. w. imetten), iuædde 100.
ī is i, bliðe 24, 116, swiðe 2, fiftene 36, but bluðeliche
282, swuðe 129. ō is o, com 113, godne 49, most 110, but
neoðeles 83. ū is u, bute 176, runen 148, 159, but ronenen
156. ȳ is u, biclused 177, cudðe 98, iscrudde 100, but
forþi 48, 66, þa 8, 184.
ea before r + cons. is a, ȝare 224, iȝarked 238,
240, and æ, hærm 8, 295, kærf 217; the i-umlaut is seen in
awariede 81, and, before a lengthening group, in ferde 85. ea
before l + cons. is regularly a, al 37, and the numerous
forms of eall, scat 189, but hælf 117, helue 129; before
lengthening groups, a, alde 28, anwalde 83, athalden 20, halden
150 &c., walden 71, but athælde 83, hælden 13, holden 143, olden
187: the i-umlaut is a before lengthening groups, aldeste
29, halde 290, iuald 109, but æ in ælderen 193, ælderne 69.
eo before r + cons. is eo, feor 160, heorte 288,
but hærcne 147, werpeð 37; before lengthening groups, ȝeorne 288: the
wur group has u, iwurðe 90, wurðliche 190, wurðscipe 71.
The i-umlaut before lengthening groups is seen in ȝirnde 206,
sturne 120, but deorne 148: wiersa is wurse 81, 291. eo
before l + cons. is eo in seolf 81 &c. eo, the
å-umlaut of e, is seen in feole 119, weoli 60; eo,
u- and å-umlaut of i, in cleopien 249 and its
forms, heore 37 &c., seoluer 88, seoððen 96, 97, seoueðe 64, but
hennen 160, iluued 22, and without umlaut, niðer 82. ea after
palatals is a, scal 38, æ, ȝæf 134, e, ȝef 133,
299, and before nasal o, scome 86. ie after ġ is
e, biȝeten 87, ȝeuen 88, and i, biȝite 172, ȝif 201, ȝiuen
297: after sc, æ in schæren 216. ȝef, conj.,
is ȝif 10 &c. eo after ġ is u, ȝunge 160,
ȝungen 187: geond is ȝeond 209. eo after sc is seen
in scolde 241, scolden 45, scullen 24, 39, 68. heom is heom 9;
eom, am 175, æm 24, 263, næm 176.
ēa is usually æ, æc 28, hæne 204, særes 216, slæn 165,
but e in ȝette 242, ȝettest 184, iȝette 206, hehne 102, ileuen
53, 80, a in bad (influenced by bæd) 239; before two
consonants æ, hæfden 87: the i-umlaut is e, bemen
249, dremden 146, heren 13 and its forms, ileueð 53, but æ in
hæren 19, 68, ihærde 264, ihærd 156, i in hiren 184, biliueð 91,
eo in heoreð 58 (if from hīeran), ileoueð 80, 81.
ēo is regularly eo, beon 175 &c., biheold 288, feollen
127, freond 273, leoden 165, þreo 4; the i-umlaut is mostly
wanting, deore 68 (4), freonde, dat. 273, neode 171, 212, but
(fif)tene 36, 233. OE. sīen is seon 27. ēa after a palatal
is seen in ȝer 36, ȝere 44, ȝeuen 76, ȝiuen 73 (4), ȝifuen 72, 76.
gīet is ȝet 65.
453
a + g is aȝ, laȝe 69 (6), ofslaȝen 163, but
dæȝen 69, ofslæȝen 138. æ + g is mostly æi, dæie
23, fæire 18 (9), fræinede 265, mæi 73, mæidene 290, sæide 152, uæin
263, but ai in dai 130, fain 286, mai 174, 204, main 290, maide
266, 283, maiden 282, ei in feire 210, feirest 89, seide 240 (3),
seið 270, æ in færeste 7, æȝ in dæȝe 193, 194. e +
g is generally ei, leide 215, toȝeines 240, þeines 101,
weies 202, but awæi 129, bilæde 220: e + h is seen in
hæhte 225, hæhten 230: i + g in þrien 284, þreoien 277
(influenced by þrēo): i + h in dihteð 67, dihte
135, isihðe 103: o + g, h in hohfulle 156, dohter
181: u + g, h in duȝeðe 141 (6), fluȝen 129, 130,
but floȝen 129, fuhten 127. ā + g is aȝ, aȝene 208,
296, aȝere 201; ā + h is oh, oht 113, ohte 84 (3).
ǣ1 + g, h is seen in fæie 127, bitæht
205, bitæhten 284; ǣ2 + g in maies 182;
ē + g in beyne 168, twene 168 (with loss of g); ī +
g in fridæi 74; ō + g in droȝen 93, inoȝe 134,
sloȝen 126, ofsloȝen 119, vnnifoȝe 130; ō + h in biþohte
111, 142, noht 80, rohten, sohten 10, þohten 122, exceptionally afeoh
188. ea + h, ht is seen in æhtene 234, isæh 116,
mæhti 65, sæh 23, sæxisce 97, sæxelonde 271, but saxelonde 124, 278,
saxisce 114, sexisc 180; the i-umlaut in mihte 46, mihte 58,
nihtes 23. eo + h, ht is mostly i, cnihtes
17, fihte 115, 172, rihten 20, but feht 120, 126, sexte 39, fæhte 155,
sæxte 63, Peohtes 84, 107. ēa + h, is eh, heh 66,
neh 291, æh, hæh 64, 65, hæhliche 16, 190, hæhne 205; ēa +
g gives hæȝe 141, 259: the umlaut is wanting in hæhste 62 (3),
hærre 13, ihæȝed 153. ēo + g, h is seen in driȝen
25, 196, iuaid 175, ræh 291. ā + w appears in nawiht 104;
ī + w in tisdæi 76; ēo + w in acneowe 261,
bleowen 249, neowe 28, 106, treowe 28, eouwer 24 (4), eoure 54, æoure
53, eou 26: feorðe 61, 72 is fēorþa.
The prefix æt is at, atstonde 183, atwite 204;
on is a in afon 178, afeoh 188, among 146, but imong 157
is gemang. oþ is a in aþet 229: o is
levelled to e in whanene 31, whænnenen 27, wunder 213: eo
is written for e in cusseoð 277; i for e in
cristine 294. The glide e is inserted in æuere 132, nauere 23, læuedi
65, næueden 228; i is prefixed in iliue 22, probably by anticipation of
iluued.
w is lost in þong 219, beside þwong 217, 218; for w,
u is written in Cantuarieburi 15, l is lost in scat 189.
m is doubled in icummen 3, n in hennen 160, iborenne 259,
whænnenen 27. n is lost in gome 228, and often in i 137 for
in, iþan 126, iþere 72, a 81 for on: in 240 represents
inn. f is kept in the combinations fd, fn,
hafde 212, læfdi 74, æfne 70, 296, and as a final, hælf 117, initially
after a word ending in a voiceless sound, færeð 43, fain 286, feorr 160,
folc 36. Otherwise it is u, initially, as classified at 365/3-6,
uorð 41, ualde 203, uerden 48, uast 132, uæin 263, ueden 190, uiue 105,
uul 276, 277, medially, bilæuen 39, biuoren 95, uuele 280, deluen
454
221, helue 129; it is written fu in hæfuest 50, bilæfuen 24,
ȝifuen 72, 76, leofue 54, 79. But exceptions are numerous, fare 176,
færen 45, feole 119, fiue 39, forð 39, fforð 14, fuliwis 225, biforen
17, toforen 144, ifaren 105, vfel 78. of is shortened to o 213.
For t, d is written in bed 100, th in bithecheð
276: in bezste 200 (4), z = ts; t is doubled in bett 100, lost in
henges 32, 151, Hænges 55; for tt, ht is written in hæhte
59 &c., if it represents hatte. d is lost in lon 64,
selcuðe 2, 35, walden 71. For þ, d appears in cudðe 98,
dod 86, falled 38, iuald 109, ladlic 294, luted 54, madmes 134, odere
228, 276, swide 120, 236; whar 28 represents hwæðer. sć is
regularly sc, scal 38, scenden 192, monscipe 153, bruttisc 281,
but særes, schæren 216. The stop c is written k before
e, i, also in kærf 217, in other positions c,
castel 173, dronc 283; ah 8 (6) is Anglian ah, WS. ac.
č is ch, ælchen 78, elchen 21, bitechen 191, drenche 272,
muchel 42, richen 154, sechen 49, swulche 23, wulche 53, but alc 51,
swulc 218. ic is ich 22, ic 175; cæster, Chastre 226.
čč is cch in ræcchen 148; cw is qu, queð
147. Palatal g is written ȝ, ȝare 224, ȝirnde 206, hærȝieð
108: a parasitic ȝ appears in iȝeten 252. g is lost finally in
weoli 60, moni 93; it exchanges with w in herberwe 131. čǧ
is gg in sugge 52, 167, ligge 174 &c. Initial h is
lost in lauerd 49, læuedi 65, loten 37, iloten 252, lust 30, lusten 149,
nap 275, ræh 291, and added in hi[s] 36; also medially in hehne 102
(hēanne), whar 61. hw is regularly wh, whæt 27
&c., whar 28, while 237, but wulche 53. In burhȝe 205, burhȝen 251,
the scribe wavers between h and ȝ; elsewhere he writes burhe, burȝen,
burje, buruwe.
(2) Of O. Oral a is a,
ac 8, faren 45; a before nasals is regularly a, fram 203,
gan 92, 207, nam 92, wan 183, wane 189, wanene 27, þanne 204, 282, but
drong 283, isomned 36; a before lengthening groups is o,
among 156, londe 19 (16 times), longe 104, but amang 251, answerede 21,
78, lang 217, þwang 217, 218, onderfang 188: and is and 18, an
133, man, pron., me 276. æ is a, after 186,
bar 257, sat 261, 287, spac 195, 262, nas 104, but þes 292. e is
normally e, beste 238, Dence 229, selliche 2 (seollich O 14409);
before lengthening groups e, ende 109, Englene 262, Englisse 226,
felde 203, but Ænglis 34 (comp. 266/15), Œnglisse 281: forbærnan
is forbearne 165, bearneþ 108; ærnan, erneþ 108; mengde,
meynde 292. i is i, amidde 203, ligge 177, wille 196;
before lengthening groups i, children 187, þing 60, but cheldren
159, þenges 35. The present forms of willan have o,
wolle 20, wolleþ 87, wolt 184, a French writing for u, but nelle
191: ġift is ȝeftes 88, 133. o is o, bolle 257,
dorste 137; before lengthening groups o, borde 215, wolde 19:
on is a 117, 261, an 53; þane 74 (7) descends from LWS.
þane. u is regularly o, borh 191 (4), come 137 (3),
drongken 251, foliwis 225, gomes 2, loue 69, þos 183, wonie 173,
455
but þus 48, 77, vp 38; before lengthening groups it is u, funde
298, grunde 109, hundred 5, 233, but mornede 293, wonder 35. y is
u, Bruttesse 225, cunne 181, custe, clupte 289, dude 117, fulþ
276, lust 269, nuste 264, vuele 21; for u, o is written in
come 118, comes 263, mochel 123 (6), soche 23, 291, woche 53
(hwylc), and before a lengthening group, goldene 257; but
y is i in win 63, winne 188, kinelonde 192, and as usual
in king 50, and e in dedest 162, wercheþ 68.
ā is regularly o, brod 218, ihote 34, 67, non 258, no
23, 204, (nā), on 59 &c., but a 60, 63, an 64, 65; before two
consonants o, loþlich 294, one 214 (ānne), but ane 217,
223, 257, nanne 191, hatte 32 (8), haxede 265: þā is þe 7
&c., þās, þeos 18, 69, 215; þām, þan 1 &c.;
hwām, wan 38. ǣ1 is e, bilefue 24, 46,
erest 262, heþene 8 (3), sprede 210, but bitak 173, bitake 191, bitakest
205 (confusion with tacan), deal 220, heaþene 295, leore 150,
rounded before r, stonene 222 (*stānen); before two consonants
e, arerde 223, ech 185, euere 7, wendesdei 72, but leafdi 65,
ladde 259, wraþþe 150. ǣ2 is e, dedes 87,
onimete 254, sete 250, þere 44, 48, weren 2 (10), but ea in beade
298, reade 110, 171, 298, a in þar 119, þarin 283, þaron 5, þare
37 (4), ware 176, 210, eo in beore 93, eoten 251 (elsewhere
ge-eten, pp., is represented by iheote O 6691, iȝeote O
14952); before two consonants it is a in þarfore 48, 86, adradde
O 7575, ea in sealþe O 25574, and e in wepne O 14838.
ē is e, cweme 184, seche 41, wene 175; before two
consonants, cwemde 139, grette 18, 144, lette 221 (4), OE. lēt:
aȝen 131, toȝenes 240 represent ongēn, togēnes; gē,
pron., is ȝeo, 27, 53, 79; doþ 292, pr. s., has o from plural.
ī is i, bliþe 24, swiþe 2, 51, wif 178 &c., written
always ii in hii 8 (20), and y in tydinge 1 (3); but
bloþeliche 282 (blȳþe), heredmen 67 (? influenced by
heord); before two consonants i, fifþe 62, wisne 214, but
womman 299. ō is o, com 1, soþ 50; before two consonants,
most 110, moste 46. ū is ou, French writing for u, aboute
220, couþe 214, nou 48, þou 20, but u in dun 246, vre 35, 64, vs
20, 45, and o in bote 177, 218. ȳ is regularly u,
biclused 177, cuðen 269, hude 202, lutel 206, prude 254, scrude 190:
þȳ is þe 8, 184.
ea before r + cons. is regularly a, harm 8,
iȝarked 238, ȝarue 224. The i-umlaut is represented by deorne
148, which points to Anglian e. ea before l + cons.
is regularly a, al 22 &c., falleþ 38, halt 275, halle 99,
half 117, salt 189, wal 222; before lengthening groups o, anwolde
83, atholde 20, 83, biholde 209, 223, holde 143, 150: the
i-umlaut is seen in elder 29, heoldre 187, falleþ 109 (Ang.
fællan). eo before r + cons. is eo in heorte
288, e in hercne 147, werpeð 37, o in for 203; before a
lengthening group eo in ȝeorne 288: words of the wur group
have o, worsipe 26, 68, worþliche 190, iworþe 91; the
i-umlaut is o, forst 26, ȝornde 206: wyr is
represented
456
in worse 291, 292. eo before l + cons. is eo in
seolue 113, seolf 209. The u-umlaut of a is wanting in
care 123, 176. eo, u- and å-umlaut of i,
gives cleopede 230, soueþe 64, and analogically ileued 22, but
heora is hire 69 &c. ea after palatals is a,
sal 89, e, ȝef 133 (3), before nasal, a, same 86.
ie after g is e, biȝete 172, ȝeue 88, ȝefue 69, ȝef
201. ȝef, conj., is ȝif 20. eo after g is
o, ȝonge 159, 187; after sc, o, solde 45, 178.
eom is ham 24, 175, nam 176; heom, heom 69 (4).
ēa is divided between ea, dead 175, deaþe 46, slean
165, and e, bileue 53, 79, gret 63, lefue 92, lesing 50: the
i-umlaut is represented by bilefeþ 53, ihure 149; before two
consonants by ihord 50 (4). ēo is regularly eo, beo 27
&c., deor 43; before two consonants, biheold 246, 288, freond 273,
274; but biful 122, 140, ful 45: bitwine 167 descends from
betwinum: deore 88, 236, freond, dat., 273, neod 38, 171
are without umlaut. OE. gīet is ȝet 65. ēa after g
is e, ȝer 36, ȝere 44.
a + g is aȝ, daȝes 69, ofslaȝe 138
(ofslagen), and aw, lawe 285. æ + g is
mostly ai, dai 23, faire 18 (7), mai 173, saiþ 273, saide 51 (5),
or ay, mayde 282, moneday 70, but ei in seide 19, 240,
seiþ 270, tisdei 70, wendesdei 72. æ + h occurs in iveiþed
175. e + g is ei, leide 220, oþerweies 122, or
ey, awey 129, but ai in laide 215. e + h
occurs in hehte 162, 225; i + h in sihte 103; o +
h in dohter 181; u + g in floȝe 129. ā +
g is ow, owe 201, owene 208. ā + h is seen
in ohte 84; ǣ1 + h in bitahte 284; ī +
g in friday 74; ō + g in sloȝen 126, ofsloȝen 119;
ō + h in iþohten 122, noht 41, 218. ea + h
is eh, seh 23; the i-umlaut of ea + ht is
i, mihte 210, mihti 60, 65. eo + ht is i,
cnihtes 5, fihte 126, rihte 20, sixte 63, but Peutes 84, 107; the
i-umlaut is represented by nihte 23. ēa + g occurs
in hehȝe 259; ēa + h in heh 64, neh 291: the
i-umlaut in hehest 62. ēo + w is ou, ȝoure
53 &c., ȝou 24, 88, ou 83, but cnouwe 261.
e is added in here 7, ofte 86. on is reduced to an 53,
a 117, and in the prefix of aboute 220, amidde 203; o becomes
e in forte 229. For u, o occurs in onderfang 188,
onimete 254. The suffix -ung is ing in rouning 143,
tydinge 147.
Initial f is once v, vare 176, elsewhere f,
faren 45, fareþ 48; between vowels or vowel and liquid it is u,
v, delue 221, ived 100, iveiþed 175, vuele 21, but bilefeþ 53,
life 46, and before u f is retained, biful 122: fu
is written in bilefue 24, 46, lefue 92, 207, leofue 79, 274, lifue 22,
lofuieþ 286, wifues 43 (5). For t, d is written in bed
100; fifþe 62 (fīfta) is an early instance of the modern form.
d is lost in an 133, answerede 21. For þ, th
appears in deathe 157; ð occurs only in louieð 57. sc is
regularly s, sal 89, same 86, sende 192, solle 24, worsipe 26,
Ænglis 34, but ss in Bruttesse 225, 281, Englisse 226, Œnglisse
281, and c in Dence 229 (Denisc), which appears to
indicate a
457
pronunciation for sc of [s]. The stop c is written
k before e, i, ilke 34, kinelonde 192, and finally
bitak 173, folk 36; nc is ng, dring 282, dringe 273, 275,
dringþ 275, drong 283, drongken 251. č is ch, childe 43,
ech 185, ich 22 (ihc 177), mochel 123, soche 23, 291, speche 266.
Palatal g is regularly written ȝ, aȝen 131, ȝarue 224,
sloȝen 126: hehȝe 259 represents hēage, meynde 292 mengde.
h is added initially in ham 24 &c., haxede 265, heoldre 187,
hifulled 258, himakede 240, hin 131. Initial hl is reduced to
l,
lotes 37, lust 269, hn to n nap 275, hw to
w, wan 38, wanene 27, ware 176, wat 27, wile 237, woche 53.
heo, pron., she, is regularly ȝeo 67 &c., comp. Orm’s
ȝho, 112/2.
Accidence: (1) of C. A peculiar feature of these texts is
the occasional addition of n after a final vowel. This ‘nunnation,’
fairly common in C, rare in O, is marked here by round brackets. Its use
makes it doubtful at times whether a noun or adjective ending in n is a
weak form or a strong form with added n. Strong declension of
masc. and neut. nouns. In the s. n. a.
maide 266, 283, 295 has lost final n. Gen. -es, þunres 73, twines 218: dat. -e, ræde 197, gomene 291, londe 3, vfele 51, crafte(n)
214, cume(n) 24, cunne(n) 188, inne(n) 112, liue(n) 25, rihte(n) 20,
wurðscipe(n) 26; without inflection are ræd 298, gomen 231, kinelond 56,
lond 162, vfel 78, gome (gamene) 228, lon 64, and the proper name
Saturnus 75. The pl. n. a. of masculines ends in -es, cnihtes 17 (6), madmes 134, but cnihten 5, 27,
ridern 233, sunen 105 are weak forms: neuters are ȝer 36, þing 50, wif
43, but haefden 87, loten 37, scipen 4 (3) are weak. Genitives are londe
33, þinge 260, weak forms are ænglene 262, cnihtene 55, 89, and, before
a vowel, cnihten 77, 152, 195: datives have mostly -en, cnihten 155, dæȝen 69, goden 68, scipen 92, 232,
but londes 137, þinge 61. The fem. nouns of the strong declension
have -e in the s. n. a.,
duȝeðe 170, 252, 272, hude 202, 210, dæde 197, ferde 85, duȝeðe(n) 166,
but sæ 2. Gen. -e, duȝeðe 141;
humbre 117 is an indeclinable form: dat. -e, halle 99, helue 129, honde 257, halle(n) 259, but
hælf 117, hond 201. Pl. n. are laȝe(n) 278, 285, probably weak;
d. deden 96, laȝen 163, leoden 295 (from pl. noun lēode),
runen 159, nihtes 23; a. leode(n) 165, 285, rune(n) 148, 156,
probably weak. Nouns of the weak declension have mostly -e in all cases of the singular, but iueren 276, monen
76, læfdi 74 are dative, læuedi 65 acc.: the plural has -en throughout, n. gumen 2, ileuen 53, 80;
d. iueren 233; a. bemen 249, nomen 231. The minor
declensions are represented by mon s. n. 41, wimmon 180,
monne s. d. 205, mon s. a. 214, wimmon 299, men
pl. n. 7 &c., wimmonne(n) pl. g. 270, monnen pl.
d. 112 (5), hiredmonnen 157, scipenmonnen 6 (for scipmonnen),
cunnesmen pl. a. 98; burh s. n. 228,
s. a. 173, 191, 223, burhȝe 205 (? confusion with pl.
burga), burhȝe(n)
458
s. d. 251; broðer s. n. 29; dohter
s. d. 181; freond s. n., freonde
s. d. 273; walden s. n. 71; childe
s. d. 43, child s. a. 44, children pl. d.
187.
Adjectives, which in OE. end in a vowel, have e in all cases, bliðe
116, deore 181, ȝare 224, hende 287, mare 223, sturne 120, vnimete 254,
wilde 43; those in -ig lose g, hali 66, mæhti 65, weoli 60. Of
the weak declension are s. n. cristine 294, holde 154,
leofue 274, d. bare 158, quicke 25, a. feire 210, hæðene
193, haðene 295. Strong inflections are s. d. m. richen
154, soðen 26, fæire 211, hæȝe 141, hæðene 205, s. d. neut.
uncuðe 40, s. a. m. brædne 209, hæhne 205 (with
burg f.), hehne 102, godne 49, guldene 257, stenene 222,
wisne 214, but long, smal 217 are not inflected,
s. a. f. gode 136, kineliche 173, stronge 85.
mycel is s. n. muchel 42, d. muchele f.
171, a. muchele m. 221 (but dic is usually f. in
L), muche 220, muchele f. 223, muchel neut. 201, pl.
n. muchele 234: āgen gives aȝene s. n. neut. wk.
296, aȝere s. d. f. 201, aȝene s. d. neut.
208. The plural of all adjectives ends in -e, except særi pl. n. 103 (sārig),
dæde(n) 110, ȝungen d., olden 187. OE. ān is
s. n. an 59, 64, 161, a 218, 267, g. anes m.
202, d. ane m. 140, 141, 203, 213, an neut. 51,
a. ænne m. 173, 209, 214, enne (ende) 211, with
d. uelde 211, 217, ane 257, a 153, anne f. 65, ane 173,
212, 223, an neut. 240, a 215: nān is s. n. na
41, d. nane neut. 47, nan 228, a. nane f.
191, nan neut. 281: bēgen is beyne 168. Adjectives used as
nouns with inflection are hæne s. n. m. 204, hæhste 62,
bezste s. d. 238, fæie pl. n. 127, ælderen pl.
g. 193, ælderne 69. Comparatives end in -e, mære 42, mare 8; the superlative has weak inflection
in aldeste s. n. m. 29, bezste 268, hæhste
s. a. f. 69, but strong in aðelest 33, fæirest 55, 89,
152, 270, hæhst 155, hendest 77, 95, 195; plurals are færeste n.
7, bezste 200, 256, deoreste 244.
The personal pronouns are ich 22, ic 175, me, we, us, þu, þe, ȝe,
eou. The pronoun of the third person is s. n. he m.
16, heo 73, heo f. 66, hit neut. 5; d. him
m. 72, heom 71, hire f. 74, 224; a. hine m.
13, 230 (with burg f.), 275, heo f. 66, 225; pl.
n. heo 3 &c., d. heom 9, a. 67. Reflexives are þe
seoluen 166, hine 111, him seoluen 145: definitive, seolf 81, 209:
possessives, s. mi n. m. 32; mine d. m.
83, mire f. 181, 199, 201, mine neut. 22 (7);
mine a. f. 149, 197, mi
neut. 182; pl. a. mine 182; s. þin
n. m. 154, þine 170, þine d. m. 154, 197, 263,
þire f. 171, þine neut. 183, 186, a. m. 153
(possibly f., the nouns in -scipe are mostly f. in
L), f. 166, þi neut. 108, 165, þin 196; pl. þine
n. 167, d. 155, a. 165; his 10, hire 232; ure 35;
eoure 54, eouwer 24 (4), æoure 53, heore 37. The definite article is
s. þe n. m. 29, 218, þæ 63, 231, þa 15, 39, þe
f. 224, þæ 228, þa 238, þat neut. 36, þe 43, þas
g. m. 292, þere f. 117, þan d. m. 4, 40
(with leode f.), þa 73 (miswritten for þan), þere
f. 3, 72, 217, þene 75 (miswritten for þere),
459
þan neut. 1, 126, 136, 253, 290, þene a. m. 72 (7),
þane 139, þa f. 174, 193, þat neut. 283, (for) þi
instr. 48, 66, þa 8, 184, 252; pl. þa n. 7 &c.,
þan d. 6, 137, 187, þa a. 229, 285. Þat is used
demonstratively, 8, 277, 283, 266 (with speche f.), 34 (with ænde
d. m.); the article is also used pronominally in vppen þan
þe, upon whom 38. The compound demonstrative is s. þes
n. m. 162, þis neut. 7, 278, þas d. f.
117, þisse neut. 19, 162, þissen 285, þis 56, þas
a. f. 215, þis neut. 116, 178, 209, 280; pl.
þas n. 17, 79, 169, a. 231. The relatives are þe, þat 7,
150 (= that which), þa 58, 68, 96, 105, 172, 174; þer
. . . on, on which, 210. Interrogatives are whæt 27 (3), what
31 (4), wulche pl. n. 53, the correlative is swulchere
s. d. f. 103, swulche s. d. neut. 231,
pl. n. 23: ilca is ilke s. n. m. 237,
275, ilken s. d. m. 34, ilke pl. a. 285.
Indefinites are me 276; oðer s. n. m. 29, odere d.
neut. 228, oder a. m. 276, oðer a. neut. 283,
oðere pl. n. 164; anoðer s. n. neut. 122; ælches
s. g. m. 202, ælche d. m. 203, f.
129, neut. 155, 291, aelchen 78, 185, alchen 280, elchen 21, alc
51; æueralche s. d. neut. 44; æi s. n. f.
272, a. f. 205; nohtes g. s. 82; moni 93, 153,
286, muni 113, pl. monie 126, 130; feole 119; al s. n.
neut. 37, alle d. f. 244, neut. 22, al 56, alle
a. m. 130, al 109, f. 197, pl. alle n.
99, all 110, alre g. 33 (8), alle d. 61, 68, al 112, alle
a. 50, 135.
Four-fifths of the infinitives end in -en; cleopien 249 is the only infinitive of the second
weak conjugation; there are no examples in -in or -i; those in -e are athælde 83, bilæue 46, cuðe 158, ligge
174, liðe 39, 92, 207, 243, ræde 171, spræde 210, all at the end of line
or half-line, cume 164, iwurðe 90: contract verbs are afon 178, slæn
165. The dat. inf. is not inflected. Presents are s. 1.
habbe 22, libbe 174; 2. ȝettest 184, hæfuest 50; 3. bereð 44, bitecheð
276, dihteð 67, drinkeð 275, fareð 276, falled 38, fordemed 170,
exceptionally gladieð 272; contracted are halt 275, seið 270, sæið 274,
sæiðe 273 (miswritten for sæið); pl. 1. biliueð 91, luuieð 57; 2.
haldeð 193, luted 54; 3. ærneð 108, cusseoð 277, liggeð 82, hærȝieð 108,
hatieð 157, luuieð 66, spilieð 159, wunieð 160, iuald 109
(gefiellaþ): subjunctive s. 1. fare 176, habbe 182; 2.
biȝite 172, bitache 173, habbe 205, sugge 52: imperative s. 2.
afeoh 188, drinc 282, hærcne 147, lust 30, 269. Past of Strong Verbs: I
a. s. 1. sæh 23; 3. bad 241, 297, bed 298, ȝæf 134, ȝef 133, 299,
isæh 116, queð 147, sæt 261, sat 287, spæc 195; pl. 3. æten 251,
setten 250: I b. s. 3. bar 257, com 113 (4), nom 92, 207, 215;
pl. 3. comen 1, 235 (11), come 229; subj. s. 3. come 241:
I c. s. 3. bigon 221, dronc 283, funde 298 (weak form), gon 92 (3), ilomp
122, 140, kærf 217; pl. 3. drunken 146, 251, fuhten 127, gunnen
14, 249: II. pl. 3. driuen 229: III. s. 3. bad 239;
pl. 3. fluȝen 129, 130, floȝen 129: IV. s. 3. scop 224,
stod 136 (3); pl. 1. uerden 48 (weak form from
460
fēran); 3. droȝen 93, sloȝen 126, ofsloȝen 119: V. s. 3. biheold 246, 288,
hæhte 225 (weak form), lette (weak form), 283; passive, s. 1.
hatte 32; 3. hatte 64, hæhte (hatte) 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 161,
162, if it be not the active form with passive meaning; pl. 3.
bleowen 249, feollen 127, hæhten 230, hetten 250. Participles past: I a.
biȝite 212, iȝeten 252: I. b. iborenne adj. pl. 259, (kine)
borne pl. 168, icumen 2 (6), icummen 3, icume 117, ouercumen 128:
III. iloten 252: IV. ifaren 105, ofslæȝen 138, ofslaȝen 163, atstonde
183: V. ihaten 34, ihate 67, ihalden 102, 279, underfon 241. Past of
Weak Verbs: s. 3. andswerede 21, arerde 223, bilæde 220, fræinede
265 (gefrægnan), ȝette 242, hafde 212 (5), hæfde 233, hehde (for
hefde) 69, bitæhte(n) 284, hæfde(n), 214, næuede(n) 228; pl. 3.
andswerden 11, cleopeden 226, halde 290. Participles past: biclused 177,
bitæht 205, ibrusted 256, iȝarked 238, 240, ihæȝed 153
(*hēagian), islit 219, iuaid 175; inflected are iscrudde, iuædde
100. Minor Groups: nuste pt. s. 264; cuðe pt. s. 214, 281,
cuðen pt. pl. 11; dursten pt. pl. 158, durste 137; scat 2
pr. s. 189, scal pr. s. 38, scullen 1 pr. pl. 68, 2
pr. pl. 24, pr. pl. 39, scolde pt. s. 241, scolden
1 pt. pl. 45; mai 1 pr. s. 174, pr. s. 204, mæi 73,
mihte pt. s. 111, 210, mihte we 1 pt. pl. 46; most 2
pr. s. 110; beon inf. 28, am 1 pr. s. 175, æm 24,
263, næm 176, is pr. s. 32, js 67, us 62, nis 56, beoð 45, 1
pr. pl. 31, 33, 48, 110, seoð 31 (with s for b from sind,
sīen), beoð 2 pr. pl. 79, pr. pl. 35, 271, 278, beo
1 pr. s. subj. 183, pr. s. subj. 41, beon 2 pr. pl.
subj. 27, seon 27 (sīen), wes pt. s. 8 (6), wæs 78,
nes 104, 218, weoren pt. pl. 2 (8), weore 8, neoren 138, weore(n)
pt. s. subj. 266, ibeon pp. 154; wulle 1 pr. s.
25 (7), wulle(n) 30, 88, 184, nulle 191, wult 2 pr. s. 149, 178,
wule pr. s. 202, wulleð 1 pr. pl. 194, 2 pr. pl.
87, pr. pl. 164, wulle pr. s. subj. 90, wullen 2 pr.
pl. subj. 28, wolde pt. s. 20 (4), wolden pt. pl. 19,
192, walden 12, 42; don inf. 111, to don dat. inf. 298,
dod pr. pl. 86, dude pt. s. 292, duden pt. pl. 71,
117, idon pp. 9, 63, 180; eode pt. s. 144, 253.
Noteworthy are the adverbs forðrihtes 107, at this very moment,
stilledliche 159, probably miswritten for stilliche of the exemplar,
rather than for stilleliche, which is unmetrical wherever it occurs, and
whænnene(n) 27, representing hwanone. OE. nā conj.
is once na, nor 191, but no 23, no . . . no, neither
. . . nor 138.
(2) Of O. Strong declension of
masc. and neut. nouns. In the s. n. a.
maide 266 (3) has lost final n. Gen. -es, kinges 292: dat. -e, crafte 214, lifdaȝe 138, ȝere 44, inne 253, londe
19 (9), but dai 23, and the neuters folk 295, ȝer 36, hin 131, lond 64, 262
are uninflected; game 285, 291 represents gamene: borde
s. a. 215 has added e. The pl. n. d. a.
ends in -es, n. m. comes 263,
kempes 5, neut. sipes 4, þenges 35, wifues
461
43, d. m. cnihtes 133, godes 68, neut. sipes 232,
þinges, 61, a. m. cnihtes 23, neut. bordes 250, godes
93, londes 37, 193, lotes 37: gen. are cnihtes 112, Englene 262
(weak form), þing 260 (miswritten for þinge). The fem. nouns of
the strong declension have -e in the
s. n. a., blisse 251, hude 202, speche 266, tydinge 1,
care 123, see 2, but leafdi 65, lesing 50, rouning 143: dat.
-e, halue 221, winne 188, but half 117,
hond 201, 257, win 63. Pl. n. are lawe 285, tydinge 104, lawes
278, d. rouninges 148, wiþerededes 87, a. leode 165,
tydinge 147, ȝeftes 88, 133. Nouns of the weak declension have -e in all cases of the singular, n. wone
271, d. ivere 276, a. bolle 257; pl. n. are bileue
53, bilefues 79, gomes 2, d. ivere 233, a. rideres 233.
The minor declensions are represented by man s. d. 205,
s. a. 214, womman 299, men pl. n. 7, heredmen 67,
wommanne pl. g. 270, men pl. d. 193; borh
s. n. 224, s. a. 191; nihte s. d.
23; broþer s. n. 29, s. a. 164; dohter
s. n. 181; childe s. d. 43, 44, cheldren pl.
d. 159, children 187; freond s. n. 273,
s. d. 273.
Adjectives, which in OE. end in a vowel, have -e throughout, bliþe 24, deore 236, deorne 148, ȝarue
224, hende 299, onimete 254, riche 33, 133, wilde 43; those in
-ig lose g, mihti 60, sori 103. Of the weak declension are
s. n. m. cristene 294, leofue 274, but heh 64, 205 is
not inflected, s. n. f. faire 287,
s. d. f. bare 157 (deathe is treated as f.),
s. a. neut. heaþene 295. Strong inflections are
s. d. m. heþene 205, s. a. m. goldene
257, stonene 222, wisne 214, but lang, smal 217, strong 222 are
uninflected. mycel is moche s. n. neut. 181, mochele
s. d. m. 26, f. 171, moche
s. a. m. 220, mochel f. 123, neut. 201:
āgen, owe s. d. f. 201, owene s. d.
neut. 208. All adjectives have -e in
all cases of the plural, except wonder 35, noun used as adj., and ȝong
187, miswritten for ȝonge. ān is s. n. an 64, on 59,
161, a 60, 63, d. one m. 203, on 140, 177, f. 237,
one neut. 33, a. ane m. 217, 223, 257, one 173,
214, an f. 65, on neut. 240; nān is
s. n. non 258, a. nanne m. 191, no f.
50. Adjectives used as nouns with inflection are Bruttesse s. d.
neut. 225, 281, beste 238, Œnglisse 281. Of comparatives heoldre 187
is pl. d.; the superlatives beste s. n. m. wk.
268 and faireste pl. n. 7 are alone inflected.
The personal pronouns are ich, ihc 177, me, we, vs, þou, þe, ȝe, ȝeo
27, 53, 79, ȝou, ou 83. The pronoun of the third person is
s. n. he m. 21, ȝeo f. 67 (6), hit
neut. 5, d. him m. 19, a. hine m.
18 (5), hire f. 67, 225, pl. n. hii 8 (21), d. heom
69, a. 188: reflexive is him seolue 113; definitive, him seolf
209. Possessives are s. n. min m. 32, mi 269,
f. 181, neut. 178, d. min m. 83, f.
201, mine neut. 22 (4), a. mine f. 149;
s. d. þine f. 171, neut. 186, a. þine
m. 196, þin neut. 108, þi 165, pl. n. þine 167,
263, d. 156, a. 165; his 19, 99, 101; hire 224; vre 35;
ȝoure 26; hire 37 (6). The
462
definite article is s. n. þe m. 29, f. 224,
þat neut. 36, 38, 128, g. þes m. 292, d. þan
m. 1 (11), þane 72, 144, þare f. 157 (with deathe, usually
m.), þan 103 (m. form with sihte f.), neut.
1, 126, 238, a. þane m. 74 (7), þat neut. 206, þe
instr. 8, 184, pl. n. þe 7 &c.: þat is used
demonstratively 8, 45, 283. The compound demonstrative is
s. n. þis neut. 278, d. þis f. 117,
þisse neut. 137, þisne 285 (miswritten for þisse), a. þeos
f. 215, þis neut. 178, 280, pl. n. þeos 18, þes 7,
g. þeos 112, d. 68, a. 69. The relatives are þat 7
&c., þe 57, þat . . . he, who, 21, wan s. d.,
whom 38. Interrogatives are wat 27, 264, 266, 270, woche pl. 53,
with correlative soche 23, 291: ilca is ilke
s. n. m. 237, 275, s. d. m. 34, f. 103,
neut. 285. Indefinites are me 276; oþer s. n. m.
29, a. neut. 283, pl. n. 164; anoþer 114; eche
s. d. m. 203, neut. 21, 36, 280, ech 185;
euereche s. d. f. 129, euerech 221, euereche
neut. 44; eni s. a. f. 205; mani
s. n. 114, pl. n. 286, manie pl. a. 119, 126;
al s. n. neut. 89, alle d. m. 78, al
neut. 22, alle a. m. 109, al 196, alle pl. n.
99, alre g. 77 (3), alle 260, alle d. 61, 68, al 270, al a.
93.
Nineteen-twentieths of the infinitives end in e; wonie 173 is the
only infinitive of the second weak conjugation; those in -en are cuðen 269, faren 45, slean 165, wreken 164; in
i-, granti 184, sarui 19, both French. The dat. inf. is not
inflected, to biholde 209, 223, for habbe 293, for to . . .
seche 37. Presents are s. 1. habbe 22, wene 175; 2. bitakest 205,
hauest 50; 3. falleþ 38, fareþ 48, takeþ 276, stondeþ 227; contracted,
dringþ 275, fulþ 276, halt 275, saiþ 273, 274, seiþ 270; pl. 1.
habbeþ, louieð 57, but ȝefue 69 (5); 2. bilefeþ 53; 3. bearneþ, erneþ
108, falleþ 109, hatieþ 157, louieþ 67, 286, sleaþ 108: subjunctive
s. 2. biȝete 172; 3. ȝefue 297: imperative s. 2. bitak 173,
dring 282, ȝef 201, hercne 147, lust 269, nim 186, onderfang 188, send
186. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 1. seh 23; 3. bad 239, 297,
ȝaf 206, ȝef 133, 299, sat 261, 287, spac 195, 262; pl. 3. eoten
251, sete 250; subj. s. 3. beade 298, speke 266: I b. s.
3. bar 257, com 1 (3), come 144, nam 92 (3), pl. 3. beore 93,
come 7, 104, 285, comen 18, 119; subj. pl. 3. come 113, 245: I c.
s. 3. drong 283, funde 298 (weak form), gan 92, 207; pl.
3. drongken 251, gonne 245: II. pl. 3. driuen 229: III.
pl. 3. floȝe 129: IV. pl. 3. sloȝen 126, ofsloȝen 119;
subj. s. 1. bitoke 193: V. s. 3. biful 122, 140, biheold
246, 288, ful 45, hehte 225 (weak form active), 162 (in meaning
passive), lette (weak form) 221, 250, 254, 283; passive s. 1.
hatte 32; 3. 32 (8). Participles past: I b. ibore 259, icome 2 (4),
icomen 27, 107, ouercome 128: IV. atstonde 183, ofslaȝe 138: V. ihote
34, 67. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 3. answerede 21, arerde 223,
bitahte 284, grette 144, hadde 214, mornede 293 (murnde), swipte
284; pl. 3. cleopede 230, grette 18, hadde 123, ladde 259, seide
19, sette 230, wende 99, iþohten 122. Participles past: biclused 177,
hifulled
463
258, iȝarked 238, ihord 50, 156, ileued 22, iscrud 100, isomned 36, ived
100, iveiþed 175, iwoned 121, himakede 240. Minor Groups: nuste pt.
s. 264; couþe pt. s. 214, 281; dorste pt. pl. 137;
salt 2 pr. s. 189, sal pr. s. 89, solle 2 pr. pl.
24, solde pt. s. 178, 1 pt. pl. 45; mai 1 pr. s.
173, pr. s. 204, mihte pt. s. 210, 258; most 2 pr.
s. 110, mot pr. s. 38, 41, moste we 1 pt. pl. 46; beo
inf. 175, ham 1 pr. s. 24, 175, nam 176, his pr. s.
34 (9), beoþ 1 pr. pl. 33 (4), 2 pr. pl. 79, pr.
pl. 35 (5), beo pr. s. subj. 41, 2 pr. pl. subj. 27,
beon pr. pl. subj. 172, was pt. s. 8 (10), nas 104, 218,
weren pt. pl. 2 (5), were 4 (5), nere 138, were pt. s.
subj. 218, 266; wolle 1 pr. s. 26 (8), nelle 191, wolt 2
pr. s. 149, 184, wole pr. s. 202, wolleþ 1 pr. pl.
184, 2 pr. pl. 87, pr. pl. 164, wolle 2 pr. s.
subj. 20, woldes 2 pt. s. 178, wolde pt. s. 143,
pt. pl. 19, 192; don inf. 178 (4), doþ pr. s. 292,
pr. pl. 86, dedest 2 pt. s. 162, dude pt. pl. 117,
idon pp. 138; goþ pr. pl. 43, 44.
Dialect: The speech of North Worcestershire, where the
Brut was written, descended from a Saxon patois which was substantially
South-Western, but with an Anglian element derived from the neighbouring
Mercia. Occasional forms in the texts, which are foreign to this
dialect, may be due, as Luhmann thinks, to the poet himself, who, as he
tells us, had travelled ‘wide ȝond þas leode,’ or to some intermediate
copyist, but otherwise the manuscripts present, on the whole, the
natural development of the dialect of the original. What the
professional scribes who copied them contributed to the divergences from
the original text was mainly graphic and in a great measure due to the
clash of native spelling with the French scribal methods to which they
were accustomed.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian words in C O are bule
bole, gærsume garisome, gistninge gystninge, hæil hail, laȝe lawe,
swaines sweines, wæshail wassayl; in C only, ibon, dring, grið, loten,
tiðende, utlaȝen; in O only, sleh, þorisdai: French in C O, castel,
latimer; in O only, granti, pore, sarui.
Metre: (1) Of C.
Like the Worcester Fragment, p. 232, and the Proverbs of Alfred, pp.
292-4, Layamon’s verse presents an intermediate stage in the transition
from the OE. alliterative long line to the rhyming couplet as
exemplified in King Horn (KH p. xlvi). Our text has i. lines which
continue the OE. practice of binding together the two halves of the line
by alliteration only, as Ah héo weore hǽðene; þat wes hǽrm þa
máre, 8; of þat ílken ǽnde; þe ángles is iháten, 34; these
have four stresses separated by light syllables varying in number: ii.
lines which add rhyme as an ornament to alliteration, as heo cómen into
hálle; hǽndeliche álle 99; út of þan léode; to
úncuðe lónde, 40; swiðe monie péohtes; heo slóȝen iþan féhte,
126, and with similar imperfect rhymes
464
79, 92, 174, &c.; the rhythm of these also is alliterative: iii.
lines like those of the second class in structure, but already showing
in various degrees the disintegrating effects of rhyme in their wavering
rhythm, as þat ouer sǽ weorẹn icúmen; swíðe | sélcuðe |
gúmen, 2, or with a regular syllabic rhythm, as ne mí|hte wé |
bilǽ|uè; for lí|ue né | for dǽ|ðè, 46: iv. lines with rhyme
only, as þe féor|ðe hǽh|te Jú|pitér; of ál|le þín|ge hé | is
whár, 61; and ǽf|ter óh|te món|nèn; þa béz|stẹ of mí|ne
cún|nè, 200; these can be scanned as syllabic verse without assuming any
licence which is not to be found in the Poema Morale: v. lines without
alliteration or rhyme, as 67, 242, 286, 297; these may be regarded as
corrupt. The alliteration is varied, rarely 2 + 2, as 75, 127, 161; 2 +
1, normal in OE., as 17, 29, 32 &c.; 1 + 1, by far the commonest, as
30, 36, 38, 42, &c.; 1 + 2, as 2, 13, 33: the last stress sometimes
falls at the end of the second half-line, contrary to OE. usage, as 17.
Crossed alliteration occurs at 31, 39, 40, 91, 124; distinct
alliteration in each half-line at 76, 249. Perfect rhymes like sohten :
rohten 10, imetten : igrætten 18 are comparatively few, imperfect ones
frequent, as vnwraste : criste 80, ænde : grunde 109, dæðe : cuðe 158,
monnen : hennen 160, ræde : neode 171, spræde : hude 210, hude : neode
212, inne : cunne 235, nap : up 275, wīn : ĭn 283; a final consonant is
negligible, to : idon 9, wolde : athalden 20, laȝe : dæȝen 69, peohtes :
fehte 126, fluȝen : vnnifoȝe 130, fæhte : cnihten 155, cumeð : gærsume
189, monnen : cunne 200, hude : ouerspræden 202, sætte : hæhten 230,
scruden : prude 254, even a final syllable, scenden : lond 192;
assonances are frequent, as driȝen : liuen 25, lond : strong 56, londe :
stronge 85, 124, ligge : libbe 174, faste : castle 177, atwite : riche
204, ende : uelde 211, while : time 237, time : liðe 243; inflectional
rhymes are admissible, as andswerden : cuðen 11, peohtes : londes 137,
andswarede : wolde 151, children : olden 187, ihærde : seide 264;
partial correspondences of sound suffice, as tiðende : kinge 1, wenden :
kinge 14, leofue : laðe 79, læue : liðe 92, arerde : mare 223 (Bartels,
61), tiðende : londe 271, hende : kinge 287; proper names have special
freedom, as Jupiter : whar 61, appollin : idon 63, Teruagant : lon[d]
64, alemanisce : horse 125, vortigerne : sone 265. The text has suffered
much less from a metrical point of view than the Proverbs of Alfred, the
interval of time between the original and the extant copy being shorter,
but the changes are the same in kind. i. Words altered: for þa king 15
read muri; comp. ‘Swa he uorð to Cantuare-buri; þer him þuhte
swiðe muri,’ L 29519, 20: l. 37, see note: l. 63, MS. O has possibly
preserved the original: l. 85, read leod-ferde ful stronge: l. 146, for
blisse—heom, read dune wes heom among; comp. ‘Þer wes swiðe
465
muchel dune; þeines þer dremden,’ L 11574, 5: l. 242, for
wolde read ȝirnde (Bartels 55); comp. 106/206: l. 268, for ær read
euere: l. 286, for fain read sæl: l. 288, read þe leuedi he ȝeorne
biheold; and comp. ‘He clepede to þere leuedi; heo
wes him on heorten leof,’ L 1190, 1: l. 297, read dringe : ȝunge (for
child). ii. Words omitted: l. 67, read dihteð alswa (Bartels 69): l.
107, read Lauerd king! nu forðrihtes; comp. 94/30, 96/50, 108/263: l.
131, read Vortigerne þe king; to herberwe wendẹ on hiȝing;
comp. ‘Þa sæide þe king; Nu to scipe an hiȝing,’ L 32040, 1:
l. 134, read hehȝe maðmes inoȝe; comp. ‘þa hæuekes ⁊ þa
hundes; ⁊ hehȝe mine maħmes,’ L 22397, 8: l. 148, read runen
swiðe deorne; comp. ‘and Hengest spæc wið Vortigerne; of rune
swiðe derne,’ L 14768, 9: l. 209, where two lines have been compressed
into one, read ‘⁊ he seolf wende; wide ȝeond þissen londe |
To sechen on folde; ænne brædne fæld’; comp. ‘Ah anan heo
wende; toward þissen londe,’ L 11634, 5; ‘Leir king wende on
anne feld; ⁊ reste hine on folden,’ L 3510, 11: l.
215, read bule hude: l. 224, read nome þare; comp. ‘Þa andswarede eorles
þare; Alle we beoð ȝarẹwe,’ L 27332, 3. iii. Substitution of
forms: read l. 5, cnihtes; l. 110 alle; ll. 149, 178, wule; comp. ‘Ȝif
ȝe hit lusten wlle,’ L 919: read l. 159, stilliche; l. 196, iwille :
alle; l. 233, rideren. iv. Words rearranged mostly in a prose order:
read l. 3, icumen weoren to londe; l. 14, wenden gunne; l. 82, nohtes ne
beoþ; l. 83, ich eou wullẹ; l. 129, ⁊ awæi floȝen swuðe; forð
an ælche helue; l. 214, ænne wisne mon he hæfden; l. 232, hider liðen;
l. 250, Bord heo breden hetten; cnihtes þer to setten
(Bartels 35). v. Padding: omit l. 9, and; l. 23, aer; l. 31, we; l. 86,
muchele; l. 88, lond; l. 93, heore scipen; l. 97, heore; l. 113, read
mani oht mon: omit l. 121, ofte; l. 128, þa; l. 218, noht; l. 248, mid
him; l. 252 þa (wes); l. 285, þissen; l. 293 read hire for þat
mæiden.
Elision takes place under the usual conditions, auerẹ 7, 132,
cnihtenẹ 55, 89, sendẹ 198, bezstẹ 200, hudẹ 217, but hiatus is not
infrequent, þinge 61, swiðe 84, alle 135, fæire 144, fulliche 183, hafde
212. In trisyllabic words the vowel of the middle syllable sometimes
suffers syncope, as neoðẹles 83, hengẹstes 232, nauẹre 23, læuẹdi 65,
naeuẹden 228, similarly answerẹde 21, 29, 55 and generally bịliue,
weorẹn. The added n has small share in the metrical scheme; of the
twenty-six certain instances of its use, three, rihten 20, cumen 24,
comen 235, prevent hiatus, to which, however, the poet seems
indifferent; once it makes a rhyme, hallen : men 259; twice it is in
excess cunnen : wunne 188, Rouwenne : wimmonnen 270; once it rhymes with
itself, hæfden : craften 214 (as emended above); four times it completes
a rhyme, driȝen : liuen 25, iwiten : wurðscipen 26, ræden : dæden 110,
innen : monnen 112; the remaining instances are
466
whænnenen 27, wullen 30, 88, 184, duȝeðen 166, næueden 228, burhȝen 251,
weoren 266, bitæhten 284. Doubtful are runen 148, ronen 156, leoden 165,
285, laȝen 278, 285; but they are most probably weak forms, and it may
well be that the use of n spread from such cases to other forms. It is
noteworthy that, out of these twenty-seven instances, the added n
appears sixteen times at the end of line or half-line.
(2) Of O. The author of this
recension had little regard for the metre of his original; ll. 68, 93,
112, 193, 226, 265, 297 are quite formless. Two lines are compressed
into one, mostly unmetrical, at 67, 90, 157, 159, 173. Rhyme is
substituted for alliteration at 114, 123, 131, 133, 149, 178, 221, 245;
occasionally attempts are made to improve the rhyme, as at 35, 63, 253.
At l. 7 a prose order is adopted; archaic words and phrases are rejected
at 92, 108, 138, 139, 184, 207, 230, 251, 258, 267, 273, 278 &c.
Introduction: The priest Layamon, son of Leovenath,
served the church at Ernley (Arley Regis) on the Severn near Radestone,
‘sel þar him þuhte.’ There it came into his mind that he would tell of
the noble deeds of the English, and journeying wide over the land he got
the noble books, Bede’s History in English, the Latin text of the same,
which he ascribes to S. Austin and S. Albin, and the history which a
French clerk made. Such is the poet’s account of his authorities, but of
the two first he made no use, Wace’s metrical version of Geoffrey of
Monmouth’s Historia Britonum was his main source. This he greatly
amplified out of his legendary store and from other sources, writing in
epic style and a somewhat archaic diction derived from the older English
literature, and investing the whole with the charm of his imaginative
and descriptive powers. But Imelmann maintains that, apart from some
insignificant details, Wace was his only source, not indeed the text as
we have it in Le Roux de Lincy’s edition, but a later lost redaction
enlarged from an intermediate version which blended the original Wace
with the first part of Gaimar’s Chronicle.
Layamon wrote in the early years of the thirteenth century, and
finished his book before 1205 A.D.
This extract gives ll. 13785-14382 in Madden ii. pp. 152-177: it
corresponds to Wace (W) 6860-7168. The references are to the older text
of L, unless O is prefixed.
1. Vnder ðan,
meanwhile; OE. under þām, where the prep. means among:
‘Entretant,’ W. Comp. ‘Under þis,’ SK 1858; ‘vnder þat,’ R. of
Gloucester 116/11. L has also ‘Vnder þan ilke þinge,’ 29849, ‘Wnder
þon,’ 6433. tiðende is OWScand. tíðindi: tydinge in O is
OE. tīdung: see Björkman, 167. vortiger is from W: the OE.
form is Wyrtgeorn.
5. Alse hit weoren,
to all appearance: usually with swulc in L, ‘heo
467
leopen ut of þan wuden; swulc hit deor weoren,’ 12828, 3070,
11571. For hit comp. 1/10. Kempes, champions, in O is a characteristic
toning down of Kinges in C, but comp. L 25301.
6. wiðuten, not
counting. scipen monnen is probably a scribal mistake for
scipmonnen. þer wiðinnen, in the ships.
7. þis:
sing. like þet 1/10 note: so too at 110/278, and with Hit,
110/271. færeste: ‘Od biax viaires et biax cors,’ W 6863.
8. ꝥ—mare: a
typical comment, comp. ‘hire cheap wes þe wrse,’ L 385; ‘his hap wes þe
betere,’ id. 4894, 816, 3857, &c.
9. hu—idon:
Madden translates, ‘how they were disposed (their business)’: Mätzner,
Sprachproben, says it corresponds exactly to OHG. wio getân, how
conditioned, circumstanced; but his dictionary does not notice this use,
which appears to be without support, for ‘þine ræddes ne beod noht
idon,’ L 24956, where Madden translates, vaguely, ‘good,’ seems to mean,
your counsels are not completed, i.e. ripe, perfect. On the other hand,
wel idon occurs in L at least twenty-three times; with it Madden
compares MHG. wol getan, translating good, excellent, brave; but it
means more specifically, well equipped, (1) mentally, comp. 104/180; ‘þa
wifmen wel idone; and þa betere biwitene,’ L 24677: (2)
physically, 96/63; ‘ah he ne blakede no; for he wes cniht wel
idon,’ L 7524; well fitted out, ‘scipen he hæfde sone;
monie ⁊ wel idone,’ L 28234; well provided with money, ‘þe riche burh
wel idone,’ L 5923; ‘Ðu ert wel don man,’ OEH ii. 29/15, the latter
answering to the colloquial ‘well-to-do.’ Similar expressions are seen
in ‘cnihtes wel bihedde,’ L 18010; ‘Jurdan is his bur-cniht;
he is swiðe wel idiht,’ id. 18960; ‘twa hundred scipene; þer
weoren wel biwitene,’ id. 20505; ‘wel bifunden,’ Orm 73/2176. The
meaning here is accordingly, how they were provided for; a polite way of
asking what they wanted.
11. cuðen, knew
how, were able.
13. heren, obey:
comp. 94/19; ‘nulle we him nauere hæren; ne hælde for ure
hærre,’ L 7671, 4887, 8483.
15. Cantuarie:
see 1/14.
16. Hæhliche
spilede: Madden translates ‘nobly diverted themselves,’ with the
usual meaning of OE. spilian, to play; and his interpretation is
supported by, ‘mid haueken ⁊ mid hunden; hired-plæie luuien,’
L 14480. Luhmann, p. 91, regards this place as the only instance of that
meaning in Layamon; he points out that everywhere else (as at 110/266)
spilien has, from expressions like ‘spilede mid worden,’ L 17269,
‘plaȝede mid worden,’ L 17335, developed the meaning, to discourse,
proper to OE. spellian. It seems unnecessary to make an exception
here; the explanation,
468
held high counsel, gives a good sense, and one more suitable for
‘hæhliche’ than the other.
17. folc kinge:
comp. 96/47: variants are, ‘biforen þen folke kinge,’ L 9107; ‘þeos
folkes king,’ id. 4872; ‘leod king,’ id. 6797; ‘leode king,’ id.
3691; ‘leodene king,’ id. 5394; ‘leodisc king,’ id. 2144. As here, O
avoids the archaic expression in each case except the last, where it
has, ‘on leodene king.’ Comp. OE. folc-cyning,
lēod-cyning.
18. Sone swa: see
130/51.
20. mid rihten at
halden, retain them and treat them fairly.
21. of—war:
this phrase, which is repeated after the epic manner with the king’s
name, as 96/51, 98/78 &c. appears for the first time at 13254, ‘of
ufele he wes wel iwar,’ where the context requires the meaning, he was
well versed, practised in evil-doing. (OE. wær, having knowledge
of.) His character is bad, ‘Fax fu et faussement parla,’ W 6796; ‘þat
iharde Uortigerne; þe swike wes ful derne,’ L 13603. Less
ambiguous is, ‘Æfter Cap Oein; for elchen vuele he wes fein,’
L 6993. Þat . . . he in O = who.
23. Comp. ‘Ne seah ic
el-þeodige | þus manige men mōdiglīcran,’ Beowulf, 336, 247-50. bi
nihtes: comp. ‘feorh færde bi nihttes,’ L 4415.
24.
for—bliðe: comp. 108/263; ‘Þe king wes gled for his kime,’
L 3962: with of, 128/9, 206/321; ‘forr mani mann | Wass off hiss
come bliþe,’ Orm, 24/795, as in OE., ‘ealle wæron swiðe bliðe his
ongeancymes,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 208/292.
26.
þurh—wurðscipen, by your true worthiness, as truly as you
are honourable. For the position of eouwer comp. 102/154, 104/171. With
for in O comp. 78/66, 119/78.
28. whar: OE.
hwæðer. alde &c., at all seasons, under all
circumstances: comp. 25/226.
32. hors: so W;
in Hist. Britonum, Horsus: comp. such double forms as Sceaf, Sceafa;
Geat, Geata.
34. ænde,
quarter: comp. 100/109, 127/344, ‘heofon biþ open on sumum ende,’ BH
93/1; ‘þe alre leste ende,’ SK 587 (= de remotis partibus); Minot,
ix. 3. angles, Ænglis O: the OE. names are Angel, Engel, Ongel;
the final s here is probably due to Englisc. ‘De Saisone,
dist-il, venon,’ W 6889; but they were Jutes.
35. tiðende, lit.
happenings, here, customs, ways: comp. 110/271; ‘In France weore
læwen; sulkuðe a þan dawen. | ⁊ selcuðe tidende,’ L 5137,
where læwen and tidende are synonymous. gonde in O is regarded by
Madden as a mistake for goude, a spelling found in C, but not, I think,
in O: he translates ‘many good things’; Mätz. ‘wondrously good things’;
but that gives a very unsuitable sense and spoils a rhyme. In Specimens
469
it is taken for goinde: O has goinde, 1582, but mostly goinge, which is
hard to parallel at this date in the sense of taking place, progressing.
Brotanek, in Zupitza-Schipper, 339 suggests that gonde is OE.
geondan, yonder; but L otherwise has only ȝeond, ȝond,
prep. as at 106/209. Possibly it is a mistake for wonde,
accustomed, instead of the usual iwoned 101/121; ‘To hire weren
iwoned; wonder craftie men,’ O 1153: C has iwunde, wounded,
10420, and the prefix is occasionally dropped, as somned, 104/167.
36. vmbe is
ambiguous: bi eche &c., O, means every fifteenth year: ‘Li prince
qui les teres ont | Tos les jenes asamblé font | Qui de quinze ans sunt
et de plus,’ W 6909. hi[s] for is: him MS. cannot be reflexive
here: comp. ‘Þa ferde wes isumned,’ L 1482, and so always in L. But
Kock, Anglia, xxv. 318 takes isomned as isomneð, assembles, with
him as reinforcing dative, like 13/34.
37. iledene is
regarded by Mätzner as for ledene, with otiose i prefixed, as in
‘iliue’ 94/22; it would in that case be pl. g. of leod as in
‘leodene king,’ L 5394. But ‘folk of the people,’ ‘nation-folk,’ Madden,
is a strange expression (though leod-folc is common enough), and it
would be a meaningless repetition; besides e for OE. ēo is
rare in L. Kellner, Archiv cxiv. 164, proposes ileuede representing OE.
gelyfed, advanced in age, and one MS. of W has ‘Tout li
viellart et li plus fort’ as a variant of ‘Tot li millor et li plus fort
| Sont mis fors del païs, par sort,’ 6193. But ileuede is not used
elsewhere in L, and would connote decrepitude. Geoffrey of Monmouth has
‘totius regni iuvenes coram se venire praecipiunt (principes): deinde
sorte proiecta potiores atque fortiores eligunt,’ 82/20; something
corresponding to ‘iuvenes’ is required here, such as iwepned; comp. L
9942-6.
38. of: see
80/47.
45. feole is
impossible: Mätzner suggests the substitution of lot, as in O, for beoþ,
but that would require feol instead of feole. More probably the scribe
has been influenced by beoð into miswriting feole for fallen:
beoð is singular.
46. for liue
&c. apparently means, for any consideration, at any price, like ‘for
love or hire.’
47. for þan,
because of the, for fear of the.
49. vnder lufte,
under heaven: comp. ‘nes þa na man vnder lufte; þe cuðe
betere cræftes,’ L 10104: lufte is Madden’s correction.
50. þurh alle
þing, in every respect, qualifying Soð: comp. ‘he wes god þurh alle
þing,’ L 6894: somewhat different is ‘⁊ þar an hiȝinge; þurh
ut alle þinges,’ L 2358.
51 O. wis . . .
war: comp. 18/16.
470
52. sugge: for
the subj. comp. ‘geliefeð ðæt he swelc sie swelce he gehierð,’ Cura
Past. 110/11. soðriht, adv. truly; comp. ‘a þilke time soh
riht,’ L 9668, MS. O.
53. þat . . . on,
and 54. þe . . . to: see 1/3.
55. cnihtene
&c.: a recurring phrase, as 98/89, 102/152; ‘cnihten alre hendest,’
104/195.
57. mode,
feeling: comp. ‘on his heorte he hauede grome; on his mode
muchele scome,’ L 4847, and with O, ‘þe leof hire weis on mode,’
L 4489. See KH 281 note.
58. hope to: see
178/89 note. heoreð . . . mid mihte,
strenuously exalt; from herian, to glorify: it might be from
hīeran, to obey, but the former meaning is more suitable here;
comp. 102/139.
59-68. There is little
doubt that Layamon found this strange jumble of the gods of the Romans,
Teutons, and French Romance in his original, but appollin and teruagant
are missing in the printed Wace. Identification of the Roman gods with
those of the Teutons and Celts proceeded rapidly among the barbarians
from the first century onward, so that the Spanish bishop, Martin of
Bracara, denouncing in the sixth century the pagan practices of his
flock, uses the Roman names of the gods (De Correctione Rusticorum, ed.
Caspari, pp. xci, 7-11), in which he is followed by Ælfric in the homily
De Diis Falsis (Kemble, Solomon and Saturn, 120; Wulfstan, ed. Napier,
104). L appears not to have known that under this system Mercurius is
Woden; Jupiter, Thunor; Mars, Tiw; Venus, Frea; and Phoebus, perhaps the
Sun, yet Wace says ‘Mercurion | Qui en nostre langage a non | Woden.’ In
L 16790-4, there is a similar list of the Saxon gods with addition of
Didon and Mamilon.
60. weoli, rich,
powerful.
62. hæhste: comp.
‘Nu hateð Aganippus; þe is þe heȝest ouer us,’ L 3648:
‘Deorum maxime Mercurium colunt,’ Tacitus, Germania, 9: see Müllenhoff,
Deutsche Alterthumskunde, iv. 212.
63. appollin is
the god of Cassivellaunus, L 8081: one of the three idols of the
Saracens in French romance, Mahomet and Tervagant being the others;
‘Mahummet sert e Apollin recleimet,’ Chanson de Roland, 8; ‘La lei i fut
Mahum e Tervagan,’ id. 611. In L, Tervagant is the god of the Romans,
5353. wel idon: see 94/9 note. of
gret win O, in whom we greatly delight: OE. wynn.
66. hired men,
members of a household, courtiers. But Frea had nothing to do with
these; she was the patroness and helper of lovers. Possibly L has
misunderstood cortoier or cortois in his original.
67. dihteð,
guides, directs.
471
69. Comp. ‘and habben þa
ilke læȝen; þe stoden bi heore ældre dæwen,’ L 5960.
hehde is for hefde: comp. ‘what he i Rome hæhde biwunnen,’ L
10547; ‘enne sune he hehde,’ id. 6958, 30185: for other instances in L
of h substituted for f, see Luhmann, 45: the expression, to hold the
highest law, may well mean, to have the highest authority, for Layamon’s
use of laȝe is very wide and varied. But Brotanek treats hehde as
past of heȝen, OE. hēgan, to put in force, to establish:
this in L is hæhȝede, heȝede: Logeman suggests hehte (OE. hatan),
promised.
71. heom is
written for him, and they did worship to him: the subject heo is not
expressed, because it is contained in heore preceding: see 6/18.
72-76. The Romans
adopted the week of seven days, with their allotment to the heavenly
bodies, from the Chaldaeans. They were already well acquainted with it
in the first century A.D., and it was
in regular use in the third. Owing to their many points of contact with
the barbarians, it spread rapidly everywhere among the northern nations,
each of which adapted it by substitution of their own equivalent deities
in the names of the days, Saturn alone proving intractable (see Grimm,
Teutonic Mythology, 1. 122 ff.; Müllenhoff, iv. 644 ff.).
The North German invaders were already in possession of the system when
they settled in England: comp. Byrhtferth’s Handboc, Anglia, viii.
321/4-17.
72. to wurðscipe,
in his honour. wendesdei O, for Wednesdei, is representative of
*Wēdnes-, Wǣdnes-dæg, out of Wōdines. (Holthausen, Anglia, Beiblatt,
iii. 39.)
73. þunres dæi,
day of Thunor: þorisdai O is Scandinavian: ODanish þūr (Björkman,
181): OE. þūres dæg. Comp. 85/99.
74. fridæi: OE.
frige-dæg, the day of Freya, identified with Venus.
75. sætterdæi
corresponds to OFrisian saterdei, OE. Sæterdei: sateresdei
O to OE. sæteresdæg. The fullest form is Sæternes dæg =
Sāturni dies (? Sǣ; see Anglia, Beiblatt, xx. 194). þene should
be þere. sonedæi: OE. sunnan-dæg; perhaps OWScand.
sunnudagr has influenced the ME. form.
76. monedæi:
OFrisian mōnedei. tisdæi: OWScand. týsdagr: OE. tīwes-dæg.
Tidea is said in the glossary to Specimens to be a Latinized form
of Tiw in the dat. case, without support from any parallel and
without explanation of d: probably it is a mistake for Tiwe, and
as O has Tydea, the mistake would be derived from an earlier MS. common
to both.
81. wurse, the
evil one, the devil; comp. 110/291; ‘þat he wið þene wurse spæc,’ L 2841
where O has ‘feonde.’
82. nohtes, of a
worthless kind: a descriptive genitive used predicatively:
472
comp. ‘eower godas ne synd nahtes,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 182/205; ‘ne beoð ha
riht nohtes,’ SJ 22/10: it is in principle the same as ‘ðæt fleax ðæt
bið hwites hiewes,’ Cura Past. 86/19.
83. ‘Mult volanters vous
retanrai,’ W 6957.
84. ohte,
doughty: OE. āht, shortened from āwiht: so the root sense
is ‘anything, good for anything, worth something.’ Comp. ‘ahte cniht wes
Auelin,’ L 8141.
86. scome . . .
grome: see 96/57 note, and for the
corresponding verbs comp. ‘þerfore him ofte scomede; ⁊ his
heorte gromede,’ L 13763.
94. dringches,
warriors: OWScand. drengr, young man: the change of e to i is normal;
see Björkman, 292.
95. hændest is
taken by the editors generally as, nearest (to him), but everywhere else
in L it means, courteous, or the like: comp. 98/77: perhaps him should
be omitted.
97. him to, to
Vortigern, but senden is corrupt; reading, seoððen siȝen him to,
the meaning would be, next the Saxon knights followed after them; comp.
‘þe eorles heom siȝen to; mid fele heore cnihtes,’ L
9996.
98. aldene cannot
be right, its final e does not belong to the dat. sing.: comp. ‘in alden
hire denne,’ L 22027. Read aldrene, of the kin of his ancestors:
comp. 98/69, 104/193; ‘of his eoldrene istreon,’ L 18609.
99. hændeliche is
translated by Mätzner, courteously; rather, making a brave show.
100. iscrudde . . .
iuædde: comp. ‘he us haueð wel iued; he us haueð wel
iscrud,’ L 13573; 104/190.
101. hængest is
the last word on the page, and the scribe has in consequence omitted
-es: for swaine read swaines.
102. hehne,
‘hæhne,’ L 11378, represents OE. hēanne, acc. of
hēan, mean, humble, and ‘hæne,’ 106/204, its nom.
hēane: but ‘hæhne,’ 106/205, represents the acc. of
hēah, high (seldom hēahne, mostly heanne).
104. Comp. ‘Nes hit
noh[t] longe; buten ane stunde,’ L 14423. ne:
see 25/241 note. longe is adverbial
in form.
108. Comp. ‘ꝥ lond heo
þurh arnden; ⁊ herȝeden ⁊ barnden,’ L 12129, 9934.
109. ænde: see
96/34. iuald, they fell; comp. ‘sixti þusende; he
leide to þen gronde,’ L 4751.
111 is formal: see
102/142, L 1035, 3147 &c.
117.
duden—iwune, behaved as usual: comp. ‘hu Osric Edwines
sune; dude ut-laȝen wune,’ L 31270.
120. Comp. ‘þat fæht
wes swuðe strong; ⁊ swuðe stær ⁊ swuðe longe,’ L 4170.
473
121. ‘Por ce que
vaincre les soloient | Lor costume tenir voloient; | Mais lor usage i
ont perdu,’ W 6991.
122. an oðer,
nom. adj. agreeing with hit: the construction is frequent in L;
comp. ‘ah al an oðer hit iwærd; oðer he iwende,’ L 17336:
oðer, adj. is also found in the same construction; comp. 203/202;
‘ah al hit iwrað (= iwarð) oðer; þene heo iwenden,’ L
19506, but it is mostly adverbial, as, ‘ah al heo þohten oðer,’ L 5429;
‘al oþer hit schal go,’ OEM 41/140.
123. If hele
represents OE. hælo, safety, heom
means, to the Britons, but the transition is abrupt, and Logeman suggests that
hele may mean, thing hidden, secret; its known meanings being,
concealment, hiding-place; it might be better to substitute iheled for
al hele.
127.
feondliche, furiously; comp. ‘Dunwal i þan fæhte; wes
feondliche kene,’ L 4168, where O substitutes ‘swiþe.’ feollen þa
fæie: an oft-repeated formula in L.
130. vnnifoȝe:
OE. ungefōg, immense; here, countless. Comp. ‘muchel ⁊ unifoh,’ L
8674, ‘monie ⁊ vniuoȝe,’ id. 13187; ‘For noldest þu nefre [hab]ben
inouh, buten þu hefdest unifouh,’ Worcester Frag. D 39.
132. on uast,
close to, fast by him; OE. on + fæst: comp. ‘He makede an
temple onfest þe baðe,’ L 2852: but Luhmann, p. 95, deduces it from
on œfeste, influenced by the prep. fæst bi.
133. The subject of
ȝef is he, contained in kinge: see 6/18. ‘Et Lindesée et bons
manoirs,’ W.
134. ‘unc sceal worn
fela | māþma gemǣnra,’ Beowulf, 1783, 4.
136. a þan
ilke, on the same footing, thus: comp. ‘⁊ þus ane stonde;
hit stod æ ðon ilka,’ L 3117, 3716, 14890 &c. ‘Ensi ont longement
esté | Et lor amor a mult dure,’ W 7001.
137. For londes
read londe, or for þan, þas.
139 O.
hendeliche, cleverly.
141. hæȝe dæie,
festival; mostly associated with religious observance; comp. ‘Hit wes an
anne hæhȝe dæie; halȝeden leoden,’ L 10708. ‘Un jor
trova le roi haitié | Si l’a à consel afaitié,’ W 7009. duȝeðe
monnen, the men of his nobility, the retainers of his court; the
first element answers to OE. duguðe, s. g. of
duguð.
148. ræcchen . . .
runen, expound, disclose secret counsels; comp. ‘summe heo muche
runen; ræhten heom bitweonen,’ L 25123; ‘þe sunne
reccheð hire rune euch buten reste,’ SM 9/30. (‘Sol in aspectu
annuncians in exitu, vas admirabile opus excelsi,’ Ecclus.
xliii. 2.)
150. halden to
wraððe apparently means, consider it a ground for anger: perhaps
wenden should be read for halden.
474
153. þine monscipe
ihæȝed, advanced thy dignity; comp. ‘⁊ mine monscipe hæien,’ 5451;
‘þurh þe haueð Morgan mi mæi; is monscipe afallet,’
id. 3838.
154. þine: see
92/26.
157. ‘Ai jo assés
aparçéu | . . . | Que tu n’en as baron qui t’aint; | Cascuns te het,
cascuns te plaint,’ W 7017.
158. bare,
actual, absolute; comp. ‘his leode hine hateden | in to þan bare dæðe,’
L 7034; ‘bi þine bare life,’ id. 25800. þare O is a scribal
error.
159.
stilleliche, secretly; so too stille 104/170; comp. ‘mid
stilliche runen,’ L 355; ‘mid heore stil rune,’ id. 3249: with
spilieð comp. 110/266; ‘Þus speken þeos swiken; and
spileden mid worde,’ L 3816.
161. ambrosie:
Aurelius Ambrosius: O has the former name.
163. laȝen,
ways, practices, a sense developed out of that of custom, but Mätzner
translates, in a treasonable manner. His death was compassed by
Vortigern, as O says.
169.
androeinnes: L has elsewhere only Androgeus, and Androgeum as in
W, with once Androchies gen. 8194. The present form corresponds
to Androgen, Andragen, Andragenus of the prose Brut, ed. Brie, p.
33.
173. kineliche,
royal, and therefore in the king’s gift.
175. Comp. ‘Þin hired
þe hateð for me | ⁊ ich æm iuæid for þe,’ L 14458. iuaid is
pp. of ȝefeogen, OE. *gefēogan: see NED v. 525,
s.v. ivee. iveiþed is pp. of a derivative verb from
OE. fæhð, feud: it occurs four times in O. uor þe, because
of your unpopularity. ic wene &c., I expect
to be killed.
176. fare
&c.: see 34/86.
177. biclused:
comp. ‘⁊ hæuede Valentin wel uaste | biclused in ane castle,’ L 12191:
elsewhere O substitutes ‘bituned.’ ‘Si ai por toi maint anemi; | Ne puis
par nuit estre aséur | Fors de castel et fors de mur,’ W 7040.
180.
of—idon: see 94/9 note.
182. wine
maies: OE. wine mǣg, a loving kinsman: L has also vniwinen,
onwines, enemies, 14466.
184. hiren:
comp. 94/19, 98/68. ‘Plus séurs en sera de moi | Et jo en servirai mius
toi,’ W 7035.
188. afeoh: ‘Et
bien les recoif et conroie,’ W 7052.
190. ueden . . .
scruden: see 100/100.
195. Þa ȝet,
still: OE. þā git. Comp. ‘hafde þa ȝet an honde,’ L 8540;
‘þe ȝet þe he wes i Rome’ (= while he was still in Rome), id.
9733.
196. driȝen,
submit to. her &c., in this and in all things.
201.
stonden—hond, to be in my possession permanently: comp. ‘Nu
475
stond al þis muchele lond; a Bailenes aȝere hond,’ L
4330. Stonden in L often means little more than beon. a,
unemphatic on: comp. ll. 215, 210.
202. anes bule
hude: Madden suggests an or bules, but in the glossary treats bule
as genitive: Mätzner thinks bule may represent a Scand. gen. bola; but
bule-hude is a compound of which the first element is uninflected, yet
genitive in essence, and so capable of association with an adjective in
that case: the principle is the same as in ahnes, 74/207 note; the
meaning is, the hide of one bull. Ælches weies, in every
direction, but Mätzner explains, in any wise, any way, quoting ‘Ælches
weies him wes wa,’ 18703, where the meaning appears to be, in both
directions, on either side. in grene O, on a green, is a curious
variant, and an early use of the noun in this sense.
204. hæne . . .
riche; a frequent combination in L: it means the lowly
. . . the exalted, the commons . . . the nobles,
rather than, the poor . . . the rich.
210. þer . . .
on, on which: see 1/3.
213. þe refers
to hude. wunder ane strong: this combination of wunder ane with
an adjective as here and at 106/219, 108/258, is frequent in the older
text of L. So we find wunder ane brad, bliðe, cræftie, deop, fæir, laðe,
lihte, monie, wod. It is also found with adverbs, as ‘Þa weop
Vðer; wunder ane swiðe,’ L 18140, and once ‘bitter ane swiðe’
occurs, L 30302, where O has ‘biterliche swiþe.’ For wunder ane, O
usually substitutes swiþe or wunderliche or rewrites or omits, but once
for ‘wunder ane kene,’ 19935, it has kept ‘wonder one kene.’
Wunder is an adverb, as in ‘Þat feht wes wnder strong,’ L 1744;
‘mid wunder muchele strengðe,’ id. 25078, and ane is OE.
ǣne, āne, adverbial derivative of ān, in an
extended use, uniquely, exceptionally, so that the combination means,
wonderfully strong beyond all comparison. The translation in Specimens,
‘a wonderfully strong one,’ does not take into account the form of ane,
and anticipates the pronominal use of an. In ‘summe heo sæten
stille; mucle ane stunde,’ L 25121, ane is the acc. of the
article, the meaning being, for a long time.
214. cuðe a: on
and of interchange with this verb elsewhere in L: so ‘And alle þe cuðe a
boken,’ C 14431, ‘Ac al þat couþe of boke,’ O.
218. swulc, as
it were: OE. swylce: O regularly substitutes ase.
220. ‘Une coroie en
estendi | De coi grant tère avirona,’ W 7072. Similar tales are found in
Virgil, Aeneid, i. 371; Saxo Grammaticus, ed. Holder, p. 143, of Ivar’s
foundation of London: comp. Geoffrey of Monmouth, ed. San Marte, p.
313.
476
223. muchele ⁊
mare, great and glorious: B-T. quotes ‘Mære ⁊ miclu weorc drihtnes,’
Ps. Lamb., cx. 2.
224. scop . . .
hire, shaped for it: OE. naman, or to naman scieppan,
with dat. of person or thing named, as ‘scōp him Heor[o]t naman,’
Beowulf, 78; 179/107 note. L has a weak past also, ‘ah scupte him nome,’
1951. ‘Cest non Vancastre li a mis, | El langage de son païs. |
Vancastre cest nom del quir prent, | Sel puet l’on nomer altrement |
Chastel de coroie en romans, | Kaer Kaerai en bretans. | Or l’apèlent
pluisor Lancastre | Qui ne savoient l’aqoison | Dont Vancastre ot
premier cest non,’ W 7075-84. The traditional site is Tong in Kent:
‘Tong Castle or rather Thong Castle, in Saxon Þwangceastre, in British
Caer Kerry . . . both whiche woordes signifie a Thong of
leather,’ Lambarde, A Perambulation of Kent, ed. 1576, p. 195. But
Camden in his Britannia, published in 1586, p. 306, places it in
Lincolnshire, at Caster, six miles from Grimsby. L specializes in
place-names; see his account of London, 7099, Hampton, 9376, Caen,
27923, Cernel, 29674. The formula in l. 227 occurs at 6062, 9380
&c.
228. gome is
translated ‘adventure’ by Madden, rather, proceeding, tricky device.
230. lane
castel and Wace’s ‘Lancastre’ can hardly be meant for Lancaster;
they are possibly due to the Lincolnshire tradition.
232. com is
practically an auxiliary verb: comp. ‘Leir wes cumen liðen,’ Lear had
arrived, L 3626, 5379; ‘Þenne þu cumes faren ham,’ when thou dost fare
home, id. 4398: similarly ‘gon forð liðe,’ 108/243, 245.
233. Read rideren:
used vaguely for knights.
234. comen is
probably an interpolation. to iwiten, that is to say: comp. ‘and
forð he gon liðen; mid his Brutleoden. | þat is to
iwitene; mid twa hundred scipene,’ L 30914. æhtene,
‘good,’ Madden; but the meaning wanted is, eighteen large ships;
‘Vinrent dix huit nés cargies | De chevaliers et de maisnies,’ W 7087;
and so Madden corrects, iii. 487. Mätzner reads æhtetene, OE. eahta
tyne, but ahtene occurs again C 18015, where O has ehtetene.
237. umbe
while, after a (short) time: so ‘umbe stunde,’ L 26505; ‘umben ane
stunde,’ id. 15924; ‘umben longne first,’ id. 287: O has usually the
same variant as here, but ‘bi on lutel stunde,’ O 11969: see KH 333
note.
238. mid,
among, ranking with: comp. ‘cniht mid þane beste,’ L 707, ‘swike mid þan
meste,’ id. 2547; ‘hærm mid þon meste,’ id. 9806.
239. bad in C
is OE. bēad, offered him hospitality; in O, OE. bæd,
477
invited him to a banquet, as also in C 241. gistninge,
entertainment; ME. gistnen, derivative of OE. giest, influenced
by OWScand. gista: see Björkman, 152.
240. to ȝeines
him, against his coming, to receive him: comp. ‘scipen he þer funde.
| þat to-ȝenes him weoren ibonned,’ L 9731. Elsewhere in L the
preposition is joined with a verb of motion.
241. fæire
underfon: see 5/11 note.
245. ꝥ, until:
see 72/179.
246. ‘Le castel et
l’oevre agarda, | Mult fu bien fais, mult le loa,’ W 7103.
249. Layamon’s delight
in descriptions of feasts and music is in strong contrast to Wace’s
prosaic manner. The present passage may be compared with L 3634, 5107,
14946. Mätzner would read gomen-men, musicians, or gleomen, with change
of cleopien into gleowien, but gomen means games, a regular
accompaniment of the feast (see KH 478 note), and cleopien
proclaim, as in ‘Lette þe king gan awal; ⁊ lude clepien ouer
al,’ L 3644.
250. hetten,
ordered; perhaps a mistake for letten, as L has generally hehten in this
sense. With breden comp. ‘bordes heo brædden,’ L 18523, where O
has ‘bordes hii leiden’: it means, to cover with cloth and
viands.
251. dræm
&c.: comp. 102/146; ‘blisse wes on folke,’ L 5108, ‘blisse wes on
hirede,’ id. 14947.
252.
þa—iloten, then had the better fallen to their lot; lucky
men were they! OE. gehlēotan, to share by lot.
253-268. In L 14956-81
Ronwen again appears as cupbearer.
254. vnimete
prude, boundless splendour: OE. prȳto, influenced in this
meaning by OWScand. prýþi, ornament.
255. al ꝥ
scrud, all the clothing; sing., the pl. is ‘alle þa
scrud,’ L 10180: the number changes in heo weoren. ibon,
prepared, adorned: comp. ‘wel wes he ibon,’ L 12805, in O alle wel
idiht; ‘þas scipen ibone,’ id. 32037. It is an East Scand. pp.
bōin, as buen is West Scand. búinn: ‘iboned,’ L 8086, with same meaning
is pp. of the derivative *ibonen parallel with bounen, derivative
of buen. See Björkman, 206.
256. ibrusted,
made bristly, rough: comp. ‘alle þai mete-burdes; ibrusted
(ibrustled O) mid golde,’ L 24667; ‘vestes auroque ostroque rigentes,’
Virg. Æn., xi. 72.
261. sæt, went
down on: comp. ‘þa hie for þam cumble on cneowum sæton,’ Grein, ii.
484/180: see KH 781 note.
263. wæs hæil
is OWScand. væs heill, be well, good health to you! In ‘Lavert King wes
hel tant li dist,’ W 7115, the forms are English: comp.
478
‘Wes þu, Hroðgar, hal!’ Beowulf, 407. for—uæin: see 94/24:
O means, for thy coming is wholesome to me; for comes, plural
with meaning of singular, comp. ‘hwanan eowre cyme syndon,’ Beowulf, 257; ‘hwonan his cyme
sindon,’ Grein, iii. 89/1196; and for the usual expression, 94/24
note.
266. See 102/159.
weoren, might be.
267. Keredic:
‘Redic li respondi premiers, | Brez ert, si fu bons latiniers; | Ce fu
li premiers des Bretons | Qui sot le langaige as Sessons,’ W 7119. The
name, Cerdic, Ceredic, Cerdicelmet, is in Nennius, ed. Petrie, ch.
xxxvii. sellic, marvellous, gifted.
268. ær is
probably a scribe’s mistake for æuer, due to her following.
271. tiðende,
pl. practice: see 96/35; and for Hit with beoð pl. 1/10,
94/7. ‘Costume est, sire, en son païs,’ W 7127.
272. gladieð of
drenche, find enjoyment in drinking: of with the adj. is common,
with the verb rare: comp. 126/310.
273.
Mid—hende, with pleasant courteous looks, or manner,
generally including gesture: ME. lat, lot is OWScand. lát, Björkman, 91.
Comp. ‘mid leofliche læten,’ L 19396; ‘mid swiðe uæire læten,’ id.
15661; ‘mid wunsumme lades,’ id. 12278. In Havelok 1246,
‘Wesseyl þe[i] ledden fele siþe,’ read seyden for ledden.
274. ‘Quant ami
boivent entre amis, | Que cil dist wes hel qui doit boire | Et cil
drinkel qui doit recoivre,’ W 7128. drinc hail, drink health, the
latter word being a noun, OWScand. heill.
276.
oðer—fareð, one brings another full one there. Different in
W, ‘Dont boit cil tote la moitié,’ but afterwards he has ‘Et de boivre
plain ou demi,’ 7143.
277. þreoien:
nothing corresponding in W, only ‘entrebaisier.’
278. sele
laȝen, pleasing customs: see KH 1110 note.
284 O. swipte,
tossed it off: OE. swipian, to lash; comp. OWScand. svipa, to
move quickly.
286. fain: the
English had a bad reputation for their drinking habits among their
French neighbours. Wace describes their revels on the night before the
battle of Hastings, ‘Bublie crient e weisseil | E laticome e
drincheheil, | Drinc hindrewart e drintome, | Drenc folf, drinc half e
drinc tode,’ Roman de Rou, ed. Andresen, 7377, that is, They cry, be
blithe and wassail, and let it (the cup) come and drinchail, drink after
and drink to me, drink full, drink half and drink to thee. ‘Fercula
multiplicant et sine lege bibunt. Wessail et dringail,’ says Burnellus
of the English students at Paris at the end of the twelfth century,
Nigelli Speculum, 63/19. The parallel place in the prose Brut is, ‘þat
was þe ferst tyme þat “whatsaile”
479
and “drynkehaile” come vp into þis lande; and fram þat tyme into this
tyme it Haþ bene wel vsede,’ 52/13.
290. mod . . .
main, mind and might: an OE. combination; comp. ‘ða ongunnon heo
sticcemælum mod ⁊ mægen monian,’ Bede, 54/8, = ‘vires animosque
resumere.’ halde to, inclined to: OE. hieldan: its use
elsewhere in L is quite different; ‘þa hæðene hundes; hælden
to grunde,’ L 19558, is typical.
291. Comp. ‘þe wurse
him wes ful neh,’ L 13284, 16636; ‘þe wurs him wes on heorte,’ id. 9215;
‘þe scucke wes bi-tweonen,’ id. 276; ‘Tant l’a diables cimoné | Qui
maint homme a à mal torné,’ W 7159. For ælche, swilce should
perhaps be read.
292. mæingde,
troubled, lit. mingled: the verb is mostly passive in L, as ‘his mod him
gon mengen; he morȝnede swiðe,’ 3407; comp. ‘Almast
menged him his mode,’ CM 8804.
293. murnede,
said of painful longing.
295. leoden to
hærme, to his people’s hurt: comp. ‘Twenti ȝer he heold þis
lond; þa leoden al to hærme,’ L 2580; 176/24 note:
folk in O is dative.
298.
funde—ræd, thought it advisable: comp. ‘he uunde on his
ræde; to don þat heo hine beden,’ L 21933; ‘Hit
is on mine rede; to don þat þu bede,’ id. 31106; 12/5 in
piece v. But W says he took the advice of his brother and friends, ‘Loë
li ont et consillié | Que il li doint délivrement,’ W 7172.
Phonology: ... eo in heoreð 58
(if from herian)
missing close parenthesis
w is lost ... bilæuen 39, biuoren
95
39 biuoren
(2) Of O.
... The present forms of willan
misprinted as plain (non-bold)
... Initial hl is reduced to
l
“l” misprinted as bold instead of italic
hn to n, nap 275
“hn to n” added by author
Adjectives ... enne (ende) 211
enne(ende)
The personal pronouns ... mine neut.
22 (7)
22(7)
Four-fifths of the infinitives ... I c.
s. 3. bigon 221,
221;
V. s. 3. biheold 246, 288
period after “s.” invisible
(2) Of O.
... man s. d. 205,
205.
The personal pronouns ... ilca is
ilke s. n. m. 237, 275,
s. d. m.
275 s. d. m.
al a. 93.
al.
Metre: ... To sechen on
folde; ænne brædne fæld’
close quote missing
comp. ‘Þa andswarede eorles þare
comp,
37. ... one MS. of W
W.
72-76. ... Grimm, Teutonic Mythology, 1. 122
ff
122ff
123. If hele represents OE.
hælo
text unchanged: error for “hǣlo”?
175. ... because of your
unpopularity.
unpopularity,
263. ... Beowulf, 257
Beowulf 257
Orm’s three forms of the letter “g” (screenshot repeated from main
volume):
The printed linenotes almost always use yogh (ȝ) for insular g
(ᵹ).
Manuscript: Junius 1, Bodleian Library, Oxford: an oblong
folio, written in double columns on 118 leaves of parchment varying
considerably in size, the largest being 508 × 200 mm.; about 1210 A.D., and an autograph, but corrected by a
second and third hand. See further Holt, i. p. lxxvi.
Facsimiles: Skeat, W. W., Twelve Facsimiles, plate iv.
Palaeographical Society; Second Series, plate 133. Napier, A. S.,
Notes on the Orthography of the Ormulum, Oxford, 1893, also in History
of the Holy Rood-tree, E. E. T. S., O. S. 103.
Editions: White, R. M., Oxford, 1852. Holt, R., 2 vols.,
Oxford, 1878. Extracts in Mätzner, Sweet’s First Middle English Primer,
48-81, Emerson and other Readers.
Literature: The Author:
Logeman, H., Archiv, cxvii. 29; Björkman, E., Archiv, cxix. 33, cxxiii.
23; Bradley, H., Athenaeum, May 19,
480
1906; Wilson, J., ibid., July 28, 1906; Phonology: Blackburn, F. A., The Change of þ to t
in the Ormulum, American Journal of Philology, iii. 46; Bülbring,
K. D., Die Schreibung eo im Ormulum, Bonner Beiträge, xvii.
51; Callenberg, C., Layamon und Orm nach ihren Lautverhältnissen
verglichen, Jena, 1876; Hale, E. E., Open and Close ē in the
Ormulum, Modern Language Notes, viii. 37; Kaphengst, C., An Essay on the
Ormulum, Elberfeld, n. d.; *Lambertz, P., Die Sprache des
Orrmulums, Marburg, 1904; Menze, G., Der Ostmittelländische Dialekt,
Strassburg. diss., Cöthen, 1889; *Napier, A. S., as above; Grammar: Funke, O., see p. 450; Sachse, R., Das unorganische e im
Orrmulum, Halle, 1881; Thuns, B., Das Verbum bei Orm, Leipziger Diss.,
Weida, 1909; Weyel, F., Der syntaktische Gebrauch des Infinitivs im
Ormulum, Meiderich, 1896; Zenke, W., Synthesis und Analysis im Orrmulum,
Götting. Diss., Halle, 1910, completed in Morsbachs Studien, no. xl;
Consonant Doubling: Björkman, E., Orrms
Doppelkonsonanten, Anglia, xxxvii. 351 (good summary of previous
literature); Effer, H., Einfache und doppelte Konsonanten im Ormulum,
Anglia, vii, Anzeiger, 166; Holthausen, F., Wel und well im Ormulum,
Anglia, Beiblatt, xiii. 16; Trautmann, M., Orm’s Doppelkonsonanten,
Anglia, vii, Anzeiger, 94, 208, Anglia, xviii. 371; General: Brate, E., Nordische Lehnwörter im Orrmulum,
Paul-Braune, Beiträge, x. 1, 580; Deutschbein, M., Die Bedeutung der
Quantitätszeichen bei Orm, Archiv, cxxvi. 49, cxxvii. 308; Kluge, F.,
Das französische Element im Orrmulum, ES xxii. 179; Kölbing, E., Zur
Textkritik des Ormulum, ES i. 1, ii. 494; Monicke, C. H., Notes and
Queries on the Ormulum, Leipzig, 1853; Reichmann, H., Die Eigennamen im
Orrmulum, Göttingen, 1905, and as no. xxv of Morsbachs Studien;
Sarrazin, G., Über die Quellen des Orrmulum, ES vi. 1.
Phonology: Orm supplemented the current graphic methods by
devices of his own. Thus he systematically doubled a consonant after a
short vowel in a closed syllable, so tunnderrstanndenn 109. Whether he
meant thereby to indicate shortness of the vowel or length of the
consonant is disputed. The latter view seems the more probable; the
difficulty which is presented by the occurrence of the doubled consonant
in unstressed syllables, where it is short in ordinary speech, is
removed if, with Björkman, we suppose that the phonetist isolated his
syllables in testing their value. Where the consonant after an open
syllable is in fact short, Orm often places a breve over the preceding
short vowel, as wĭtenn 3, tăkenn 40, wăke 76, 82, 105, hĕte 87, hĕre
123, but fails at times, as in sune 20, wake 56, here 114, 143. Likewise
he uses very seldom an almost horizontal accent to indicate vowel
length, as á 174, but more frequently, as if to
481
emphasize his warning against possible error, doubles it, as le̋t, fe̋t
10, ha̋t 37, űt 53, &c., or even for greater insistence trebles it,
as clū̋t 2, ȝē̋t 39, mostly before final t. Here, too, he is not
systematic, thus time 115 has a single mark of length twenty times
elsewhere, and words like ut have sometimes two, sometimes three
accents.
Furthermore, Orm invented a special
symbol with a flat top projecting on both sides
for the guttural stop g, reserving the continental g for the dzh sound
in such words as egge (edge), leggen, seggen: the latter occurs in this
extract only in gluternesse 167, and that by mistake. In his
representation of late OE. eo, ēo, the author hesitated
between eo and e, preferring the former at the beginning, but gradually
increasing the use of the latter, so that it becomes normal in the last
third of the work and invariable in the Dedication and Preface, which
were, no doubt, written last of all. He then appears to have aimed at
uniformity by scraping out, not always effectually, the o wherever he
had written eo, which was restored in many instances (but apparently not
in this extract) by a later scribe in a fainter ink and thinner letter.
Holt, by printing eo wherever it once existed, fails to represent the
actual state of the manuscript: in this extract o is still visible,
though partly erased, in heore 56, heoffness, leome 57, þeossterrnesse
65, deofless 67, heoffness, leome 70, heoffness 77, mildheorrtnesse 78,
heoffness 107, 113, deofless 126; everywhere else it is completely
erased. Finally, heffness 174 is so written without erasure in a line
added lengthwise on the margin, perhaps from the following leaf, which
is now missing and may have been withdrawn by the author. It is
generally held that Orm employed eo and e to represent the same sound,
the former being a traditional spelling. This is unlikely on the part of
a determined phonetician like Orm, who would naturally be impatient of
traditional spellings. Much more probable is Bülbring’s view that Orm
spoke a mixed dialect, in which an [ö] sound existed beside the [e]
sound, and that he finally decided for the latter.
Oral a is a, acc 3, habbenn 51; a before nasals
a, grammcunndnesse 86, ‘năme’ i. 9717; a before
lengthening groups a, faldess 56 (fal(o)d), hande 10, sang
131, but short in annd 114, unstressed, stanndenn 67, 117: the
indefinite pronoun is mann 36. æ is a, affterr 21, fasste
59, wăke 76; ꝥat 46 was probably meant for þatt: wrecche 4 (4 times),
wrecchelike 24 is OE. wrecca. e is e, cwellen 38,
hĕre 123, hĕte 87, sett 146, but se̋tt 68 (probably miswritten),
stressed wel 34 (13), qualifying a verb, and in most cases at the end of
the first half-line, beside well 29 (4), qualifying adjective or adverb;
e before lengthening groups is e, ende 113, genge 129, but
short are senndeþþ 62 and enngle 15 (10), with a consonant after the
482
lengthening group: whillc 152, iwhillc 134, 161 represent hwilc,
gehwilc, swillke 69, swilc. i is i, cribbe
2, friþþ 133, inn 2 &c., mikell 93, wĭtenn 3 (Orm divided wiþþ utenn
113), but in 170: i before lengthening groups is i,
bindenn 10, child 4, shildenn 67, 126, but brinngenn 18, sinndenn 74,
169, winnde clū́t 2, 7. o is o, follc 30, biforenn 16;
before lengthening groups o, unorneliȝ 45, worde 60, but short
are wollde 5, forrþrihht 1 (usually forþ uncompounded): o is
u in wurrþenn 33, 48 (worden) by analogy of the
infinitive. u is u, stunnt 27, vnnorne 4; before
lengthening groups u, sungenn 131, tunge 119, wundenn 7, but
short are hunngerr 37, unnderrstanndenn 109, wullderr 132, wunnderrliȝ
35. y is i, dill 27 (*dyll), gillteþþ 155, ifell
64, þrisst 37, wrihhte 151; before lengthening groups, kinde 108, but
birrþ 3, 44.
ā is a, á 174, lare 79, whas 90; before two consonants
a, bitacneþþ 100, gast 73: shortening in hallȝhe 69: swā
is usually swa 17, but se 1 (swē). ǣ1 is
æ, hæþenndom 161, læreþþ 73, sæ 12; before two consonants
æ, næfre 41, unnclænnesse 161, but a in aniȝ 157
(ānig), lasse 39, mast 169 (North. māst).
ǣ2 is mostly æ, færedd 84, 91, lætenn 45, 54,
þær 19 (4), wæde 8, wære 17 (3), wærenn 58 (3), but e in
greditleȝȝc 167, and with shortening fordredd 88 (4); before two
consonants æ, wæpnedd 90, and e with shortening, sellðe
95. ē is e, betenn 158, eche 19, fe̋t 10, le̋t 10, but
o in doþ 29 &c., from the plural. ī is i, bliþe
85, pinenn 36, riche 5 (4); before two consonants i, crist 1, 90,
cristenndom 49, but elsewhere usually crisstendom. ō is o,
dom 75, god 71; before two consonants o, frofrenn 60, 66:
shortened in comm 26, 30, 55, soffte 85. ū is u, brukenn
174, -clū̋t 2, űt (numen) 53; shortened in
vpp 18, 142, uss 3, 62. ȳ is i, bisne 43 (bȳsne),
grisliȝ 91 (*grȳslig), kiþenn 92, litell 21 (3),
shrideþþ 6.
ea before r + cons. is a, naru 13, starrke 75;
before lengthening groups æ, ærd 5, middelærd 6, but harrd 37,
towarrd 87, warrþ 3 (3). The i-umlaut is not represented in this
extract, it is e in ‘errfe’ i. 1068, beside ‘dærne’ i. 2004,
where æ represents ea before a lengthening group.
ea before l + cons. is a (Anglian), all 3 &c.,
hallf 36, 93; before lengthening groups a, haldenn 22, kald 37,
walde 124; the i-umlaut is e, beldeþþ 79, corrected out of
miswritten beoldeþþ; see 359/5. eo before r + cons. is
e, herrte 89, 119, but misspelt herte 134; before lengthening
groups e, erless 164, erþe 20 (4). To the wur group belong
forrwerrpenn 149, wurrþenn 17 (3), wurrþshipe 132: ȝernenn 21 is without
umlaut, but hirde 53, hirdess 46, irre 75, 167. eo before
l + cons. is seen in sellf 53, sellfenn 19 (4). eo,
u-umlaut of e is eo, heoffness 57 (5), but e
in heffness 5 (11), hefennlike 8, werelld 9: the å-umlaut of
e is wanting in berenn 29; the umlaut of i is eo in
heore 56, but here 50, ‘fele’ i. 7640. ea after palatals is
a, shall
483
134, shaffte 9, unnshaþiȝnesse 50 (scæþþig). ie after
g is i, ȝifenn 14 (5), ȝifeþþ 72, gife 174: ȝef is
ȝiff 80. eo after g is u, ȝung 108; after
sc, o, shollde 47, 94, sholldenn 50, 96.
ēa is æ, læfe 49, ræfenn 89, sæm 29, but e in ec
53 &c.; its i-umlaut is e, ekedd 129, lefenn 96.
ēo is e, ben 7, bitwenenn 141, defell 86 (3), lefe 34, lem
77 (4), sen 40, þed 15, and eo, deofless 67, leome 57, seo 91;
ȝho 2 (hēo) shows shifted accent: the i-umlaut of
ēo is wanting in lesenn 102, nede 33, stereþþ 9, þessterrnesse
63, 160, þeossterrnesse 65. gīet is ȝḗt 39. ēa after
palatals is e, shep 50, 54, īe after g, e,
ȝemenn 52, 125.
a + g is aȝh, laȝhess 22. æ + g is
aȝȝ, daȝȝ 99 (= daī), daȝȝess s. g. 100
(= dai-iess), laȝȝ 16, maȝȝ 40 (3), but seȝȝde 92 (as if from
*segde). e + g is eȝȝ, leȝȝd 13
(= leīd). Final -ig is iȝ (= ī), aniȝ 157, bodiȝ
173, grisliȝ 91, modiȝnesse 87; greditleȝȝc 167 is probably miswritten.
i + h is ihh, sihhþe 58, 77. o + g is
oȝh, forrhoȝhenn 149. u + g is uȝh, muȝhenn
80, 142. ā + g is aȝh, aȝhenn 3, 54. ō +
g is oh, inoh 31. ea + h is seen in waxenn
137; the i-umlaut in mihhte 36, 137, nihht 55, 57, but mahht 72,
allmahhtiȝ 108, nahht 46 (4) descend from Anglian forms in æ.
eo + ht is ihht in brihhte 77, rihhte 49, 89, 91,
fihhten 123; the i-umlaut is wanting in seþ 84 (corr. out of
seoþ). ēa + h is ehh, þehh 74 (ðēh shortened
by loss of stress), neh 30. ēo + ht is seen in lihht 57
(as if from leoht). ā + w gives aw, sawless
69, 129, wawenn 151. hewe 70 is from Anglian hēow: ohht 145
represents oht, similarly nohht 40, 91. ēa + w
appears in awwnedd 105 (*ēawnian); ēo + w in reweþþ
158 (corr. out of reoweþþ), trowwþe 90 (treowþ without umlaut and
with shifted accent), þeww 72 (= þeū: from þeow), so, too,
þewwten 31.
Ealswā is alls 172: for e, i appears in drihhtin
42 (6); it is lost in wiþþren 150, added in swikedomess 67, 168, onne
29, ‘offe’ i. 4097 by analogy of inne, uppe: o is a in
anan 1. The prefix ge is i, iwhillc 134, 161.
Metathesis of r is seen in þrisst 37, wrihhte 151. n is
lost in i 2, o 36; by inadvertence it is not doubled in unorneliȝ 45,
comp. vnnorne 4. f is used in every position, faldess 56, hafeþþ
28, hallfe 93, but it was probably voiced between vowels and vowellikes,
v as in ‘serven’ i. 506 is rare. For d, þ appears
by analogy in wurrþenn 33, 48. After d, t, certain
pronominal words change initial þ to t, tær 13, tanne 94, tatt 13
&c., teȝȝ 128, te 25, 115, tu 34. sć is regularly sh,
shrideþþ 6, shop 9, nesshe 37; in bisscopess 51, ‘bisskopess’ i. 7233
(but elsewhere bisshopess), and mennisscnesse 38, sc is probably due to
Scandinavian influence. The stop c is k before e,
i, makenn 5, mannkinn 21, c before o, u,
other consonants and final, comm 26, clut 2, flocc 49, ec 53 (contrast
ekedd 129), k or c in other positions, kald 37. č
is ch, child 4, eche 19, but palatalization does not take place
in
484
swillke 69, illke 13, illkess 161, iwhillc 134, whillc 152 and ekedd
129, mikell 93, miccle 33. čč is cch in wrecche 4:
cw is regularly preserved, cwellenn 38, cwike 15; qu
occurs in the Latin words quarrterrne, quaþþrigan. Palatal g is
ȝ, ȝæn 73, ȝernenn 21, ȝifenn 14 (6), but gife 174: the guttural
spirant is ȝh, follȝhenn 79, 107, 165, hallȝhe 69, sinnȝheþþ 155.
The guttural stop is distinguished from the
dzh sound in edge, which is represented by g. h is lost initially
in laferrd 25, nesshe 37, reweþþ 158: hēo is ȝho 2: hw is
wh, whas 90, whatt 137.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. sune 20, 106 represents
sunu. Gen. -ess, daȝȝess
100, deofless 67, heffness 14, lifess 100, but, by a scribal error,
daȝȝes 75: d. -e, hewe 170, sune
96, worde 60, and six others, but the inflection is mostly wanting, as
in bodiȝ 173, daȝȝ 99, dom 75, and thirty-two others. The acc.
heffne 12 is due to the LWS. fem. heofone. The pl.
n. a. of masculines ends in -ess,
hirdess 46, bisscopess 51; neuters are shep 50, 54, ?wiless 126:
genitives are enngle (þed) 15, 122, kinne 64, 71, 157: datives have
mostly -ess, bandess 11, claþess 24, but
þinge 71, wrihhte 151. The fem. nouns of the strong declension
end in e in the s. n. a., blisse, sellðe 95, are 80,
bisne 43, except mahht 72, þed 15, werelld 9, and sæ 12. Gen.
-e, helle 101, 151, possibly blisse 174:
dat. -e, blisse 18, cribbe 2,
hallfe 93, but hallf 36. Pl. g. is þede 122; d. sawless
129; a. hande 10, shaffte 9, sawless 69. Nouns of the weak
declension have mostly -e in all cases of
the singular, but demess 75 is genitive and, before the caesura, lem 77,
dative, beside leome 57, lem 107, 163 accusative: a pl. n. is
wawenn 151. The minor declensions are represented by fet pl. a.
10, mann s. n. 20, manness s. g. 172, manne
s. d. 30, mann s. a. 134, menn pl. n. 76,
pl. d. 49, 56; nahht s. d. 46, nihht
s. a. 57; moderr s. d. 1; child
s. n. 4.
Adjectives which in OE. end in e retain that termination throughout,
as bliþe 85, cweme 152, eche 19, 100, 103, milde 82, riche 5, 112, 165,
soffte 85, vnnorne 4. Instances of weak inflections are
s. d. m. laþe 165, lefe 34, rihhte 49, starrke 75,
s. d. f. brihhte 77, s. a. m. laþe 32,
73, 123, s. a. neut. rihhte 89, rume 14: strong inflections
are few, s. d. f. fulle 90, hefennlike 8, 173,
s. a. m. gode 153: all others are uninflected in the
singular. The plural ends in -e, glade
127, gode 147, hallȝhe 69, laþe 31, 66, 126, cwike 15. Adjectives used
as nouns are not inflected. mycel in the strong declension is
mikell, s. d. f. 131, s. a. f. 93,
s. a. neut. 61, in the weak, miccle
s. d. f. 33 (myclan), s. a. neut.
120 (mycle). āgen gives aȝhenn 3, 54 without inflection.
OE. ān is an n. m. 114, a 172, aness
g. m. 170, an d. f. 2, a. m. 49,
a. f. 3. Comparatives are bettre, mare 145, lasse 39;
superlative, mast 169.
485
The personal pronouns are uss, tu, after t, 34, þe. The pronoun of
the third person is s. n. he m. 3, ȝho f. 2,
itt neut. 28 (with asse mf.); d. himm m. 17,
23; a. 2, itt neut. 29 (with sæm m.); pl. n.
þeȝȝ 130, teȝȝ, after t, 52; d. a. þeȝȝm. Reflexives are
himm 10, 173, þe sellfenn 44, 45, himm sellfen 19, 35: definitive, himm
sellf 53: possessives, ure 4; hiss, as general form for the singular, 1,
3, 16, 34, 47, 54, but hise g. m. 155; pl. a. hise
22; here 50, heore 56, teȝȝre, after t, 32. The definite article is þe,
te, after t, 25, 126: þatt (ꝥ), tatt, after t, is demonstrative
adjective 13 or demonstrative pronoun 26; its plural is þa adj.
56 and pron. 22. The compound demonstrative is s. þiss 6,
pl. þise. The relative is þatt, tatt, after t, 13, 27; þatt 30,
36, = in, on which, þurrh whatt 137, 144, by that by which.
Interrogative is whillc 152 (hwelc); its correlative is swillke
pl. a. 69: ilca is illke s. n. 13, 152,
a. 97, 118. Indefinites are mann 29, 36, 38, 169; whase 154, whas
90, whoso; illkess 161, every; iwhillc 134, 161; aniȝ pl. g. 157;
all s. n. neut. 30, d. neut. 64, 94,
a. m. 32, f. 9, neut. 14, but alle
s. d. f. 6; pl. alle n. 128, alre
g. 169, alle 64, 71, all 122, alle d. 172, a. 5, 9,
22: all 168 is apparently s. n. = everyone.
Infinitives end in -enn, except sen 40,
fon 36: of the second weak conjugation are follȝhenn 107, forhoȝhenn
149, lofenn 110, lokenn 156, makenn 5, pinenn 36, ræfenn 89, sammnenn
48, tacnenn 47, þankenn 120. The dat. inf. is not inflected, to
berenn 29, tunnderrstanndenn 109, to sen 116, forr to kiþenn 92, for
. . . to makenn 112. Presents are s. 3. beldeþþ 79,
bitacneþþ 100, and nineteen others; contracted, birrþ 3, 44, seþ 84,
stannt 158; pl. cumenn 70, haldenn 22, lufenn 23, stanndenn 117,
waken 66, wiþþrenn 150: subjunctive s. 3. gife 174, seo 91. Past
of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 3. laȝȝ 16: I b. s. 3. comm 26,
30, 55: I c. s. 3. wand 2, warrþ 3, 20, 42; pl. 3. sungenn
131: IV. s. 3. shop 9, toc 60, 82; pl. 3. unnderrstodenn
135, wokenn 46, 56 (form from wacan, meaning from wacian):
V. s. 3. let 10. Participles past: I a. ȝifenn 17: I b. borenn 1,
97, cumenn 92, utnumen 53: I c. wundenn 7, wurrþenn 33, 48: IV. V.
waxenn 138: V. forrdredd 88, forrdredde adj. pl. 59, 83,
offdredde 74. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 3. leȝȝde 2, seȝȝde 92.
Participles past: bitacnedd 81, ekedd 129, leȝȝd 13, sett 68, 146. Minor
Groups: witenn inf. 3, witt 2 s. imp. 34, wisste pt.
s. 83, wisstenn pt. pl. 128, 139; shall pr. s. 134,
shollde pt. s. 47, 94, shollden pt. pl. 50, 96; muȝhenn
inf. 142, maȝȝ pr. s. 40, 152, 171, muȝhenn pr. pl.
subj. 80, mihhte pt. s. 36, 137; ben inf. 7, iss
pr. s. 63, 151 (apparently with pl. nominative), niss 91,
sinndenn pr. pl. 74, 169, be pr. s. subj. 28, si 3 s.
imp. 132, wass pt. s. 1, wærenn pt. pl. 58, 76, 127,
wære pt. s. subj. 17, 138, 172; wile pr. s. 88, wollde
pt. s. 5; to don dat. inf. 32, doþ pr. s. 29, 109,
missdoþ 157, don pp. 61, 118.
486
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are afell 28, aȝȝ 44, baþe 10,
fra 67, gætenn 52, griþþ 133, laȝhenn 44, lahȝhre 43, mec 85, occ 117,
sahht(nesse) 140, skerrenn 88, skill (læs) 27, summ 27, takenn 40, till
49, (inn)till 18, þeȝȝ 74, þeȝȝre 32, þohh 28, usell 4, usell(dom) 24,
and the suffix in (modiȝ)leȝȝc, (gredit)leȝȝc 167; possibly also bandess
10, come 148, deȝeþþ 41. French is gluter(nesse) 167; long i in Crist
shows new borrowing from French.
Dialect: East Midland bordering on the North; a mixed
dialect, which possibly accounts for the wavering in the representation
of eo, ēo. The large Scandinavian element in the
vocabulary and the absence of u in final syllables (372/34) point to the
East; the representation of ā + w, the development of
c, g, and perhaps the uniform appearance of ā as a
in this thirteenth-century text, show Northern influence. Lambertz has
noted so many correspondences between the phonology of Orm and that of
the Rushworth gloss on the Gospel of S. Matthew as to make it probable
that they belong to the same dialectal area. The Northern border of
Lincolnshire was most probably the place where the Ormulum was
written.
Metre: For the scheme of the Septenarius see p. 327. Orm’s verse is monotonously regular; every
line has its fifteen syllables exactly counted out and ends in x́ x; the
caesura comes after the eighth syllable; the rhythm is iambic without
substitution. For the sake of this uniformity he does violence to the
natural accent in Niþþrédd 35, Bisscópess 51, Enngléss 69, sahhtnésse
140, drihhtíness 171, though Schipper regards such cases as examples of
‘hovering accent,’ wherein the stress is distributed equally over the
two syllables having the word-accent and the verse-accent,—a
spondee rather than an iamb. Elision takes place regularly before an
initial vowel or h, sonẹ, leȝȝdẹ 2, vnnornẹ, wrecchẹ 4, heffnẹ 12,
mihhtẹ 36, wolldẹ 54, wilẹ 88, seȝȝdẹ 94, whasẹ 154, &c. Sometimes e
is not written, as in whas 90; crasis is found elsewhere in he̋t
(= he itt), ȝhőt (= ȝho itt), þűtt (= þu itt), and
similar combinations.
Introduction: The author of the Ormulum speaks of himself
under two names in ‘Þiss boc iss nemmnedd Orrmulum Forrþi þatt Orrm itt
wrohhte,’ Preface 1, 2, and ‘Icc wass þær þær I crisstnedd wass Orrmin
bi name nemmnedd,’ Dedication 323, 4. The former was a fairly common
name in the Scandinavian districts of the North; in the latter, not
found elsewhere, he has probably added, as befitting the ritual
occasion, the Latin termination īn from īnus, as in Awwstin
(= Augustinus). In the same way, as Bradley suggests, he has taken
the termination of Ormulum from Speculum, as often occurring in titles
of devotional books, like Speculum Laicorum, Conscientiae, Sanctorale.
He tells us that he wrote at the request of his brother Walter, who was,
like himself, an Augustinian Canon;
487
his purpose was to paraphrase and expound, for the benefit of unlearned
English folk, the Gospels of the Mass throughout the year. His
exposition is drawn for the most part from S. Bede, and particularly
from his sermons and commentaries, and to a small extent from S. Gregory
the Great. Traces of his acquaintance with S. Isidore and Josephus,
through Hegesippus, have been found by Sarrazin.
Nothing further is known of Orm, but Bradley has made it probable
that he was an inmate of Elsham Priory in North Lincolnshire (Dugdale,
vi. 560). The contention of J. Wilson that he was identical with Orm,
brother of Walter, Prior of Carlisle between 1150 and 1170, would be
very attractive, if it were not for the philological difficulty, for the
Ormulum is undoubtedly written in the Midland dialect, and must be dated
about 1210.
This extract gives ll. 3662-4009, in Holt, i. pp. 126-38.
1. Forrþrihht anan
se, lit. Straightway forthwith as, i.e. as soon as. Orm has
‘forrþrihht se, anan se, sone swa, son se, forrþrihht summ, anan summ,’
all with this same meaning, and forrþrihht summ, immediately, ii.
42/11404. Orm’s expletives are a feature of his dreary style; in his
dedication he says that he has set ‘maniȝ word | þe rime swa to
fillenn,’ that is, to make up the number of syllables required for his
metre; he makes extensive use of all, 112/3, 16 &c. Beside anan, Orm
has the primitive onn an, continuously, without a break.
2-18. The original of this
passage is, ‘Et pannis eum involvit et reclinavit eum in praesepio
. . . parvulus natus est nobis, ut nos viri possimus esse
perfecti. Qui totum mundum vario vestit ornatu, pannis vilibus
involvitur, ut nos stolam primam recipere valeamus. Per quem omnia facta
sunt, manus pedesque cunis adstringitur, ut nostrae manus ad opus bonum
exertae, nostri sint pedes in viam pacis directi. Cui coelum sedes est,
duri praesepis angustia continetur, ut nos per coelestis regni gaudia
dilatet. Qui panis est Angelorum, in praesepio reclinatur, ut nos quasi
sancta animalia carnis suae frumento reficiat,’ Bede, v. 234.
2. ⁊ = annd; see
115/114.
3. uss birrþ, we
ought: a favourite expression of Orm.
5. heffness ærd,
heaven’s region: a phrase suggested by middellærd.
9. shaffte,
creatures: OE. gesceafta.
10. baþe belongs to
fet ⁊ hande.
12-14. This section
diverges in form from those before and after it, as also from the
original. The subject of filleþþ is Þatt illke child.
heffness rume riche, the wide kingdom of heaven: perhaps
suggested by ‘ut amplitudinem nobis supernarum sedium tribueret’ of
Bede’s Sermon, vii. 300.
488
16. all alls = all
alse, alswa, quite as.
17. Swa summ, so
as, just as if: summ is OEScand. sum: more usually the phrase
means, just as, 112/27, 113/47, 55. Variants are ‘all swa summ,’ O.
Introd. 43; ‘all all swa summ,’ 114/76; ‘all all swa se,’ O. Dedication,
281. fode: the ass represents the Gentiles, of whom Bede says,
‘plurimi . . . coelestibus eius (= Christi) quaerebant
alimoniis ad perpetuam crescere salutem,’ vii. 300.
19. And give himself as
everlasting food there to us with angels.
21. to ȝernenn,
&c., to be content with a humble lot.
27. stunnt ⁊ dill:
comp. ‘⁊ stunnt ⁊ stidiȝ, dill ⁊ slaw | to sekenn sawless seollþe,’
O. i. 344/9885.
28. afell,
strength. O. has also a pp. afledd, endowed with strength, ‘Forr
cnapechild iss afledd wel,’ O. i. 274/7903; opposed to
‘unnstrang.’
30. þatt, when: so
þe 15/84, þa 15/93. comm . . . to manne, was incarnate: comp.
36/117, 114/97; ‘þe becom to mannum mid iudeiscum folce,’ Ælf. Lives,
ii. 60/89; ‘hu hi to mannum comon,’ AS. Hom. ed. Assmann, 26/44; ‘Hwarto
was he aure iscapen te manne,’ VV 113/14, regularly with pl.
dat.; contrast ‘ic ðe to men gebær,’ I bore thee as a man, Ælf.
Lives, ii. 78/175.
31. laþe gastess,
hateful spirits, i.e. false gods: ‘in asino autem exprimit populum
gentium, qui sordibus idololatriae semper manebat immundus,’ Bede, vii.
300.
33, 34. þurrh ꝥ . . .
þurrh ꝥ, inasmuch as, whereas . . . thereby, as a consequence;
propter quod . . . propter id: so 115/114, 116. O. is fond of
these formal correlatives: comp. ‘forr þi . . . Forr ꝥ,’
113/48.
35. niþþredd,
lowered, humbled: OE. geniþerod, pp. of niþerian.
wannsedd, diminished: OE. wansian. Comp. ‘⁊ illc an lawe ⁊
illc an hill | Shall niþþredd beon ⁊ laȝhedd,’ O. i. 321/9205; ‘Aȝȝ
niþþreþþ Godess genge, | ⁊ cwelleþþ hemm ⁊ wannseþþ hemm,’ id.
279/8032.
36. o ꝥ hallf ꝥ, in
that part of his nature in which: see 46/292.
39. ȝet lasse,
still lower: ‘qui modico quam Angeli minoratus est,’ Heb.
ii. 9.
43. lahȝhre inoh,
sufficiently lower, i.e. much lower.
45. lætenn,
&c., think very meanly: comp. 44/260.
46-53: suggested by, ‘Apte
autem satis hoc superna est providentia dispositum, ut nascente Domino
pastores in vicinia civitatis (eiusdem) vigilarent, suosque greges a
timore nocturno vigilando protegerent. Oportebat namque, ut cum magnus
pastor ovium, hoc est, animarum nutritor fidelium, in mundo natus est,
testimonium eius nativitati vigilantes super gregem suum pastores
darent. . . . Nam et futurum (iam) tunc erat, ut per
489
orbem universum electi pastores, id est, praedicatores sancti,
mitterentur, qui ad ovile Dominicum, videlicet sanctam Ecclesiam,
populos credentium cogerent,’ Bede, vii. 301.
46. wokenn, kept
watch: comp. 113/56.
48. forr þi . . . Forr
ꝥ, for that reason . . . because: like ‘eone es ferox, quia habes
imperium in beluas?’ Terence, Eun. iii. 1. 25.
49. rihhte læfe:
see 89/28.
52. ȝemenn . . .
gaetenn: comp. 114/68, 115/125: synonyms, the former English, the
latter Scandinavian.
53. utnumenn hirde:
‘princeps pastorum,’ 1 Pet. v. 4.
56. wakemenn,
watchers.
57. lihht ⁊ leome:
often in O.; comp. 114/70, 77, 115/107; ‘Ah swuch leome ⁊ liht | leitede
þrinne,’ SK 1582. leome is flame, a bright and flashing light.
With 57-70 comp. ‘Bene autem vigilantibus pastoribus angelus apparet,
eosque Dei claritas circumfulget. Quia illi prae ceteris videre sublimia
merentur, qui fidelibus gregibus praeesse sollicite sciunt, dumque ipsi
pie super gregem vigilant, divina super eos gratia largius coruscat,’
Bede, v. 235.
63. þessterrnesse:
comp. ‘Þiss þessterrnesse iss hæþenndom | ⁊ dwillde inn hæfedd sinness,’
O. ii. 303/18855.
64.
Inn—sinne, in sin of all kinds; comp. 114/71, 116/157, ‘O
fele kinne wise,’ O. i. 123/3573, and see 132/9 note.
67. stanndenn inn:
comp. 116/158; ‘Affterr þatt he beoþ fullhtnedd, | Birrþ stanndenn inn
to þeowwtenn Crist,’ O. ii. 43/11434, where Mätzner says it =
perseverare: in Specimens it is translated, continue. Orm is, in his
literal way, translating L. instare, to press on, to be zealous,
a meaning which suits well here and elsewhere: the phrase is peculiar to
him.
71. god innsihht,
‘recta sapere,’ ‘a right judgement in all things.’
72. hiss þeww, to
his servant.
74. þohh swa þehh,
notwithstanding: OE. þēah, yet, was reinforced by the addition of
swā, swā þēah meaning even so yet: to this in Orm is
prefixed the Scandinavian þoh, although. See Björkman, 73.
75. starrke, rigid,
stern: ‘se hearda dæg,’ Christ, 1065.
76-91: this passage is
mainly a repetition of O. 20/657-80, which comments on the appearance of
Gabriel to Zacharias, S. Luke i. 11: it is drawn from Bede’s Commentary:
‘Trementem Zachariam confortat Angelus: quia sicut humanae fragilitatis
est spiritalis creaturae visione turbari, ita et angelicae benignitatis
est paventes de aspectu suo mortales mox blandiendo solari. At contra
daemonicae est ferocitatis quos sui praesentia territos
490
senserit ampliori semper horrore concutere, quae nulla melius ratione
quam fide superatur intrepida,’ v. 220.
78. hihht, joyful
expectation.
79. frofreþþ . . .
beldeþþ, comforts . . . encourages, a favourite combination: comp.
O. Dedication, 237; i. 20/662.
82. Toc, betook
himself, began.
89. shetenn inn hiss
herrte: Holt translates, ‘shut up, harden,’ wrongly connecting
shetenn with OE. scyttan: it represents scēotan,
meaning, to shoot into his heart, to inflict a deadly wound: the
expression was suggested by such places as ‘þæt hi magon sceotan þa
unscyldigan heortan dygollice,’ = ‘ut sagittent in obscuro rectos
corde,’ Ps. x. 3 (Thorpe), and ‘þine flana synt swyþe scearpe on þam
heortum þinra feonda,’ id. xliv. 7.
90. whas is for
whase, whoso. itt is formal nominative; the whole expression is
equivalent to, Whosoever is armed. Comp. 116/154; ‘Whasumm itt iss þatt
illke mann | Þatt hafeþþ tweȝȝenn kirrtless,’ O. i. 324/9291;
‘Whatt mann se itt iss þatt wepeþþ her,’ id. 196/5666; ‘ꝥ iss ꝥ,’
116/157.
91. rihht,
adv., utterly, at all: ‘Rihht all swa summ,’ O. i. 39/1188,
means, precisely as.
93. o godess
hallfe, on God’s behalf.
97. borenn . . . to
manne: see 113/30 note.
98-102: ‘notandum quod
Angelus qui in noctis utique vigiliis pastores affatur non ait, hac
nocte, sed hodie natus est vobis salvator. Non aliam scilicet ob
causam, nisi quia gaudium magnum evangelizare veniebat. Nam ubi tristia
quaeque nocturnis temporibus gesta vel gerenda significantur, ibi saepe
nox vel adiungitur, vel etiam sola nominatur,’ Bede, v. 235.
100. all: see
112/3.
104-7: ‘Neque enim
frustra Angelus tanto lumine cinctus apparuit, ut claritas Dei pastores
circumfulsisse . . . dicatur . . . sed mystice
praemonuit, quod aperte postea monuit apostolus dicens, Nox
praecessit, dies autem appropinquavit,’ Bede, v. 235.
107. follc,
dative.
108-12: ‘Hoc est non
tantum humilitatis eum et mortalitatis, sed et paupertatis habitum
suscepisse pro nobis. Quia cum dives esset, pauper factus est pro
nobis, ut nos illius inopia ditaremur,’ Bede, v. 235.
109. wrecche,
poor, of lowly condition. doþ uss, causes, gives us to
understand: comp. 209/405; ‘us gedyde nu to witanne Alexander,’ Orosius
126/31 (= ‘nobis prodidit Alexander’).
111. Off . . .
wollde, because of the fact that he was willing; off governs
491
the clause, þatt he wollde: so, ‘writen uppo boc
. . . off þatt he wisslike ras,’ O. Dedication, 161, 167,
written in book concerning the fact that &c.
114-20: ‘mox multitudo
militiae coelestis advolans, consono in laudem creatoris ore prorumpit,
ut sui sicut semper obsequii devotionem Christo impendat, et nos suo
pariter instituat exemplo . . . Deo statim laudes ore, corde
et opere reddendas,’ Bede, v. 235.
116. Thereby it was
given us to see and understand full well in that incident.
119. herrtess
tunge: see 56/51: apparently, with sincere and heartfelt praise.
120. god is
acc. of the thing for which thanks are to be given. Comp. 132/11;
‘þonkien hit ure drihten,’ OEH. i. 5/29.
121-6. ‘Et bene chorus
adveniens Angelorum militiae coelestis vocabulum accipit, qui et duci
illo potenti in praelio, qui ad debellandas aëreas potestates apparuit,
humiliter obsecundat. Deus . . . ad tutelam nostram constituit
exercitus Angelorum,’ Bede, v. 235, 6.
123. Alls is
shortened alse, as. ȝæn . . . gast: see 114/66, 73.
127-9: ‘Glorificant
Angeli Deum pro nostro redemptione incarnatum, quia dum nos conspiciunt
recipi, suum gaudent numerum impleri,’ Bede, v. 236.
132-5: ‘Gloria in
altissimis Deo, et in terra pax hominibus bonae voluntatis,’ S. Luke ii.
14.
133. griþþ ⁊
friþþ: a frequent combination in O.; the words are synonyms, one
Scandinavian, the other English: see 19/57
note.
136-8: that the angelic
host was to be made up to its full number by the addition of holy souls,
by which addition honour and glory in God’s presence should be as though
it were increased, if indeed it were capable of increase. The
explanation of this passage is helped by the parallel place, ll. 143-5:
‘Ȝiff—mihhte’ corresponds to l. 145. ‘quos infirmos prius
abiectosque despexerant [Angeli], nascente in carne Domino iam socios
venerantur,’ Bede, v. 236.
140. soþ
sahhtnesse: see 84/50.
146-51: ‘qui cum pacem
hominibus poscunt, exponunt et quibus, videlicet bonae voluntatis, hoc
est eis qui suscipiunt natum Christum, non autem Herodi, pontificibus et
Pharisaeis caeterisque antichristis, qui eius nativitate audita turbati
sunt, eumque quantum valuere gladiis insecuti. Non est enim pax
impiis, dicit Dominus,’ Bede, v. 236.
149. Forrhoȝhenn
&c., despise and reject.
151. wrihhte,
merit, lit. thing done: OE. gewyrht, from wyrcan:
492
a dat. pl.: comp. ‘⁊ he wass flemmd ⁊ drifenn ut | All affterr
hise wrihhte,’ O. i. 286/8239, id. 147/4283.
154. itt: see
114/90.
155. hise
þannkess, wilfully, of his own free will: see 10/167.
156. himm lokenn,
keep watch over himself: see 4/20, 78/85.
158. stannt . . .
inn: see 114/67 note.
165. flocc,
company: a favourite word of the author’s: comp. 113/49, ‘þe laþe
gastess flocc,’ O. i. 226/6546; ‘summ hæþene flocc,’ id.
344/9875.
167. modiȝleȝȝc,
with same meaning as modiȝnesse, l. 165, but with Scand. suffix, leikr,
leiki in Icel. forming abstracts. There are a good many instances in the
MS. of -nesse corrected into -leȝȝc. greditleȝȝc: so MS., but the correct form
is grediȝleȝȝc, as elsewhere in Orm.
170. hewe, form,
appearance.
173. hefennlike:
‘Angeli corpora in quibus hominibus apparent, in superno aëre sumunt
solidamque speciem ex coelesti elemento inducunt, per quam humanis
obtutibus manifestius demonstrentur,’ Bede, viii. 294. f. 95 v ends with
kinde, l. 174 is added on the margin, and the two leaves following are
missing.
Literature: ... Orrms
Doppelkonsonanten
Ormms
111. ... ‘writen uppo boc
text unchanged; text cited has “writenn”
Manuscripts: i. Bodleian 34, Oxford (B); on vellum, 165 ×
120 mm.; written in one hand throughout about 1210 A.D. Its contents are S. Katherine f. 1 r; S.
Margaret f. 18 r; S. Juliana f. 36 v (see p. 139); Hali Meidenhad
f. 52 v; Sawles Warde f. 72 r (old foliation f. 76 r). It has lost two
leaves after f. 80, which is very faint and defective. Entries in
fourteenth-century hands connect it with Ledbury, Godstow, and Magna
Coworne (Much Cowarne) in Herefordshire. The text is printed from this
manuscript up to its end at 127/4.
The writing is sometimes difficult to decipher; the letters are often
crowded and hesitating, a, e, o are sometimes hard to distinguish.
Doubts are permissible in the following cases, hwen or hwon
118/24, ihaten or ihoten 37, hondon or honden 51; in sent
55, the last letter wavers between t and d; in ȝemelese 56, ȝ appears to
have been corrected out of g; after mei 60, there is a half-formed c;
under the second o of preoouin 72, there is what looks like a casual pen
mark, not a dot of erasure; in seoueuald 287, d is corrected out of t,
or the reverse.
ii. Royal 17 A 27, British Museum (R); on vellum, 160 × 117 mm.;
early thirteenth century. Has all the pieces in B except Hali Meidenhad,
with the addition of an incomplete copy of the Oreisun of Seinte Marie
493
(printed in OEH i., p. 305). This manuscript supplies the end here from
127/4.
iii. Cotton Titus D 18, British Museum (T). See p. 355.
Editions: Morris, R., OEH i. 244-267 (with translation);
Specimens, 87-95 (part only); Kluge, F., ME. Lesebuch, 8-15; Wagner, W.,
Kritische Textausgabe . . . mit Einleitung, Anmerkungen und
Glossar, Bonn, 1908.
Literature: Bartels, L. (see p.
450/23); Einenkel, E., Ueber die Verfasser einiger
neuangelsächsischer Schriften, Leipzig, 1881, continued in Anglia, v.
91; Konrath, M., ES xii. 459; Stodte, H., Ueber die Sprache und Heimat
der ‘Katherine-Gruppe,’ Göttingen, 1896; Vollhardt, W. (see p. 269/19); Williams, Irene F., Anglia, xxix.
413.
Sources: SW is a free expansion of chapters xiii,
xiv and xv of the fourth book of the treatise, De Anima, ascribed to
Hugh of S. Victor (Rouen ed., 1648, vol. ii. pp. 207-9). The imaginative
detail is mostly due to the English author: contrast, ‘Et qui veniunt
cum illa?’
Memoria: ‘Mille daemones ferentes secum libros grandes et uncos
ferreos et igneas catenas’ of the original with its equivalent
119/68-75. The gruesome picture of 119/86-121/140 is mainly derived from
the Visions literature.
Phonology: (1) of
B. The following should be compared with the account of the
MS. A of the Ancrene Wisse on pp. 357-62;
explanations of abnormal forms offered there are not repeated here. Oral
a is a, habben 41, makid 39; a before nasals and
lengthening groups is o, from 25, lonc 58, fondin 224, inȝonge
32; þen, þenne, hwen, hwenne are the usual forms, but þeonne 138 by
analogy of heonne: and is ant 9, man indefinite is me 45,
possibly mon 25. æ is mostly e, ed 98, gledd 208, but
ea in feader 116 (4 times), forbearneð 103 (forbærnan),
glead 201 (3), gleadschipes 306, 307, leatere 103, nease 96, 112
(næs-), reaðliche 21, smeale 70, wearliche 4, weattres 100, and
a in blac 58, 110, war 195, 332, warliche 39, 178, warre 142,
warschipes 42 &c., and habbe 61, 112, 220. e is e,
bereð 70, herien 320, spekeð 8; before lengthening groups, ende 106,
engles 239, but rikenin 86, stude 46 (3), hwuch 6 &c., swuch 93 (4).
Umlaut e is ea in beast 332 (but best 64), formealte 104
(Anglian mæltan), smeal 275, spealie 303: from *swolgian
descend forswolheð 91, forswolhe 152. i is regularly i,
blisse 136, ȝimmes 245, but wiit 200; before lengthening groups, binden
71, bringe 113, but u in wule 42 (7), wulleð 289: in welcume 227,
an early instance of this spelling, the adverb wel has been
substituted for the original wil. o is o, bodi 323,
bigotten 316; before lengthening groups, bold 129, word 73, but a
in nalde 7, walde 6 (3), wrahtte 74 (descended from an older form with
a): dehtren 202 is an umlaut plural: greot 93 for grot RT (grot,
particle) is due to confusion with grēot, grit. u is
494
regularly u, cume 7, stunde 207, tungen 114, once o in
comme 60, and i in kimeð 69, 138. y is u, arudden
120 (*āryddan), brune 83, ȝuldene 170, sunderlepes 280;
mycel is muchel 11, muche 105.
ā is a, ban 131, ouergað 270; before two consonants,
gast 323, tadden 95, but e through loss of stress in se 17
&c., (hwam) se 276, (hwider) se 275, ase 91, beside stressed swa 120
&c., alswa 230, and u in wumme 133: ohwider 25 is probably
influenced by nohwider (nō): ea in easkeð 75, 215, easkest
68 comes from a form with ǣ. ǣ1 is ea
(33 times), deale 105, ear 44, ȝeað 151, leasten 108, but e in
flesch 99 (5), lest 54, lesten 178, sumdel 137, 284, þen 158, 212,
mostly before two consonants. ǣnig is ei 42 (4), but eni 113;
ǣlc is euch 16 &c. ǣ2 is e (45
times), bere 23, dede 19, dreden 166 (5), ferliche 67 (3), þer 27, 150,
were 124 (9), and eo in leote 40; ea appears only in
deadbote 75, fearlac 62, heale 242, ileanett 35, 202, offearen 56 (4),
reades 296, ?readien 81, reade 142, readeð 177, þear 246, 331. ē
is e; ī, i, but u in bluðeliche 80
(*blȳþe); ō is o, but eo in iseoð 229
(beside soð 75, 179, 293, isoðet 257); ū is u without
exception; ȳ is u, cuðen 241, fure 71; before two
consonants, lutlin 327, but stele 114 represents the earlier
stǣli, similarly the derivative istelet 126.
ea before r + cons. is a in igarket 339, ȝarowe
260, swarte 70, 89, and before lengthening groups, hardi 56, inwarde 72,
inwardliche 247, towart 81 (4), warde 1 (3), wardi 141, warneð 34, warne
155, warni 42, warnin 63, 140, unwarnede 157, mostly after w, but
ea in heard 116 (7), ofearneð 135, as well as hearm 117, hearmin
290, and e in þerf 171. The i-umlaut is e, derne
296, ferd 151. ea before l + cons. is regularly a,
al 12 &c., fallinde 178, forwalleð 104; before lengthening groups,
bald 183, bihalde 40, bihalden 57 (5), calde 104, halden 46 &c.,
half 143 (4), talde 114, but ea in wealdent 226, eo in
feole 54. eo before r + cons. is generally eo, feor
40, heorte 163, steorren 267, and before lengthening groups, eorðe 84,
ȝeorne 201, but e in derueð 90, 103 (possibly representing
dierfan), hercneð 218, werc 74, werkes 64, and o in dorc
130 with accent shifting. To the wur group belong iwurðen 26,
iwurden 298, iwurðeð 93, 148; wyr words are deorewurðe 203, wurse
102, 105, wursi 164, wursin 328, wurð 156, 181, 194, wurðe 40: warpe 43
is Scandinavian; istirret 245 a ME. formation. eo before l
+ cons. is seen in seolf 27 &c. ea, the u- and
å-umlaut of a, is seen in eawles 126, gleadeð 310,
gleadien 223, 270, gleadunge 283 (4), heatel 128, heateð 109, meaðen 99,
neauele 98, and analogically in feareð 18, igleadet 214, heatieð 111,
but it is wanting in bale 93, 129, care 150, carien 162, 166, cwakie
131, cwakien 325, waker 53, 57, 142 (Vesp. Ps. wæc(c)er),
wakien 7 (Angl. wæcian, Bülbring, § 231). eo,
u-umlaut of e, is represented in heouene 146 (3),
heouenliche 243, but wordes 251, world
495
169 (7), worldlich 170 after w. eo, å-umlaut of e,
is seen in abeoren 125, breoken 8, 28, freoteð 96, speoken 61, feole
306, weole 161, weoleful 245; eo, the u- and
å-umlaut of i, in cleopeð 38, icleopet 36, hweonene 60,
65, neomen 317, neome 328, neomeð 311, seoðen 213, seoueðe 284,
seouenfald 282, 287, þeose 97, unweotenesse 179, and by analogy, neome
147, bineome 11, but hare 18 (3), suster 43, 207. ea after
palatals is a, schal 21 &c., schadewe 148, 231, schape 122,
but e in schekeð 132 (i-umlaut), eo before nasal,
scheome 117. ie after ġ is e, forȝet 25, 167, ȝef
27, ȝeueð 87, 164, ȝelden 301, ȝeldeð 213, ȝelpeð 188. ȝef is ȝef
6, 14, gef 12. ie after č is e, chele 101; after
sć, i in schilde 233 (scildan), e in scheld
159. eo after sć is u, schulen 178, 224, 320,
schulde 158 (R1 has scylde subj.), schunien 177. eom is am 62;
heom, ham 45, 87.
ēa is generally ea, beateð 48, deaðes 62, deaðlich 58,
eauraskes 97, but e in ec 64, echen 95 (perhaps representing
īecan), etscene 240, eðeliche 157, 193, ȝe 77, 216 (Anglian
gǣ), gret 70: its i-umlaut is e, alesen 242,
alesnesse 294, here 22 (5), herunge 16, (an)lepi 313, (sunder)lepes 280.
ēo is generally eo, beon 10, biheolt 262, breoste 98,
deopre 296, þeosternesse 89, but þosternesse 86 and schute 160, with
shifted accent: hēo is ha 40; the i-umlaut is wanting,
deore 31, 144, þeoster 246, neod 211 (see p. 288, last line). Palatalization is wanting
after ġ in forȝeme 54, ȝemeð 168, ȝeme 177, ȝeme 147, 311,
ȝemeles 18, 56; after sć in schene 233, 268, schenre 287.
gīet is ȝet 239.
a + g is ah, drahen 72, sahen 201, mahen 22:
islein 116 is geslegen; sei 280, seist 279, seið 6, 61 come from
forms with æ; dreaien 206 represents *dreagan. æ +
g is regularly ei, dei 29, feier 209, feierleac 272,
iteilede 90, mei 10 &c., meiden 243, seide 66, but mahe 290, 332.
e + g is ei, aȝein 20, eie 23, eilin 290, wei 170,
but isehen 77 (6). i + g, h is ih, nihe 251,
diht 10, sihðe 16 (4), unwiht 5, but flið 158 (WS. flihð,
Rushworth2 has flīð): freineð 65 is from a form with
æ or e (R1 has frægnast, Li,
fregna). The spirant has disappeared in monie
307, 314, murie 283: final ig is i, buri 129 (from dat.
byrig), dreorinesses 131, moni 29, seli 280, unseli 121. o
+ g, h is oh, bohte 28, 237, untohe 23, untohene
13, untoheliche 18; dehtren 35 has umlaut e. u + h
is uh, bituhhe 133; y + h, uh, tuht 46,
tuhte 23. ā + g, h is ah, ahen 4, ahne 184,
305, wahes 32, ah 165. ǣ1 + h is ah,
bitaht 144, 149, but ǣ1 + g, ei, keis
34, eiðer 102, 111. ī + g, ih, wiheles 155; in sti
186 the spirant has disappeared. ū + h is uh,
buhsam 241. ea + h is ah, mahte 84 (5), but iseh
118 (6); the i-umlaut is seen in almihti 324, unmihti 181, 191,
niht 29; lahhinde 213 comes from an Anglian form in æ. eo
+ g is seen in tintreohen 264 with eo,
å-umlaut of e; the form is
characteristic of the group. eo + ht is iht, brihte
269, rihte 14 &c.,
496
rihtwise 193, but fehte 160 has Anglian e. ie + h
is seen in bisið 332. ēa + g, h is eh, ehnen
51, heh 225, neh 329, but tah 11 (3). ēo + g is eh
in drehen 105, dreheð 167, but liht 87, lihtschipe 283, lihtliche 263.
īe + h, lihteð 69, ilihtet 214, but hest 48 (Anglian
hēst), nest 41 (Angl. nēst). ā + w is
aw, cnaweð 55, cnawen 293, cnawlechunge 292, nawt 7 &c.,
nawiht 183, sawles 1, 27, snawi 100, but noht 149 (nōht), nowðer
171 (nōwþer), sehe 228, isehe 118. ī + w, elheowet
58 (Anglian hēow), speoweð 91 (with w-umlaut). ēa +
w is aw, schaweð 240, schawede 265, ischawed 258, schawere
233, but þeaw 30, unþeaw 32, unþeawes 334, heaued þeawes 36. ēo +
w is mostly eow, tocheoweð 93, reowðful 120, treowe 157
(trīewe), treoweliche 78, 206, but fowr 36 (3), trowðe 78.
In deorewurðe 149, eðeliche 193, euenin 83, husebonde 34 (but
husbonde 38), huselauerd 9, 17, husewif 20, 205, leatere 103, steuene
133, sunegin 179, wrecchedom 85 a glide e has been added, a final
e to ine 337, inwarde 72, ofte 18. e is lost in echnesse
108, i in unwerged 251, 318 (wērigod): a occurs for
o in anan 105; o is levelled to e in lauerd 4,
sikere 107, sikerliche 171, sikernesse 188, sunderliche 308, te 71
&c., lost in wordes 251 (werod). u is e in
durewart 39, it is lost in world 169 &c. The prefix æt is
ed, edwiteð 123, et, etstont 158; be is bi,
bisetten 64, bigineð 1, bihinden 92, biwiten 5; ēaþ is et
in etscene 240; ge is generally i, icwiddet 257, ifindeð
156, ihal 91, iwis 137, unimete 125, but it is omitted in bere 23,
schape 122, monge 102, schad 176, unrude 71 (but unirude 125), wissunge
31. The suffix in herunge 16 is noteworthy. þǣr is syncopated in
þrin 79, þrinne 53, þrof 33, trof 331, þrute 41.
Metathesis of r is seen in wernches 5, wrahhte 74, eauraskes
97 (forsc). rr is simplified in feor 40. ll is
simplified in feole 54, tele 79, 228, and finally in ful 82, godspel 4,
wil 10. m is doubled in comme 60, mm simplified in
grimfule 122. nn is simplified in bigineð 1, moncunnes 242,
n is lost in raketehe 71; the prepositions in, on are reduced to
i, o, except before a vowel or h or when stressed, as in 316; for
n, m appears in þrumnesse 234. p is inserted in
inempnet 244. f is usually u between vowels or vowel and
liquid, biuoren 59, deouel 171, froure 35, seoluen 117, vuel 19, but
deoflen 69 (4), otherwise it is f, fondin 224, hefde 113, seolf
27. t is doubled in bigotten 316, bitternesse 130, ileanett 35
(but ileanet 202), wrahtte 74, lost in best 64, beast 332, added in
lustnið 61, loftsong 283. For t, d occurs in ed 98;
tt is simplified in wit 8 (but wittes 16). For d, t
is often written finally, ant 9, dret 50, durewart 39, etstont 158,
feont 33, heart 165, hiderwart 139, hundret 335, lont 130, ontswereð 66,
somet 21, þusent 69, towart 81, wealdent 226, but ð in iseið 280,
lauerð 8, schenðlac 124; d is doubled in gledd 208, dd is
simplified in midel 174 (but middel 45, 170). Initial þ
497
becomes t after t, tah 12, te 9, tis 106, 152, tu 68,
after d (possibly miswritten for t), te 98, trof 331: final
þ becomes t before t, limpet 154; for þ,
d appears in blideliche 248, deorewurde 301, iwurden 298, makid
39, makied 255, oder 19, sod 293, swide 208. s is doubled in
gasstes 30 (gāst), but gastes 122, rihtwissnesse 175
(wīs); for ss, sc appears in iblescede 221:
sć is regularly sch, schad 176, schal 21, scheome 117,
schilde 233, schunien 177. The stop c is usually k before
e,
i, biloke 204, blake 110, keis 34,
kimeð 69, þonkeð 201, c in other positions, blac 58, moncunnes
242, þonc 20: ah 26 is Anglian ah, WS. ac. č is
ch, chele 101, echen 95, echnesse 108 (a new formation from
eche), euch 16, hwuch 6, ich 61, ilich 97, licomlich 173, pich 104,
rechelese 13, sechen 32, smeche 88 (but North. smeke 88), stench 84,
tocheoweð 93, þulliche 162 (but þulli 326, 327). čč is
cch, dreccheð 90. cw is preserved, cwakie 131, cwemen 20,
cwic 84, acwikieð 105, but quoð 139 &c. Palatal g is written
ȝ, forȝeme 54, ȝarowe 260, ȝe 137, ȝe 159, ȝef 6, 14 (but gef
12), ȝef 27, ȝelden 301, ȝelpeð 188, ȝeorne 201, ȝet 239, ȝimmes 245,
but igarket (no breaking). The guttural stop is written g,
bigineð 1, gulteð 18, bigoten 259, 316, unwerged 251, but ȝ in
aȝulteð 48, ȝeað 151, inȝonge 32, 41, 146 (comp. Northumbrian ġeonga,
ġionga, Bülbring, § 492, anmerkung 1, and hiniong[a]e,
Sweet, Oldest
E. Texts, p. 149), ȝuldene 170. For the spirant after l,
r, h appears in folhin 12, 336, folheð 275, halhen 278,
forswolhe 152, forswolheð 91, sorhe 85: myrigþ is murhðe 253,
255, murðes 219. hl is reduced to l in leane 58, leor 58,
231, lust 261, lustnið 61, anlepi 313, sunderlepes 280, hn to
n in nesche 162, 167, hr to r in remunge 99.
Initial hw is usually preserved, hwen 68, hwer 17, hwet 60.
h is added in unwhiht 151, doubled in bituhhen 168, bituhhe 133,
169.
(2) Of R. The principal divergences
from B are noted. a before nasal: unþeonkes 42 (comp. ‘feondeð,’
SM 10/7). æ: the spelling ea for e is used only in
smeale 70, wearliche 4, otherwise e occurs, except in latere 103,
neose 96, 112 (nosu): similarly ea for umlaut e is
absent in best 332, formelte 104, smel 275, spelien 303. o: grot
93. u: com 60 (cwōm), cumeð 69, 138. y is regularly
u, as in B. ā: swā stressed and unstressed is so,
but once swa 234; eskeð 75, 215, eskest 68. The representation of
ǣ1 is divided between ea and e, each 28
times: ǣ2 is e 50 times (lete 40); the
exceptions are hear 132, heale 242, hileanet 202, offearen 56 (4),
offeared 54, 211, reade 142, reades 296, rodien 81 (reoden T). ī:
bliðeliche 351. ea (breaking): hard 116 (7), harm 117, herdes
183, þearf 171, weldent 226. eo: hercni 349, darc 130. The
u-, å-umlaut of a is e in gledeð 310,
gledien 223, 270, gledunge 308, 310, 312, medeð 99 (for meðen), neuele
98, igledet 214, and is wanting in fareð 18, hatel 128, hateð 109,
hatieð 111. å-umlaut of e: to speokene 347. u-,
å-umlaut of i: seððen 213, unwitnesse 179.
498
eo after ġ: ȝuheðe 383. ēa: deð 171, dedlich 58,
adie 269, eðsene 240, greạt 70. īe: fleme 343. ēo:
þeosternesse 86, þreohad 372. a + g: dreien 206. æ
+ g: feirlec 272. i + ht: unwiht 151. ē +
g: tweien 342. ō + h: þohtes 360. eo +
g: tintreon 264.
r: wrenches 5. n: in 108, 319, on 29. f: under
fon 57. t: et 98. d final is seldom altered to t,
dred 50, dureward 39, hard 165, hideward 139, lond 130, toward 81, 127,
but heauet 59: other spellings are onswereð 66, 281, schenlac 124, gled
108, middel 174. Initial þ is often unaltered after final
t, þu 79, þrof 331 (but it is lost in ant e 372), so final
þ in limpeð 154. Normal þ appears in bliðeliche 248,
makieð 255, makeð 39, oðer 19, soð 293, swiðe 208; for þ,
d in beod 15. s: gastes 30. c: ecnesse 108.
g: ȝef 12, iȝarcket 339, biȝeoten 316 (but bigoten 259), agulteð
48, guldene 170, strencðe 153 (5), strencðen 164, strenðe 343. h:
unwiht 151, hearen 98, her 94, hileanet 202, hearneð 135, hure 144, er
58, is 28, wilinde 135.
(3) Of T. a before nasals and
lengthening groups is o, but fram 25 (5) is invariable. æ
is a (45 times including nase 96, 112), exceptions are hefde 116,
hefden 256, hweðer 101, forbearneð 103, readliche 21, smecche 88,
wrecchedom 85. e: rekenen 86, best 332, smal 275, spelie 303.
i: wile 42 &c. (but ichulle 81), wilneð 289. o: grot
93. u: cumeð 69, 138. y is u, except winne 161, 173
(but wunne 166, 169). ā: ai 53 (7), a Scandinavian word, leað 153
(? lǣþo, or miswritten for leið, OWScand. leiðr), askeð 75, 215,
askest 68, owhwider 25 (comp. ‘ouhwuder’ AR 172/3, ?influence of
ōwer). ǣ1 is ea, in close agreement with
B; sumdeal 284, but lasten 108, 178. ǣnig is ani 42, 135, 192.
ǣ2: also as in B; lete 40, rodien 81, þer 246, 331,
trinne 86. ē: fearreden 269. ī: bliðeliche 80, huinen 17
(comp. OWScand. hjûn). ō: isoð 229, sweote 291 (‘swoete’ Vesp.
Psalt., Sweet, OET. 217/13). ȳ is u, written ui in
fuire 71, fuir 83, 87 (but fur 103). ea (breaking): wearnið 34,
wearne 155, wearnen 63, unwearnede 157, hard 116 (5), hardes 163, 172,
harm 117, harmen 290, þurf 171; i-umlaut, dearne 296, ferd 151.
eo: isterret 245, self 27 (6), seluen 5 (3), but seolf 8. The
u- å-umlaut of a is wanting, except in eawles 126;
for heatel 128 heates is read. The absence of this umlaut points to
Northumbrian or W. Saxon. eo, u-umlaut of e: heuene
220, 325, heuenliche 243, but heouene 146; after w, woredes 251,
world 108 (7), worldlich 170. eo, å-umlaut of e:
breke 28, breken 8, freten 96, speken 61. eo, u-
å-umlaut of i: nime 147, 328, binime 11, nimeð 311, siðen
213, clepeð 38, iclepet 36, seuenfald 282, seuefald 287: for hweonene B
60, 65 T has hweðen, hwenne; hore 122. ea after sć, schome
117. ie: ȝef 27, ȝiueð 87, 164, ȝiue 371. ȝif 6, 12, 14.
ēa: dedes 62, gledred 71; ȝa 216, ȝea 77 (possibly Scandinavian),
great 70. ēo: biheld 262, depre 296, deulen 69, iseð 89, 94, seð
257, ned 211, þeosternesse
499
86, ho 40. æ + g: dai 29 &c., mai 10 &c. are the
regular forms, but mei 303, so feir 209, 239, feirleic 272. e +
g: aȝain 20 (Angl. ongægn), aȝaines 34, 153, but to ȝeines
196. ea + h: mihte 113, 118, 162, but mahte 84, 232.
eo + g: tintrohen 264. ie + h: bisihð 332.
ā + w: noht 7. ī + w: speweð 91. ēa +
w: scheaweð 240, scheawde 265, ischeawet 258, scheawere 233.
ēo + w: treowðe 78; treweliche 78, 206.
r: wrenches 5. m: com 60. n: in 99, 108.
f: biforen 59, þer fore 150, þurn 225, under fon 57. t:
blend 87, at 98. d: dred 50, dureward 59, atstond 158, feond 33,
hard 165, hiderward 139, hundreð 97, 335 (OWScand. hundrað), lond 130,
256, heauet 59, onswereð 66, 281, somen 21, þusend 69, þusand 114, 119,
þusanð 138, toward 81, 127, schendlac 124, glad 208, middel 174.
þ: bliðeliche 248, limpeð 154, makes 39, makieð 255, swiðe 208.
s: gastes 30. c: cumeð 69, þoncheð 201, long 58, swing
289, smecche 88, euh 58, hwucse 72, stinc 84, ecnesse 108. ȝ: ȝif
12, ȝarket 339, biȝoten 316, unwerched 251, agulteð 48, guldene 170.
h: unwiht 151.
Accidence: (1) Of B.
Strong declension of masc. and neut. nouns. In the
s. n. þinge 84 has added e. Gen. -es, cunnes 90, deaðes 62, contracted weis 162, 236:
d. -e, dome 261, flesche 270, hame
25, with all nouns which have vowel ending in the s. n. as
bale 93, chele 101, in others the inflection is more frequently wanting,
deað 222, flesch 99, and generally in words of two syllables, as finger
325, godspel 4, heaued 59, lauerd 207; wa 86 is indeclinable. In the
s. a. deale 105, inȝonge 32, 41 (but inȝong n. 146),
mete 45, 47 have added e; bere 23 is gebǣre; sune 235 represents
sunu. The pl. n. a. of masculines ends in -es, eauraskes 97, engles 239, deaðes 119, duntes 125:
neuters, with the exception of þing 178, 297, schape 122
(gesceapu), have taken the masc. termination, þinges 89, werkes
64, wittes 16, wordes 251, wordes 64, or have joined the weak
declension, deoflen 89, 91, studen 240, wepnen 159: genitive is smeche
88; datives have mostly -es, eawles 126,
gleadschipes 307, but bisocnen 277, colen 104, deoflen 69, 139, wepnen
162, 184, and siðe 97, 138, 335 (without n). The fem. nouns of
the strong declension have -e in the
s. n., este 173, cnawlechunge 292, and many other
derivatives in -ung, schadewe 148, but meað 37, 43 (once
masc. in OE.). Gen. -e,
helle 95, nease 96, but murðes 219, sawles 1: dat. -e, alesnesse 294, bisne 4, worlde 108, 136, 260, but
ferd 151, half 160, 238, luft 186, sti 186 (stīg), world 108,
110, 147, 169 are not inflected: acc. -e, blisse 221, froure 35, but ferreden 269, fulst 225
(fylst), half 143. Pl. n. is hondon 51; d. blissen
267, pinen 90, 127, sunnen 70, wunden 240, dreorinesses 131; a.
pinen 263, sahen 201, strengðen 164, sunnen 124, cunreadnes 261, estes
197, keis 34, runes 296. Nouns of the weak declension have -e in all cases of the singular, -en throughout the
500
plural. The minor declensions are represented by uet pl. d. 260;
mon s. n. 8, monnes s. g. 9, 15; boc
s. d. 72, s. a. 70; buri s. n. 129
(from dat. byrig); niht s. d. 29; feader
s. g. 237, s. d. 241, s. a. 116;
moder s. a. 116; dehtren pl. n. 202, pl. d.
35, 195; suster s. a. 43, sustren pl. n. 202, pl.
d. 207; feont s. n. 33, s. d. 158; wealdent
s. n. 226.
Adjectives which in OE. end in e retain that termination in all
cases. Weak inflections are s. n. m. ȝuldene 170,
rihtwise 193, neut. blake 110, willesfule 205,
s. d. f. swarte 89, s. d. neut. ferliche
102, s. a. m. willesfule 44, f. brihte 269:
strong inflections are s. d. f. inwarde 72,
s. a. f. longe 254: swote s. n. m.
275, neut. 291 (swōt) has conformed to swete. All other
adjectives are uninflected in the singular. Those in -ig lose g, anlepi 313, eadi 243, hali 234: lȳtel
is lutle s. a. f. 235; lutle s. a. neut.
328, lut pl. n. 187, few people, are used as nouns; mycel
is mostly muche, but muchel s. d. neut. strong 166, muchele
weak 300, pl. a. 314: āgen gives ahne
s. d. f. 305, pl. d. 184. The plural ends in
-e, ȝarowe 260, wakere 57, 142, misliche
127, unmihtie 191; exceptions are n. ful 239, hal 93, ilich 97,
hardi 56, lusti 318, d. eadi 269, mislich 20, seli 280, snawi
100, a. unseli 121, wurð 194. OE. āna is ane 200;
ān is an, a, s. g. anes 311, d. ane 207,
a. 216: nān is nan, na, s. g. nanes 317,
pl. n. nane 274. Adjectives used as nouns are rarely inflected,
as heardes s. g. 163, 172, nesches 172, uuele pl. n.
224: comparatives regularly end in e, brihtre 287, deopre 296, earre
103, leatere 103, wurse 102, but grisluker 97; of superlatives earste
36, forme 195, leaste 115, 118, measte 115 have weak inflection.
The personal pronouns are ich, me, we, ure 181, us, þu, tu after t,
þe, ȝe, ow. The pronoun of the third person is s. n. he
m. 6, ha f. 10 &c., hit neut. 13; g.
hire f. 11; d. him m. 35, hire f. 42,
a. hire f. 8 (with hus neut.), 11, 33 (with þeaw
m.), 43, 87, hit neut. 10, 85; pl. n. ha 89
&c., heo 93, 274, 276; g. hare 18; d. ham 55;
a. 13. Reflexives are me 190, him 54, hire 180, 205, ham 94, me
seolf 189 (possibly definitive), me seoluen 117, us seolf 191, 193, us
seoluen 5, him seolf 27, him seoluen 109, 309, hire seoluen 182;
definitive are seolf 8, 228, him seolf 277, him ane 200; possessives are
mi s. 80, 116, min 163, 196, mine pl. 164, 234, ure 4, þi
s. 78, þin 319, his 5, hire 12, hare 51, 122. The definite
article is þe, te after t; inflected forms are þet s. n.
neut. 33, 214, þen s. d. m. 158,
s. a. m. 212, þet s. a. neut. 248; the
instrumental is þe 11, 142. Þet is used demonstratively 35, 103, 104,
þet ilke 89, 105, 256; the article is also used pronominally, þeo þe,
those who 48, 49, 56, 247, those which 178, one who 180, þeo, those 15.
The compound demonstrative is s. n. þes m. 6, tis
106, þis neut. 8, 53, 124, tis 26, s. d. þis
m. 318, þisse f. 136, þeos 146, þis 110, neut. 9,
102, 137, 198, 199, s. a. þes m. 118, þis
neut. 284, 285, tis 152; pl. n. þeos 17, 202, d.
24, 101,
501
207, 285, þeose 97, a. þeos 140. The relatives are þe, þet; þet
. . . hire 10, = whom, þet te 154, = what. Interrogatives are
hwam 39, hwet 60 (4), hweðer 101, hwuch 6 (6), hwucche pl. n. 14;
its correlative is swuch 93, 135, 255, swucche pl. n. 194:
ilca is ilke 105 &c.; þyllic, þulliche pl. d.
162, þulli s. d. 326, 327. Indefinites are hwam se
s. a. 276, hwet se s. n. 172, hwuch se
s. a. 72; me 45, 68, 87, 165, 275, mon 25; an 252; sum 54,
summes s. g. 162, 236, summe pl. n. 14; eiðer 102,
111; oðer 37, oðres s. g. 109, 112, oðre s. d.
252, pl. d. 52, 285, pl. a. 277; euch 108, euchan 49, 109,
euchanes s. g. 252, eauereuchan 307; eni 113, ei 42, 135,
192; nawiht 172, 183, noht 149; moni 20, 29, 166, monie pl. n.
307, pl. a. 314, ma 167; feole 306; al s. n. 12,
alles s. g. 90, 197, 264, al s. d. 74, 155,
s. a. 105, 116, 117; alle pl. n. 13, 114, 214, alre
pl. g. 181, alle pl. d. 30, 46, 281, pl. a. 33, 40,
297, mid alle 211.
Verbs in -an have infinitive -en, abeoren 125, bihalden 233, 236, and thirty-five
other instances, or -e, bringe 113, 173,
cume 7, here 22, munne 303, neome 328, those in ian, mostly of
the second weak conjugation, have -ien,
carien 162, 166, gleadien 270, herien 320, schunien 177, þolien 7 (6),
wakien 7, readien 81 (ME. formation from read = rǣd), or -ie, spealie 303, þolie 235, or -in, amurdrin 32, blissin 270, eilin 290, euenin 83,
folhin 12, 336, fondin 224, grapin 87, hearmin 290, lokin 232, 254,
lutlin 327, openin 285, rikenin 86, sunegin 179, warnin 152, wursin 328,
and ME. wontin, or -i, wursi 164: contract
verbs are biseon 122, fleon 158, seon 305, underuon 312, unwreo 285. The
dat. inf. is inflected in to cumene 265, to witene 50, 150, 226;
other forms are forte binden 71, forte warnin 140, forte . . .
halden 57, for . . . to drahen 72, forte breoke 28, to alesen
242, to seon ⁊ to cnawen 293 (virtual nom.), to warnin 63, to
. . . makie 325. Presents are s. 1. cume 76, 220,
cwakie 131, demi 185, iseo 150; 2. cumest 76, easkest 68, seist 279; 3.
cleopeð 38, limpet 154, makid 39, and seventy-four others; contracted,
about one-fourth of the total number, bisið 332, bit 246, flið 158,
forȝet 25, 167, halt 180, 195, 205, hat 45, let 26, 212, sent 55, sit
48, 225, 237, wit 52, and nine others, passive hatte 62;
pl. 1. habbeð 191, witeð 144, drede we 155; 3. aȝulteð 48,
edwiteð 123; of the second weak conjugation, acwikieð 105, heatieð 111,
herieð 317, makied 255, wunieð 272, 320, but ofearneð 135 and liuieð
287, werieð 143; meallið 90, seoð 257, 295, iseoð 89, 94: subjunctive
s. 1. habbe 61, understonde 285; 3. bihalde 40, bineome 11, cume 23,
65, 144, comme 60, feole, forȝeme 54, forswolhe 152, fortruste 54, leade
65, leare 45, leote 40, reade 142, rihte 14, 141, schute 160, seche 60,
slepe 25, tuhte 23, werie 141, chasti 11, loki 39, wardi 141, warni 42;
pl. 1. demen 191, 193, halden 198, þonkin 200, neome we 147:
imperative s. 2. etstont 158, let 209, sei 280, tele 79, 228,
warne 155; pl. 2. hercnið 218,
502
lokið 67, lustnið 61, neomeð 311, þencheð 115, understondeð 218. Past of
Strong Verbs: I a. s. 1. iseh 118 (5), biseh 249, 3. ȝef 27, quoð
315; pl. 1. speken 44; subjunctive s. 1. isehe 118, 2.
sehe 228: I b. s. 1. com 139: I c. subj. s. 3. bigunne
299: III. subj. s. 3. forbude 13: V. s. 1. biheolt 262,
lette (weak form) 28. Participles present: I a. sittende 278: I b.
cuminde 40: IV. lahhinde adj. 213: V. fallinde adj. 178;
past: I a. isehen 77 (6), ispeken 335: I b. ibore 136, icumen 55: I c.
bigunne 112, iborhen 276, formealte 104: II. iwriten 70, untohene
adj. pl. 13, untohe adj. s. 23, fulitohe adj. s. 9:
III. bigoten 259, bigotten 316, biloke 204: IV. islein 116: V. bihalden
57, ihaten 10, 37, 220, underuon 57, ofdred adj. 145. Past of
Weak Verbs: s. 1. hefde 113, talde 114; 3. bohte 28, luuede 241,
schilde 233, sende 223, wrahtte 74; pl. 3. deiden, liueden 266.
Participles present: libbinde 270, sechinde 151; ME. formations are
fikelinde adj. 147, smorðrinde adj. 88; past: bitaht 144,
149, ibet 74, igret 256, ilihtet 214, ischawed 258, iseid 328, iseið
280, unwerged 251, icleopet 36, icwiddet 257, offearet 54, 211, unwerget
318, and thirteen others in -t, besides
irobbet 26, istirret 245; others used as adjectives are elheowet 58,
fordemde pl. 133, forrotet 99, forwerede pl. 114,
iblescede s. weak 221, pl. 250, isette pl. 252,
istelet pl. 126, iteilede pl. 90, unwarnede noun
pl. 157, offruhte pl. 222. Minor Groups: witen inf.
137, 305, wat pr. s. 176, nat 66, witen pr. pl. 295, 297,
nuten 101, wiste pt. s. 6; ah pr. s. 165, ahen 1 pr.
pl. 4, pr. pl. 300; con 1 pr. s. 81, 329, pr.
s. 64, cunnen pr. pl. 187; þerf pr. s. 171, þurue we 1
pr. pl. 145, 225; schal pr. s. 21 &c., schulen pr.
pl. 178, 224, 320, schulde we 1 pt. pl. 158; mei 1 pr.
s. 81, pr. s. 10 &c., me[i] 327, mahen 1 pr. pl.
22, 2 pr. pl. 137, 305, mahe pr. pl. 274, pr. s.
subj. 290, 332, mahte 1 pt. s. 113, 162, 232, pt. s.
84, 118; most 2 pr. s. 285, 316; beon inf. 10 &c., am
1 pr. s. 62, is pr. s. 8, nis 18, bið 146, aren pr.
pl. 107, 256, beoð 13, 56, 159, 202, beod 306, beo pr. s.
subj. 26 (8), beon 1 pr. pl. subj. 142, 198, beo we 193, beon
pr. pl. subj. 104, wes pt. s. 205, weren pt. pl.
94, 114, were pt. s. subj. 127, 136, 210, 253, nere 121, 136,
were pt. pl. subj. 124, ibeo pp. 331; ich chulle 1 pr.
s. 81, wule pr. s. 145, 193, 325, wulleð pr. pl. 289,
wule pr. s. subj. 42, 210, 323, walde 1 pt. s. 119, pt.
s. 6, 12, nalde 7; to donne dat. inf. 142, 185, to don 288,
324, to do 189 (virtual nom.), do 1 pr. s. 190, 197, deð
pr. s. 182, doð pr. pl. 49, 267, do 2 s. imp. 154,
idon pp. 300, ido 53, 117; gan inf. 21, 316, ȝeað pr.
s. 151, ga we 1 pr. pl. 171, ouergað pr. pl. 270, ga 2
s. imp. 315, pr. s. subj. 10, 47.
Among adverbs may be noted á 105 (4), áá 53 (3), ever, distinguished
by accent from a 227, ah! hweonene 60, 65, interrogative, earþon 74,
previously, unmundlunge (unmyndlinga) 68, unexpectedly, in ME.
apparently only here and once in AR; among prepositions, bituhhen 168,
bituhhe
503
133, 169, extension of OE. bituh, BH 133/33, which comes also in
SK 1515, ‘bituhe’ AR MS. A, 204/20, ‘bituhhen,’ id. 358/11, fore 27,
276, on behalf of, in both places separated from the word governed and
put at the end of the sentence.
(2) Of R. This is substantially the
same as that of MS. B: some forms from ll. 339-373 are here noted.
Nouns: neut. bodi s. d. 369, limen pl. n. 364;
fem. sawle s. n. 369, neod 349, sondes
s. g. 346, murðes 342, lefdi s. d. 355, sonden
pl. a. 357. Adjective comp. lessere 345 (lǣssa), an early
instance of the double comparative; T has lesre. Pronoun: incker dual
g.: indef. oðer s. d. 363, noðres s. g.
347.
(3) Of T. It differs from B mainly in
the verbal inflection. Forms with i are few, euennin inf. 83,
fondin 224, lutlin 327, openin 285, sunegin 179, wursi 164, mellið
pr. pl. 90; in the pr. s. -es and -eð alternate,
warnes 348, wilnes 286, bides 59 (hat B), fares 25, haues 144, makes 39,
slepes 25, spekes 8, wites 52 (wit B), fleoð 158 (flið B), beoð 146, beð
24, in the pr. pl. -en and -eð, habben 191, beon 14 (6), freten 96, ȝelden
213, hatien 111, iwurðen 93, snicken 96, sweren 21, beoð 17 &c.,
speweð 91: arn 256, schuln 340, þurn 225 are syncopated. Beside ha, she,
ho occurs 12, 40, 181; man 165 is indefinite. The suffix of the verbal
noun is regularly -ing, cnawlechinge 292,
gretinge 213, hechelinge 100. For aðet B, R 104, it has til ꝥ, for mid
B, mit R 28, wið.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are ai T 53 &c., aren
107, drupnin 222, etlunge 310, far (lac) 341, 363, fear (laic) T 341,
(feir) lec R 272, feoloh(lukest) 270 (OWScand. félagi), flute 349,
flutteð 100, ȝa T 216, ȝea T 77, hird 65, hundreð T 79, keiseres 261,
lahe 193, 259, 271, lane 202, meoke 198, nowcin 163 (4), tidinges 140,
til T 104, trust 184, vmben 207, wan 129, warpe 43, varpeð 341, wengen
143, 340, witer(liche) 78, witer(luker) 285, wontin 135 (OWScand.
vanta), wontreaðes 129, wondraðes R 129, wandreðes T 129, þicke 86
(OWScand. þykkr), probably baðe T 23, iburst 151, lustnin 217, possibly
froden T 95, ȝetteð 247 (Björkman 109), ȝeieð 134 (OWScand. geyja)
influenced like ȝoulen by ȝellen (Björkman 69). French are archangles
249 (possibly Latin), apostle 157, castel 31, chasti 11, chere 213,
icheret 209, cruneð 49, cunestable 38, 200, cunfessurs 266, enbreuet 73,
false 147, falsi 163, fol 19, feh 149, 204, grace 160, iordret 252,
irobbet 26, leattres 71, liun 151, meistre 44, meistreð 33, meoster 189,
252, mesure 174, meosure 45, patriarches 255 (possibly Latin), poure
259, preoouin 72, prophetes 255, semblant 19, seruið 247, 250, tresor
27 (3), treosor 369, tresures 339, tresorers T 339, trone 244, 260, turnes
182, ?turneð 206, aturnet 209. A Latin borrowing is martyrs 262.
Dialect: MS. B bears a close resemblance in all dialectal
criteria to
504
MS. A of the Ancrene Wisse; its Anglian peculiarities are somewhat more
pronounced. MS. R differs from MS. B in its representation of
ǣ1 and in the narrower range of its u-,
å-umlauts; it is somewhat more Southern than MS. B. MS. T,
in the same hand as the copy of the Ancrene Wisse, is of the mixed
character described on p. 373, but the
Southern element is more extensive here.
Style: Sawles Warde has been divided by its latest
editor into one thousand and seventy-two half-lines of ‘rhymeless
Layamonic verse,’ with three hundred and sixty-two varieties of
scansion, nearly two hundred of which are each represented by a single
line. Much ME. verse, the Proverbs of Alfred, the Brut, the Bestiary for
example, is, like Sawles Warde, written continuously, but its verse
character is always definitely indicated by its punctuation, in
Layamonic verse by a half- or full stop at the end of the half-line and
a full stop at the end of the line. But, as Luick has shown, Sawles
Warde has a prose punctuation of natural pauses in reading, of clause
and sentence, a contention which may readily be tested by the texts in
the present book, which reproduce the manuscripts in this detail. Thus
the punctuation of Sawles Warde which has been adduced as an indication
of its verse character is evidence to the contrary.
Some specimens of the verse with the editor’s scansion are: ‘téacheð
us þùrh a bísnè,’ 117/4: ‘Þis hús þe ùre láuèrd | spékeð òf, is sèolf þe
món,’ 117/8: ‘þe éarèste is Wárschìpe | icléopet, ànt te óðèr | is
gástelìch Stréncðè,’ 118/36: ‘Wárschìpe, þet àa is wáker, | ìs offéared,
lèste súm | fortrúste hìm ant fèole oslép,’ 118/53: ‘hwuch só he mèi
préouìn | þùrh his bóc, þèt is ón | euch súnnè ibréuèt,’ 119/72. Now
Bartels points out that in Layamon’s verse there is no enjambment
and no beginning of a clause in the middle of a half-line. Furthermore,
there is no rhythm in these lines which remotely resembles either the
recitative of Layamon’s alliterative line or the syllabic measure of his
rhymed lines. But the fatal objection is the absence of alliteration or
rhyme, for without one of these or a combination of the two there is no
verse at all in Middle English; they are of the essence of its form. For
Orm is an eccentric and absolutely isolated; his verse would be
recognizable by his contemporaries as such only in virtue of the rigid
uniformity of its rhythm.
Sawles Warde is written in the same rhythmic prose, and by the same
author, as AR and the other pieces mentioned on p. 373, including the Wohunge of Ure Lauerd (OEH
i. 269-87) and the Ureisun of God Almihti (id. 200-3). The evolution of
this style is easily followed. The writer began his literary career with
his memory well stocked with alliterative formulae and other phrases,
derived in some small measure from the
505
pre-Conquest literature, but mostly from a body of popular poetry which
is represented by isolated pieces like the Worcester Fragments. His
first writings, SJ and SM, are overloaded with them, and they have
impressed their peculiar movement more or less on the stretches of prose
which link them together. Accordingly many passages in SJ for example
approach much more nearly to verse than anything in Sawles Warde. Take
at random 143/68-72:—
sei me hwi þu forsakest; þi sy ant ti selhðe.
þe weolen ant te wunnen; þe walden awakenen.
ant waxen of þe wedlac; þet ich reade þe to.
hit nis nan eðelich þing; þe refschipe of rome.
ant tu maht ȝef þu wult; beon burhene leafdi.
ant of alle þe londes; þe þerto liggeð.
This has the right swing, and its slightly faulty alliteration could
easily be mended, yet Saint Juliana is not verse. In SK, HM, AR, and SW
we can observe a gradual and progressive diminution of this borrowed
matter, but the verse cadences persist to the end.
Introduction: Einenkel, in the preface to his
edition of Saint Katherine, claims to have proved that Saint Juliana and
Saint Margaret were written by one author, Saint Katherine by another,
and Hali Meidenhad by a third. His proof rests largely on the untenable
assumption that a Middle English author, whatever the length of his
literary career, or the changes in his environment, or the nature of his
subject, by reason of his unbending ‘individuality’ did not vary in his
vocabulary, phrases, or turns of expression. So if words in sufficient
number occur often in one writing and seldom or not at all in another,
if the percentage of the foreign element is not similar, if the synonyms
for abstract notions like joy and sorrow, luck and mishap are not the
same, the compositions must be the work of different authors. Of far
other significance are the unity, not uniformity, of style which
pervades the whole group in orderly and natural development, the unity
of subject, that is, the praise of virginity and its superior virtue
over other states of life, the recurrence of a considerable number of
characteristic words, phrases, and constructions found seldom or never
outside the group, the presence throughout of a pronounced Scandinavian
element testifying at least to a common dialect of origin.
As has already (p. 376) been suggested, this literature is best
understood as a product of the Gilbertine movement. The lives of the
female saints, of whom two resist marriage and the other says of Christ
‘He haueð iweddet him to mi meiðhad,’ were suitable reading for the
Gilbertine nuns, and the anchoresses, for whom the Ancrene Wisse was
written, had a copy
506
at least of Saint Margaret. Hali Meidenhad was probably occasioned by
the affair of the nun at Watton, one of Gilbert’s foundations, which is
related by Gilbert’s friend, Ailred of Rievaulx, in what is one of the
most extraordinary revelations of the mediaeval clerical mind on the
subject of the single life: it shows us the younger nuns of Watton far
outdoing in ferocity their exemplar Saint Juliana, and helps to the
understanding of the sentiment in Hali Meidenhad, which is so
distasteful and even revolting to modern feeling that some have thought
it impossible that the author of the mild wisdom of the Ancrene Wisse
could have any part in it. But it must be observed that much of the
abusive language about the married state in Hali Meidenhad is not
original, some of it is as old as S. Jerome, and no one is so likely to
have written the treatise as the enthusiastic founder of an order of
nuns.
The writer has already used the main idea of the allegory in the
Ancrene Wisse (M 172, 271). The parallelism pointed out in the note on
l. 82 of Sawles Warde is another indication of common authorship; it is
not like a borrowing, nor can it be accounted for by independent use of
the curt Latin original. Finally, the passage 125/268-278 in
glorification of the ‘feire ferreden of uirgines in heouene,’ SK 2309,
which is an addition of the author’s, strikes the dominant note of all
his works.
The Latin original of Sawles Warde was again adapted by the writer of
the supplement to the Ayenbite of Inwyt, pp. 263-9, presumably Dan
Michel of Northgate; his version is much closer to the original, and he
does not seem to have been acquainted with that of his predecessor.
1. With the title comp.
‘Mid alle cunne warde (= custodia) . . . wite wel þine heorte, uor
soule lif is in hire; ȝif heo is wel iwust,’ AR 48/5; ‘þonne se weard
swefeð, | sawele hyrde,’ Beowulf, 1741 (with Holthausen’s note).
2. Si &c.: S.
Matt. xxiv. 43: V has ‘veniret’ with S. Luke xii. 39.
3. a bisne: a
forbisne T.
5. to is omitted by
R: to witen T: comp. ‘To wyten vs wyþ þan vnwihte,’ OEM 72/4;
‘ihereð hu ȝe schulen witen ou wið þes deofles wieles, þet he ou ne
biwrenche,’ AR 224/20, and see 48/299
note. þe unwiht of helle: so HM 41/19; ‘of þe laðe vnwiht þe
hellene schucke,’ id. 41/35.
6. þes lauerd: þe
husebonde RT.
8. hire: so all
MSS.; the writer is thinking of the allegory rather than of his grammar.
With breoken comp. 62/20. mon &c.: R has, mon . in wið
þe monnes wit iþis is þe huselauerd . , T, mon . Jnwið . þe
monnes wit iþis hus is te huselauerd. Kluge,
adopting the text of B, punctuates þis hus, . . ., is seolf þe
mon inwið; þe monnes wit i þis hus is þe huselaverd; while W, omitting
‘i þis hus,’ which does not fit into his metrical scheme,
507
has þis hus, . . . , is seolf þe mon . inwið þe monnes wit is þe
huselauerd. In both cases ‘inwið’ is adverbial, as at 130/57, and the
sense yielded is intelligible. But it diverges strangely from the
original, ‘Pater iste familias animus potest intelligi, cuius familia
sint cogitationes et motus earum, sensus quoque et actiones tam
exteriores quam interiores. . . . Domus est conscientia, in
qua pater iste habitans thesauros (see 118/27) virtutum congregat,
propter quos ne domus effodiatur, summopere vigilatur,’ V 207 e,
208 a. All three writers appear to have been contending with a
faulty archetype: the original may have been:—
þis hus þe ure lauerd spekeð of · is seolf þe mon
nes inwit; wit i þis hus is þe huselauerd,
where the first line is actually that found in R: the division of
mon-nes would readily give rise to the corruptions of all three MSS. In
the Ayenbite of Inwyt the Latin is translated, ‘Hous . is inwyt|in
huychen þe uader of house woneþ . þe hord of uirtues gadereþ,’ 263/24.
For inwit comp. ‘wiðinnen us suluen, ure owune conscience, þet
is, ure inwit,’ AR 306/1, 206/5. When the writer afterwards speaks of
the house of the body, 127/369, he is using a familiar expression, for
which there is nothing corresponding in the Latin original. wit
is Reason = animus rationalis: the contest between it and Will is also
in HM 15/23-36; the embodiment of the latter as the ‘fulitohe wif’ is due to our
writer.
10. ꝥ—hire,
whose guidance if the household (hus = familia) follow: see 46/292 note. diht &c.: see 66/120 note.
11. chasti,
discipline, restrain: comp. ‘Hwil þi wit atstond ⁊ chaisteð þi wil
. . . ne harmeð hit te nawiht,’ HM 15/26.
13. hit: see
1/10: ha RT.
16. wittes,
senses: comp. ‘hire fif wittes . sihðe ⁊ heringe . smecchunge ⁊
smeallunge ⁊ euch limes felunge,’ HM 13/25; AR 48/8, 116/25.
17.
hwer—ȝemeles: ‘Nam si vel parum a sua sollicitudine
torpuerit,’ V 207 e.
18. feareð
untoheliche, behaves in unruly fashion. gulteð ilome: see
34/91.
19. ifol
semblant, in foolish demeanour: comp. ‘ȝif þu makest ei semblaunt
oðer eni luue lates touward unðeauwes,’ AR 90/17. Inwið &c.:
following on the division made in ll. 14, 15, we might have expected
here something like, Þeo wið innen beoð þohtes.
20. in, busied
about, intent on such a great variety of purposes to please Will. For
in, of aim, object, comp. ‘He only, in a general honest thought |
And common good to all, made one of them,’ Shakspere, Julius Caesar,
v. v. 71. It might also be regarded as, in the shape of.
508
21. hit might be
impersonal, that things shall go on to her liking, but comp. l. 10.
22. iþþlen can
hardly be a mistake for ifelen (Specimens): it is possibly for iðolien.
R has felen, T fele. nurhð, noise: comp. 129/47 note: ‘His
laðliche nurð ⁊ his untohe bere makeð þe to agrisen,’ HM 31/22; ‘nurð ne
kimeð in heorte bute of sum þing ꝥ me haueð oðer isehen oðer iherd,’ AR
Corpus MS. where MS. Nero, ed. Morton, 92/3, has ‘noise’; ‘leaueð ower
nurð . ant oþer ladliche bere,’ SM 21/20. The word is not found outside
this group. T has murð, as at 118/22, but R with ‘murhðe’ there has
correctly nurð here.
23. a þet: see
72/179 note. hit: RT have correctly
wit. eie . . . luue: comp. 72/200. With tuhte,
discipline, comp. ‘tuhten ne chasten þi meiden uor hire gult,’ AR
268/21.
24. for, because
of the untrustworthiness of: analogous to 104/175. for hwen ꝥ, if
on occasion, when: see 72/192 and comp. ‘for hwen þat he cheas hire,’ HM
15/11. Its use appears to be restricted to this group. slepe . oðer
ohwider fare R; slepes oðer owhwider fares T.
26. let ham
iwurðen, lets them have their own way, abandons them to their own
devices. Comp. ‘ure Louerd let us one iwurðen oðer hwules ⁊ wiðdraweð
his grace,’ AR 230/27, 288/23; ‘Heo let heom alle i-wurþe . þat beoþ so
swyþe stronge,’ OEM 89/32; SK 791.
28. forte breoke
. . . abuten:
see 74/229 note.
efter: see 7/53. ꝥ is acc. after bohte, with lette
it means, for which: comp. 44/252, 263. With lette &c. comp.
144/84.
29. moni þeof:
‘Fur autem non unus est sed multiplex, quia singulis virtutibus singula
vitia insidiantur,’ V 208 a.
30. gasttes:
comp. 15/79; ‘ȝewerged gastes . ⁊ unþeawes . ⁊ unwraste lahtres,’ OEH i.
243/7.
31. castel: so T,
but R has chatel, property, possession. All the MSS. have ‘castel’ at
123/203.
32. hire, the
corresponding vice. OE. þēaw, un-þēaw are masculine.
33. heaued:
‘Principalis tamen fur diabolus intelligitur. Contra quem et eius
satellites pater idem (si tamen non negligens fuerit) domum suam forti
custodia muniens, prudentiam in primo aditu constituat,’ V 208 a.
meistreð, acts as leader to.
34. keis is
evidently translation of satellites, guards. ‘Item satelles dicitur quia
adheret alteri ad eius custodiam,’ Catholicon. But W explains it of
those who hold the keys of office.
35. froure: so T,
comfort, support; comp. 18/19. But fowre R is better.
36. heaued
þeawes, cardinal virtues. V mentions only three of these
509
here, but Temperantia (= Meað) afterwards takes part in the dialogue.
Warschipe is Prudentia: gastelich strengðe is a
translation of the Spiritus Fortitudinis of the very ancient
Confirmation Prayer; VV has more literally ‘gost of strengþe,’ 83/22: V
has Fortitudo only.
38. cunestable,
chief officer: an early instance of the word in English.
39. durewart:
comp. ‘Þe ȝeteward . þet is wittes skile,’ AR 270/26: in VV she is
ȝeapnesse, ‘on of ðe holie mihtes ðe wel cunne ⁊ wel muȝe ðo gaten ⁊ ðo
duren wel bilokin of ðis holi temple,’ 99/22. þe: so R, but ꝥ T:
relative with subjunctive of purpose, like the Latin, ‘quae discernat
quid sit admittendum, quid vitandum, quid excludendum.’
40. of feor, from
a distance; explained in NED under afar, as an analytical form =
OE. feorran, adv., from far. The latter is sometimes
treated in ME. as a noun and combined with prepositions of, on, from:
comp. 118/55, 198/31: oferrum in Minot vii. 70 is on + dat. s.
neut. of feorr, adj.
42. warschipes:
for the construction, see 10/167. R has warschipe, showing confusion of
gender. The subject of warni is warschipe contained in the
preceding genitive; see 6/18. fore, adv., previously,
comp. 121/140; ‘Ah wel ich warni þe uore,’ SJ 47/15.
44. ꝥ . . .
speken: see 81/77.
45. mete: so T,
but meðe R: comp. 122/174. uueles: so T, faults of excess and
defect, extremes: ‘muchel ⁊ lutel,’ 122/169. R has þinge, which
perhaps points to an original uuele þinge. for ꝥ—halden,
lit., for that is in every place (i.e. under all circumstances) virtue
and disciplined conduct in the observance; which is practically, for the
observance of that moderation is under all circumstances virtuous
conduct. So ‘ꝥ ich demi riht ⁊ wisdom to donne,’ 122/185, the doing of
that I judge to be proper and wise. This use of the gerundial infinitive
is frequent in AR, comp. ‘ne beo þu nout Gius fere ne Gius make uorte
birlen him so,’ 114/15, by pouring him out such a drink. With
halden comp. ‘Al so me tempreð an baþ . . . also deð
ðis haliȝe mihte alle ðes mannes ðeawes ðe hes luuiȝeð ⁊ healden cann,’
VV 107/18.
46. ꝥ nan
&c., that none of them in any case should, in opposition to her,
with excess overstep moderation: wid vnmeoð is duplicated in
ouer mete.
48: ‘Iustitia sedeat in
medio, ut sua cuique tribuat,’ V 208 b.
49. efter his
rihte, according to his deserts.
50. his: RT have
correctly þis, and after is, his. Comp. the corresponding passage
127/356-8, where efter ꝥ he is is varied by ‘efter ꝥ him limpeð
to,’ and nimed . . . his warde to witene by ‘fondeð
. . . his warde te
510
witene.’ This household, each in his own department, undertakes the care
of his charge. R omits to witene. With warde . . .
witene comp. 74/231; ‘þet he wite ⁊ wardie ou,’ AR 174/24: similar
combinations are ‘werieð ⁊ witeð,’ 121/143, 122/192; ‘wite ⁊ werien,’
123/203, 136/147, 149/169; ‘wardi ⁊ werie,’ 121/141.
52. of þe oþre,
of the other servants. wit is contracted 3 sing. pr. for
witeþ, takes care; T has the equivalent in his dialect, wites: comp.
‘swuchne wardein, þet wit ⁊ wereð us euer wið þe unseiene gostes,’ AR
312/8. R reads ant euchan al swa as of þe oðere wið ꝥ wit onont him . ne
schal &c.; wið ꝥ wit is an evident mistake for wit ꝥ. onont
him, so far as he is concerned: see NED under Anent; the
final t is possibly due to Scandinavian influence (Björkman, 20),
and the second o to the analogy of such pairs as hwenne, hwonne,
þenne, þonne. Comp. 70/161 note.
53: ‘His ita dispositis,
introducere debet prudentia aliquos nuntios, qui aliqua narrent, quae ad
exercitationem valeant,’ V 208 b.
54. fortruste him
appears to mean, be over confident, the prefix implying excess: the word
occurs here only.
55. in, adverb.
of feorren: see 118/40 note.
58. elheowet, of
strange colour: apparently here only. T has blac ille heowet, which
looks like a popular derivation of an uncommon word.
59. þuncheð ꝥ
stont: see 7/52 note. biuoren, as
a preliminary, as the first thing to be said: comp. ‘vore,’ 118/42. RT
have biuoren ham, which is rather pointless.
61-3. lust: ‘se
respondit non aliter quicquam dicturum, nisi summum fiat silentium. Quo
impetrato sic incipit. Ego sum timor mortis et mortem vobis venire
nuncio,’ V. In AR 306, fearlac binds the sinner condemned in Reason’s
court. munegunge, ‘Memoria mortis,’ V.
64. bisetten,
employ, expend (NED i. 817, comparing bestow): arrange, dispose would
better suit wordes, but not werkes.
67.
ah—hwenne, but be always expectant of that time: comp.
‘deað þet we beoð siker of ⁊ unsiker hwonne.’ AR 144/13.
68. unmundlunge,
unexpectedly: vnmunidlinge T. hwen—weneð: comp. ‘er me lest
wene,’ AR 178/12, and often; ‘þer we lest wenet,’ OEH i. 7/26; SJ
44/3.
70. of, with,
filled with records of sins: comp. ‘Vre Louerd hefde ifuld him of his
þreatunge,’ AR 156/3; 121/130; 201/61 note. See 36/101.
72. preoouin,
convict: a rare absolute use. preouin R, preouen T.
73. ꝥ . . . on,
on which: see 1/3 note. enbreuet,
enrolled: comp. ‘vor nis non so lutel þing of þeos þet þe deouel naueð
enbreued on his rolle,’ AR 344/10; ‘in iames ant imembres bokes
ibreuet,’ SM 16/31. OF. embriever:
511
n for m is Anglo-French: T has embreuet: ibreuet in
R is pp. of *breuen, enroll.
74. lif siðe: see
2/27.
75. soð schrift:
see 88/183, 80/52, and comp. ‘healen ham wið soð schrift ⁊ wið
deadbote,’ HM 15/1, 21/24. hire: so RT: see 13/34 note.
77. ha seið
warschipe: comp. 119/79, 80, 215/23; ‘An oðer stede he seið godd,’
VV 81/2; ‘he seið seint Jame,’ AR 10/14 and often; in all cases the name
of the person thus added in explanation of the pronoun has been
previously mentioned. Analogous are 192/504, 194/602.
78. ofte ⁊ ilome:
see 32/47. Nu . . . þenne: see 60/8
note. for þi trowðe: see 94/26, and note in l. 80, the common
‘omi trowðe.’
80. efter: comp.
36/119; ‘Vor efter þet me icnoweð his muchele godnesse . . .
efter þet me luueð hine more oðer lesse,’ AR 92/13: in the next line
efter—con means, to the best of my ability and
knowledge.
81. tellen: RT
omit. þer towart, lit. in that direction, i. e. concerning
that matter: mostly used in local sense as ‘buhen þertoward,’ SK 1473.
In l. 83 it means thereto. readien, discourse: rodien R,
reoden T: W reads reordin.
82 ff. The details in
this and similar descriptions, as VV 17-19, are ultimately derived from
the Visions literature; see Introduction to piece X. The main divisions
here correspond exactly to those in AR 144; ‘þe seoruwe of helle, þer
bihold þreo þinges—þe untaleliche pinen þet no tunge ne mei tellen
(comp. 119/85)—þe echenesse of euerichon, þet lesteð wiðuten ende
(comp. 120/106-8)—þe unimete bitternesse of euerichon’ (comp.
120/108-112).
82. [wid]:
supplied from T, not in R. ‘Infernus latus est sine mensura, profundus
sine fundo, plenus ardore incomparabili (‘uneuenlich’), plenus foetore
intolerabili (‘unþolelich’), plenus dolore innumerabili’ (‘untalelich’),
V 208 d. wið ute grunde: comp. 40/178.
83. uneuenlich:
comp. ‘al so ase heo (blisse) is unefenlich to alle worldes blissen, al
so heo is untalelich to alle worldliche tungen,’ AR 410/11. R has
unwerilich.
85. ne mei
&c.: comp. 46/285, 126/303; ‘ne mahte hit na mon rikenin ne tellen,’
SJ 50/4.
88. smeke: smoke
RT. smeche forcuðest, vilest of fumes, but RT have smecche, of
flavours (smæcc); comp. ‘þreaste smeorðrinde smoke ut smecche
forcuðest,’ SM 9/6. The adjective is everywhere else used of moral
worthlessness; comp. 26/253.
90. alles cunnes
pinen: see 81/80.
91. ase deoflen:
R has as þe deoulen, which is preferable.
512
94. For bute bote
T has unbotelich, a rare word, but ‘unboteliche lure,’ HM 17/25. The
combination of bote and bale is very common; see Minot i. 4 note.
as—weren belongs to hal. ful—grure, and
unmistakably they see themselves terrible and awful. grisle
. . . grure: comp. 56/40, 120/122, 121/131; ‘þet grisliche
word ⁊ grureful ouer alle,’ AR 306/5; ‘grislich ⁊ grureful uorto
biholden,’ id. 242/12.
95. froggen: T
has froden: see 46/273 note.
96. The omission of
þe would improve the grammar of this passage by giving a verb for
helle wurmes, tadden ⁊ froggen.
97. eauraskes,
water-frogs: eaureskes R, eafroskes T.
99. eauerȝete, at
any time yet: comp. ‘al þe wo ꝥ nu is ⁊ euer ȝete was,’ AR 52/12. In
‘For falshede euer ȝite heo souhten,’ Castel off Loue, 342, it
represents Fr. tut tens. remunge &c.: ‘Ibi est fletus et
stridor dentium (S. Matt. xxii. 13 altered), ibi transitur a frigore
nivium ad calorem ignium, et utrumque intolerabile,’ V 208 d.
Comp. 42/231-6, 76/25.
100.
hechelunge: apparently here only: Morris translates ‘chattering.’
If it is connected with ME. hechele, a tool for heckling flax, grating
or gnashing is a more likely meaning.
102. monge,
mixture, alternation of extremes.
103: ‘Ibi omnes
comburuntur . . . nec consumuntur,’ V.
104. forwalleð,
‘tortures by boiling,’ NED; apparently here only: comp. 43/222.
106. unhope,
absence of hope, of any prospect of release: ‘ibi nulla spes boni,’ V
208 d. A rare word, differing in meaning from wanhope: comp. ‘in
desperaunce, þet is, in unhope ⁊ in unbileaue forte beon iboruwen,’ AR
8/17. See 46/289.
108. iwa:
in wa RT.
109. heateð:
‘Omnis, qui est in eo, odit se et omnes alios,’ V. T has, hateð oðer . ⁊
ter teken him seluen, and in addition thereto (tō
ēacan).
110. blake:
‘bestia nigerrima sicut corvus,’ Visio Tnugdali, 36/4.
114. tungen of
stele: Virgil’s ‘ferrea vox’; ‘isene stemne,’ Wulfstan, 215/2; ‘teþ
and tunge . of stel imaked,’ OEM 154/268.
116. hefde a
mon &c.: comp. ‘Testis mihi Deus est, quia, si viderem quempiam
hominum, qui me et omnes caros meos omnibus damnis, iniuriis et
laesionibus et extrema leti sorte affecisset: si, inquam, tam immanissimum
hostem meum illis suppliciis, quae vidi, deputatum conspicerem prolixius
cruciandum, millies, si fieri posset, pro eius ereptione temporalem
mortem appeterem,’ Visio Monachi de Eynsham, ed. Huber, Rom.
Forschungen, xvi. 663/25. The date of the Visio is 1196 A.D.
117. al þe
ende, the whole: ende, portion, as in OE. micel ende,
nan
513
ende appears to show in this solitary place the same development
of meaning as lot, portion in the colloquial use, ‘the lot,’ ‘the whole
lot.’ Morris translates ‘remnant,’ but that is a late meaning of the
word: W, starting from the meaning, region (see 127/344), explains, the
whole circle of my kin.
120. ut þrof,
out of that place: comp. ‘arudden mi sawle ut of þine honden,’ SM 6/21:
but aredden is usually followed by of alone, as, ‘to aredden of helle,’
OEH i. 203/16.
121. Some distinction
is apparently intended between iseon (seon RT) and biseon
(all MSS.) such as that between, to be within sight of, and, to gaze
upon.
122. grimfule ⁊
grurefule: the first word is rare and the combination apparently
without parallel.
124. schenðlac,
disgrace: schenlac R, schendlac T: a word found only in AR, SK, and
here.
125. ⁊ hure
þolien, and especially to bear: in a normal sentence we should look
for something like, but it is still worse to endure. unirude:
unrude RT: see 188/389.
126. mealles:
melles RT, beetles, clubs: comp. ‘þer ȝe schulen iseon bunsen ham mit
tes deofles bettles,’ AR 188/4; ‘Þarfor þe devels salle stryk þam þare |
With hevy melles ay,’ Hampole, Pr. of Consc. 7047. dustlunges:
only here; the parallel place, 58/68, fixes its meaning as flingings,
hurlings: ME. dusten, to fling, is a word characteristic of the group. R
has reade . hare dustlunges as, T reade Hare dustlunges as, a better
division, but requiring ⁊ before hare.
128. grure
&c.: comp. ‘greden ai ⁊ granen iþe eche grure of helle,’ HM 47/12;
‘ðær is ece gryre . . . þær is wanung and granung,’ Wulfstan
114/4, id. 209/15, 18. heatel, full of hate, cruel; OE.
hatol. R has hatel, T Heates.
129.
wontreaðes: wondraðes R, wandreðes T: see 58/76. With
bold, dwelling place, comp. ‘bold of eche blisse,’ OEH i.
273/10.
132. For
schekeð R reads sorheð. me . . . me are dat.
pronouns, like ham 120/96: comp. 80/47. rueð: runeð T, ruueð R;
the first two seem to be mistakes for the last, which may represent a
simple form of which ruffle is derivative, with meaning, to stiffen,
stand up in disorder. W reads riseð. of, at; indicating source or
cause: see 160/184.
133. wumme: see
2/13. ‘Nulla ibi vox, nisi vae, vae, vae habent, vae sonant,’ V 208
e.
135. ofearneð:
if the prefix has any force, it means, thoroughly, fully.
hwilinde: the OE. adj. are hwīlen, hwīlendlic,
hwīlwende.
514
136. ȝef ꝥ: R
omits ȝef: T has ȝif without þet. ‘Bonum erat ei, si non esset natus
homo ille,’ S. Mark xiv. 21.
140. fore: see
118/42.
141. rihte . . .
reade: comp. 141/50, 147/158.
142. Read beo[n] we,
let us be.
145. he: ha
RT.
146. deore:
‘pretiosa in conspectu Domini mors Sanctorum eius,’ Ps. cxv. 15.
147. fikelinde,
deceiving: comp. ‘þis fikele world ⁊ frakele,’ HM 7/34; ‘eorðe ðet is
fikel ⁊ fals,’ OEH i. 200/24. false: fahe RT., variegated.
148. wurðeð: so
T, wurcheð R.
151. iburst,
bristled, and metaphorically, enraged: elsewhere said of the boar,
‘burst bar,’ SJ 68/13, ‘iburst bar,’ id. 69/16; ‘al was heora
gristbatinge; al swa wilde bares eȝe. | Whil heo weoren
blake; ⁊ ladliche iburste,’ L 1886; ‘comeþ þe maister budel
brust ase a bore,’ Böddeker, AE. Dicht. 104/51. sechinde: R adds
inȝonge, which is superfluous, but not senseless; comp.
118/32.
152. tis, for
þis after ant, cannot mean ‘thus,’ Morris: the meaning is, this much I
can do, warn you against his malice . . . but I have no power
against his force.
153. of,
for, against. T has of his leað for hise wrenches ich con . Ah i
ne mai &c.
154. ꝥ te,
what: R has only ꝥ, T reads ꝥ te limpeð to.
157. eðeliche,
morally poor: usually as applied to persons, it means, in humble
circumstances. T reads eðeliche ⁊ wake · vnwearnede ⁊
unwepnede of treowe bileaue; preserving the original.
158. Etstont:
here with dat.; it takes wið 122/182; aȝeines 126/324.
159. alle
&c., our weapons are all given us by his favour. Fortitudo in the
Latin quotes ‘induite vos armaturam Dei,’ Eph. vi. 11.
160. he, the
adversary.
161. towart,
against: comp. 126/333; ‘weorreð ⁊ warpeð eauer toward tis tur,’ HM
5/18. weole ⁊ wunne: a frequent combination in this group: comp.
143/69, 95; AR 198/30; SK 1501; HM 9/8, also ‘For al þe weole and þe wyn
. þat riche men fede,’ OEM 91/22. este: comp. 72/187; ‘al hore
wil ⁊ flesches eise ⁊ este,’ AR 220/6.
162. summes
weis, in some respects: comp. 140/30; HM 9/32; at 124/236 it appears
to translate aliquantisper, for some time. Similar phrases are ‘þisses
weis,’ AR 186/25, ‘eueriches weis,’ id. 218/12.
163. na þing
heardes: like Lat. nihil duri: comp. 122/183; ‘Wat dostu godes among
monne,’ ON 563. With heardes comp. 113/37.
515
165. For both things,
i. e. for both the rigour of adversity and the absence of bliss, it
behoves one to feel dread. heart: hard RT.
167. ma þah,
still more.
168. forȝemeð
ham: comp. 22/137.
170. ȝuldene:
comp. ‘Þe middel weie of mesure is euer guldene,’ AR 336/23. guldene
RT.
172. hwet se
&c., whatever be the case when hardships are concerned, I am not at
all afraid of prosperity. For this use of of, comp. ‘Hwen þus is
of þe riche . hwat wenes tu of the poure,’ HM 9/16. Morris translates,
‘Whatever may be of hardships I dread’; which involves an impossible
ellipsis and the mistake of making ‘of heardes’ partitive depending on
‘hwet.’ In this text that would require ‘heardes’ without the
preposition: comp. 122/163, 183.
173. ne of licomliche
estes R.
176. schad is
usually followed by of, as at 130/81, but Orm 6228, 9 has ‘bitwenen.’
Comp. ‘scadwisnesse,’ 92/121; ‘ȝescod,’ 14/74.
178. fallinde,
perishing: B-T quotes ‘Ðis lif is lǽnlic and feallende,’ Thorpe, Anc.
Laws, ii. 400/16.
179. þurh
unweotenesse, if she sins, it will not be for lack of knowledge.
Comp. ‘I þine soule, oðer two—sunne ⁊ ignorance; þet
is, unwisdom ⁊ unwitenesse,’ AR 278/6.
180. After nis
T adds ha. siker of, free from anxiety about; as ‘sikernesse’ in
l. 188 is confidence. as þeo þe &c., as being one who thinks
herself weak, like Lat. quippe quae: comp. 128/1.
181. ⁊: so T,
but R has correctly to, in.
182. onont, as
regards, so far as she herself is concerned: Lat. quoad. etstonden
wið: see 121/158. turnes, cunning devices: comp. ‘aȝein þes
deofles turnes ⁊ his fondunges,’ AR 78/27. deð—wise: comp.
‘þenne doþ we as þe wise,’ OEM 79/228.
185. deð: this
superfluous use of do is common in AR. ‘ne seið hit nout ꝥ heo biheold
wepmen; auh deð wummen,’ 54/19; ‘Auh þe treowe ancren þet we efneð to
briddes; nout we þauh; auh deð God,’ 130/30, and
often. Comp. 85/105: different is ‘do’ used to avoid the repetition of a
verb as at 49/304, 86/141. to donne: see 118/45.
187. T omits
halden.
189. T has the better
reading, to do riht ⁊ riht for to demen, which is supported by
122/197: R to don riht ant riht fon ⁊ demen; ‘fon riht’ is a strange
expression, which may mean to exact justice at the hands of others.
ich deme &c.: Morris translates, ‘and I deem myself so that
I, through myself, may do it (sin) not.’ The meaning is, My duty is to
behave justly
516
and to judge justly, and, in my own case, I judge that I do not perform
that duty by my own unaided powers.
190: ‘Omne datum
optimum et omne donum perfectum desursum est, descendens a Patre
luminum,’ S. Jas. i. 17.
191. Nu . . .
þenne: see 60/8.
192. werien . . .
witen: see 118/50. halden: habben T.
193. demen
&c., to have a poor and humble opinion of ourselves. Comp. ‘leoten
ham lahe ⁊ eðeliche,’ HM 43/29. Ne beo—swucche, even if we
be not at all such, belongs to the preceding sentence.
199. of, in
respect to; it comes near in meaning to, in spite of these merits. OE.
fordēman is constructed with for, dēman with be, ymbe.
200. him ane is
definitive qualifying god: comp. ‘he him ane is to herien,’ 130/75.
201. þonkeð . . .
of, thank on account of, for: comp. ‘Gode ðanciað mid godum weorcum
his gifa,’ Cura Past. 318/3; ‘þet þu luuie þine drihten . . .
⁊ him þonkien alles þinges,’ OEH i. 39/25; but ‘þonkien hit ure
drihten,’ id. 5/29.
203. on helpe,
as a help: comp. 123/226. wite &c.: see 118/50.
206. dreaien:
see 74/233: dreien R, drahen T. treowliliche is a scribe’s
mistake for treowliche, as in R, treweliche T.
207. Vmben: not
‘for,’ Morris, but After. On the other hand, ‘umbe stunde,’ AR 344/27,
means, at times; ‘eauer umbe stunde,’ HM 33/30, at all times.
209. freolich,
goodly, charming, properly, of gentle upbringing: for the combination
with feier, comp. 129/23, 138/22. ‘Alius nuntius venit pulcher et
hilaris, qui videtur afferre bona,’ V 208 c. aturnet,
attired: see 68/146.
210.
ꝥ—neod, we should have much need of that: the construction
in this expression is dat. of the person needing, nom. of
the thing needed, as in ‘Muchel is us þenne neod . . . sod
scrift,’ OEH i. 11/1; ‘Þu seist þet te nis no neod medicine,’ AR 178/15;
‘Þe holie man is ned ꝥ he [bie] festned on his holinesse,’ OEH ii.
57/31: see also 62/24.
211. mid alle,
utterly: the phrase translates L. penitus in SK 658.
214. ilihtet,
alleviated, freed from depression: comp. ‘þet ich beo ilihted of hore
heuinesse,’ AR 356/5. ham þuncheð is parenthetic.
215. schimmeð,
shines: a form found also in SJ, SM: schimereð T.
217. lustnin: T
has lustin ꝥ helden us swa stille hwil fearlac us agrette, which
corresponds to ‘Si nos, dum timor et memoria mortis loqueretur,
tacuimus, iustum est ut te loquente multo magis taceamus,’ V 208
c.
219. munegunge:
see 119/62. liues luue: ‘desiderium vitae aeternae’; comp. ‘ꝥ he
hire liues luue luueliche leareð,’ HM 3/11.
517
220. ꝥ, in
which, where.
222. drupnin,
to be dejected: a Scand. word; see Björkman 177, 208, durcnin, the
reading of R, is for drucnin, a variant of the other: comp. ‘⁊ dearede
al adeadet, | druicninde ⁊ dreori,’ SK 2020. See Minot, i. 9 note.
224. fondin ⁊
ifinden, experience and discover.
229. ȝe iseoð:
ȝoi isoð T.
230. alswa: R
omits. aȝein, in comparison with: comp. 124/246, 264; ‘euerich
worldes sauur is bitter þer aȝeines,’ AR 102/26, id. 112/10. In l. 232
it means toward, in the direction of (from the place opposite): comp.
‘Ben ðese hangen ðe sunne agen,’ GE 4075.
231.
sunne—schadewe: comp. ‘te sunne were dosk ȝif hit to þi
blisfule bleo mihte beo euenet,’ OEH i. 269/26 (Wohunge); ‘Iesu al feir
. aȝein hwam þe sunne nis buten ase a scheadewe,’ id. 200/9; HM 39/32;
AR 100/4.
233. schawere,
mirror; OE. scēawere. T has scheawere, R schadewe. The idea was
possibly suggested by ‘per speculum in aenigmate,’ 1 Cor. xiii. 12.
Comp. ‘Ȝe schulen, ase ine scheauware, iseon ure Lefdi mid hire
meidenes,’ AR 92/26.
235. an, one;
not ‘and,’ Morris: the expression translates individua Trinitas.
236. summes
weis: see 121/162.
237. blisful:
wunderful R.
238. rixleð:
the absence of a connecting word is perhaps due to the original Latin:
‘Aliquantisper tamen intuitus sum Dominum Iesum Christum in dextera
patris sedentem, in aeterna vita regnantem, quamvis super omnem
creaturam adeo speciosum, ut in eum desiderent Angeli prospicere, ad
haec (? adhuc) tamen vulnera passionis, quibus nos redemit, in corpore
suo habentem, patri pro nobis assistentem,’ V 208 d.
239. ful . . . to
bihalden, sated with gazing: a peculiar use of the, historically,
dative infinitive as a genitive: comp. ‘sead . . . to
iseonne,’ 133/30; ‘upo hwas nebschaft þe engles ne beoð neauer fulle to
bihalden,’ HM 39/32: NED quotes under date 1607, ‘full to provide,’
fully occupied in providing. Sometimes ‘of’ is added, as 52/388; ‘Hit
bieð sume þat non imeðe ne cunnen of hem seluen to feden,’ VV 139/23. In
OE. the dat. inf. is often used to translate the Latin gerundive in the
genitive, as ‘swa mycel getydnes ⁊ gelærednes to sprecanne’ = ‘tanta
dicendi peritia,’ Bede, ed. Miller, 362/27. For ich iseh R has
is, T iseh.
240. etscene:
eðsene R, edscene T.
243.
heouenliche, heavenly ones: T adds weoredes: comp. l. 251. ‘super
omnes ordines beatorum Angelorum . . . exaltatam,’ V.
518
244. in,
on.
245. istirret:
isterret T. weoleful: meinful R, powerful.
246. þear ich iseh
as, I saw where: usually the words are not separated: comp. 127/342;
‘he is ase buruh wiðuten wal, þer ase uerd mei in oueral,’ AR 74/6: so
‘þider as,’ whither, 126/334. For ase, where, comp. 125/272, ‘ine
Jerusalem, ase he wunede,’ AR 172/2.
248. þa, when.
R has after mahte, na mare of hire iþolien; T reads, mihte of hire na
lengre þolien.
249. biseh to,
looked upon, beheld: comp. 3/45; ‘Ða biseh ure drihte mildeliche to hire
penitence,’ OEH ii. 145/9, and the similar ‘belocest to,’ 13/36; ‘hwa
bihalt to þeo þet beoð of lowe liue,’ AR 276/26; ‘iseh towart’ =
intuitus sum 124/254; ‘on to biseonne,’ 136/137. But ‘to . . .
bisihð’ 134/81 means, looks up to, like ‘hwon ȝe habbeð touward me eien
oðer honden,’ AR 76/16: ‘biseon to’ 136/134, look after, provide for, as
in ‘Bisih to me lauedi briȝt, | Hwenne ich schal wende heonne,’ OEM
160/18. T omits ⁊—archangles, probably taking ‘þe oðre þe beoð
buuen ham’ to mean the archangels. The Latin is, ‘Sed hanc admirabilem
claritatem matris et filii diu ferre non sustinens, converti aspectum
meum ad illos beatorum spirituum ordines, qui ante Deum assistunt.’
Probably the author meant by ‘þe oðre’ the four and twenty elders and
the four beasts in perpetual adoration about the throne (Rev. iv.
4-11).
251. unwergeð:
unwerched T. Nihe wordes: see 16/138: T has woredes, R ord`r´es,
corrected out of wordes.
253. onsihðe:
see 64/55.
255-8: ‘miro
exultantes gaudio, qui eam quam olim a longe salutaverant patriam
obtinent, qui ea quae in spiritu praeviderant completa conspiciunt,’ V
209 a. See Heb. xi. 13. ꝥ, because.
256. For igret,
greeted, OE. gegrētan, R has igreiðet, prepared.
259. poure: ‘de
pauperibus et de infirmis tam gloriosos tamque sublimes factos,’ V. T of
poure, R `ꝥ´ poure `weren´; omitting on eorðe. bigoten, drenched,
perfused: comp. ‘Eall ic wæs mid blode bestemed | begoten of þæs Guman
sidan,’ Dream of the Rood, 48; ‘ꝥ ha al were bigoten of þe blode,’ SJ
27/6.
261. alle cunnes
ledenes: RT have the usual alles: the MS. has alleṣ, where the dot
may be only a casual resting of the pen: see 81/80, and comp. l.
264.
264. talden to,
esteemed: for ‘to’ T has of, which is the usual construction, comp.
164/256, ‘telleð lutel þerof,’ AR 200/12, but ‘to’ at 129/30; ‘tellest
herto lutel,’ AR 100/20. aȝeines: see 123/230.
266. haliche:
read haliliche with RT.
519
267: ‘fulgent quasi
stellae in perpetuas aeternitates,’ V 209 b, from Daniel xii. 3.
wlite: ‘Regem in decore suo vident,’ V from Isa. xxxiii. 17. The
writer omits any reference to monks, to whom the last clause of this
sentence, ‘ꝥ—ehnen’ (Rev. vii. 17), is applied in the Latin. It is
significant that he greatly expands the passage which describes the
maidens; which should be compared with AS. Hom., ed. Assmann, 42/460-72
(Ælfric, de Virginitate), HM 19/9-15.
269. ferreden:
comp. ‘i þe feire ferreden | of uirgines in heouene,’ SK 2309.
ilikest towart engles: so, ‘þu ofearnest meiden to beo engle
euening iþe heȝe blisse of heuene,’ HM 13/5; ‘to singen wið engles hwas
felahes ha beoð,’ id. 19/8, 21/31.
270.
feolohlukest, best fitted as associates and equals to rejoice and
be glad with them. An isolated superlative of felaȝlich: comp.
‘wunderlukest,’ 34/88; ‘wurðlukest,’ L 25496. The comparative adv. is
more common: ‘dimluker,’ 56/43, ‘creftluker,’ 131/88, ‘greatluker,’
70/157, ‘monluker,’ 66/110, ‘oðerluker,’ 38/149, 86/135, ‘witerluker,’
125/285: in AR ‘ȝeorneluker,’ ‘gledluker,’ ‘wisluker,’ ‘uestluker,’
234/5, 7, 8, 9; ‘wunderluker,’ OEH i. 93/28. For u in these forms
see Bülbring, §§ 420, 421. ouergað: see 22/143.
271. flesches
lahe, desires of the flesh: lahe is custom, habit; its use
was perhaps suggested by ‘Video autem aliam legem in membris meis
. . . captivantem me in lege peccati,’ Rom. vii. 23.
cunde, natural propensities: comp. 160/209; ‘heald þin cunde,’
follow nature, OEH ii. 31/6.
272. as, where:
comp. 124/246. There should be a full stop at wunieð, as in RT.
274. R omits
þe—singen. The arrangement in T shows how the mistake arose from
the similar endings of two lines:
na tunge tellen. Alle ha singeð
ꝥ ter beoð. Ah hare song ne
mahe nane buten heo singen
Se swote smal ham folheð hwi.
hare song: ‘Nam cantabant canticum, quod nemo alius poterat
dicere,’ V 209 c, from Rev. xiv. 3 (altered).
275. smeal:
smel R, smal T. ‘Sed odor in regione earum tam suavis erat, ut omnia
aromatum genera exuperet,’ V.
277. aȝein
&c., to receive their petitions. ꝥ alle &c.: ꝥ alle þe
oðer `he´ walden sittinde ihereð R, ꝥ alle þoðre halhen sittinde
him hereð T.
279. Ah nu
&c.: ‘De singulis beatorum Ordinibus mira disseris, quaesumus ut
quae sit eorum in communi actio edicas,’ V 209 d. The stop
520
should come not after setnesse, but after sunderlepes, as in T; R puts
it after sumhwet, which is tolerable. setnesse, OE.
setness, properly ordinance, arrangement, is here by extension,
order, class: R has the isolated tosetnesse, corresponding to an OE.
*tō-setness, division into classes, which is probably the
original word. The sense is, Well, thou hast now spoken so admirably
about each class of the blessed severally, tell us somewhat as to what
bliss is common to all alike. W explains setnesse as =
swetnesse.
282. lengðe:
‘Vivunt, sapiunt, amant, gaudent, laudant, veloces sunt, securi sunt,’ V
209 d.
283. In T murie
by punctuation goes with ‘loft song,’ which is OE. lof-song,
Lauds, hymns of praise; see 126/318.
287-330. The messenger
proceeds to explain the nature of the seven blisses. The scribe marks
off each section with a special capital, but has omitted one at ‘her,’
126/317.
287. brihtre:
comp. ‘seouesiðe schenre þen þe sunne,’ HM 41/2; AR 100/4; SK 1665; SM
23/13; a phrase of this group. See Ælf. Lives, i. 538/820.
288.
buten—swinc: ‘current et non laborabunt,’ Isa. xl. 31.
289. in a
steal, in one station, condition: contrasted with man’s state on
earth, ‘numquam in eodem statu permanet,’ Job xiv. 2, ‘never continueth
in one stay.’ R has stel.
290. wið ute
wonunge: ‘sine diminutione.’
291. hare lif
&c.: ‘Vita eorum visio et cognitio beatae Trinitatis,’ V, quoting
further S. John xvii. 3. R adds ‘in’ after is.
295. nebbe to
nebbe: ‘tunc autem facie ad faciem,’ 1 Cor. xiii. 12. Comp. ‘secheð
earst upon hire nebbe to nebbe,’ HM 17/7; ‘cristes wille bo us bitwon. |
neb wið neb for him to son,’ OEH i. 61/109. wise &c.:
‘Sapiunt consilia atque iudicia Dei, quae sunt abyssus multa,’ V 209
e; partly from Ps. xxxv. 7.
296. R has godes runes
ant his reades ꝥ. Comp. 1/5; ‘Godes derne runes ⁊ his derne domes,’ AR
96/3; ‘his derne runes ⁊ his heouenliche priuitez,’ id. 154/2; ‘þe
deopschipe ⁊ te derne run,’ SK 1333.
297. sea dingle
answers to ‘abyssus’: dingle is not otherwise known till the
seventeenth century: see NED s.v. ha seoð &c.: so,
‘Alle þeo ine heouene iseoð ine God alle þing,’ AR 96/1.
298. hwi ⁊
hwerto: ‘Sapiunt causas et naturas et origines omnium rerum,’ V. R
omits.
300. bi ham
idon, acted towards them, dealt with them: comp. 80/58. R omits
ham.
521
301.
deorewurðe: muchele R. milce is dat., hwet
acc. after ȝelden. R omits ase muchel.
302. R omits al, se
muchel is not in RT and is not original: the correlatives are ‘Se
gleade’ . . . ‘ꝥ ne mei.’
303. munne:
comp. ‘⁊ monie ma murhðen | þen alle men mahten | wið hare muð munnen |
⁊ tellen wið tungen,’ SK 1697-1700, and 119/85.
304.
Euchan—ahne: comp. ‘ylc blissæþ on oðres gode ⁊ on oðres
murhðe, swá on his aȝene,’ Twelfth Cent. Hom. 120/11; AR 282/14-17.
306.
ase—alle, as many gladnesses as all the saints in heaven
are many: ‘tot gaudia habent quot socios,’ V. R omits alle.
308. hwen,
since.
310. of: see
110/272. wið uten ei etlunge, beyond all estimate: comp. ‘wiðuten
eni etlunge,’ HM 39/35. eilunge R, a scribe’s error.
311. Neomeð
&c. The Latin of this passage is clear enough: ‘Si ergo cor
uniuscuiusque vix capit suum gaudium, quomodo capit tot et tanta gaudia?
Ideo dicitur, Intra in gaudium Domini tui: non intret gaudium
Domini tui in te, quia capi non posset,’ V 209 b. If hu be
read for ꝥ in l. 313, it gives a similar turn of expression and
sense. As the text stands, it means, Now then note that, even if the
heart of any one man can never find room for its own joy taken
separately (so great beyond measure is the bliss of the individual) yet
it does receive into itself so many and great joys [of others]. That is
the meaning of our Lord’s saying, ‘Enter into the joy of thy Lord’ (S.
Matt. xxv. 21). You must enter into the joy, it does not enter into you,
for you cannot take it in. Such verbal ingenuity is common in scriptural
interpretation at this period. nu þenne, now, that being so; see
60/8 note.
312. iseide,
meant, taken: for this use of seggen, see 56/46. T omits, B is defective
here.
313. þe:
þen R, te T. ꝥ would in a modern sentence come after ‘ȝeme,’ l.
311.
316. blisse:
hus R. bigotten: see 124/259: biȝeoten R, biȝoten T.
317. neomen: in
the absolute use of betake itself, proceed: see 213/539: in is a
mere repetition of the preceding ‘in’: comp. 143/67 note. her of
begins the expansion of ‘laudant’: it does not refer to what precedes,
but means, for the reason given in the following verse, ‘Beati qui
habitant in domo tua, Domine; in saecula saeculorum laudabunt te,’ Ps.
lxxxiii. 5.
318. lusti,
finding pleasure: ‘sine fastidio.’ songes: read songe, as
in R.
321. Comp. ‘Alle þeo
ine heouene schulen beon ase swifte ase is nu monnes þouht, ⁊ ase is þe
sunne gleam, þet smit from east into þe west, ant
522
ase þe eie openeð ⁊ tuneð; . . . tet bodi schal beon hwar so
euer þe gost wule in one hondhwule,’ AR 94/21.
322. tuneð
&c.: ‘In momento, in ictu oculi,’ 1 Cor. xv. 52: ‘as tu turnest þin
hond,’ HM 25/12.
324. etstonden:
see 121/158.
325. ȝe: Ȝea T.
makie to cwakien: for the dat. inf. of purpose, comp. 128/370;
‘he wæs . . . geneded to onfonne þa ðegnunge biscophades,’
Bede, 368/17. The construction has its equivalent in an object clause,
as ‘makeð ham ꝥ ha beoð,’ 131/101.
327. The writer has
neglected the translation of ‘de tali velocitate’ after blisse. ꝥ
hit &c.: ‘quod nullum finem, nullam diminutionem, nullum
detrimentum habebunt,’ V 209 b. me is miswritten for mei;
mai T.
329. nower neh,
nowhere near, falling far short of the reality; a phrase of this group,
comp. ‘Nis hit nower neh gold al ꝥ ter schineð,’ HM 9/15; ‘ne schaltu
nower neh | se lihtliche etsterten,’ SK 2094. R reads, Ah nower neh ne
neh al; ne ꝥ ich iseh . ne ne con ich al tellen: T, Ah nower
neh ne seh ich al . ne þat ȝet ꝥ ich seh ne con ich half tellen. Both
are quite intelligible, R is nearest the original. W emends, ah nowðer
ne seh ich al, | ne þet ȝet þet ich iseh | ne con ich half
tellen. The Latin is, ‘Neque enim ut vidi dicere, neque ut sunt videre
potui.’ ȝet, even.
331. efter þi
sihðe, in accordance with what you saw: ‘vera vidisse, vera narrasse te
intelligimus,’ V 209 c.
332. bisið him,
takes heed to himself.
333. towart:
see 121/161.
334. þider as,
to the place where: see 124/246. þider þer T.
335. an, for
ant: ⁊ RT. blisse . . . bale; comp. ‘in blisse buten euch bale,’
SK 1755; ‘my blysse, my bale ȝe han ben boþe,’ E. E. Allit. Poems,
12/373. R has wið uten balesið.
336. folhin, to
follow after, or to practise, does not suit the context; but fonden T,
to experience, gives a good sense and a characteristic combination: see
123/224. R has folhen an finden. hwet &c.: ‘Quis ergo nos
separabit a charitate Christi? . . . Certus sum enim quia
neque mors neque vita . . . poterit nos separare a charitate
Dei,’ Rom. viii. 35, 38, 39.
337. halden us
þeonne, keep us away from him: comp. ‘halde we us from uniwil,’ OEH
i. 69/264. þeonne, not ‘then,’ but thence, therefrom: contracted
from þeonene, OE. þanone: usually meaning from that place and
seldom applied to a person as here.
339. haueð: the
subject is he contained in the preceding ‘his.’ tresures:
a mistake for tresurers: tresorers T: possibly the earliest instance of
its use.
523
340. under his
wengen, i. e. if we have his protection: from ‘protegar in
velamento alarum tuarum,’ Ps. lx. 5: similar expressions in Pss. lvi. 2,
lxii. 8, xc. 4.
341. warschipe:
T has rihtwisnesse, with the Latin, where Justitia pronounces judgement
(comp. l. 350) and Fortitudo executes it (l. 343), while Temperantia
says what is translated in ll. 349-52.
342. þer as,
where: see 124/246. murðes: murhðes T.
343. nu ut quod
strenðe is omitted by T.
344. ende: see
96/34. Nu nu quoð fearlaic . T.
345. lessere
&c., inferior in importance to that of mirth’s messenger; so Morris,
taking sondes as s. gen. balancing ‘mi’ after þen. T has
sonden.
346. unbihefre:
see 91/108. licwurðe ne icweme: comp. ‘Hesteres bone þe cwene was
þe kinge Assuer licwurðe ⁊ icweme,’ AR 146/7, 120/25, 326/13.
347. ow: T adds
quoð meað.
349. þah with
nu, nevertheless at this time, on this occasion. T has, flutte nu
þah fearlac.
351. ‘Forsitan tu
admitteris si Desiderium vitae aeternae aliquando loqui cessaverit,’ V
209 d.
352. stutteð,
ceases: a word characteristic of the group: comp. ‘þa ne cuðen ha neauer
stutten hare cleappe,’ AR 72/14 (Corpus MS.); ‘Stute nu þenne ⁊ stew þe,
| ⁊ stille þine wordes,’ SK 1529; ‘Wið þis ꝥ ha stutte stoden þe
cwelleres,’ SJ 64/12; ‘stute nu ant stew þine unwittie wordes,’ SM 6/2:
it is mostly used of cutting short a discourse: cognate with Du. stuiten
(Franck), G. stutzen.
353. ituht
efter, disciplined in conformity with: similarly don efter,
l. 355, to behave in subservience to: comp. 106/197.
355. T has, se ful
itohen ⁊ don al as ham luste ase wil hare lafdi ⁊ nawt ase wit
ham tuhte; lustneð &c.
356. fondeð
&c., each one, owing to those two messages which they have heard,
and (owing to) that which the four sisters have taught in addition, ever
strives, in discharge of his office, to keep his watch and to guard
faithfully against the entrance of each vice.
357. þurh: R
has the contraction þ with oblique stroke through the lower part of the
staff here and at 128/371, not ꝥ. ꝥ fowr: to fowr R.
358. for,
against, with ‘witene’ and ‘warden.’ warde &c.: comp.
118/50.
359.
ant—treowliche: T omits.
360. ofte
&c.: see 32/47.
524
361. þe islep:
ꝥ iþe slep of ȝemles T. For ȝemeles comp. 54/10, 17. hire:
his T. ‘Sic debet quisque torporem suum excutere,’ V 209 d.
362. efter
þeos: after þe tidings of þe T. biseon to, gaze up to:
comp. 124/249: with on, 120/122. Here V ends.
364. T reads his
hinen. efter, in accordance with that which: after þat his
wil T.
365. ꝥ is: þe
wise T. tuhten ⁊ teachen: comp. 47/272: in Specimens connected
with ‘wule,’ ‘as Wit . . . will discipline and instruct’; by
Morris made to depend on ‘husebonde,’ both wrongly. They depend on
ah, l. 360, which governs the whole series of infinitives ‘te
þenchen,’ ‘awecchen,’ ‘biseon,’ ‘To habben,’ ‘leaden,’ ‘tuhten ⁊
teachen,’ ‘witen,’ l. 368: one ought to train and teach (himself and his
servants, l. 363) that Wit should always go before.
366. teache: T
has the correct reading, drahe. dihteð ⁊ demeð, arranges and
decrees to be done. The combination is uncommon, but comp. ‘al ich wule
dihten | þe domen of mi kinedom,’ SK 1460 (MS. Titus); ‘he dihte feole
domes,’ L 7221.
367. þer fore:
not in T; it is a blundering anticipation of the two words
following.
370. te fleon:
see 126/325. ontent, inflames: comp. 70/168; ‘þe hali gast | þe,
in furene tungen, | ontende þe apostles,’ SK 1402; ‘Ontend me wiþ þe
blase of þi leitinde loue,’ OEH i. 185/6. T has ontenden.
372. feder
&c.: fader ⁊ te hali gast an godd i þrehad rixleð ai bute ende T.
ant e sune is a strange mistake: comp. 88/190.
374 ff. are not in T.
iohan is the copyist: comp. 74/237, 75/209; ‘Ant he ꝥ her least
on wrat swa as he cuðe,’ SJ 79/18. He may have been the author of the
doggerel which follows.
377. swa,
accordingly, i.e. by reading it.
381. ꝥ lif,
such a life.
384. Þet means
that, in conjunction with 381, so that, with 382. Johan was a good
scribe, and a poor poet.
Sources: ... ‘Et qui veniunt cum
illa?’
illa.
Phonology: (1) of B.
of B. misprinted as plain (not
spaced)
greot 93 for grot RT (grot,
particle)
R. T.
ea before r ... schulde 158
(R1 has scylde subj.),
comma missing
a + g ... (R1 has
frægnast, Li, fregna)
reference “Li” unexplained: Lindisfarne glosses?
tintreohen 264 with eo, å-umlaut of
e
e misprinted as plain (non-bold)
... The stop c is usually k
before e, i,
“e” and “i” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
Sweet, Oldest E. Texts, p. 149
OE. Texts
Dialect: ... its u-,
å-umlauts;
“u” and “å” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
8. hire ...
all punctuation in this paragraph printed as shown
... the embodiment of the latter
later
28. forte breoke . . .
abuten:
... abuten;
73. ... ibreuet in R is pp. of
*breuen,
* breuen,
116. ... tam immanissimum hostem
immannissimum
157. ... T reads eðeliche ⁊ wake ·
vnwearnede
anomalous mid-dot unchanged
331. ... vera vidisse, vera
narrasse
narasse
Manuscripts: As for Sawles Warde. The text of this
extract is from the Royal MS.
Editions: Morton, James, The Legend of St. Katherine of
Alexandria, Abbotsford Club, London, 1841 (text from MS. Titus D 18,
with variants from the Royal MS.). Hardwick, Charles, An Historical
Inquiry touching Saint Catharine of Alexandria: to which is added a
Semi-Saxon Legend, Cambridge, 1849 (text from MS. Titus). Einenkel,
Eugen, The Life of
525
Saint Katherine, London 1884 (text based on the Royal MS. with readings
of all the manuscripts, the Latin original and an English translation):
also as Appendix to The Life and Martyrdom of Saint Katherine of
Alexandria, Roxburghe Club, 1884.
Literature: (1) Of the present
version. Einenkel, E. (see p. 493/7);
*Stodte, H. (see p. 493/9); Victor,
Otto, Zur Textkritik und Metrik der frühmittelenglischen
Katharinenlegende, Bonn, 1912; Luick, Karl, Anglia, Beiblatt, xxiii.
226-35 (review of Victor’s dissertation); Bartels, L. (see p. 450/23). (2) Of the
Legend in general. Knust, H., Geschichte der Legenden der h.
Katharina von Alexandrien und der h. Maria Aegyptiaca, Halle, 1890;
Varnhagen, H., Zur Geschichte der Legende der Katharina von Alexandrien,
Erlangen, 1891; id., Zur Geschichte der Legende der Katharina von
Alexandrien, Erlangen, 1901.
Source: The most widely spread of the Latin lives
of the Saint, called by Varnhagen the Vulgata, and printed opposite the
English text by Einenkel. Varnhagen’s tract dated 1891 gives a good
account of all the Latin versions and their sources.
Phonology: This is of the same type as that of MS.
A of the Ancrene Wisse and of MSS. B, R of Sawles Warde. Noteworthy are
cang 88 with a for a before a lengthening group, and
therefore a loan-word; wastum 24 with a for æ after
w; icuret 25 participle of ME. curen, derivative of cyre;
dale 33 from dāl, not dǣl; medschipe 79 (gemǣdd
pp.); teeð 64 with doubled vowel for length; roðeren 21 (reoderen B)
from hrȳðer through ruðeren L 8106 (roþere O); awariede 48, 82,
wariet 67 without i-umlaut of ea; horte 38 French writing
for heorte; steðeluest 24 u-umlaut of a; woorld 97
probably miswritten for weorld (weorlde B); hersumin 49 representing
*hēarsumian without umlaut; storede 4 French writing for steorede
from stēoran without umlaut; scheop 73, 80, 103 (scēop).
Dreien 12 is dragan with å-umlaut of a; for plohen
36 see 360/19; slaht 67 is Anglian slæht; seheliche represents
*gesegenlic, Li has geseen; rewfule 55 has ew from
ēow. A glide e is added in halewunde 78, ludere 69;
e is lost in ȝeinde 54, wettres 93; e is u in
halewunde 78 (hālwende) through an intermediate i;
o is u in þrittuðe 15. In ȝurinde 54 r has been
lost, d is t in wurðmunt 73 (wurðmund T); ð in
cweðen 45 is from the singular; ð is lost in wurgin 19, wurgið 93
(wurðgin B, ME. derivative of wierðig); ȝ is written for
g in ȝeinen 60 (OWScand. gegna); initial h is lost in
lowinge, ludinge 48, remes 55.
Accidence: This has been sufficiently described in the
texts mentioned above. Noteworthy is heoren 85, perhaps the earliest
instance of the form with n added from min, þin.
526
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are bule 21, crokes 43
with its derivative crokinde 87, euene 20, ȝeinen 60 (keinen T),
(god)lec 98, 101, hap 62, keisere 60, lates 35, menske 45, witer(liche)
96: possibly hird 53, ȝeinde 54. French are lay 55, mawmez 21, mawmetes
48: possibly cang 88, crauant 45.
Dialect: As for Sawles Warde.
Style: What has been said about the arrangement of
Sawles Warde in Layamonic verse applies to Einenkel’s distribution of SK
in Otfridic verse, which Trautmann, the discoverer of Otfrid’s verse in
England, afterwards recognized as Layamon’s. It produces such strange
divisions as, ‘þet an engel ne com | lihtinde, with swuch | leome, from
heouene,’ 666-8; ‘He haueð iweddet him to | mi meiðhad mit te ring,’
1507, 8; ‘to habben ant to halden þe | cwic, þen to acwellen þe,’ 1867,
8; ‘ant heo duden; drohen hire | wið uten þe burhȝetes,’ 2173, 4, and
such rhythms as, ‘hwet he warpe a word aȝein ow,’ 643; ‘for hwas nome
ich underneome,’ 765; ‘ant kénest of ow álle óf þe créft,’ 814; ‘ant
cweðe ham al sker up,’ 867, with many others. There is a parallel to SK
in the OHG. Himmel und Hölle printed as verse in MSD i. 67. It is
described by Einenkel (p. xxi) as ‘a poem which, curiously enough, is in
its unrhymed form unique in O. H. G.,
and forms the only perfect analogy to our three legends and to numerous
other Old and Middle English poems of the same class,’ while Steinmeyer
(MSD
ii. 162) is of opinion that to treat it as verse and so create an unique
rhymeless poem in the earliest German literature is a very doubtful
proceeding.
Introduction: This is the first version of the
Legend extant in English. It was followed by six other redactions in
Middle English, all in verse: they are enumerated and traced to their
originals in Varnhagen’s tract of 1901.
1. Maxence: a
mistake of the Latin original and of its source, Simeon Metaphrastes,
for Maximinus, as correctly given in the Menologium Basilianum
(Hardwick, p. 11). Galerius Valerius Maximinus was raised to the rank of
Caesar by his uncle, the Emperor Galerius, and made governor of Syria
and Egypt in 303 A.D. He died in 313.
See 138/16. as, as being: comp. 122/180, 131/103, 139/15, 141/49,
142/57, 145/105, 108.
2. hehest i rome:
comp. 140/32.
3. þurh: the
usual prep. is bi, as ‘ðe ferden al bi fendes red,’ GE 2921: ‘be
his witena ræde,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 106/591. hwiles: hwile BT,
which is grammatically correct; but comp. ‘umbehwiles,’ l. 5 (where BT
have again hwile); ‘sumehwiles,’ AR 272/28; ‘oðer hwiles,’ HM 33/31.
4. refschipe:
comp. 143/71.
5. comen: subject
hi, contained in preceding ‘him’: see 6/18. Similarly
warð, l. 10.
527
7. walde: for
omission of gan, see 2/2.
9. of him siker,
secure so far as he was concerned, fearing no danger from him. of his
cume: comp. 94/24.
10. lei into,
appertained to, was subject to; comp. 143/72: a charter expression: B-T
quotes ‘ælc ðara landa ðe on mines fæder dæge læg into Cristes cyrcean,’
Kemble, iv. 232/8: in modern dialect it means, to border on.
11. wedwulf:
‘repentina rabie incitatus’: comp. ‘þe þurs Maxence, | þe wed wulf, þe
heaðene hund,’ SK 1858.
14. Oleast, at
last, as a final resort: the prefix is on: comp. ‘a last,’ Castel
off Loue, 457, AR 18/15.
15. tintreo:
comp. 144/98, 145/119. tintreohen B, tintrohen T. The first form which
occurs five times in R corresponds to OE. tintrego, pl. of
tintreg: the others to tintregan, pl. of
tintrega.
16. okine
seotle: comp. ‘set in kineseotle,’ SK 722.
18. iþe tun
does not mean ‘in the town,’ Morton, but, in the court, the enclosure in
which the temple was built. The Latin is ‘ad templum deorum suorum.’
20. bi his
euene, according to his ability, means: ‘iuxta possibilitatem suam’;
comp. ‘efter hire efne,’ AR 126/31; ‘mys motinde men alle by here
euene,’ Böddeker, AE. Dicht. 110/38. OWScand. efni: Einenkel points out
that it has taken the place of OE. hæfen, as in ‘Be his agene
hæfene,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. i. 582/28. to wurgen:
wur`d´gede B.
21. mahte: so
B; mihte T.
22. Add full stop
after briddes.
23. ȝung of
ȝeres: comp. 139/23; ‘ȝung of ȝeres ase he was,’ AR 158/17;
‘ȝunglich of ȝeres,’ SK 545. twa wone of twenti: ‘duo de
viginti’: see 52/368 and comp. ‘Abraham on wane of an hundred told,’ GE
1028. feier ⁊ freolich: comp. 123/209, 138/22. o wlite
&c.: comp. ‘schan al of wlite ant of wastum,’ SM 2/34: similarly, ‘O
schene nebschaft | ⁊ schape se swiðe semlich,’ SK 1446.
24. steðeluest
goes closely with ‘of treowe bileaue’; not ‘steadfast within, of true
faith,’ Morton: comp. ‘stalewarde ⁊ kene ine treowe bileaue,’ AR 272/6.
OE. staþol-fæst usually takes on, like ‘a þanke
unstedefeste,’ 44/241. ‘speciosa valde, sed quod pluris est religiosa
fide.’
25. icuret
clergesse, a choice female scholar: comp. ‘Sum is clergesse, ⁊ sum
nis nout,’ AR 6/12.
26. of, from:
comp. ‘Þah ich beo in alle | of se earliche ilearet,’ SK 858.
27. wisliche:
see 18/16.
28. herd: OE.
heord, flock: not ‘custodia,’ Einenkel, which is OE.
528
heorde. It does not fit the context, and eard B points to an
original erde, dwelling-place, ancestral home. Morton took herd to mean
hearth, hall. com of &c.: com hire of burde B, com hire of
burðe T, came to her by birth: Victor quotes ‘⁊ tat com þe of burðe,’
OEH i. 273/27.
30. telleð wel
to: see 124/264.
32. kepte . . .
of: like ‘let of,’ 44/260; ‘tellen of,’ 164/256; ‘Hold it of wel
litel pris,’ Floriz, 350: ‘nichil cum mundo habere commune
decreverat.’
34. in,
upon.
35. lasteles
lates, blameless gestures, bearing.
36. lihte
plohen apparently answers to ‘puellares iocos,’ and Morton’s
‘trifling amusements’ seems preferable to ‘frivolous plays,’ Einenkel.
luue—songes: sotte songes Nalde he nane ronnes BT.
37. leornin
refers to ‘songes,’ lustnin to ‘runes,’ talk; see 102/159.
39. to leaf ⁊ to
lare, to belief and to learning: comp. ‘ꝥ tu were iset ȝung | to
leaf ⁊ to lare,’ SK 384. underueng: undernom B,
undernam T.
41.
underneomen, ‘entrap,’ Morton, a translation which suits also ‘me
to underneomene,’ SK 652, but is hard to parallel elsewhere, the usual
senses being to receive (in one’s mind), to reprehend. Perhaps the
writer had in mind OF. susprendre, to catch in one’s words; ‘ut eum
caperent in verbo,’ S. Mark xii. 13. The Latin has attemptassent.
42. wrenchen . . .
ut of þe weie: a phrase characteristic of this group: Einenkel
quotes ‘mahen wrenchen sum rihtwis of þe weie,’ SJ 43/5; ‘tu ne maht
. . . me . . . wrenchen ut of þe weie,’ SM 4/25.
crefti crokes, crafty devices; a figurative use of croke, hook:
comp. 131/87, 148/141; SJ 35/5; ‘Mast he cuth o crafte and crok,’ CM
700, 740.
43.
ȝeincleppes, blows in return, counter strokes; apparently only
here: ȝeincleappes B, ȝainclappes T.
45. crauant,
vanquished: comp. ‘he is crauant ꝥ me wende to ouercumen,’ SM 11/19.
cweðen . . . up, yield, resign: comp. ‘al ich forsake
her | ⁊ cweðe ham al sker up,’ SK 866: possibly an imitation of L.
abdicare.
47. burde
boldes: burðe boldes T: it corresponds to ‘in palatio patris,’ and may
mean, ancestral mansion; it occurs only here: at l. 439 is ‘buriboldes,’
= palatium. murhðe: murð T, nurð B, which is doubtless correct:
see 118/22.
48. towart, in
the direction of.
49. Comp. ‘gleowinde
of euch gleo,’ SK 1667; ‘ꝥ euch mon ah to hersumin | ⁊ herien in eorðe,’
id. 352; 131/84.
51. were is
subjunctive in a dependent question: contrast with ‘wes’ in preceding
line. sone so, as soon as: comp. 94/18: ‘Þe child him
529
answerde | Sone so he hit herde,’ KH 199, where MS. L has the
alternative ‘so sone.’
52. of: comp.
‘þat he of þe holy gost · so vre heorte a-tende,’ OEM 52/548, but ‘wið’
is usual, as at 70/168. wod—walde: similar expressions are
frequent in this group: comp. 130/81; 146/121; ‘þet wod he walde
iwurðen,’ SJ 66/7; ‘for neh wod he walde iwurðen,’ SM 7/34.
53. hwuch as,
those whom: less common than the equivalent ‘hwich þat.’ For a similar
use of as, comp. 72/192.
54. ȝeinde ⁊
ȝurinde: comp. ‘⁊ he to rarin reowliche · to ȝuren ant to ȝein,’ SJ
49/4; ‘þe heaðene hundes ȝellen | ⁊ ȝeien ⁊ ȝuren on euch half,’ SK
2013. wið rewfule remes: comp. 141/39.
57. hire: heo
BT; both are necessary and in besides: read, þen heo in hire
heorte iwundet inwið: comp. 139/28; ‘Nes þis meiden nawiht | herfore
imenget | in hire mod inwið,’ SK 607; ‘Constu bulden a burh | inwið i
þin heorte,’ id. 1642. Einenkel reads heo and says that ‘heorte’ is
instrumental.
58. wraðe: the
usual meaning, angry, is unsuitable: the word is connected with OE.
wrīþan, to twist, OHG. reid, ‘curled’, and crooked, perverse,
would give a good sense here and in such places as ‘iboren owraðe time,’
SJ 57/3; ‘to wraðer heale,’ 141/64.
60. þah: so all
three MSS. Einenkel reads þa, and translates, ‘as she was alone (to
strive) against’; rather, when she singly should be against, &c. If
any alteration is to be made, ꝥ for þat would be preferable, but þah,
even if, as in ‘ꝥ we ne cunnen | ⁊ tah we cuðen, | ne nullen ne ne
duren,’ SK 1322, gives a quite sufficient sense.
61. hef,
lifted: comp. ‘tu schuldest þin herte heouen þiderward as tin heritage
is,’ HM 25/34; AR 86/5.
62. hap, good
fortune, success. wisliche, truly.
63. wepnede:
‘sumentes scutum fidei,’ Eph. vi. 16; ‘induti loricam fidei,’ 1 Thess.
v. 8.
65. rode taken:
see 17/145.
66. itend of
lei: comp. 130/52; ‘al þe cwarterne, of his cume | leitede o leie,’
SK 671; but, ‘leitinde al on leie,’ id. 1651; ‘þe halwende lei | of þe
hali gast,’ id. 1401. bimong: see 66/97
note.
67. deoulen,
dat. pl., deouele BT, dat. sing. to lake, for a
sacrifice.
69. ludere
stefne, dat., as in ‘þa cleopode he hludre stefne,’ BH
181/18; but ‘⁊ ȝeide lude steuene,’ SK 2033; ‘ȝeiden lude stefne,’ SJ
64/12.
71. ȝeld,
tribute, resumed in ‘hit,’ l. 72.
72. driueð:
comp. 60/11.
73. ⁊ al walt:
omit al and ⁊ after wisdom, with BT.
530
75. he him ane,
he and only he: see 123/200 note.
76.
þah—þolie, though he be long-suffering; ‘longanimiter
ferens,’ Heb. vi. 15.
78. halde,
keep: comp. ‘haldeð his heastes,’ SK 1788; ‘heaste halden,’ HM 5/28.
80. wið is
adverbial and repeats ‘þurh’: see 62/24
note, and add, ‘vor vuel ꝥ ter kumeð of hit,’ AR 52/2; ‘þu ꝥ dest
eni þing hwarof þer mon is fleschliche ivonded of þe,’ id. 58/22. The
repetition of conjunctions is also found as in, ‘nis he fol chepmon þet,
hwon he wule buggen hors oðer oxe, ȝif he nule biholden bute þet heaued
one?’ AR 208/6; of pronouns, as ‘ꝥ þe muð ne mei uor scheome, þe liht
eie spekeð hit,’ id. 60/6. B omits wið. þen = þen ꝥ.
81. schad: see
122/176. wit ⁊ . . . wisdom: see 22/142. wurðen &c.:
see 130/52.
82. forð: se
uorð B, se forð T: se being wanting in this text, the following ꝥ
must mean, so that.
83. unwitlese:
so B unwitelese, but T witlese, senseless, the meaning required.
wuneð in: the idea that idols are inhabited by demons is as old
as Porphyry: it is frequently expressed in the legends: comp. 145/118;
SJ 22/14; CM 2303; SK 553; ‘praecipio tibi, daemon, qui in eo [ydolo]
latitas, ut simulacrum istud comminuas,’ Legenda Aurea, ed. Graesse,
39/2; ‘In hoc ydolo quidam daemon habitabat,’ id. 540/30.
84. hereð
&c.: see 130/49.
87. fint:
‘malorum omnium inventor diabolus.’ crokinde creftes, comp.
129/42: not ‘crooked crafts,’ but either, perverting devices, or more
probably, devices by which he hooks his victims; the idea of both words
being pursued in ‘keccheð’ and ‘creftluker’: for the termination of the
latter, see 125/270.
88. cang: see
58/82.
89. ꝥ he makeð,
by his making.
92. sunne
&c.: the Latin has only ‘elementis mundi’; perhaps the author had in
mind, ‘Nam solis lunaeque simulacra humanum in modum formant, item ignis
et terrae et maris: quae illi Vulcanum, Vestam, Neptunum vocant,’
Lactantius, de Origine Erroris, ch. vi (ed. Spark, 143/5).
95. bute ꝥ ow
þuncheð, but by your thinking, lit. but that it seems to you; the
explanation of ‘þing.’ schulen: so B, but T has correctly
sehen.
97. B reads, ant of
nawt ant i.
98. of: comp.
83/5.
99. ha ꝥ
walden, must mean, they desired that. But BT have correctly he ꝥ
walde.
531
100. þurh
cunde, by reason of their nature.
101. makeð
&c.: see 126/325. in eche, eternal: T omits in, but the
phrase occurs again 149/182, SJ 79/14.
103. as in sum
time, as conditioned by time: comp. 128/1. BT have ham for as.
104. ꝥ . . .
in, in which. ne does not negative the clause: it continues
and emphasizes the negatives of the principal sentence: see the
quotations in note on 25/241.
Style: ... unique in
O.H.G.
O. H. G.
while Steinmeyer (MSD ii. 162)
MSD.
47. ... ‘in palatio patris,’
close quote invisible
Manuscript: Cotton Nero A 14, British Museum. See
p. 355.
Editions: Morris, R., OEH i. 191-9 (with
translation), and Specimens, 129-32 (part only); Zupitza-Schipper, AE.
Lesebuch, ed. viii. 106-10.
Literature: Kölbing, E., ES i. 169; Lauchert, F.,
ES xiii. 83; xvi. 124. Marufke, W., Der älteste englische Marienhymnus,
Leipzig, 1907; Vollhardt, W. (see p. 269/19).
Phonology: This section should be compared with
the account of MS. N of the Ancrene Wisse, pp. 363-5, the copy of which
is by the same scribe as the Orison.
Oral a is a, hauest 9, uare 119; a before nasals
is o, mon 74, nome 126, hwon 112, 119, but me 45; a before
lengthening groups is o, londe 16, ilong 96, but and 4: þeonne
118 is influenced by heonne. æ is regularly e, et 90, gled
54, hedde 144, nes 68, once ea, sead 30, and a in habbe 82
(4 times), hwat 106, was 88 (4). e is e, aleggen 133,
seggen 158; before lengthening groups, engles 27, schende 92, but
i in siggen 134, siggeð 72, 73: in seoruwe 60, 89, 120 eo
represents œ, i-umlaut of o. i is i.
o is o, uorst 38, hopie 110, note 88; before lengthening
groups, gold 34, nolde 143: þene 93, 127, 169 is LWS. þæne:
on without stress is a 9. u is u, kume 117,
unne 164; before lengthening groups, bunden 123, murnen 44. y is
u, agult 82, muchele 14 (7), sunne r. w. wiðinnen 92; before
lengthening groups, guldene 45, 52, welsprung 72 r. w. þing, but
chelle 45: king 57, kinestol 25 have the usual i. ā is
o, holie 126, loðe 93, one 21, but a adv. 129, a
art. 150; before two consonants, wost 145: nenne 131 represents
nǣnne. ǣ1 is divided between e (15),
clenenesse 163, er 66, techen 48; before two consonants, euer 54, lefdi
2 (5), neuer 30 (3), and ea (10) in cleane 42 (3), todealen 95,
deale 154, heale 6 (3), healen 124, leafdi 170: ilch 81 is OE.
ylc. ǣ2 is regularly e, uorbere 106,
greden 155, misdeden 156, were 105, but a in hwar 106. ē
is e, greten 152, swete 17, but eo in steoren 45,
532
weopen 44 represents umlaut œ̄, and idreaued 58, 82, from
drœ̄fan, descends in form from drǣfan. ī is
i, arine 127, bliðe 116, hird 51, but u in hwule 12, 153,
swuðe 14 (6), wummon 23, wummen 19. ō is o: ū,
u: ȳ, u, kuðe 118 r. w. siðe, fulðe 94
r. w. dweoluhðe, luðere 123, luðernesse 107, schrude 139 r. w.
wide, ischrud 51.
ea before r + cons. is e, der 158, erme 64, ert
158, 160, herm 36, ȝeruh 132, but ȝeirkest 49. ea before l
+ cons. is a, al 4 &c., uallen 111, ualuwen 39, schalt 149:
the i-umlaut is seen in wille 46 (wiell). eo before
r + cons. is eo, eorðe 159 r. w. wurðe, ueor 94,
ȝeorne 80, 103, heorte 4 (5); to the wur group belong wurðie 7,
wurðeð 21, wurð 122, wurschipe 13: beornen 104, wurðe 138, 160 are
without umlaut. eo before l + cons. is u in suluen
64, 66, 100. The u- and å-umlaut of a is wanting in
kare 120, iðauien 142; it may possibly account for e in were 71,
comp. helwearum VP 29/4, Sodomwearena VH 7/62. eo,
u-umlaut of e is eo, dweolðe 148, dweoluhðe 93,
heouene 77 (3), heoueriche 24, 150. eo, å-umlaut of
e is eo, ueole 9. eo, å-umlaut of i
is o, hore 22, 42. ea after palatals is a, schal
45, and e, ȝef 100. ie after ġ is i, ȝiue
162, ȝif 102, 126, ȝiuest 34 (3), uorȝiuenesse 110, 132, but e in
forȝelden 135. EWS. gief is ȝif 42, 84. eo after sć
is u, schulen 41, 43; ie after sć, i,
ischild 120. eom is am 112, 113, ham 98; heom, ham 56.
ēa is ea, deað 36, leasung 75, read 53, but e in
ek 87, ec 159, edmodnesse 79, isched 88; its i-umlaut is
e, aulem 94, alesed 15, ȝeme 163, ȝemeð 42, ȝeme 121, ihere 84,
but dreameð 27, without umlaut. ēo is regularly eo, beon
113 &c., biseon 134, deoflene 15, leoue 2 (10), but looue 100, 170,
apparently for lōue; the i-umlaut is e, onsene 27.
ēo after g is eo, ȝeomer 40: gīet is ȝet
109.
a + g is aw, drawe 128, 141. æ + g
is ei, dei 50, feier 137, mei 31, but daie 8, dai 166, fawe 142
(fagen). e + g is also ei, awei 94, pleie
62, reine 58 r. w. kwene. i + g final is i,
holi 70, i 97, 106, moniuold 61, murie 27. i + ht is
iht, wiht 31, 47. u + g is uw, muwen 65.
ā + g gives ow, owen 13, owune 112; ā +
h, ouh 7. ō + h is ouh, auouh 119, brouhte
86, inouh 62. ū + g is uw, buwe 3. ie,
i-umlaut of ea, + ht is iht, miht 133, nihte
8. eo + ht is also iht, briht 19, uihte 60; the
i-umlaut is seen in bisihð 81. ēa + g gives
ei, beie 3, beien 18. ēo + ht is iht, liht
5, lihtliche 133, 135. ēa + h is seen in þauh 82, 105.
ā + w, bloweð 37, soule 5, snou 38, but iseie (?
gesǣge). ēo + w, kneon 3, kneouwunge 136, reoweð
101, þeoudome 98.
Swā is so 53. For e, u is written in owune 112;
for o, e in heouene 77, sumer 39: e is added in
clenenesse 163, heuede 108, heuedest 107, neuere 143, but neure 111;
e is lost in hird 51; the suffix ing is ung in
gretunge
533
135. on is weakened to a 9. u is added in dweoluhðe 93,
muruhðe 61, seoruwe 60 (3), þuruh 122 (3); comp. ‘seluðe,’ AR 354/4.
Metathesis of r is seen in spert 140; rr is simplified
in der 158; ll in wil 62; mm in ȝimstones 55. n is
lost in i 50, o 96, 114 and medially in heoueriche 24, 150. bb is
simplified in sib 60. f is generally preserved in combination
with other consonants, deoflene 15, efter 76, lefdi 2; before u,
ful 35, fulðe 94; finally, ȝif 126, lif 6; initially after a word ending
in a voiceless sound, fawe 142, feier 137, fif 102, forboren 109,
forȝelden 135. Otherwise it is u, v, uorst 38, aulem 94,
auouh 119, iureden 38; exceptions are hefedest 143 and the contract
hedde 144. t is added by inadvertence in þuruhtut 70; tt
is simplified in biset 55: þ is omitted in wurschipe 13, wurchipe
130. After þet, þu becomes tu 72, 84, 91, but vort þu 64, þet þe 73, 74,
bit þe 132, et ðe 90. ts is represented by c in milce
79 (3): bletsung is blescinge 162. ss is simplified in
blisful 19. Initial sć is sch, gledschipe 14, schende 92,
but wurðscipe 141, wurchipe 130; medially it is ssc, englissce
167, ssch, wassche 139. c [k] is k before e, i, u,
ȝeirkest 49, sike 97, kinescrud 34, kunne 9, c before o, com 36,
icoren 67, in other positions it is indiscriminately c or
k, Cristes 1, krune 55, kneon 3, licame 163, kare 120, woc 40, ek
87, ec 159. č is ch, eche 35, techen 48, stenches 44;
čč is cch, drecche 148, wrecche 130, but arechen 47:
cw is kw, kwene 57, but once queadschipe 42: cg is
gg, aleggen 133, seggen 158. Palatal g is written
ȝ, ȝef 100, forȝelden 135, ȝimstones 55: the prefix ge- is
preserved as i, ilong 96. The stop g is doubled in singges
8. For h, ch is written in ðurchut 142; h is added
in ham 98, dweoluhðe 93, ȝeruh 132 (as at AR 394/12), lost in is 126,
licame 163, arine 127 (ahrīnan), lefdi 2, ringes 34, but
hw is kept in hwar 106.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. sune 57 represents
sunu, gome 62 has lost final n. Gen. -es, deaðes 120, kunnes 92, but heoueriche 150 is not
inflected: dat. -e, daie 8, deaðe
90, reine 58, siðe 101, wille 46; no exceptions. In the a.
schrifte 152 has added e. The pl. n. a. of masculines ends
in -es, engles 27, beies 34, but were 21:
neuters are þing 71, kneon 3. Genitives are kunne 9, meidene 21, þinge
76; weak forms are deoflene 15, englene 16 (4); there are no datives.
The fem. nouns of the strong declension have -e in the s. n. a., kwene 57, ore 73,
sorinesse 36, bene 84, except sib 60, help 116 (often m. in OE.).
Gen. -e, helle 44, 104, soule 5:
dat. -e, blisse 16 (5), fulðe 94,
honde 15, mihte 7. Pl. dat. are honden 32, misdeden 156, wunden
102; a. heorte 18, wunden 124. Nouns of the weak declension have
-e in all cases of the singular, except
lefdi 2 (6): plurals are n. blostmen 37, d. wrecchen 63,
uote 155. The minor declensions are represented by mon
534
s. n. 74, wummon 23, men pl. n. 13, ureondmen 166,
wepmen pl. a. 20, wummen 19; nihte s. d. 8, 59, niht
s. a. 50; moder s. n. 1, 67; ureondes pl.
a. 33.
Adjectives which in OE. end in a vowel have -e throughout, eche 35, 39, 62, 120, swete 17. Of the
weak declension are s. n. leoue 2 (5), looue 100, 170,
d. erme 64, fule 94, heie 66, 165, holie 126, leoue 125,
a. englissce 167, leoue 26, 76, loðe 93. Strong inflections are
s. d. m. guldene 45, s. d. f. hwite
51, s. a. m. fulle 65, s. a. f. fulle
110, gode 121: iliche 23, 68 is gelīca. The plurals of all
adjectives end in -e, holie 71, hwite 37,
luðere 123, reade 37; exceptions are gled 54, sead 30, hwit, read 53;
gold-ring 34 is an OE. combination. mycel is s. n.
muchel 79, s. d. muchele m. 14, f. 89, 140,
neut. 49. āgen gives owune 112. ān occurs once as a
150; āna is one s. d. m. 125, f. 21:
nān is s. n. no 23 (9), non 24, 39 (pronominal), 47
(before heorte), 40, s. g. neut. none 92, a. m.
nenne 131. Adjectives used as nouns are god s. a. neut. 49,
muchel 151: superlatives are best 129, leouest 76.
The personal pronouns are ich, i 97, 106, me, we, us, þu, tu 72 (4),
after þet, þe. The pronoun of the third person is s. n. hit
neut. 63, a. 11; pl. n. heo 30 &c., d.
ham 29, a. 15. Reflexives are mi suluen 100, ðe suluen 64, 66:
possessives, s. n. mi 6 &c., min 6, 96, 158
(pronominal), g. mire f. 5, mine 5, 157, mines
neut. 2, d. mine m. 117, mire f. 75, mine 7,
107, mine neut. 126, a. mine m. 152, f. 135,
mi neut. 133, min 4; pl. mine n. 166, d.
156, a. 3: s. n. þi 25 (3), þin 24 (7) before vowel
or h, 157 (predicative), d. ðine m. 26 (4), ðire f.
149 (5), þine 18 (8), þin 27, ðine neut. 89, a. þine
m. 116, f. 31 (3), þi neut. 30; pl. þine
d. 32, 155, a. 33: is 126: ure 18, 86: hore 22, 42. The
definite article is s. n. þe 53 &c., g. þes 100
(pronominal), d. ðe m. 90, þere f. 85, 88,
a. þene m. 93, 127, 169; pl. g. þer 24 (for þere).
The compound demonstrative is s. n. þes m. 78,
d. þisse neut. 64, 119, a. ðesne m. 167,
170. The relative is þet 23 &c., once þe 41; ðet 12, during which;
interrogative is hwat 106; indefinites are me 45; ilch
s. d. m. 81; sume s. d. m. 101; ueole
pl. g. 9; s. n. al 5, g. alle neut. 93,
d. m. 42, f. 7, a. al m. 100,
neut. 48 &c.; pl. n. alle 13 (6), g. alre 76,
a. alle 19.
The infinitives of the second weak conjugation end in -ien, iðauien 142, karien 43, luuien 17, except ualuwen
39; others, 32 in number, end in -en, but
without n are deale 154, singge 8, þonkie 12, wurðie 7, iseo 165: to
biseonne 137, to iseonne 30 are dat. infinitives. Presents are
s. 1. beie 3, hopie 110, liuie 12, offrie 4, þonkie 11, wene 111,
wurðie 146; 2. ȝiuest 34, ȝeirkest 49; 3. hateð 145, likeð 29, wurðeð
144, contracted bisihð 81, bit 80, 132, let 56, spert 140, wurð 68, 122;
pl. 3. bloweð 37, wurðeð 21: subjunctive s. 1. habbe 116,
156, iðeo 121, 130; 2. bringe 169, ȝiue 162, kume 117, kuðe 118, makie
91, schrude, wassche 139, werie, wite 147; 3. arine
535
127, derie 148, drawe 128, drecche 148, habbe 82, ihere 84, schende 92,
to-drawe 141,
unne 164; pl. 1. kumen 66: imperative s. 2. auouh 119,
aulem 94, ȝeme 163, haue 159, ȝif 102, 126, ischild 120, iþench 100, nim
121, þole 127. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 1. ȝef 100; 2. iseie
105: I b. 3. com 36; subj. s. 2. uorbere 106: I c. s.
3. funde 170 (weak form): IV. s. 1. uorsoc 99; 2. stode 90.
Participles past: I b. forboren 109, iboren 23, 68, ibroken 151, ikumen
112, inumen 107: I c. bunden 123, iholpen 9, isungen 167: III. icoren
67, uorloren 74, 108: V. isched 88. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 1.
heuede 108, wreðede 101; 2. heuedest 107, 143: subjunctive s. 3.
brouhte 86, hedde 144. Participles present: liuiinde 40 adj.;
past: agult 82, alesed 15, biset 55, ibrouht 10, 98, idreaued 58, 82,
ischrud 51, isend 16. Minor Groups: wot 1 pr. s. 103, wost 2
pr. s. 145; ouh 1 pr. s. 7, owen 1 pr. pl. 18, owe
we 17, owen pr. pl. 13; kunne 1 pr. s. subj. 134; der 1
pr. s. 158; schal 1 pr. s. 104, schalt 2 pr. s.
149, schal pr. s. 45, 95, schulen pr. pl. 41, 43; miht 2
pr. s. 133, mei pr. s. 31, 74, muwen 1 pr. pl. 65;
mote 1 pr. s. subj. 165; beon inf. 74, 113, to beonne
dat. inf. 29, 138, am 1 pr. s. 112, 113, ham 98, ert 2
pr. s. 5, 158, 160, is pr. s. 25, nis 23 (4), beoð pr.
pl. 52, beo 1 pr. s. subj. 23, 116, pr. s. subj. 122,
129, 138, pr. pl. subj. 166, was 1 pt. s. 106, pt.
s. 88, nes 68, were 2 pt. s. subj. 105; wulle 1 pr. s.
12 (3), wule 113, wult 2 pr. s. 121, 133, 142, wule pr. s.
142; don inf. 13, do 152, dest 2 pr. s. 149, doð pr.
pl. 41, 56, dude 1 pt. s. 106.
Noteworthy are the adverb þereuore 63, 83, an early example of the
meaning, that being so, and the prepositions anunder 32, OE.
anunder (Morsbachs Studien, l. 171), ine 104 (4), onuppe 25
(comp. ‘anuppon’ 77/46).
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are laste 69, lasten
123, lune 126, wonteð 73, possibly trust 125. French are cherite 161,
ciclatune 51, krune 52, ikruned 52, lai 167, paradise 10, 49, 108,
seruise 50, seinte 17, seynte 1, trone 22. Latin are cherubine 25, lilie
53, munuch 169, rose 53, seraphine 26, all OE. borrowings, except the
last. The inflectional -e of cherubine,
seraphine appears to be quite isolated.
Dialect: The Orison in its present form agrees
substantially with the copy of the Ancren Riwle in the same manuscript;
both are in the dialect of the scribe, that of the Middle South. But the
Midland i for y, ȳ is attested by the spoilt rhymes þing :
welsprung 71; wiþinnen : sunne 91; kuðe : siðe 118; schrude : wide 139,
which also point to an original filðe : dwilðe 94 (the forms dweoleð,
dweoluhðe, dweolðe are found only in this manuscript), and chille :
wille 45. There is nothing else in the rhymes to help to a nearer
localization of the author: it can only be said that his dialect was
Midland.
536
Metre: This is in dispute. Schipper sees in it a
mixture of septenaries, alexandrines, and alliterative verse. He regards
l. 28, pléieð and swéieð and síngeð bitwéonen as the only indubitable
example of the last, but first half-lines have two accents only in, to
þé ich búwe 2; and þónkie wúlle 12; ne wéopen ne múrnen 44, 72, 77, and
second half-lines in, þi uéir to iséonne 30; mid gúldene chélle 45; mid
énglene wílle 46, 52, 70. The alexandrine is a French verse of six
stresses equally divided into two half-verses by a caesura; the ending
of each half-line may be masculine or feminine; each half-line may also
take a prelude. The scheme of the verse is accordingly
(x)x́xx́xx́ (x) || (x)x́xx́xx́(x). Such is held to be the rhythm of
nís no | wúmmon i|bóren || þét ðe | béo i|líche 23; þíne | blísse ne |
méi || nó wiht
| únder|stónden 31, where the stress on ‘þet’
and ‘no’ is forced. It is found necessary to employ all the licences of
English prosody in scanning this foreign metre, which moreover in its
native form is never mixed with other metres, and rhymes, not in
couplets, but only in ‘laisses’ or fours. Scanned as septenaries are,
biuór|en ðín|e léo|ue súne || wiðín|nen sér|aphíne 26; þú ham | ȝíuest |
kíne | scrúd || beíes | and góld|ringes 34. But a line like
vor heo neúer ne beoð séad . þi
ueír to iséonne 30 may be
scanned as an alliterative long line as marked, or as a septenary, vór
heo | néuer | né beoð | séad || þi uéir | tó i|séonne, or as an
alexandrine, vor heo neú|erne béoð | séad || þi uéir | tó
i|séonne. On the other hand, Kaluza refuses to admit such an admixture
of metres: he regards the poem as written throughout in septenaries. So
the first line is to be scanned, Crístes | mílde | mód|èr || séynte |
Már|íè. The unstressed syllable in a foot is often wanting; sometimes
all the syllables of a word are stressed, as in the first half of l. 55,
Mid bríht|e ȝím | stòn|ès. It is very artificial and unconvincing.
The matter is complicated by the fact that the Orison is only a copy,
probably a copy of a copy, perhaps one of a succession of copies. A
scribe dealing with an older text was generally little concerned about
the form and much about the matter and the transcription of its language
into his own dialect and idiom. That the text of the Orison has suffered
from this preoccupation is evident from the rhymes; it is fairly certain
that the author wrote lefdie 2, 11, 17, 170, sorinisse 36,
mildheortnisse 78, 149, 164, edmodnisse 79, luðernisse 107, rene 58,
leste 69, leasinge 75, gretinge 85, þas 100, seggen 134, and it may be
inferred that alterations, including substitution of words, have been
made within the verse. But even taking this into account, it is very
doubtful whether the poet meant to write syllabic verse at all. Rather
his metre exhibits the alliterative long line in the last stage of its
dissolution, in which systematic rhyme has largely displaced the older
and once essential elements of the verse. If rhythms occur, which
537
can with some violence be forced into the moulds of purely syllabic
verse, they are not of the author’s express purpose; precisely the same
phenomenon is seen in Layamon (464/5). Moreover the alliterative element
is considerable; the poet starts with two perfect lines, and ll. 60, 94,
101, 115, 153, 157, 171 have each three alliterating words; l. 3 is up
to the Layamonic norm, and there are twenty-seven others equally good.
But the development of the verse towards rhyme is complete and no
longer, as in Layamon, occasional and for the most part imperfect
(464/16).
Introduction: The author speaks of himself as a
monk and of his composition as an English lay, as though it were an
original production. He shows acquaintance with the earlier English
literature, his manner is English, and the French element in his
vocabulary is remarkably small. The highly conventional character of his
language makes it difficult to speak with any confidence of his reading,
but he would find much of it in his service books, and he was probably
acquainted with Adgar’s Mary Legends and the long series of Orationes ad
Sanctam Mariam Virginem with the Psalterium S. Virginis of S. Anselm
(ed. Gerberon, pp. 276-87, 303-8), the enthusiastic promoter of the cult
of the Virgin Mary in England. For the same reason it is impossible to
give much weight to the series of parallels from the writings of S.
Edmund of Pontigny (Edmund Rich, Archbishop of Canterbury, 1234-40), by
which Marufke has sought to prove his authorship of the Orison.
In ureisun of the title, both pretonic and tonic u are
characteristic of early Anglo-French: ei is historic spelling,
and at this time alternates in AF. with phonetic e.
1. Comp. 134/67; ‘O
mater alma Christi charissima,’ York Brev. ii. 182; ‘virgo singularis:
inter omnes mitis,’ id. ii. 477; ‘La duce mere al Salueur,’ Adgar
131/39.
2. mi leoue
lefdi: comp. ll. 11, 17, 63, 115, 170; ‘ma douce dame,’ Wright,
Lyric Poetry, 55/1.
3. buwe . . .
beie: see 143/84.
6. Comp. 134/96,
136/153; ‘te spem meam singularem, te salutem computo,’ Guibert of
Nogent, De Laude S. Mariae, 6; ‘Vita, dulcedo et spes nostra, salve!’ l.
2 of Salve Regina; ‘Ki est salu, ueire esperance | A tuz Crestiens, sanz
dutance,’ Adgar 107/845; ‘Þu art hele and lif and liht,’ OEM
160/11. mid iwisse: see 32/40.
8. bi daie
&c.: comp. 133/50.
9. aueole kunne
wise, lit. in fashion of many kinds, i.e. in very many ways: comp. 62/30, 114/64,
151/20; ‘a vele kunne wise,’ OEM 39/53, 44/241; ‘Aþre cunne wise,’ id.
38/33; L 1717. OE. fela, much, many, is an
538
indeclinable noun followed by a genitive case, and this construction is
occasionally found in EME., as at 27/300, 34/70 (76/19 is ambiguous),
but generally in ME. fele, many, is pl. adj. or pronoun of all cases, as
nom. 15/83, 16/115, 18/2; gen. 85/105; acc. 30/9.
For the expression with wise, comp. ‘on ælches cunnes wise,’ L
8072; ‘on aiȝes cunnes wisen,’ id. 25778; ‘an almes monnes
wisen,’ id. 19641: the genitive is, of course, equivalent to an
adjective, as in ‘a seolcuðe wisen,’ id. 27835; ‘on moni are
wisen,’ id. 555.
11. hit: see
115/120.
13. Comp. ‘Ceste
Dame deit hoem loer | E mult seruir e honurer, | Ki rent as soens si bon
luier, | Ke cors e alme lur uelt saluer,’ Adgar 225/65.
15. of: see
52/394.
19. Comp. ‘Marie, ki
fu si bele, | Vnke si bele ne uit pucele,’ Adgar, 22/75; ‘gaude
gloriosa: super omnes speciosa,’ York Brev. ii. 493.
21. were
Björkman (Archiv cxxii. 398) takes as a scribe’s mistake for wered;
comp. ‘He gesceop tyn engla werod,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. i. 10/12. But
comparing 134/71, it is more probable that it represents OE.
wara, waru, as in Lundenwaru, in an extended sense of,
host, company: possibly influenced in form by OWScand. -veri, -verjar.
22. blostme:
comp. ‘Leuedi, flour of alle þing,’ OEM 195/28.
23. Comp. 134/68;
‘nis non maiden under sunne | þe mei beo þin eueni[n]g,’ OEH ii. 256/43:
‘Sancta maria, non est tibi similis orta in mundo in mulieribus,’ York
Brev. ii. 491.
25. Comp. 124/243;
‘Exaltata est sancta dei genetrix: Super choros angelorum ad celestia
regna,’ York Brev. ii. 477; ‘atque in regni solio sublimata post
Christum gloriosa resedit,’ id. ii. 492; ‘Tibi thronus regius ab angelis
collocatur in aula aeterni regis,’ Sermon of Fulbert of Chartres, in S.
Augustini Opera V2, 246.
26. wid
innen, surrounded by.
28. sweieð,
make melody. bitweonen: see 148/6.
29. Comp. ‘Kar li
angele funt nuit e ior | Son plaisir, par grant amur,’ Adgar
165/287.
30. See 124/239.
sead . . . to iseonne: see 76/17. For ueir as a noun,
beauty, comp. 139/27; ‘þe mone ⁊ þe sunne wundrieð of faire · swo fair
is ure louerd ihesu crist,’ OEH ii. 19/29.
32. Comp. ‘Tuit est
en sa main atachie | Li ciels e li munz ensement,’ Adgar 165/282.
33. riche:
see 19/34.
34. Suggested by
such places as, ‘Tulitque annulum de manu sua, et dedit eum in manu
eius: vestivitque eum stola byssina, et collo torquem
539
auream circumposuit,’ Gen. xli. 42; Esther vi. 8. beies, crowns;
comp. 133/55 note, or less probably, collars, armlets; comp.
202/194.
35. Comp.
50/360.
36-40, 59-62. These
passages describing the joys of Paradise have many analogues in the
earlier literature. Kölbing, ES i. 169, thought they were borrowed
directly from the OE. Phoenix: he compares with l. 38, ‘Ne mæg þær ren
ne snaw, | ne forstes fnæst . . . | wihte gewyrdan,’ Ph. 14,
15, 19; with l. 37, ‘is þæt æþele lond | blostmum geblowen,’ Ph. 20;
with l. 39, ‘Wintres ⁊ sumeres wudu bið gelice | bledum gehongen,’ Ph.
37, 38; with l. 36, ‘Nis þær on þam londe laðgeniðla | . . .
ne se enga deað,’ Ph. 50, 52, and he might have added, ‘ne feallað þær
on foldan fealwe blostman,’ Ph. 74. For similar descriptions comp. Grau,
G. (Morsbachs Studien, xxxi), p. 130; Pseudo-Cyprian, De Resurrectione
Mortuorum, ed. Hartel, iii. 316/193-268; De Die Iudicii (attributed to
Bede), 128-47; Christ, 1650-65; BH 65/16-22, but the parallels between
the text and the Phoenix are remarkable.
36. þer ðe,
where: comp. ‘ȝet doð þer þe heo beoð,’ OEH i. 9/9.
37. hwite ⁊
reade: lilies and roses; symbols of virgins and martyrs: comp. Be
Domes Dæge, 18/286-9.
39. ualuwen:
see 29/6.
43. swinken,
be distressed: comp. 134/97, and see 40/194
note.
44. stinken,
smell, perceive: comp. ‘wrieð hore fulðe so ꝥ heo hit ne muwen stinken,’
AR 86/17.
45. steoren
&c., cense with golden censer: probably suggested by Rev. viii. 3.
chelle: OE. cylle, vessel; only here in ME.
46. mid englene
wille, ‘with angels’ joy,’ Specimens; comparing OWScand. vili. But
this use of ME. wille for state of felicity is at least rare, and
besides something more concrete is needed to balance ‘mid guldene
chelle’; wille represents OE. wiell, wiella, fountain,
with allusion to the ‘fluvium aquae vitae’ of Rev. xxii. 1, and to such
places as ‘Haurietis aquas in gaudio de fontibus salvatoris,’ Isa. xii.
3; ‘torrente voluptatis tuae potabis eos,’ Ps. xxxv. 9. The sense then
would be, and pour out for them eternal life by means of the water of
Paradise. The writer uses englene vaguely for, of Heaven; comp.
ll. 16, 70.
47-50. An
application of 1 Cor. ii. 9 already in Adgar, ‘Certes, nul ne poet
escrire, | De cuer penser, de buche dire | Les biens de la Dame
uaillante, | Ki de tuz biens est puissante, | Ke as soens fait chascun
ior, | Vers cels, ke el’ ad puint d’amur,’ 224/7. See 46/285, 119/85.
With l. 50 comp. ‘Nostre Dame serui nuit e ior, | El soen seruise out
grant amur,’ Adgar 117/27.
540
51.
ciclatune, originally a fine silken stuff of Persian origin,
usually red. Almeria, in Spain, was the seat of a flourishing
manufacture of this stuff in the twelfth century. Comp. 140/37.
53. Comp. ‘eall
heora neb-wlite wæron swilce rose and lilie,’ Ælf., Lives i.
536/780.
55. Comp. ‘þær se
beorhta beag brogden wundrum | eorcnanstanum eadigra gehwam | hlifað
ofer heafde,’ Phoenix 602.
58. Comp. ‘Þær ne
hægl ne hrim hreosað to foldan | ne windig wolcen, ne þær wæter fealleþ
| lyfte gebysgad,’ Phoenix 60.
60. uihte,
variance: ‘gewindagas,’ days of strife, Phoenix 612. Comp. also, ‘sib
butan niþe,’ Christ 1660; 70/158 note.
61. teone ⁊
treie: see 24/208.
62. For
Gleobeames, harps, gleodreames is suggested in Specimens, with a
reference to Beowulf, 3021, ‘gamen ⁊ gleo-dream,’ sport and social joys.
inouh goes with gome. liues wil, joy of life.
63. long hit
þuncheð: comp. ‘ne biþ him wynne hyht, | þæt hy þis læne lif long
gewunien,’ Phoenix 480.
64. For vort,
see 72/179 note.
67. Swete:
comp. ‘Bidde we ure lauedi | swetest alre þinge,’ OEM 166/81.
icoren: comp. ‘Mildest quene ant best icorn,’ E. E. Lyrics,
ed. Chambers and Sidgwick, 90/41; ‘Of þe he makede his moder · vor he þe
hedde ycore,’ OEM 38/22, 88/37. The expression comes from the service
books, ‘praeelecta ut sol,’ York Missal ii. 20; ‘Ista est speciosa
electa a domino,’ York Brev. ii. 540.
69. Comp. ‘moder
unwemmed ⁊ maiden clene | swich in world non oþer nis,’ OEH ii. 255/3;
‘Virgene en l’emfantement, | Deuant e apres ensement,’ Adgar 225/53.
70. reste,
abode.
71. were: see
132/21.
72. liues
welsprung: apparently suggested by ‘quoniam apud te est fons vitae,’
Psalm xxxv. 10. In the York Breviary she is called ‘puteus aquarum
viventium,’ ii. 480.
74. Comp. ‘Ki fu
refuse u cumfus, | Ki unkes out fiance en uus?’ Adgar 107/825.
75. A word has
dropped out after soule. In Specimens, leome is supplied, in
Zupitza-Schipper, liht, as in l. 5.
79-81. Comp. ‘Duze
Dame tresimple e coie, | Plein de misericorde e de uertu, | E de grant
grace, mere Jhesu; | Mult tost mustrez uostre duzur | A checun dolent
pecheur. | Mult se poent en uus fier, | Ki uus uolent merci crier,’
Adgar 26/243, 38/17, 65/64.
541
80. of helpe . .
. missen, fail to obtain help: comp. ‘Þu hauest ymyst of fayrhede,’
ON 581, 825; ‘Hi wenden to wisse | of here lif to misse,’ KH 121
note.
81. to: see
124/249. milce ⁊ ore: comp. 135/102; ON 1083, 1404.
82. agult,
offended; a transitive use; the word is usually followed by to, wið,
toward, of the person; comp. ‘ne ne warien hwon me agulteð to ou,’ AR
186/2.
84. ȝif þi wille
is: a common tag: comp. 77/60; ‘ȝef hit were þin wille,’ L, MS. O
20815; ‘ȝef þi deore wil is,’ SJ 37/9; ‘mi swete leuedi, her mi bene | ⁊
reu of me, ȝif þi wille is,’ OEH ii. 255/7.
85. gretunge:
the first of the five joys of the Virgin; see OEM 87/1-8, as l. 87
refers to the greatest of her sorrows: comp. ‘Bidde we seinte Marie |
for hire milde mode. | For þe teres þat heo wep | for hire sone blode,’
OEM 190/93.
93. loðe:
comp. 46/283. kunnes: see 81/80. dweoluhðe: also at
136/148 in a similar context, for delusions, deceptions practised by the
devil: see AR 224/12, and comp. ‘et ideo prae ceteris | volo te precari,
| ne sinas me daemonis | dolo defraudari,’ Mone, Lat. Hymnen ii.
108/85.
94. fule
fulðe: comp. 29/33.
95. to
dealen: comp. Rom. vii. 39.
96. ilong,
dependent: comp. 135/114; ‘Þæt wæs swiþost on ðæm gelong þæt Hasterbal
swa late fleah,’ Orosius 198/26: ‘is seo bot gelong | eal æt þe anum,’
Christ 153: ‘On hire is al mi lif ilong,’ OEM 158/1; ‘ꝥ is long on
felefelde iuele lastes,’ OEH ii. 71/31: in mod. English, along of. See
also ‘bilong,’ 200/112.
97. wel
ilome: see 32/47.
98. þeoudome,
bondage: comp. ‘ic em in þine loue bende,’ OEH ii. 256/35.
101. sume
siðe, at one time, in former days: comp. ‘giet sume siþe,’ Christ
318, yet one day.
102. fif
wunden: comp. ‘Þat we moten to him cume · for his wundes fyue,’ OEM
57/696; ‘He make vs clene and bryhte | for his wundes fyue,’ id. 87/23;
Minot i. 91.
103. þet is
explained by the noun-clause, l. 104. wel ȝeorne and ‘ful
ȝeorne,’ l. 145, appear to mean, very accurately, very well. Mätzner
quotes in support, ‘Me awaiteð ou, þet wute ȝe ful ȝeorne, wiðuten,’ AR
174/15, which might be punctuated otherwise.
105.
stille, silent: comp. 36/112.
106. þauh,
and yet.
107. wreche
inumen, taken vengeance: different is the sentiment in
542
‘Sunful ich am an wrecche. | Awrec þe nu on me leuedi. | Er deþ me honne
fecche. | Do nim þe wreche ich am redi,’ OEM 162/42.
109. ȝet,
further, longer.
111. uallen
&c.: comp. 80/47.
112. hwon,
since, seeing that. hine, household servant: comp. ‘Eyez merci,
quar en mon vivant | Serroi vostre lige serjaunt,’ Lyric Poetry, ed.
Wright, 56/13; ‘E sa duce mere e chere | Pitusement fist sa preiere, |
K’il eussent de sun serf merci,’ Adgar 5/44; ‘Vne nuit, par auisiun, |
Vint la Dame a cel son barun,’ id. 56/7; ‘swete leuedi of me þu
reowe; ⁊ haue merci of þin knicht,’ OEH ii. 255/15; ‘ic crie
þe merci, ic am þi mon,’ id. 256/23.
115.
longeð: impersonal construction, with acc. of person: comp. ‘Loð
is me þis eorðliche lif . ⁊ me longeð to criste,’ OEH ii. 149/29.
117. Comp. ‘Bi-sih
to me lauedi briȝt. | Hwenne ich schal wende heonne,’ OEM 160/18; Anglia
i. 391/45; and elsewhere.
120. kare,
anxiety about; practically, fear: comp. 121/150.
123. þuruh,
tightly. bunden: see 81/67.
125. Comp. ‘Dame!
En uus sule ai ma fiance,’ Adgar 101/649; ‘Apres Deu ne ai autre refui,’
id. 106/818.
126. lune,
rest, occurs only here in ME.; for the word in modern dialects see EDD
s.v. lown, quiet, shelter, which is Northern and North Midland:
the solitary instance recorded for Hampshire is probably a stray. Dan.
luun; OWScand. logn: see Björkman, 250.
127. þet he me
arine: a clause instead of an infinitive; comp. 126/325; analogous
is 151/21.
129. so
&c., so that whatever happens may ever be the best for me: comp.
‘And he þat haueþ þis rym iwryten . beo hwat he beo | God in þisse lyue
. hyne lete wel iþeo,’ OEM 57/697.
132. to bote
ȝeruh, ready to make amends: comp. ‘sunbote,’ 80/58; ‘deadbote,’
119/75.
134. biseon to
me: see 124/249.
136. swinc . .
. sor: comp. 40/194.
140. spert:
comp. 89/44.
141. to
drawe: tear in pieces, destroy: comp. ‘ichot þe cherl is def, þe del
hym to drawe,’ Böddeker, AE. Dicht. 177/34. Morris explains ‘entice me
(to sin),’ referring to the glossary to Hampole, Prick of Conscience,
where the word so explained is ‘drawe.’
142. wule:
supply, to-drawen me.
144. Nor that any
man that honoureth thee should have gladness: he resumes no
mon ꝥ þe wurðeð; comp. 77/39, 138/12: similar are, ‘Þe
543
wreche peoddare more noise he makeð to ȝeien his sope,’ AR 66/17: ‘ꝥ þe
muð ne mei uor scheome þe liht eie spekeð hit,’ id. 60/6.
147. wite
&c.: see 118/50.
148.
dweolðe: see 134/93.
149. dest:
supply witen ⁊ werien.
150. schalt
can hardly mean, ‘shalt give,’ as Morris translates: some word such as
delen has dropped out after me: comp. ‘to pore men dalt his
dale,’ Sir Amadas 43. aueir dol, a fair, handsome, portion.
151. Comp. ‘De
cest e d’el uus frai dreit, | Selunc ceo que uus sui forfait,’ Adgar
163/221.
153. lif . . .
heale: comp. 132/6.
156. vort:
see 72/179 note.
157, 8. Adgar has
similar uses of lovers’ language: ‘Ne ia, Dame, uus ne larrai; | Kar
espuse prise uus ai. | Ja ne larrai uostre amistie, | Ne uostre amur,’
Adgar 163/213, 162/178-85.
160. al so,
even as; not ‘as much as,’ Morris.
163. The line lost
after this may have been something like, and ek mine soule vor þine
eadmodnesse.
164, 5. Comp. ‘Pur
amur de la Dame chere, | Ki nus duinst la seinte Deu grace, | E Deu nus
duinst ueer sa face,’ Adgar 40/98.
166.
ureondmen, friends: a rare word, which occurs again in OEH ii.
183/23; CM 20242.
170. bi,
concerning.
Metre: ... nó wiht | únder|stónden
31
wiht|únder
and góld|ringes 34
text unchanged: error for “rínges”?
But a line like vor heo neúer ne beoð séad .
þi ueír to iséonne 30
text unchanged: errors for “néuer” and “uéir”?
or as an alexandrine, vor heo neú|er ne
béoð
text unchanged: error for “néuer”?
6. ... Adgar 107/845; ‘Þu art
107/845; | ‘Þu
9. ... i.e. in very many ways
“i” in “i.e.” invisible
Manuscripts: i. Bodleian 34, Oxford (B). ii. Royal 17 A
27, British Museum (R): for descriptions see p. 492. In this life R is abbreviated, as
Einenkel shows; the joints are often visible.
Edition: Cockayne, O., Þe Liflade of St. Juliana (parallel
texts with translations). E. E. T. S., O. S. 51.
Literature: Backhaus, O., Über die Quelle der
mittelenglischen Legende von der heiligen Juliane und ihr Verhältnis zu
Cynewulfs Juliana, Halle, 1899; Einenkel, E., see p. 493; Stodte, H., see p. 493; Stratmann, F. H., ES iv. 94
(emendations).
Phonology: This has been sufficiently described at
pp. 493-9: a few forms call for comment.
(1) in R. a: þeauien 102 has
å-umlaut. æ: awakenin 55 (āwacenian), pal 36,
hauene 135, if descended from hæfen, have a for æ;
ea appears in breas 118, feader 3. e: heolen 43, speoken
59, toteoren 63, weolen 54, seotel 114 have å- or u-umlaut
of e; sutelin 98
544
descends from swutol with u-umlaut of i
and loss of w as in suster; hatterliche 91
is elsewhere in SJ heatterliche, probably representing u-umlaut
of *hator; comp. hatol, hetol; unweommet 28, 120,
133 shows rounding of e to [ö] between labials; bitild 36, OE.
beteldan, comp. ‘tilden’ 82/110, ‘bitillen,’ L 27852, perhaps
owes i for e to tilian; sulliche 48 comes from
syllic. i: neomen 45 has å-umlaut of i. y:
unduhti 18 represents dyhtig. ā: lechnunge 23 follows
lǣcnian, the OE. noun is lācnung. ǣ1 is
e in lefdi 7, erndunge 8, unmeð 17, wreððen 78, wreððede 46, and
a in wraðði 42 instead of the normal ea; the adverb
eisweis 68 (also in SM 13/26, MS. R, but eanies weis, MS. B) corresponds
to ǣniges weges. ǣ2 is exceptionally ea
in forreadeð 96, reade 55; leoten 63 is imitative of words with umlaut
like beoren, eoten (Bonner Beiträge, xv. 128). ea before r
+ cons. is a in harmen 107; the i-umlaut is e in
merrið 104, sumchere 21 (cierr): the i-umlaut of ea
before l + cons. is absent in afal 137, which is in form
āfeallan, fall, in meaning āfiellan, fell; for healden 118
see 359/7. eo before r + cons. is a in darc 122,
perhaps the earliest instance of this spelling; the i-umlaut is
seen in iȝirnd 34, firsin 86 (but see Bülbring, § 187 anm. on
Anglian firr). For ȝeouen see 359/34; geond is ȝont 35.
ēa is e in les 75, but lease 135, e in ȝet 93
descends from gēt beside the normal gēat; the adverb
gēara is ȝare 83. The i-umlaut of ēo is seen in
derure 90; strupen 91 descends from *strȳpan; hei[e]nde 17, as if
from *hegan; the Anglian form is hēan. a +
g: for dreihen 122, see 360/13. æ + g: in fehere
104 (fægerra) the spirant is retained; comp. ‘feȝerest,’ L 29485,
but feire 53. e + g final: tintreg is tintreow 98.
sy 54, with y written for i, represents sige;
‘syge’ in L 17409. ȳ + g: druifot 137, with ui for
long u. ea + h: waxen 55, iseh 22. eo + h:
mix 96 (Anglian). ēo + g: lihinde 7.
duheðe 18 represents duguð: e is added in fuheles 63,
liðeri 92: m is lost in limel 67 (lim mǣlum), f in
leowinde 95 (lēofwende); t occurs often for final
d, after mit for mid or miþ, þin becomes tin 52. For the stop
c, ch appears to be written in senchtest 137. The loss of
g in list 43 is OE. (līst for ligst). h is
added in selhðe 54; nest 129 is Anglian nēst, WS. nīehst: es 100
has lost initial h, so im in ichim 85.
(2) in B. Many of those noticed in R
occur in B also; other forms in B only are, chearre 166
(cierran), see 359/4: neolechin 43 represents a by-form
nēolǣcan, while nehlechen R 31 comes from the normal
nēahlǣcan: lattow 170 is OE. lāttēow. ch in wlech
151 (wlæc) is due to the influence of wlæce (Björkman,
148).
Accidence: (1) of R. were
79 has added e in the nom. cun s. d. 11 is exceptionally
without inflection, comp. cunne 19. fetles 97 is a contracted
545
plural; OE. fǣtels, pl. fǣtelsas, occasionally
fǣtels. aldrene 14, dahene 117 are weak pl. gen. The dual
pronoun occurs in inc pl. d. 107. urne 119 is pt. s. subj.
from irnan. The contracted þrof 59, the prepositions ine 16,
bimong 132, for which see 398/97, are characteristic of the group.
(2) Of B. burhene 72, folkene 57 are
possibly weak pl. genitives, like aldrene, dahene above, but they
are more probably adjectives formed on the analogy of words in -en, like cristen, from nouns. For leoflukest
82, see 125/270.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are bistaðet bisteaðet,
crokes, derf, feolahes, lahe, lufte, liðin, menske; probably ihondsald,
lustnin, truste; possibly ȝeien, hauene, keiser: in R only, baðen,
derfliche; possibly trukeneð: in B only, feolahscipe, ilated, menskin,
witere. French are ciclatun, furneise, leuns liuns, maumez mawmez,
misspelt mawmex 144/97, purpre, rente, seinte: in R only, cumseð
(commencer), serui, tur (MS. reading 140/36), uie: in B only, cendals,
eoli.
Dialect: See p. 503.
Introduction: For style and authorship see pp. 504-6. The author states, 139/7, that he
translated from a Latin source. The Life of S. Juliana, printed in Acta
Sanctorum under Feb. 16th, is pronounced by Backhaus not to be the
immediate source of SJ, because when compared with it the English shows
considerable omissions, additions, and divergences. Yet SJ stands in
about the same relationship to that Latin text as SK does to what is
generally regarded as its original and as Sawles Warde does to the
treatise of Hugh of S. Victor (p. 493). The author of these pieces is no
mere translator, but an adapter who weaves other matter into his free
imitation of his originals. He was apparently unacquainted with
Cynewulf’s Juliana. Grau (Morsbachs Studien, xxxi. 157) shows that the
earlier writer also introduces ideas into his poem which had been used
by him in other works.
S. Juliana never attained in England to the popularity of her
associates, S. Katherine and S. Margaret, but there is another life in
rhymed septenaries printed as an appendix to Cockayne’s edition of SJ
from MS. Ashmole, no. 43 (c. 1310), and a third in the Scottish
Legendary, ascribed by the editor to Barbour, the source of which is the
Aurea Legenda; it is printed in Barbour’s Legendensammlung, ed.
Horstmann, ii. 190.
The references are to B, unless R is prefixed.
3. feader . . . of
frumscheft: OE. ‘fæder frumsceafta,’ Christ, 472.
5. glideð,
proceeds: comp. ‘þe hali gast · ꝥ glit of inc baðen,’ SM 21/33; ‘⁊ te
hali gast, hare beire luue, | þe lihteð of ham baðe,’ SK 1772.
unagin: found here only; it appears to mean, without beginning:
OE.
546
unāgunnen with that meaning occurs in ‘on unagunnenre
Godcundnysse and on ongunnenre menniscnysse,’ Ælf. Hom. Cath. ii.
292/16: perhaps the ME. form has been influenced by angin, beginning.
euch godes ful, full of every good: contrast ‘euches cunnes
gode,’ 141/58.
6. lideð ⁊ lusteð:
comp. ‘Lusteð me . . . ⁊ liðeð ane hwile,’ SJ 73/14; ‘God make alle soon
blithe, | Who so wil lystne and lithe,’ K. Alisaunder 5750.
8. wið þon þat, in
order that.
R 7. lif hali, holy of lif: comp. ‘to summe oðre lif-holie
monne,’ AR 346/4; OEH ii. 51/10, 133/10.
9. lihnide is
probably a miswriting of lihinde as in R, lying, deceptive: ME. lihen,
OE. lēogan, but it is possibly a pp. of ME. lihnen, OE.
līgnian, to deny. eche: supply lif.
11. of munne,
commemorate: usually transitive in this sense as, ‘þis meiden þe we
munnid wes marherete ihaten,’ SM 2/13, but comp. ‘His deope wounden
bledeth fast, | Of hem we ohte munne,’ Lyric Poetry, ed. Wright,
112/22.
12. i Nichomedese
burh: ‘in civitate Nicomedia’: the adjectival termination is
Anglo-French -eis as in Hispaneis, L.
Hispanensis: the scribe has ‘Nichomedesse,’ 77/9: ‘iþe Nomecuðe burh
Nicomede inempnet,’ 79/9. In Sammlung AE. Legenden, ed. Horstmann,
51/628, Ianuesse means Genoa; Arimminence 20/784, Rimini; Iponence,
79/1046, Hippo.
13. heascede,
insulted: comp. OE. hyscan.
R 12. of—deaðe, more than any other heathen he drew
cruelly to death those that were Christians: ham represents the
real object, ‘þeo ꝥ cristene weren’: see 136/144: the Latin has, ‘qui et
ipse erat persecutor Christianorum.’
15. as þeo ꝥ, as
being one to whom: for as, see 128/1; for ꝥ = to whom,
46/292. ilenet: the ME. texts often confuse lǣnen and lēven, to
permit.
17. schupte: see
2/2. wealdeð: comp. 34/84; ‘weldinde ⁊ wissinde | alle worldliche
þing,’ SK 933, 1780; L 5279.
R 16. redegunge (= redeȝunge) appears to be pres. part. of ME.
rǣdien, to discourse (119/81); for ȝ, comp. ‘heriȝinge,’ OEH i. 5/1. But
it is possibly a miswriting of ‘redunge’ as in B, which corresponds to
L. lectio.
19. Maximien: see
128/1 note.
20. heriende ⁊
heiende: a favourite phrase with this writer: comp. 149/180; SJ
41/5, 55/10; SK 459, 1041.
R 18. unduhti duheðe, ill-spent splendour; because used for
the glorification of idols: probably the original reading. In Specimens
translated ‘unworthy body of retainers.’
547
23. riche of
rente, with a large income. ȝunge mon of ȝeres: see
129/23.
24. wel, on good
terms: comp. 138/21.
25. iunne,
bestowed; generally said of conferring a favour, but ‘þe þe ufel unnen,’
L 28117, means, who inflicted harm on thee.
27. utnumne
feire, exceptional beauty: see 133/30; but R 22 means exceptionally
beautiful and charming: comp. 123/209; ‘se unimete feier,’ 124/239.
28. in wið in:
see 130/57.
30. lechnunge,
healing, medicine: a rare word, found in the Ureisun of God Almihti, OEH
i. 202/16.
31. wið ute longe
steuene, ‘without a long tale,’ Brock. But it seems preferable to
connect the noun with OE. stefn, time, giving the sense, without
long delay, much the same as ‘efter lutle stounde’: the repetition is
quite in the manner of the writer; comp. ‘doð hire biliue to deað buten
abade,’ SJ 73/3; ‘Anan þrefter sone com a seli wummon,’ id. 77/9.
R 25. For omission of the subject ha, see 6/18. hire
unwilles, to her sorrow, an adverbial genitive: unwil is the
opposite of ‘wil,’ joy, pleasure, 133/62. A similar adv. phrase is
hire unwil in 141/36; comp. ‘min unwil hit is; to don
al ꝥ ti wil is,’ SM 13/3. For the construction see 10/167, and
165/263.
37. truked =
trukeð from trukien is the usual form; see 72/183: the derivative
trukeneð R 26 appears to be quite isolated.
38. daheðes is
apparently genitive of *daheð, daȝeð, noun derivative of ME. daȝien, to
dawn, used adverbially, at dawn. In R 27 euch deis dei means at daylight
(dawn) of each day: it is apparently without parallel. The Latin has
‘per singulos dies.’
39. reowfule
reames: see 130/55. wissede, would direct: pt.
subjunctive.
R 30. summes weis, some while, as at 124/236, corresponding to
summe hwile in B.
42. lihten se
lahe, descend so far: comp. 176/20, 199/79, 206/306; ‘loke þenne her
bi hwa se of hire maidenhad lihteð in to wedlac; bi hu moni degrez ha
falleð duneward,’ HM 23/24; ‘liht to ure lare,’ SK 1011.
44. hehest i
Rome: comp. 128/2. heh reue: ‘praefectus.’
46. lette: supply
as subject, Keiser.
R 35. ⁊ te riche riden in, and to ride in his domain: an
addition necessitated by the mistake in ‘tur.’ tuhen: the subject
heo is to be supplied.
47. ouertild,
canopied.
548
48. purpres ⁊
pelles, purple cloths and rich stuffs: a frequent combination for
gorgeous clothing: comp. ‘ischrud ⁊ iprud ba wið pel ⁊ wið purpre,’ SK
1449; here used of a canopy. ciclatuns: see 133/51.
cendals: sendal is a thin silken stuff, mostly red.
49. As þe ꝥ:
comp. 128/1.
50. rihten ⁊ to
readen: comp. 121/141; 147/158.
54. iswechte is
explained in Specimens as pp. wearied, descending from OE.
geswenct, geswenced, pp. of geswencan: the
disappearance of n would be difficult to account for; it might be
due to the analogy of þencan: in any case the word is for iswecht + te,
thyself. wreaðe &c.: see 34/86.
56. leauen þe
lahen: comp. ‘ant leaue alle þe lahen ꝥ tu list inne,’ SJ 24/3.
57. folkene
froure: comp. OE. frōfor-gāst; ‘folkes froure’ (of the
B. V. M.), OEH ii. 255/2; ‘Vroure ⁊ hele folkes fader heouenliche
drichte,’ id. 258/5; ‘þe hali gast moncunne froure,’ SM 18/18; ‘folkes
feader,’ 149/173, 19/33; ‘froure moncunnes,’ L 9075. folkene as
gen. pl. appears to be quite isolated; the usual ME. form is
folce, OE. folca.
58. igret,
magnified: OE. grēatian: ‘greaten’ is in AR 128/1.
59. windi of,
turned away from, done with: comp. ‘windi (wundi R) of wisdom,’ devoid
of wisdom, SK 376. Comp. MHG. wendic, wendec.
R 47. droh him, put him off, like L. trahere: apparently
without parallel in this meaning.
61. Efter ꝥ,
notwithstanding the fact that. In R, it means practically, when.
63. him: see
13/34 note.
64. to wraðer
heale, to perverse fortune: see 130/58, and comp. 145/109; L 29556;
‘to ufele hele wes ic iboren,’ OEH i. 33/24; ‘Godere hele þu hit scalt
iseon,’ id. 57/44; ‘to goderheale þin he hit þoleð,’ HM 29/10.
67. For ‘fon on,’ to
handle a matter, to proceed, comp. 143/85, 97; 157/135; ‘⁊ he bigon to
fon on | þisses weis towart hire,’ SK 1863. If the punctuation of the
MS. goes for anything, the second on is an otiose repetition of
the first, and the meaning is, proceeded gently at first to try if
&c., as at l. 85. Such repetitions are not uncommon in this group:
comp. 126/317; ‘Hef up forði, mid treowe bileaue ⁊ mid herdie, up þine
þreo uingres,’ AR 290/29; ‘sitteð al stille, ꝥ hwon he parted urom ou, ꝥ
he ne cunne ower god,’ id. 64/20. But in Specimens on to lokin are
connected, proceeded at first ‘fairly (= kindly) to look upon
her.’
69. sy . . .
selhðe: comp. 147/157; SJ 24/13; ‘isi ant iselhðe,’ SM
549
23/13. sy: OE. sige, victory; in this phrase it must mean
something like, prosperity. weolen &c.: comp. 121/161.
70. awakenen: see
54/24.
R 55. inoh, fully, quite: see 62/41.
71. refschipe:
‘praefectura’: at 128/4, the imperial dignity.
72. liggeð: see
128/10.
73. luuien ⁊
leuen: a stock phrase of this group: comp. 142/66, 145/104; ‘ileueð
⁊ luuieð,’ AR 410/11; also 180/135, 194/590.
R 57. as þeo þat: see 128/1.
75. ich—is:
comp. 90/73.
76. for, before:
I call to witness Apollo; comp. 145/101: somewhat different is ‘for mi
lif,’ 145/106, upon my life, staking my life on the fulfilment of my
promise.
78. haldest her
on, perseverest in this determination; comp. ‘hald hardiliche | on ꝥ
tu hauest bigunnen,’ SK 677; ‘ȝif me hit halt eure forþ in on,’ ON
356.
79. toluken
&c.: comp. ‘⁊ leoten toluken þi flesch | þe fuheles of þe lufte,’ SK
2092; ‘þer ase wilde deor limmel to luken ham,’ SJ 79/5; 34/83.
81. aȝein þe, in
reply to thee, answering thy oath by Apollo and Diana: the stop after
aȝein is to be disregarded. ich swerie &c., I call
Christ to witness: the acc. after swerien is perhaps without a
parallel, but it gives a sense somewhat different from that which would
be gained by the insertion of bi or to.
83. i leitinde
leie, in flashing flame: comp. ‘for al þe cwarterne, of his cume |
leitede o leie,’ SK 671; ‘⁊ i þe reade leie, | ⁊ i þe leitinde fur,’ id.
1360; ‘⁊ leitinde al on leie,’ id. 1651. The full stop after leie
and the following capital obscure the structure of the
sentence—though I be burnt alive, I will not &c.
84. þe,
dat.: comp. ‘buhð him ase he bit,’ AR 288/24; ‘all we sal him
bu,’ CM 16712; ‘þe lauerdes leofmon ꝥ (= to whom) alle kinges
buheð,’ HM 5/24. her onont, as regards this matter. Þreate
&c.: see 34/86. buhe ne beien: comp. 132/3; SJ 27/10, 43/9;
‘buhsume ⁊ beisume,’ SK 1787.
86. leoftede is
translated in Specimens, ‘flattered,’ and derived from OE.
lyfettan, which is hardly possible: leotede luueliche, made
affectionate gestures, behaved affectionately, would give a known
combination: comp. ‘wið luueliche lates,’ SM 14/4; ‘ȝif þu makest ei
semblaunt, oðer eni luue lates touward unðeauwes,’ AR 90/17; ‘mid
leofliche læten,’ L 19396; 110/273, but the weak forms of læten are not
elsewhere found before the fifteenth century.
550
88. wið þerean ꝥ
is explained in Specimens as for wið ꝥ þerean, the last word being taken
with wenden as, in respect of that matter; but that seems very
improbable, though the order of words is often strange enough in this
piece. Stratmann suggested that þerean is a mistake for þen,
which does not account for the corrupt form. Possibly the scribe had
before him, wið þē (= þen) ane ꝥ, on the sole condition that: see
72/192 note. wið ꝥ in R 70 means, on
condition that.
89. do, join.
91. To soðe: see
90/73.
92. Vnwurð,
despicable: see 26/258.
R 75. ꝥ . . . to, to whom: see 1/3.
95. him:
dat. with lihen; acc. with leauen: comp. for the former,
29/2, 191/474; ‘Iff iosephus ne legeð me,’ GE 1281: the combination is
uncommon. weole &c.: see 121/161.
96. wa . . .
wontreaðe: comp. ‘wurðe him wurst of wa ⁊ of wontreaðe,’ SJ 27/12;
‘hauest ifunden weane þrin ⁊ wondraðe riue,’ HM 9/4; AR 156/4. See also
58/76.
R 77. wa . . . wunne: the repetition of the latter word is
probably a scribe’s mistake for weane: comp. ‘ah al þe weane | ⁊ te wa
wente,’ SK 1166, 2104.
R 79. Me: a word characteristic of the Katherine-group and
frequent in AR, where it has been misunderstood by Morton: it wavers
between conjunction and interjection, ‘well! but,’ and often introduces
a question which offers an objection, or applies what has been said,
like, ‘well then’: comp. AR 310/17; SK 325, 589; SM 6/19, 7/22. Its
origin is obscure; if another guess may be hazarded, it is perhaps
Anglo-French mes (F. mais, L. magis), which was used in contemporary
French in much the same way.
98. ꝥ . . . to,
to whom.
99. se forð, so
far: comp. ‘ert ibrouht so uorð ouer,’ AR 294/7; ‘to uorð,’ too far, id.
294/14: see also 64/85. letest lutel of: see 44/260.
100. ꝥ ich
wite, so far as I know.
103. lette lif:
see 118/28.
104. ꝥ me of
þuncheð: see 30/10. luuie . . . leue: see 143/73.
105. as: see
121/1; similarly 145/108.
106. laðin
&c., his love shall be hateful to thee: so, ‘ꝥ te schal laði þi
lif,’ HM 9/2.
108. as on
ernesse, as a foretaste: probably the first occurrence of ernes.
besmen: so, ‘beateð hire bare bodi wið bittre besmen,’ SM 5/19;
‘mid besman swingan,’ Orosius 68/11. Before ꝥ something like, ꝥ
þe wule of þunchen, has dropped out. As the reading of R, which means,
that it
551
shall turn to misfortune that you were woman, is plainly an attempt to
mend a faulty original, it may be concluded that the omission belongs to
an earlier stage of the transmission. For to wraðerheale see
141/64.
111. Here the scribe
became confused: his original had probably, ꝥ ti wil is wurch þu, but he
began with wur, and erasing it forgot to add it at the end. Then
he omitted het before swiðe, and tried to mend matters by
changing leggen into leggeð, but forgot strupen.
bliðeliche, gladly, is strange.
113. liðeri,
should be in a lather: comp. ‘ꝥ hire leofliche lich | liðerede al o
blode,’ SK 1542; ‘leiden swa luðerliche on hire leofliche
lich; ꝥ hit . . . liðerede o blode,’ SM 5/20.
115. beaten
&c.: see 34/86.
118. fetles,
vessels, i.e. dwellings; comp. 131/83.
119. heien ne
herien: see 139/20. teone ne tintreohe: comp. ‘ne schal þe na
teone | ne tintreohe trukien,’ SK 402, 623, 1503, 1795. With
timbrin comp. ‘to timber trey and tene,’ Minot vi. 2 note.
R 101. allescunnes: see 81/80
note.
120. sutelin,
be made plain: comp. ‘isuteleð ⁊ ischeawed,’ AR 154/2; ‘sutel ⁊ eðcene,’
id. 154/22; ‘for sutel is ⁊ eðsene,’ SK 381.
125. þeauien ⁊
þolien, permit and suffer: comp. ‘þauieð ant þolieð,’ SM 15/19;
‘þatt Godd ne þole nohht | Ne þafe,’ Orm i. 188/5456. mucli:
comp. ‘þi lauerd godd it þoleð him to muccli þi mede,’ HM 47/16.
muchelin, R 102, is a form characteristic of the group. mede
. . . murhðe: comp. 147/157; ‘mi murhðe ⁊ mi mede,’ SK
2350.
126. eauer se
goes with mare.
128. drehen . . .
derf: for the combination, characteristic of the group, comp. ‘ꝥ hit
ne sem . . . ꝥ ich derf drehe,’ SM 5/31; ‘abeore bliðeliche þe
derf ꝥ tu drehest,’ HM 17/31; ‘hwen ha schulen | þe derf of deað
drehen,’ SK 2392; ‘to deaðe | deruest þing to drehen,’ id. 2100.
R 106. willes, spontaneously: so, ‘willes ⁊ woldes,’ AR 6/26;
‘willes wiðuten neode,’ id. 242/19; ‘willes ⁊ waldes,’ HM 27/2.
131. Þet,
because.
134. bicumen,
arrive, come: comp. 175/434.
135-7.
wei—forð is a parenthesis (alas for your fates that ye were
born in the world and brought forth), and so is awei—weren
in R 111; comp. ‘Wa me þære wyrde, pæt min wynn alæg,’ Psalter (Thorpe)
373/5. For se, which can only mean so, to must be substituted,
and if ȝe schule is retained, it must be regarded as a mere
repetition of the preceding ‘ȝe schulen,’ due to the parenthesis. to
wraðer heale in R 111 goes with sinken; in B its position is
ambiguous: probably in the original it
552
belonged to the parenthesis, and the right order in R is, to wraðer
heale, sinken ow: for the reflexive, see 13/34
note. For sar . . . sorhe see 52/374.
141. ehsihðe: a
word characteristic of the group: comp. SM 17/27; SK 2315; ‘eihsihðe,’
OEH i. 209/28. In the passage here omitted, Eleusius tries to win her
over, but neither suasion nor scourging shake her resolution.
142. festnin
&c.: comp. ‘to festnin ham | in treowe bileaue,’ SK 1985;
180/143.
143. isoðe
bileaue: see 89/28: R 116 without it gives a poor sense. don
. . . ut of dahene, put out of life: the expression is
common: comp. ‘þat we haue done him of daghe,’ CM 4168.
144. As brune
is everywhere else a noun (see 119/83), of must have fallen out after it
here. wallinde bres: comp. 60/103.
145. healden,
pour, as at 72/197. Brock translates, ‘hold.’
148. þer . . .
in, in which. The writer had in mind the second lection in the
Breviary for the feast of S. John ante Portam Latinam (May 6th), ‘in
olei ferventis dolium missus: ex quo tamen divina se protegente gratia
tantum liber exiit a dolore corporis: quantum alienus erat a corruptione
carnis,’ York Breviary, ii. 277.
149. liues
lauerd: OE. līf-frēa; ‘auctorem vitae,’ Acts iii. 15.
him, for himself.
151. wod þa,
then mad; the text seems defective. With R 121, comp. ‘to weden ⁊ to
wurðen | ut of his ahne witte,’ SK 1257; 130/52.
157. murhðe . . .
mede: comp. 145/125. sy . . . selhðe: comp. 143/69. ꝥ
. . . efter, after whom.
158. al,
completely, qualifies bisteaðet ⁊ bistonden, circumstanced and
beset; a combination characteristic of the group: comp. ‘ich iseo me
. . . bistaðed ant bistonden as lomb mit wed wulues,’ SM 3/24;
AR 264/24. Riht . . . read: comp. 121/141.
161. nestfalde,
nearest: apparently here only. NED compares OE. nēahfeald.
162.
mine—hearmen: ‘et inimici hominis domestici eius,’ Mic.
vii. 6, S. Matt. x. 36. inhine does not occur elsewhere, but its
meaning, ‘household servant,’ is assured by the Latin imitated. In R 130
heanen makes no sense, perhaps heanende is to be read.
163. anes: see
74/207 note.
164. wil cweme
apparently answers to OE. wel-gecwēme, which is quoted in B-T. as
a gloss on beneplacitus in Spelman’s Psalter cxviii. 108, cxlvi. 12.
553
165. ilated se
luðere, so wickedly mannered, behaved. ilated is a new
formation from lat, usually pl. lates, looks, manners: see
129/35. In Specimens translated, ‘visaged so horribly.’
167. Al, if not
a mistake for Als, goes with ham.
168. wid,
against: see 48/299 note.
169. wite . . .
were: comp. 118/50 note. witere, make wise, teach. In R 134,
ant witen is to be altered into ant were.
170. liues
lattow, life’s guide: OE. lātþēow, lāttēow.
171. hauene of
heale: ‘salutis portum,’ see 5/12 note.
In R 135 with lestinde, understand lif.
173. ⁊ tu, thou
too, even so do thou &c. folkes feader: see 141/57.
174. to drif,
drive away; usually means, drive asunder, dispel.
176. ȝet goes
with iseon.
177. schrenchen ⁊
schunchen, deceive and terrify: an uncommon combination. of,
out of, from: comp. ‘wrenchen sum rihtwis of þe weie,’ SJ 43/5.
178. wið, see
82/118, 117/5.
179. crefti
crokes: see 129/42. crechen, scratch; if it be a form of
cracchen: in NED said to be for crochen, catch with hooks or claws, from
F. crocher: comp. ‘crefti crokes,’ 129/42; ‘crokinde creftes,’
131/87.
180. iheiet ⁊
iheret: comp. 138/17.
Edition: ... E. E. T. S., O. S.
51.
E.E.T.S., O.S.
Phonology: ... u-umlaut of
i
i misprinted as italic instead of bold
neomen 45 has å-umlaut of
i
a-umlaut
ǣ1 is e in lefdi
7
æ1
Anglian nēst, WS.
nīehst
W.S.
Manuscripts: i. Jesus College, Oxford, E 29 (J); see
p. 285. ii. Cotton Caligula A 9, British
Museum (C); see p. 450. They are copies
of a common exemplar X, which was probably taken directly from the
poet’s original. X was written by two scribes; the work of the first is
represented in ll. 1-353 of the present selection; that of the second in
ll. 354-437; the former was accustomed to French scribal methods. The
writer of C was a mechanical copyist and not at home in English,
consequently he reproduces X with tolerable accuracy. The scribe of J
was more independent (see p. 293).
Facsimile: Of J. The Owl and the Nightingale, ed. J. E.
Wells.
Editions: Stevenson, J., Roxburghe Club, London, 1838;
Wright, T., Percy Society, no. xxxix, London, 1843 (text of C);
Stratmann, F. H., Krefeld, 1868 (critical edition); *Wells,
J. E., Boston, 1907 (parallel texts with notes); Gadow, W.,
Palaestra, no. lxv, Berlin, 1909 (text of C with variants
of J).
Literature: Borsch, J., Ueber Metrik und Poetik der
altenglischen Dichtung The Owl and the Nightingale, Münster, 1883;
*Breier, W.,
554
Eule und Nachtigall, Halle, 1910, completed in Morsbachs Studien, no.
xxxix, Halle, 1910; ES xlii. 306, 408; Ebisch, W., Zur Syntax des Verbs
im altengl. Gedicht Eule und Nachtigall, Leipzig, 1905; Gadow, W., Eule
und Nachtigall, Berlin, 1907 (completed in edition as above); Kenyon,
J. S., Journal of English and Germanic Philology, xii. 572-92;
Koch, J., Anglia, Beiblatt, xxi. 227-40; Noelle, H., Die Sprache des
altengl. Gedichts von der Eule und Nachtigall, Göttingen, 1870; Sherman,
L. A., A Grammatical Analysis of the OE. Poem The Owl and the
Nightingale, Transactions of the American Philological Association, vi.
1875. Wells, J., Anglia, xxxiii. 252-69; Modern Language Notes, xxv.
108, xxvi. 139-41.
Phonology: (1) of C. The
spellings of (a) ll. 1-353 and (b) ll. 354-437 are distinguished, when
they show a characteristic difference. Significant rhymes are recorded.
Oral a is a, fare 422, tale 3; a before nasals
wavers between a (10 times) and o (14), can 126, vram 119,
man 334, mani 399, þan 22, 24, þane 39, wanne 308, bigon 13, con 199,
from 154, monnes 254, moni 355, nome 405, þonkes 70, won 240, wone 243,
wonne 38, exceptionally þenne (þænne); a before
lengthening groups is o, honde 400, onde 297, longe 45, tonge
112, but andsuare 105, answare 55, 277; and is and 4, an 7
&c.; man, indefinite, me 32; ferden 432 r. w. uerde,
descends from fēran. æ is regularly a, bare 56, 106
r. w. answare, glad 312, hadde 275 r. w. iladde, smal 73
r. w. al. e is e, bet 21, hen 291; before lengthening
groups, ende 386, felde 357: (a) suich 283, suiche 134 is from a form in
i, (b) swucche 354, swuch 374 from one in y: a diphthong
has developed in imeind 18, 306 (gemenged, comp. 451/25).
i is i, bile 79, chirche 339, is 388 r. w. wis, (a)
wile 141 r. w. sckile; before lengthening groups, bringe 311, linde
393, but wsome (= ysome) 136, (b) wulle 373, nulleþ 407, wuste 10
r. w. custe, neltu 106 (nelt), wolcumeð 318, with o
written in this text for u from e by labial influence,
comp. wulcume L 8528 &c., grulde 98 (*gryllan). o is
o, bodi 73, horne 234, word 45, wolde 128, nolde 115, but walde
370 r. w. scholde; þane 414 is LWS. þane, wan 334, hwan: on
prep. is reduced to an 239 and often to a 20 &c. œ,
i-umlaut of o, still lingers in seorhe ON 1599. u
is u, cumeþ 298, luueþ 188, wunest 254, but o in lo`u´ue,
where `u´ was possibly meant as a correction of o, ouerkome 386,
wode 322 r. w. rude, woning 403, in which o is associated
with m, n, w; u before lengthening groups is
u, dumb 294, tunge 194, but tonge r. w. iþrunge. y is
u, kume 314 (perhaps with [u] from cuman), murie 261, vuele 63,
stude 410 (styde) r. w. mide, muchel 404, muche 413
(mycel); before lengthening groups, cunde 88, hurne 14; but
unrounded in þincþ 430, þincþe 46, þinche 262, wirche 340; wrchen 286 is
probably French writing for wurchen.
555
ā is regularly o, bore 286, hoten 192, swo 76, 381, so
52, 289, 415, o 249, 331, þos 95, but a 45, 104, 112, an 4, 80,
Portesham 434, swa ON 1577, wa 425, þeos 413 (þās); before two
consonants o, wostu 334, but axest 325, 329, hattest 191.
ǣ1 is regularly e, brede 130, ledeþ 216, sprede
315 r. w. mede, þen 386, but þare 28 &c., þan 156 (3); before
two consonants e, fleshe 83, ileste 257, meshe 84
(*mǣscan), neuer 60, but iladde 276, wranne 360.
ǣ1 is elsewhere sometimes ea, eauer ON 922,
deale ON 954, bileaue ON 1688. ǣ2 is also e,
forlete 36, rede 425; before two consonants, oferd 277, but a in
lat 194 (4), lateþ 372 (3), ofdrad 387, þar 16 &c., þareafter 271,
þareuore 210, whar 64, war 392, uareuore 203, 333, these pronominal
forms probably come from shortened ǣ: before two consonants,
fnast 44, raddest 115, misraddest 116. ē is e, breme 158,
kene 212; before two consonants, dest 49, 237 r. w. preost, spedde
435, but dost 307, dostu 174, 289, doþ 112, 238 with o from the
plural. ī is i, wile 155, pipe 22, suiþe ON 376; before
two consonants, þriste 127 r. w. liste, wisdom 399, but (a) suþe 2,
12, 111 from swȳþe with absorption of w, comp. such from
swuch. ō is o, brode 93, ilome 49, noþeles 105, but
neoþeles 357 (15 times in Layamon, see 452/8); before two consonants,
blostme 315, softe 6. ū is u, kuþe 332, tukest 63, hule 4
&c., but houle 428, a French writing. ȳ is u, hud 120,
lutle 356, þuuele 214 r. w. foȝle, but litle 419, þe 19, 34, 401,
forþe 69, vorþi 65, hwi 407, whi 106, wi 174 (hwī).
ea before r + cons. is a, areȝ 285, ȝare 171
r. w. aiware, hardeliche 280, þaref 146, but eardingstowe 28; the
i-umlaut before a lengthening group is e in uerde 433
r. w. ferden: cierm is chirme 221 (see Bülb. 187 anm.) but
bichermet 215. ea before l + cons. is a, al 8 and
the numerous forms of eall, hale 2 r. w. dale, schaltu 165;
before lengthening groups o, which descends from Anglian unbroken
lengthened a, as in Layamon 452/15, bold 233 (3), boldeliche 279,
biholde 71, holde 3 (4), wolde 367, but once belde 358: without umlaut
are falt 37, halt 32. eo before r + cons. is o, for
328, vorre 243, horte 37, 43, rorde 227; before a lengthening group,
ilorned 172; but daisterre 244 r. w. vorre: forbernest 297 is from
bærnan; wyr words are worse 219 r. w. mershe, worste
10, worþ 283, wrs 34, elsewhere wurs ON 793, wrþ 256, unwrþ 255,
elsewhere wurþ ON 769. eo before l + cons. is seen in
sulue 69. The u-umlaut of a is wanting in hauekes 207 (3).
eo, u-umlaut of e gives houene 335, 346 r. w.
steuene, 350. eo, å-umlaut of e is seen in feole
415, but uele 20, and fale 365, auale 410 (feala). eo,
u- and å-umlaut of i is o (for eo) in
honne 66 r. w. kunne, hore 216 &c., noþerward 100, soþþe 240,
but (b) heore 418. ea after palatals is a, schal 143, ȝaf
55, 105, aȝaf 95, before nasal, schame 50 (3),
556
but schome 123. ie after g is e, biȝete 344,
uorȝete 343, underȝete 124, ȝeueþ 419, but ȝiueþ 416, ȝiue 410.
ie after sc is i in schille 98, 364, e in
schelde 356 r. w. felde. gef, EWS. gief is ȝif
51 &c., ȝef 429. eo after sc is o, scholde 371
r. w. walde, sholdest 54, short 73, but Anglian schulde 390
r. w. wule. eom is Angl. am 126, 212, nam 387, heom,
hom 62, 94.
ēa is regularly e, blete 57, dreme 230; before two
consonants, cheste 133 r. w. unwerste, but earen 254, unneaþe ON
1605, dreim 21 (a scribal error). The i-umlaut is e,
grettre 74, ȝeme 345, ihere 180 r. w. fere, iherde 2, ihert 406,
but ihire 228. ēo is (a) o, a French writing, blo 108,
319, bon 198, 342, bo 107 (9), boþ 75 (4), flo 33 (4), flon 106, floþ
214, ho 19 (13), hom 353, iso 243, isoþ 302, lof 159 (3), oftoned 190,
so 34, swore 73, tone 50, prostes 351, þo 26, 155, þos 41 (4), holde 12,
hold 100, athold 270, bihold 30, but the corrector has added e in preost
238 r. w. dest, weode 236; (b) eo, beo, beoþ 378, 418, heo
360 (9), heom 407, 408, but ho 368. The i-umlaut is seen in
atfliþ 37 (Angl. flīþ), þuster 154 (3). gesīene is isene
122, 211 r. w. kene; gīet, ȝet 225. ēo from ō
after g is o in ȝomere 293 r. w. sumere, ēa
from ā after sc, e in schede 153.
a + g is aȝ, draȝe 209. æ + g is
ai, dai 89 &c., vaire 15 &c., mai 141 (4), fawre 138,
miswritten for fayre, but ei in seide 9, 289, 424, 265 r. w.
rede, 325 r. w. dede, rhymes which indicate sede 33, 173
representing sǣde as the original form, so ised 273 r. w.
red is gesǣd. e + g is ei, aȝein 431, pleie
169, wei 224, under this head come seist 50 (4) from segst, seiþ
132 from segð, seie 173 from sege: aȝen 7, 314 is
agēn, snailes 87, snægl. i + h is iȝ,
adiȝte 242, wiȝt 312, or ih, diht 399; for iht, ist
is written in mist 78: final ig is i, bodi 73. o +
g is oȝ, itoȝen 368. u + g is uȝ,
fuȝele 64 r. w. vuele, but the spirant has been absorbed in
fuelkunne 65; foȝle 213 r. w. þuuele, is a French spelling.
y + h is unrounded in hiȝte 208, hiȝteþ 314. ā +
g is oȝ, oȝe 195, þroȝe 196. ǣ1 +
g is ei in eiþer 9, 141, but aiþer 7, aiware 172.
ǣ2 + g is seen in iseȝe 303. ō +
g is oȝ, boȝe 15, woȝe 120. ō + h is
oȝ, broȝte 150, noȝt 58 (nōht), roȝte 305, þoȝte 269, but
oh in brohte 369. u + h is uȝ, þuȝte 21,
ofþuȝte 275. ea + h is eȝ, iseȝ 29, ouerseȝ 30; the
i-umlaut is iȝ, miȝt 64, 177, miȝte 42, 411, miȝtest 192,
niȝt 89, but mihte 392. eo + ht, ariȝt 278, briȝter 108,
viȝte 128, riȝt 76, riȝte 120 r. w. liȝte 398, but riht 379,
unrihtfulnesse 385; bituxen 390 represents WS. betux: the
i-umlaut gives isiþ 285, but isoþ 302 without umlaut. ēa +
g, h is (a) eȝe 304 r. w. iseȝe, neȝ 44, þeȝ 48, but
þoȝ 220, (b) þeg 367, þah 422. ēo + h is (a) iȝ,
liȝte 119 r. w. riȝte, (b) ih, lihtlich 402, 417; the i-umlaut is
seen in fliȝst 89, 183, fliȝt 132, 224, atfliþ 37: dīegel is
diȝele 2. ā + w is ow, crowe 220, croweþ 251, snov
308, asnowe 291, owel 80 (*āwul), but nawt 383; clawe 109, 110 is
probably clawe. ī + w, howe 108 (Anglian
557
hēow). ō + w, bigrowe 27, -stowe 28, but nouþer 375 (nōwþer). ēa +
w, gleu 149, unþeu 150, but sewi 107. ēo + w, eu
436, ower 379, tro d. 316, representing occasional dat.
trēo.
In bisemar 104 a appears for e, in svikel- 118, 119
e for o, in munekes 347 e for u, in gladur
19, uairur 108, u for e, but gladdere ON
737. ā is o in oferd 277, elsewhere aferd 288. e
has been added in areȝ 285 (earg), areȝþe 282, arehþe 359, bareȝ
286, bisemar 104, hardeliche 280, narewe 68, steuene 345, 363, þaref
146, lost in warni 246, as already in OE. warnian; houẹneriche
335, houẹneliȝte 350, represent heofon-rīce, heofon-lēoht,
similarly þornewode 322, þarẹuore 210, warẹuore 203, 333. The prefix in
atschet 44 is oþ; be- is regularly bi-, bigrede
220, bitelle 199; a in adun 164 is of; the prefix
ge- is fully preserved as i-; the suffix -hede, 118 &c. is *hǣd.
w is written u in suiche 134, 283, tuengst 112, but
more frequently v, sval 7, tosvolle 101; it stands for wu
in wrchen 286, wrs 34, wrþ 256, unwrþ 255, for wi in wle 284, for
uu in wl 31, wle 35 (fūle); in wole 8, as Breier explains,
the original had uuele (yfele), the copyist took uu as w and read
wole (fūle). Metathesis of r is seen in unwerste 134;
rr is simplified in for 328. n is lost in þane 39 &c.,
wane 298, 352, ope 124, on is often reduced to a, adwole
420 &c.; nn is simplified in hen 291, kun 332. For f
initial, f, u, v are used indiscriminately, faire
114, vaire 15, fiȝt 132, viȝte 128, for 328, vorre 243, foruorþ 276, for
32, uor 19, vor 43, vram 119, from 62; it is once w in waste
(fæst), and w = uu in wl 31, wle 35; between vowels
f is regularly u, buue 164, auale 410 beside fale 365,
touore 371, similarly eure 251, cliure 78 (3), sulue 67, but v in
eve 41, over 64, f in afere 177, aferd 288, ifare 278, oferd 277;
in other positions it is commonly f, efne 229, stefne 230.
t is lost in blosme 16 as already in OE. blōsma, nel tu
106, doubled in sittest 89; for t, d is written in ad 241;
tt is simplified in wit 420. For d, t is written in
ihert 406; d is mostly omitted in an 7 &c., beside occasional
and 4, 294, also in answare 55, 277, as rarely in OE., but andsuare 105;
spene 121 is a new back formation from the pt. tense and
pp. of spend (NED); dd is simplified in bed- 240, midel-
349. For þ, d appears in haued 123, lodlich 32 (3),
t in witute 139, 200, bigredet 67, biledet 68, hatiet 186,
schuniet 185, singet 152, wit 56, 222; dostu 174, 289 is a compendium
for dost þu, similarly axestu 329, wenestu 219. sć is sch,
schal 143, schende 210, bischopen 404, schuniet 185, but occasionally
sh, shal 258, ishote 23, mershe 220, and once s, sewi 107.
The stop c is regularly k before e and i,
unker 107, loki 56, also in kon 326, kume 314, kun 332, kunne 144, kuþe
332, and ck in eck 130, haueck 219, otherwise c, cunne 47,
48, cuþe 360, hauec 223, spac 274: cc is ck, flockes 216,
þicke
558
17, 308; it is simplified in stoc 25: (b) ah 357 (6) is Anglian
ah, but (a) ac 83 (6). cw is (a) qu, quaþ 143, but
(b) cwaþ 372 (5). č is expressed by ch, chirche 339, ich
1, swuche 354, unwrenche 125, ilich 232, 234, but ilike 113 r. w.
biswike. čč is cch, recche 60, wrecche 251, but reche 58;
čǧ is gg, alegge 272, hegge 17, 59 (*hecg), legge
164, segge 18. Palatal g is written ȝ, ȝare 171, ȝaf 105,
areȝþe 285, murȝþe 257 (3), areȝ 285, bareȝ 286, folȝeþ 223, isuolȝe
102, unwroȝen 118, but arehþe 359, ibolwe 101. ng appears in
lengþe 130, strengþe 129, but strencþe 356 (Horn, Beiträge, 60).
h has been added initially in his 404, hunke 376, hure 141, and
dropped in abbe 130, is 281. hr is r in rise 19;
hl, l in lud 6, luste 99; hw is hw in hwile
ON 1591, wh in what 60, but otherwise w, aiware 172, wat
141 &c., wan 334, wile 6 (3), wa 425, wo 152, wonne 38, wone 243,
won 240, wider 342.
(2) Of J. Mainly a record of
divergences from C. a is more frequently o before nasals,
grome 49, lome 375, mon 334, 355, and before lengthening groups,
ondsware 105, onsware 55. Beside hwanne 121, 308, hwenne occurs 38 (4).
ewel 80 takes its initial vowel from æl. æ is e in
hedde 102 (3), queþ 372 (3), wes 1 (7). e, sweche 354, but such
374, suche 134 (swylc). i is often written in French
fashion y, especially in conjunction with m, n,
u, h, myne 51, ynne 208, clyures 111, fyht 132;
willaþ is wille 373; welcometh 318 has wel substituted for
wil; with cleures 84, 206 comp. ‘cleafres,’ AR 102/5, ‘claures,’
Corpus MS. o, wolde 370. u, tunge 37, vnne 382, but
schonyeþ 185, vowele 213, a French use. ā, hwo 425, no 202,
meaning nor, but naþeles 105, 357. ǣ1 dayrewe 244,
wrenne 360 (3); eoch 231, euche 151, euych 187 descend from ylc,
comp. 288/8; meysse 84 (*mǣscan), vleysse 83, with ǣ
before sć, may, in this text, be French spellings, but comp.
428/6. ǣ2 is with fewer exceptions e, efne 239,
let 194 (4), leteþ 372 (3), ofdred 387. ē, dome 426 is misspelt
for deme. ī, swiþe 2, 12, swyþe 149. ȳ, hwy, with y
written for i. ea before r + cons. is e in
erdingstowe 28. eo before r + cons. is eo, veor
328, veorre 243, heorte 37, reorde 227, steorre 244, ileorned 172.
ie, bichirmeþ 215. No umlaut in heuene 346 r. w. stefne,
heueryche 335, fele 415, but veole 20. eo, u- and
å-umlaut of i,
heonne 66, heore 216 &c.
neþerward 100, seþþe 240. ea after palatal and before nasal,
schome 50, 374, schomye 117. ie after g is regularly
e, yeue 410, yeueþ 416, 419. gief is if 283 &c.:
heom, heom 62 &c. ēa, eren 254, drem 21; the
i-umlaut, ihere 228. ēo is mostly preserved, fleo 33, heo 33,
heolde 51, leof 159, preostes 351, teone 50, but he 19, holde 12,
lesen 267, prest 238, swere 73.
The new diphthongs have reached a more advanced stage in which w
displaces ȝ; y is used extensively for i. a + g, drawe
209, mawe 138.
559
æ + g, day 89, vayre 15, but seyde 9, iseyd 273. e
+ g, ayeyn 7 (3), pleye 169, seyþ 132, snayles 87, seist 50.
i + h, adihte 242, bitwihen 390 (betwih), myht 78.
i + g, unwryen 118. o + g, itowen 368.
u + g, vowele 64, fowel 65, muwe 62. ā + g,
owe 195, þrowe 196. ǣ1 + g, eyþer 9; ihware 172
is OE. gehwǣr. ō + g, bowe 15, wowe 120. ō +
h is ouh, brouhte 156, 369, þouhte 269, roughte 305, but
þoutest 113. ū + h, þuhte 21, of þuhte 275.
ea + h, iseyh 29, ouerseyh 30; the i-umlaut, myhte
42, nyht 252. eo + h, ariht 278, brihter 108, vyhte 128,
ryht 76; the i-umlaut, isihþ 285. ēa + g, eyen 75,
100, eye 304, neyh 44; þēah appears as þeih 367, þeyh 137
&c., þey 287, þah 422 (stressed), þe 48, 220. ēo + h,
lyhte 119, ryhte 120; the i-umlaut, flyhst 89, flyhþ 132;
dīegel is dyele 2. ā + w, snouh 308, nouht 58,
nowiht 256, noht 183. ī + w, hewe 108. ēo +
w, eure 379, treo 316.
i is levelled to e in chireche 339, clerekes 340, 347,
mureþe 257, murehþe 336, 343; in gretture 74, u appears for
e; e is inserted in bolewe 101, swikedom 119.
w stands for u in hw 46, 435; it is written for
wu in wrche 340, wrse 219, wrste 10, wrþe 278, and for we
in wre 159; it is u in suych 283. Final n is omitted in a
241 &c. f is v in ivi 27. d is written for
t in bid 319; it is doubled in gladdre 19. For þ, t
is written in wit 57, h in bihouhte 155. sć is s,
sarp 79, atset 44, sende 210, sc, biscrycheþ 67, scrichest 179,
scort 73, sch, schewi 107, scholdest 54, schulle 320, mersche
220. Beside sweche 354 are such 374, suche 134. Final c is
written k in spak 279, 288; cc is kk in þikke 308;
cw is qu in iqueme 427. nyk 202 (OE. nič) is a
Midland form, and probably due to Scandinavian influence; ic is ic
245 (7) beside ich 1 &c.; ilyche 113 r. w. biswike. Palatal
g is very regularly written y, yaf 55, 105, ayaf 95,
yomere 293, voryete 343. After l, r, g passes into
the spirant w, bolewe 101, foleweþ 223, iswolwe 102, amorewe 310,
moreweninge 361, sorewe 309, but arehþe 282 (areh + þe). g is
lost initially in if 260 &c. h is lost in þoutest 113.
hw is generally preserved, hwan 334, hwar 64, hwi 204, hwile 158,
ihware 172.
Accidence: (1) of C. Strong
declension of masc. and neut. nouns. In the
s. n. a. bile 79, 205, griþbruche 377, kume 314
(possibly d.), hete 123 have their OE. vocalic ending; songe 259
is a scribe’s mistake for song; bodi 73 has lost final g, eve 41, final
n. Gen. -es, fuȝeles 259, speres
355: d. -e, boȝe 15, bore 286, daie
352, houene 346, sumere 1, 294, wintere 293, but adai 89 (3), aniȝt 89,
175, awinter 290; with loss of final consonant, amorȝe 310, eue 239 (3),
iui 27; OE. are blo 108, 319,
(Portes)hom 395, tro 316; king 371 is miswritten for
kinge. The pl. n. a. of masculines ends in -es, snailes 87, tunes 348, but cliuers 111, 206, fuȝele
64 (see note): neuters are ibere 178, þinge 225, wiȝte 87, 160, and with
masc. termination,
560
wiȝtes 309, wordes 134, unwiȝtis 174. Genitive is cunne 20; datives have
mostly -e, foȝle 213, rise 19 (3), songe
82, stude 410, þinge 312, 415, þuuele 214, vnwrenche 125, volde 72,
worde 114 (7), but craftes 329, cliures 84, toppes 306, bischopen 404.
The fem. nouns of the strong declension have -e in s. n. a., answare 55, 277, blisse
298, 346, eardingstowe 28, godhede 267, skentinge 324, stefne 233,
unrihtfulnesse 385, cheste 133, sorȝe 309, but hen 291, insiȝt 151,
woning 227, 403, so ME. grucching, luring 301: þuster 154, 186, 188 is
neuter. Gen. -e, worlde ON 476:
dat. -e without exception, blisse
335, brede 130, ME. pipinge 232, 253, see 397. Pl. d. is dede
188, 406; a. blisse 311, clawe 109, tale 193, tide 26. Nouns of
the weak declension have -e throughout,
s. n. swore 73, mose 69, d. deme 426, frogge 85, eȝe
304, wise 20, but uo 281, a. daisterre 244, grame 49, ȝeme 345,
but dairim 244, iuo 359: pl. n. blosme 16, eȝene 75, d.
fere 179, but earen 254. Minor declensions: uote pl. d. 51; man
s. n. 210 (3), monnes s. g. 254, 304, men pl.
n. 302, manne pl. d. 365, menne 368, men pl. a. 246;
boke s. d. 266; mus pl. n. 87; niȝt s. n.
250, middelniȝte s. d. 241, but aniȝt 89, 175, niȝt
s. a. 247, 252, niȝtes pl. n. ON 523; childre pl.
d. 419.
Adjectives which in OE. end in -e have e in all cases, breme
158, grene 18, isene 122, 211, murie 261, þicke 17, riche 413, similarly
those in -a, lame 375, unwille 300, but hoked 79 has lost
e, while ope 124 has vocalic ending by loss of n, and
fastrede s. n. m. st., r. w. unrede, has added e.
Those in -ig lose g, holi 339. Otherwise the nom. is
unchanged. Datives have -e in all genders,
str., gode 223, riȝte 170, 200, 212, wk. faire 317, 319,
fule 93, 295, olde 163, so acc. m. f. str. stronge 205,
vaire 15, bolde 288, schille 98, 364, but stif 205, lodlich 32 before
vowels, unwrþ 255, wk. gode 414, longe 247, but ful 94: wrecche
s. a. m. wk. 251 has taken the form of wrecca
sb. (Breier). The acc. neut. is uninflected, god 131; wole 8 is
corrupt. mycel is s. n. muchel 404, s. d.
muchele ON 1217: āgen has lost n in oȝe 195. The pl. of all
adjectives ends in -e, n. brode 75,
isome 378, d. belde 358, smale 213, a. gode 206, scharpe
109, but scharp 206 before a vowel. OE. ān is
s. n. m. on 25, 238 before vowel, 82, 330 (pronominal),
o 331 (num. adj.), f. a 112, an 80 before vowel,
s. d. m. one 2, 15, &c., f. ore 17, 393,
397, one 14, 235, neut. one 1, 236, s. a. m. one
102, a 94, o 249 (num. adj.), f. one 4, 155, 324, an 4, one 403
(num. adj.), neut. a 45, 104. nān is
s. n. m. no 210, f. 146,
s. d. m. none 168, 387; as adv. na more 169 (3).
Adjectives used as nouns are wise s. n. m. 132, pl.
d. 181, bare s. d. 106, s. a. 56, gode
s. d. 338, ille 299, longe 45, vuele, wroþe 63 (see note),
blete s. a. 57, woȝe 120, 154, worste 10, but god 245.
Comparatives have -e, betere 330 (3),
grettere 74, mildre 418, worse 219, but briȝter 108, gladur 19, icundur
85, uairur 108.
561
The personal pronouns are ich, i 353, me, unker dual g., of us
two 107, we, hure pl. g., of us 141, us, þu, (speddes) tu 125,
þe, hunke 376 (see note), ȝe, eu. The pronoun of the third person is
s. n. he m. 21 &c., ho f. 19, 368, heo
360, 372 &c., he 97, 274, 279, hi 141, hit neut. 28,
d. him m. 167, hire f. 104, him neut. ON
682, a. hine m. 392, hi f. 29, 30, 32, hit
neut. 92, pl. n. hi 10 &c., ho 66, 76, heo 418, 434,
435, d. hom 94, heom 408, a. hi 420, hom 62 (possibly
d.), heom ON 930: reflexive are hi 155, heom 407; definitive,
sulue 69. Possessives are s. n. mi, before vowel or pronom.
h, min, d. mine m. 46, mire f. 384, mine 59, 245,
neut. 83, 218, a. m. 36, 242, f. 196;
pl. mine; s. n. þi, before vowel or h, þin, d.
þine m. 58, þin 117, þire f. 307, 383, þine 40 (6),
neut. 88, a. m. 119 &c., þin 249, þine f.
194, þin neut. 121 (before vowel), þi ON 104; pl. þine,
but þin pl. n. 75, 113 before vowel; his 188, is 281, his
neut. 267; hire 26; ure 298; ower 379; hore 216, heore 418; unker
423, 425, 426. The definite article is s. n. þe m.
132, þo f. 26, 155, þe 13, 29 &c., þat neut. 10
&c., þe 352, g. þas m. 254, þare f. 28,
d. þan m. ON 125, þen 386, þe 322, 371, þare f. 31,
397, þe ON 96, þan neut. ON 133, þe 56, a. þane m.
414, þe f. 13, þat neut. 8, 10; pl. n. þe 315. The
article is also used demonstratively as adj. þat 5, 8 &c.,
þare 96, as pronoun, þat 82, þan 156, 405. The compound demonstrative is
s. n. þes m. 195, þos f. 41 (3), þeos ON 1667,
1707, d. þis neut. 437 (the metre requires þisse),
a. þos f. 133, þis neut. 156 (4); pl. n. þos
348, þeos 413, d. þisse 432, a. þos 95, þeos ON 1653. The
relatives are þe ON 1346, þat 10, 144; meaning to which 187, that which
78, 115, 174. Interrogatives are wa 425, wo 152, wat 141, 271, 353, what
60, (to) wan 334, wuch ON 1378 and the correlative suich
n. s. m. 283, swuch s. a. f. 374,
suiche pl. n. 134, swucche pl. d. 354. gelīc is
ilich s. n. m. 232, 234; gelīca, ilike pl.
n. 113. Indefinites are me 32 &c., man 341; sum
s. a. f. 6, summe pl. n. ON 1648; eiþer 9, 141,
aiþer 7; oþer s. d. f. 54, s. a. 7,
s. a. f. 326, oþeres s. g. 9, oþer pl.
n. 160, pl. a. 225; ech s. n. m. 231,
neut. 312, eche s. d. m. 151; eurich
s. n. m. 150, f. 257, neut. 185,
g. m. 304; eni s. a. f. 326, neut.
338; moni s. n. m. 355, mani s. a. m.
399, manie 398, monie pl. d. 72, a. 193; uale
s. d. m. 410, uele pl. g. 20, fale pl. d.
365, feole 415; al s. throughout, except all
s. d. f. 129, alle s. a. f. 247; alle
pl., except alre g. 10.
The infinitive ends in -e, singe
39 (5), wirche 340 and 40 other instances; exceptions in -en are losen 267, singen 327 before vowel or h, abiten
77, smiten 78 at end of line, hoten 192, speten 39, wrchen 286; the
second weak conjugation has -i, liki 258,
sewi 107; contract verbs are flo 284, 319, flon 106 before vowel. The
dat. inf. is not inflected, to biholde 71, for teche 408, [for]
ȝiue 410, to seche 402 (virtual nominative): no examples in -en. Presents are s. 1. abbe 130, adiȝte 242,
kep (ich) 110; of second
562
wk. conj. warni 246, wndri 184; of contract verbs, iso 243, so 34; 2.
axest 325, singest 247 (3), passive, hattest 191, axestu 329, wenestu
219, ME. clackes 81; with -ist, singist
175, wenist 231; seist 50 (4) represents segst; syncopated forms
are telst 226, tuengst 112, wenst 47, the metre requires woldẹst 84,
hauẹst 109; a contract verb is fliȝst 89, 183, fliȝst(e) 283; 3. blisseþ
313, croweþ 251 and 17 others, singet 152, schuniet 185; syncopated
forms are numerous, abid 421, berþ 281, bit 319, 323, demþ 420, diht
399, falt 37, fiȝt 132, halt 32, helpþ 127, lat 224, liþ 308, lust 168,
169, singþ 339, telþ 256, þincþ 430, worþ 283, writ 399, þincþe 46
(= þincþ þe); seiþ 132 represents segð; contract verbs are
atfliþ 37, fliȝt 132, 224, isiþ 285, isoþ 302; pl. 3. bigredeþ
215, habbeþ 309, 406, bigredet 67, biledet 68, haued 123, floþ 214:
subjunctive s. 1. holde 59, schilde 57; second wk. conj., loki
56; 2. clawe 110, wepe 182; 3. bitide 52, uorȝete 343; pl. 1.
lete 133, ute 422, fo 135; 3. bigrede 220; imperative s. 2. hud
120, stond 431, loke 122, schamie 117, seie 173, flo 33; pl. 2.
fareþ 379, lateþ 372 (3), lusteþ 372. Past of Strong Verbs: I a.
s. 3. aȝaf 95, ȝaf 55, 105, iseȝ 29, ouerseȝ 30, quaþ 143, 145,
sat 15, 101, spac 274, 288; pl. 3. seten ON 1102; subj. s.
3. iseȝe 303: I b. s. 3. com 361; pl. 3. bicome 434: I c.
s. 3. bigon 13, song 20 (4), sval 7, warp 45; subj. s. 3.
wrþe 278: II. s. 3. abod 41: III. s. 3. atschet 44: IV.
s. 3. stod 25: V. s. 3. athold 270, bihold 30, hold 100,
let 8; pl. 3. holde 12; subj. s. 1. holde 51. Participles
past: I a. awreke 198, bispeke 381, underȝete 124: I b. ibore 334: I c.
ibolwe 101, ibred 367 (breden), isuolȝe 102, iþrunge 38, tosvolle
101: II. itoȝen 368: II, III. vnwroȝen 118: III. ishote 23: IV. ifare
278: V. bigrowe 27, bihote 388, iholde 366, ofdrad 387. Past of Weak
Verbs: s. 1. iherde 3; 2. raddest 115 (weak form), þoȝtest 113,
speddestu 125; 3. broȝte 156, hadde 102, sede 33, seide 9; pl. 3.
spedde 435, ferden 432: subj. s. 3. roȝte 305. Participles past:
acoled 161, aferd 288, ihert 406, iladde 276 (lǣded), ilorned
172, imeind 18, 306, ised 273, oferd 277, oftoned 190. Minor Groups: an
1 pr. s. 382; can 1 pr. s. 126, 436, con 199, kon 326, con
pr. s. 415, cunne 1 pr. s. subj. 47, kunne pr. s.
subj. 144, kuþe pt. s. 332, cuþe 360; þaref pr. s.
146; wot 1 pr. s. 61, wostu 2 pr. s. 334, wot pr.
s. 151, ?wte 2 pr. s. subj. 318, wiste pt. s. 103,
wuste pt. pl. 10, nuȝte ȝe 2 pt. pl. 394; schaltu 2 pr.
s. 165, schal pr. s. 143, shal 258, shulle 1 pr. s.
subj. 320, 323, sholdest 2 pt. s. 54, scholde pt. s.
371, schulde 390; mai 1 pr. s. 184, miȝt 2 pr. s. 64 (3),
mist 78, mai pr. s. 141, muȝe 1 pr. pl. 138, pr. pl.
subj. 62, miȝtest 2 pt. s. 192, miȝte pt. s. 42, mihte
we 1 pt. pl. 392, miȝte pt. s. subj. 411; mote 1 pr. s.
subj. 52; bon inf. 198, bo 146, beo 378, ?be 296, am 1 pr.
s. 212, icham 126, nam 387, art 2 pr. s. 38, nart 285, is
pr. s. 34, his 404, nis 162, boþ pr. pl. 75 (5), beoþ 418,
bo 2 pr. s. subj. 127,
563
pr. s. subj. 107 (4), bo 1 pr. pl. subj. 137, 2 s.
imp. 197, beoþ 2 pl. imp. 378; was 1 pt. s. 1, were
pt. pl. 16, pt. s. subj. 21, nere 22, weren pt. pl.
subj. 76, were 305; wille 1 pr. s. 198, wilt 2 pr. s.
121, nel tu 106, wile pr. s. 170, wle 284, wulle ȝe 2 pr.
pl. 373, nulleþ pr. pl. 407, wille 2 pr. s. subj. 77,
pr. s. subj. 144, wile 141, wille pr. pl. subj. 222, wolde
1 pt. s. 128, nolde 115, woldest 2 pt. s. 84, wolde pt.
s. 70, walde 370; don inf. 115, do 374, 1 pr. s. 245,
dest 2 pr. s. 49, 237, dost 307, dostu 174, 289, deþ pr.
s. 359, doþ 112, 2 pr. pl. 377, pr. pl. 113, misdoð
413, do we 1 pr. pl. subj. 424, do 2 s. imp. 431; gon
inf. 170, goþ pr. pl. 221.
The adverb aiware 172, widely, OE. ǣghwǣr has added e; B-T.
quotes ǣghwāre from Lye. Adverbs and prepositions in -an
have -e, abute 16, bute 403, buue 164,
honne 66 (heonane), soþþe 240, vorre 243, ine (innan)
266 (3), upe (uppan) 351, touore 426, witute 139, but bituxen 390:
mid 18 (4) and mide 411, oft 36 and ofte 81 occur.
(2) Of J. The few divergences are
briefly indicated. Nouns: eyen pl. n. 75, song s. n.
259; adjectives: vuele s. a. neut. wk. 8, iliche
s. n. f. str. 235, o a. s. f. 403, non
s. d. m. 168, icundere s. n. neut. 85
(unmetrical), beter s. n. m. str. 330, 331. The pronoun
of the first person is often ic 245, 385; vr pl. g. 141; heo
s. n. m. 23, 280, 375, 394, he
s. n. f. 19, hi pl. n. 76, my
s. a. m. 36, þi s. a. m. 264, þin
s. d. m. 125, þine s. d. f. 383, eure
s. d. m. 379; þe s. n. f. 26, þon
s. d. neut. 350; þisse s. d. neut. 437, þeos
s. a. f. 133; oþres s. g. 9, 11. Tellest
226, biholdeð 30, helpeð 127 are not syncopated; wenest 231, hateþ,
luuyeþ 186, abit 421; wite 2 pr. s. subj. 318, unwryen pp.
118 (wrigen), vnne 1 pr. s. 382, beo inf. 198; beon
pr. pl. subj. 137. Noteworthy are muchele adv. 413, ne
conjunction 74, than.
Vocabulary: French are acorde 137, afoled 162, castel
131, certes 412, clerkes clerekes 340, 347, fals 166, gente 160, granti
graunti 157 (the latter Anglo-French), grucching 301, ipeint 76, kanunes
347, maister maistre 147, 421, pes pays 373 (the former phonetic, the
latter traditional spelling), plait plaid 5, 380, plaidi 140, plaiding
12, rente 410, schirme 222, possibly crei 251. Scandinavian are ilete
lete 281, 358, 35, ille 299, lah(fulnesse) 384, nai 202, skentinge 324,
sckile 142, þoȝ 220, wronge 152, possibly wailawai 176 and wise 54, if
it means song. Noteworthy is the large number of expressive words
bearing a popular stamp, such as clackes, clechest, crempe, galegale,
misrempe, snepe, spale, totose, ȝollest, ȝoȝelinge.
Dialect: The poem was presumably written in Dorsetshire and
so in the dialect of the Middle South; the evidence of the rhymes
confirms this. But in its present form there are considerable traces of
Anglian influence, and these, as appearing equally in both manuscripts,
may be set down
564
to the transcriber of their common exemplar or to one of his
predecessors.
Metre: The short rhymed couplet, in its original French
form, has regularly eight syllables, with masculine ending or nine with
feminine ending. But the Anglo-French poets, like Chardry, whose Petit
Plet, ‘estrif mut delitus’ is in both our manuscripts, allow themselves
more freedom, and the form of the verse in ON is varied by all the
licences of native English prosody. The types are i. masculine ending,
eight syllables, four stresses, iambic rhythm, as, þat plaít | was stíf
| and stárc | and stróng 5; so 7, 8, 29, 30, 43, 44, 174, 176, 183-185,
248, 250, 252, 256, 260, 338, 353, 394: i a. the same, but with trochaic
beginning, as, Mé is | þe wúrs | þat ích | þe só 34, 149, 319: i b.
seven syllables with light syllable wanting in first foot, as, þíd|er
fúnd|eþ eúr|ich
mán 337: ii. feminine ending, nine syllables,
four stresses, iambic rhythm, as, þat ál|re wórst|e þát | hi wúste 10,
12, 15, 17, 19, 20, 27, 35, 36, 40, 45, 46, 55, 56, 67, 69, 72, 82, 93,
95, 96, 99, 105 and 104 other lines: ii a. the same with trochaic
beginning, as, wénst þu | þat ích | ne cún|ne sínge 47, 38, 52, 78, 80,
98, 121, 122, 215, 222, 225, 244, 295, 302, 304, 318, 325, 334, 342,
349, 352, 406, 417, 424: ii b. eight syllables with light syllable
wanting in first foot, as, ánd | me schíld|e wít | þe bléte 57, 70, 71,
87, 91, 110, 117, 131, 147, 148, 217, 378. The unstressed element in a
foot is doubled in i. þi bód|i is shórt | þi swór|ẹ is smál 73, þu
chát|ẹrest so dóþ | on ír|ish préost 238, Hit lúu|eþ þúst|er and hát|iet
líȝt 186, þat þín|e píp|inge nís | ilích 232: i a. Grétter|ẹ is þin
héu|ed þán | þu ál 74, Cértes | cwaþ þe húl|e þát | is sóð 412: i b. þát
| ho sóng | hirẹ a bís|emár 104: ii. Eurich þíng | mai lós|en hís |
godhéde 267, Me lúst|e bet spét|en þán|e sínge 39, 62, 317, and þúȝ|te
wel uúl | of þár|e húle 31, 425, þoȝ crów|e bigréd|ẹ him bí | þe mérshe
220, þe níȝt|ingál|e
bigón | þe spéche 13, 116, 154, 187,
253, 262, 266, 354, þe wér|ẹ icúnd|ur to ón|e frógge 85, alsó | ho
hád|dẹ one frógg|ẹ isuólȝe 102, Þo quáþ | þe húl|e wo schál | us séme
143: ii a. wénes | tu þat háu|eck bó|þe wórse 219, álle | þat ihér|eþ
þín|ẹ ibére 178, Schíld þin|e svík|eldom vrám | þe líȝte 119, 234, 359;
ii b. Hó | ne míȝt|e no léng | biléue 42, 264, 347, þár | þo v́l|e sóng
| hire tíde 26. The light syllable is missing in i. and mák|ẹst þine
sóng | só | unwúrþ 255, He wún|eþ át | pórt|es hóm 395, Ich síng|e
bét | þan þú | dést 237, vor suích | worþ bóld | ȝif þú | flíȝst 283,
284: ii. On mé | hít | is wél | iséne 211, Ich wót | þat þú | árt |
unmílde 61, 303, 390, wel fíȝt | þat wel flíȝt | seíþ | þe wíse 132,
werẹ aférd | ho spác | bóld|e tále 288, Bet þúȝt|e þe dreím | þat hé |
wére 21: ii a. Nís he | vor þé | nóȝt | afóled 162, Bít me | þat ích |
shúll|e sínge
565
323. Inversion of the accent is fairly frequent, as i. Þat ích | shúlle
| to hír|e fló 320, An díht | and wrít | máni | wisdóm 399, He náu|eþ
bút|ẹ óne | woníng 403: ii. Ne hélpþ | nóȝt þat | þu bó | to þríste 127,
392, 408, 425, Þo stód | on óld | stóc þar | bisíde 25, 32, 199, 372,
381, 422, vor hír|e lú|uẹ óne | skentínge 324, 396. Synizesis takes
place in monie 72, 193, 398 (pronounce monye), schamie 117, schuniet
185, hatiet 186, murie 261, unmurie 262, lilie 317. The e of a middle
syllable after the stress in a trisyllabic word suffers syncope; certain
instances are, sumẹre 1, 327, diȝẹle 2, oþẹres 9, 11, vuẹle 63, fuȝẹle
64, hauẹkes 207, chatẹrest 238, wintẹre, ȝomẹre 293, sumẹre 294, betẹrẹ
330, 331, 401, steuẹne 345, 363, houẹne 346, 350, also warẹuore 333,
morẹȝeninge 361, probable are narẹwe 68, eȝẹne 75, svikẹdom 123, as
avoiding a three syllable foot. With regard to -est, -eþ of the sing.
present, the only certain examples of syncope are woldẹst 84, cumẹþ
298, in all other possible cases there is the alternative of a three
syllable foot. But taking into account the preponderance of forms
syncopated by spelling, and the dissyllabic norm of the foot in the
French verse which served as model, it seems more likely that the poet
scanned þretẹst 83, hauẹst 109, speddẹstu 125, schirchẹst, ȝollẹst 179,
miȝtẹst 192, wenẹst 195, bicumẹþ 207, wenịst 231, singẹst 247, 310, 175,
crowẹþ 251, singẹþ 292, forbernẹst 297, cumẹþ 298, hauẹþ 356, nullẹþ
407: similarly werẹn 76, ovẹr 64, euẹr 421 are probable. What has been
said about syncope applies also to the relative spheres of elision and
hiatus. The letter which suffers elision is weak, mostly inflectional,
final e before an initial vowel or pronominal h, presumably also before
an inorganic h as in hule; there is no elision in the case of such words
as me 38, 164, we 133, he 303, ope 124. It certainly takes place in Bet
þúȝt|e þát | he wér|ẹ ishóte 23, and in the same position in 50, 63, 75,
77, 81, 123, 125, 137, 160, 161, 168, 177, 178, 181, 236, 257, 277, 281,
308, 315, 336, 346, 364, 397, 428, alsó | ho hád|dẹ one frógg|ẹ isuólȝe
102, þát | ho sóng | hirẹ a bí | semár 104, Þo húl|ẹ one wíl|e hí |
biþóȝte 155. Hiatus, which is the maintenance of e under the same
conditions, is certain in ll. 28, 31, 92, 140, 163, 168, 173, 227, 268,
þat þẹ húl|e hád|de hír|ẹ iséd 273, 289, 305, 344, 386, 409, 418, 425.
In all other cases the choice lies between a three syllable foot with
hiatus and a two syllable foot with elision; the latter is probably to
be preferred.
The few lines which are metrically faulty are easily amended, Ilóm|e
þu dést | me múch|ẹle gráme 49, þu cúþ|est þát | þu árt | unwíȝt 90, þu
féd|ẹst on hóm | a fúl|ne fóde 94, 107 MS. J is correct, þan þú | mid
áll|e þín|e stréngþe 129, 164 MS. J is correct, þat hé | for þé | fálse
| dom déme 166, Ne maí | no mán | þarẹuór|ẹ me schénde 210, vor þí | ich
566
lóþ | am smál|e fóȝle 213, 235 MS. J is correct, Ích | do gód|e mid
mín|e þróte 245, and éu|re seíst | þin ón|e sóng 249, Ac nó|þẹles spác |
he bold|elíche 279, þu fár|est ál|so dóþ|þe ílle 299, To uór|e þe kíng|e
þáh | heo schólde 371, An dó | þan kíng|e swúch|e scháme 374, þeos
rích|e mén | múchel | misdóð 413, 437 MS. J is correct. Peculiar in
rhythm are, and mák|ẹst þine sóng | só | unwúrþ 255, þat he míȝt|ẹ héom
il|óme | be míde 411. The rhymes are generally correct, but kunne :
honne 65, cunde : schende 209, foȝle : þuuele 213, ȝomere : sumere 293,
stude : mide 410 are inexact. The poet was all the same a very skilful
metrist.
Introduction: There has been a wide difference of opinion
as to the time when ON was written, but the weight of recent authority
is in favour of a date somewhere about A.D. 1220. The references in the poem to passing
events are mostly vague or obscure; only the passage ‘þe king Henri |
Jesus his soule do merci’, ON 1091, 2, which can refer to no other than
Henry the Second, fixes a superior limit of A.D. 1189. It would equally appear to exclude the
reign of Henry the Third, for, as ten Brink concedes, such an indefinite
expression would hardly be used when another Henry was on the throne. It
is further arguable that its use points to a time when the death of the
king was recent. Again such a reference as that to the minstrel
go-between saved by the intervention of King Henry the Second from the
vengeance of a wronged husband would be to a recent event. Furthermore,
it would give point to the expression, ‘ȝet nis he (i. e. the king)
nouþer ded ne lame’, 171/375, if it were referred to the good peace kept
by the Justiciar Hubert Walter, during Richard the First’s absence from
England in A.D. 1194-8. These external
considerations, slight though they be, are in favour of the end of that
reign as the date of the composition of the poem. The stage of
development reached by the language may be held to support this view.
Our manuscripts are copies of a copy, probably not far removed from the
original poem. That copy is primitive in the fullness of the
inflections, the extensive preservation of grammatical gender and the
form of the new diphthongs.
Of the author nothing is known. A certain Johan of Guldeuorde is
recorded in a copied note in MS. J as declining to sing more, but any
connexion of his with ON cannot be determined. If the author were the
Nicholas de Guldeuorde mentioned in the poem, it would lend a
characteristic spice of humour to the excellent testimonial which he
gives himself (157/147-170, 173/389-401). His name indicates that he was
a native either of Guildford in Surrey or of Guldeford near Rye in
Sussex.
567
What sort of court he presided over cannot be determined; he may have
been bailiff of the hundred court, or steward of a manor, or commissary
for the neighbouring Abbotsbury. The attempt made by Gadow to identify
him with a certain Nicholaus Capellanus, who appears in the diocese of
Salisbury in A.D. 1209, 1220, is not
convincing.
The poem is in the favourite débat form of the contemporary
French literature. The Owl is the Cleric, living a secluded life under a
strict rule, the Nightingale is the Minstrel, amateur of the open air
and vagabond freedom, the Wren is a poet, like Philippe de Thaün, who
has gained a secure place at Court. Though he tries to hold the balance
even, the author’s secret sympathies are with the Nightingale; he had
been himself sometime a wandering scholar.
Read 150/16 þat, 152/57 wit, 154/104 bysemar, 160/183 nyht, 160/185
vych, 160/191 quaþ, 166/289, 167/289 Þule,
167/310 eue, 168/336 Murehþe ilyche, 168/339 holy.
The references are to C, unless J is prefixed.
1. sumere, summer,
adj. s. d. agreeing with dale; a summer valley. Gadow
compares OE. sumer-lida and similar compounds. But Stratmann
explains it as s. d. f. of sum, certain.
2. diȝele: comp. ‘on
ænne swiðe faire stude. | in ane dale deope; diȝelen
bihælues,’ L 26933. ‘North of Portisham is a valley now called
Mystecomb, formed by Hampton and Ridge Hills, and on the east side of
the former are some pits, where the hundred courts were formerly held
and hundred silver paid,’ Hutchins, Dorsetshire, i. 556. Was this the
scene of the ‘plait’?
5. starc: comp. ‘þat
fiht was swiþe strong; swiþe starc and swiþe lang,’ L 4170,
MS. O.
6. among, at
intervals, at times: comp. 152/81; ‘þar was weping strong;
þar was gredinge among,’ L 23563, MS. O, and see KH 1527 note. Similarly
‘bitweonen’, 132/28; ‘And also cussed his feet amyd’, CM 14015,
MS. T.
7. sval, was puffed
out with anger, like L. tumeo. Rare in this absolute use; for a common
expression comp. ‘þin heorte in wið þe swelleð of sar grome,’ HM 31/27:
see also 155/101.
11. hure and hure:
see 15/91 note.
J 13. þo speke, then to speak: the scribe had before him þo
speche, the speech, þo representing OE. þā, s. acc. f. of
se, usually þe in these texts. Mistaking þo for the adverb,
meaning then, he altered speche into speke, spoiling the rhyme. (Breier,
125.)
14. breche probably
represents OE. bræc, brec, which occurs in the
568
boundaries of charters and appears to mean land left untilled among
cultivated fields, such as would be covered with underwood; it would go
well with hurne in its dialectal meaning of ‘a nook of land
projecting into another parish, district or field.’ The phrase would
then mean, in a corner of a spinney, just the position where the
nightingale would feel safe; see 153/59, 60. Mätzner takes the word to
mean fallowland; there is a dialectic breck, mostly northern and not
recorded for the south and a literary word break, given in NED under
date 1674, with that meaning. beche in J is generally identified
with Layamon’s bach, bæch, valley, but Kenyon holds that it represents
OE. bēce, beech, if so, hurne must have its secondary sense of
hiding place.
J 16. þat: a scribe’s mistake for þar.
17. ore: OE.
ānre, s. d. f.: hegge is descended from a
strong fem. *hecg, but it is treated as masc. at l. 59, perhaps
by confusion with OE. hege. waste: written for vaste, that
is, faste (comp. ON, J 796), which Breier takes for an adverb qualifying
þicke, very thick. But there is no evidence in ME. for the adverb,
except with verbs and participles. It is an adjective, secure, safe, as
in ‘wel he makede his castles; treowe ⁊ swiðe uæste,’ L
11897; comp. 153/53, 56-60, 157/130, 131, or possibly, dense.
18. Tall grasses and green
flag plants grew up through the hedge.
19. rise, boughs;
comp. ‘blisse was among þe rise,’ ON 1664.
20. auele: see
132/9 note.
21. he: see 135/127 note.
22. þan, than
that.
26. hire tide, her
hours; see 163/230 note, and comp. ‘Gif
preost on gesetne timan tída ne ringe oððe tida ne singe, gebete þæt,’
Liebermann, Gesetze, i. 382/36.
27. ⁊: comp. 81/82
note. bigrowe, overgrown: comp. ‘mid iui grene al bi-growe,’ ON
617.
30. ouerseȝ, looked
down at from her higher position: comp. 34/75.
31. þuȝte:
impersonal; supply hire from the subject of the preceding sentence:
wl is predicative adjective.
35. lete,
behaviour, i.e. hooting: comp. 165/281, 171/358.
37. atfliþ, takes
flight, deserts me: comp. ‘expavit cor meum et emotum est de loco suo,’
Job xxxvii. 1. Mostly with acc., but comp. ‘leste þe heorte
etfleo ⁊ wende ut,’ AR 50/19. falt, folds, collapses: comp. ‘and
þi tunge foldet,’ PRL 250/3, 249/2; OEM 101/4 and see 2/19 note.
38. when you thrust
yourself on me. Comp. ‘Bruttes him þrungen to; þræfliche
swiðe,’ L 27796.
569
39. Me luste bet,
it would please me better.
40. of, by reason
of, as the result of.
41. fort: comp.
163/248 and see 72/179 note. for in
J is due to the scribe who avoids the unusual word; comp. 162/248,
166/310.
42. bileue, hold
in, keep still; a somewhat forced sense.
44. atschet, shot
out, drove out of her body; its subject and that of warp in the next
line is heo, contained in the preceding hire: comp. 98/71. The editors,
however, treat fnast as the subject, but in the only other place where
the verb occurs, ‘Ah þah mi lif me beo at-schote,’ ON 1623 it is
transitive.
45. warp, sent
forth; see 13/45.
48. writelinge,
‘trilling, singing in shakes and flourishes,’ Specimens; a meaning
apparently deduced from the context here and ON 914, the only places
where the word occurs. It may be a miswriting of wrixelinge or
wriselinge; OE. wrixlian, to modulate, vary the voice, as in ‘Ic
þurh muþ sprece monȝum reordum. | wrencum singe, wrixle ȝeneahhe |
heafodwoþe, hlude cirme,’ Riddle ix (by some interpreted of the
nightingale), Grein, iii. 189/1, to which Toller parallels ‘Vox mea
diversis variatur pulcra figuris,’ Aldhelm, 252/27; ‘wrixleð woðcræfte
. . . | beorhtan reorde,’ Phoenix 127.
49, 50. grame . . .
tone . . . schame: comp. 40/165 note.
51. on, within the
compass of, under.
52. May it so happen that
I have the opportunity, a parenthesis; ⁊ in the next line is
equivalent to and if.
54. wise may mean,
song.
56.
loki—bare, guard myself against the open, i.e. keep in my
thicket, as at l. 59, 155/106. Other adjectives used as nouns are blete,
l. 57, unsheltered place; woȝe ll. 120, 154, crooked conduct; harde, ON
459, 527, bitter weather, 703, difficulty; toȝte 703, puzzling
situation. loki wit appears to be without parallel, but wiþ is
common in conjunction with similar verbs, see 48/299 note; from is usual, 149/77 as with schilde,
153/62, 157/119.
63. tukest: the
usual construction of this verb in OE. and ME. is seen in, ‘þa halgan
. . . to ealre yrmðe tucode,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 494/106
(afflicted the Saints with every kind of misery); ‘ha tukeð ure godes to
balewe ⁊ to bismere,’ SK 551. Whether to is to be inserted, or wroþe
(which is a noun, ON 944) and vuele are to be regarded as adverbs, in
any case the verb must have a direct object; over is probably a
misreading of the common original MS. for oþer; comp. ON 1524 where J
has correctly oþer and C over. The mistake would lead to the omission of
to before wroþe.
570
The sense then is, thou dost harass with evil and harm other small birds
wherever thou canst. fugele as pl. acc. in rhyme can be
supported by bridde : amidde, ON 123; wrenche : atprenche, id. 813.
67. bischricheþ,
screech at; apparently only here. Comp. 160/215.
68. narewe,
strictly, harshly; comp. 74/203 note. biledet, treat, like L.
afficere; comp. ‘He iseyh hw ihesu crist. wes vuele biled,’ OEM 45/278;
‘And luþre heom biledeþ | Mid pykes and myd eaule,’ id. 83/329. The word
appears to descend as to form from OE. belǣdan, to lead (astray),
and as to meaning from OE. belecgan, to treat (ill), afflict,
through the intermediary of their common pp. belēd. The
expression is somewhat like ‘mettre à l’estroict, to put vnto the
pinch,’ Cotgrave.
70. Hire þonkes,
gladly; see 10/167 note.
72. in monie volde,
lit., in many folds, that is, in many respects. The phrase seems to be a
mistaken resolution of some such adverbial expression as *on
manigfealdum; in ME. on manyfolde, bi manifold are found, as well as
many a folde. A natural extension is seen in, ‘ne uint he red in one
(none J) uolde,’ ON 696.
76. Riȝt swo, just
as if; comp. 155/98, 163/222.
78. cliure, claw:
six times in ON, only once again in ME., see ES xxxi. 7, 17.
‘clifra, ungularum,’ OE. Glosses, ed. Napier, 135/5341,
148/458.
80. owel: see
58/67 note.
J 81. euer among: see 148/6
note.
83. to: the
construction appears to be quite isolated, for þrēatian, þreatien
take the acc. of the person or thing threatened. The simple
dat. is seen in, ‘swiþe hii gonne þretie; Arthur þan
kinge,’ L 20341, MS. O. Comp. ‘escade to,’ 77/44 note.
85. Lit. It would be more
natural to thee in respect of a frog, i.e. A frog would suit you better.
to one frogge is the virtual subject of were. The same
construction is implied in ‘Ov nas neuer icunde þarto,’ ON 114.
Different is ‘Ne lust him nu to none unrede,’ 159/168, for lusten has a
prepositional construction (see 52/383
note), while icunde has not. For the usual construction of icunde,
see 3/32 note.
86. cogge: probably
for cog-stone, a stone propped up at the edge.
88. cunde . . .
riȝte: datives singular.
90. on should be
omitted, it is unmetrical and, no doubt, due to un- in the following
word. unwiȝt, hideous.
92. Bi, with
reference to; see 4/30, 13/18, and comp. the similar use of ‘on’ in l.
94.
94. In them (i.e. in their
case) thou rearest a very foul brood. For on hom comp. 161/211
note.
571
100. noþerward,
downward: comp. 56/51.
101. to svolle
&c.: comp. 149/7; ‘heorte to-bollen ⁊ to-swollen,’ AR 282/8.
104. a bisemar, a
mockery, but ‘a bisemere,’ ON 1311 means in mockery.
106. bare: see
152/56.
107. þare: so the
MS.; Wells thinks it a scribe’s mistake for ware representing
hwæþer, but C has elsewhere only hwaþer, wather, hweþer, weþer,
and the interrogative pronoun is apparently not contracted. Probably the
scribe has left out the first syllable and has been influenced in
writing the second by bare in the preceding line.
109. The nightingale
answers.
110. Ne kepich
noȝt &c., Nor do I care for your clawing me, i.e. I would rather
that you did not claw me.
112. tonge, pair
of tongs.
113.
so—ilike, as those like you do, after the manner of your
kind.
118. svikelhede,
attempt at deception: apparently only here and at ON 838.
120. And conceal your
wickedness beneath an appearance of righteousness. For the combination
comp. ‘myd wowe ne myd ryhte,’ OEM 49/412; ‘þat is woh ⁊ na wiht riht,’
L 4333, 5043, 6373; ‘Man mai þer of et inoȝ | Al wiþ riȝt and noȝt wiþ
woȝ,’ Heuser, Kildare-Gedichte, 146/62.
J 121. The second þu is a scribe’s mistake for þin.
125. unwrenche,
evil tricks; comp. ‘For þine fule sunnen | ⁊ for þin uniwrenche,’ OEM
174/93, and for the rhyme 29/2.
127. to þriste:
see 30/17.
128. liste . . .
strengþe are often contrasted, ‘Betere is liste þen luðer strencðe’,
AR 268/27; ‘hit wes ȝare iqueðen | þat betere is liste; þene
ufel strenðe. | for mid liste me mai ihalden; þat strengðe ne
mai iwalden,’ L 17209.
130. on brede . . .
lengþe goes with god, good in all dimensions, in every
respect: comp. ‘A fairer child neuer i ne siȝ, | Neiþer a lingþe ne on
brade,’ Sir Beues 536, with Kölbing’s note.
132. ‘Wel fyht þat wel
flyþ,’ Hendyng, Böddeker, AE. Dicht. 291/77; ‘Mieuz vaut bone fuie que mauvaise
atente,’ Li Proverbe au Vilain, no. 64; ‘þu most turne þe rug ȝif þu
wult ouercumen ⁊ wið fluht fehten,’ HM 17/28.
133. lete awei,
give up, drop; comp. 50/348 note.
135. fo we on,
let us proceed; comp. 143/67.
572
136. wsome:
miswritten for ysome, concordant, peaceable, which is adj. as at
171/378: Kenyon points out that the word-order is idiomatic. In J,
some, concord, is a noun; comp. 70/158 note.
137. at one
acorde: the phrases at accord, in accord and with one accord are all
found, but this combination is at any rate rare: a similar tautology is
seen in ‘Two dogges and one bone | Maye never accorde in one,’ Rel. Ant.
i. 233.
140. foȝe,
fitness, decency: OE. fōg, a joint. Kock (Anglia, xxv. 323)
translates, ‘reason, reasonableness, justice and moderation.’ Wells
compares G. mit Fug und Recht. The word does not occur elsewhere in ME.;
soþe in J is a substitute for a word not known to the scribe.
143. us seme,
reconcile us, settle our dispute. OE. sēman.
148, 149. Comp. 18/16,
30. In J 149, worde is faultily repeated from l. 148.
151. wot insiȝt
in, has skill in: the usual verb is seen in ‘insiht he
cuðe; a winde and a mone,’ L 30497.
153, 154. Comp. 157/120
and 161/186.
J 155. bihouhte appears to be a scribal error for biþouhte,
which occurs in the same text in a similar line, ‘Ful wel myd rede hire
biþouhte,’ l. 704. It can hardly represent OE. *behogode or
*behogde, pasts of behogian, behycgan.
158. wile, at one
time.
161. suþe acoled,
made cold or grown cold. In J, nu þe may mean now for thee; Skeat
takes it for nuþe, now: but the scribe had probably suþe in his
original.
164. Should condemn me
and give you the upper hand: legge goes better with adun than with buue.
Comp. ‘That brynges me vnder ⁊ not above,’ Ipomedon 43/1428, 106/3681;
‘who so . . . may not come to his above,’ id. 1/5 with
Kölbing’s note; ‘Leve thy resoun and bileve in the wondir | For feith is
aboven, and reson is undir,’ Rel. Ant. i. 127.
167. him: see
13/34 and add ‘Þe ston hym hys of swiche grace,’ KH MS. O. 585; ‘For
horn hym was so longe,’ id. 977. fastrede, steadfast of
purpose.
168. to: comp.
52/383.
170. a, on.
171. ȝare, J
ware: the same variation occurs ON 488, 860. ȝare is the
better reading.
181. þinchest: a
scribe’s mistake for þincheþ. snepe, foolish; apparently only
here: now a Lincolnshire dialect word.
184. þar of:
comp. ‘Þes meiden wes awundret swiðe of þes wordes,’
573
SJ 37/1; ‘þe sunne wundrieð of faire,’ OEH ii. 19/29. For of =
at, see 121/132.
186. Comp. 159/154.
187. þat, to
which: see 44/250, 257 note, 46/292 note.
188. to his dede,
as accompaniment of his actions.
194. Let thy tongue have
a holiday. spale: OE. spala, a substitute, spelian,
to take the place of another, ME. spelien mostly means to use sparingly.
A related word is spell, a neutral word with meaning like þroȝe l. 196,
a stretch of time; so a spell of work, a spell of rest: in Somerset
dialect it means relaxation, in Australia, cessation from labour.
200. riȝte soþe:
comp. 156/140. spelle, long story; comp. 175/437.
202. nich ne nay,
not I nor nay.
203. lust:
imperative, as at l. 199; but Skeat, ‘I am pleased to tell,’ which would
require me lust.
208. wune:
miswritten for wunne as the rhyme shows. The original probably had
ƿ̇unne, which the scribe of J copied as ynne.
209. me draȝe to,
incline towards, act in accordance with. The physical sense, betake
oneself, is seen in ‘þes duc mid his drihte; to þare sæ him
droh,’ L 92, and intransitively at 32/47. Comp. also ‘heald þin cunde,’
follow thy nature, OEH ii. 31/6.
210. me, as in J,
seems necessary as the object of schende, immediately before which it
should be inserted.
211 is formal; comp. ‘on
me hit is isene,’ ON 367; ‘On þe hit is wel eþ sene,’ OEH ii. 255/5;
Minot viii. 79 note. on me, in my case; for this use of on, comp.
155/94; similar is bi, 4/30. hit represents l. 212.
212. vor riȝte
cunde, it is purely because of my nature that I am so keen.
215, 216. Comp. 153/67,
68. to me ledeþ, lead against me, bring to attack me; comp. ‘Me
þinkþ þu ledest ferde to me,’ ON 1672.
220. bi,
near.
221. goþ: go
might have been expected, as bigrede is subjunctive.
222. Riȝt so:
comp. 153/76.
223. rede:
dative.
225. me . . . of,
about me; comp. 1/3. Þet in J is a mistake for ȝet.
227. woning:
comp. 159/176, 182.
228. to ihire, to
be heard, to listen to; comp. 159/180.
229. efne,
uniformly, without trillings; comp. 153/48.
230. Mid fulle
dreme, with good round volume of sound, in contrast with the
nightingale’s thin shrill pipe, ll. 235, 236.
574
236. weode
unripe, half-grown weed, like Milton’s ‘scrannel pipes of wretched
straw.’
239-246. a riȝte
time. The owl takes credit for singing, not all night like the
nightingale, l. 247, but only to call the religious to their hours,
an eue, Vespers (æfen-sang); bedtime, Compline
(niht-sang); ad middelniȝte, Mattins with Lauds
(ūht-sang); dairim, Prime (prīm-sang), ‘þærrihte
upasprungenum dægriman dægredsang sy begunnen,’ Benedictine Rule, ed.
Schröer, 32/22. S. Brendan in his wanderings came to the bird’s
paradise where ‘þe foweles sunge ek here matyns:
wel riȝt, þo hit was tyme, | ⁊ of þe sauter seide þe uers: ⁊ siþþe also
prime, | ⁊ vnderne siþþe ⁊ middai: ⁊ afterwardes non, | ⁊ eche tyde
songen of þe dai: as cristene men scholde don,’ Legendary, ed. Horstman,
225/223. note, employment, here divine service; comp. 74/210. The
nightingale claims her share in this at ll. 347-353.
248. fort: see
72/179 note.
251. crei: found
here only; it has been explained as crowing, or crying, it can hardly be
connected with F. cri, but it may possibly be, as Breier suggests,
connected with OE. crāwan. More likely it is an imitative word
invented by the writer.
252. þat, so
that.
256. A mixed
construction combining (i) that one esteems nothing of thy song, values
thy song at nothing, and (ii) thy song is worth nothing; with the latter
comp. ‘nis noht wurð þratte; buten þer beo dede æt,’ L 26555,
with the former 124/265 note; ‘Thei tolde right nauȝt of thyn awe,’ Laud
Troy Book, 2178. of þar, thereof, of thy song.
258. wel
unwreste, right feebly.
261. Be the song
pleasing beyond all measure, ever so pleasing. ne does not
negative the verb, but goes with and strengthens neuer; comp. ‘Ne beo he
nefre swa riche, forð he scal þenne is dei cumeð,’ OEH 35/21; similarly
23/168, 43/225; ‘treouðe nefde he nane; to nauer nane monne,’
L 25471.
262. þat is not
the correlative of so in the preceding line, which is a conditional
clause; it is an illogical repetition of ‘þat’ in ll. 256, 258: the
sense is, though the song be ever so pleasing, it must appear
unpleasing, if it continues &c. For ne, see 25/240.
263. ouer
unwille, ‘beyond what is desirable,’ Specimens, but in the glossary
unwille is translated, displeasure. Wells takes unwille as an adverb
qualified by ouer, ‘too unpleasantly.’ Probably ouer is written
for ower which with unwille would form an adverbial phrase,
against your will, or pleasure, representing OE. ūrum unwillum,
the latter
575
element being pl. d. of unwilla; comp. ‘ure gast biþ swiþe
wide farende urum unwillum,’ Boethius 152/4. Similar combinations
descending from OE. unwill are seen in ‘þe man . . .
here wuneð on wanrede ⁊ þoleð his unwille hwile druie, ⁊ hwile wete,’
OEH ii. 123/5; ‘hire unwilles,’ 140/25; ‘hire unwil,’ 141/136, HM 31/32;
‘min unwil,’ SM 13/3: see 140/25 note.
264. aspille,
waste.
268. unmeþe:
comp. 118/47.
276. so foruorþ
iladde, carried so far, i.e. she had said so much. foruorþ,
lit. far onwards; but forþ comes to mean simply, far; comp. ‘uorþ ase ȝe
muwen,’ AR 46/10; ‘ouer al ase forð as imei,’ SJ 47/6. With
iladde comp. ‘Of ðis kinge wil we leden song,’ GE 699; ‘talewise
men þe speches driuen,’ OEH ii. 193/27.
278. ifare,
‘conveyed,’ Specimens, as if a strong pp. from the weak verb
ferian. But the writer has elsewhere (l. 1709) ifare as
pp. of faran, and the sense yielded, ‘should not be
presented, conveyed, aright,’ does not suit the context. Weorðan,
wurðen are sometimes used with past participles of intransitive verbs,
‘Denum eallum wearð | æfter þam wælræse willa gelumpen,’ Beowulf 823;
‘swa hit agangen wearð | eorla manegum,’ id. 1234; ‘þa þat forme
ȝer; wharð forð igan,’ L 4942; and similarly ‘þe arcebiscop
ongan to tellende . . . hu hit gefaran wes,’ AS. Chron. ed.
Plummer, i. 130/30: the natural meaning of ariht faran is, to
fare well, to prosper, and the present phrase may well mean, that her
answer might not turn out prospered, well.
281. berþ grete
ilete, assumes a haughty bearing; comp. 151/35, 171/358, and for
pl. 110/273, 129/35.
282. So that he do not,
through cowardice, give up his case, give way. hit is a vague
object; comp. 42/214 note.
284. svicst: see
footnote: Wells adopts the correction of the MS. and reads vicst,
fightest, and Breier thinks the original had fihst; in Specimens
niswicst is read without reference, and explained, ‘ceasest not.’ The
readings of the MSS. may be accounted for thus. The author probably
wrote biswicst (comp. 155/114, ON 930), deludest by a show of fight; the
copyist of the exemplar common to CJ, with iswiken (geswīcan),
cease, in his mind, altered to iswicst; C copied that, but noting its
unfitness emended it to vicst, spoiling the rhythm, while J rejected i
and adopted swykst, deceivest.
286. He will make a
barrow-pig of a boar, i.e. he will climb down, from a fierce animal he
will become quite tame. The boar is typically fierce, ‘brem as a bare,’
Sir Degrevant, 1240.
576
298. cumeþ to
londe, comes to dwell with us, like ‘Þa æstre wes
aȝeonge; and sumer com to londe,’ L 24241 (‘to toune,’ MS. O). See
KH 153 note.
299. þe ille, the
evil one, the devil; in modern dialect, the ill man, the ill thief:
comp. ‘wurse’ 98/81. Wells says ‘the evil man.’
305, 306. Nor would he
mind though flocks (coarse felted stuff made of refuse of wool and
cotton) were muddled up with fine carded wool and hair, that is, he
would take a perverse delight in a confusion which would be troublesome
to sort out. roȝte: pt. s. subj. appears to owe its time
to wolde. With flokkes comp. ‘xv capella nigra
. . . falsi operis et mixti de lana et flokkes,’ Munim. Gildh.
Lond. iii. 433 (quoted in NED, s.v. flock2). Imeind
bi: mengan, mengen mostly take wiþ, ON 131 or mid, 151/18,
38/142, ON 870; bi appears to be quite isolated.
310. fort: see
72/179.
312. for mine
þinge, on my account: comp. ‘Ða ic þas stemne gehyrde and for minum
þingum ongeat beon geclypode,’ Ælf. Lives ii. 32/485; ‘þat ich for þine
þinge; mid sæxe me of-stinge,’ L 5033.
313. blisseþ hit
can mean only, causes it to rejoice, comp. 14/50, 52. Alteration to hine
would give a common reflexive use, rejoices; comp. ‘Ne mei nan mon
. . . blissien him mid þisse wordle,’ OEH i. 33/29: hine would
go with hiȝteþ also, as in ‘hyhte me myd my skentinge,’ ON 532;
‘ic . . . | ellen wylle | habban ⁊ hlyhhan | ⁊ me hyhtan to,’
Cod. Exon. ed. Thorpe, 456/19. J means, blesses my coming.
318.
þat—wte may mean, that thou mayest know, but the reading of
J gives a better sense, though you find fault with her action, and
þat is probably a scribe’s mistake for þah.
320, 323. shulle:
the ordinary construction of biddan where its object is expressed
by a clause is þat with the subjunctive of the verb, as at 77/60,
141/39; ‘þa bæd he eaðmodlice þæt he hiene ne sende,’ Cura Past., 48/6;
the insertion of shulle, which apparently does not alter the
sense, is new; comp. ‘Ðeo apostles hine beden ꝥ he scalde suggen hwet
þeo saȝe bicweðe,’ OEH 133/23.
327. sume: a
mistake of the common exemplar for sumere, as Mätzner pointed out: comp.
‘vor sumeres tide is al to wlonc,’ ON 489.
328. Comp. ‘eorlum
bringe | blisse in burgum,’ Grein, Poesie, iii. 189.
333. Comp. 161/203.
334. to wan, to
what end, for what purpose: OE. tō hwan (hwon).
340. ginneþ . . .
wurche, do compose, or, sing: for the periphrasis see KH 1277 note,
Anglia xxix. 129. But Sweet translates ‘anginnað ðonne oftrædlice mare
secggean,’ Cura Past. 66/3 ‘often try to speak more.’
577
341. bi, through
the agency of.
342. Comp. 42/210,
48/326, 327. shal, must go: comp. 2/2 note. bon: inf.
depending on shal.
345. And note from the
church song.
348. wicke tunes,
monasteries and other religious houses: OE. wīctūn, which
translates L. atria, ‘introite in atria ejus,’ ‘ingangað on his
wic-tunas,’ Ps. xcv. 8, xcix. 3: in form the ME. word is possibly
influenced by wīce, office; wike occurs three times in ON.
349. to, at; see
163/241.
351. prostes:
that is, seculars, upe londe, in their parishes, as distinguished
from the clerks (l. 347), who are either monks or canons.
353. Repeated from ON
484. wat (hwat), as far as; an adverbial acc. of extent:
comp. ‘wet we on þisse middelerd liuien,’ OEH 11/2, as long as; ‘also
wat se we sinegen,’ OEH ii. 101/29, as soon as; ‘also wat swo þe þridde
dageð,’ id. 103/26: see ‘alwat,’ 15/84, 215/26.
354 begins a paragraph
with large initial in both MSS., but it goes with the preceding line
‘heo walde neoþeles ȝefe answere.’ The owl’s language was threatening.
Comp. ‘Þe niȝtingale at þisse worde, | mid sworde an mid speres orde, |
ȝif ho mon were, wolde fiȝte,’ ON 1067; ‘men weorreð mid þreo kunne
wepnen, mid scheotunge, mid speres ord ⁊ mid sweordes egge,’ AR
60/14.
356.
⁊—schelde goes with orde.
358. ilete: see
165/281.
363. þah, not in
J, is necessary to the sense.
365. awille, to
their pleasure.
367. Added at bottom of
leaf. awolde, in the woodland; for though by her place of birth
she was weak in woodcraft, she had learnt wisdom from the men among whom
she had been brought up.
369. þenne,
thence.
371. Even if she had to
speak in the king’s presence. Touore takes a dative: see 102/144
and read kinge with J.
373. Hwat: an
exclamation, What!
374. þan kinge:
correction by Stratmann: perhaps his is to be read for þis in the
preceding line: comp. l. 377.
375. lame,
crippled, unable to act: comp. ‘Debilis uel eneruatus lame,’
Wright-Wülcker, Vocab. 162/1.
376. Hunke:
strange in form, as in meaning: we should expect inc, as Wells points
out: we, J 377 is more consistent.
378. Lateþ beo,
cease from your strife.
384. do obviates
the repetition of an: comp. 122/185. lahfulnesse,
578
loyal holding to her offer, ll. 145-147, contrasted with
unrihtfulnesse, l. 385.
J 390. eu is, of course, a mistake for us.
391. An ȝef is
clearly wrong, while ȝet in J, meaning moreover, gives a poor
sense. The original may have been, ȝif, als ich wene, þat he wolde, if,
as I think, he would be willing to act as umpire. Ȝif þat, if, occurs in
‘ac ȝif þat he forlost his wit,’ ON 693, where J rejects þat and spoils
the metre: perhaps the avoidance of the construction has caused the
corruption of the text.
394. nuȝte: in
all probability the original had nuste. The scribes, being acquainted
with the graph st for ȝt, ht (see KH 249 note), mechanically substituted
the latter here. C, starting correctly from nuste, wrote nuȝte; J read
the original as miste, which for him meant myhte. There is a similar
trouble in the text of ON 1300, where for nustest C has miȝtest or
mistest and J nustest, ‘very like mistest,’ Wells.
397. utlete: the
passage to the sea, now represented by the Fleet between the Chesil Bank
and the mainland. Portisham is now about three miles inland, near
Abbotsbury, to the monastery in which place it formerly belonged
(Dugdale, Monast. iii. 52).
400. þurh
&c.: by his delivered judgements and by his writings; that they
righted matters as far as Scotland is a playful exaggeration.
407. Why will they not
betake themselves to counsel, that is, take counsel: comp. ‘þe traytours
of Scotlond token hem to rede, | þe barouns of engelond to brynge to
dede,’ Bödd. AE. Dicht. 133/225; ‘Þe Irise oft tok hem to red, | To ston
þat douhti kniȝt to ded,’ Horn Childe, 214; ‘Cnihtes eoden to ræde,’ L
19238; Minot vi. 68 note.
409. for teche:
see 40/180.
410. rente,
income of any sort, here probably from church preferments. a uale
stude, in many a place; another playful touch.
413. riche men,
men in high place.
414. leteþ,
neglect.
415. of . . .
con: comp. ‘He couþe of wode ⁊ of ryuere,’ R. of Brunne, Chron.
4006, and contrast ‘Brennes cuðe on hundes; Brennes cuðe an
hauekes,’ L 4895.
417. See 44/260
note.
418. litle
childre: the appointment of well-connected boys to valuable
preferments was an abuse of that time. Comp. ‘Si nepotibus suis paruulis
[prelati] mille animas strangulandas tradiderint et dixerint adulatores
quod bene faciunt, tales in curiis laudantur,’ Eudes de Cheriton, p.
262. It is frequently referred to in Grosseteste’s letters, as no. 17,
19, 26, 30 &c.
579
420. In this way their
wit adjudges them in error, namely, inasmuch as Master Nicholas
continues to endure such neglect. swo is explained by the clause
which begins with þat. Wells translates, ‘So they condemn their
intelligence [as] in error (foolish),’ but that is against the order of
the words and syncopated pres. plurals are rare.
423. In J, þat is
a mistake for þar.
425. rede,
present, report.
428. al:
acc. after telle. ende of orde, end from beginning, that
is, from beginning to end; a strange expression, but not more so than
‘ord fram þan ende,’ L 15770, 22983. In OE. as now, ‘from ord oð ende
forð,’ Elene, 590; ‘ord and ende,’ Ælf. Hom. ii. 220/34.
430. misrempe:
only here and in ‘misrempe ⁊ misdo,’ ON 1353, where J substitutes
‘misnyme,’ and the scribe of C adds in the margin ‘steppe’ as a gloss on
rempe. The simple verb occurs twice, ‘Oft mon biþ suiðe rempende,’ Cura
Past. 149/12, corresponding to ‘praecipitata actio’ of the Latin
original, and ‘þe Bretons sawe þer syde ȝede lowe | þey rempede þem to
reste a þrowe,’ R. of Brunne, 3491, where Wace has ‘a une part se sont
retret,’ 3160. The root of the word, as of OHG. rimpfan, G. rümpfen, F.
rampe, a slope, OE. *hrimpan, Gk. κράμβος, Eng. rimple, rumple, appears to mean, crooked,
out of straight, hence ‘rempende’ said of headlong action, ‘rempede,’
drew aside, ‘misrempe,’ to go crooked, out of the straight path, in this
place, to act on the cross, be dishonest.
431. crempe,
restrain, check; only here and in the compound forcrempeþ, ON 510:
related to cramp, and ultimately to the word with which it here
rhymes.
433. Absolutely without
army or following; comp. ‘Ne scalt þu neuere þider faren;
bute mochelere ferde,’ L 3678.
434. ꝥ: þat,
until; comp. 72/179 note; ‘æuere heo uerden alle niht; þat
hit wes dæi-liht,’ L 19200; KH 123 note. þer in J may mean where,
but it is more probably a mistaken expansion of the original. For
bicome see 147/134.
Phonology: ... þane 414 is LWS.
þane
L.W.S.
ea before r ... gef,
EWS. gief
E. W. S.
a + g ... liȝte 119 r. w.
riȝte
liȝte
In bisemar 104 ... u for
e
e misprinted as italic instead of bold
(2) Of J.
... eo, u- and å-umlaut of i
i misprinted as italic instead of bold
ēo is mostly preserved
eo
The new diphthongs ... of þuhte
275
ofþuhte
Accidence: ... OE. are blo 108, 319,
(Portes)hom 395
319 (Portes)hom
Adjectives ... āgen has lost
n
agen
Metre: ... þíd|er fúnd|eþ eúr|ich mán
337
text unchanged: error for “éur|ich”?
þe níȝt|ingál|e bigón | þe spéche
níȝt | ingál|e
He wún|eþ át | pórt|es hóm
pórt | es hóm
Þo húl|ẹ one wíl|e hí | biþóȝte
húl | ẹ
Read ... 160/185 vych
corrected by author from “160/186”
5. ... L 4170, MS. O.
L.
132. ... Hendyng, Böddeker, AE.
Dicht.
Æ. Dicht.
167. ... KH MS. O. 585
KH.
239-246. ... the bird’s paradise
text unchanged: expected word “birds’”
298. ... (‘to toune,’ MS. O)
Ms. O
Manuscript: Arundel 292, British Museum: on vellum, 200 ×
130 mm.: late thirteenth century. Its miscellaneous contents, English,
Anglo-French, and Latin, are described in Altdeutsche Blätter, ii.
141-148. The Bestiary is written continuously, but the initials of the
lines and, in the long metres, of the half lines are mostly rubricated.
In most cases the long lines are
580
divided into half lines by a space and a stop, sometimes one or both are
missing. At ll. 439, 493, two words are carried below the last full line
of the folio. Final g of ll. 42, 43, 316, 317, 332, 333, 338, 339, 358,
359, 463, 464, 475, 476, 477, 478, 542, 543, 662 has a stroke or hook
added, which appears to be merely ornamental: similarly the g of wrengðe
69, among 147, ðing 392, strong 509; h and b are much alike; ƿ is open
at the top as in Genesis and Exodus. Latin headings are in red, some are
on the margin, the others at the head of their sections. As will be seen
from the footnotes, the manuscript was much corrected or altered over
erasures, and that after it was finished, for the substituted words do
not always fill the gaps left by the scraper. The first leaves of the
exemplar were probably damaged at the lower margin, since defective or
difficult passages occur at regular intervals, so l. 32, ll. 89-92, 120,
121, 143, 144, 173, 200, 201.
Editions: Wright, T., Altdeutsche Blätter, Leipzig, 1836,
1840, ii. 99-120; Reliquiae Antiquae, London, 1841, i. 208-27. Mätzner,
E., Altenglische Sprachproben, Berlin, 1867, i. 55-75. Morris, R., An
Old English Miscellany, 1872, 1-25.
Literature: (1) of the English
Bestiary. Hallbeck, E., The Language of the M. E. Bestiary,
Lund, 1905. Holthausen, F., Archiv, lxxxviii. 365-9 (emendations). (2)
of the Bestiaries in general. A detailed
bibliography will be found in Anglia, Beiblatt, x. 274-87, xii. 13-23,
xiii. 18, 19, 236-9. The following will provide an introduction to the
subject: Ahrens, K., Zur Geschichte des sogennanten Physiologus, Ploen,
1885; Carus, J. V., Geschichte der Zoologie, München, 1872; Land,
J. N. P., Encyclopaedia Britannica, s.v. Physiologus;
Lauchert, F., Geschichte des Physiologus, Strassburg, 1889; Mann,
M. F., Französische Studien, vi. Heft 2, Heilbronn, 1888; Peters,
E., Der Griechische Physiologus und seine orientalischen Uebersetzungen,
Berlin, 1898.
Source: With the exception of the last section, the
English poem is generally an adaptation of the Latin Physiologus,
written in a variety of verse forms as the concluding line informs us,
by one Tebaldus or Thetbaldus, who is variously described in the
headings as Italicus, Senensis, Placentinus episcopus, and is identified
by some with the Abbot Theobald who presided over Monte Cassino from
1022 to 1035. The poem is extant in a large number of manuscripts and
early printed editions, the first of which latter with place and date is
that of Antwerp, 1487. It will be found printed in Hildeberti Turonensis
Archiepiscopi Opera, ed. D. A. Beaugendre, Paris, 1708, p. 1174,
from which it is repeated in Migne, P. L., tom. 171, p. 1218, and
also as Appendix i,
581
p. 201 in An Old English Miscellany, ed. Morris. The text is very
unsettled, apparently scribes and editors felt themselves free to
rewrite it on occasion. The passages where the English adapter notably
departs from his original are pointed out in the notes. He was, no
doubt, acquainted with one of the older Latin prose versions of
Physiologus enumerated by M. F. Mann in Anglia vii. 443-6; there is
no positive evidence that he knew the Bestiary of Philippe de Thaün.
Phonology: Oral a is a, dareð 310, late
453; a before nasals is a, bane 370, man 194, ðan 157,
ðanne 13, wan 386, wanne 10, wankel 446; a before lengthening
groups is o, among 147, folde 33, fondeð 532, stonden 497, but
gangen 110 (3 times), gangeð 153, 177, gangande 530, standen 531 with
Anglian shortening; in gandre 532 d is inorganic; funt 93 (OE.
fant) descends from OE. *funt, its use here possibly
influenced by Anglo-Fr. funt. æ is mostly a (82 times),
barlic 192, fast 161, fasteð 109, qual 598 r. w. al, togaddre 482,
525, ðat 3 &c., was 26 &c.; the exceptions mostly descend from
OE. forms in e, or are due to analogy, defte 23
(gedeftan), dele 4 (comp. dell), festeð 438, festen 417,
feste 143, 160 (comp. feste adv., Scandinavian influence
is also possible), heruest 177 (herfest), meche 586 r. w.
reche (gemečča, but make 574, 576, 578, gemaca), nese 3,
223 (næs-), resteð 178, 504 (restan), steppeð 6
(steppan), steppes 5 (stepe), weder 270, 521
(hweþer): togiddre 282 has e raised to i before a
dental, wos 628 is *hwās with vowel from hwā. e is
e, be 588, fel 109; before lengthening groups, felde 307, lengðe
437, trendled 606, but bi 4, 24 (bi); wilc 4, swilc 248, swilk
338, sille 449 (syllič) r. w. ille, represent forms with
y; tetireð 318 (to-teran) has i from Fr. tirer, as
in tireð 336, possibly helped by the contracted sing. 3, tyrþ;
seie 613 (4) r. w. haliweie, seien 385 imitate other parts of the
verb without c, similarly leigeð 272. i is i,
biddan 101, is 384, 414 r. w. fis, 509 r. w. fuligewis, mirke
80 r. w. kirke, wile 71 r. w. bile, wille 607 r. w.
stille; before lengthening groups i, finden 7, singeð 448, but es
183 r. w. gres, nes 518, merk 341 r. w. werk (due to labial
influence), wulle 634, wullen 314. o is o, bodes 136, nos
303 r. w. gōs; before lengthening groups, hornes 236, sorgeden 559
(without i-umlaut), word 35, but forwurden 108, wulde 74 (4),
wuldest 385 by consonant influence; ouese 362, eaves, is without
i-umlaut, comp. ofesc, owisc and modern Essex dialectal
oavis, but in Layamon eouesen. u is u, cumeð 40 &c.,
dure 134, wude 181, wune 281; before lengthening groups, bunden 443,
hunger 306, but towrong 42 r. w. strong, with o before
n, ðrist 231, 428 r. w. list (analogy of þyrstan,
þyrstig). y is i, dine 646 r. w. wiðerwine,
fille 373 r. w. stille, mankin 168, 243 r. w. win, 569
r. w. dim, pit 624 r. w. offrigt,
582
stireð 11 (4), unride 389, 507 r. w. wide, 522 r. w. side,
wirm 106 (4); before lengthening groups, birdene 289, minde 263 (3); but
dede 171, elp 522 (3) (comp. OE. elpend), stereð 309, furg
dat. with u from the nominative, hungren 428, hungreð 390
(analogy of hungor), sundren 577 (analogy of sundor),
tunder 419 r. w. wunder (once ‘tunderi,’ Oldest E. Texts 570; comp. also OWScand.
tundr), vuemest 639 (ufemest), come 664 r. w. nome. ā
is regularly o, cof 124, invariably non 494 r. w. bon, no
148, on 490 (7) r. w. gon, 635 r. w. bon, one (āna)
579 (3), ston 66 r. w. on; before two consonants, bitokneð 152, golsipe
245, gost 214; but a, an frequently, anoðer 262 (unstressed shortened
ā), atter 121, 241 with shortened ā extending from the
oblique cases (Bülbring § 344), gast 435 r. w. stedefast, 640
r. w. vuemest, which Morsbach, ME. Gr., § 135, anm. 8 deduces
from shortened a, nummore 208, 455, through loss of stress, comp.
‘wumme’ 235/21, 121/133. ǣ1 is e, hete 56
r. w. wete, mene 248 r. w. ouerwene, rede 38 r. w.
guðhede, stel 419 (stǣli), wete 190, 209; before two consonants,
fles 114, 435, eure 402, neure 16, but haliweie 612, through association
with hālig, most 501, moste 384 from māst, goð 66 (5) with
o from the plural, oni 378 from ānig, ilk 82 (4), ilc 256,
ilkines 180 from ylc. ǣ2 is also e, dede
82 r. w. mede, forleteð 191, leteð 114, 658, let 156, sed 180
r. w. wed, 658 r. w. ned, slepen 452 r. w. waken, ðer
19 (17), ðere 207, 369, were 61 (8), weren 80 (4), wete 57 r. w. hete,
615 r. w. swete; before two consonants, neddre 107 (3), but lat
327, 328, lateð 271 r. w. wadeð, ðar 8 (7), ðore 81, 88 r. w.
lore (þāra), wor 514 (5) from hwāra, wore 578 r. w.
more, broken 242 in both of which o represents ā. ē
is e, let 642, mede 84 r. w. dede, swetnesse 613; boke
dat. 665 has the vowel of the nominative, doð 141 (8) the vowel
of the plural. ī is i without exception. ō is
o, but kam 29, 352, cam 564, te 107. ū is u without
exception. ȳ is i, briche 293, 592 r. w. heuenriche,
fir 123, ðirl 112; before two consonants, filðe 156, wissing 246.
ea before r + cons. is a, art 139, dar 647,
narwe 113, sarpe 318; before lengthening groups, harde 499 (4), forðward
160, but e in ern 73, ernes 37, flerd 351, middelerd 352 and
u in wurð 566 (wearþ) by confusion with the present tense.
The i-umlaut is a in chare 457, char 519 (see 359/4),
warmen 421, but derne 21, 75, dernelike 326. ea before l +
cons. is a, al 116 &c., fallen 56, galle 654, half 460, salt
155; before lengthening groups o, biholdeð 365, kold 495, holdeð
573, olde 581, told 459, twifold 322, wolden 139, wolde 482, but the
contracted? bihalt 520, biwalt 521 have shortened a; in helden
136 e is probably miswritten for o: the i-umlaut is
a in falleð 58 (5), 526 r. w. calleð, e in elde 40,
108, elded 139, eldere 171, 241, unwelde 41, all before lengthening
groups, welle 46, 253.
583
eo before r + cons. is regularly e, berges 481,
bergen 8, fer 265, herte 136 (3), stert 6, werc 340; before lengthening
groups, erðe 20 (3) and its compounds. To the wur group belong
forwurðes 138, forwurðe 196, wurðeð 59 and other forms of
weorþan, wurði 346, wurðlic 173, but not forwerpen 257, werpeð
236. The i-umlaut is seen in hirde 33, 34 (hirde), tirgen
275 (not original); hertien 277 is very doubtful: a wyr word is
wurdi 145, without umlaut. The u- and å-umlauts of
a are wanting, bale 172, 379, care 563, but heuekes 664: o
in noule 444 (*nafola, contrast ‘neauele’ 120/98) is ascribed by
Morsbach, ME. Gr. § 87, anm. 4, to the influence of v, but a
diphthong appears to have developed, the modern East Anglian dialectic
word is nowle. The u- and å-umlauts of e are also
wanting, forgelues 138, hert 218 (3), heuene 49 &c., werlde 106,
fele 297, 463. eo, u- and å-umlaut of i is
e, here 280 (5), senden 63, 441, seuene 50, 652, clepeð 221,
leneð 510, 523, but limes 41 (3), niðer 4, 500, niðerward 444, siðen 227
r. w. swīðe, liuen 412: widue 578 is Anglian widwe, but wude
181 (*wiudu) has normal u (Bülbring § 264). ea
after palatals is a, chaueles 397, sal 16 &c., sakeð 193,
sadue 524 r. w. togaddre, but seftes 356; before nasal, same 193,
339, 346 r. w. name, and before lengthening group, o in
sonde 431. ie after ġ is e, geld 338, gelt 316,
bigeten 490, 494, forgeten 451, but giueð 291; after sc, also
e, seld 130 (but scildan gives silden 34, sildeð 130),
sending 339, seppande 356 (i-umlaut of ea after
sc). EWS. gief is gef 274 (5), if 35 (9): if is used from
l. 35 to l. 265 and once again at l. 578, gef, which is probably the
author’s form, begins at l. 274. eo after ġ is u in
gungling 543, guðhede 39, i in ging 162, gingen 259, gingid 238,
after sc, u, sulde 123, suneð 193, sunen 210, 285
r. w. munen, sulen 203 (4). heom is hem 281 &c.
ēa is regularly e, ches 586, ded 26 (9), slep 635,
lefful 585, queðsipe 298; the i-umlaut is e (Anglian),
gemen 260, here 2 &c., leueð 85, nede 100 (9), nedeð 113, 164, remeð
527; before two consonants, bekneð 213. ēo is also e, be
21 &c., bet 213, bitwen 281, crepeð 111 (3), deuel 164 (5), der 322
r. w. her (4), undergede 568 r. w. manhede, wel 600 (Ang.
hwēl, Bülb. § 217) r. w. wel; before two consonants,
brest 117 (4), helde 173, but diuel 21, an early instance of this
shortening, cripelande 111 from crypel; the i-umlaut is
e, strenen 485, ten 109. gesīene is sene 356, gīet,
get 62, 385 r. w. flet. ēa after palatals is e, ger
492 r. w. her, sep 34, 483.
a + g is ag, dages 607, drageð 6, sage 475, but
daies 109, 635; mugen 323 has the form of the subjunctive mugon;
sei 159 descends from sege, seieþ 347 from segeþ, seit 577
from segð. æ + g is divided between ai and
ei, dai 29 (7), 582 r. w. ai, daies 109, 635, faier 629, lai
28, 633, mai 110 (9), maig 64 (3), mainles 110; breid 548, breides 344
(bregd), dei
584
216, 576, deies 309, meiden 23, 442, seide 191, 353, seid 549: fagen
394, 415 r. w. dragen is Anglian fagen; muge 126, 187
descends from LWS. muge. e + g is ei, weie
4; forbredes 138 comes from forbrēdan, agen 185, 457 from
agēn: e + h is seen in hightes 135, 161, hightest
133. i + g: the spirant has been absorbed in lieð 15;
final ig is i, mani 429, manie 441, wurði 346. i +
h is ig, idigt 364, sigte 92, wigt 235. o +
h is og, ðogt 501, 559, but forbroiden 108, not from
-brogden, but -brōden, with a variation which perhaps
mimics the alternation of the ME. infinitives breden (brēdan) and
breiden (bregdan), see NED. s.v. broiden. u +
g is ug, fugeles 308, mugen 503, 643, but the spirant has
disappeared in fules 305, 312. y + h is ig, drigten
26 (3), fligt 43, 54, offrigt 625 (late North. fryhta). ā
+ g, h is og, og 263 (3), ogen 210 (4), ogt 623
(āht), but ovt 560 r. w. ðogt 577, out 521, forms due to the
scribe: steg 639 (stāh) has borrowed e, as often
elsewhere, from the third class of strong verbs. ǣ1 +
g, h is ag, agte 477, er, meaning or, 99 (9) is
descended from ǣgþer, while er, before, 191 (4) is ǣr:
neggen 122, negge 3 represent genēgan. ǣ2 +
g is seen in haliweie 612 (wǣg). ī + g: in
sti 152 r. w. bi, g has disappeared. ō + g,
h is og, inog 118, ðogte 354, nogt 122 (9), but nout 11,
593, 622 r. w. ogt, nowt 192, 214, forms due to the scribe.
ȳ + g, drie 615. ea + h, ht is seen
in magt (mæht) 426, magti 175, waxe 196, waxeð 124, waxen 445
(wæxan); the i-umlaut in migt 234, 532 r. w. wiht,
migte 21 (3), nigt 47, but sloð 329 (WS. sliehþ) r. w. loð,
corresponds to North. slāþ, influenced by OScand. slá. eo
+ ht is igt, brigt 55 r. w. fligt, figtande 128, rigt
52, rigten 102, rigteð 125, but sexe 50 (Anglian sex), bitwixen
293 (betweohs); without umlaut is seð 49 r. w. teð (WS.
siehþ) as if from sēoþ. ēa + g, h is
eg (Anglian), egen 16 (5), heg 18, hege 562; eilond 387, 414
(īegland) is from Anglian ēgland. ēo + g is
also eg, fleges 366, flegeð 48 (3), legeð 350, 577; ēo +
h, ligtlike 315; without i-umlaut are fleð 123, 165 (comp.
flēð, Durh. Rit.), teð 48 r. w. seð, 274, but ligten 20,
289. ā + w is ow, ou, ov, knoweð 106,
sowles 103, soule 158 (4), knov 133, but soge 386 as if from
*sāhe, sawen 599, possibly miswritten for sowen. ī +
w, appears in newe 60 (5), neweð 39 (5), newe 141, all from
Anglian forms with ēo. ō + w: nowor 35 represents
*nōwar, nōwer from nāhwǣr, nāhwār. ēa + w is
seen in ðewes 143 and finally in deu 7: ēo + w in rewen
437, rewe 206, reufulike 528, speweð 116, finally in gu 549 (4): tre
508, 516, 524, 551 r. w. we, is Anglian tre(o):
the i-umlaut is wanting in trewe 163, 589, untrewe 61, 96.
In syllables without stress o is levelled to e, wankel
446, hunger 203, siker 207, wunder 194, sumer 176, te 107. a
appears for e in mereman 442, influenced by man. An e,
generally unmetrical, has been inserted in
585
deuẹles 436 (but deules 665), folegen 269, folẹgeð 431, 620 (but folgen
439, 643), fugeles 308, lagelike 573, steuẹne 561, husebondes 299,
sineginge 149, wisedom 324, and i similarly in hardilike 177,
fulịgewis 508 (comp. fuliwis 445), haliweie 612 (‘haleweie,’ L 23072),
sinịging 256: e is omitted in biforn 62, 68, 268, but metre
requires everywhere biforen. The prefix be- is bi-,
bisetten 167: ge- is i in imong 476, it appears also in
uniemete 459 (ungemǣte) with ie for i as in attrie 228, perhaps
an Anglo-Norman interchange of these symbols. But ge- is
generally lost, as in bodes 136, minde 263, vnride 389, unwelde 41.
on- is a in among 147, to-, te in tetireð
318. redi 125 (3) is a ME. formation from gerǣde + ig, the
termination in sille is -lic; -ung is ing, drowing
567, groning, woning 662, lesing 478.
Geminated final consonants are invariably simplified as web 363, coc
300, stoc 224, fel 109, hil 18, spel 335, den 8, fen 630, mankin 168,
sin(ful) 82, win 244, char 519, dar 647, fer 265, pit 624; often too
medially as rr, chare 457, dure 145; nn, wiðerwine 645,
cune 148, cunen 457; þþ, siðen 41 (5); cc, fecheð 179,
reche 585, meche 586. For w, u is written in sadue 524.
r is doubled in warre 456; metathesis occurs in ðrist 231, 428.
n is added in hauen 183, boðen 181, boden 525, doubled in
drigtinnes 242, vnneðes 113, omitted in euelike 213, and frequent o for
on. p is doubled in steppes 5, inserted in sampnen 484.
f between vowels and vowellikes is u, rauen 311, geuelic
173, ouese 362, culuer 650, derue 205, once v in weveð 360 (but
weueð 363), otherwise it is f. f is doubled in off
prep. 104, 241, 264, 616, while the adverb appears as of 657.
t is doubled in little 200, 432, beside litel 131, lost in beste
514, for it th is written in cethegrande 383: ts is
sc in giscing 245, c in milce 151. d is doubled in
togaddre 482, gaddreð 180, omitted in selcuðes 441, as already in OE.
selcūþ and in sille 449, but already syllic in OE. For
d, ð is written in ðon 328, faðer 13, queðsipe 298, seð
191, for þ, d in boden 525, broder 287, dede 31, 625,
filde 160, lodlike 357, swide 360, swideð 54, dat 634, de 165, dridde
29, drowing 567, wurden 250, mostly due to the scribe’s failure to
complete ð: þ is t in forsaket 81, wit 136: after
voiceless t, s pronominal words begin with t
instead of þ, tanne 216, tat 18, te 209, (at) te 134, 361, 586,
ter 329, tin 161, tine 159, tis 73, 154, tu 133 (7), tus 77 &c., but
de 192, once after d, tu 150. In forðward 160, ð has been
wrongly inserted. sć is s, initially, sadue 524, sakeð
193, sal 16 &c., same 193 (3), sarpe 318, seftes 356, seld 130,
sending 339, sep 34, seppande 356, silden 34, sinen 12, sipes 411, sonde
431, sop 356, sulde 123, suneð 193, sures 203, once sc, scrifte
159, once sk, skinbon 272, NED compares NFris. skenbiin, WFris.
skynbonke; medially, golsipe 245, queðsipe 298, but ss in wissing
246
586
(*gewȳscung); finally, fis 383, fles 114, 435. The stop c
is k before e and i and in combination with other
consonants, forsaket 81, kinde 10, bitokneð 152, drink 158, but craft
111, in other positions mostly c, cam 564, uncuð 396, blac 598,
swic 149, but kam 29, 352, unkuð 97, swik 344, suk 454, smake 3 (ME.
formation from smæcc): cc is ck, necke 303.
č is ch, chaueles 397, ches 586, erðchine 308, chare 457,
char 519, briche 293, 592, eche 139, quenchet 256, riche 480, but ic 38
&c., sekeð 46, kirke 78, Scand. in form, kolde 486, kold 495, mirke
80, merk 341 (see Björkman 146), micle 536, mikle 542 (comp. OWScand.
mikil), wilc 4, swilc 248, swilk 338, ilik 343, lic 662. čč is
cch, dreccheð 88, feccheð 301, but fecheð 179, reche 585, meche
586 and fetchen 265, witches 427, early instances of tch, but ?wikke
468. cw is qu, qw, quenchet 256, qwemeð 190,
queðsipe 298, quike 253. Palatal g is written g, bigeten
490, forgeten 451, gemen 260, geld 338, forgelues 138, ger 491, get 62,
ging 162, gingen 259, gingid 238, giueð 291, gu 549, gungling 543,
guðhede 39, undergede 568 (undereode); it is doubled in negge 3,
neggen 122, lost in if 35 &c. The voiceless spirant is also
represented by g, as in egen 16, ðogte 354, soge 386, furg 307,
inog 118, ðurg 3: doubled in suggeden 559 (in Orm suhhghen), now
dialectal, mostly Northern, sough, soo. h is lost in ire 183,
added in heten 421: hl is l, lene 110, lepeð 230, lides
16, list 585, listen 74, louerd 19, lude 377; hn is n,
necke 303; hr, r, raðe 317, rem 13, remeð 527, rewen 437;
hw, w, wan 386, wat 95, weder 270, wel 600, wete 190, wilc
4, wile 648, wite 599, wos 628, wu 20 &c., and qu in qual
(Northern).
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. a. dine 646,
heuenriche 18, 292, hirde 33, bale 379, golsipe 245, se 404, tre 508,
516, wete 190, 209 have e corresponding to their OE. vocalic ending,
bodi 172, sti 152 have lost final g; seppandẹ 356 and haliweie
612 r. w. seie have added e; mere 448 is shortened from meremenn.
Gen. -es, bukes 330, foxes 314,
sees 407, but heuenriche 558; brest 121, 160 is a composition form:
dat. -e, bale 172, bile 70 and 15
others with vowel termination in the nom., hauen 183 has added n
(nunnation, 457/11), dede 31, dele 4 and 31 others with inflection, of
which ouese 362 is the only word of more than one syllable: without
inflection are bodi 130 (3), drigtin 104, meiden 23, stel 419, der 322,
627, rem 13, 611 and 90 others mostly with long stem vowel or of more
than one syllable; always o dei 576, bi dai 47 &c.; many examples
are in rhyme as mod 249, 348, muð 395, ðogt 501, 559, wold 620. The
pl. n. a. of masculines ends in -es, chaueles 397, witches 427, daies 109, fodredes 361;
there are no weak forms: neuters are limes 41, 63, sipes 411, 417, 454,
bodes 136, 213, lides 16, sep 34, 483, ger 491, 492, ðing 358: datives
have -es, berges 481,
587
breides 344, briddes 660, finnes 445, ðewes 143, ðornes 237, limes 131,
wiles 297, but der 603. Of the fem. nouns of the strong
declension mire 175, neddre 107, 129, same 193, widue 578 have e
corresponding to their OE. vocalic ending in the nom., dede 468,
469, sowle 586 have added e, all others are without e, culuer 650, ned
142, woning 662 (the verbal substantives are rarely inflected in any
case). Genitives are sinnes 158, sowles 103: birde 117 (comp.
byrdtīd), erðe 630, helle 638 (comp. hellewīte), heuene
638 (comp. heuen 170), kirke 134, 586, soule 158 may be genitives, but
are more probably composition forms. Dat. -e, birdene 289, filde 160, godcundnesse 644, manhede
567, migte 587, werlde 106, sineginge 149, stefninge 451, but blis 140,
638, hid 120, magt 426, migt 416, tunder 419, werld 201, and the verbal
nouns lesing 478, reming 542, sending 339, swiking 477, wissing 359 are
without inflection. In the acc. forðward 160, migt 234, 532, ned
659, stund 309, 408 and the verbal nouns billing 316, 338, foxing 333,
giscing 245, drowing 567, siniging 256, tokning 463, wissing 246, 255
are without inflection, bote 150, guðhede 39, nede 100, 216, 280, soule
172, 478, steringe 451 with 27 others have e, besides fille 319, 373,
forbisne 322. Pl. n. are fedres 56; dat. harmdedes 299,
misdedes 151, sinnes 75; a. forbisnes 219, kindes 218, seftes 356
(sometimes masc.), sinnes 159, stefnes 448, agte 477. Nouns of
the weak declension have -e in the
nom., bane 370, sunne 12; d. make 576, erðchine 308;
a. fode 64 (5), wille 330, but fod 207, licham 214 before a
vowel: genitives are belles 541, huntes 548: pl. n. egen 44, 80,
fleges 366, husebondes 299; dat. egen 16, 87; a. egen 55,
willen 515. The minor declensions are represented by fet (steppes)
pl. a. 5; teð pl. a. 318; man s. n. 73, mannes
s. g. 148, man s. d. 444, a. 124, men
pl. n. 305, sipmen 451, manne pl. g. 24, men ?pl.
d. 144, manne 359, men pl. a. 428; boc s. n. 350,
boke s. d. 38 (4); furg s. d. 307; gos
s. a. 302; nigte s. d. 588, bi nigt 47, 150, o
nigt 576, nigt s. a. 582; faðer s. n. 13, fader 30,
s. d. 640; broder s. n. 287, s. a.
535; fend s. n. 349.
Adjectives which in OE. end in a vowel have -e throughout, briche 592, eche 139, minde 263, newe
210, softe 176, but swet s. d. neut. 231 (comp.
swētnes, swōt) and merk s. d. f. 341 have
lost e; those in -ig lose g, attrie 228 (with ie for i), droui
407, holi 642, redi 311, weri 511. Weak inflections are s. voc.
cristene 133, d. rigte 70, sinfule 340, a. olde 210, 581:
strong are s. n. f. bare 121, ilike 442, like 444,
s. d. m. rigte 435, s. d. f. quike
253; others are uninflected in the singular: mikel
s. n. m. 565 has d. mikle 542, but mikel 230,
pl. n. mikle 433, 536: litel s. n. neut. 131 has
s. a. f. little 200, pl. n. 432. The pl.
n. has -e, kolde 486, leue, loðe 594,
warre, wise 456; the exceptions are all predicative, fagen 394, 415,
kold 495,
588
siker 207, strong 63, twifold 471, uncuð 396, war 204, wod 250;
dat. -e, iuele 343, wite 599, but
dern 75 r. w. ern; acc. -e,
erðliche 213, but brigt 55 r. w. fligt. ān as article
unstressed is a 28, 46 &c., before consonants, an 391, 282 before
vowels and h, twice 106, 596 before w, divided in a neilond 387, 414,
while the numeral and indefinite pronoun is on 268, 530, (on) on 223,
635, one s. d. neut. 264; āna, alone, is one 579,
580, 622: nān as adj. is no 148, 444 &c., non 64 &c.,
none s. d. neut. 65, as pronoun, non 267, 271, 285, 494,
556, 597. Adjectives used as nouns with inflection are s. d.
geuelike 214, 593, gode 65, nakede 165, pl. grete 400, sinfule
167, selcuðes 441, smale 399: nouns used as adjectives are flerd, fox
351. Comparatives and superlatives have -e, s. fairere 597, more 194, beste 514, firste
552, moste 384, swetteste 392, pl. eldere 171, 241, but best 667
r. w. nest, vuemest 639 r. w. gast, most 501 before vowel.
The personal pronouns are ic 38 (6), before vowel, h or palatal g, i
37 (5) before consonants, we, wes (= we es) 651, ur pl. g.
285, 661, vs, ðu, tu 133 &c., ðe, te 142, gu pl. d. 549, 575.
The pronoun of the third person is s. n. he m. 2,
330, ge f. 175, 179, get (= ge it) 195, it neut. 29,
450, itt 601, d. him m. 5, 521, hire f. 184, 499,
ire 183, a. him m. 13, 128, hire f. 299; pl.
n. he 264, 625, g. her 556, d. hem 281, 546, a.
369, is 7, 137, 304. Reflexives are us 663, ðe 160, him
s. d. 64, 103, 109, himself 65, hire 372, him
s. a. 8 (13), hire 178, 365, hem pl. a. 413, 421,
484: definitive is himseluen 520: possessives are s. ðin 156, tin
161, ði, before consonant, 160, 478, pl. ðine 151, tine 159, ðin
477 before vowel; s. his 3 &c., pl. hise 16 &c.,
his, before vowel, 44, 55; hire 179, 496; vre 19 &c., here 280, 427.
The definite article is ðe without inflection, te 13, 623, de 165, 192,
atte 134, 361, 586: s. ðat 18 &c., tat 18, pl. ðo 432,
604 are demonstratives. The compound demonstrative is s. ðis 77,
tis 73, pl. ðise 398. The relatives are ðe 19; it means, of which
621, during which 201, and ðat 13, it means, in which 517, on which 206,
about which 191, that which 184, 470, dat, for whom, 634. Interrogatives
are wat 127, 133, 170, wos 628, wilc 4; the correlative is swilc 248,
swilk 338. Indefinites are wo so 335, 577; wat 95; man 2, 194, 221, 304;
sum 461; oni 378; oðres s. g. 273, oðer s. d.
378, a. 267, pl. oðre 276 (6), oðer 603; an oðer 10, 262; ilk 82, ilc
256, ilkines 180; eurilc 257, eurilc 286; mani 429,
pl. manie 441 (4), manikines 358; fele 297, 463; al 54 &c.,
all 211, pl. alle 5, 241.
Only three verbs have the infinitive in -e, biswike 327 r. w. dernelike, chare 457
r. w. ware, rede 38 r. w. guðhede, one or two in -ien, luuien 135, ?hertien 276, the rest, in number 111,
of which 18 are of the second weak conjugation, end in -en. The dat. inf. is not inflected, its sign is
to (31) or for to (6). Presents are s. 1. haue 549, mene 248,
seie 557 (4); 2. hauest
589
137, forbredes, forgelues, forwurðes 138; 3. falleð 58 (4), wakeð 33,
wuneð 401 (5) and over 200 others in -eð;
hatieð 304, rotieð 311; forsaket 81, quenchet 256; atbrested 548, bekned
213, gingid 238, bilimpes 275; contract verbs, fleð 123, 165, teð 48
r. w. seð, 274, seð 49, sloð 329 r. w. loþ, contracted forms
are abit 581 r. w. sit, bet 213, bit 195, 211, 370, 379 (read biteð
in all these places), bit 330, bit 192 (read bideð), biwalt 521
r. w. bihalt, fet 214, 337 r. w. ket, 605, fint 209 (read
findeð), flet 386 r. w. get, fret 319, 373 (read freteð in both
places), gelt 316, geld 338, hitt 365, lat 327, 328, lið 11 (read lieð
as in l. 15), seit 577, sit 520, 576, 580 r. w. abit, smit 391,
underset 516 r. w. bet, stant 2; pl. 1. hauen 176 (3), wunen
201, haue we 295, fele we 552, haue 659; 3. beren 278, cumen 276 (4),
haten 299, noten 488, sundren 577, waken 453; sen 413, ten 266, hatien
305, cume 536: subjunctive s. 3. fare 99, se 122, tide 499, but
derie 186; pl. 1. bimene we 663, leue we 590, luue we 587, 590,
seke we 207, wende we 588: imperative s. 2. bid 150, help 144,
swic 149, herkne 506, newe 141, reche 585, sei 159, deme 145; pl.
2. hereð 45, muneð 575. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 3. lai 28,
633; subj. s. 2. soge 386; 3. sete 388: I b. s. 3. bar 24,
kam 28, 352, cam 564; pl. 3. broken 242; subj. s. 3. come
22: I c. s. 3. wan 632, wurð 566: II. s. 3. ros 31, 637, steg 639:
III. s. 3. ches 586: IV. s. 3. sop 356, stod 557: V.
s. 2. hightest 133, hightes 135, 161; 3. fel 551, let 642, slep
635; ?subj. pl. 1. helde we 173. Participle present: V. gangande
530; past: I b. broken 137, forbroken 108: I c. bred 117, bunden 443,
doluen 27, forbroiden, forwurden 108, towrong 42 r. w. unstrong:
II. fordriuen 411, sinen 12, writen 572: III. forloren 69: IV. faren
589: V. IV. waxen 445: V. biholden 512, fallen 570, sawen 599. Past of
Weak Verbs: s. 3. dennede 23, filstnede 30, seide 191, ðogte 354;
pl. 3. remeden 561, suggeden 559, wuneden 493. Participles
present: cripelande 111, figtande 128, secande 536; past: cloðed 124,
cristned 134, elded 139, eried 308, herd 459, idigt 364, ikindled 10,
lered 239, offrigt 625, seid 549, set 220, tokned 627, told 621, 628,
trendled 600; inflected are cloðedẹ s. d. 166, forbisnede
s. d. 464. Minor Groups: og pr. s. 263 (3), ogen 1
pr. pl. 210 (3), pr. pl. 653; can pr. s. 79, canne
(= can he) 534, cunen pr. pl. 457, cune 2 pr. s.
subj. 148, cunne pr. s. subj. 7 (3); dar pr. s. 647,
dure 2 pr. s. subj. 145; salt 2 pr. s. 155, sal pr.
s. 16 &c., sulen 1 pr. pl. 203, 292, pr. pl. 485,
594, sulde pt. s. 123; mai pr. s. 110 (9), maig 64, 400,
433, mugen 1 pr. pl. 323, 643, pr. pl. 503, muge pr. s.
subj. 126, 187, migte pt. s. 21, 554, 556, migten pt.
pl. 560; moten 1 pr. pl. 210, mote 2 pr. s. subj. 151;
ben inf. 84 (4), to ben dat. inf. 263, 653, art 2 pr.
s. 140, 162, is pr. s. 10, 662, es 183, nes 518, beð 313, ben
1 pr. pl. 34, 204, be we 205, arn pr. pl. 41 (11), aren
394, 415, ben 450, senden 63, 441, be
590
pr. s. subj. 21, 615, ben 1 pr. pl. subj. 207, 293, be we
589, 655, ben pr. pl. subj. 282, be 2 pr. s. imp. 163, was
pt. s. 26 &c., weren 1 pt. pl. 250, pt. pl. 80,
559, 625, were 2 pt. s. subj. 134, pt. s. subj. 61 (7),
wore 578; wile 1 pr. s. 575, wille 37, wile pr. s.
71 (12), wille 34 (5), wulle 634, wilen pr. pl. 367, wullen 314,
wile pr. s. subj. 4, 327, 328, wuldest 2 pt. s. 385, wulde
pt. s. 553, 2 pt. s. subj. 74, pt. s. subj. 353,
354; don inf. 330, 531, ðon 328, fordon 354, to don dat.
inf. 212, 515, 661, doð pr. s. 141 (10), do we 1 pr. pl.
subj. 172, 205, 657, dede pt. s. 171, don pp. 663; gon
inf. 155, 225, goð pr. s. 66 (5), gon pr. pl. 482,
491, 1 pr. pl. subj. 35, 254, go 2 pr. s. imp. 157,
undergede pt. s. 568.
Noteworthy among adverbs are lic, equally, 662, nede, of necessity,
129 (nīede), ðer wile, whilst, 648, welle, very, 18 (also in
Layamon, 29622), which seems to have added a superfluous adverbial e;
among prepositions, mitte 454, 546, one 334, 388, onẹ 420; conjunctions,
⁊ (ant), meaning if, 2, er, or, 99 &c., wiles, whilst, 88 (4), wor
so, wheresoever, 602 (4).
Vocabulary: The Scandinavian element is large: ai
46 (7), arn 41 &c., aren 394, 415, blast 541, bone 101, boðe 47,
boðen 181, boden 525, brest 458 (OE. byrst would in this text be
birst), brennen 249, brenning 229, brinneð 227, bro 598 (OWScand. brá),
calleð 527, call(ing) 563, costes 284, derflike 313, feg 160, fro 31
&c., gapeð 390, gres 182, heil 59, ille 410, ill(ing) 317, ket 336,
lage 15 &c., leiðe 357, oc 55, 159, or 76, 116, 119, rapelike 178,
reiseð 13, reisen 553, renneð 178, scaðe 447, skemt(ing) 332, skies 50,
swideð 54, takeð 71, til 12, ðeðen 364, ðog 21 &c., (un)skil 331,
wille 35, wrengðe 69, wrong 62, probably hileð 318, vncost 148, wore
578, possibly fikeð 532, listneð 306 (comp. hlystan), liuenoðe
200, (o) twinne 195; influenced in form are atbrested 548, atbrosten
458, come 664, frame 323 (fremu), in meaning, onde 310. French
are bec 42, capun 300, caue 186, cete 397, cul 604, dragunes 622
(‘draguns,’ P. de Thaün), gin 521, grace 104, haleð 184, leun 2, market
378, panter 596, poure 144, pride 247, prophetes 555, rime 572,
robb(inge) 657, simple 655, spuse 587, tireð 336, turtres 572, uenim 116
(venin); pre-Conquest Latin is crede 98. The proper name Moyses 553 is
the Vulgate form.
Dialect: The author of the Bestiary lived in East Anglia,
sufficiently near its northern border to account for such rhymes as loð
: sloð 328, 329, stedefast : gast 434, 435, vuemest (read -mast) : gast 639, 640. The large Scandinavian element
also points to the northern part of East Anglia. How far he was
responsible for the Northern or North Midland broken 242, offrigt 625,
qual 598, sawen 599, senden 63, 441, soge 386, s as the regular and
frequent representative of sć, as in sadue, sal, sarpe &c.,
the 2, 3 pr. s. in -es, bilimpes 275,
forbredes, forgelues, forwurðes 138, higtes
591
135, 161, and the participles in -ande it
is impossible to determine. But he certainly did not write gangande 530,
secande 536, and transmission through a Northern or North Midland copy
may accordingly be assumed. Our manuscript was written by a scribe of
the Southern border of East Anglia. He has left his mark in a number of
syncopated presents which spoil the metre and probably in the case of
others where the full form is metrically admissible, in luuien 135,
hatieð 304, rotieð 311, wulle 634, wullen 314, and probably in were 134
&c., since wore 578 r. w. more is the only form controlled by
rhyme. He is also responsible for dede 171, stereð 309, æ +
g as ei, dei 576, meiden 23 &c., for vuemest 639,
daies 109, 635, out 521, ovt 560, nout 11, 593, 622, nowt 192, 214,
occasional alterations without any systematic attempt at revision. We
may perhaps venture the guess that the poem was written in Lincolnshire
and copied in Essex.
Metre: Thetbaldus attempts a variety of metres,
‘temptans diversis si possem scribere metris;’ leonine hexameters for
his Lion, Eagle, Siren, Onocentaur and Panther, leonine elegiacs for the
Ant, Fox, Stag, Whale and Elephant, sapphics for the Serpent, catalectic
dactylic tetrameter for the Spider, adonics for the Turtle. The English
adapter emulates his versatility and moreover mixes different kinds of
verse in the same article. In alliterative long line are ll. 1-24,
32-35, 106-151, 156-161, 164-166, 170-173, 175-179, 184-197, 199-204,
297-299, 304-315, 318, 356, 357, 360-370, 376-381, 441-448, 451, 458,
459. Of these the great majority are of the first kind described on
p. 463, lines with alliteration only, as
2-8, 10, 11, 15, 18-21, 23, 106-111 &c. Of the second are 13, 16,
114, 134-136, 141, 150, 171, 173, 176, 185, 195, 312-315, 364, 370, 376,
379, 380, 459, of the third, 24, 112, of the fourth 12, 116, 118, 144,
?298, 305, 306, 362, 381, but groups of lines in this class, such as
26-31, 152-155 have attained to their full development as syllabic verse
and are printed like the octosyllables and similar metres from which
they are indistinguishable. Lines of the fifth class are discussed in
the notes. They are numerous, indeed the parts written in alliterative
verse are in much worse state than the rest of the text, probably
because the scribe’s ignorance of the technique of the native metre gave
him greater scope for alteration. The changes he has made are of the
kind described on pp. 464, 465,
prominent among them is the rearrangement of words, mostly in a prose
order, which often results in the elimination of rhymes. These rhymes
are mostly imperfect; inflectional as reiseð : makeð 13, drinkeð : neweð
118 &c., luken : egen 16, leuen : luuien 135, name : queðsipe 298,
ouese : felde 362, or partial in correspondence of sound, as sinen :
abuten 12, dure : were 134, herte : kirke 136, men : abuten 144,
592
hulen : fules 305, wunder : hunger 306, mere : -mete 459. The most frequent alliterative combination is
2 + 1, as at 4, 15, 18, 19, 106-109, 113, 115, 117, 365 (hitt,
hole, biholdeð) &c., it occurs in at least one third
of the lines; next in number is 1 + 1, as in 5, 10, 16, 20, 21, 23, 34,
35, 110, 196 (forwurðe, waxe), 458 (atbrosten,
brest) &c., 2 + 2 is seen in 111, 123, 160, 363, 367, 1 + 2
in 2, 11, 114, 128, 135, crossed alliteration in 3, 6, 148, 157, 161,
170, 203, 360, 445 (fis, fuliwis, finnes,
waxen), 448, distinct alliteration in 147, 165.
The septenarius is the metre of ll. 205-216, 294, 295, 572-579,
585-594. For the structure of this verse, see p. 327; the following is a restoration and
scansion of the passages in the Bestiary.
205
do wé | forðí | so dóð | ðis dér || ðánne | bé we | gléwe,
Ón ðat | daí ðat | dóm sal | bén || ðát it | ús ne | réwe.
Séke we | hére | sóules | fód || ðat wé | ben sík|er ðóre,
Só ðis | wírm in | wínter | ís || ðan gé | ne tíl|eð móre.
ðe mír|e sún|eð ðe bár|lic séd || ðanne gé | fíndeð | ðe wéte;
210
ðe óld|e lág|e we óg|en súnen || ðe né|we we mót|en séken.
ðe córn | ðat gé | to cáu|e béreð || ál get | bíteð o|twínne;
ðe lág|e us lér|eð gód | to dón || ant ús | forbéd|eð sínne:
It bét|eð ús | érðlich|e bódes || ant bék|neð héu|enlíke;
It féd|eð ðe líc|ham ánt | te góst || oc nógt | o géu|enlíke.
215
vre lóu|erd críst | it lén|e ús || ðát his | láge us | féde
nú in | érd ant o | dómes | deí || ant tán|ne we háu|en néde.
294
ðús is | úre | lóuerdes | láge || lúue|líke to | fíllen;
hérof | háue we | míkel | néd || ðat wé | ðar wíð | ne díllen.
572
In bók|e ís | ðe túr|tres líf || wríten | ál o | ríme;
wu lá|gelík|e ge hóld|eð lúue || ál hir|e líf|tíme.
géf ge | ónes | máke | háueð || fro hím | ne wíl|e séden:
575
múneð|, wímmen|, híre | líf || íc it | wíle gu | réden.
bi hí|re mák|e ge sít | onígt, || o deí | ge góð | ant flégeð:
wó so | séit he | súndren | ógt || i seí|e ðát | he légeð.
Oc if hér|e mák|e wér|e déd || ant gé | wídu|e wóre,
ðánne | flégeð ge | óne ant | fáreð || non óð|er wíl|e móre.
585
Líst ilk | léfful | mán her|tó || ant hér|of óft|e réche;
vre sówl|e át|te kírk|e dúre || chés hire | críst to | méche.
hé is | úre | sóule | spúse || lúue we | hím wið | mígte,
ant wénd|e wé | néure | fro hím || be daí|e né | be nígte.
ðog he bé | fro úr|e sígt|e fáren || bé we him | álle | tréwe:
590
non óð|er lóu|erd ne léu|e wé || ne lúu|e nón|e néwe.
593
léue we | ðát he | líueð | aí || úp on | héuen|ríche,
ant ðéð|en hé | sal cúm|en éft || ant bén | us ál|le bríche,
fór to | démen | álle | mén || oc nógt | on géu|elíke;
hise lóð|e súl|en to héll|e fáren || hise léu|e tó | his ríche.
The writer handles this metre skilfully; the stresses coincide
generally with the natural accent and the rhymes are good. The
variations from the norm of the verse are those described on p. 328, but in proportion fewer.
For the octosyllable see p. 564. In this
metre are ll. 26, 27, 37-46, 48, 49, 54-59, 62-64, 68-71, 230-236, 238,
239, 250, 257-260, 262-271, 276, 278, 279, 281, 282, 284, 285, 288, 289,
292, 293, 322, 323, 325-331, 334-337, 341, 343-354, 359, 371, 372,
383-388, 390-402, 405-416, 419-424, 426-439, 454, 455, 463, 465, 466,
475, 476, 480-491, 494-496, 499-501, 508-511, 516-526, 528-533, 536-541,
546-549, 551-570, 580-583, 596-625, 627-648, 650-667. Of these some are
to be emended, others are peculiar in scansion, as, ðo úr|e drígt|en déd
| wás 26, ánt | his ég|en ár|en dím 44, His béc | is gét | bifór|en
wróng 62, Bíll|eð tíl | his béc | bifóren 68, háueð | ðe wréng | ðe ál |
forlóren 69, Ne háu|eð ðát | uením | non mígt 234, so hért | doð hís|e
hórn|es ál 258, óc | on swímm|eð bí|forén || ant áll|e ðe ód|re fól|egén
268, 269, álle | ðe óð|re míd|e cúmen 276, bér|en him óf | ðat wát|er
grúnd 278, ant bríng|ẹð us in sínn|ẹ ant tér | us slóð 329, ét|en ant
drínk|en wíð | unskílle 331, máni | alsó | ðe fóx|es náme 345, wúr|ði
árn | to háu|ẹn to sáme 346, dóð | ge hém | non óð|er gód 372, Céthe |
gránde | ís a | gret fís 383, ðerforẹ óð|re físs|es tó | him drágen 393,
wúneð | ðis fís | wið ðé | se grúnd 401, ne maí | it wún|en ðán | ðer
ínne 406, aneí | lond he wén|en ðát | it ís 414, Of stón | mid stél|e ín
| ðe túnder 419, wo só | him fól|ẹgeð fínd|eð sónde 431, ne cúm|en hé |
nummór|e úp 455, Féle | men háu|en ðe tók|eníng 463, ðat wán|ne hír|e
hárd|e tíde 499, slépeð | bi ðe tré | ál in | ðe sádue 524, ðán|ne
cúm|eð ðér | on gángen 530, mánie | ant mík|le cúm|en sáken 536, ðis élp
| he reís|en só | on stálle 547, Móy|ses wúld|e hím | up reísen 553,
mígt|e hé | it nó | wigt fórðen 554, áft|er hím | prophét|es álle 555,
ðo rém|ẹden he áll|e lúd|ẹre stéuẹne 561, hem tó | cam críst | urẹ
héu|en kíng 564, ðre dág|es ál | he slép|en wílle 607, ðánne | áfter |
ðe ðrídd|e daí 608, wið swét|nessẹ áls | ic ít | gu seíe 613, wor só |
he wálk|eð ón | ðe lónde 617, wor só | he wálk|eð, wor só | he wúneð
618, ful wél | his lúu|ẹ he táun|ẹde mán 631, ðannẹ hé | was déd | in
blód | ant bón 636, v́p | he rós | ant rém|ẹdẹ iwís 637, ínto | his gód
| cundnéss|ẹ afín
644, it óg|en áll|e to bén | us mínde 653, gé | ne
háu|eð in hír|ẹ non gálle 654, ðe wírm | ge lét|eð ant líu|ẹð bi séd
658, In wát|ẹr ge is wís | of héu|ẹkes cóme 664, In hól|ẹ of stón | ge
mák|ẹð hirẹ nést 666.
594
Verses of three measures are ll. 28-31, 47, 50-53, 60, 61, 65-67,
152-155, 162, 163, 167 (two lines), 168, 169, 180-183, 218-229, 237,
241-249 (241, 242 originally four lines, see note), 251-256, 272-275,
277, 280, 286, 287, 290, 291, 300-303, 316, 319, 320, 324, 332, 333,
338-340, 358, 373, 374, 389, 403, 404, 417, 418, 450, 456, 457, 461,
464, 467-474, 477, 478, 492, 493, 497, 498, 502, 503, 527, 534, 535,
542-545. Noteworthy are, bó|ðe bi nígt | ant bi daí 47, so rígt|e só |
he cúnne 52, ánt | he bíll|eð ðer ón 67 (anapaest in last foot occurs
several times in this metre), ðis líf | bitók | neð ðe stí 152, ðát | tu
sált | ðurg gón 155, aí | ðe sín | fúle || bisétt|en hé | wíle 167,
gáddr|eð ílk|ines séd 180, bóð|ẹ of wúd|ẹ ant of wéd 181, of córn | ánt
| of grés 182, ðat man clép|ẹð físi | ologét 221, He ðrág|eð ðe nédd|rẹ
of ðe stón 222, wiðínn|ẹ he haú|ẹð brenníng 229, bi swílc | átter | i
méne 248, drínk|en hís | wissíng 255, it quénch|et ílc | sinịgíng 256,
on óðr|es lénd|ebón 273, gef hím | ðat téð | bifóren 274, ?ant hélp|en
hím | to hérten 277, hélp|en him át | his néde 290, god gíu|eð ðér|forẹ
méde 291, ge fécch|eð óft|ẹ in ðe tún 301, frét|eð hí|re fílle 319, ánt
for his | sínful|e wérk 340, bute frét|eð hír|e fílle 373, ðis fís | ðat
is ðús | unríde 389, tíl | it cúm|ẹð ðe tíme 403, ðat stórm | stíreð | al ðe sé 404,
síp|es ón | to fésten 417, ant áll|e úp | to gángen 418, súm ðing |
tókneð | bi ðís 461, ant wík|ke ís | herẹ déde 468, ?on wérld|e wún|en
hér 493, ðat he múg|en rís|en wíð 503. Verses of two measures are ll.
317, 449 (mánie | ant sílle), 452, 460.
Common Metre consists of alternate octosyllable and three-bar lines
arranged in stanzas of four lines, rhyming a : b : a : b. In this are
ll. 73-104, 504-507, 512-515. Scan, ðó|re sát|anás | forsákeð 81, to
ihés|u críst | him sélf | bitákeð 83, His múð | is gét | wél | unkúð 97,
bídd|en bón|e gérn | to góde 101, ánt | his múð | ðus rígten 102, to dón
| wel hís|e wíken 515. The stanza, ll. 89-92, is desperate.
Syncope of the middle vowel takes place in filstnẹde 30, heuẹne 49,
51, 562, 565, 639, seuẹne 50 (but seuene 652), sinịging 256, iuẹle 344, chauẹles
397, folẹgeð 431, 620, deuẹles 436, slumẹren 452, wunẹden 493, stedẹfast
509, suggẹden 559, sorgẹden 559, remẹden 561, steuẹne 561, taunẹde 631,
heuẹkes 664: e is also slurred or lost in ouẹr 48, 629, 630, clepẹð 221,
hauẹð 229, ogẹn 284, arẹn 394, forbisnẹde 464, bergẹs 481, cumẹð 543,
oðẹ 549, makẹn 556, watẹr 664, makẹð 666; in many other cases there is
the alternative of a three-syllable foot, as for instance, of an
anapaestic last foot in 502, 604. Hiatus occurs in stille 28, golsipe
245, giuernesse 246, pride 247, 257, alle 264, 418, 540, nede 267, raðe
333, same 339, wulde 354, were 387, eure 402, ðanne 485, 511, name 489,
wanne 499, helpe 538, 546, migte 556, oliue 583.
595
Introduction: Before the middle of the second
century A.D., there appeared at
Alexandria a Greek book, in which marvellous accounts of the nature and
properties of certain animals, plants, and stones were used as
allegorical and mystical illustrations of the dogmas of the Christian
faith. The natural history element was an amalgam of popular conceptions
and travellers’ tales, sheltering under the authority of ὁ Φυσιολόγος, the Naturalist, by
whom the compiler probably meant Aristotle, and from whom the book
itself was in later times called Physiologus. The didactic portion was a
product of Alexandrian Judaeo-Christian theology, inspired by similar
moralisations in the Septuagint and influenced by the pervading
atmosphere of Egyptian nature symbolism.
In its primitive form the book is probably best represented by the
version printed in Lauchert, pp. 229-270. It had an amazing success, it
passed everywhere with the Christian faith and soon found translators
into Ethiopic, Armenian, Syriac (more than once), and Arabic. There is
evidence of a prose version in Latin as early as the fifth century; from
Latin it passed into most of the literatures of Europe. But the metrical
version of Thetbaldus appears to have driven out the older Latin
versions, one of which, however, is the main source of the Anglo-Norman
poem written by Philippe de Thaün on English ground about 1130 A.D.
1-35. Compare generally CM
18641-60.
2. ⁊ = ant, with
the subjunctives here, smake means if; some explain it by
supposing ellipsis of ȝif.
3. smel, sense of
smell, power of smelling; Mätzner compares ‘Smel of neose is þe ueorðe
of þe vif wittes,’ AR 104/17; ‘Þonne is þe hundes smel for-do,’ ON 822.
Smake, perceive by smell; a rare transitive use; see 211/497 for
the intransitive, give out a smell.
4. ‘Qualicunque via
descendit vallis ad ima,’ T.
5. The second half line is
short; read he self filleð.
6. [dun]: supplied
in Specimens with a reference to l. 22.
7. deu: Holthausen
suggests fen, mud, restoring the alliteration; comp. 195/630. he,
the hunter.
8. driueð dun,
hastens down; comp. ‘se ferliche ha driuen dun to þe eorðe,’ HM 21/20,
‘driue adun swireforð,’ id. 23/32; with ‘ðeðen,’ 187/364. bergen:
Holthausen conjectures dernen, which is apparently not used in ME. of
living things: possibly dennen should be read as in l. 25; the writer is
fond of such repetitions. There is nothing in T. corresponding to this
line.
10-13. ‘Natus non
vigilat dum sol se tercio girat | Sed dans rugitum pater ejus suscitat
illum,’ T.
596
11. lið: read
lieð, as in l. 15.
12. Holthausen
transposes, Til ðe sunne haueð ðries · sinen him abuten. But the
inflectional rhyme is sufficient.
13. Transpose, his faðer
him reiseð. makeð: perhaps remeð; comp. 193/540.
15. lage: a
variant on ‘kinde,’ l. 10, characteristic, habit; comp. ‘þenne hafest þu
þes hundes laȝe,’ OEH i. 25/4; ‘Ðe unwise man and forwened child habbeþ
boðe on laȝe,’ OEH ii. 41/23, and see 20/63.
16. ‘Qui quociens dormit
nunquam sua lumina claudit,’ T. ‘Crederis esse leo vigilanti semper
ocello,’ Ruodlieb iv. 85.
17. This interpretation
springs from, ‘Catulus leonis Iuda: ad praedam fili mi ascendisti:
requiescens accubuisti ut leo, et quasi leaena, quis suscitabit eum?’
Gen. xlix. 9; see Honorius Augustod. 935 c.
18. hil: comp.
‘Twen heuone hil and helle dik,’ GE 281.
20.
wu—liked, how (anticipating ‘hu,’ l. 22), when it pleased
him; similar is ‘hu,’ 192/504. ligten: see 141/42 and comp.
199/79.
21. Comp. ‘ah þurh þe
mon ꝥ he wes | ischrudd ⁊ ihudd wið, | he bicherde þene feont, | ⁊
schrenchte þen alde deouel, | ⁊ teschrapet his heaued,’ SK 1181.
derne, cunning.
22. The missing half
line may have been something like, to ðis dale niðer, as in
l. 4.
23. dennede him,
hid himself as in a den, suggested by den in l. 8; comp. ‘caldeliche
dennet in a beastes cribbe,’ OEH i. 277/29.
24. to manne
frame, for men’s benefit; manne is pl. gen., but the
original reading was probably manne to frame with the usual
dative: comp. 15/110; ‘naht him to mede ac hus to freme ⁊ to
fultume,’ OEH i. 217/17; ‘folce to frofre,’ Beowulf 14: see 3/37,
85/107, 86/126, 110/295, 186/323, 187/360.
27. doluen,
buried; comp. ‘Brend and doluen was ðat folc soth,’ GE 3685. so for
also would improve the rhythm; comp. 177/33.
29. it: formal
subject; comp. ‘Til hit sprang dai liȝt,’ KH 124 note: similar is
114/90.
30. filstnede,
helped; a derivative beside the more common filsten; comp. ‘He badd hiss
maȝȝstre fillstnenn himm,’ Orm i. 181/5236, 213/6170.
32. A half line is
missing, something like, liues louerd so he is, corresponding to ‘mortis
vindex’ in T. Comp. 147/149. vs—holden, to hold us to life,
maintain us alive, save us from death; add to before holden; comp. ‘Butt
iff þatt Godd himm hullpe þær, | ⁊ helde himm þær to life,’ Orm ii.
63/12033: similarly ‘þa alde; þe to fehte heom scolde
halden,’
597
L 9458, the elders who had to keep them fighting. But this transitive
use is rare.
33. wakeð, keeps
watch. ‘Tu nos custodis, tu nullo tempore dormis | Pervigil ut pastor ne
demat de grege raptor,’ T. This is the explanation of natura iii.
hirde: some such word as wakeman 113/56 would restore the
alliteration.
35. heren to,
obey. OE. hīeran with this meaning takes the dative, ‘Ne mæg nan
mon twæm hlafordum hieran,’ Cura Past. 128/23, but it is rare in ME.
nowor wille, nowhere, in no case, never, astray; comp. ‘ðo fleg
agar fro sarray, | . . . | In ðe diserd, wil and weri,’ GE
28/973, 5; ‘In a foreste þay were gone wylle,’ Ysumbras 157.
37. kinde is
without rhyme and Holthausen suggests that a line like l. 263 or l. 653
has fallen out. T. has ‘Esse ferunt aquilam super omne volatile primam |
Quae se sic renovat quando senecta gravat’: something like, ðe moste ðat
on lift we finde, would correspond, comp. 188/384.
39. ‘renovabitur ut
aquilae iuventus tua,’ Ps. cii. 5.
40. cumeð ut of
elde, divests himself of old age.
41. Siðen, after,
practically means when; comp. ‘Siðen ghe brocte us to woa, | Adam gaf
hire name eua,’ GE 237, not ‘since,’ Mätzner. It is an adverb at l. 70
and nine other places, meaning afterwards. With unwelde comp.
‘Vn-welde woren and in win, | Here owen limes hem wið-in,’ GE 347.
42. wrong, awry;
OWScand. rangr; comp. ‘⁊ all þatt ohht iss wrang ⁊ crumb | Shall effnedd
beon ⁊ rihhtedd,’ Orm i. 321/9207; see also 177/62, 178/69, 70: al to is
then altogether, exceedingly. But Mätzner assumes a participle
*to-wrungen, which is without parallel. T. has, corresponding to
ll. 61, 62, ‘Est autem rostrum quo carpitur esca retortum,’ but nothing
here; with ll. 41-43 comp. ‘Solet dici de Aquila dum senectute premitur,
quod rostrum illius aduncetur et incurvetur, ita ut sumere cibum nequeat
et macie languescat,’ H. de S. Victor, ii. 417.
46. ‘Fons ubi sit
quaerit qui nunquam surgere desit,’ T., from ‘fons aquarum, cuius non
deficient aquae,’ Isa. lviii. 11.
48. ⁊ rubricated
as though beginning another line. teð, proceeds; comp. 184/266,
274; ‘To-warde egipte he gunne ten,’ GE 1953.
50. seuene: he
flies through seven to the highest, eighth, heaven; comp. ‘Eiȝte
firmamenz þare beoth: swuche ase we i-seoth. | þe Ouemeste is þe riȝtte
heouene: in ȝwan þe steorrene beoth. | for godes riche is þare a-boue:
þat last with-outen ende | . . . | þare bi-neoþe beoth seoue
firmamenz,’ SE. Legendary, 311/413.
52. as directly in front
as he is able.
598
53. houeð,
remains poised, floats; comp. 188/395, 189/409, Minot iii. 83.
54.
swideð—fligt, burns all his wings; comp. ‘In dai swiþe noht
sunne (MS. sinne) þe sal,’ Surtees Psalter, MS. E. cxx. 6 (= ‘Per
diem sol non uret te’). T. has, ‘Tunc sibi sol ambas incendit
(a. l. accendit) fervidus alas. | Et minuit grandes
alleviatque graves.’
56. ‘ex calore poris
apertis et pennis relaxatis subito descendens in fontem ruit,’
Bartolomeus Anglicus, lib. xii.
57. mide,
therewith; comp. 212/513 and see 1/19
note.
58. grund,
bottom, see 188/401.
59. heil ⁊ sund:
comp. 184/279, 188/402; ‘Tel him ꝥ þou ert sund and hale,’ CM 5112; ‘hol
and isunde,’ OEM 42/186.
61. If his beak were not
crooked; not ‘unzuverlässig,’ Mätzner, but as artificers still use true,
noun and verb, in various expressions, as ‘out of true,’ ‘to true up,’
&c.
62. biforn, in
front, the upper mandible has curved over the lower, as S. Augustine
explains, iv. 1. 839: it is mostly used with verbs of motion, as at
76/10.
64. tilen,
procure; comp. 179/103, 182/199; ‘In swinc ðu salt tilen ði mete,’ GE
363.
65. with any benefit to
himself. Comp. ‘Mare hit hem deð to herme þenne to gode,’ OEH i. 27/12;
‘hi þonne ne mihtan nawþer ne him sylfum, ne þære heorde . . .
nænige gode beon,’ BH 45/14. ‘Vix valet ex aliquo sumere pauca
cibo,’ T.
67. billeð: comp.
186/316, 334, 338; ‘ad petram elidit, immo comminuit et conterit,’
Neckam, De Naturis Rerum, 72.
69. wrengðe,
distortion: derivative of wrong; apparently here only: see Archiv
cxxvii. 47. Add al before forloren.
70. rigte,
straightened.
75. sinnes dern
would in any other context mean sins done in secret, but T. has ‘Est
homo peccatis que sunt ab origine matris | Qualis adest
(a. l. idem est) aquila, sed renovatur ita,’ which requires
the sense of original sin not manifest in word or deed. This is clearer
in Philippe de Thaün, ‘Pur general pechié (i.e. the universal sin of the
human race) | Est enfes baptizié, | E quant il est levez | Cum aigle est
renuvez; | Quant il est baptiziez | Dunc est rejuveigniez: | Vertu e
veement | En baptisteire prent,’ 78/2115-22. The infant is old in
inherited sin, in baptism he renounces Satan and becomes a Christian,
then he learns priest’s lore, pater noster and creed: ll. 93-102 are
simply variations on the preceding. ‘Nubes transcendit solisque incendia
sentit. | Mundum cum pompis
599
despiciendo suis. | Fit novus in Christo ter mersus gurgite vivo. |
. . . | Os terit obliquum per verba precancia
Christum,’ T.
78. nimeð: see
213/539.
79 goes with l. 78, he
must betake himself to the Church, before he can find repentance; his
eyes were previously too dim to see his guilt.
81. Transpose, ðore
satanas forsakeð, and for l. 83 read to ihesu crist him self bitakeð:
comp. ‘Ich wole ȝou nou bitake ihesu crist,’ E. E. Poems
106/165.
84. mede, reward,
gives a poor sense; beten his nede would suit the context; comp.
184/280, ‘For he wende bete his nede,’ Rel. Ant. ii. 278/10; ‘er he bete
þy nede,’ Lib. Desconus, 1582.
86. lereð
&c., learns what the priest teaches, i.e. the articles of the
faith.
88. dreccheð,
tarries: comp. ‘ne wold he ðor | Ouer on nigt drechen nunmor,’ GE
1420.
89-92. This stanza is
imperfect, ll. 89, 91 do not rhyme. The former is on an erasure. There
is nothing corresponding in the original: it is probably due to the
scribe.
89. to godeward:
not toward God; ward is a mere tag, as at 179/115, 180/146,
184/259, 194/588; comp. ‘frommard,’ 58/66 note, 70/165; ‘efterward,’
77/63 note. For the construction comp. 89/28, 96/58, ‘ich hopie to
mede,’ AR 148/16; ‘hopieð to here michele wisdome,’ VV 67/13, 131/18; SJ
29/16; ‘forðæm hie gemunon ðone tohopan þe hie to ðæm gestrionum
habbað,’ Cura Past. 344/1.
90. lereð:
Emerson restores the rhyme by reading leteð; but ‘leten of’ is
apparently always accompanied by an adverb of degree; see 44/260 note.
91. ðat
apparently refers to ‘gode’ l. 89: in one edition of the Latin original
‘solis incendia’ is glossed ‘iusticie calores.’
93. funt fat:
probably here only in ME. for the usual fantston, as at 85/101; CM
29200: OE. fant-fæt.
95. The punctuation of
Mätzner and Morris, buten a litel; wat is tat? involves taking ‘litel’
as a little thing. The meaning appears to be, but a small something
(= a slight imperfection) is that his mouth is still crooked. Comp.
‘And þeonne sum lutel hwat he mei leggen on þe,’ AR 346/22; ‘Ah ȝette me
an hwet,’ SK 767.
96. untrewe, with
double meaning, crooked and unfaithful.
97, 98. unkuð
wið, unacquainted with, not knowing (insciens); comp. 191/469 and
‘uncuð . . . of,’ 188/396, apparently the only three places
where the word has this meaning. Elsewhere uncuð with the dative
600
means unknown (ignotus); comp. ‘hit is us uncuð ⁊ ungeliefedlic,’
Orosius 214/21.
99. Whatever he does,
under all circumstances; comp. 34/86 note.
100. He shall find out
what is wanting to him.
101, 102. ‘Os terit
obliquum per verba precancia Christum,’ T. After bone, a word of
one syllable has dropped out, probably gern.
103, 104. ‘Panis is
est Christus, fit sine morte cibus,’ T.
105. With this section
should be compared OEH ii. 199, which deals with the same subject.
106. o werlde,
in the world: comp. 180/140.
107. te name, a
predicative phrase: him has fallen out before it. Comp. ‘fox is hire to
name,’ 185/298 = fox is for name to her; ‘him . . . se
gemyndega papa Petrus to naman scop,’ Bede 405/31 (‘cui papa memoratus
Petri nomen imposuerat’). Mätzner quotes ‘þam is to naman nemned
Drihten,’ Psal. lxvii. 4 (Dominus nomen est ei). A curious variation is
seen in ‘þat lond þat is to water nemned,’ OEH ii. 177/3. The usual ‘bi
name’ is at 176/24. For the noun toname, comp. ‘Ðes wimman hadde ec on
toname magdalene,’ OEH ii. 143/12.
108. A padded line;
the last half was probably, ⁊ elde forwurðen.
109. him: see
80/47 note. ten: the bestiaries say
forty.
110. lene: read
megre; ‘jejunans macie perhorret,’ T. iuele, with difficulty; an
early instance of the meaning. ‘Vix movens sese veniensque
tandem,’ T.
111. craft . . .
kiðeð: comp. ‘Who so kouth wele his craft þare might it kith,’ Minot
v. 69 note.
112. ðat . . .
on, in which: see 1/3 note.
113. Narrow the hole
is, but he forces himself to go through it: comp. ‘Long silence ⁊ wel
iwust nedeð þe þouhtes up touward þer heouene,’ AR 72/17. Nimeð:
see 213/539 note. ‘Querit angustum lapidis
foramen | . . . | Inde pertransit spoliatque carnem | Pelle
vetusta,’ T.: ‘cumeð to ane þurlede ston ⁊ criepeð nedlinge þureh nerewe
hole ⁊ bileueð hire hude baften hire,’ OEH ii. 199/25. Transpose him
nedeð.
115. ward is
merely expletive; see 178/89 note.
116. or,
previously, before drinking; comp. ‘siðen,’ 118. speweð: the
explanation is in 181/159, 160: comp. ‘heo schal speowen al ut þet
wunder,’ AR 346/6; ‘þet is þet beste þeonne speowen hit ut anon mid
schrifte to þe preoste,’ id. 240/6; 119/91, 92, mostly with ut. Read
here, Oc he speweð ut or. al ðe uenim ðor; for or : ðor comp. GE 4033
with 3845.
118. Transpose, inog
siðen drinkeð, making a rhyming line.
601
120. of . . .
naked, stripped of, without: nacod takes the genitive. Read,
Ðanne ðe neddre is newe. ⁊ of his hid naked: comp. 181/162.
121. An abridged line;
read, ⁊ in bodi ⁊ in brest. bare of his atter. Comp. ‘helden ham cleane
ai fra fleschliche fulðen ibodi ⁊ ibreoste,’ HM 23/1. For of
comp. ‘bare of euch blisse,’ SK 845; Minot vi. 25 note.
123. Transpose, him
fro. sulde, would be bound to, obliged to.
124. Read, . cof ⁊
kene: comp. ‘Biforenn kafe ⁊ kene,’ Orm 19962. In AR 66/13 ‘þe coue,’
wrongly translated ‘the chough’ means, the keen one; similarly, ‘þe
luðere coue deouel,’ id. 66/14.
125. rigteð
him: ‘Surgit in ipsum,’ T.
126. to ded
maken may be a construction by analogy of don, bringen &c., but
it is more likely that to has been wrongly repeated and should be
omitted. forðen, further, effect; comp. 184/280, 192/533,
193/554; ‘for to forðen is fendes wil,’ GE 341.
127. wat if:
elliptical for, what results if? as at 181/170, what matters it if?
Transpose, wurðe war, be on his guard: comp. 9/122, 48/330, 203/204.
128. figteð:
read fliteð, contends, offers resistance; comp. ‘Ierusalem ⁊ babilonie
. . . fliteð eure ⁊ winneð,’ OEH ii. 51/10. fareð
&c., advances fighting against him; ‘sequiturque multum,’ T. For
on, comp. ‘hie alle on þone Cyning wærun feohtende,’ AS. Chron.
ed. Plummer, 48/4; ‘for to finde me a freke to feȝte on my fille,’
Anturs of Arther, 15/27.
129. After
siðen insert he seð · ðat, after he sees that he must needs.
130. ‘Negligit corpus,
facit inde scutum; | Verticis vero tenet usque curam, | Ne moriatur,’ T.
Comp. ‘Ðare næddre ȝeapnesse is ðat hie lið al abuten itrand, ⁊ hire
heaued on midden, for to berȝen ðat heaued,’ VV 101/19.
131.
litel—of, little he cares about, he does not much mind what
happens to: see 8/84 note. bute, if
only.
133-142 are based on
‘Fonte qui sacro semel es novatus, | Denuo peccans, silicernus extas. |
Ergo sis semper imitator anguis, | Cum veterascis,’ T.
134. Atte kirke
dure, at the font, placed symbolically at the entrance to the
church: comp. ‘heore godfaderes ⁊ heore godmoderes scullen onswerie for
hem et þe chirche dure ⁊ beo in borȝes et þe fonstan,’ OEH i. 73/29.
135. Transpose, on him
to leuen. For leuen . . . luuien see 143/73 note.
136. For bodes,
hestes should probably be read; comp. 130/78; ‘þe heste of hali
chirche,’ OEH i. 85/18.
602
137-140. Re-arrange,
If ðu hauest is broken. al ðu forbredes. | forwurðes ⁊ forwelkes. eche
lif to wolden. | Elded art fro blis. so ðis wirm o werld is.
forgelues: only here; it may be connected with OE.
geolwian, and so mean, to spoil by becoming yellow, to fade. But
it is suspect; possibly the original word was forwelkes, dost wither.
There is nothing in the original to correspond with l. 138; the adapter
had perhaps in mind ‘decidat, induret et arescat,’ Ps. lxxxix. 6.
Eche lif to wolden, so far as the attainment of eternal life is
concerned. Elded, severed by age, is the writer’s interpretation
of silicernus. Silicernium, a funeral feast, is used in Terence, Andria
iv. 2. 48, as an abusive term for an old man, hence L.L. silicernus,
senex; but the Catholicon, citing this place in T., says ‘Item
silicernus ponitur quandoque pro firmo et duro ut silex.’
141. Add at the end,
him bi, meaning, in his own case. For the rhyme comp. ‘And manige of ðo
greten forði | ðat he adden ben hard hem bi,’ GE 3207, 3208; for the use
of bi, see 13/18 note.
142. See 123/210.
143-151. Based on,
‘Sit cibus parcus, minuantur artus. | Unde non mandis miseros
(a. l. pauperes) juvabis | Penitens defle dominoque semper |
dic miserere,’ T.
143. Feste
&c. is explained, confirm thyself in steadfastness; but for this
ethical sense festnen is used everywhere else (see 147/142) and of seems
to be without parallel, though ‘steðeluest . . . of’ occurs at
129/24. The expression is rather pointless and corresponds to nothing in
the ways of the serpent, while ll. 109, 110 are the only ones which have
no interpretation in the ‘significacio.’ Furthermore the last half of
the line is defective. Now l. 144 clearly represents the second line of
the original quoted above, which means, from what you do not eat you
will help the poor, and it depends for its point on the sparing of food
enjoined in the preceding line of the original. Accordingly we should
expect something in l. 143 to correspond to it, which as printed above
means, let your food be sparing and your limbs reduced by bloodletting
(minutio, see 66/103-105 notes). If the poet had before him, or misread
his copy so, muniantur artes, he might translate, Feste þe of fastenes.
⁊ filste þe of þewes, that is, fortify thyself by fastings and help
thyself by virtues. For he would find ars explained by Papias as bene
recteque vivendi virtus . . . ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρετῆς, id est a virtute. And the scribe
by anticipating ste þe from the last half of the line might readily
produce stedefastnesse.
145.
wurði—loken, worthy to presume to look.
146. ward: see
178/89 note.
147. wið, in
contact with, on: comp. 188/401, 201/148.
603
150. bote bid,
pray for deliverance: for the usual combination see 179/201. With l. 151
comp. ‘bidden for heom deies ⁊ nihtes þet crist heom milcie of heore
misdede,’ OEH i. 7/36.
152. sti is
subject of bitokneð: ‘Signat hunc callem lapidis foramen. | Signat et
christum petra, nam per ipsum | Fit novus quisque,’ T. Perhaps for tis,
l. 154, we should read Christ.
156. Comp. 181/160.
Let, permit it to escape, as in ‘þe king bigan to grete | ⁊ teres
for to lete,’ KH 889. Transpose ðe fro.
157-160. ‘Cuius ad
celsum veniendo templum, | Ut bibas sacrum beatumque verbum, | Evomas
primum quod habes nocivum | Corde venenum,’ T.
158. A defective line;
read drench · þi sinnes to cwenchen. Comp. 28/10; ‘swa bihoueð þe saule
fode; mid godes wordes mid gode mode,’ OEH i. 63/153; ‘to
cwennkenn oþre sinness,’ Orm 11652.
160. Omit
brest. forðward: read forward, covenant of 180/133: the
combination is formal; comp. ‘my forwarde with þe I festen on þis wyse,’
E. E. Allit. Poems, 47/327; ‘Pepigi fedus cum oculis meis
. . . Ich habbe ivestned, seið Job, foreward mid min eien,’ AR
62/23; ‘ꝥ ich þis forward wulle; fastliche halden,’ L 23607.
After this there are eight lines in the Latin which are not represented
at all in the English poem, which is only slightly dependent on the
original for the rest of the section.
161. firmest,
first of all, at the very beginning.
163. forðward,
henceforth; at 81/90 it means, straight ahead.
164. Nedeð,
presses on, vexes: comp. 179/113; ‘I me sellf all ah itt wald | Þatt
deofell maȝȝ me scrennkenn, | Þurrh þatt I do min lusst tærto, | To don
summ hefiȝ sinne | Þatt he me maȝȝ wel eggenn to, | ⁊ nohht ne maȝȝ me
nedenn,’ Orm 11815, a passage which may have been in the writer’s mind
here. But Mätzner suggests neggeð, comparing 179/122. Omit the second
nogt, and in l. 165 transpose ðe fro.
166. cliuer,
expert in seizing: the only ME. example of the word clever: noted by Sir
Thomas Browne as an East Anglian word. See NED s.v. clever; the
connection with clifer, claw, suggested by this use is
illustrated by, ‘Hweðer þe cat of helle claurede euer toward hire ⁊
cauhte mid his cleafres hire heorte heaued,’ AR 102/4. With on
comp. ‘gredi uppen woreld richeise,’ OEH ii. 195/1.
169. nið ⁊ win:
comp. 183/244: ‘nið and strif’ is the equivalent in GE 373: nið usually
takes to, ‘he haueð to us muchel nið,’ OEH i. 55/11, but see 197/11.
170. Comp. ‘he haueð
leue to fonden mon,’ OEH i. 67/232.
171. Transpose, us for
to deren: it is a rhyming line.
604
172. let us subject
the body to pain: bale was probably suggested by ‘bote,’ 180/150.
The meaning is made clear by, ‘lyued in penance hys lyueȝ longe | With
bodyly bale hym blysse to byye,’. E. E. Allit. Poems, 15/476. Omit
ðe before bale.
173. that (i.e. the
soul) is equal to the head, that is, the head figuratively signifies the
soul. But the Latin finally identifies the head with Christ, ‘Hoc caput
dico quod habes in ipso | Principe christo,’ which is from ‘omnis viri
caput Christus est,’ 1 Cor. xi. 3. helde might be subj. past
from healdan, if we were to keep, but that would give a poor
sense; and it cannot be from heldan (hieldan) incline, for that
would require to: silde should probably be read; comp. 180/130; ‘Semper
illesum caput est habendum,’ T.; the meaning would be, let us protect it
as it deserves.
176. Transpose, weder
softe: sen hauen ofte. softe, mild; comp. ‘ðis weder is softe,’
GE 3061.
177. Read, heruestes
hete; comp. ‘Heruest, with the heite ⁊ the high sun, | Was comyn into
colde,’ Destruction of Troy, 407/12465. hardilike:
heardlīce, energetically; the glide i takes the place of
the usual e.
178. renneð
rapelike: comp. 187/368.
181. wed, weed,
used, no doubt, for the rhyme: for a more usual expression, see
21/112.
182. Comp. ‘He deden
on gres and coren deres,’ GE 3088, 3049.
183. ire is for
hire. hauen, wealth; comp. ‘man hoh . . . loc to
chirche bringen ⁊ wurðin þermide godes bord; alse his haue
beð,’ OEH ii. 217/6: n has been added as to ‘boðen’ 181/181 and
elsewhere in this text and GE. Lit., that is to her for wealth; which
constitutes her wealth.
185. winter
agen, to meet, resist, winter: comp. ‘Þe blake cloð . . .
is þiccure aȝein þe wind,’ AR 50/15; ‘Ðat arche was a feteles good |
set and limed agen ðe flood,’ GE 561. ‘Ut valeat brume fieri secura
future,’ T.
186. Holthausen
restores alliteration by substituting colde for winter.
187. hule, hut,
shelter. Mätzner takes the former ðat as demonstrative, and
divides bi liuen, that is meat by which she can live, quoting ‘mete
quorbi ðei migten liuen,’ GE 573. More probably the former ðat has
displaced mide (comp. 191/503), then mete is the object of tileð,
procures.
188. Transpose, ðar
tileð.
189. it: the
book Physiologus; so 192/506; see 177/38, 183/221.
190. ‘Haec frumenta
legit, si comperit; ordea spernit,’ T. finde ge, if she find:
cleche for finde would restore the alliteration. corn, grain
605
or seed, so OE. hwǣtene corn, corn hwǣtes, ‘granum
frumenti,’ S. John xii. 24.
191. Omit al, and for
forleteð read sedeð, sheds. ðat—seide, of which I have
already spoken.
192. ‘She biteth not
the barley to bear it about,’ Specimens. Mätzner also takes bit as
biteð, eats, but explains beren abuten, about the barn. But bit,
OE. bīt, is contracted form of bideð, endures, which is to be
restored here: she cannot endure the carrying of the barley about.
193. but shunneth it
and hurries away, as though it were a shame to have anything to do with
it. sakeð: comp. 192/536; ‘nes þer nan biscop; ꝥ forð
on his wæi ne scoc | na munec ne nan abbed; ꝥ he an his wæi
ne rad,’ L 13245; ‘and with his batayle forth he schoke,’ Laud Troy
Book, 4886.
195. Omit ðe corn, for
bit read biteð (so too at l. 211), and transpose, otwinne biteð.
al—biteð, she bites it all asunder. otwinne, on
twain: comp. OWScand. tvinnr, double. ‘Sed ne de pluviis aspersum
germinet udis, | Aut ea ne pereat, esse quod hinc nequeat, | Granum quod
legit prudens formica bipertit,’ T.
196. Add wurþ before
forwurðe: comp. ‘Ich schal mid one bare worde | Do þat þi speche
wrþ forwurþe,’ ON 548. ne waxe &c., nor germinate so as to be
lost to her.
200. Defective: ðis
little wile. ðe we on werlde wunen appears to form a line: Long and
liuenoðe are probably the first and last words of a line; the latter
must be dative. The Latin original has ‘Nosque laboremus, fratres, dum
tempus habemus;’ something too is wanted to balance ‘mikel ge swinkeð,’
181/175, like, Longe þat we labouren . for ure liuenoðe. This conjecture
assumes an earlier use of labour than any recorded.
202. of, off,
away, adv. representing off ðis werlde; comp. ‘ær ic
. . . of gewite,’ ‘prius quam eam,’ Psal. xxxviii. 16.
winter: ‘tempore judicii, quod simile est hiemi,’ T.
203. harde
sures, sore troubles; comp. ‘to put þe of peril · i haue ney
perisched oft, | ⁊ many a scharp schour · for þi sake þoled,’ W. of
Palerne, 4513; ‘ffull sharpe was the shoure (printed shoute), shent were
þere mony,’ Destruction of Troy, 10069: the adjective in this sense is
usually sharp; ‘hard shoure,’ Destr. of Troy, 11048 is a fierce attack,
but ‘sorful scurs,’ CM 24602. Similarly, ‘weorre ⁊ weane baðe | ⁊ untidi
wederes,’ SK 2599.
204. The line may be
completed by, er we henne wende; see 22/117. The rest of this section
consists of rhymed septenaries.
205. For derue
read glewe, wise, prudent.
606
206. Transpose, us ne,
and omit harde. So that we do not deeply regret our improvidence at
doomsday.
207. For ure
read here, for ðere, with Holthausen who cites 178/88, þore. For
liues, soules should perhaps be read, as at 179/103.
208. For
nummore read more.
209. After
barlic add sed or corn. In the earlier bestiaries barley stands
for heretical writers: Eudes de Cheriton, p. 247, explains wheat as good
works.
210. Omit to.
hauen moten, must have, is feeble and does not rhyme. Holthausen
suggests hauen geten, have to observe: moten geten, must get, or moten
seken, which makes up for an indifferent rhyme by its contrast with
sunen, seem better. ‘Ipse novam legem colligo, non veterem,’ T.
211. get as at l. 195
would be better metrically.
212. Transpose, god to
don, and, us forbedeð.
213. ‘Hoc est quod
binas lex habet una vias, | Quae terrena sonat, simul et celestia
monstrat. | Nunc mentem pascit, et modo corpus alit,’ T. The corrections
bet, offers, and erðliche are due to Mätzner. bodes, not
‘biddings,’ Specimens, but teachings, information. bekned, points
to, indicates, proclaims. The meaning of the original depends on the
special use of lex, according to Papias ‘a legendo dicta lexis græce,
latine locutio, id est quælibet syllaba uel uox, quæ scribi potest,’
hence the written word, here the ‘facts’ of natural history, useful to
know for our bodily sustenance, but also charged with spiritual
instruction. The ant, as the Latin puts it, ‘in suis factis res monstrat
spirituales.’ The English version has obscured the sense by adding,
without authority, l. 212, where lex is taken in its natural meaning of
law. euelike, heavenly (teachings).
214. o
geuelike, on an equality, equally: OE. ge-efenlic adj.
here used as noun: comp. 194/593.
215, 216. ‘Nos utinam
repleat, famis ut formido recedat, Tempore judicii, quod simile est
hiemi,’ T.
216. The first half is
short; add, in erd after nu.
217. Next to the Ant
in T. comes the Fox and then the Hart.
218-221. ‘Cervus
habere duas naturas atque figuras | Dicitur a phisio, cum docet inde,
logo,’ T. How the hart renews its youth is again told in the Deposition
of Richard the Second, 15/8-20, and there is a curious use of the fable
in Nova Legenda Anglie, i. 254/23-29.
221.
fisiologet: the termination is probably borrowed from the
familiar donet, a Latin grammar; OF. donet.
223. ðurg his
nese, by drawing in his breath, ‘spiritu narium,’ or as T.
607
puts it, ‘cum naribus extrahit.’ on on, continuously; at 207/339,
forthwith.
224. stoc . . .
ston: ‘de caveis terrae, de latebrisve petrae,’ T. The translator
uses a familiar combination.
225. it: the
adder.
226. sweleð,
miswritten for swelgeð, swallows: the scribe was probably led by
‘brinneð’ in the next line to think of the word which for him
represented swǣlan.
227, 228. ðerof . .
. of: tautology is frequent in this piece: comp. 184/260. The
impersonal use of brinneð appears to be without parallel: the
meaning is, that poisonous matter burns him afterwards.
230. ‘Estuat ad
liquidas pergere fontis aquas,’ T.; estuat is glossed festinat, hence
lepeð; comp. Psal. xli. 1. wið—list, displaying
great prudence, wisdom: comp. ‘To the fischers hous þai went wiþ list,’
Gregorlegende, ed. Schulz, 52/1015.
232-238. ‘Quas cum
forte bibit, his plenus toxica vincit, | Se juvenemque facit, cornua
quando jacit,’ T.
235. non wigt,
no whit, not at all.
236. er, before
he recovers.
238. gingid
him, renews his youth; comp. 184/259: a rare word, perhaps only
here.
241-249. ‘Nos quoque
cum prisci serpentis fraude revicti, | Virus contrahimus, urimur et
facibus, | Haec est luxuria quae fert odium vel et iram, | Aut etiam
nimia est aeris auaricia,’ T.
241, 242 were no doubt
originally couplets, perhaps, Alle we atter dragen | of ure eldere
misdeden || ðe broken drigtinnes sonde | ðurg ðe neddres onde: comp.
40/192, 193. eldere seems to have been suggested by prisci.
244. nið ⁊ win:
see 181/169.
245. giscing,
covetousness: OE. gītsung; comp. ‘He bad him chesen steres-men
. . . ðe niðing and giscing flen,’ GE 3429, 3432; ‘Mid
yuernesse and prude . and yssyng wes þat on,’ OEM 38/35.
246. wissing:
to OE. wȳscan: its meaning as a sin is shown by, ‘Ne wrec þu þe
mid wussinge . ne mid warienge,’ OEH ii. 179/22, avenge not thyself by
wishing evil or cursing.
247. ouerwene,
presumption: found here only.
248. Insert bi before
swilc.
252, 253. ‘Ad fontem
vivum debemus currere christum,’ T.
255. wissing,
instruction. ‘Qui cum nos udat, sumpta venena fugat,’ T. udat is
explained, with quotation of this line, in the Catholicon as
balneat.
608
257. forwerpen
and gingen 259 depend on bihoueð 252. Holthausen restores
the missing rhyme by reading, forwerpen pride hornes | so hert doð hise
in þornes. It would be simpler to add al (comp. 178/73, 180/137,
182/191, 190/443), meaning completely, entirely, after hornes; it would
balance eurilcdel,
and the rhyme is possible; see 190/465, 466.
259. In this way renew
our youth to God, that is, restore the baptismal relation to him; comp.
181/162 and 178/89.
260. take heed to
ourselves afterward henceforth, ever after. Comp. ‘ðe sunenday | ðat is
forð siðen worðed ay,’ GE 261.
263. That ought to be
present in thought to us all: comp. 191/487, 196/653; ‘þine beoden þe
beoð þe so imunde,’ SM 13/8. minde is OE. gemynde.
265. ‘Longius et
pergunt pascua quando petunt,’ T.
266. ouer water
ten: ‘Si fluvios tranant,’ T.; ‘quant passent braz de mier,’ Bozon,
Contes moralisés, 56/3; ‘Cervi . . . maria trameant gregatim
nantes porrecto ordine, et capita imponentes praecedentium clunibus,
vicibusque ad terga redeuntes,’ Pliny, N. H. viii. 32, 114. See
Fecunda Ratis, 105/522 note, as to the use of this story by the
Fathers.
268. Read biforen.
272. skinbon,
shinbone; OE. scin-bān, tibia, which if placed on the haunch of
the preceding hart would make swimming difficult. He should have written
chin: ‘Portant suspensum gradientes ordine mentum, Alter in alterius
clunibus impositus,’ T.; ‘chescun de eux met sa test sus autri croupe,’
Bozon, 56/4.
274. Transpose, teð
biforen: ‘Sed qui precedit fessus ad ima redit; Sic se vertentes cuncti
mutuoque ferentes | Nunquam deficiunt, atque viam peragunt,’ T.
275. tirgen, to
be fatigued: OE. tiergan, tyrgan, to vex. ‘Tirwyn, or make
wery, lasso,’ Prompt. Parvul., col. 499. But the word is not original,
it does not rhyme. Teren, representing tēorian, teorian,
to tire, would be better; *toren with shifted accent, perhaps influenced
by tor, difficult (see NED tor, tere) would restore the rhyme.
276. Transpose, mide
cumen.
277. hertien is
Mätzner’s correction, comparing 199/75, 76; but the inf. in -ien is very doubtful. The original word was
probably beren.
278. grund: see
188/401: the poet has misunderstood ‘ad ima redit,’ the weary leader,
who has no rest for his chin, falls in at the rear of the
procession.
280. and supply their
necessity; ‘nunquam deficiunt,’ they never fail
609
one another. A line is wanting, such as, ⁊ cumen to here stede,
answering to ‘atque viam peragunt.’
281. ‘Hunc retinent
usum, si sint vel in agmine centum,’ T. hem bitwen, among
themselves.
284. ‘Per tales mores
alienos ferre labores | Cum pietate monent atque juvare docent,’ T.
costes, habits, ways: comp. ‘knewen he nogt ðis dewes cost,’ GE
3327.
285. Connect ur non,
no one of us.
288. his wine,
to his friend.
289. ‘Alter alterius
onera portate, et sic adimplebitis legem Christi,’ Gal. vi. 2.
291-294. ‘Sic lex est
Christi nobis complenda magistri | Cuius, qui faciet, pascua
repperiet,’ T.
293. bitwixen us .
. . brice, useful, serviceable to one another: comp. 194/592.
294. lage:
acc. after to fillen, which is subject of is.
295. ðar wið ne
dillen, be not sluggish about that: comp. ‘Hymself to on sware he is
not dylle,’ E. E. Allit. Poems, 21/679. The first half of the line
is feeble: perhaps dred for ned would be better.
298. hire
follows the gender of vulpes. For to name see 179/107.
queðsipe: Holthausen suggests flerdscipe to restore the
alliteration, with reference to 187/351; the compound does not occur
elsewhere. Perhaps fikenunge, deceit; or, for the last half-line read
for ure unframe, comp. ‘Quad esau, rigt is his name | hoten iacob, to
min unframe,’ GE 1565. But the writer may have intended an inflectional
rhyme.
299.
harm-dedes, injurious action; a compound which apparently occurs
here only.
301. feccheð,
steals: comp. ‘Bothe my gees ⁊ my grys . his gadelynges feccheth,’ P.
Plowman B. iv. 51. tun, the enclosed farmyard.
305. hulen is
hardly possible; it is not found elsewhere till the end of the
fourteenth century and the construction with the direct acc. hire
is improbable. Mätzner suggested hunten, Holthausen, hurlen, drive:
huten, revile seems preferable; comp. ‘⁊ ȝiff mann wollde tælenn þatt, |
⁊ hutenn hire ⁊ þutenn,’ Orm 2033, 4875. So chauntecler says to the fox,
‘Acoursed be thou of Godes mouthe,’ Rel. Ant. ii. 273/19. Further the
repetition of hatien is feeble; harien, persecute, would give a
good sense, while huntes (176/21, 192/512) for men would restore the
alliteration. So the line would run, harien ⁊ huten . boðe huntes ⁊
fules.
307. furg,
furrow. ‘In terram scissam se tendit atque supina | Et quasi mortua sit,
flamina nulla trahit,’ T.
610
308 is made up of
halves of two lines which may have run thus: fugeles to bilirten . mid
hire fel wrenche | In eried lond er in erðchine . ge strekeð adun.
bilirten, deceive, ensnare, a Midland and Northern word: OE.
belyrtan. eried lond, ploughed land, ‘terram scissam,’ the
‘furg’ of l. 307. erðchine, a cleft in the ground: a compound
found here only.
309. stund,
portion (of time): rarely with defining genitive.
310. dareð:
comp. 187/374, 195/624: here, to lie motionless, in the other places, to
lie hid, to lurk; comp. ‘fare man . . . to þam scræfe þær þa
wiðer-sacan inne dariað behydde,’ Ælf. Lives, i. 506/321, and see Minot
i. 9 for further illustrations of the uses of this word.
311. swiðe
redi, very prompt to seize the opportunity: comp. 187/368.
312. fallen bi,
alight near; a use of the verb determined by the needs of alliteration:
Mätzner adduces OE. befeallen, but that requires on; so in ME.
‘Gredi foueles fellen ðor-on,’ GE 947. ‘insidet ut comedat,’ T.
Transpose, bi hire fallen · fode for to winnen.
313. Transpose, beð
ded.
314. Mätzner alters
wullen to billen, spoiling the secondary alliteration: the
absolute use of willen, to desire to go, is common enough. fel:
in Eudes de Cheriton, 303/7 and Jacques de Vitry, no. ccciv, the fox
puts out his tongue and the birds make for it, a device which greatly
improves the fox’s chance. Transpose, feleð wel.
315. letteð,
stops, hinders: OE. lettan. Transpose, up lepeð . ⁊ hem sone
letteð.
317. illing,
evil treatment. ‘Dentibus et tristem reddit edendo vicem,’ T.
318. tetoggeð,
pulls to pieces; see 68/145.
323. frame: see
176/24.
324. For the
combination, see 18/16.
325. ‘Nunc zabulo
similis, par aliquando viris,’ T.
327. ‘Nos et
dissimulat quod mala non faciat,’ T. lat, pretends; comp.
203/222: influenced in form at any rate by OWScand. láta.
329. Omit a and
he.
330. bukes,
belly’s: see 4/19, where it means body.
331. wið
unskil, without discretion: comp. ‘Ne rend, ne beat nogt wið
vnskil,’ GE 3506; Orm 427.
332. And while we are
amusing ourselves, he quickly plays us a fox’s trick. foxing, a
nonce-word in this sense, but it is common in dialect for shamming.
611
334-341. ‘Cuius (read
eius) edit carnem quisquis rem fingit inanem, | Hoc est peccatum
quodlibet et malum | Quem quasi deglutit, cum secum ad tartara
ducit,’ T.
335. idel spel:
‘verbum otiosum,’ S. Matt. xii. 36; ‘tel heom þer spelles,’ L 26538
appears to mean, tell them tales there.
336. Whoever feeds on
sin, he tugs at the fox’s flesh.
338. geld,
requites; comp. l. 316.
339. sending,
disgrace, confusion; OE. scendan.
341. merk,
dark, murky; OE. mirce: comp. 190/439, 193/570.
343, 344. ‘Daemon ab
insidiis vulpeculae est similis,’ T. breides, stratagems, tricks;
comp. 193/548. swik, deception; comp. 188/396: OE.
swīc.
345, 346. ‘Sic cum
fraude viri sunt vulpis nomine digni, | Quales hoc plures tempore sunt
homines,’ T. For man read mani, omit ⁊, transpose wurði arn and
insert to before same, and many likewise are worthy of the name
of fox to their disgrace. Comp. ‘Euerilc ðhing haued he geue name, | Me
to sorge, scaðe and same,’ GE 301.
347. oðer, to
another.
348. Comp. ‘Danne
ðogte eue on hire mod,’ GE 333; KH 281 note.
349. iwis: see
32/40 note. There is nothing in T.
corresponding to ll. 347-349; the writer had probably in mind, ‘Ut quid
cogitatis mala in cordibus vestris?’ S. Matt. ix. 4.
350. legeð
&c., lies not, misleads not in this; so, ‘Iff iosephus ne legeð me,’
GE 1281.
351-354. ‘Herodesque
fuit, qui christum querere jussit, | Credere se simulans, perdere
dissimulans,’ T.; comp. S. Luke, xiii. 32. herodes: Orm has
Herode in his English text. fox ⁊ flerd: nouns used as
adjectives: for the former comp. 29/15; flerd, deceit, occurs in
Orm, ‘falls ⁊ flærd,’ 12177: OE. fleard: see Björkman, 160.
354. fordon:
‘Futurum est enim ut Herodes quaerat puerum ad perdendum eum,’ S. Matt.
ii. 15.
356. Seftes
&c.: comp. 2/2. sene—werlde, it is seen in the case of
the world; parenthetic; but Mätzner takes ðing as subject of is. With on
comp. ‘þat was on Tristrem sene,’ Sir Tristrem 1205; ‘On þe hit is wel
eþ sene,’ OEH ii. 255/5; ‘Ful soth it was apon vs sene,’ CM 24333.
357. leiðe,
hateful: OWScand. leiðr = OE. lāð: lodlike, OE. lāðlic is
synonymous. ðus: either, as has already been said, that the Creator made
these loathly things, or, as follows, that He made them to this end, for
the instruction of men generally. The latter is a common medieval
612
idea; men, says Gilbert of Hoyland, contemplate God ‘in speculo
creaturarum et scripturarum aenigmate,’ S. Bernardi Opera, ii. 170.
358. manikines:
see 81/80 note.
359. manne:
dat.; see 176/24 note.
360. Holthausen
supplied web (see l. 363), and swiðe or wide. ‘Plurima fila net
(a. l. nectit) assiduus,’ T.
361. Transpose, atte
hus rof festeð. festeð, binds. fodredes, plans, means of
securing food: a word found here only.
362.
so—elde, so it is for her in age, is senseless in this
context: read, hire is so on felde, it is for her as if on a field, that
is, she moves on a ceiling as if she were on the ground. so, as
if; comp. 194/583 with 195/625; ‘His brunie he gan lace | So he scholde
in to place,’ KH 717.
363. werpeð,
throws, with perhaps a reference to the specific meaning of warp, OE.
wearp, stamen.
364. Transpose, al
idigt haueð. With driueð comp. 176/8.
365. it, the
web.
366. Transpose, fleges
ðer faren . ⁊ ðerinne fallen.
367. wiðeren,
struggle; properly, resist.
368. renneð
&c.: comp. 181/178. redi: comp. 185/311.
369. nimeð . . .
to, makes for; see 213/539. nimeð, seizes: the repetition is
tolerable, because of the different meanings of the word.
370. bit: read
biteð. bane, destroyer: OE. bana, mostly used of the
agent.
372. This line appears
to be derived from ‘Et placet inde sibi nimium | Quando nocere potest
alium’ which comes in the application or ‘significacio.’ If so, it means
that in this action she finds her greatest profit. But probably hem
should be substituted for hire.
373. Read freteð.
374. dareð: see
185/310 and 195/624.
376. ‘Hos sequitur
homo vermiculos | Decipiendo suos socios,’ T. For man read were.
377.
on—stalle, in any place whatsoever: comp. ‘i stude ⁊ i
stalle,’ SK 683. B-T quotes from a charter, ‘ꝥ hi . . . næfre
ne beon on stede ne on stealle þær æfre undon worðe ꝥ ure foregengles
geuðen,’ Thorpe, Diplom. Angl., 348/28. The words are synonymous, so,
‘Þer þe fir he has his stall,’ CM 396. See 192/537.
377. stille er lude, under any circumstances: see 25/226 note.
378. mot, place
of meeting, especially in a court of law. For wise read mene:
comp. ‘mannes mene,’ society of men, GE 501. See 26/266.
379. Read, sarp he him
biteð; corresponding to ‘bitterlike’ 187/370;
613
comp. ‘sarp on bite,’ GE 2989. ‘Quos comedit faciens miseros,’ T.
bale selleð, does him an injury. ME. sellen, to give, is rarely
used with immaterial object, but comp. ‘sylle heom forȝefenesse,’
Twelfth Cent. Homilies, 132/20. Similar is ‘nuste noht Bruttes
þere; þat balu heom wes ȝiueðe,’ L 29817. Transpose, bale
him.
380. Transpose, his
blod drinkeð. dreueð, vexes, annoys.
381. For hem
read him; the scribe corrected ll. 379, 380, but overlooked this.
Transpose, ⁊ ðo him al freteð.
382.
cetegrandie: genitive of ‘cete grandia,’ Gen. i. 21, treated as
though it were one word and a noun singular. Cetegrandia is not in
Papias or the Catholicon; it is quite possibly the invention of the
present writer; the heading in T. is ‘De Balena’ or ‘De Ceto.’ The word
in l. 383 appears to have been formed directly from it; the OF.
Bestiaries have cetus only.
383-388. ‘Est super
omne pecus quod vivit in aequore cetus, | Monstrum grande satis, cum
superexstat aquis | Prospiciens illum, montem putat esse marinum, | Aut
quod in oceano insula sit medio,’ T. Insert gret before fis.
385. ðat:
pronoun anticipating the clause ðat—neilond, l. 387. get,
too; comp. ‘Of thre ȝere in þe temple sett, | And þerto fourtene winter
gett,’ CM 10531.
389. vnride,
enormous, monstrous; OE. ungerȳde; the general idea of the word
is excessive. Comp. 192/507, 522, 120/125.
390. hungreð:
impersonal as at 60/99; comp. ‘crist him ȝeueð swilcne mete ꝥ him nefre
eft ne hungreð,’ OEH i. 37/30; ‘þer in onliche stude him hungrede,’ AR
162/1. Omit he. gapeð &c.: ‘os aperit | Unde velud florum
(a. l. hamum) se flatus reddit hodorum | Ad se pisciculos ut
trahat exiguos,’ T.
391. it smit an
onde, a breath rushes forth; comp. 126/321 note: it is formal
nominative, the real subject is onde; comp. 188/403; ‘Til hit
sprang dai liȝt,’ KH 124 note.
393. to him
dragen, move towards him: comp. 189/416, 32/49; ‘And whatena hauld
shall we draw to?’ Child, Ballads, iii. 434.
394. it, the
sweet breath.
395. houen: see
177/53.
396. swike: see
82/111. uncuð . . . of: see 179/97.
397. ‘Piscis
pisciculos claudit, deglutit et illos,’ T.
401. wið, on;
comp. 180/147. se grund, bottom of the sea; comp. 177/58,
184/278, 189/423; ‘þai sail in þe see gronde . fissches to fede,’ Minot
x. 4 note; ‘I’ll set my foot in a bottomless boat, | And swim to the
sea-ground,’ Child, Ballads, i. 448.
614
402. heil ⁊
sund: see 177/59.
403. Insert perhaps
harde or ille before time. ‘Si sit tempestas, cum vadit vel venit estas,
| Et pelagus fundum turbidat omne suum,’ T.
404. For se,
Holthausen suggests brine, salt sea, by way of improving the rhyme, but
comp. time: bi me, KH 533, 534.
405. winnen,
come into conflict, at the change of the seasons.
407. droui,
turbid; comp. OE. drōf, drēfan: comp. ‘Þer faure citees
wern set nov is a see called, | Þat ay is drouy ⁊ dim,’ E. E.
Allit. Poems, 68/1016.
408. ðat stund,
at that time; comp. 185/309.
409. ‘Continuo summas
se tollit caetus ad undas,’ T. stireð, moves; comp. ‘ðis asse is
eft of weige stired,’ GE 3961, but stirteð would be more appropriate;
comp. ‘And pharaon stirte up anon,’ GE 2931; ‘Þe fisches sturten op with
þis song,’ South English Legendary, 232/456. houeð stille: comp.
‘Louerd crist, þat swch a best: scholde houi so stille | And soffri men
opon him gon: and don al heore wille,’ id. 230/375.
411. sipes:
Mätzner suggested siperes, OE. scipere, but that does not
apparently occur in ME. and it would be unmetrical, sipmen might be
read, if any change were necessary. fordriuen, driven about, so
‘We beoþ séé-weri men; mid wedere al for-dreuen,’ L MS. O,
6205: but OE. fordrīfan means to drive away, banish, drive out of
course.
412. There is nothing
in the original corresponding to this line: comp. 91/88.
413. biloken:
Mätzner explains, look around, comparing ‘Brid . . . biwent
him ofte, ⁊ bilokeð him euer ȝeorneliche al abuten,’ AR 132/26, but the
meaning of the verb is there qualified by ‘abuten.’ Here its natural
sense is better, they look to themselves, they consider their
plight.
414. Add ðat after
wenen: comp. 185/311. ‘Est promontorium cernere non modicum |
Huic religare citam pro tempestate carinam | Nautae festinant utque
foras saliant,’ T.
416. mid here
migt, striving their hardest: ‘bi his mihte,’ OEH ii. 189/11.
417, 418. These lines
probably ran, Sipes on to festen | ⁊ alle up to gangen. festen
on, moor.
419, 420. ‘Accendunt
vigilem quem navis portitat ignem,’ T.; ‘vigilem,’ ever burning, Virgil,
Æn. iv. 200. wel to brennen may mean, to light a good fire, but
such absolute use of brennen is without support. For wel read
welm, blazing fire: OE. wielm, wylm; comp. ‘he wolde hine
ifusen; to ane bare walme,’ L 22123: the word is common
enough in OE.
615
but rare in ME., and so may have puzzled the copyist, who would find wel
in the next line. The sense is, They all go up on land to light a
blazing fire on this monster by a spark struck out of flint by steel
into tinder.
421. warmen . . .
heten . . . drinken depend on gangen: ‘ut cale se faciant aut
comedenda coquant,’ T.
423. grunde:
see 188/401. For the whale mistaken for an island, comp. the South
English Legendary, 224/155-176.
426, 427. ‘Viribus est
zabulus quasi cetus corpore magnus, | Ut monstrant magni quos facit ille
magi,’ T. wið, of, as in ‘mekill of maine,’ Minot, i. 85.
427. hauen
gives a fair sense with ‘wil ⁊ magt’ as object, but the original word
was probably taunen (comp. 195/631), rendering ‘monstrant.’
428, 429 are due to a
misunderstanding of the original, ‘Mentes cunctorum qui sunt ubique
virorum | Esurit atque sitit, quosque potest
perimit;’ the devil hungers and thirsts for the souls of men and he
destroys all he can.
430. tolleð,
allures: the earliest occurrence of the word.
431. Omit he.
sonde, shame.
432. in leue
lage, low (weak) in faith; a phrase apparently without parallel.
‘Sed modicos fidei trahit in dulcedine verbi, | Namque fide firmos non
trahit ille viros,’ T.
435. in rigte
leue: see 89/28. mid fles ⁊ gast, in body and soul.
437. on lengðe,
in the long run, at length: more commonly used of measure, ‘hit is on
lengþe; four and twenti mundes,’ L MS. O, 21993.
438. festeð:
comp. 1/23; ‘In him i hafe min hope al fest,’ CM 5288: ‘spem sibi
ponit,’ T.
439. helle dim:
comp. 186/341.
440. This article is
mostly original. Sirene, genitive of sirena; the title in T. is
‘De Sirenis’; classical Latin has only siren, -is, fem. In T. they are female and birds in the
nether half; his account is very brief and general, and it is followed
closely by that of the onocentaur, which is ‘biformis’ like the siren;
the ‘significacio’ is common to both. An earlier description is found in
Layamon, 1322-1347, which is based on Wace, Brut, 733-771. The author of
the Bestiary was acquainted with one or both of these. Comp. also Bozon,
Contes Moralisés, p. 47.
441. selcuðes,
marvels: the word is mostly adjective. ‘Item mare est animancium et
monstrorum multiplicis forme productivum; mare enim longe producit
monstra et mira quam facit ipsa terra,’ Bartholomeus Anglicus, lib.
xiii.
616
442. mereman,
mermaid: a better form is meremin, pl. merminnen, L 1322: merman
is a much later masculine formed from mermaid. The first half of the
line is short: perhaps muchel should be added after is.
443.
oc—bunden, but in her resemblance to a maiden she is
altogether limited to this extent of breast and body. This use of bind
has perhaps been helped by Layamon’s ‘wifmen hit þunchet
fuliwis; bi-neoðe þon gurdle hit þuncheð fisc.’
444. ‘Poisson sunt del
nombril aval,’ Wace 737. For the second half line read, ge is noman
ilik.
445. to
fuliwis: see 32/40 note. waxen:
explained by Mätzner as furnished, in meaning of OE. beweaxan,
which however is used only of extraneous growths, as ‘burgtunas brerum
beweaxne,’ town-dwellings with briars o’ergrown, Cod. Exon. 443/16.
Comp. ‘a win-tre | ðat adde waxen buges ðre,’ GE 59/2059.
446. wankel,
unstable; OE. wancol: comp. ‘wanclen,’ weaklings, L 31834. The
modern dialect word, wankle, is current in the North and Midlands, and
often used of uncertain, unsettled weather, and so probably here of
stormy, disturbed seas.
447.
ðer—sinkeð is a half-line, sipes—werkeð a
complete line: the former may have run, ðer ðe water sinkeð . dun on
west halue, where the sea slopes away down to the west; for the second
half-line comp. ‘an æst halue an west halue,’ L 29287. ‘Et modo
naufragium, modo dant mortale periclum,’ T.
448. mirie:
‘Dolces vois ont, dolcement chantent,’ Wace, 738; ‘Þeos habbeð swa murie
song,’ L 1326. Holthausen omits ge. mere, a shortened form
of mereman. manie: ‘Sirenae sunt monstra maris resonancia multis
| Vocibus et modulis cantus formancia multis,’ T.
449. sille,
marvellous; OE. syllic.
450. it ben:
see 1/10 note.
451. The scribe should
have put the stop before forgeten. ‘Li fol home qui le cant oent,
| . . . | Lor voie oblient et guerpissent,’ Wace, 743,
745.
452. ‘Quae faciunt
sompnum nimia dulcedine vocum,’ T.
454. suk, suck,
expressing the sound made by the water closing over the vessel.
456-459 appears to be
based on the experience of Brutus; ‘Brutus iherde siggen;
þurh his sæ-monnen | of þan ufele ginnen; þe cuðen þa
mereminnen | . . . | Þa mereminnen heom to svommen;
on alchare sidan. | swiða heo heom lætten; mid luðere heora
craften. | Neðelas Brutus
617
at-bræc; al buten burstan, | ⁊ ferde riht on his wei,’ L
1334-1337, 1342-1347.
456. wise . . .
warre: see 18/16.
457. know how to
return, that is, to escape: comp. ‘hwan ic aȝen cherre; al ic
þe ȝelde,’ OEH i. 79/12, and for the noun, ‘Þer deþ so redi fynt dore
opene, | Ne may helpe no ȝeyn char,’ Desputisoun, 76/167; ‘efter-charr,’
CM 21922.
458. Often they have
burst away, made good their escape: comp. 193/548 where the verb has an
object in the acc. of the thing escaped from, as occasionally in
OE., and as probably here also. For the second half of the line in its
present form yields no satisfactory sense. Mätzner, who completed
he[re], translates, with their heart incorruptible, inflexible, equating
ouel with OWScand. ófalr. Read, ofte arn atbrosten mid hele .
here brest iuel, often have they safely escaped from their evil danger.
Comp. ‘Þe king Goffar iseih his burst; ⁊ unæðe him seolf
atbreac,’ L 1610; ‘þa ofte ure Bruttes; makeden hufele
burstes,’ id. 19856, and with the form brest, ‘or thei take reste | Er
schal thei suffre mochel breste,’ Laud Troy Book, 4226; ‘To-quils þai
duelled þar to rest, | O water had þai ful mikel brest,’ CM 6308.
459. Mätzner deletes
herd, to correspond with, ‘Quod (i.e. periculum) qui
fugerunt, hii tales esse tulerunt,’ T.; but in view of L 1334-1337
quoted above, it would be better to leave out told; the wise
escape because they have been forewarned. With either alteration, the
line remains formless: better, he hauen herd tellen . of tis mere
unimete, with distinct alliteration in each half-line (comp. 464/15).
Holthausen supplies is after ðat: the scribe probably understood
the connection as, which, monstrous in this wise, as being half human
and half fish, has a moral application (‘significacio’, ‘bitacnunge,’
79/15) in virtue of this monstrosity.
463, 464. Many men
illustrate what is signified by this creature here adduced as a symbol.
‘Quam plures homines sic sunt in more biformes,’ T.; comp. 191/471.
465. Mätzner altered
wulues to sepes; the source is, ‘Attendite a falsis prophetis,
qui veniunt ad vos in vestimentis ovium, intrinsecus autem sunt lupi
rapaces,’ S. Matt. vii. 15.
467, 468. ‘Utpote sunt
multi qui de virtute locuti, | Turpibus indulgent,’ T. Perhaps of should be
inserted before godcundhede.
469. vncuð wið:
see 179/97. ‘Qui foris ut fantur, sic intus non operantur,’ T.
474. ðe legen,
lie to thee, by presently breaking their oath: ‘unum dicentes, aliud mox
tibi facientes,’ T.
618
475. sage,
discourse: OE. sagu: comp. ‘heo wenden þat his sawen;
soðe weren,’ L 749.
476. ðer imong,
all the time they are promising.
477. agte and
soule l. 478 are apparently accusatives in a sort of apposition
to ‘ðe’ l. 476. OE. swician requires ymb or on with
the name of the thing about which deceit is practised.
480. Elpes: the
OE. forms are elpend and ylp; elp is probably a shortened
form of the former. Inde riche, the realm of India.
481. berges
ilike, like mountains; ‘bene firmares montibus esse pares,’ T.; ‘ylp
is ormæte nyten mare þonne sum hus,’ Ælf. Lives, ii. 104/366.
482. o wolde,
in the woodland: comp. 195/620.
484, 485. ‘Adversi
coeunt, cum sibi conveniunt.’ The scribe has put sampnen in the
place of some less common word; Holthausen proposes hemen which gives an
assonance at any rate: if a verb *menen may be inferred from mæne, mene,
intercourse, it would fit still better.
486. kolde of
kinde, chaste by nature: comp. 191/495; ‘so kinde cold,’ GE
1999.
487. minde: see
184/263.
488. noten of,
make use of: see 84/45. gres, herb, medicinal plant.
489. ðe, to
which: see 46/292. mandragores, mandrake: L. mandragoras; in
Philippe de Thaün mandragora. It is discussed at length in Bartholomeus
Anglicus, lib. xvii, ‘dicitur autem habere virtutem prebetivam
mulieribus concipiendi.’ There is no
mention of it in T., but it is common matter in the Bestiaries.
490-494. ‘Hique semel
pariunt quamvis tot tempora vivunt, | Hoc est ter centum, nec faciunt
geminum, | Ast unum generant et per duo tempora gestans,’ T. (‘duo
tempora’ = duos annos). See Ælf. Lives, ii. 104/569. wuneden:
read wunen: more is probably an addition by the scribe.
495. blod ⁊
bon, subject of is: for the phrase, meaning the whole body, comp.
196/636; ‘nys non so feyr of blod ant bone,’ KH MS. L, 916 note.
496. ‘Cum parit in
magna, ne cadat, exstat aqua,’ T. The Bestiaries generally say that she
takes to the water for fear of the dragon. sal, has to, must.
498. to mid
side: nothing corresponding in T., but ‘Tresque à sun ventre en
l’unde,’ P. de Thaün, 1442; ‘pergit ad lacum magnum et ingreditur usque
ad ubera,’ H. de S. Victor, ii. 427. midside is a compound noun;
contrast ‘with a sadel to the midside,’ Desputisoun, ed. Linow, 59/517
(Laud MS.) with the corresponding, ‘Wiþ a sadel to middle þe syde,’
101/517 (Digby MS.).
499.
wanne—tide; Mätzner translates, ‘when mischief betides
her,’
619
treating harde as a noun, like 152/56 note. The construction would then
be the same as in ‘Aþulf tit no wounde,’ KH MS. L, 1352, and
harde might better be translated birth pangs. But the order of
the words is against that interpretation: tide is impersonal and
harde is an adverb: comp. ‘wel þe sal bityde,’ L MS. O, 2236.
500. ðat is
often repeated when a clause interrupts the construction, as in ‘sitteð
all stille, ꝥ hwon he parted urom ou, ꝥ he ne cunne ower god, ne ower
vuel nouðer,’ AR 64/20.
502. ‘Non habet ut
(a.l. unde) surgat, quia nunquam crura recurvat,’ T. The elk is
also without joints in its legs; see Elton, Origins of English History,
p. 54.
504.
Hu—wide depends on l. 506. With he comp. 119/77,
194/602.
505. walkeð
wide, travels to a distance; a favourite phrase in the romances:
comp. ‘Ihc habbe walke wide,’ KH 953 note.
506. her: in
Physiologus.
507. For resting is
difficult because his huge bulk prevents him from lying down.
508. to
fuligewis: see 32/40.
509. ‘Incumbit trunco
arboris haut modico,’ T.
510. trostlike,
confidingly: ‘Idunc dort a seür,’ P. de Thaün, 1550.
511. of walke
weri, weary from walking; so, ‘weri of sorȝen,’ L 28081.
512. ðis
anticipates l. 514: the hunter notes the elephant’s favourite support,
‘his beste wune.’
514. wune,
resort; usually custom, but comp. ‘Vyche day in þe temple . wes myne
ywune,’ OEM 43/207. Eudes de Cheriton, 316/26, has, ‘Elephas, more
consueto super illam appodians, simul cum illa cadit.’
515. For willen
read wiken: to don hise wiken, to perform his functions, here, to sleep.
The phrase ‘don wiken’ occurs in OEH i. 137/11, meaning, to do services.
Comp. 84/45 note.
516. underset:
‘Quam notat atque secat venator, et obice celat,’ T. Mätzner translates,
underprops; rather, wedges up, underpins.
517. bet: used
for the rhyme, where best might have been expected.
518. he, the
elephant. it . . . war, aware of it: see 200/116 note.
519. makeð
char, returns: comp. 190/457.
520. ‘Clamque sedens
spectat dum requiem repetat,’ T. biwalt is Mätzner’s correction
for biwarlt; it is a rare word and means to rule, manage, wield, as in
‘þe holie þremnesse þe shop ⁊ biwalt alle shafte,’ OEH ii. 25/8. He
explains the passage as, the hunter sits alone, observes whether his
device helps him in any way. But olon for al one or one as
620
in this text, 194/579, 580, the absence of a conjunction before
bihalt and the meaning given to biwalt all raise doubts.
Morris translates the last word as ‘deceiveth.’ Perhaps in olon lurks al
on, which with *bihalt, observation, would give, intent on watching.
*bihalt, noun of bihalden, is not found, but may be inferred from OE.
geheald. biwalt may be miswritten for biualt, representing
OE. befealleþ: l. 521 might then mean whether his device results
in anything for him.
522. unride:
see 188/389.
524, 525. ‘Ille velud
quondam securus ad arboris umbram, | Cum venit, incumbit, cumque ruente
ruit,’ T. boden, for boðen.
530. ðer, to
that place. gangande: the author wrote gangen, and at l. 536
seken or more probably saken: comp. 108/232; ‘þer com o schelchene gon,’
OEM 45/279, 285; ‘Þer com go a wel fair mon,’ South English Legendary,
223/139, 226/265, 227/272; ‘þat him com biforen gon; a wunder
ane fair mon,’ L 32064. The infinitive defines; here it means, on foot.
‘Tunc unus currit, qui relevare cupit,’ T.
531. ut is a
scribe’s mistake for up.
532. Fikeð,
bustles, fusses: still in dialectic use in the northern counties and
Scotland. See Björkman, 145, 306. The combination with fondeð,
tries, does not occur elsewhere.
533. forðen:
see 180/126. no wigt, not at all.
534. canne, can
he; nor can he do anything else. ‘Sed nequit et satagit: complorans hic
quoque barrit,’ T.
536. manie: in
the older Bestiaries twelve besides the first try to raise him. The
original reading of the MS., sacande, for saken (shake), is preferable
to the correction: see 182/193.
537. on stalle
maken, put him in a standing position, set him up again; comp.
193/539, 547, 556, 557; ‘cumen . . . on stalle,’ 193/539. A
deer is said to stall when it stands still in covert.
538. for, in
spite of, notwithstanding; comp. ‘For roting es na better rede,’ CM
11505; ‘thei scholde come with-outen dwellyng | And speke with him for
any thyng,’ Laud Troy Book, 3103: contrast ‘For,’ in consequence of,
193/542.
540-549. ‘Cum nequeunt
omnes, contendunt mittere voces, | Ad quas fit subitus parvulus ac
minimus | Cuius (et est mirum) promuscida sublevat illum, | Et sic
predictas effugit insidias,’ T.
548. Comp. 186/344,
190/458. atbrested: supply he (the fallen elp) as subject: see
6/18 note.
552. ðat fele
we, for that we suffer.
553. Holthausen would
read, Moyses wulde him reisen rigt, | migte i
621
forðen no wigt; but reisen : forðen is sufficient rhyme for this author.
The lines are, however, short; insert up before reisen, he after
migte.
556. her non,
none of them.
557. By ‘upright’ I
mean in his former position as possessor of the riches of heaven. For
iseie see 56/46 note. Comp.
‘heoueriche wunne,’ AR 242/4; ‘heouenriche murhðe,’ OEH i. 115/1.
559. suggeden,
sighed; comp. ‘Forr iwhillc mann birrþ wepenn her, ⁊ sikenn sare ⁊
suhhȝhenn,’ Orm 7923. weren in ðogt, were very anxious: comp.
‘Euer ⁊ oo for my leof icham in grete þohte,’ Bödd. AE. Dicht.
179/7.
560. ovt: read
ogt, in any wise, at all.
561. onder
steuene is meaningless. Mätzner suggested mid are steuene, with one
cry; Holthausen for onder, luder. But alle is superfluous
and the rhythm is defective: the original may have been, remeden he ðo
ludere steuene. Comp. ‘Þa quað Membricius; ludere stefne,’ L
927; ‘Numbert heom to clepede; mid ludere stefne,’ id.
1428.
563, 564. ‘Ipsorum
precibus venit ad hoc dominus,’ T. care, anxiety. hem
. . . to, to them: see 1/3.
566. litel:
‘parvus, quoniam deus est homo factus,’ T.
567. drowing
ðolede, endured suffering: comp. ‘Ac of cristes þruwinge · þet he
þolede her,’ OEM 37/4; ‘He ðrowede and ðolede un-timing ðat,’ GE
1180.
568. under
gede, went to the help of; said with a reference to l. 545: L.
subvenire.
570. dim: comp.
186/341.
571. For the Turtle,
the author follows the Latin original pretty closely.
572. boke:
Physiologus. o rime, in verse: insert al before o.
573. lagelike,
loyally, faithfully: comp. ‘ȝif ha hare wedlac laheliche halden,’ HM
13/33.
574. make:
comp. ‘Forr fra þatt hire make iss dæd | Ne kepeþþ ȝho nan oþerr,’ Orm
1276. siðen: read seden, separate, depart, OE. scēadan;
comp. ‘Þurrh þatt he wollde stilleliȝ | Fra Sannte Marȝe shædenn,’ Orm
2922, 16240. Omit ge as unmetrical.
575. muneð,
keep in mind; comp. 185/284.
576, 577. ‘Nocte
dieque juncta manebit | Absque marito nemo videbit,’ T. sundren
ovt, separate at all, at any time: comp. 195/623.
578-583. ‘Sed viduata
si caret ipso | Non tamen ultra nubet amico, | Sola volabit, sola
sedebit: | Et quasi vivum corde tenebit | Opperiensque casta
manebit,’ T.
579. one,
alone: OE. āna. fareð, passes her life.
622
581. luue abit,
awaits, watches for the return of her beloved.
585. reche,
take heed, bethink thyself.
586. See 180/134.
meche: ‘Namque maritus est sibi (i.e. animae)
Christus,’ T.
588. fro
himward: see 178/89 note. The metre
requires the omission of -ward.
590. Read luue none:
for the combination leue . . . luue, comp. 143/73.
ne—newe, nor love any new one; comp. ‘Allas! is every man
thus trewe, | That every yere wolde have a newe,’ Chaucer, H. F.
301; ‘He wolde not him chawnge for no newe,’ Guy of Warwick, 122. This
gives the best sense and rhythm, but luue may be a noun governed by
leue, and l. 581 favours that interpretation.
591-593. ‘Quem
superesse credit in aethre, | Inde futurum spectat eundem | Ut
microcosmum judicat omnem,’ T.
592. briche:
see 185/293.
593. on
geuelike: see 182/214.
594. Omit men.
his loðe, those hateful to him.
598-600. ‘Qui niger ex
albo conspergitur orbiculato,’ T. bro, eyebrow: OWScand. brá: see
Björkman 231. Mätzner sees in the whale’s brow an expression for
whalebone: Pliny says ‘ora ballaenae habent in frontibus, ideoque summa
aqua natantes in sublime nimbos efflant,’ N. H. ix. 6, 16. The
explanation is not convincing. Such comparisons are generally made with
familiar objects, so ‘colblake,’ 153/75; ‘And worth al black sum ani
cole,’ CM 22489; ‘Al blak so cole-brond,’ King Alisaunder 6260. Perhaps,
so brond of cole: the scribe is given to leaving out the end of his
words, and the rhyme cole : al is no worse than fel : al, 190/465. In
other Bestiaries the panther is of many colours.
600. trendled
&c., rounded as a wheel.
601. And it sets him
off, adorns him, exceedingly: an early instance of this meaning. Comp.
‘þe kirtel bicom him swiþe wel,’ Guy of Warwick, Auch. MS. 14/210.
602. he: see
119/77 note.
603. der: T.
has ‘Diversis pastus venatibus et saciatus,’ but the Bestiaries
generally avoid making him carnivorous; ‘Divers mangiers manjue,’ P. de
Thaün, 474; ‘Saoulee . . . De boenes viandes plusors,’
Guillaume, 1958, 1960; ‘diversis herbis vescitur,’ Honorius Augustod.
(Migne), 887.
604. cul, rump:
the earliest appearance of this French word in English. Mätzner explains
it as cowl, fell.
607. After
dages insert al: comp. 195/635.
623
609. lude so,
as loudly as: but lude should probably be omitted, as the line is too
long.
610-615. ‘Exit odor
talis de gutture, tamque suavis, | Ut virtute sua superet vel aromata
cuncta,’ T. mid . . . forð may be equivalent to forð
mid, along with (see 1/19), but forð is more probably adverbial,
far, as in, ‘Sum was wið migte so forð gon, | ðat hadden he under hem
mani on,’ GE 835. oueral, widely spread.
612. haliweie,
more usually halewei, some preparation of a balsamic nature used both as
a lotion and a drink. It corresponds to an OE. *hǣlewǣg, healing water, but the
spelling in the text shows an association with hālig (NED.).
Comp. ‘hwo þet bere a deorewurðe licur, oðer a deorewurðe wete, as is
bame, in a feble uetles, healewi in one bruchele glese,’ AR 164/13;
‘Kumeð þerof smel of aromaz, oðer of swote healewi,’ id. 276/11.
615. Comp. ‘For na
drie ne for na wate,’ CM 6365. wete is by form a noun, as at l.
57; comp. ‘hwīlum fliht se wǣta ꝥ dryge,’ Boethius, ed. Fox, 234/10.
617. wor so . . .
of londe, wherever in the world; comp. ‘Wher he beo in londe,’ KH
416 note. But the metre requires on ðe londe.
620. folegeð:
‘Ferunt odore earum mire sollicitari quadripedes cunctas,’ Pliny, N. H.
viii. 17, 62. The original has ‘Ad quem mox tendit quae vocem belua
sentit, | Ac sectatur cum nimia dulcedine plenum.’ Eudes de Cheriton
says, ‘animalia crudelia, ut Lupus et Leopardus . . . eam pro
bono odore sequuntur et non infestant,’ 232: he explains the sweet smell
as the soft answer that turns away wrath.
621. ðe, of
which: comp. 46/292 note.
623-625. ‘Cum sonat,
aut fugiunt, aut segnes corpore fiunt | In caveisque latent, nec in ipso
tempore parent,’ T. ogt, at all.
624. daren: see
185/310.
627. tokned:
‘per mistica dictus,’ T.
629. ‘Speciosus forma
prae filiis hominum,’ Psalm xliv. 3.
630. fen, mud;
comp. ‘Or or flum noe spredde his fen,’ GE 490.
631. taunede,
displayed: taunen is an aphetic form of *at-awnen (see NED. s.v.
tawne): it is found only here and several times in GE. ll. 631, 632 are
the interpretation of ll. 603-605: ‘At satur ille fuit, quia quot vult,
tot sibi sumit,’ T.
634. Well is it for
the man for whom he was willing to suffer it. ‘Et somnum cepit cum nos
moriendo redemit,’ T. For the omission of the verb after wel, see
21/92 note: for dat, to whom, see
46/292 note.
635. on on,
continuously.
624
636. blod ⁊
bon: see 191/495.
637. Perhaps in
wis of the MS. should not have been altered, as it occurs again in
GE at 214/575: it may be a genuine, though mistaken, resolution of
iwis.
639. vuemest,
highest.
641. smel:
‘nimio suae incarnationis odore,’ H. de S. Victor, ii. 426.
642. let her,
left behind in the world.
643. For him,
hin, shortened form of hine, may be read: comp. ‘fleges kin sal hin
ouer-gon,’ GE 3004.
644. For fin
read afin or in fin; the meaning will be, into his divine presence at
our ending. The original has ‘Celos ascendens, ubi regnat cum patre
presens, | Quem gentes cuncte sunt sic credendo secute:’ the parallel
passage in the description is l. 620. godcundnesse properly
means, divinity, divine nature, here apparently, the manifestation of
that divinity in heaven. For fin, death, comp. ‘Alle ðhe olde
deden ðor fin,’ GE 3852.
645. ‘Serpens antiquus
qui nobis est inimicus,’ T.
646. dine,
sound, preaching: suggested by ‘rem,’ 195/611, and possibly by S. Paul’s
use of Psalm xviii. 5, ‘in omnem terram exivit sonus eorum,’ Rom. x.
18.
648. ðer wile,
whilst, so long as; comp. 198/37, 205/288, 446/59, ‘And mete quorbi ðei
migten liuen, | ðor quiles he woren on water driuen,’ GE 573;
‘Therwhile, sire, that I tolde this tale | Thi sone mighte tholie dethes
bale,’ Seuyn Sages, 701. he—beren, they maintain obedience
and cherish love: he refers to noman: beren goes
naturally with luue, with lage it stands for lage halden,
to keep the commandments (of God).
649. Thetbald ends
with the Panther, and this section is generally said to be taken from
Neckam’s De Naturis Rerum, c. xlvi. His dove has eight ‘natures,’ three
of which are wanting in our author’s seven, and lacks two of those given
here (ll. 656, 657; ll. 660, 661), while Neckam’s explanation of the
fifth, ll. 662, 663, is quite different. The matter is common to the
Fathers and medieval writers, and our author may have drawn from more
than one, but Hugh of S. Victor, De Bestiis et aliis Rebus, lib.
i. c. 11, most nearly resembles him. His dove has ten qualities,
six of which are here, and there is something resembling the seventh:
each of them is quoted.
651. wes, we
them. hauen in mode, keep in mind: so, ‘ben us minde,’ l. 653:
see 184/263.
625
653. Mätzner takes
alle it together as, all of them, comparing 190/450, where he
says it = them, but see 1/10 note: the
construction is similar here, it is a mere introductory word like
there: the order is, it ogen alle &c., and the meaning, they ought
all to be present in thought to us.
654. ‘Caret felle, id
est, irascibilitatis amaritudine,’ V. Comp. ‘Loke nu þet tu, þet he
cleopeð kulure, habbe kulure kunde, þet is wiðuten galle,’ AR 292/19;
‘Forr cullfre iss milde ⁊ meoc ⁊ swet, | ⁊ all wiþþutenn galle,’ Orm
1258; ‘Lauedi scho es o leuedis all, | Mild and mek witouten gall,’ CM
101.
655. simple:
Comp. ‘Estote simplices sicut columbe · buð admode alse duue,’
OEH ii. 49/25, that is, humble. softe, gentle.
656. ‘Non vivit ex
raptu, quia non detrahit proximo,’ V. Mätzner divided bi lagt and
explained lagt as pp. of lacchen used substantively as
prey: the word does not occur elsewhere.
657. The scribe
probably understood this line as, Let us do aback all thieving; that is,
renounce, reject, like ‘werpeð abec,’ 16/142: though aback descends from
on bæc. But the rhyme is bad, and the emendation hac, due to
Mätzner, does not improve it, besides being difficult of interpretation.
If it is for ac (comp. 217/87) the meaning might be, Let us also put
away from us all thieving. Morris suggests hagt = agt, mind, and the
rhyme lagt : hagt occurs in GE, see 201/135, but the word hagt means, in
ME., only care, anxiety, peril. Holthausen proposed iþagt, OE.
geþeaht; in the sense, put out of our counsel, thoughts: the form
apparently does not occur elsewhere, and it makes a metrical difficulty.
Probably the corruption of the line began with Ilc; it may have
run, Noman do we robbing of aght; comp. ‘If i giue þe for to kepe |
. . . | Hors or ani oþer aght, | And it wit wiþerwin be
laght,’ CM 6763; ‘For to spare his aune aght, | þis pore manes schep he
laght,’ id. 7927.
658, 659. ‘Colligit
grana meliora, id est, meliora dicta. Non vescitur cadaveribus, id est,
desideriis carnalibus,’ V. leteð, abstains from. Omit ðe
before sed.
660, 661. ‘Geminos
nutrit pullos, id est, amorem Dei et amorem proximi,’ V, which is not
like the text. Comp. rather, ‘Alienos pullos nutrit dum errantes a regno
Dei alienos per poenitentiam reducit,’ Honorius Augustod., 962. ur
ilk, each of us.
662, 663. ‘Columba pro
cantu utitur gemitu, quia quod libens fecit plangendo gemit,’ V.
woning &c.: see 2/15. lic: apparently adv.,
equally; likewise; her song is at the same time a lament: the order of
the words and the absence at this date of a preposition with woning is
against the meaning, her song is similar to a lament: comp. ‘Forr þeȝȝre
626
(cullfre ⁊ turrtle) sang iss lic wiþþ wop,’ Orm 7931. For bimene,
reflexive, see 40/168 note.
664, 665. ‘Super
fluenta aquarum (Canticum Canticorum, v. 12) residet, ut, visa acciptris
umbra, venientem citius devitet, quia in scripturis studet, ut
supervenientis diaboli fraudem declinet,’ V. wis of, a variant of
‘war of,’ suggested by the frequent association of ‘wis and war:’ see
18/16. nome, seizing, clutches: only here and at 206/322.
666, 667. ‘Nidificat
in foraminibus petrae, quia spem ponit in Christi passione,’ V.
Phonology: Oldest E. Texts
570
OE Texts
a + g ... Anglian
tre(o):
tre (o)
Accidence: ...nigt s. a.
582;
582:
The personal pronouns ... oðer
603
oder
eurilc 257, 286
euerilc 257, eurilc 286
Only three verbs ... I c. s. 3. wan
632
3,
For the octosyllable ... cundnéss|ẹ afín
644
afin
Verses of three measures ... tíl | it cúm|ẹð
ðe tíme 403
timé
Syncope of the middle vowel ... sinịging
256
sinigịng
173. ... subj. past from
healdan
subj. past.
185. ... AR 50/15
AR/50/15
257. ... it would balance
eurilcdel
euerilcdel
260. ... Comp. ‘ðe sunenday | ðat
is
open quote missing
356. ... subject of is.
period (full stop) missing
357. ... the Creator made these loathly
things
final “r” in “Creator” invisible
a common medieval idea
“l” in “medieval” invisible
414. ... Huic religare citam pro tempestate
carinam
pre
428, 429 ... Mentes cunctorum qui sunt
ubique virorum
text unchanged: error for “ubicunque”?
467, 468. ... Turpibus
indulgent,’
close quote invisible
489. ... habere virtutem
prebetivam
text unchanged: error for “prebitivam”?
612. ... It corresponds to an OE.
*hǣlewǣg
OE *hǣlewǣg
Manuscript: Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, 444,
former mark R 11; on vellum, 186 × 116 mm., in one hand of the end of
thirteenth or of the beginning of the fourteenth century. It contains on
81 folios the poem from which the present extract is made. On f. 1 r is
the name of a former owner, Richard Southwell, with a motto nearly
obliterated, Sapit qui sustinet, or suscepit (James). See further A
Descriptive Catalogue of the MSS. in the Library of Corpus Christi
College, Cambridge, by M. R. James, vol. ii, p. 357.
Editions: Morris, R., Genesis and Exodus. E. E. T. S.,
O. S. 7, 1865, revised 1873. Mätzner, E., Altenglische
Sprachproben, i. 76-90. Specimens, 153-170. Emerson, O. F., ME.
Reader, 21-35.
Literature: Fritzsche, A., Anglia, v. 43-90
(authorship, phonology, grammar, metre, notes); Hilmer, H., Ueber die
Sprache der altenglischen Story of Genesis and Exodus, Sondershausen,
1876; Holthausen, F., ES xvi. 429-33, Archiv, xc. 143, 144, 295, cvii.
386-92, Anglia, xv. 191-4, xxii. 141 (notes and emendations); Kölbing,
E., ES iii. 273-334, xvii. 292-6 (notes and emendations); Schumann, W.,
Anglia, vi. Anzeiger, 1-32; Stratmann, F. H., ES ii. 120, iv. 98
(notes).
Analogue: Die altfranzösische Histoire de Joseph, ed.
W. Steuer, Erlangen, 1903, also as L’Estoire Joseph, ed. E. Sass,
Berliner Dissertation, 1906.
Phonology: This section should be compared with
pp. 581-586; explanations of abnormal forms offered there are not
repeated. Oral a is a, asses 427, crauen 420; a
before nasals is a, gan 8, man 446 r. w. chanaan, nam 84,
quanne 14, ðanne 199; men 204 (3 times) is a reduced form of the
indefinite pronoun man; a before lengthening groups is
o, among 587, fond 30, but and 6 &c., handful 15, Orm’s
hanndfull, with consonant following the lengthening group. æ is
a, at 25, bad 93 (14),
627
bar 22 (6), dale 79 r. w. bale, faste 93, 248, quat 37, ðat 9, was
1 &c.; the exceptions are fest 427 r. w. best, queðer 111,
reste 82, reste 466 (5), weche 514, weches 521 (comp. ‘weciað,’ Vesp.
Ps. 126/1), togider 406 r. w. hider. e is e, beden
266, beðen 501, deren 402 r. w. sheren, stede 81 r. w. dede,
wel 10 &c. (wēl, Bülbring, § 284); before lengthening
groups, ende 588, engeles 587, feld 29, but hate 12, 32, 33, influenced
by haten, hatian and perhaps by OWScand. hatr, bi 150, quilke
134 (3), swilc 33, bliscing 452, influenced by blissung, rejoicing,
wol 384, GE 621, ‘wol wel he dede,’ id. 724, ‘ðehg wol wel,’ id. 1266,
due to labial influence and weakness of stress (Gabrielson, Influence of
W-, 207, 8); seigen 548, seið 404 (secgað). i is i,
bid 563, driuen 219, is 74 &c., ðider 55, wile 180, wliten 343
r. w. eten; before lengthening groups, bringen 213, wilde 71,
winden 502; beðen 552 is a miswriting of bidden, welin 585 of wilen.
o is o, biforen 16, on 32, soren 15, wrogt 36 r. w.
nogt; before lengthening groups, forð 190, gold 194, ‘wolde,’ GE 1418,
but an 95, a 40, 108, without stress, wulde 9 (4), wurðen 517. u
is u, kuppe 101, wukes 527; before lengthening groups, grund 164,
hunger 204, murnen 107, but boden 67, storue 54, ‘domme,’ GE 2821,
French writings. y is regularly i, bigen 220, kin 240, 244
r. w. beniamin, kire 505 r. w. ȳre; before lengthening groups,
kinde 129 (5), kinges 87, but deden (dǣdon) 2, 154, 265
r. w. beden, 431, 504, 538 r. w. abiden, dede 44, 82
r. w. stede, come 321, sundri 81 (3), analogy of sundor.
ā is o, agon 292 (ongān), gon 242 r. w.
pharaon, 249 r. w. symeon, non 283 r. w. symeon, on 320
r. w. symeon, ðo 13, wrot 581 r. w. mot; with oo,
‘ooc,’ GE 1873, ‘wooc,’ id. 1874; but ‘loac,’ GE 1798, ‘ðoa,’ id. 3894
r. w. salmona, 4129 r. w. fasga, ‘woa,’ id. 880 r. w.
oba: slo 35, slon 34 r. w. on, come from forms with ā;
before two consonants, homward 430, but a 81, an 58 &c., unstressed
article, anoðer 43, ali 482, 493, 526, hali 492, clad 174? with
shortened a as if from *clādd, gast 482, 492, quam 374
(hwām), bilef, 214, 251 (‘belāf,’ Peterborough Chron., an.
1131), probably by confusion with belǣfan, but Kluge, Grundriss
§ 125, assumes a change of ablaut, ‘ða,’ GE 1901 r. w. bozra,
‘wac,’ id. 1197 r. w. ysaac. ǣ1 is e, bilewen 287,
clene 493, leden 358 r. w. speden, 355 r. w. ðeden, segeð 286,
form from sǣgan, meaning from sīgan; before two
consonants, fette 154, helðe 398, lesteð 564, but ea in ear 202,
483, a in ani 235 (ā with shortening), ðan 212, 389, 550
(þām with shortening), and o in most 350, 422 (l N
māst), ei in fleis 143 (= fles, comp. treweiðe 358),
i in ilc 409, 410, 421 (ylc). ǣ2 is
e, bedden 327 (bǣdon from biddan in form, but
budon from bēodan in meaning), dede 41 (4), mel 466
r. w. wel, red 45, 191 r. w. sped, 568 r. w. dead, sel
442 r. w. wel, ðer 95 r. w. prisuner, 170 r. w. buteler,
weren 255 (6), were 228, wet 342, 396 r. w. gret; before two
consonants, lewse 44, 407
628
(lǣswe), redden 34, vnselðehe 370, but ðor 42 r. w. sor, 48
&c., 471 r. w. ger, ðore 324, wor 82 (hwāra), quuor
482 (3), quor 462, wore 139, 246, woren 434 r. w. biforen, and six
other instances. ē is e, bene 565, sped 46 r. w. red;
before two consonants, kepten 25, but doðes 230. ī is i,
but y is written for it in yre 506. ō is o, written
oo in good 121, 448, ‘booc,’ GE 4124, ‘tooc,’ id. 4123, but cam
55 (8), bicam 202, breðere 7 (14), an umlaut form, wep (OE. wōp)
382 is a new formation from wēpan, briðere 325. ū is
u, but ‘town,’ GE 2739, ‘out,’ id. 72. ȳ is i, hid
364, kid 411 r. w. bitid, srid 73 r. w. bitid, but ðe 357
(þȳ).
ea before r + cons. is a, harme 368; before
lengthening groups, forward 290, harde 94 (3), but e in erd
148 (3), gerken 309, speren 248, sperd 93, 147 and wurð 116 (9). The
i-umlaut is e, derne 46, erue 44, werneden 261, but chare
444. ea before l + cons. is a, alle 34 &c.,
salt 20 (3); before lengthening groups o, bold 13, 175, cold 39,
584, holden 94 (3), old 3 (3), sold 4 (4), wold 40 (4), but geld 206,
‘geald,’ GE 2581; the i-umlaut is e, eldere 483, 560,
welden 197 (see 359/7 and comp. Bülbring § 175 anm.). eo
before r + cons. is e, berge 583, fer 483, feren 31, herte
32 (6), sterres 17. To the wur group belong wurðe 111, 128,
wurðen 465, 481, wurðed 20, wurðeden 18, wurðing 194. The
i-umlaut is i, hirde 449, hirdnesse 26, but hertedin 76,
smeren 496, 502 (smierwan), smered 509, 511, smerles 508 are
without umlaut: a wyr word is wurð 39 (5). The u- and
å-umlauts of a are wanting, as in bale 80 r. w. dale,
faren 292, misfaren 7, as are also those of e, werlde 288 (7),
beren 138, fele 425. eo, u- and å-umlaut of
i, is e in her 13, but biueð 334, cliued 59, cliueð 438,
liued 60, nimen 416, 532, siluer 268 (comp. OWScand. silfr, Björkman,
112), siðen 115 (6) have no umlaut. ea after palatals is
a, sal 79 &c., shauen 174, bigat 332 r. w. get, forgaf
553, forgat 146, gaf 45 (5). ie after ġ is e,
bigetel 88, bigeten 234, forgeten 156, geuen 452, 512, but forgiue 549
r. w. liuen, ME. gifte 520; after sc, e, sheren 401
r. w. deren. EWS. gief is if 7 (3). eo after ġ
is u in gunge 335, gungest 214 (4); after sc, u,
sulen 22 &c., sulde 9, sulden 355, ‘suuen,’ GE 107. eom is am
129 (4), heom, hem 9 &c.
ēa is e, bed 101, bred 102, dede 519, eddi 140, gret
341, 395 r. w. wet, lepes 132, ee in neet 151; before two
consonants e, eðimod 303, lefful 578, but ea in bead 548,
bread 133, dead 1 r. w. unred, 485, 547, 567 r. w. red, dead
286, eares 158, and a (shortening) before two consonants in
chapmen 85, chafare 47, gatte 531, 567 (Björkman, 109). The
i-umlaut is e, herde 107, heren 585, nede 215, 219, ned
295, 578 r. w. red, nedful 184. ēo is invariably e,
bed 127, bedden 552, for beden, ben 10 &c., dep 38 r. w. slep,
leue 475, sen 26 &c., ðeden 356 r. w. leden, ðre 132 r. w.
me; it is written
629
ee in seen 492, ‘teen,’ GE 1344; before two consonants e,
fellen 326, 551, leuere 139; but ei in weis 343 (wēox from
weacsan),
comp. fleis 143: miswritten i in
lif 481 for ‘lef,’ GE 340 (6). The i-umlaut is e, dere
301, 453, ten 51 r. w. men. gīet is get 39 (6). ēa
after ġ is e, ger 1 (11).
a + g is ag, dragen 100, lages 500, slagen 58,
but daiges 499, 509, 525, laiges 510, 526, daies 123. æ +
g is ei, dei 141 r. w. weilawei, freinde 107, seide
19 (6), seiden 218 (7), seid 479, 482, and ai, abraid 165, dai
249, 359 r. w. wei, faire 447, mai 19 (6), waines 416, written
ay in may 36: fagen 321 (3) is from fagen: æ +
h is seen in lagt 135, ‘vnachteled,’ GE 796. e + g
is ei, leid 284, weie 293: agen 55 r. w. sen, 125, 304, 403
r. w. ben comes from agēn. i + g is ig
in manige 234, 332, but the spirant is absorbed in birien 478, biried
571, ybiried 574, and manie 446: birigeles 528, biriele 542
(byrgels) are analogic: beries 116 is LWS. berie. Final
ig is i, eddi 140, seli 568; stiward 87, 317 is LWS.
stīweard: i + h is seen in ‘sigðhe’
(gesihþ), GE 1630. o + g, h is og,
bogt 90, drogen 456, wrogt 78, 272, ‘dogtres,’ GE 1090, 1094, but dowter
201 (? Northern). u + g, h is ug, fugeles
135, mugen 144. y + h is seen in ME. frigti 18. ā +
g is og, ogen 108, but owen 40; ā + h,
og, ‘oget,’ GE 324, but agte 363 (? influence of ǣht).
ǣ1 + h is ag, agte 144 (ǣht),
bitagt 97 r. w. hagt: ǣ2 + g, leigen 16. ō
+ h is og, brogt 274, nogt 35 r. w. wroht, sogt 30,
other spellings are ‘broghten,’ GE 1008, ‘ðohgteful,’ id. 1437, ‘sowt,’
id. 2870, ‘ðhowtes,’ id. 3544, ‘wroutis,’ id. 456. ō + g
is og, ug, ‘bog,’ GE 608, ‘ynog,’ id. 3670, buges 114,
ynug 210. ū + g is ug, drugte 161, ðhugte 118.
ea + h is seen in sag 7 (6), waxen 114; the
i-umlaut in migt 504, migte 68 &c., nigt 103, 515 r. w.
rigt. eo + h is seen in rigt 15, brictest 6, but sextene 3
(comp. Mercian sex, sexta, Bülbring § 319 anm.); fe
89 represents feoh, dat. fēo. ēa + g is
eg, bege 194; hegest 196 may represent hēahsta, but is
more probably a new formation from hēh; ēa + h,
‘ðehg,’ GE 1266. ēo + g is also eg, drege 262;
ēo + h is seen in wex 211; wexen 158, 556; the
i-umlaut in ligten 79 (līhtan). ā + w is
ou, ow, sowen 401, soules 578, sowle 579. ī +
w, newe 412 is Anglian nēowe. ēa + w is
ew, shewed 67, ðewed 10. ēo + w is also ew,
knewen 31, 216, reweli 382, rewðe 393, trewthe 390, but gure 232 (5),
final, gu 314 &c., knew 221, 222, wintre 113; without umlaut are
trewið 91, trewed 439.
In syllables without stress a is levelled to e, moneð
516, vten 460, so o in hunger 230; ofrigt 104, 279 representing
āfyrht has been influenced by ME. offriȝt: on is an 95. An
e, often unmetrical, has been inserted in bodẹward 336, bodẹwurd
548, breðere 7 &c., briðẹre 325, coren 158 (9), engẹles 587,
manigẹfold 556, gadẹren 188, eldẹre 483, 560, fugeles 135, 143,
630
leuelike 329, leuere 139, reweli 382 (but rewli 64), vnselðẹhe 370,
similarly ei, i in trewẹịðe 358, birịgeles 528
(byrgels); an irrational e is added finally in ðogẹ 24,
towardẹ 49; e is omitted in bettre 44, biforn 326, first 185,
forward 88, 318, gur 314, herdne 127 (ǣrende), mor 260 r. w.
or: i is written for e in michil 260, and inserted in
eðimod 303 (ēaþmōd), sinịgeden 259. The prefix in tawnen 180 is
æt; be- is regularly bi, biforen 16, biment 256,
bitwen 23; ge- is generally lost, kinde 129, lefful 578, seli
192, writ 70, but it survives in gede 43, 341 (yet g may be merely
parasitic), yoten 470, ynug 210, it is disguised in to ful in wis 575
(comp. 196/637); the suffix ung is regularly ing, ending
283, wurðing 194.
Metathesis of r takes place in wrigtful 258, wrigteleslike
130; rr is simplified in chare 444 r. w. fare, charen 490
r. w. faren, duren 293, fer 483, feren 31. ll is simplified
in al 167 &c., handful 15, wil 28 (3), wilen 358. n is added
in dalen 27, against metre, and lost in a 40, 108, o 103, 177, 280 for
on; nn is simplified in gunen 432, mankin 460
(manncynn), quane 4, 356. p is inserted in dempt 92, ME.
drempte 37, 103, and lost in ME. chafare 47. f between vowels and
vowellikes is u, crauen 420, erue 44, louerd 237, luue 18, ouer
541, wiue 201, written w in bilewen 287, wiwes 91, but ‘wifwes,’
GE 857, ‘wifuede,’ id. 1588 and even ‘wifes,’ id. 453 also occur;
otherwise it is f, fare 85, lif 493; it is doubled in off 476,
and lost in lord 226. t is doubled in bettre 44, lutten 217, lost
in best 350 and finally in an 122, 575 (the original had ant), ða 128,
244, 372, ef 391, GE 3081, ‘hef,’ id. 4019, ‘flig,’ id. 3084; tt
is simplified in fet 152; for t, þ is written in anð 218,
and th, ‘soth,’ GE 3685, ‘leth,’ id. 3385: ts is sc
in bliscing 452; a curious letter substitution is p for t
in waspene 6, GE 1440 (wæstm). d is doubled in bedden 327,
552, eddi 140 (? shortening); b is written for it in glaðe 351
r. w. scaðe, wurðen 517 and frequently elsewhere: dd is
simplified in fordred 245. For þ, th appears in trewthe
390, ‘tholen,’ GE 508; it is often written ðh, biðhogte 169,
ðhenke 126, ðhing 476, ðhogt 165, 221, 308, ðhogte 24 (3), ðhugte 118,
ðhurg 246, welðhe 428, but ðinkeð 457, ðogte 448. Initial þ in
pronominal words is seldom assimilated after t, s, so, ðat
ðin 189, ‘malt ðat,’ GE 1017, ‘salt ðu,’ id. 1043, but ‘at te,’ GE 2756,
‘and (for ant) te,’ id. 615, ‘and tin,’ id. 926, ‘is tis,’ id. 334. For
þ, d is written in dan 54, dat 70, 534, de 97, dogt 486,
dor 45, endede 575 (endeð), helped 77, kude 168, quad 35 (4), wid
41 (4), and t in quat 77, 383, ‘Betel,’ GE 760. þþ is
simplified in siðen 115 &c., d is substituted for it in siden
509. Noteworthy is derke 291, 399 with rk for rþ.
sć is mostly s, sal 79, salt 20, soren 15, srid 73, srud
61, 421, sulde 9, sulen 22, finally, fleis 143, weis 343 (cs),
doubled in wassen 345, but shauen 174, sheren 401, shewed 67, schilde
579; she 21, ‘sche,’ GE
631
235, ‘sge,’ id. 1444, ‘che,’ id. 1227 are equivalent. The stop c
is k before e and i and in combination with other
consonants, biwaken 498, wukes 527, kid 411, drink 106, often before
u, kumen 31, 48, kuppe 101, kude 420, but cloðes 73, folc 82,
ranc 159, cumen 123 &c., cuppe 364, 372, cuðe 208, and the proper
names ‘Cedar,’ GE 1257, ‘Ceturam,’ id. 1446; otherwise it is c,
cam 55, comen 75, coren 158 &c., spac 395, woc 165. For c,
g is written in ‘ðig,’ GE 564, ‘swing,’ id. 566, ‘ðengen,’ id.
1571. č is ch, chare 444, childes 61, lich 495 (5), michel
89, riche 324, but biseken 546, euerilk 379, ic 21, swilc 33 &c.,
are not palatalized: swil 442 has lost c; similarly ‘Qwel,’ GE 170,
‘quil,’ id. 3631. čč is ch, drechen 42, fechen 417, rechen
140, 176, rechede 178, reching 112, wech 514, weches 521: smaken 497 is
a ME. formation. čǧ is g in bigen 220, 300, comp. 481/7,
8. cw is regularly qu, quad 35 &c. Palatal ġ is
written g, geld 206, ger 1, gunkeste 5; ġe is y in
yoten 470, ynug 210; it is lost in if 7 &c. An interpolated y
sound appears to be indicated by g in ‘digere’ (dīere), GE
3483, ‘tgen’ (tēon), id. 3824, ‘tgen’ (tīen), id. 3413,
3418, ‘tgelt,’ id. 1840, the second and third also appear as ‘then,’ GE
1514, 3305 (h pronounced separately), similarly ‘thaunen,’ GE 32: comp.
365/23. The guttural spirant is g in swolgen 72, sorge 74 (comp.
Orm’s bollȝhenn, sorrȝhe); later forms are sorwe 59 (3), morwen 359; it
is lost in sorfull 380. The voiceless spirant is also written g,
frigti 325, nigt 103, sogt 30, sag 7, ðog(e) 24, ðurg 577, so probably
drugte 161 (drūgað, in Orm, druhhþe), other representations of
the same sound are seen in brictest 6, ‘brocte,’ GE 237, ‘hicte,’ id.
713: ‘sagt,’ GE 1301, ‘burgt,’ id. 727 have added an irrational t
by analogy of sogt &c. Noteworthy is the insertion of the spirant in
the French words haigre 73, ‘olige,’ GE 1624, ‘astronomige,’ id. 792,
where ig may be written for ī, but olie 512. ǧ appears in egypte
86 &c. h is lost in adde 14 (5), adden 504, 505, ali 482 (3),
aue 442, aueð 523, e 39, 395, 476, is 14 (9), om 324, yoten 470, also by
coalescence in fonde 29, madim 62, weli 582, wexem 11. h is added
in halle 394, herdes 464, herdne 127, hunne 303, hure 260, 549.
hl is l, lene 153, lord 226: hr, r, rad 535,
raðe 367, rem 58, ring 193: hw, qu, quane 4, quan 190,
quat 37, queðer 111, quiles 37, quilke 134, quam 374, quor 462 and
quu, quuan 365, quuor 482, but nā-hwǣr is ‘nogwer,’ GE
1271.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. a. hate 12, stede 43,
81, sune 5, 72, wlite 342, kire 505, mete 138, bale 80, erue 44, herdne
127 have e corresponding to their OE. vocalic ending, bege 194, bode 69,
437 (gebod, comp. boda, messenger), liche 542, 569 (but
lich 495), weie 305 have added e, wliten 343, GE 3614, n, fe 89
632
represents feoh, drugte 402, drūgaþ. Gen.-es, flodes 150,
kinges 87, wiwes 91, but louerdis 326: dat. -e, bale 92, 579, come 321, ende 588, here 533, mete
348, stede 468, 521, sune 443, with vowel termination in the nominative,
dale 79 (dalen 27 has added n, against metre), gilte 463, harme 368,
kinge 235 (but king 451), liue 471 (but lif 493), londe 386, 572 (but
lond 129 &c.), ofspringe 236, tune 365, wastme 6, wedde 252, weie
293, 534, wiue 201; without inflection are fulsumhed 182, grund 164,
strem 150, ðogt 384 and a large number of others, mostly with long stem
vowel or of more than one syllable; yre 506 has lost n, tre 113 is an
Anglian nominative form trēo, wo 458 is indeclinable. The pl.
n. a. of masculines end in -es,
fugeles 135, sunes 2 (7), lepes 132, muðes 270, but meten 133, 309,
r. w. eten (translating cibos, panes; at GE 363 it is probably
singular with added n), sunen 229 r. w. cumen: neuters are der 71,
folc 498, 505, ger 181 (7), ?kin 556, neet 151, srud 421, gere 190,
bones 566, geres 207, liches 501, wiues 417. Genitive is teres 342, 396,
datives, engeles 587, semes 427, teres 410. Of the fem. nouns of
the strong declension helpe 83, herte 339, luue 340 have original e in
the nominative, bene 565, bere 535, blisse 122, dede 41 (3), rewðe 393,
sonde 367, trewðe 513, vnselðehe 370, sinne 36, sorwe 59, sorge 74 (3),
wede 68 have added e, without it are ending 474 and other verbal
substantives in -ing, ned 295, sped 192.
Genitives are drugte 161, soules 578, werldes 494; helle pine 584, helle
dale 79 may be regarded as composition forms. Dative -e, blisse 586, helðe 398, lewse 44, nede 215, 219,
werlde 288 (7); onsagen 99, ðeden 356 have added n; but bering 232, hond
197 (3), as often in OE., ned 578, smerles 508, sped 46, 275, wurðing 194
are without inflection. Acc. -e,
fare 85, hirdnesse 26; gifte 520, kinde 490 have added e; without
inflection are bimening 538, bliscing 452, ending 283, forward 88 (3),
stund 95, 163 and, as in OE., hond 117, migt 504. Pl. n. are
blisses 404, dedes 513, hertes 13, lages 500, sondes 219, agte 144;
d. laiges 526; a. agtes 278, laiges 510, agte 198, weden
423. Nouns of the weak declension have -e
in the nom., bode 529, bredwrigte 131, wille 388; d. wune
6; a. kuppe 101, time 474; genitive is weches 521, but ‘sterre,’
GE 134. Pl. n. are sterres 17, wukes 527; d. wunes 347,
but ‘feren,’ GE 1275; a. asses 427, beries 116, feres 532, but
‘wunen,’ GE 3137. The minor declensions are represented by fot
s. d. 326, 551, ‘fote’ pl. d., GE 376; man
s. n. 167, s. d. 302, men pl. n. 184,
chapmen 85, hirdemen 449, men pl. d. 587, pl. a. 47; moneð
s. a. 516; boc s. n. 576; biri s. d.
311; nigt s. d. 103, s. a. 515, pl. a.
501 (5), nigtes 499; fader s. n. 19, faderes
s. g. 229, fader s. d. 8; broðer
s. n. 110, s. a. 244, breðere pl. n.
21 (9), briðere 325, breðere pl. g. 267, pl. d. 429, pl.
a. 7; moder
633
s. d. 338; dowter s. a. 201; childes
s. g. 61, childre pl. n. 282, pl. a. 304,
childer 203; eares pl. n. 158; bred s. a. 102, bread
133.
Adjectives which in OE. end in a vowel have e throughout, bliðe 413,
429, riche 324, 327, 408; those in -ig lose g and are invariable,
miri 312, sundri 81, 408, 468, similarly rewli (hrēowlic) 64.
Weak inflections are gunge s. n. m. 335 (insert þe
before it), leue s. a. m. 475, wis[e]
s. d. m. 461 (similarly ‘ðe strong[e] god of israel,’
GE 1846 is to be read). All others are uninflected in the singular; they
either belong to the classes mentioned above, or are predicative, or
come after the noun qualified. mycel is michil
s. n. f. 281, michel s. n. neut. 89,
lȳtel, litel s. a. f. 95. The plural has -e, fette 158, fulle 400, glaðe 351, gode 513,
harde 108, smale 161; the exceptions, mostly dissyllabic or predicative,
are bold 13, fulsum 207, nedful 184, niðful 13, ranc 159, 162, sorful
380, wis 533 (read wisẹ), wrigtful 258. ān as article without
stress is before consonants, a, an, 58, 64, 81, 149, 159 &c., once
on 469, before h, an 455, 555, as elsewhere before a vowel. The numeral
and pronoun is on, 101, 179, 227, 233 &c.; nān, pronoun and
adjective is mostly non, but the adjective is twice no, 296, 352.
Adjectives used as nouns with inflections are pl. n. fette 164,
d. dede 519, fette 154, a. fette 155, sibbe 557.
Comparatives have -e, bettre 53, more 420,
leuere 139, eldere 483, but bet 420 (adverb form); superlatives are
mostly without it, best 350 (3), brictest 6, first 185, gungest 214,
239, hegest 196, most 350, but gunkeste 5, gungeste 244 have weak
inflection: boðen is pl. n. with added n, 179, pl. d.
103.
The personal pronouns are ic 21 (4), ‘hic,’ GE 34, rarely i, id. 309,
me, we, ur pl. g. 316, us, ðu, (‘redes)tu,’ GE 2934, ðe, ge
pl. n., gure g. 372, gu d. 314, a. 561, ge
406. Dual forms occur elsewhere, ‘wit,’ GE 1775, ‘unc,’ id. 1776,
‘gunc,’ id. 2830. The pronoun of the third person is s. n.
he m. 4 &c., e 29 (4), (wel) i 582, she f. 21, ‘sche,’
GE 235, ‘sge’ id. 1444, ‘che,’ id. 1227, ghe 203, ‘ge,’ GE 1024, it
neut. 12, (was)t 53, (‘stod)et,’ GE 590, with pl. verb,
id. 1770, g. ‘hire’ f. id. 2035, d. him m.
60, (mad)im 62, ‘hin,’ GE 47, ‘hire’ f., id. 322, ‘it’
neut., id. 6, a. him m. 37, ‘hine,’ GE 3468
r. w. dine, ‘hin,’ id. 3004, ‘in,’ id. 3887, ‘hire’ f., id.
971, it neut. 63, (‘tell)et,’ GE 3526; pl. n. he 31
&c., once ‘ðei,’ GE 573, g. here 263, 410, 421, ‘ere,’ GE
2855, her 312, d. hem 14, (wex)em 11, a. hem 26 &c.,
is 184, 458, 503 (‘warp)es,’ GE 3025, ‘hes’ (= he them), id. 911,
943. Reflexives are ‘ðe self,’ GE 934, gu 358, him 169, hem 256, 355,
‘himseluen,’ GE 1338, ‘hemseluen,’ id. 537; definitive is self
s. d. m. 235; possessives, mi s. n. m.
110, mine f. 565, in other cases min 72, 80, 371; pl.
n. a. mine 566, min 282, 304, 404; ði s. n. f.
388, s. a. neut. 143, in other cases ðin 110, 125, 189, 436;
pl. n. ðine 21; his 8 &c. as general form for
634
the singular, written is 15 (6), but hise 91, 191, 236, 396, 474, 475,
490, 495, 569, 579, at all these places his is metrically admissible;
pl. hise as the general form 25 &c., but his 40, 73, 75, is
14, 410, 429, hise being in all these places metrically admissible;
‘hire’ f., GE 333; ‘his’ neut., GE 120, ‘is,’ id. 327; ure
315, 547, 560, hure 260, 549, ur 226; ‘gunker,’ GE 398, gure 232 (4),
gur 314; here 16 (8), ‘ere,’ GE 3773, her 13. The definite article is ðe
82 &c., de 97, ‘(at) te,’ GE 2756, miswritten ðo 164, instrumental,
ðe 357, for ði 11; ðat 169 &c., ða 244, pl. ðo 98 &c. are
demonstratives: wið ðan ðat conj. 389, miswritten wið ðanne ðat
550. The compound demonstrative is s. ðis 19, 131, ðes 166;
pl. ðise 185, ðis 179, 186, ðes 253, in the last three places
ðise is admissible. The relatives are ðat 22, 185 (= that which),
ðe 102. Interrogatives are ‘quo,’ GE 2821, ‘quase,’ id. 2870, quam 374,
quat 107 (5), ‘Queðer,’ GE 1471, quilc s. 474, ‘quil,’ GE 3631,
quilke pl. 134, 404, ‘qwel,’ GE 170; the correlative is swilc
s. 33, 59, 393, swil 442, pl. swilke 234, swilc 236, 500
(metre requires swilke in the latter place). Indefinites are quat so 37,
40, 388, quat so euere 386; men 204, 232, 277, ‘man,’ GE 1, 3; sum 515,
516, 517, ‘summe’ pl., GE 399, 401; ani 235; oðer s. 202,
oðere pl. 183 (5), toðere 394, oðer 133, 510 (read oðre); anoðer
43, 157; ilc 410, euerilc 152, euerilk on 379; ‘mani,’ s., GE
696, manie 446 (read mani), manige pl. 234, 332, ‘manie,’ GE
4068; fele 425; fo 457; al s. 167, but allẹ
s. d. f. 428, pl. alle 16 &c., halle 394, al
250, 325 (read alle).
Only two verbs, fare 443, reste 82, have infinitive in -e; all others, including thirteen of the second weak
conjugation, end in -en. Contract verbs
are bisen 195, sen 19 (5), seen 492, ten 9. The dative infinitive is not
inflected, it has for prefix mostly to, but for to with bigen 300, cumen
123, geuen 452, slon 34. Presents are s. 1. bid 563, chare 444,
rede 187; 2. findes 374, ‘betes,’ GE 3974, ‘haues,’ id. 360 and others
in -es, ‘tregest,’ GE 3975 is isolated; 3.
bimeneð 280, liueð 437, cliued 59, endedẹ 575, haued 92, helped 77,
liued 60, ðinked 461, trewið 91; contracted are bitid 235, bit 292, hað
560, lið 12 (‘ligeð,’ GE 889, against metre), wurð 39 (5); pl. 1.
holden 290, drege we 262; 2. senden 294, cume ge 225, haue ge 369; 3.
hauen 72, wunen 518: subjunctive s. 2. friðe 389; 3. berge 583,
helpe 582, leue 586, wurðe 111, deren 534 r. w. here, with
irrational added n; pl. 1. liuen 550: imperative s. 2. bed
127, tel 110, forgiue 549, ðhenke 126; pl. 2. bereð 297, hoteð
564, seið 404. Past of Strong Verbs: I a. s. 3. bad 93, 175,
bigat 332, forgaf 553, forgat 146, gaf 45, quad 35, quat 77, quað 121,
sag 7, spac 395; pl. 3. bedden 327, leigen 16: I b. s. 3.
bar 22, bicam 202, cam 55, nam 84, tobar 200; pl. 3. comen 75,
nomen 61: I c. s. 1. gan 459, wrong 118, wurð 116; 3. abraid
635
165, bigan 462, fond 30, gan 8, geld 206, unbond 277, wurð 145, freinde
107 (weak form); pl. 3. funden 69, gunnen 546, gunen 432, gunne
49 (if the word following ends in n, there is a tendency to drop the
verbal n, comp. 10, 420), wurðen 104: subjunctive s. 1. wurðe
128; 3. wurðe 272, wurð[e] 477: II. s. 3. bilef 214, 251, ros 32,
wrot 578; pl. 3. abiden 537, smiten 163: III. s. 3. bead
548, bed 101, gret 71; pl. 3. boden 67, lutten 217: IV. s.
1. stod 113; 3. stod 15, swor 487, understod 264, woc 165; pl. 3.
foren 536, token 254: V. IV. s. 3. wex 13, 291, weis 343;
pl. 3. wexen 158: V. s. 3. forlet 494, het 419, knew 221,
let 222, slep 37; pl. 3. fellen 326, knewen 31. Participles
present: ‘sigande,’ GE 1436, ‘betende,’ id. 2713, ‘stondende,’ id. 3149;
past: I a. beden 266, ?forgeten 233, freten 155, geuen 512: I b. bicumen
281, boren 214, cumen 190, forholen 371, fornumen 282, numen 32,
ouercumen 162, stolen 129, soren 15, vndernumen 189: I c. bunden 270,
swolgen 72, worpen 39, wurðen 517: II. driuen 375: III. drogen 456,
forloren 565: IV. dragen 100, grauen 485, shauen 174, slagen 58, sworen
530: V. IV. waxen 114: V. fordred 245, holden 94, hoten 239, yoten 470,
inflected, hotene s. d. 562. Past of Weak Verbs: s.
1. hadde 117; 3. bitagte 193, gatte 531, herde 107, likede 353, made
580, seide 19, missed 57, trewed 439, set 58, told 177, ðoht 352, went
543; pl. 1. sinigeden 259, werneden 261; 3. chidden 23, ferden
360, leiden 65, luueden 206, maden 88, senten 66, skinden 85, hertedin
76, biried 571, shewed 67, stunden 83. Participles present: ‘tuderande,’
GE 164, ‘wuniende,’ id. 2742; past: maked 524, smered 509, ðewed 10,
bitid 74, mad 469, seid 479, sperd 93, srid 73, biment 256, ?fest 427,
filt 361, ligt 306, ofrigt 104, went 365, inflected, welkede 161. Minor
Groups: ‘witen’ inf., GE 328, wot 1 pr. s. 231, pr.
s. 166, ‘witen’ pr. pl., GE 74, wiste 2 pt. s. 383,
pt. s. 316, wisten pt. pl. 271; hunne pr. s. subj.
303; og 1 pr. s. 241, ‘oc’ pr. s., GE 197, ogen pr.
pl. 108, owen 40, ‘agtes’ 2 pt. s., GE 1762, agte pt.
s. 363, ‘oget,’ GE 324; duren pr. pl. 293, ‘durste’ pt.
s., GE 2593, ‘dursten’ pt. pl., id. 1863; can pr. s.
176, ‘cunen’ pr. pl., GE 4054, cuðe pt. s. 208, kude 168,
‘cuðen’ pt. pl., GE 2996, kude 420, ‘kuð’ pp., GE 2666;
sal 1 pr. s. 79, salt 2 pr. s. 20, ‘sal,’ GE 1815,
‘saltu,’ id. 1041, sal pr. s. 126, sulen 1 pr. pl. 22, 2
pr. pl. 408, sule ge 242, sulen pr. pl. 143, ‘sule’ GE
305, ‘suldes’ 2 pt. s., id. 3984, sulde pt. s. 24, sulden
pt. pl. 355, sulde 10; ‘munen’ inf., GE 1622, ‘mune,’ id.
972, ‘to munen’ dat. inf., id. 197, ‘for to munen,’ id. 687,
muneð pr. s. 463, ‘munen’ 1 pr. pl., GE 558, mune ?pr.
s. subj. 476, ‘mune’ 2 pr. s. imp., GE 45; ‘mugen’
inf., GE 1818, mai pr. s. 19 &c., may 36, ‘muwen’ 1
pr. pl., GE 3316, ‘mugen’ pr. pl., id. 3017, ‘mogen,’ id.
3227, mugen pr. pl. subj. 144, migte 1 pt. s. 137, pt.
s. 68, migt he 238, ‘migten’ pt. pl., GE 573; mot
636
pr. s. 582, ‘mote’ 1 pr. s. subj., GE 1621, pr. s.
subj., id. 2645, ‘muste’ pt. s., id. 2624; ben inf.
10, for to ben d. inf. 196, am 1 pr. s. 129, ‘best’ 2
pr. s., GE 2884, ‘beas,’ id. 365, ‘art,’ id. 356, is pr.
s. 74, ‘beð,’ GE 182, ben 1 pr. pl. 258, 2 pr. pl.
223, pr. pl. 123, be 454, aren 282, ‘arn,’ GE 16, be pr. s.
subj. 388, 565, ben pr. pl. subj. 566, beð 2 pr. pl.
imp. 317, was 1 pt. s. 120, ‘wore’ 2 pt. s., GE 1759,
was pt. s. 1, wast (= was it) 53, were we 1 pt. pl.
228, weren pt. pl. 255 (6), woren 100 (7), ‘worn,’ GE 61, wore
pt. s. subj. 139, 246; wile pr. s. 180, nile 59, wilen 2
pr. pl. 358, welin (for wilen) pr. pl. 585, wulde pt.
s. 9, ‘wolde,’ GE 912, ‘wulden’ pt. pl., id. 1075, ‘wolden,’
id. 3756, ‘nolden,’ id. 3029; ‘don’ inf., GE 194, vndon 168, to
don d. inf. 28, doð(es) pr. s. 230, don 2 pr. pl.
285, pr. pl. 519, do pr. s. subj. 568, 2 pr. s.
imp. 387, doð 2 pr. pl. imp. 405, dede pt. s. 44 (9),
deden pt. pl. 2, dede 82, don pp. 41, 128, 315, 477, 542,
do 142; gon inf. 238, ouergon 340, ‘to gon’ d. inf., GE
3078, ‘gon’ 2 pr. pl., id. 3124, ‘go’ 2 pr. s. imp., id.
2815, ‘goð’ 2 pr. pl. imp., id. 3585, gede pt. s. 43,
‘geden’ pt. pl., GE 1034, gon pp. 291.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are ai 287, aren 282,
blomede 115, boðen 103, 179, (bi)calleð 368, fo 457, fro 31, geren 495,
grot 74, groten 80, hagt 98, heil(nesse) 122, eðen 242, ille 12, kides
63, lages 500 laiges 526, laðes 188, lit 64, liðeð 131, lote 382 loten
312, nai 35, oc 229, or 1, orest 115, raken 186, ransaken 377, rapen 430
rapeð 403, scaðe 352, seck 363, semet 223, skinden 85, (ouer)takeð 367,
tiding 412, til 60, ðeden 84, ðog 24, 217, ðral(dom) 376, wante 298,
witter 6, witter(like) 374, wopnede 533; probably busk 159, vnhillen 8;
possibly bond 130, cartes 416, twinne 421; in sonderemen 65, er is
probably due to Scandinavian influence. French are butuler 109 buteler
169, cisterne 38, feið 241, feste 524, fin 424, flum 540, fruit 301,
graunte 590, haigre 73, hardi 175, lettres 581, merci 237, messe(song)
520, offiz 125, olie 512, paid 269, pais 589, plates 52, poure 233,
present 327, pris 301, prisun 94, prisunes 98, prisuner 96, scite 469,
seruede 105, spices 48, spice(like) 497, spies 223, spien 226, strif
494; possibly the interjection A 237, rospen 186 (OF. rosper). Latin are
crisme 512, elmesse 520.
Dialect: East Midland of the Southern border. Its
general character is definitely East Midland, but ā as
occasionally oa in rhymes like ðoa : salmona GE 4129, woa : oba
GE 880, the occurrence of hine : dine GE 3468, hin, id. 3004, yoten 470
beside hotene 562, wuniende GE 2472 as assured by the metre, æ +
g as ei beside ai testify to contact with the
South. The large proportion of French words may point in the same
direction. Evidence of transmission through a North Midland copy is
furnished by ā as occasionally a, sć as s,
the pronouns ghe, ge beside she,
637
ðei beside he pl., the 2 pr. s. ind. of verbs in -es, the pres. part. in -ande, and occasional aren beside usual ben. It was
probably at this stage that the metre suffered by loss of final -e; some feminine endings may have become
masculine. The scribe of our manuscript was probably faithful to his
exemplar, for he was imperfectly acquainted with the language.
Metre: The short rhymed couplet, as in ON. It is
not so skilfully handled here as in ON, but it was no less regular in
its construction before the copyists tampered with the text. Skeat’s
description of it as a verse of four accents, ‘the unaccented syllables
being left, as it were, to take care of themselves’ is misleading, for
it is a verse of four feet with the regulation number of accented and
unaccented syllables. It differs from the verse of ON in the
predominance of masculine endings, in the larger proportion of
trisyllabic feet, and in the number of fourth feet with an additional
syllable. The types, as in ON (see pp. 564,
565), are i. ðat hé | wel ðéw|ed súld|e bén, 10; so 11, 33, 46, 63,
64, 70, 73, 75, 89, 93 &c.: i a. Naí quad | rubén | slo wé | him
nógt, 35; so 45, 72, 101, 110, 145, 202, 221, 297, 302, 331, 387, 408,
422, 435, 459, 460 &c.: i b. ðát | ðu sált | ðus wúrð|ed bén, 20; so
23, 30, 36, 222, 272, 295, 578: ii. He knéw|en hím | fro fér|en kúmen,
31; so 47, 80, 85, 87, 92, 100, 123, 124, 133, 137, 156, 157, 181, 207,
218, 230, 265, 299, 322, 324, 337, 344, 351, 355, 371, 405 &c.: ii
a. Wúrðed|en hím | wið frígt|i lúue, 18; so 333, 334, 343: ii b. Né |
ðat mét|e fró | hem béren, 138; so 469, J́t | was v́nd|ren tím|ẹ or
móre, 323. The unstressed element in a foot, and especially in the third
foot, is often doubled; one of the syllables often admits of being
slurred: i. Twelwe gér | or ýs|aác | was déad, 1; so 246, 363, ðo wéx |
her hért|es niðfúl | and bóld, 13; so 28, 34, 42, for thrít|ti plát|es
to ðó | chapmén, 52; so 57, 71, 96 &c., Wið ðó | prisún|es to líu|en
in hágt, 98, Jacób|es sún|es déd|en unréd, 2; so 29, 39, 40, 62, 84, 97,
369: i a. Ál but ðe | ton bróð|er sým|eón, 250, Sónder|e mén | he it
leíd|en ón, 65; so 69, Goód is | quað jós|eph to drém|en of wín, 121; so 184, féllen
| bifórn | ðat lóu|erdis fót, 326; so 436, 439, 451, 564: i b. dón | for
ðe déd|e chírch|e góng, 519, Wénd|e him slág|en set úp | an rém, 58; so
328, ðát | ðe bár | sulen lút|en ðé, 22; so 78, 83, 127, 148, 171, 193,
200, 228, 254, 286, 289, 301, 308, 350, 427, 440, 452, 453, 487, Jác|ob
ðús | him bimén|eð o rígt, 280; so 383, 391, 403: ii. seue eár|es wéx|en
fétt|ẹ of córen, 158, Hu he sét|tẹ at ðe mét|e hís|e súnes, 348, Jc
réd|e ðe kíng | nu hér | bifóren, 187; so 235, 270, 288, 294, 321, 338,
374, 437, 502, 537, He wás | iacób|es gunkést|e súne, 5; so 81, 88, 155,
162, 217, 220, 281, 367, 431, 463, 530, 565, 585, Jn tó | egípt|e
lédd|en ðat wáre, 86; so 309, 357, 400: ii a.
638
Tóward | here fád|er he gún|en drágen, 432, so 467, Ság he | ðor kúm|en
wið spíc|es wáre, 48, Gáf he | is bréð|ẹre wið hért|e blíðe, 429: ii b. Ór |
for misdéd|e or fór | onságen, 99, ðát | is hánd|ful stod rígt | up
sóren, 15; so 79, 185, 219, 300, 362, 385, 402, 538. The light syllable
is omitted in ii. Ne wíst|e he nógt | quát | he wóren, 434: ii b. Húr|e sínn|e ðú
| hím | forgíue, 549, with good effect. Inversion of the accent is
infrequent, i. ðu sált | áfter | ðe ðríd|de deí, 141, 517: i a. Kínde | lúue |
gan him óu|ergón, 340, Jósep | háued | hem áft|er sént, 366, J́c am | iosép | drédeð |
gu nógt, 397: ii. He bád | cártes | and waín|es nímen, 416, Quuor ié|su
críst | wúlde | ben bóren, 484, He dógt | wið hém | réste | to háuen,
486, And ebrís|se fólc | ádden | an kíre, 505, Egípt|e fólc | áueð | him
wáked, 523, He bád | síbbe | cumen hím | bifóren, 557. Synizesis occurs
in olie 512, birigeles 528, biriele 542. Syncope of the syllable after
the accent in trisyllabic words is certain in breðẹre 21, 325, 429,
blomẹde 115, rechẹde 178, euẹrilc
268, lerẹde 354, eldẹre 483, luuẹde 554, and
similarly in arẹn 282, comẹn 356, wilẹn 358; it is probable, though not
assured by the metre in seruede 105, wrigteles 130, leuere 139, fugeles
143, euerilc 152 &c., gaderen 188, faderes 229, 347, oðere 253 (oðre
573), breðere 51 &c., werneden 261, wunede 471, eldere 560, hotene
562; the medial e in words of this type is nowhere necessary for the
scansion. The verbal termination -eþ has
probably full syllabic value everywhere, as it has at 77, 92, 286, 367,
523. Elision takes place in allẹ 16, wantedẹ 209, sentẹ 213, listnedẹ
276, ðhogtẹ 347, witterlikẹ 479, hiatus in 153, 155, 233, 246, 252, 262,
367, 378, 425, 551, 586: in a large number of lines there is a choice
between elision and hiatus; in view of the author’s liking for
trisyllabic feet, the preference should perhaps be given to the
latter.
Proper names of three syllables have, with few exceptions, two
accents, those of two syllables are very often stressed on the second,
according to the current clerical use, for Mammotrectus says ‘nulla
dictio de natura acuit ultimam nisi . . . hebraica · ut David
⁊ Jacob.’ So ábrahám, adád, béniamín (10), but béniamin 422, chánaán,
‘cánahán,’ GE 726, dotáym, ebrón, éffraým, gálaád, génesís, gersén,
iurdón, mánassén, pháraón 119 (7), pháraún 172 r. w. prisun, but
pháraon 191, 465, pharáon 411, pútifár 87, 199, but pv́tifar 91, rámesé,
sichém 25, but síchem 29, sýmeón, ýsaác. Otherwise egípte, once egípt
213, iácob, ácob 445, jacóbes, iésu, jóseph, jósep, ósep (18), iosép 92,
266, joséph 139 r. w. swep, in many other places the metre admits
of either accentuation, josépes, júdas 387, elsewhere indeterminate, as
Vdas 45, móyses, pháran, rúben 55, elsewhere rubén is possible;
adjectives are cristéne 510, ebrísse. The spelling of the proper names
mostly follows Comestor or the Vulgate, but ebron, egipte, jurdon,
639
pharaon are French, and probably ramese; in view of the variants, no
conclusion can be drawn from initial j in Jacob, Judas, and Joseph; for
the last the author probably wrote iosep throughout.
The corruptions of the text consist mostly of inversions of the word
order and additions which aim at greater clearness or emphasis. Line 6,
read witter of wune (H = Holthausen); l. 7, hise breðere sag (H); l. 8,
gan it; l. 24, ðog ðhóg|te iác|ob it súl|de bén; l. 53, was it; l. 60,
Til he him; l. 77, it helpeð (H); l. 82, Wor sé|li fólc | hem rést|e
déde, comp. GE 257; l. 91, his; l. 108, Harde drém|es óg|en a wóld|e
ðát; l. 118, ðorin, comp. GE 3634; l. 130, And wrígt | ẹleslík|e hóld|en
in bónd; l. 134, omit ðe; l. 149, read ðo drémp|te phá|raón | a drém;
comp. 200/119, 127; l. 159, ránkẹ on | an búsk | and wél | tidí; l. 163,
To sám|en smít|en and ón | a stúnd; l. 172, omit ðe king; l. 173, omit
ðo; l. 180, omit king; l. 182, read In fúl | sumhéd | súlen | ben númen,
comp. 207/351, 208/400; l. 183, And séu|e súl|en áft|er bén; l. 186,
ðisẹ óð|ẹre súl|en rósp|en and ráken; l. 189, ðat ðin fólc | ne wúrð|e
v́nd|er númen; l. 190, omit forð (H) and read ger; l. 191, omit king; l.
199, read was v́n|der hím | ðo pú|tifár; l. 214, biléf | at hóm | was
gúng|est bóren; l. 225, And cúm|en fór | non óð|er ðíng; l. 241, Nú | bi
ðe feíð | ic og phár|aón (H); l. 269, H would read here for ðe, but
?pai-ed; l. 275, omit so; l. 279, omit ðanne; l. 285, read If bén|iamín
| ge; l. 287, Aí | sal hé | wið mé | biléwen; l. 290, omit non; l. 293,
read Óc | he ne dúr|en weí | cumen ín, comp. 206/305; l. 310, omit alle;
l. 311, omit alle; l. 312, read Here nón | ðo lót|en hád|den míri; l.
317, Béð | nu stíll|e quád | þe stiwárd; l. 341, Sone gé|de he út; l.
358, If gé | gu wíl|ẹn wið tréw|ðẹ léden, comp. 212/512; l. 361, omit
alle; l. 370, read Grét | vnsélð|e is gú | cumen ón; l. 384, ðát | ic ám
| wol wítt|er o ðógt; l. 386, Quat só | on lónd|e wúrð|e stólen, comp.
198/37, 40, 208/388, GE 270; l. 394, he dé|de ut áll|e ðe tóð|ẹre gón;
l. 396, ðat ál | his wlít|e wurð tér|es wét; l. 400, Get fúll|e fíu|e
súl|en ben númen; l. 411, omit king, and in line 412, newe; l. 421, omit
here; l. 438, read Al egípt|e ín | his wíll|e clíueð; l. 446, Ánd | of
his kínd|e mán|i a mán; l. 476, On ðhíng | ðat óff | og é | wel múne; l.
477, read wurðe; l. 492, Hál|i gást | it him déd|e sén; l. 495, read
his; l. 498, And egípt|e fólc | him faír|e biwáken; l. 500, read
swíl|ke; l. 514, ðo bén | ðam ál | ðat wéch|e déde; l. 528, scan get
ádd|e jác|ob bír|yels nón; l. 529, omit king; l. 531, omit it; l.
542, scan ðor ís | ðat lích | in bír|yels dón; l. 545, read Hise
bréð|ẹre ðán|ne cóm|en him tó; l. 546, omit alle; l. 550, read Wið ðán |
ðat wé | ðe v́nd|er líuen; l. 577, ðe móy|ses eár | ðurg gód|es réd; l.
579, read his; l. 587, éngẹles | amóng | and sé|li mén, comp. GE 700,
785. In ll. 66, 67, it, though metrically
640
admissible, is superfluous: l. 68 may be scanned, Jf his chíld|es wéd|e
it mígt|e bén: ll. 250, 251 are unrhythmical and al in the former,
ungrammatical, perhaps, álle but | here bróð|er sým|eón might be read,
for l. 251 Holthausen proposed, biléf | ðis bróð|er ðór | in bónd: in l.
291, ðe dérð|e wéx | would improve the rhythm, as ure for ur in l. 316:
scan l. 470, ðe wás | y-ót|en rám|esé. A considerable use is made of
alliteration.
Introduction: The author tells us that his song is
drawn out of Latin and written in simple language for those who are not
book-learned. He was probably a secular priest, for there is no
reference to the monastic life in his work. His source was almost
exclusively the Historia Scholastica of Peter Comestor (here quoted from
the edition printed by Crespin at Lyons in 1526), but he occasionally
referred to the Vulgate. As his purpose was narrative, he leaves out
most of Comestor’s learned disquisitions, but he retains those at ll.
81-4, 501-21 and somewhat enlarges the latter. The source of ll. 354-58
has not been discovered; it may have been an interpolated Comestor. The
addition of ‘ouer pharan’ in l. 541 is probably due to the author.
2. unred, folly,
an ill-advised thing; OE. unrǣd: comp. ‘He has me don oft
vnresun,’ CM 3747; ‘vnwit,’ Laud Troy Book, 4285.
3. For &c. is
the remnant of a calculation in Comestor of Jacob’s age at the time when
Joseph was sold. See Gen. xxxvii. 2.
6. ‘prestantior corpore
et sapientior ceteris,’ Comestor. wastme is Mätzner’s emendation;
Morris suggested wasteme: the same scribal error, ‘of faiger waspene’
occurs at GE 1440. OE. wæstm, wæstem means growth, stature; the
sense here is, countenance: comp. ‘hire wliti westum,’ SK 310, answering
to ‘vultus ipsius claritas.’ of witter wune, discreet in
behaviour: the explanations of Mätzner, ‘of intellectual capacity,’ and
of Morris, ‘of good ability,’ seem to force the meaning of wune, which
is, custom, use, so ‘for kinde wune,’ GE 1405, by family custom, usage.
Comp. 208/384; ‘witter of figt,’ GE 864; ‘o resun . . . rijf,’
CM 14837; ‘o reson . . . ranc,’ id. 21024.
7. misfaren, go
astray, misbehave.
8.
gan—baren, uncovered and laid bare: the auxiliary use of
gon is frequent in GE.
9, 10. He would have
them discipline themselves, so that they might be of good moral
character. Possibly the second he stands for Jacob; that is,
Joseph wished Jacob to discipline them. Comp. for ten, 171/368;
‘þat he hine sculde wel i-teon; ⁊ tuhlen him teachen,’ L
2418.
11. him was
added by Mätzner. For wið, against, comp. ‘⁊ all þatt follc toc
niþ wiþþ himm,’ Orm 10267. nið is often associated with
hate;
641
comp. 198/33; ‘þurrh hete ⁊ niþ,’ Orm 1404, 8013; ‘stormes of nið · ⁊ of
onde · ⁊ of hatienge,’ OEH ii. 177/4.
12.
for—lið: Morris inserts herte after ille, producing a
truism and spoiling the verse. Mätzner translates ‘quia situm est in
malo,’ treating ille as a neuter noun, evil. Possibly ille
means, evil men, but more probably the place is corrupt, and we should
read, And hate sor þat ille in it lið, (envy) and bitter hatred which
wickedly co-exists with envy, that is, envy which produces hatred of the
person envied. For ille as adverb, comp. GE 1706, 4029.
13. ðo . . .
Quanne, then especially . . . when: ‘Causa tamen odii maior fuit
visio somniorum,’ Comestor. bold, shameless: Lucifer is ‘ðat
neddre bold,’ GE 323.
15, 16. ‘Putabam . . .
vestros manipulos adorare manipulum meum stantem,’ C. soren,
shorn.
16. And all theirs lay
before them. it may be meant for a reinforcing dative; see 13/34:
but its occurrence elsewhere, as at 201/163, 202/182, where it is hard
to explain or otiose and metrically in excess, makes it probable that it
is due to the scribe, as it certainly is at GE 385, 387.
17.
xie is by the rhyme endluue or elluue.
18. frigti
luue, love and awe, ‘luue eie,’ 72/200: comp. ‘ðo wurð abraham
frigti fagen,’ GE 1331.
19. sen:
Mätzner takes this word to be the infinitive of the substantive verb,
corresponding to OHG. sīn, MDu. sijn; how may this be? But if the word
ever existed, it would surely be found elsewhere in ME. He quotes ‘Hu
mai it hauen, hu mai it sen,’ GE 298, where if hauen is equivalent to se
habere, sen may be to videri. In the third place instanced, ‘To sen gode
witnesse ðor-on, | ðat wond was in ðat arche don,’ GE 3843, it appears
to go closely with ðor-on, as in ‘so faiger he was on to sen,’ id. 2659
and to represent in both places tō sēonne.
22. luten
usually takes to, as at 193/544, but comp. ‘Þa kingess fellenn dun, itt
seȝȝþ, | To lutenn Crist ⁊ lakenn,’ Orm 7348.
24. ðoge; read
ðog. As a probable source of the line, Fritsche quotes Josephus ii. 2,
‘eventurum olim quando tam a parentibus quam a fratribus adoratione
dignus haberetur;’ but perhaps it may be regarded as a natural inference
from ‘pater vero rem tacitus considerabat,’ Gen. xxxvii. 11.
26. Hirdnesse:
OE. hierdnes; custody, guard; here used for flocks: comp. ‘for te
loken hirdnesse fare,’ GE 2771, to look to the welfare of the
cattle.
30.
he—sogt, he sought and found them; invenit eos quaesitos; a
form of expression much used by the author, suggested by such places
642
in the Vulgate as, ‘requisita non invenieris ultra in sempiternum,’
Ezech. xxvi. 21. Comp. 203/215, where join, ‘to josep sogt for nede;’
‘ðer het god abre ðat tagte lond,’ GE 827; ‘And son he fand þe soght
cite,’ CM 3254; ‘Ai quen þat þe folk him soght sau,’ id. 7473.
31. fro feren,
from afar: see 118/40.
32. Hatred conceived
in their hearts arose in them. Such phrases are common in our author, as
‘olie in trewðe geuen,’ 212/512; ‘song . . . on soðe sagen,’
GE 14. On the other hand such expressions as ‘drugte numen,’ 201/161;
‘sorge numen,’ GE 368, where the participle is used like L. captus,
suggest taking it here in dependence on hem. With on comp.
210/454.
35, 36. ‘Nel feron
mie, | ce sereit desverie,’ Joseph 273.
37. drempte:
impersonal with two accusatives, Quatso and him; so too at 200/103,
202/170, and probably at 201/149: more commonly the thing dreamt takes
of, or is a clause, 200/113, 120, 201/132. ðor quiles, whilst:
see 196/648.
38.
cisternesse: the MS. has ðisternesse here (it occurs correctly at
GE 58), and ‘ðis ðhisternesse’ at GE 66, where ‘ðis’ is in excess, and
cisternesse at l. 56. The original had, no doubt, cisterne or cistern in
both places, and in this line probably In cisterne ðise, imitating
‘proiicite eum in cisternam hanc,’ Gen. xxxvii. 22 (comp. ‘He ðrowede
and ðolede untiming ðat,’ GE 1180): having blundered here, the scribe
altered cistern l. 56 in conformity, spoiling the metre.
39. Get, still,
in spite of his dreams. Above e of wurðe a small he is
added in the MS.
40. The phrase owen
a wold means, to have in one’s power, like its synonym hauen a wolde
(see 52/387 note); it occurs in its
literal sense at 200/108, distressing dreams were responsible for that,
and in ‘Luue wel michil it agte a wold, | Swilc seruise and so longe
told,’ GE 1671, very strong love was capable of such hard service and so
protracted. Here it has the derived sense of import, mean, like power,
force used for meaning expressed by letter or phrase: comp. ‘Quat oget
nu ðat for-bode o wold,’ GE 324, what now was the import of that
prohibition; ‘And vndernam him ðat it agte awold,’ id. 2727, and
questioned him as to what it meant; ‘ðor is writen quat agte awold, |
ðat ðis werld was water wold,’ id. 525, therein is written what it
signified that this world was destroyed by water.
41. wid herte
sor, presumably on Reuben’s part.
42-44. ‘et recessit
Ruben meliora querens pascua,’ C. lewse, so again at GE 1576: OE.
lǣs, g. lǣswe.
45. dor quiles,
meanwhile; comp. 204/265, and see 196/648.
643
46. ‘that was carried
out in secret haste,’ Morris, who proposes derue for derne. But the
meaning is, advice that was filled full of secret gain. For of
comp. 217/91, 94, for sped, ‘of euerilc sed, | Was erðe mad moder
of sped,’ GE 121. In the OF. Joseph, it is said of Judas, ‘mult iert
escientous | et auques coveitous,’ ll. 347, 348, and he makes a speech
to his brothers, ‘Touz temps somes berchier, | onc n’ëumes denier. | Ore
en porrons aveir | senz vendre nostre aveir,’ ll. 365-368.
48. spices
ware: ‘aromata & resinam & stacten .i. myrram,’ C.
52. xxx plates:
all the early MSS. of the Vulgate have ‘viginti argenteis,’ but
‘triginta’ C., ‘deniers treis feiz dis,’ Joseph 414; the change is due
to the desire to perfect the parallel with Christ. plates, silver
coins: comp. ‘I nul sulle my Loverd [for] nones cunnes eiste, | bote hit
be for the thritti platen that he me bitaiste,’ Rel. Ant. i. 144/25. The
metrical stress requires ðo for ðe.
53, 54. ‘Melius est ut
venundetur Ismaelitis, et manus nostrae non polluantur,’ Gen. xxxvii.
27. dan, than that. in here wold, in their power, at their
hands.
57. ðhogte
swem, felt sorrow, as in ‘Of paradis hem ðinkeð swem,’ GE 391, if
so, the verb is impersonal and him must be supplied from he: or
perhaps, experienced a feeling of faintness: the OF. poem has ‘Quant
l’enfant ne trouva, | par poi ne forsena. | Il ne set que il face, |
pasmez chiet en la place,’ ll. 433-436.
58. set up,
raised: ‘credens eum interemptum scissis vestibus eiulabat,’ C. Comp.
‘ðis folc ðo sette up grot and gred,’ GE 3717.
59. him cliued:
the MS. reading is meaningless; that in the text is Mätzner’s, who
explains, cleaves to him. But in view of, ‘And atter on is tunge
cliuen,’ GE 372; ‘Al egipte in his wil cliueð,’ 210/438, it is doubtful
whether even the pronoun can be used in this sense without a
preposition. Now cleave is associated with cling in ‘My hert doth clynge
and cleve as clay,’ Coventry Mysteries (54), where cling, wither up, is
used metaphorically for, shrink in fear (see 3/32
note and comp. ‘I clynge as cleyȝ, icauȝt in care,’ Horstmann,
S. A. Legenden, 178/388), and it is also used transitively. Is it
not probable that cleave had also some such metaphorical meaning which
would be suitable here?
62. If in is
right, it goes with ðe, in which. But its absence would improve
the verse, and ðe alone can mean with which: see 46/292. In any
case prud is adj., splendid; comp. 209/422; ‘Wið gold and
siluer and wið srud, | ðis sonde made ðe mayden prud,’ GE 1413.
63. wenten,
turned it round and round, rather than, altered it; although the Latin,
‘tinxerunt,’ favours the latter.
644
64. an rewli
lit, a pitiable dye.
65. Sondere
men, messengers; sing. ‘sonder man,’ GE 2871; ‘sanderrmann,’
Orm 19383; ‘sondes man,’ L 13615.
73. in haigre
srid, clad in a hair, a hair shirt; see 62/31.
74. grot and
sorge: comp. 214/583, similarly ‘grot and gred,’ GE 3717; ‘In grot
and in srifte,’ id. 3692.
76. hertedin:
read herten; comp. 184/277.
79. ligten,
descend: see 141/42. ‘Descendam lugens ad filium meum in
infernum,’ C.
81-84. ‘Erat enim tunc
in inferno quidam locus beatorum longe semotus a locis penalibus · qui
ob quietem et separationem ab aliis sinus dicebatur. . . . Et
dictus est etiam sinus abrae · quia etiam abraam ibi erat in
sustentatione usque ad mortem christi,’ C., commonly called Limbus
Patrum: ll. 83, 84 refer to the Harrowing of Hell, for an account of
which in ME. literature see Hulme’s edition of the legend, E. E.
Text Society.
85. skinden here
fare, hasten their journey: the verb, which occurs only here in ME.,
represents OWScand. skynda.
88. bigetel,
advantageous: the adjective of ‘biȝete’ 60/12; only here.
90. Insert him before
sold, with Holthausen. The expression is formal, mostly used of
betrayal; comp. ‘ic am i-boust ant i-sold to-day for oure mete,’ Rel.
Ant. i. 144/26; ‘How þat ioseph was boght and sald,’ CM 142; ‘Dickon thy
maister is bought and sold,’ Shakspere, Richard III, v. 3. 305.
Strunk in Mod. Lang. Notes, xxvi. 51 suggests He (Putifar) haueð him
bogt.
93. The line is
printed as in the Specimens, but a better order would be, He bad him
sperd ben faste dun. The last word does not go well with sperd, which
takes in or wiþinne, 201/148, 204/248. C. has ‘Ille nimis credulus
coniugi vinctum ioseph tradidit in carcerem regis,’ the OF. version,
‘mist le en la prison | au fort rei Pharaon;’ the Vulgate, ‘in carcerem
ubi vincti regis custodiebantur,’ all mentioning the king. The original
may have had Him bad ben sperd king Pharaun: for the rhyme see
202/171.
95. an: comp.
201/163.
96. prisuner,
gaoler. prisunes, prisoners.
98. to liuen in
hagt, to live in care, goes with l. 100: comp. 201/136. hagt:
see 196/657 note, and comp. ‘Twin-wifing
ant twin-manslagt | Of his soule beð mikel hagt,’ GE 485; ‘Amalechkes
folc fledde for agte of dead,’ id. 3384.
99. onsagen,
accusations, charges; OE. onsagu: apparently only here in ME.
645
103. drempte:
see 198/37.
105. on sel,
at a time, on one occasion: comp. ‘And moyses was numen an sel | In ðe
deserd depe sumdel,’ GE 2769; ‘on midel sel, ðat ilc nigt,’ id. 3159.
Kölbing translates timely, that is, early in the day, quoting, ‘Ad quos
cum introisset Ioseph mane,’ Gen. xl. 6, and, ‘And made swiðe on sele
ðat mete,’ GE 1537, where however swiðe gives the special sense, in
quick time. But the expression appears to mean happily in, ‘And he
folgede is red on sel,’ GE 1866; ‘on good sel,’ id. 1375, 1545.
108. This is the
answer of the dreamers. See 198/40 note.
111. strong:
see 21/94 note.
112. on god
bilong, pertaining to God, in God’s power. ‘Numquid non domini est
interpretatio .i. numquid adiutorio dei potest interpretari,’ C.
bilong is an isolated form, apparently made of bi + long, OE.
gelang which in ME. is commonly ilong; see 134/96 note. Mätzner would read ilong here.
114. waxen
buges, full-grown boughs, or shoots. ‘Videbam coram me vitem &
in ea tres fundos oculos (principal buds) scilicet unde funduntur
palmites. Alii ponunt tria flagella, vel tres propagines quod idem
est,’ C.
116. Morris by his
punctuation makes beries acc. after bar and wurð
ic war parenthetic; but the construction is the same as at 9/122,
192/518; ‘quanne he it wurð war,’ GE 1462, 3387; ‘And quane ðe king wurð
war ðis dead,’ id. 2983; ‘ðan pharaon wurð war ðis bot,’ id. 2957: wurð
war is treated as though it meant observed. But it takes of at
203/204.
121, 122. ‘Deus
dedit in bonum hominibus vsum vini . . . soluit lites et tristitias · et
bona est eius visio,’ C.
127. herdne:
OE. ǣrende, mission, but here affected in meaning by
ǣrendian, to intercede: make intercession for me.
128. ða: for
ðat: the scribe not seldom drops final t.
129. kinde,
native; so, ‘ðog it was nogt is kinde lond,’ GE 1279: ‘car a tort sui
chaitis | en estrange païs,’ Joseph 837.
130.
wrigteleslike, undeservedly: OE. gewyrht, thing done,
merit, in Orm, wrihhte.
132. lepes:
‘canistra,’ C.
135. ðor on:
comp. ‘On was tette he sone aueð lagt,’ GE 2621. The construction with
on is rare, the verb in this sense regularly takes an
accusative.
136. hagt:
see 200/98.
140. swep
occurs in the same connection at 202/166, and in ‘For þai can swyth of a
sweuyn · all þe swepe tell,’ Wars of Alexander, 248,
646
evidently with the meaning, scope, significance. Mätzner refers it to
OE. swǣp, for which see Napier, OE. Glosses, 78/2894 note; its
meaning, persuasion, or more probably, deceit, does not suit our word.
More probably its OE. congener is seen in ymbswǣpe which glosses
L. ambages, Sweet, Oldest E. Texts, 599; if so, it would mean compass,
content, like the noun sweep of more recent origin.
144. ðat,
from that: werien usually takes wið (50/335), fram, but the
pronouns are frequently used alone in all sorts of loose syntactical
relations: see 46/292 note. Omit
sal; though it might be defended by GE 1818, agte is commonly
plural. Not in the Vulgate or Comestor, but ‘It sal na raunsun ga for
þe,’ CM 4494; ‘te trenchera la teste; | ne te lera raendre,’ Joseph
854.
145. ðat is
subject of wurð.
148. Divide wið
uten-erd; for wið, on, see 180/147. uten-erd, foreign
land; OE. ūtan + eard: comp. ‘uten erdes sorge sen,’ GE
956; ‘into vten stede,’ id. 1741. At 210/460, it is used adverbially in
conjunction with her, and at 210/464 it develops an adverbial form,
‘uten herdes.’ Comp. L. extorris.
149. pharaon:
probably acc.; see 200/104.
150. flodes
strem: ‘Putabat se stare super fluuium,’ C.
151. vii:
seuene.
158, 159. ‘Septem
spice plene pullulabant in culmo vno,’ C. busk, bush, for stalk
is curious. ranc and wel tidi, luxuriant and very
healthy-looking; the phrase qualifies ‘eares.’
161. drugte
numen: ‘percusse vredine,’ C.; ‘uredo . . . dicitur corruptio ex
urente vento proveniens quando stantes segetes aduste videntur in
campo,’ Catholicon: ‘de gelée brulez,’ Joseph 904. With numen
comp. 198/32: drugte, sorge are genitives. Similar constructions without
prepositions are frequent in this author, ‘water wold,’ 526, overpowered
by water; ‘sinne wod,’ 1073, demented by sin; ‘elde swac,’ 1528,
weakened by age; ‘herte hard,’ 2936, hard of heart; ‘hungur fordred,’
3313, in fear of hunger; ‘nede driuen,’ 3165; ‘deades driuen,’ 1125,
under the sway of death. See 207/342.
163, 164. There is
nothing in Comestor or the Vulgate corresponding to these difficult
lines. Mätzner takes it as equivalent to they, and quotes for the
intransitive use of smiten, ‘Heo smiten to-gædere,’ L 5183, to
which may be added, ‘Bitid a stund þai samen smate | In a dale biside a
wate,’ CM 2495. Schumann objects that smiten is transitive everywhere
else in the poem; he proposes, To-samen is smiten, them dashed together,
apparently depending on ranc. It would probably be better to omit
it
647
(see 197/16 note); adopting Fritsche’s
ðristen he in the next line, the meaning would be, Next (ðo) the lean
ears have overcome the full ears, dashed together in conflict, and in a
moment they have thrust the full ears to the ground. The participial
phrase is quite in the manner of the author.
164. ðo:
miswritten for ðe.
166. wot,
where wiste might be expected, is perhaps due to anticipation of
nogt.
168. Who could solve
the riddle involved in the dream: comp. 1/4.
170. of ðat:
supply a relative as accusative to drempte: see 198/37, 200/103.
174. shauen:
‘ioseph totonderunt. Uincti enim et exules incrementa crinium
patiuntur,’ C.
175. hardi ⁊
bold: Comp. ‘Þe king of Beme had cares colde, | Þat was ful hardy
and bolde,’ Minot iv. 68.
176. wold,
power, meaning. See 201/140.
180. ‘quod facturus
est deus ostendit pharaoni,’ C.
182. numen,
taken, in the sense of dealt with, experienced. Comp. 208/400; ‘Ðe
seuend moned was in cumen, | And seuene and xxti dais numen,’
GE 593; ‘Seue nigt siðen forð ben numen,’ id. 1687.
184. The editors
take Sori and nedful with men, but they might qualify
is, them, and that would be more consonant with the original,
‘quos (annos) sequentur alii .vii. tante sterilitatis. vt obliuioni dent
cuncta retro abundantia,’ C.
186. rospen and
raken, waste and scrape away: in these meanings the words are
apparently without parallels.
187. her
biforen: miswritten for ear biforen: see 211/483 note: for her = ear, comp. ‘ðor he
quilum her wisten wunen,’ GE 801.
189.
vndernumen, taken unawares: comp. ‘Ðis godes folc was undernumen,
| Quan he segen ðis hird al cumen,’ GE 3221, where it appears to mean,
surprised: perhaps influenced in this rare meaning by undergan, as in,
‘Þou hast me gyled and vndurgone’ (= circumvenisti), Horstmann,
S. A. Legenden, 33/479, 75/790.
194. bege:
‘collo torquem auream circumposuit,’ C. Comp. 133/34.
195. bisen:
see 12/14 note.
197. welden
&c., so, ‘neme hit in here honde,’ KH 60 note. vnder his
hond, l. 210, in his control; comp. 204/252; ‘Unnderr þe laþe
gastess hand,’ Orm 11146.
199. ðo . . .
ðanne together are strange and the line is unmetrical. Read, was
vnder him ðo putifar.
648
200. hem so to
bar, caused such dissension between them; OE. toberan, to
carry in different directions.
202. Oðer . . .
ðan, different from what: see 100/122
note. ðan is Mätzner’s correction.
206. Comp. for the
form of the sentence, ‘He was hem lef, he woren him hold,’ GE 793.
212. x: The
scribe writes tgen (2), then (1), ten.
215. for nede
sogt: depends on josep: comp. 198/30, and ‘for nede driuen,’
203/219.
217. ðog,
nevertheless; that is, though he was their brother, they unwittingly
fulfilled the prophecy of 197/21, 22.
219. for: but
‘ðo wurð pharaon nede driuen,’ GE 3165.
222. Als he
let: read, Let he als, he pretended as if: comp. ‘Sho lete als sho
him noght had sene,’ Ywain, 1809.
226. For
spien with acc. comp. ‘Bot er yee comen þe land to spi,’ CM 4824;
‘vous venez ceste terre | espier et conquerre,’ Joseph.
230. doðes:
Mätzner’s suggestion, doð us, causes us, gives the best solution. Comp.
206/303.
233-236.
‘Impossibile est enim viro idiote tales filios esse · cum etiam regibus
talis filiorum copia valde sit difficilis,’ C. forgeten:
explained by Mätzner as forgotten, with meaning, of no account, obscure,
which is without parallel. Probably for geten, for progeny, offspring:
get is however not instanced in that sense before the fourteenth
century.
235. For seldom hath
it befallen even to a king: for this practically adverbial use of
self, comp. ‘God haued swilc fair-hed him geuen, | ðat self ðe
fon it leten liuen,’ GE 2609: ‘Self his kinde nile ðat wune forgeten,’
id. 1806.
240. for
&c.: as the name Benjamin implies.
244. gure is
due to Morris.
245, 246. ‘Timebat
enim ne forte et in illum (Benjamin) aliquid deliquissent,’ C.
he, Benjamin. hem, the brethren. forred,
betrayed.
247. dun, to
an underground prison.
253. sone on
on, soon forthwith, very quickly: a favourite phrase of our
author.
255. If sone
be correct, it must stand for sone so, as soon as, as in, ‘sone so loth
ut of sodome cam,’ GE 1109. But that is inconsistent with ll. 263, 264,
where, as in the Vulgate and C., their lamentations are uttered in the
presence of Joseph. Probably sone has been repeated from l. 253,
displacing or, before: so ‘ðor,’ l. 257, means, in Joseph’s hearing.
258.
Wrigtful, guilty; deserving punishment for our misdeed; ‘Merito
649
hec patimur,’ C.; comp. wrigteleslike, undeservedly, 201/130. But
Kölbing suggests that the original had Rigtful, justly, rightfully;
comp. ‘Rihtful was iacob cald his name,’ CM 3742.
260. michil
mor, much more than we now suffer.
263. None of them
suspected that they were understood: ‘nescientes quod intelligeret eos
ioseph, quia per interpretem loquebatur eis,’ C. on his mod: a
common tag; comp. ‘ðo ðogte thare on his mod, | long bigging is here
nogt god,’ GE 717; ‘He þoȝte vpon his mode | Hit nas for none gode,’ KH
281 note.
265. ðor
quiles, meanwhile, as at 198/45, usually whilst, as at 196/648.
270. ðor
biforen, ‘there as before,’ Morris; ‘over it,’ Kock. biforen here
and at 205/299, 207/362 has plainly the meaning of, in addition,
besides. The development of meaning is parallel to that of besidan, by
the side of, in addition to: so biforen, in the presence of (the common
meaning in our author, as at 207/337), in addition to. ðor
biforen then means, in addition to that; ðor rounds off the
expression, as in ðor quiles.
273.
ouerðogt, ‘vexed,’ ‘grieved,’ NED.; ‘anxious,’ Bradley-Str.;
‘very anxious,’ Morris: it apparently occurs here only. The original had
probably, o seri ðogt, of sorry mood; comp. 208/384 for the form of the
expression and ‘dredful and bleð and sori mod,’ GE 3520; ‘And sumdel
quemeð it his seri mood,’ id. 408.
277. Comestor does
not mention that one of the sacks was opened on the way: our author
follows him, not the Vulgate, Gen. xlii. 27.
279. sori,
sorely; comp. ‘wiste hire drogen sori for ðrist,’ GE 977. Holthausen
suggests sor.
280. o rigt:
the meaning is doubtful, it may be justly, reasonably, OE. on
riht, but for that the author has ‘wit rigt,’ GE 52. In the other
place where it occurs, ‘Abraham was buxum o rigt,’ GE 1299, it means,
straightway.
283. ending
non, Of Joseph I know not how he ended: comp. ‘Of his endinge ne wot
ic nogt,’ GE 487.
286. segeð,
descends: OE. sǣgan, cause to sink.
288. ðor
quiles, as long as: see 196/648.
289.
us—hard, it will go hard with us.
290. no:
probably ne should be read.
291. derke:
so too at 208/399: it seems hardly a mere scribal error for derðe.
293. Mätzner thinks
he is a mistake for we, but see the examples of sudden transition
from indirect to direct speech in Kellner, Syntax, 60.
296. Kölbing
suggested the addition of non: Schumann would substitute
650
non for no, but the former gives a better verse. Mätzner reads,
And ic ne can, following Morris, who translates, And I know no
better plan. Understand quan after And.
298. That there be
wanting to the Egyptians none thereof; comp. ‘ne nawiht ne wonteð ham |
of al ꝥ ha wilneð,’ SK 1670.
299. ðor
biforen, besides: see 205/270.
300. wið,
with which.
304. agen,
back; so 208/375.
305. Join forð
rigt, straightway, or, by the nearest way.
306. Mätzner rightly
omits cumen as a gloss. For ligt as a verb comp. ‘Nu am ic
ligt to fren hem ðeðen,’ GE 2787; 141/42. ‘Igitur filii iacob
descenderunt in egyptum,’ C.
308. Kinde ðhogt,
natural affection; comp. ‘kinde blod,’ 206/330. was is evidently
a substitute for some rhyming word; Emerson suggests lag, Kock, stag,
Morris, ðag. It was probably some uncommon word which the scribe
altered, possibly wag, stirred, moved, OE. wæg, which is
sometimes used intransitively. In the passage corresponding to 207/340,
C. has ‘Commota sunt viscera eius,’ which our writer seems to have used
here.
311. biri,
palace: at 12/7 it means, court.
312. Her non,
none of them: so ur non, l. 316.
316. wiste . . .
gilt, was conscious of wrong-doing: ‘non est in nostra conscientia
quis posuerit eam in marsupiis nostris,’ Gen. xliii. 22.
318. min
forward is explained in Specimens of the condition that Benjamin
should be brought, as in 205/290; but that stipulation was Joseph’s, not
the steward’s. It looks like a vague rendering of C., ‘Pax vobis
. . . pecuniam quam dedistis mihi probatam (i.e. checked,
found correct) ego habeo.’ The French version has, ‘Vostre aveir seit
tout vostre, | car nous avons le nostre’; and the English text may mean,
for the price which I was ordered to charge for the corn is actually in
my possession.
320. on and
on, one by one; comp. 208/377, 214/573.
322. to nome,
as captive: comp. 196/665; probably the only instances of its use in
ME.; noun of niman.
323. vndren
time: ‘meridie,’ C. See 74/209.
324. For
riche, see 6/30.
325. of frigti
mod, through their feeling of fear; comp. ‘Wið reuli lote and frigti
mod,’ GE 1162.
329.
understod, received; comp. 210/447.
334. I know there
none who does not tremble; a parenthesis which
651
would be better placed before l. 333. ðat he is practically
equivalent to who.
336. after
bodeword ðin, in accordance with your commandment; comp. ‘for ðhu
min bode-word haues broken,’ GE 361.
339.
ouerwente: an isolated past of *ouerwenden, in the intransitive
use recorded in NED., to go over, pass over; giving the meaning, his
heart went out to him forthwith. But the absence of to before him
renders this explanation doubtful. More probably him refers to
Joseph and reinforces his, as in ‘þat his ribbes him to brake,’
KH 1077 (see also 80/47 note), with meaning, his heart overflowed
forthwith. C. has, ‘commota sunt viscera eius.’
340. For
ouergon, overcome, see 22/143.
342. teres
wet: comp. 208/396; teres appears to be pl. gen., of, with
tears, so ‘swerdes slagen,’ GE 3721, where swerdes is s. gen.
Contrast ‘of is teres wet,’ 209/410.
345. Holthausen
omits and; the scribe has taken it from the next line, as he did
again at ll. 2839, 2840. him biforen, in his presence.
347. wunes,
custom: the pl. is used for the rhyme. ‘Deposuitque ioseph
fratres secundum ordinem etatis eorum · sicut in domo patris sedere
consueuerant,’ C.
349. sonde:
see 13/30.
354. For omission of
the subject, see 6/18. There is nothing in the Vulgate or Comestor
corresponding to ll. 354-358. There is a similar passage in CM 4863-82,
in which Joseph tells his brethren that Pharaoh has no mercy for
thieves.
355. Omit
And, with Holthausen.
356. vnkinde,
foreign; a singular use, but comp. ‘ðog it was nogt is kinde lond,’ GE
1279; ‘to wende into þaire kindely lande,’ CM 3914; ‘He left bath kiyth and
kyndli thede,’ id. 11103.
358. Read trewðe, as
elsewhere.
360. Or or:
this doubled or is frequent in GE; perhaps the second or was felt to be
adverbial: a further redundancy is seen in ‘or or ðe flod was long
biforn | of noe bigeten,’ GE 905.
362. biforen:
see 205/270.
365. ut, out
of: the rare prepositional use.
368. And accuses of
harm and damage.
370. on: see
210/454. Read unselðẹ, as elsewhere.
371.
forholen: this verb takes the dative of the person, 34/77,
208/385, or wiþ, as in, ‘forhele hit wid þin arege,’ OEM 117/244.
373.
sikerlike, confidently.
652
374. Vp,
upon; comp. ‘Of ȝoure hors aliþteþ; and vp ȝoure feot
stondeþ,’ L MS. O, 5862.
375. agen:
comp. 206/304.
382. Comp. ‘Wið
bedes and gret and teres wep,’ GE 3888.
383, 384. ‘An
ignoratis quod non sit similis mihi in auguriandi scientia. Forte ioco
dictum est · nec est imputandum,’ C. The French version has ‘ne saviez
vous | que je sui engignous | et tant sai deviner | que je n’en truis
mon per,’ but GE and CM omit all reference to divination.
389. Wið ðan
ðat, on condition that.
390. Morris added
him after ledde; the omission of the relative is fairly common in
GE.
396. Read, al his.
teres wet: see 207/342.
398. ‘pro salute
vestra misit me dominus ante vos,’ C.
400. sulen . . .
ben numen, are to be gone through; comp. 202/182.
404. min
blisses: ‘gloriam meam,’ C.
407. gersen:
‘Gessen,’ Vulgate; ‘iessen,’ C., the form in GE was probably influenced
by ‘Gerson,’ Gen. xlvi. 11.
408. sundri
appears to mean, apart from the Egyptians, and to be derived from ‘Hec
(i.e. pastores sumus) dicetis vt habebitis seorsum ab egyptiis in optima
terra iessen,’ C.; comp. 210/468; Gen. xlvi. 33, 34.
413. in herte
fagen: so, ‘in herte wooc,’ GE 1874; ‘in herte mild,’ id. 2635.
414. For him
read hem, Joseph’s relatives; for migte in the next line migten.
‘Gauisusque est pharao et dixit ad ioseph. De fratribus tuis. Tollite
plaustra de egypto ad subuectionem coniugum,’ C.
415. Because of
Pharaoh’s love for Joseph they were enabled to prosper. ‘Omnia vestra
adducite vobiscum · dabo vobis omnia bona egypti,’ C. timen, to
fare well or ill, mostly the former, is almost confined to GE in this
sense: comp. ‘Amalech fleg and israel | Hadde hegere hond and timede
wel,’ GE 3391; ‘Bi ðan sal sarra selðe timen,’ id. 1023; ‘ðis folc,
sprungen of israel, | Is vnder god timed wel,’ id. 4023.
421. twinne
srud: ‘Deditque ioseph singulis binas stolas,’ C.
422. Comp.
198/62.
425. Al so
fele: ‘totidem,’ C. He sent his father a present similar to that of
Benjamin.
426.
in—wil, at his father’s disposal.
427. fest is
taken by Mätzner as the pp. of esten; so, ‘with burdens
fastened’: it might be adj. fæst, ‘with burdens loaded,’
Morris. In either case it is a strange phrase. Probably lest, OE.
hlæst, is to be read, meaning, with the burden of a horse
load.
653
434. He did not know
them in their rich dresses; ‘þai com ham noght als prisuns like, | Bot
als þai war knigthes rik; | Cled þai war wit riche wede,’ CM 5133.
438.
in—cliueð, remains fixed, stands at his disposal. ‘Joseph
viuit et dominatur in egypto,’ C. Comp. 209/426.
441. Wel me:
see 2/13 note, 21/92 note, 195/634. If wel
is me wel is correct it must mean, it is very wel for me: perhaps we
should read, me is wel wel; comp. ‘wol wel he dede,’ GE 724, ‘Wel wel
was hit bitoȝe,’ L MS. O, 23253; ‘Hijs lauerd he kneu wel wel biforn,’
CM 11033: or, fel it me wel; comp. ‘Niðede ðat folk him fel wel,’ GE
1521.
442. That I have
thus lived to see such good fortune. swil[c] sel usually means in
GE such time, as ‘it wurð soð binnen swilc sel,’ 1032, it came true
within the stated time, so GE 417, 1204, and it may have that meaning
here.
444. sen:
supply as object sune from the preceding line.
453. dere is
Mätzner’s correction.
454. ger:
read geres, 203/207, or gere, 202/190. be ðe on: constructions
with on are frequent in GE; comp. 205/286, 208/370; ‘ðat burgt folc ðat
helde was on,’ GE 1063; ‘For swinc and murning hem was on,’ id. 3205, in
each case rhyming with don. Comp. the Latin inscription, ‘scire laboras,
annos quod tulerim mecum.’
455. xxx:
ðritti.
456. Have I suffered
wo here in the world, not, ‘Have I suffered here in [this] world’s woe’;
for dregen generally takes an accusative in GE, and the intransitive
use, as at GE 3235, is rare.
457. offen is
very doubtful, while ðor of occurs frequently in the poem. The original
had probably, ðor of an fo, answering to ‘An hundred ger.’
460. Here among men,
away from my true home: comp. 201/148; ‘And uten erdes sorge sen,’ GE
956. vten erd was suggested by ‘Dies peregrinationis vite mee,’
C., on which he comments, ‘Peregrinationis dixit · quia sancti vitam
hanc pro incolatu habent,’ words which are paraphrased in ll. 461-464.
Comestor had in mind, ‘Heu mihi quia incolatus meus prolongatus est,’
Ps. cxix. 5 (actually quoted in Zainer’s ed. of 1473).
461. So is
explained by l. 464.
466. If seli
represents OE. gesǣlig, happy, its use with mel, meal, is
singular. But ‘he seruede his fader wel | Wið wines drinc and seles[t]
mel,’ GE 1541 suggests sele, good, as the right word here.
467. him:
corrected by Mätzner.
654
468. sundri:
see 209/408: ‘sciens gratum esse egyptiis separari a se
pastores,’ C.
472. xiiij:
The Vulgate and C. say seventeen.
474. Quilc
time, at what time, when.
476. One thing
whereof he should be right mindful. Mätzner inserts he after ðat:
Schumann suggested the division of offe. But the line is still
unmetrical, and the subjunctive mune for should remember is very
doubtful; probably og has dropped out after off: comp. ‘And for hise
sinne oc (= og) he to munen,’ GE 197, for the infinitive without
to, ‘Cristene men ogen ben so fagen,’ id. 15 and for the infinitive in
e, ‘fare’ 210/443 in rhyme as here.
477.
wurð—don, was finished with him: NED quotes ‘He knewe well
that it was doon of him,’ Caxton, Sonnes of Aymon, i. 56.
479.
witterlike, definitely; that is, not merely in Hebron, but in the
cave where Abraham was laid; ‘in sepulchro maiorum suorum quod abraamium
dicitur,’ C.
482. stille,
in secret: comp. ‘And stille he dalf him [in] ðe sond,’ GE 2718.
483. fer ear
biforen, very long beforehand: comp. ‘ðe was of hin fer ear biforen
| Or ani werldes time boren,’ GE 47; ‘ear fear biforn,’ id. 253. See
202/187.
484-486. hem:
Jacob’s ancestors, as in the frequent ‘dormivit cum patribus suis.’ C.
has ‘Cura fuit sanctis sepeliri in terra qua sciebant Christum
resurrecturum · ut cum eo resurgerent’ (in Zainer’s text the last clause
is ‘vbi cum eo multa corpora sanctorum surrexerunt cum eo’). Accordingly
Kölbing proposed to read for hem, him, referring to Christ, of
whom our author says that he ‘restede him after ðe ded,’ GE 257. A
further change of reste to arist would make the correspondence
with C. complete, but it is more probable that the author omitted the
clause.
489. This line
appears to represent ‘Cumque videret diem obitus sui imminere · vocauit
Joseph,’ C. which comes in the narrative before l. 415. There is a
mixture of constructions, (1) when he felt his departure at hand, and
(2) Before his departure. Mätzner proposed to substitute migte for
wiste.
491. And prophesied
of their future: Gen. xlix.
493. Comp.
212/526.
494. strif:
‘Militia est vita hominis super terram,’ Job vii. 1. Comp. ‘He made on
werlde al erue tame, | ðe sulde him her, in swinkes strif, | to fode and
srud, to helpen ðe lif,’ GE 174.
655
498. bi
waken, ‘waked,’ watched by his body: comp. ‘He was biwaked
richeliche, | And wel faire browt on erthe,’ Seuyn Sages (Weber),
2578.
502.
biqueðen, ‘bewail,’ Morris, whom Mätzner follows. But this use is
without parallel and is not a natural development of OE.
becweðan: possibly it descends from cwīþan, to lament. In
NED, bigreden, lament, or bigreiðen, prepare, make ready, are suggested.
Perhaps biwreðen, representing OE. bewrīðan, to surround with
bands: the line would then mean, to anoint, shroud and enwrap.
504. migt,
power, that is, means, wealth.
506. Not to bury it
speedily with iron tool. For wið yre, comp. Minot iii. 102
note.
507. rigt,
properly, carefully.
510-522. This
passage is based on ‘Fideles modo quia mortuos suos fide et virtutibus
conditos aiunt .xxx. diebus eos plangunt .i. speciales missas sub numero
tot dierum pro ipsis celebrant. Quidam tertiam diem maxime celebrant ·
pro spiritu anima et corpore. Alii septimam,’ C.
510-512. Christian
folk have other customs. They are anointed during their lifetime with
chrism and oil; with chrism and the oleum catechumenorum at baptism,
with the oleum infirmorum in Extreme Unction. in trewðe geuen:
administered with faith in their efficacy: in Extreme Unction, the
ministrant said, ‘da fiduciam tui muneris exequendi.’ ‘Oratio fidei
salvabit infirmum,’ S. Jac. v. 15.
513, 514. For
ðon, Morris read don, Mätzner, ðor. More probably it is a mistake
for ðo induced by the ending of the next word, ðan also has been
corrupted out of ðam. For acts of faith accompanied by charity, those
are for Christians in place of all that watching of the dead: an idea
repeated in ll. 519-521. Strunk, Mod. Lang. Notes, xxvi. 51, proposes
for ðon ben, don bet, with meaning, For truth and good deeds
therewith avail more than that vigil. For mide, see 177/57,
212/532.
515. Sum is
subject of don, l. 519. on, the first day. The Officium Mortuorum
and masses of requiem (‘chirche gong,’ l. 519) were celebrated for
thirty days and with special solemnity on the day of the deposition, the
third, seventh, thirtieth (the month’s mind) and the anniversary; these
or some of them were accompanied by doles (‘elmesse gifte,’ l. 520). See
Rock, Church of our Fathers, ii. 315, 516-519.
517. Mätzner
explains wurðen, ‘accomplished,’ that is, completed: which is the
sense required, but such use of the participle is hard to parallel,
although ‘þenne weoren heore iwil; allunge iwurden,’ L 19656,
comes near it. Awurden, ended, would present less difficulty, and would
656
improve the verse. A participial expression with the same meaning is
seen in ‘fowerti winter vten led,’ GE 3348.
526. laiges
was corrected by Morris. See 211/493 and comp. ‘Clense ðis folc wel ðis
to daiges, | And bidde hem leden clene la[i]ges,’ GE 3453.
529. bode:
‘Significauit autem Joseph Pharaoni per intercessores quod iurauerat
patri de sepultura,’ C. bōda, messenger.
531.
ðor—dede, wherein he (Joseph) acted well, his pious
act.
533. wis of
here: neither in OE. nor in ME. does here mean war, battle,
but only army, devastation. Morris reading heren, translates, ‘skilful
in armed expeditions,’ which seems forced. Probably were is to be read:
comp. ‘Als it were wopnede here, | Redi to silden him fro were,’ GE
1787. A similar phrase is ‘witter of figt,’ GE 864. In l. 534 read
dere.
535. rad:
comp. ‘And iacob was of weie rad,’ GE 1783.
536. abuten,
making a detour: ‘timentes bella deuiauerunt a recto itinere veneruntque
ad aream azad,’ C. adad: ‘atad,’ Vulgate and LXX; not in Codex
Amiatinus.
539. numen,
proceeded: comp. 13/28, 178/78, 179/113, 187/369; ‘And ðeðen he nam to
mirie dale,’ GE 745, and often. There is an ellipsis of wei; comp.
206/305. So ‘his weige ðeðen ches,’ GE 2736, compared with ‘Anon of lond
he ches,’ Sir Tristrem 2221.
541. ouer
pharan: not in Comestor or the Vulgate; comp. GE 1248. The desert of
Paran on the west side of the Dead Sea is meant.
542. biriele:
this form without final s is suspect.
544. sent: s
added by Morris.
549. ‘nos quoque
oramus vt patri tuo dimittas iniquitatem hanc,’ C.
550. Wið ðan(ne)
ðat, inasmuch as, seeing that: differently at 208/389.
552. This line is
corrupt: Holthausen’s ‘To bidden meðe and beden bot’ gives a good sense
and restores the rhyme. He compares ‘Moyses bad meðe,’ GE 3011: see
36/126 note.
556. This line is
unmetrical and otherwise difficult: kin should be sing.,
wexen is pl., manige fold for manigfeald is
strange. Perhaps we should read, His kin was waxen manig fold.
557. Mätzner adds
his before sibbe, which makes the line too long; perhaps
cumen is in excess.
559. biforen
qualifies hað . . . sworen.
561. in:
comp. ‘Tac ðin sune ysaac in hond,’ GE 1287; ‘An. vii. kinge-riches lond
| Ic sal hem bringen al on hond,’ id. 2789.
564. Fulfil it then,
promise it now: so, ‘ðat ic ðe haue hoten wel, | Ic it sal lesten
euerilc del,’ GE 2905.
657
568. seli
red, happy counsel, possibly in the sense of what is advantageous,
helpful; but ‘seli sped,’ 200/192, GE 240 suggests a simpler
reading.
570. egipte
like, after the Egyptian fashion.
571. Add he before
biried. hem, his bones, l. 566.
572. late,
after many years: ‘nec motus donec egressi sunt filii israel de
egypto,’ C.
573. on and
on: comp. 206/320.
578. soules
is sing., comp. ‘for liues helpe and soules red,’ GE 496; ‘for
sowles frame,’ id. 626.
579-590. Not by the
author.
580. engel
tale: ‘on engleis speche,’ GE 14; ‘on engleis tale,’ id. 450; ‘On
engle speche,’ id. 814.
582. ‘May God help
him kindly,’ Morris; this involves helpe, mot, where we should expect
helpen, mote. Mätzner suggested wel e mot, God help him, well he
may.
583. sorge ⁊
grot: see 199/74.
584. cold ⁊
hot: see 44/232-236.
586. spilen,
disport themselves.
589. Comp. ‘And to
alle cristene men | beren pais and luue bitwen,’ GE 7. After us,
Holthausen adds be: perhaps, ben ús | bitwén.
Phonology: ... but ‘loac,’ GE
1798
GE.
ǣ1 is e
æ1
ēa is e ... (wēox from
weacsan)
wæcsan
a + g ... ǣ2
+ g
æ2
Accidence: ... onsagen 99, ðeden 356
have added n
adden
Vocabulary: ... til 60, ðeden
84
ðeðen
Metre: ... Goód is | quað
jós|eph
quáð
ii b. Ór | for misdéd|e or fór |
onságen
ii. b.
quát | he wóren, 434:
434;
i a. Kínde | lúue | gan him
óu|ergón
1 a.
J́c am | iosép | drédeð | gu nógt
Jć am
euẹrilc 268
text unchanged, but body text has euerilc almost throughout
308. Kinde ðhogt,
đhogt
which our writer seems to have used
here.
here.’
356. ... CM 3914
CM.
371. ... OEM 117/244.
OEM.
Manuscript: Laud Misc. 471, Bodleian Library; on
vellum, 188 × 130 mm.: consists of two manuscripts bound together; the
former, mostly Latin, has at f. 65 r, ‘Man may longe liwes wenen’ (see
p. 308). The second manuscript, of the
end of the thirteenth century, begins at f. 92 with Grosseteste’s
Château d’Amour; on f. 128 r is Maurice de Sully’s sermon for January
1st in French, then follows the present article. Other sermons in French
by Sully begin on f. 138 v2, but they do not include the
originals of these English translations.
Facsimile: Skeat, W. W., Twelve Facsimiles,
Oxford, 1892; plate v gives ll. 19-78.
Editions: Morris, R., An Old English Miscellany,
pp. 26-36. Kluge, F., Mittelenglisches Lesebuch, pp. 19-25.
Literature: Danker, O., Die Laut- und
Flexionslehre der mittelkentischen Denkmäler, Strassburg, 1879; Heuser,
W., Zum kent. Dialekt im Mittelenglischen, Anglia, xvii. 73-81;
*Konrath, M., Zur Laut- und Flexionslehre des Mittelkentischen, Archiv,
lxxxviii. 47-66, 157-180,
658
lxxxix. 153-166; Reimann, M., Die Sprache der mittelkentischen
Evangelien, Berlin, 1883. Of the French
original, Manuscripts and Text: Meyer, P., Romania, v. 466,
xxiii. 178, xxviii. 245; Documents manuscrits, Paris, 1871, pp. 157,
158, 244; Boucherie, A., Le Dialecte poitevin au xiiie
siècle, Niort, 1873; the Author: Mortet,
V., Maurice de Sully, évêque de Paris, in Mémoires de la Société de
l’histoire de Paris, xvi. 105; Bourgain, L., La Chaire française au
xiie siècle, Paris, 1879; Lecoy de la Marche, A., La Chaire
française au Moyen Âge, Paris 1868.
Phonology: Oral a is a, habbe 75,
last 212; awakede 172 has its form from āwacian, its meaning from
āweccan. a before nasals is a, fram 35 (5 times),
man 120 &c., þan conj. 34, þanne 47, 160, wanne 21 (4);
man indef. pron. is man 112, me 34; apparently lengthened in naam
237, from the plural. a before lengthening groups is o,
belongeth 86, fond 206 (3), hond 138, londes 31, longe 246, 275, but
shortened and 10, answerden 18, and amenges 217, influenced by
gemengan. æ is divided between e, efter 22 (3),
hedde 41 (8), hedden 11 (12), nedden 242, hest 101, smech 50,
53, þet 10 (47), wet 42, 151 and a, hadde 173, spac 20, 87,
þat 54 (23), uastinge 57, was 6 &c.,
wat 26, 86, 174, 221, watere 91 (6),
stressless at 84 (6), ate 229; from OE. forms in a, almichti
5 (6), fader 48, habbe 67; flexion form bak (biteres) 111; iheed 248
represents OE. gehæfd. e is e, be prep. 39
&c., iþenche 282, wrench 275; before lengthening groups ende 161,
strengþe 267; but bi 54 &c., swiche 127 (4), siche 179, wiche 145,
wyche 112; e is raised to i in sigge 53 (11), togidere 95
from the umlaut form togedere, wrichede 59, comp. wrecca; with
bie prep. 94, 228 for bi, comp. ‘beo’ for be, Reimann § 18.
2 f; in angles 150 a is probably due to French influence,
although a for umlaut e before nasal is characteristic of
the South-Eastern area, see 439/9-13, 269/25-27. The isolated o
in ongel 28 beside angles may be set down to the representation of OF. a
before nasal + cons. in Southern ME. indifferently as a or
o, so in Ayenbite, chambren, chombre, chongi (Behrens 78), but
the scribe of KS writes always sergant, serganz. i is i,
wille 22, finde 24, often written y, especially in contact with
m, n, agyn 212, hym 13; here 85, her, is an early instance
of the spelling with e. o is o, dorste 87, wolde
23, but an 71, ane 242 (an), a 192 through loss of stress; þane
175, 274, 281 is LWS. þane. u is u, icume 216, 253,
to cumene 284, luuie 74, hifunde 21, undren 205 (3), but o in
awondrede 177, come 60, comme 55, cometh 22, 159, icomen 215, ffolvellet
90, fonden 208, ifonden 27, louie 243; see 269/31. y is e,
spusbreche 110, chereche 149, dede 205, euele 107 (12), ferst 96 (7),
uuluelden 93, manken 41, senne 61 (14), þenche 245, werm 55, berdene
219,
659
but forþingketh 221, due to palatal influence, kinges 7, mirre 11, 54,
as in French original, niste 98, analogy of wiste, formeste 134
(formest). ā is o, aros 169, holi 5 &c., no 55,
none 156, on art. 202, one 134, 199, o 14, one numer. 117
&c., doubled in aróós 171, hool 137, hóót 74, 280, noon 148, 221,
282; before two consonants, o, bitockned 107 &c., gost 48,
onlepi 48; but the indef. article is mostly an, ane, a, so too anoþer
30, anoþren 34; askede 13, 17, haleghen 146 have shortened a,
contrast ‘oxi,’ Ayenbite 114/1; with namore 87 comp. nammore 231/14.
ǣ1 is regularly e, anhet 115, wreþe 188,
doubled in anhéét 116, 124, before two consonants, clensed 139, euerich
122 (5), leuedi 83, leuedis 31, but aueriche 69, lauedi 6, 87, goth 51,
with o from the plural. ǣ2 is also e,
euen 206 (5), þer 60 &c., wer 13 (4), were 91 (4), ofdred 16,
werefore 69 (3), but war 26 (hwār), ware 91, waren 215, 216.
ē is e, akelþ 108, deþ 70 (3), he 15 &c., se
art. 13 &c., wenden 216, but doþ 179, with o from the
plural, ha 20 &c., a 250, 264, mostly stressless. ī is
i, hwilem 19, niþing 121, wyn 84; doubled in hij 248; before two
consonants, wyman 87, winyarde 203; the only exception is bleþeliche
182, comp. ‘blethliche,’ Seuyn Sages 503 (Kentish), ‘bleþeliche,’
Ayenbite, 20/26; according to Konrath (p. 172) ē in MK. had a
very close sound approaching ī, which led to their interchange,
but there is also ‘bluðeliche’ 119/80, OEH i. 31/4 which needs
accounting for. ō is o, comen 35 (4), into 12, to 22,
sothfast 38, doubled in good 120, 183, 281, goodman 202, but a in
kam 12 (4) and reduced to e in te 7, 20, 256, te dai 5 (4),
euerte 135, neuerte 248, inte 250, 251. ū is u, bute 279,
ut 239, upward 51, doubled in uut 202, but o in bote 244, don
170. ȳ is e, bredale 80, fer 112, ueréé 51, here 203,
herde 208, iherde 228, iherede 232, iherd 248, prede 188, wéé 207
(hwȳ); before two consonants, bredgume 99, but ihierde 236 where
ie may be a writing for ē, or equivalent to [je], litle
143 (litel).
ea before r + cons. is a in art 124, 125,
winyarde 203 &c., to . . . ward 51, but e in
forewerde 203, 204 in syllable of minor stress. ea before
l + cons. is a, al 8 &c., and its compounds, falle
155, halt 283, before ld, a in chald 109, schald 108,
o in chold 124, itold 67, 222 (as bold, bolde in Ayenbite), but
before lde, ia (as for ēa) in ialde 39, ihialde
101; this alternation of a (not o) and ia, as short
and long, is specifically Kentish. The i-umlaut is e, elde
260, 268, 270. eo before r + cons. is e, verrene
35, herte 45 (6), sterft 154, sterre 7 (4),
werkes 50 (8), werkmen 203 (3), before lengthening groups,
erþe 82, 135, erþliche 65, husberners
111; Kentish absence of i-umlaut (Bülb. § 187) in ismered
55; uerste 223. eo before lf is e, selue 115,
seluen 123, 183. eo, u- and å-umlaut of e is
e, fele 224, 270, heuene 29 (9); after w, o in
wordle 191, world 228. eo, u- and å-umlaut
660
of i is e in beneme 186, clepie 181, clepeþ 262, selure
64, here 11 (10), but hire 27, 30, 185. ea after palatals is
a, sal 34 (4), yaf 158, 214. ie after ġ is
e, yeue 210, 251, yeft 35, yefþ 272, yeue 71, 159, yef 213, yeld
211, yeftte 37. EWS. gief is yef 24 &c. eo after
sć is o, solle 271, sollen 200, 254, solde 14 (5), solden
250, but sulle 223. eom is am 184, heom, hem 10
&c.
ēa is ia, beliaue 41 (6), diadlich 41, 264, diadliche
143 (7), diath 41, diaþe 274, griat 201, griate 234, 272, ya in
yare 282, but ea in beleaue 45 (6), great 141, 169, greater 267,
a in belaue 67, e in gret 171, grete 143: slon 24 is from
a form with ā. The spelling with e [ē] is not Kentish,
that with a is probably meant for ea, which is historic
spelling of the same import as the specifically Kentish ia,
ya. The phonetic value of the latter is in dispute. Sweet says
probably [jaa], that is, with accent shifting; Konrath [jœ̄] for the
initial, [œ̄] for the medial position; Heuser maintains that the symbols
must have the same value wherever placed and suggests for it [eǣ]. The
i-umlaut of ēa is e, beleue 47, 250, bileue 75,
bileued 242, beleuede 103, iherde 14, 19, iherd 62 (4), ihere 282,
ihereþ 106, 224, onlepi 48, onlepiliche 65, but ie in ihiereth
42, niedes 181, 185, nyede 180. ēo initial is ye, yede
12 (7); medial, ie bien 18, 192, bieth 59, 68,
bieþ 152 (10), bied
116, biedh 143, dieule 61, forbiet 73, liese 16, liesed 114, liest 145,
153, forliest 154, but e in betuene 9, deuel 187, deueles 241,
frend 221, helden 235, iuel 84, prest 40, and i in sike 58,
sikman 136; final, ie, ye, bie 178, 223, 156, 207, ibye
219, hie 207 (hēo), hye 87, þrie 7 (5) and i, bi 14, 71,
139, si 6 (10), hi 87, but e in be (swo) 263, ibe 238, 239, 241,
246, 247. The medial ie, which is characteristic of Kentish, has,
according to Sweet, the value of diphthongic [jee], according to
Konrath, of the monophthong ē; final ie, ye is ī. The
i-umlaut of ēo is e, þefte 144. ēa after
ġ is e in yere 66, ēo, e in yemer 114,
yemere 113, yemernesse 56, but Morsbach (Anglia, Beiblatt, vii. 326)
regards it as umlaut e. gīet is yet 118.
a + g is agh, daghen 252, laghe 17 (3), but
ai in daies 66: mowe 53, 260, moue 72, muee 33 represent the
subjunctive form mugon: seith 183, 242, seiþ 184, seyth 201, seid
113, 274 come from segeþ. æ + g is ai, dai 5
&c., day 33 (5), mai 148 &c., may 58 (5), maidene 237, vaire
177, but deai 219: seide 20 &c., seyde 88 (6), seiden 172, seyden
217, iseid 19 represent segde &c.: sede 86, seden 230 descend
from sǣde, sǣdon. e + g is ei, ileid
170, weye 30: ayen 30, 206, agenes 269 descend from ongēn, so
toyenes 235; tojanes 8 (influence of n), from tōgēanes,
comp. 428/37. i + g final is i, bodi 60, mani 118,
peni 251; lauedi 87, leuedi 83 represent hlǣfdī; the spirant is
lost in bodie 158. u + g: mowe 75. ā + g is
seen
661
in oghe 112, ǣ1 + h in tachte 249 (shortened
tāhte), ō + h in ibrocht 99, nocht 23 (5); in cróós
90 the spirant has been absorbed; nacht 65, 104, 146 comes from
shortened nāht. The i-umlaut of ea + ht is
e in the specifically Kentish manslechtes 111 (Bülb. § 180
b), but i in almichti 5, micht 137, michte 24, nicht 28.
ēo + ht is i in bricht, brichtnesse 44, richt 209,
unricht 221: wesse 92 is wēoscon. ēo + g is
e in legheþ 275; īe + ht, i in licht 46.
e + w: iseghe 176 comes from gesegen. ā +
w is au, saule 159, saulen 191: seghe 105, seghen 25, 215
come from sǣgon. ī + w: newe 134. ēa +
w is seen in feaue 224, seaweth 199, seawede 37, 39, seauede 237,
seaude 249, seauinge 8, seywinge 32, miswriting, perhaps for sewinge.
ēo + w occurs in biknewe 8, furti 266 shortened, yure 64,
final yu 89, 210, yw 174, 251. Accents are more sparingly used than in
piece v, 275/40; they appear to emphasize the length of a vowel already
doubled to indicate length in anhéét 116 (anheet 124), aróós 171 (aros
169), cróós 90, hóót 74, 280 (hot 88, 279), wéé 207; in beleauéé 230,
icornéé 224, ueréé 51, séé 169, 175 short inflectional e is
doubled and accented, possibly to point out that it is not silent, but
muee 33 is without accent; similarly iléke 61 (ileke 72, 73, ilke 59),
offréde 38 (offrede 38): in galiléé 78 (Vulgate Cana Galilaeae) separate
pronunciation of the vowels is indicated.
In godespelle 5, 32, 199, haleghen 146, iherede 232, ileke 61,
leuedis 31, leuedi 83, lauedi 6, moreghen 202 a glide e has been
inserted, a final e added in ate 229, ofte 275; e is lost
in icornéé 224, mor 34. For e, ie is written in sollie
160, o is e in sikerliche 187. The prefix in akelþ 108 is
a- intensive; in agyn 212, alast 236, anhet 115 &c.,
an-, on-; in astrengþed 179 a- from ar-; in
answerden 18, and-; in awondrede 177, of-: be- is
mostly bi-, but betokned 116 (3), ge-, i-, ihende
55, iwil 114, but it is lost in bore 71. The suffix in sothfast 38 is
-fæst (in the Ayenbite it appears as -uest), in felarede 147, -rǣden, in childhede
262, -hǣd; the termination of verbal nouns is -ing, as in ME. gauelinge 144; in baþieres 92 the suffix
is Fr. -ière.
w is written u in betuene 9, suo 135, uilleth 200; it
has disappeared in siche 179, so 59: vrefore 246 is miswritten for
werfore. Metathesis of r is seen in undren 205, in loruerde 103
the scribe has added r by anticipation. ll is simplified
in ffolvellet 90, uuluelden 93, godspel 242, iwil 114 &c.; Kentish
wordle 191 &c. alternates with world 228. m is doubled in
comme 55; mm simplified in wyman 87. The preposition in is
reduced to i 5 &c.; nn is simplified in clenesse 92, cumene
284, done 191, heþenesse 8; n is lost in heueriche 252, 256, 281.
bb is simplified in habeþ 259. Initial f is u,
v in vaire 177, uastinge 57, velaghes 218, ueréé 51, verrene 35,
662
uerste 223, uuluelden 93 and medially between vowels and vowellikes,
ffolvellet 90, iuel 84, over 26, senuulle 142, with exceptions bifore
25, 104, underfonge 254, þerefore 254, werefore 238, vrefore 246,
otherwise f occurs under all conditions. f is assimilated
in hedde 41, lost in hest 101, iheed 248, lordes 32, lordinges 31. For
t, th appears in wath 102 (comp. ethe in Ayenbite), and
td in hotestd 266: t is doubled in yeftte 37, lost in
beste 100, last 212 and finally in þa 82, 180, þe 39, 280. d is
doubled in risindde 8; dd simplified in ofdred 16. For þ,
th is often written in verbal terminations, t occurs in
habbet 62, 64, 85, maket 121, d in bied 116, bitockned 107,
bitokned 142, betokned 116, 143, 152, 266, drinked 115, hatied 278,
tþ in habbetþ 219, dh in biedh 143, clepiedh 185, hatedh
73, mudh 113. Initial þ is t twice, to 58, 175 after and;
the scribe must have had ant in mind or in his exemplar. A parasitic
þ has
been inserted in alþer 266, OE. ealra, an early instance of a
form common in the South. For voiced s, z occurs in sechez
21, serganz 88, 89, signefiez 142, but it is not used initially.
ss appears as sc in blisce 70. sc is s, sal
34, seawede 37, solle 271, sulle 223, srifte 159, flesliche 43, fles
237, but ssipe 168 (4), wesse 92, flesce 56, flessce 59. The stop
c is k before e, i, akelþ 108, wakie 57,
before a, u, kam 12, kuþe 17, in combination with
consonants, biknewe 8, tokningge 141, folk 135, except cl,
cr, clenesse 92, croos 90: it is c before o, cometh
22. Finally it is c or k, spac 20, bak 111, tok 139, 175:
c is written ck in betockneþ 225, bitockneþ 268, bitockned
107, and gk in forþingketh 222. The graph xp (= χρ) is used in xpisteneman 107
&c., xpisteman 109: the Latin text has chana 78 for Cana. č
is ch, besech 125, bisecheth 182, chald 109, chold 124, chereche
149, child 21, euerich 122, -lich 41
&c., michel 15, kingriche 16, seche 36, speche 33, swiche 127,
techinge 231, þenche 245, wiche 145, wrench 275, sch in schald
108, but hic 22 &c., besekeþ 68: čč is ch, smech 50,
wrichede 59. Palatal g is written y, ayen 30, toyenes 235,
(wyn)yarde 203, yaf 158, ye 21, yemer 114, yere 66, yeue 210, yeftte 37,
the doubling in winyyarde 272 was without intention: y is lost in
iyue 133, gegiefen. It has developed to w in mowe 53, moue
72 and is lost in muee 33; other spellings are seen in tojanes 8, hye
64: yu 89, yure 64 have imitated ye, gē. g is lost finally
in words ending in -ig. čǧ is gg in sigge 53
&c. The guttural stop is written g, gold 11, king 15, doubled
in tokningge 141: for ng, nk appears in kink 38, offrinke
34, 36, þinkes 74, 112. The spirant is gh, daghen 252, haleghen
146, laghe 17, legheþ 275, oghe 112, seghe 105, moreghen 202, sorghen
185. Similarly the guttural spirant h is represented by
ch, ibrocht 99, nacht 65, nocht 23, þurch 119 &c., but þurh
188; palatal are bricht 44, licht 46, michte 24, nicht 28, richt 209.
h is added
663
in hac 87, hic 66 &c., hifunde 21, his 218, hure 178, 198, hut 279,
hye 64: h is lost in i 43, 250, is 232, ise 168, 246. hr
is r, raþe 140, as already in OE., hw, w, wee 207,
wer 13, vrefore 246, wiche 145, wo 48, wylem 38, but hwilem 19, 258,
hwylem 117.
Accidence: Strong declension of masc. and
neut. nouns. In the s. n. sune 48 represents sunu.
Gen. -es, domes 192, liues 275;
heueriche 252, 256, 281 is a composition form: d. -e, bodie 158, with short stem vowel, daye 69, daie 220,
227, gode 49 (10), marcatte 206, ueréé 51; exceptions are god 47, gost
72, iwil 157; peny 203 is probably accusative: the time words dai
5 (11), midday 205 (3), euen 235, moreghen 202 (5), undren 205 (3) are
treated as accusatives, as occasionally in OE. tō-dæg, on
mid-dæg, on undern. In the acc. bodi 60, peny 213,
215, 216, peni 251, 255, 281 have lost final g. The pl.
n. a. of masculines ends in -es,
bakbiteres 111, lordinges 31, daies 66, but husberners 111, croos 90;
neuters are n. þinges 59, 61; a. þinges 73, 74, þinkes 74,
werkes 50 (5), faten 91, 93. Pl. d. -es, angles 150, londes 31, 36, werkes 68 (4), writes
183, but daghen 252, wyntre 266 (comp. nom. wintru). All
feminine nouns of the strong declension have -e throughout the singular, except n. lauedi 87,
leuedi 83; d. lauedi 6, world 228, 238, 258, 263, wordl 230 (but
wordle 191, 236, 243); a. hond 138. Plurals are n. deden
111, saulen 191, sennen 145, leuedis 31, tides 227; d. hertes 72,
niedes 181, 185, offringes 63, wordles 259, sennen 147, sorghen 185;
a. sennen 142, 143, 160. Nouns of the weak declension have -e throughout the singular, n. sterre 7,
tunge 282, yare 282; d. bredgume 99, sunne 44, time 168;
a. beliaue 41; plurals are d. haleghen 146; a. time
228. The minor declensions are represented by man s. n. 123,
sikman 136, xpistenman 69, goodman 202, wyman 87, mannes
s. g. 147, cristenemannes 45, men s. d. 260,
manne 46, 120, cristenemanne 52, 69, man 265, 267, 268,
s. a. 120, men pl. n. 15, pl. d. 153, pl.
a. 142, werkmen 203; fader s. n. 48; frend
s. n. 221; child s. a. 21; nicht
s. d. 28. The French nouns have -es in the pl., except geus 15, gyus 13, paens
245, 247, serganz 88, 89.
Adjectives which in OE. end in e retain it throughout; those in
-ig lose g and are invariable in the singular, so stille, newe,
holi, onlepi 48. Weak inflections are s. n. m. euele
107, 109, gode 44, 45, vaire 177, f. gode 52,
s. g. m. gode 45, s. d. m. euele 120,
gode 46, 52, f. griate 272, ialde 39, neut. wrichede 59;
strong, s. g. neut. longe 275, s. d. m.
gode 67, 230, f. diadliche 150, 153, 154, 157, 189, 278, griate
234, neut. euele 157, s. a. m. gode 173. Not
inflected are weak s. a. neut. heþen 239; strong,
s. d. f. diadlich 264, neut. good 183, yemer
114, s. a. m. god 234, good 120, hool 137,
s. a. f. gret 171, griat 201. French words have no
inflection.
664
The plural ends in -e, bitere 59,
diadliche 143, euele 109, 156, senuulle 142, verrene 35, but heþen 252
and the predicative idel 207, 238, 241, 246 are uninflected.
litel is litle, s. d. m. 174, pl. d. 147,
pl. a. 143; āgen, oghe, s. n. m. 112.
ān adj. is n. an before vowel 28, a before
consonant 80, 136, 169, o 14, d. ane f. 81, neut.
168, a. ane 203, 213, 214, 216, emphatic form on n., a
certain, 202, one d. 134, a. 199: the numeral and pronoun
is d. one 117, 118, 168, on 221, a. on 218: nān
adj. is s. n. no 55, 148, 273, noon 282,
d. f. no 263, neut. none 157, a. neut. noon
before vowel 221, no 85, pl. d. none 156: the pronoun is
n. s. noon 148, non 247, 274. Adjectives with inflection
used as nouns are euele s. d. 126, 138, gode 126, eueles
pl. d. 190, godes 65, gode pl. a. 58; euel 186, good 281,
unricht 221 are s. a. neut. Comparatives are greater
s. d. f. 267 (2); more 217, namore 87 used as nouns:
superlatives, formeste 134, beste 100, 102; used as nouns are ferste
pl. 213, uerste pl. 223, laste pl. 218, 224;
predicative are hotestd 266, ferst 224, last 223.
The personal pronouns are hic 22 (8), i(ne) 104, 221, me, we, us, þu,
þe, ye, hye 64, yu, yw 174, 251. The pronoun of the third person is
s. n. he m. 15 &c., ha 20 (21) often stressless,
a 250, 264, ha in has 69, hi 26 for he, hi f. 87, hye 87, hit
neut. 18, with m. f. nouns 50, 175; d. him
m. 11, hire f. 86; a. hine m. 172, 283, hyne
10, hin 27 before vowel, hym 13 (possibly dative), hit neut. 21;
pl. n. hi 8 &c., hie 207, i 43, 250; g. here 216;
d. hem 10; a. hi 185, 204, hij 248, hem 17 (possibly
dative), is in has 69, his 218. Reflexives are hine 148, him 170, him
seluen 123, hem pl. d. 217, pl. a. 25, 92, 177; definitive
are himselue s. d. neut. 115, himseluen 183: possessives,
mine s. d. m. 209, 250, 251, f. 137,
neut. 138, min s. a. neut. 222; þine
s. d. m. 219; his s. 211 &c., is 232,
pl. hise 15, 83, 171, ise 168, 246, his 103, 146, 150, 233; here
85; ure 5, 68, 280, hure 178, 198; yure 64; here 11 (10), hire 27, 30,
185. In the following account of the article and demonstrative the
translator is assumed to have taken the genders of French nouns from the
French original. The definite article is s. n. se m.
13 (15), þe 211, þe commencement 102, þe miracle 140, þo 265, si
f. 31 (6), and with masc. nouns 6, 12, 45, si miracle 31,
177, þe 141, 255, þe custome 93, þe nature 266, þet neut.
32 (12); g. þes m. 214 (perhaps miswritten for his);
d. þo m. 9 (17), þe 50 (13), þo f. 8 (18), þe
45 (6), þe cite 6, þo neut. 5 (12), þe 33 (8); a. þane
m. 175, 274, 281, þan 206, 235, þo 25, 269, þo miracle 176, þe
44 (7), se 107, þo f. 70 (11), (and) to 175, þe 53 (7), þet
neut. 21 (8); instrumental þe 105, 178: pl. n. þo
24 (17), þe 226, 247; d. þo 7 (11), þe 183; a. þo 56 (12),
(and) to 58, þe 58, 89, 228, 229, 245. Þet is demonstrative adj.
42 (3), 49, 54 (2), 281, also þa s. d. m. 82,
s. d. neut. 82, 180, þo s. d. m. 267;
665
the plural is þo 59, 72, 73, 74 (2), 145, 147, 176, þa d. 252:
þet is demonstrative pronoun 22, 68, 281, þat 150, 152, 161, þe[t] 280;
for þet 15, 23, 24 means because, be þet 37, by that that: the plural is
þo, mostly with relatives, þo þet 108 &c., those who, 231, those to
whom, 283, for those who: other pronominal uses of the article are seen
in se þet 96, 154, 180, he who, for þan 272, on that account, er þane
171 (read þan), before. The compound demonstrative is s. n.
þes m. 225, þis, þis commencement 102, þis miracle 140, 177, þis
f. þis signefiance 122, þis tempeste 171; d. þise m.
210, f. 152 (4), þis 229 (6), þise
neut. 84, 97; a. þise f. 204, 222, þis neut.
20: pl. n. þos 210, 217, a. 90, 91. The relative is þet
and þat; it means that which in 43, 209, 243, 278, 279, 280, in which
82, anyone who 208. Interrogative are wat 86, 174, 221, wet 42, 151,
wiche 145, wyche 112; the correlative is swiche
s. d. m. 179, siche s. a. m. 179,
swiche pl. 127, 191, 262: ilca is ilke pl. 59,
ileke 61, 72, 73, ilek 74. Indefinites are wo so 48; me 34, 38, 58, 145,
man 112, 274; oþer 188, oþre pl. 111, 121, 210, oþer 100, 153;
anoþer s. d. m. 30, anoþren 34; euerich 122, 216,
eueriche s. d. m. 213, 260, aueriche 69, euerich 214;
mani 118, 234; fele 224, 270; feaue pl. 224; al s. 243
&c., alle pl. 15 &c., pl. g. alþer 266.
Verbs in -an, except the contract slon 24, have infinitive in
-e, bidde 75, bileue 75, yeue 251 and
twenty-five other examples; those in -ian with short stem vowel
have -ie, luuie 74, hatie 72, makie 34,
137, wakie 57, with long stem vowel, -i,
loki 148. French verbs with consonant stems follow the latter, acumbri
187, anuri 22, onuri 24, serui 75 (3), somoni 16, suffri 41, targi 273,
uisiti 57, with these is associated offri 10. The dat. infinitive
is inflected in to cumene 284 only; it has -en in to siggen 123, 152, 231, otherwise -e, with prefixed for te, habbe 256, here 203, liese 16,
wende 273; with to, seche 36, sigge 90 (3), slepe 170; Fr. for to anuri
10, to serui 273. Presents are s. 1. beneme 186, habbe 67, sigge
104; Fr. sucuri 185; 2. makest 218, syncopated hest 101; 3. belongeth
86, betockneþ 225, luueþ 279 and twelve others in -eþ, bitockned 107, betokned 116, 143, 152, 266,
bitokned 142, luued 74, maked 119, hatedh 73, loket 60, maket 121; Fr.
ofserueth 112, signefieth 40 (4), turneþ 265, amuntet 52, defendet 54,
ofseruet 70, signefiet 55, 57, signified 50, 113, signefiez 142;
syncopated are akelþ 108, anhet 115, forbiet 73, forliest 154, liest
145, 153, halt 283, hath 48, hot 88, 279, hóót 74, 280, licht 46, seith
183 (4), seid 113, 274, sent 264, sterft 154, telþ 32 (5), yefþ 272; the
syncopated forms are thus as numerous as the full forms: pl. 1.
bisecheth 182, habbeth 219 (3), redeth 5, habbetþ 219, hopieþ 256 (verbs
in -ian with short stem vowel have -ieþ in pr. pl., -ie in subj.); Fr. perisset 173; 2. habbeth 21,
106, habbet 62, 64, 151, luuieþ 278, hatied 278, syncopated
666
dret 174; Fr. ofserueþ 281; 3. betockneþ 226, habbeþ 100, 218, drinked
115, liesed 114, habbet 85, luuieþ 283, clepiedh 185, syncopated yeft
35; Fr. defendet 60: subjunctive s. 3. helpe 182, loke 122, wende
126, yeue 71, 159, yef 191 before vowel, luuie 244; Fr. deliuri 190,
granti 284, serui 244, sucuri 181; pl. 1. beleue 47, loke 152,
grede 186, 189, offre 42, 47, sigge 189, clepie 181; Fr. perissi 190; 2.
falle 155: imperative s. 2. agyn 212, besech 125, yef 213, yeld
211, clepe 211; Fr. saue 172, sauue 189; pl. 2. bereth 96, cometh
22, 159, ihiereth 42, lokeþ 155, offreth 65, ffolvellet 90, forleted
159, greded 158, sechez 21; Fr. anuret 22, moveth 95. Past of Strong
Verbs: I a. s. 3. spac 20, 87, yaf 158, 214; pl. 3. seghen
25, 215, seghe 105, speken 13: I b. s. 3. kam 12 (4), naam 237;
pl. 3. comen 35 (4), nomen 9: I c. s. 3. fond 206 (3);
pl. 1. fonden 208: II. s. 3. aros 169, 174, aróós 171: IV.
s. 3. tok 139, 175: V. IV. pl. 3. wesse 92: V. s.
3. het 29, iuel 84; pl. 3. biknewe 8, helden 235. Participles
present: II. risindde 8; past: I a. iseghe 176, iyue 133: I b. ibore
6 (4), bore 71, icume 216, 253, icomen 215: I c. idrunke 97, hifunde 21,
ifonden 27: III. icornéé 224: V. behote 19, ihialde 101, underfonge 254,
ofdred 16. Past of Weak Verbs: s. 3. ansuerede 220, answerde 86,
clepede 89, makede 118, made 103, 135, offrede 38, seauede 237, seaude
249, hedde 97 (5), iherde 14 (5), iherede 232, seide 20 &c., sente
204, tachte 249; Fr. aperede 28, apierede 7, aresunede 245, failede 84,
onurede 136, sucurede 180, paide 214; pl. askede 13, awakede 172,
beleuede 103, offrede 40 (4), seawede 37, 39, hadde 173, hedde 41 (3),
seyde 208, answerden 18 (3), hedden 11 (9), nedden 242, maden 63, seiden
172, 217, seden 230, uuluelden 93, wenden 216, wenten 25; Fr. anurede
27, gruchchede 217, seruede 88, 230, serueden 258. Participles past:
astrengþed 179, bileued 242, clensed 139, icleped 81, pl.
iclepede 91, 224, imaked 81 (3), maked 119, imad 204, ioffred 64,
ismered 55, istrengþed 106, iþoled 219, iheed 248, iherd 62 (5), ileid
170, iseid 19, 259, itold 67, 222, anheet 116, 124, ibrocht 99, iwent
94; Fr. anud 15, anured 71, aparailed 11, asoiled 160, deseiurd 147,
deseuerd 156, deseurd 148, 149, ientred 254, isauued 192, iserued 96,
itravailed 218, iwarisd 140. Minor Groups: wot pr. s. 274, wiste
pt. s. 173, pt. pl. 98, niste 98; kuþe pt. pl. 17;
dorste pt. s. 87; sal 1 pr. s. 210, 251, pr. s. 34,
178, sollen 1 pr. pl. 200, 254, sollie 2 pr. pl. 160,
sulle pr. pl. 223, solle 271, solde pt. s. 14 (4), pt.
pl. 30, solden 250; micht 2 pr. s. 137, mai pr. s.
148 (3), may 58 (5), mowe 1 pr. pl. 53, 260, moue 72, muee 2 pr.
pl. 33, mowe 1 pr. pl. subj. 75, michte pt. s. 24;
mote 2 pr. s. subj. 127, pr. pl. subj. 192; bi inf.
14, 71, bie 178, 223, bien 18, 192, am 1 pr. s. 184, art 2 pr.
s. 124, 125, is pr. s. 31 &c., his 122, nis 146, 148,
bieþ 1 pr. pl. 152 (3), 2 pr. pl. 155 (5), bie ye 207,
bieth pr. pl. 59 (5), biedh 143, bi 2 pr. s. subj.
667
139, be (swo) pr. s. subj. 263, bie 2 pr. pl. subj. 156,
be pr. pl. subj. 263, bieþ 2 pr. pl. imp. 160, was pt.
s. 6 (6), were pt. pl. 91 (3), weren 176, ware 91, waren 215,
216, ibe pp. 238 (5), ibye 219; wille 1 pr. s. 22, 139,
wilt 2 pr. s. 137, wille pr. s. 182, 187, wile 180, nel
55, uilleth 1 pr. pl. 200, wolde pt. s. 23 (3), wolden
pt. pl. 10; do inf. 58 (6), misdo 62, don 200, to done
d. inf. 191, for to done 241, to do 58 (nominative), do 1
pr. s. 221, 222, deþ pr. s. 70 (3), doþ 179, 2 pr.
pl. 279, 280, pr. pl. 100 (3), do pr. s. subj. 125,
126, 2 pr. pl. subj. 279, doþ 2 pr. pl. imp. 89, dede
pt. s. 16 (5), deden pt. pl. 235, ido pp. 50, 101;
go inf. 22, 57, gon 10, 192, goth pr. s. 51, go 2 pr.
s. imp. 212, goþ 2 pr. pl. imp. 20 (3), yede pt. s.
12 (5), pt. pl. 210, yeden 252, igo pp. 239.
Noteworthy adverbs are al 8, 11, 212, alast 236, euerte 135, neuerte
248, ihende 55, 60, onlepiliche 65, also in Ayenbite; prepositions, the
alternatives an 71, ane 242, a 192; at 84, ate 229; for 41, fore 67,
105; in 81 (11) mostly before vowels, ine 18 (33) mostly before
consonants, inne 154, i 5 (5) followed by the definite article; to 22,
te 5 &c. stressless, inte 250, 251, and amenges 217, an early
instance, wath 102; conjunctions, ase so 110, 144 translating si cume,
al wat 26, þe 39 for þet, þo þet 242, 246 meaning inasmuch as.
Vocabulary: Scandinavian are velaghes 218,
fela(rede) 147, scab 142, and probably bakbiteres 111, as a compound.
French are †acumbri 187, †age 265, †amonestement 61, †amuntet 52, †anud
15, †anuri 10, onuri 24, †anvie 188, †aparailed 11, †aperede 28,
apierede 7, apostles 246, †aresunede 245, †asoiled 160, auenture 84,
†bunte 272, chaste 120, cite 6, †commandement 214, †commencement 102,
†compainie 149, conseil 9, †contrarie 101, †cors 55, custome 93,
†cuuenable 37, deciples 84, †defendet 54, deliuri 190, †deseiurd 147,
deseuerd 156, deseurd 148, †diuers 259, †ensample 35, failede 84, folies
121, geus 15, gyus
13, †glorius 31, glutunie 144, grace 72, granti 284, gruchchede 217,
†hasteliche 94, †ientred 254, †iwarisd 140, large 121, lecherie 110,
lechur 120, lepre 137, leprus 136, †maladie 140, manere 188, merci 158,
miracle 98, montayne 134, †moveth 95, †nature 267, †naturel(liche) 115,
nature(liche) 108, offrendes 12, 27, (of)serueth 112, †orgeilus 120,
†paens 245, paide 214, †painime 71, †pardurable(liche) 148, patriarches
229, †pelrimage 57, peril 180, †perissi 190, poure 58, prechur 249,
profetes 19, prophete 249, religiun 92, roberie 110, †sacrefise 39,
sarmun 135, saue 172, sauue 189, seinte 6, sergant 211, serui 75,
seruise 200, †signefiance 62, †signefieth 40, somoni 16, spus(breche)
144, †sucuri 181, suffri 41, †targi 273, †tempeste 170, †trauail 212,
†itravailed 218, †umble 120, ure 218, urisun 67, †verray 39, uertu 126,
uisiti 57, †ydres 90. The words marked † appear for the first time in
668
English. marcatte 206 is probably a post-Conquest borrowing: offri 10 is
French in form, but its meaning is the restricted one of OE.
offrian. Latin are Architriclin 96 (pre-Conquest), probably
clerekes 17, the French original has clers, possibly religiun 92. The
French borrowings are often Anglo-French in form. The prefix in acumbri
is en-, in ofseruet, English of-, with meaning for the compound, gains
by serving; anud (enuier) and ensample for essample show an exchange of
prefixes; in anvie a is written for e before a nasal; anuri is a
contamination of aorer and honorer; in contrarie the affix is AF. -arie for OF. -aire, in manere, AF. -ere
for OF. -iere, so -ur for -eor in lechur,
prechur; OF. -ee (Latin -āta) is e in contre. In grant, OF. graanter,
a is lost, in age, e initially, and after ai in painime,
also between l and r in pelrimage. In sarmun, e becomes a before
r + cons., but not in serganz; ie for e in apierede, as often in
AF. texts, is probably here Kentish interchange of e, ie; u for o
before n appears in amuntet, bunte, religiun, urisun, but not in
commandment, commencement, the same substitution takes place in suffri;
ai before s is phonetic e in aresunede; ai followed by e is
ae in paens; ai + n mouillé is simple ai, ay
in compainie, montayne; ei before vr is e in deseuered,
deseur[e]d, but deseiur[e]d 147; ei before l mouillé is ai
in aparailed; OF. juiu, later giu, is represented by geus, gius, as in
MS. A; OF. ue is o in moveth; the regular representation of L. ŏ
+ l mouillé is seen in asoiled, but orgeilus is an isolated
spelling, the usual diphthong being oi, ui, perhaps the writer was
influenced by English orgel. OF. üi is u in anu[e]d. ch
for c before i is doubled in gruchchede; n is lost in cuuenable, as in
MS. A; r is doubled in verray; z has the value of ts in serganz;
the spelling deciple is in MS. A.
Dialect: A scribe, not Kentish but probably South
Midland, has copied with tolerable fidelity a Kentish manuscript, but
alien forms such as aueriche 69, lauedi 6, war 26, ware 91, waren 215,
spac 20, yaf 158 intrude; chold 124, as a compromise between chald of
the exemplar and cold is significant.
Introduction: Maurice de Sully, bishop of Paris
from 1160 to 1196, composed in Latin a series of sermons on the gospels
for the Sundays and other festivals of the Christian year, which were
intended for the use of the priests in his diocese. The French versions
of these are, in the opinion of Bourgain and Lecoy de la Marche, free
reproductions by various preachers. That they were exceedingly popular
is shown by the large number of manuscript copies which have survived.
These have been classified by Meyer in two redactions. Our translator
has used a manuscript of class A, and indeed one differing little from
MS. Douce
669
270, Bodleian (D), written in England early in the thirteenth century.
It has, however, a plus not represented in the English
translation, which occasionally rather resembles MS. Ashmole 1280,
Bodleian (A) also of the thirteenth century.
The translator gives a very literal rendering of his original; it
influences his idiom, order and choice of words, even to the borrowing
of an occasional inflection, as in sechez 251/21 (= querrez) and
probably in signifiez 218/42 (= signefie). As the French sermons
are not easily accessible, the fourth is here printed from D, with some
variants from A. ‘Nos trouon lisand (lisons) en saint euangille
dui . ke n·s· dex entra une fiez en une nef ⁊ si disciple le siuirent.
Et si cum il furent en la mier . si leua un grant torment
⁊ nostre sire se esteit cochiez dormir . en la nief .
deuant ceo ke li tormenz comencast. Et si disciple eurent
grant pour; del torment . sil esueillerent . ⁊ si li
distrent . Sire sauue nos; ke (kar) nos
perisons . ⁊ il estoit chose de ce . kil nauoent creance
(bone fiance) `i´ oi creance ne fiance en lui . ⁊ il lor dist .
Que cremez uus gent de petite fei? si leua sus . si chosa
deliurement les uenz . ⁊ la mer . sempres se furent
appeisie. Et cum li hom qui erent en la mer (nef) eurent
ueu le miracle . si sesmerueillerent mout. Ceo `est´ li
bons (beaus) miracles ke leuangille dui nus reconte . si
en duit estre afferme nostre creance. Car bien deit len
creire en celui seignor qui tel miracle pot fere . ⁊ fet
quant il ueut. OR nus besoigne que cil qui securut
ses desciples en icel peril; quil nus
sucurre en noz perilz . ⁊ il le fra uolentiers se nus len
crion merci . par bone uolentie. Si cum il meisme dist par
la sainte escripture . Je sui fet il la saluetie del pople .
quant il mapeleront en lor besoigne . [e]t en lur angoises
. Jo les orroj . ⁊ serrai lur deu pardurables. Prion lui donc
merci seurement se diable nus uout enconbrer . par
peche . par orgoil . ⁊ par enuie . o par ire . . .
crions li merci . ⁊ si li disons . Sire saluez nos . ke
nus ne perisons . . . ⁊ que il nus
deliure de tuz mals . ⁊ quil nus doinst tot bien . ⁊
nus dont tels oures a faere en cest siecle que les almes ⁊
les cors (cors de nus) poisent estre sauuie . al ior del ioise.’
The French quotations without reference are from the Douce MS.
1. The text is from the
beginning of the gospel for the feast of the Epiphany, S. Matt. ii. 1,
2. D has a wrong heading, In die nat. domini.
5. ase: ‘ke
quant.’
6.
þet—apierede: ‘ke lestoille ki est demustrance de la
nessance apparut.’ Supply þet after sterre.
8. heþenesse:
‘paenime.’ tojanes: ‘uers,’ towards. al swo . . .
swo: even as . . . so; ‘com . . . si’: similarly
in ll. 11, 12; 215/26, 27.
11.
hedden—offrendes: ‘ourent apparaillees lor offrendes.’
670
12. kam:
apparently the translator read uint. D has ‘siuirent’; A, ‘siwerent’:
Boucherie’s text, ‘se mistrent apres.’
13. hym
askede: an order of words like ‘li demanderent,’ so at 215/17.
15. anud:
‘trublez.’
17. þe laghe:
‘les escriptures’: see 182/213 note.
18.
Hi—ierusalem: ‘cil respondirent · ke en bethleent.’
23. This sentence is
in D, but not in A. he . . . herodes: see 119/77.
25. hem
wenten: ‘sen alerent’; appears to be used as the past of go;
elsewhere the writer has yede, yeden.
26. al wat hi
kam: ‘iusquil uint.’ For al wat, until, see 15/84. For
hi read he, i.e. the star.
27. For omission of
the subject before hin, see 6/18.
30. ayen
wende: ‘alassent,’ D; ‘returnassent,’ A. wende: ‘sen
repeirassent,’ D; ‘returnassent,’ A.
35. verrene:
‘lointenes.’
36. offrinke:
‘offrendre,’ D, A.
37. be þet
hi, by the fact that they, inasmuch as: ‘por ceo quil,’ D; ‘par iceo
quil,’ A. cuuenable yeftte: ‘couenables dons.’ seawede
&c.: ‘demostrerent kil auoent uerraie creance quil esteit reis
uerrais’: there is a similar shortening in the English at l. 39.
39. to here godes
sacrefise: ‘au sacrifice damlede.’
42. This
interpretation of the gifts is as old as Irenaeus and is a medieval
commonplace. Comp. ‘Monstrant auro regem esse, | praesulem designant
thure, | mirram signum tumuli | tribuere domino,’ MSD i. 41/28-30.
43.
Gostliche: ‘esperitielment.’
44. glareth:
‘resplendist.’
46. licht,
lights, lightens.
48. he is: an
addition, not in the French.
50. werkes: D
has, ‘Li encens signefie bon oure . (ure A) ⁊ bone preiere;’ Boucherie,
‘bone ovre e bone prière.’ Our writer has translated ‘ovre,’ but not
‘preiere,’ on the other hand in l. 52 he mentions prayer, ‘biddinge,’
but not good works. ido—ueréé: ‘mis el fu del encensier,’
D, but A has only ‘mis el fuz.’
55. ihende,
near: OE. gehende.
56. is: due
to the French, ‘la bon oure . ki est amiere.’ to þo yemernesse,
to the wretchedness: ‘a la chiche ⁊ a la maluoistie de nostre char,’ to
the stinginess and the evil disposition of our flesh.
57. uastinge
&c.: ‘ieuner pur deu . ueiller . alier en pelerinage.’
59. so, in
the same way as myrrh is bitter to the taste: ‘Jces choses si sunt
ameres a nostre malueise char,’ A.
671
60. loket:
‘defent.’
61.
amonestement is conveyed directly from the French original.
66. i þo
yere: ‘de uostre uie,’ DA.
67. fore Gode
belaue: ‘par ferme creance:’ similarly for and for in
the next line are mistranslations of ‘par.’
69. þo
cristenemanne: dative, from the christian, ‘requiert tuz iors a son
crestien.’ werefore &c.: ‘ke (par qui, A.) li crestien se il
le faeit desert ⁊ conquiert la glorie perdurable.’
76.
Quod—dignetur: supply, qui vivit et regnat Deus per omnia
secula seculorum. Amen.
77.
euangelica: drawn from the gospel for the day, S. Joh. ii.
81. cite:
‘cithe’; A has ‘uile.’
82.
flesliche: ‘corperelment:’ comp. 217/103. To &c.: ‘A
cel noces fud madame saint Marie,’ A.
84. so iuel
auenture: ‘si auint par auenture:’ per or by may have fallen out in
the English, but the expression in the text occurs elsewhere with fell
and befell.
86. Wat
&c.: ‘Que apartient a mei ⁊ a tei femme;’ ‘Quid mihi et tibi est,
mulier,’ S. Joh. ii. 4.
88. Serganz:
‘serganz.’ of: partitive; comp. ‘and of þe cupe serue,’ KH 234
note.
90. ffol
vellet &c.: ‘Emplez fist se il les ydres de eue.’
þet—faten is an addition of the translator’s.
92. baþieres:
‘bognoeres,’ D; ‘baignur,’ A. for religiun, ceremonially: ‘pur
religion.’
94. was: for
omission of the subject see 6/18 note.
95. Moveth
togidere: D has ‘Puissiez ore,’ A, ‘Espucet,’ and the Vulgate,
‘Haurite nunc.’ The translator probably read esprucet (with AF. u for o)
= esprochez; his rendering would then mean, Draw nigh, approach.
96.
þat—iserued: apparently from Comestor, Historia Euangelica,
c. xxxviii, ‘architriclino ·i· primati inter conuiuantes in triclinio;’
the French is quite different.
97. Possibly he has
dropped out before hedde idrunke, but A has ‘e cume out
guste.’
99. ibrocht:
‘puissie,’ D; ‘espuce,’ A. The word seems to have puzzled the translator
here, as at l. 95.
100. doþ forþ .
. . ferst: ‘mettent auant.’
101.
ihialde: ‘estuie,’ stored up.
102. wath
nu, until now: ‘desque aore.’ See 15/84.
672
103. þo
beleuede: ‘Et si crurent en lui si disciple.’
107. This
interpretation is singular. In Bede, vii. 205; Alcuin, ii. 464, Ælfric,
Hom. Cath. ii. 56, the water is knowledge of holy scripture.
109. chald
of: ‘froid del amor;’ comp. 218/124.
110. Ase so
here and in l. 144 appears to be an attempt to render ‘si
cume,’ A.
111. There is
nothing in the French for husberners. In CM 26234, ‘Fals wijtnes
and trouth breking, | Mans slaghter and hus brening’ are sins reserved
to the bishop’s absolution: see Pollock and Maitland, History of English
Law, ii. 492. bakbiteres is the compendious equivalent for ‘tuz
cil ki despeisent ⁊ clamnent lur pronie,’ A.
112.
ofserueth: ‘deseruent.’
115.
naturelliche: ‘naturelmen.’ anhet: ‘eschaufe.’
117. ine one
time: comp. 128/1.
119.
gostliche: ‘esperitelment.’
121.
of—large: ‘Del auier large,’ of the covetous, generous.
and—folies: there is nothing in the French corresponding to
this: probably so has dropped out before of.
122. Nu
&c.: ‘Or esguard chescon uer sei meismes.’
126. of
&c.: ‘de mal en bien.’
130. S. Matt.
viii. 1, 2, as adapted in the lesson of the missal.
133. iyue:
‘liure.’
135.
euerte: comp. 11/190; ‘neuerte,’ 221/248: compounds of
ǣfre, nǣfre + te, to, like hitherto, heretofore:
mostly Kentish. ‘le primier sermon quil onques feist en terre.’
136. a
sikman: the translator’s gloss on ‘leprus.’ onurede:
‘aora.’
137. of mine
lepre . of mine euele: the last three words are added by the
translator. ‘de ma lepre,’ D; ‘de male lepre,’ A.
138. ‘n·s· si li
dist · si estendi sa main ⁊ tocha sa liepre.’ tok, touched: comp.
‘If erf or man ðor one take,’ GE 3456.
139. al so
raþe, as quickly as the word was spoken. ‘isnelepas,’ on the
spot.
141.
tokningge: ‘signefiance.’
144.
Gauelinge: ‘usure.’
146.
haleghen, saints: the French has ‘amis.’
147.
þet—loki, against which no man can guard himself: ‘dont
nuls ne se pot guardier.’ For þet = wið þet, see 46/292 and comp.
153/56.
148.
pardurableliche: ‘perdurablement.’
149. for
lepre: The French has, ‘Por le lepre est deseurez hom de la
compaignie dautres genz . car cil qui moret en pecchie criminel
. . . cil pert
673
la compaignie de deu . ⁊ de ses amis . ⁊ de ses angles perdurablement.’
Probably the translator’s eye wandered from the former ‘compaignie’ to
the latter; he then added ‘þat is to sigge’ &c., and afterwards in
l. 153 he returned to the omitted sentence.
159.
forleted: ‘guerpissez.’
164. S. Matt.
viii. 23, 24; the last sentence altered from S. Mark vi. 48, ‘erat enim
ventus contrarius eis.’
168. one
time: ‘une fiez.’
169. so . . .
so: ‘Et si cum il furent en la mier . si leua un grant torment.’
170. was ileid
him &c.: ‘se esteit cochiez dormir.’
173. ha wiste
wel &c.: ‘il estoit chose de ce . kil nauoent creance,’ D, it
was a fault that they had not faith; ‘il les chalenga de ceo qui il
naueient bone fiance en lui,’ A. The translator had in mind choisi.
174. wat dret
yw is usually explained as, what terrifies you, a very rare meaning
for dreden, or possibly as an impersonal construction, which is without
parallel. The French has ‘que cremez uus,’ the Vulgate, ‘quid timidi
estis.’ The usual construction in ME. is reflexive, comp. 208/397, ‘ne drede ȝe ow nawiht,’
SK 1393; ‘Ne dred te, Zacariȝe, nohht,’ Orm i. 2/151; ‘him ne dret naȝt
to do zenne,’ Ayenbite 34/14, and if dret may be taken as a syncopated
plural, that construction would be exemplified here. Syncopated plurals
are rare, and where they occur, they are usually said to be scribal
mistakes; such are ‘yeft,’ 215/35, ‘spekþ,’ Ayenbite 58/15, ‘brekþ,’ id.
16/21, ‘zeneȝþ’ id. 155/3. Perhaps they are specifically Kentish. If
this view be accepted, wat is an acc. of reference like quid and
practically equivalent to why.
175. tok,
rebuked: ‘chosa.’
177. so
awondrede hem: ‘si sesmerueillerent;’ see 54/27.
180. þet se þet
. . . þet: ‘que cil qui securut . . . quil nus sucurre.’ For the
repeated þet, comp. 220/200; ‘sitteð al stille, ꝥ hwon he parted urom
ou, ꝥ he ne cunne ower god,’ AR 64/20.
183. ‘Salus populi
ego sum, dicit Dominus: de quacumque tribulatione clamaverint ad me,
exaudiam eos: et ero illorum Dominus in perpetuum,’ Introit for
xixth Sunday after Pentecost, and for Thursday after the
iiird Sunday in Lent. The French version ends, ‘serrai lur
deu pardurables:’ in l. 186 the English translator has deserted, as he
rarely does, his original.
187.
sikerliche, with confidence: ‘seurement.’ acumbri, load,
oppress; ‘enconbrer:’ apparently the earliest instance of its
occurrence.
674
191.
yef—done, grant us to do such works. þo saulen
&c., ‘les almes ⁊ les cors de nus,’ A.
194.
sexagesima should be septuagesima.
195. S. Matt. xx.
1.
200. þet . . .
þet repeated as at 219/180: ‘ke si nus uolons faere le son seruise .
ke nus en aurons loiers.’
202.
goodman, head of a household; an early instance in this sense.
‘pruzdom,’ D; ‘prudome,’ A.
203.
for—forewerde: ‘au couenant dun dener.’
205.
undren: ‘tierce;’ ‘circa horam tertiam,’ Vulg.; about nine
o’clock: see 74/209.
206. ayen þan
euen: ‘enuers la uespre.’ Comp. 221/235.
210. mid þo
oþre: ‘ourer ensemble as autres.’ hi wel: read hit was, as at
l. 205. ‘Quant uint au seir.’
212. agyn
to: ‘comence a cels.’ al—ferste: ‘iusquas
premerains.’
214.
þes—commandement: ‘le comandement sun seignor.’
215. hi . . .
þo: ‘Et com ceo uirent cil qui par matin esteient uenu:’ the clause
þo—icomen is in apposition to, and explains hi, just
as ‘cil—uenu’ does ‘ceo.’
217. habbe:
the translator has left out ‘Mes com li sergantz uint a els paer . si ne
dona a chascun ke un denier.’
219.
berdene: ‘le fes de la peine,’ A; ‘les feissels ⁊ la
paine,’ D.
221. After
unricht there is a considerable omission. Wat &c.,
What displeases you in my doing as I will: ‘tei ke peise se io faz ma
bunte’ (‘uolunte’ A).
227. tides,
hours: ‘diuerses ores.’ Comp. 38/137.
228. time
&c.: ‘les diuers tens de cest siecle.’
234. þet
&c.: ‘qui par grant amur a lui se tindrent . ⁊ firent le suen
seruise.’ to him depends on helden.
236. alast of
þis wordle, towards the end of the world. alast is an adverb and its
use with a dependent noun here is remarkable. ‘uer la fin del
siecle.’
237.
seauede: ‘se demustra:’ him has probably dropped out before
ine.
238.
Werefore, because: ‘car.’
241. for to
done &c., so far as concerned the doing of the works of the
devil, they had been industrious enough at that. But that is idleness in
God’s sight. ‘Il nauient mie estie oiseus damier le diable . ⁊ de fere
les lecheries ⁊ de feire les mauues enginz de gahannier (cultivate) lor
terres . de faere lor uignes.’
243.
For—man is: the French has, ‘Car ce que home faet
(fet, A)
675
en cest siecle, desque il deu nen aime; ne ne
sert; tote deit estre recontie pur oiseyse.’ Apparently the
translator has read seit for faet.
244. al
&c., he may count it all as loss and idleness. for, as; comp.
27/304: ‘tote deit estre recontie pur oiseyse . ⁊ tot reuient a nient.’
But Bülbring, Ablaut 25, takes for lore for past participle.
245.
aresunede, called to account; ‘chosa.’
246. þo
þet, inasmuch as, so in l. 242; lit. when that: ‘quant,’ A.
248. neuer
te: see 218/135. Restore the MS. iheed in the text. ‘Ceo est a dire
. que il nauient onques eu ne prophete ne apostre.’
256. al so . .
. ase, just as.
259. of diuers
wordles: ‘del diuers tens del siecle.’
260. elde,
age, period of life: ‘aez,’ D; ‘age,’ A.
262. ‘quant il
apele de tels ia a son seruise.’ þer bieþ appears to be a false
translation of ‘ia,’ already, as if it were i a.
263. beswo
þet, provided that: an early instance of the phrase.
264. At
undren &c.: ‘Et cels met il en sa uigne a tierce . quil torne en
son seruise en la hie (= ae, L. aetas) de xx anz.’
267. ‘issint est
humene nature de greinor chalor en cest aage.’
269. agenes þo
euen: ‘uers le uespre:’ see 220/206.
270. fele:
‘les plusors.’ As so . . . ase, just in the same way
. . . as: ‘issint . . . si come.’
272. All the same
no man should put off turning to God, trusting to His forbearance.
‘Nepurquant ceste grant buntie . damledeu quil done as ous com as autres
. ne se deit nul asseurer (asurer ne targer, A) de sei torner a deu . ne
targier de lui seruir.’ With Nocht for þan, not on that account,
comp. 25/240.
274. þane
dai: ‘le ior ne lore,’ probably a reference to ‘Vigilate itaque,
quia nescitis diem, neque horam,’ S. Matt. xxv. 13, but þet holi
writ, ‘lescripture’, is applied to other books than the Bible.
for Man—wrench: see 21/108, 29/1, 2 note: there is nothing
corresponding to it in the French, but after ‘seruir’ (note on l. 272)
‘quil ne seit suspris de mort dementres.’
280. and,
if: comp. 176/2.
283. halt alle
þo, keeps in reserve for all those; ‘quae praeparavit Deus iis, qui
diligunt eum,’ 1 Cor. ii. 9: ‘pramet ⁊ estore a ceus qui lui
aiment.’
w is written ... A parasitic þ
has been inserted
ꝥ
Accidence: ... The pl. n. a.
of masculines
“pl.” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
The personal pronouns ... d. þise
m. 210
“m.” misprinted as plain (non-italic)
Vocabulary: ... geus 15, gyus
13
15 gyus
174. ... The usual construction in ME. is
reflexive
ME is
THE END.
The inverted semicolon is represented as an oversized semicolon
;
A half-width space, shown here in red, is common
in the main text but rare in the Notes.
All brackets are in the original.
The work cited as the “NED.” is now known as the OED.
Cross-References
References such as “see p. 123” or “see 12/34” (page/line) come in
several forms:
— Page numbers up to 222 refer to the primary text. See table
of
contents in the main volume for pagination; line numbers refer to the
text, not to the physical page.
— The form “12/34 note”, and all higher page numbers (223 and
up), refer to the present volume. The first kind are linenotes; the
second refer to some earlier text’s notes, identified by physical line
number.
Errors and Inconsistencies:
Formatting of less common characters such as þ and ȝ has been
silently corrected to agree with the rest of the text. Inconsistent
punctuation in subheaders (“Accidence:” and similar) has been
silently regularized. Other typographical errors are shown in two ways:
with mouse-hover
popups as they occur, and as a list at the end of each selection.
The word “invisible” means that there is an appropriately sized gap, but
the letter or punctuation mark itself is absent. Note that text format
(bold or italic) has semantic meaning in this volume.
Editorial corrections listed in the Corrigenda have been made in the
text. The page as printed is retained for completeness.
Inconsistencies noted by transcriber but not changed:
spelling of the names Batiouchkof(f), Horstman(n)
variant spelling of medi(a)eval
NED and NED.
Selection I (Worcester Fragments) has two general Notes sections,
for I.A and I.B-C. The two parts of Selection IX (Ancrene Wisse) share
general Notes.
* Most aspects of Selection XI are discussed under Selection X.
† “Grammar” in Selection II, “Accidence” elsewhere.